P-660HW-Dx v2 Series
Transcript of P-660HW-Dx v2 Series
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series
80211g Wireless ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway
Support Notes
Version340
Jan 2007
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
1
FAQ 5
ZyNOS FAQ 5
1 What is ZyNOS 5
2 What‟s Multilingual Embedded Web Configurator 5
3 How do I access the P-660HW-Dx v2 Command Line Interface (CLI) 5
4 How do I update the firmware and configuration file 5
5 How do I upgradebackup the ZyNOS firmware by using TFTP client
program via LAN 5
6 How do I restore P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations by using TFTP client
program via LAN 6
7 What should I do if I forget the system password 6
8 How to use the Reset button 6
9 What is SUA When should I use SUA 6
10 What is the difference between SUA and Full Feature NAT 7
11 Is it possible to access a server running behind SUA from the outside
Internet How can I do it 7
12 When do I need select Full Feature NAT 8
13 What IPPort mapping does Multi-NAT support 8
14 How many network users can the SUANAT support 9
15 What are Device filters and Protocol filters 9
16 How can I protect against IP spoofing attacks 9
Product FAQ 11
1 How can I manage P-660HW-Dx v2 11
2 What is the default password for Web Configurator 11
3 What‟s the difference between bdquoCommon User Account‟ and
bdquoAdministrator Account‟ 11
4 How do I know the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address assigned by the
ISP 11
5 What is the micro filter or splitter used for 11
6 The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Bridge and Router mode whats the
difference between them 12
7 How do I know I am using PPPoE 12
8 Why does my provider use PPPoE 12
9 What is DDNS 12
10 When do I need DDNS service 13
11 What is DDNS wildcard Does the P-660HW-Dx v2 support DDNS
wildcard 13
12 Can the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA handle IPSec packets sent by the
IPSec gateway 13
13 How do I setup my P-660HW-Dx v2 for routing IPSec packets over
SUA 14
14 What is Traffic Shaping 14
15 Why do we perform traffic shaping in the P-660HW-Dx v2 14
16 What do the parameters (PCR SCR MBS) mean 15
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
2
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
15
18 What is content filter 15
ADSL FAQ 17
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems 17
2 What is the expected throughput 17
3 What is the microfilter used for 17
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up 17
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL 17
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing 18
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics 18
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector 18
9 What is triple play 18
Firewall FAQ 20
General 20
1 What is a network firewall 20
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure 20
3 What are the basic types of firewalls 20
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2 21
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet
filtering and NAT built-in 21
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack 21
7 What is Ping of Death attack 22
8 What is Teardrop attack 22
9 What is SYN Flood attack 22
10 What is LAND attack 22
11 What is Brute-force attack 23
12 What is IP Spoofing attack 23
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
23
Configuration 23
1 How do I configure the firewall 23
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall 23
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN 24
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using
FTP over WAN 25
Log and Alert 26
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log 26
2 What does the log show to us 26
3 How do I view the firewall log 26
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert 27
5 What is the difference between the log and alert 27
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
3
Wireless FAQ 28
General FAQ 28
1 What is a Wireless LAN 28
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN 28
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN 28
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks 29
5 What is an Access Point 29
6 What‟s the difference between IEEE80211abg 29
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
29
8 What is Wi-Fi 29
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band 29
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device 30
11 Can radio signals pass through wall 30
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference
among WLAN products 30
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN 30
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage
any hardware 31
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
31
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support 31
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering 31
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption 31
Advanced FAQ 31
1 What is Ad Hoc mode 31
2 What is Infrastructure mode 31
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area 31
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash
(DSSS) 32
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash
(FHSS) 32
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
32
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range 32
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID) 32
9 What is an ESSID 32
Security FAQ 33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access
Points radio link 33
2 What is WEP 33
3 What is WPA 33
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP 34
5 What is a WEP key 34
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
4
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP 34
7 Can the SSID be encrypted 34
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff
the SSID 34
9 What are Insertion Attacks 34
10 What is Wireless Sniffer 34
11 What is OTIST How do I use it 34
Application Notes 36
General Application Notes 36
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode 36
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
38
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay 40
4 SUA Notes 40
5 Using Full Feature NAT 50
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS) 62
7 Network Management Using SNMP 64
8 Using syslog 67
9 Using IP Alias 67
10 Using IP Policy Routing 69
11 Using Call Scheduling 73
12 Using IP Multicast 75
13 Using Bandwidth Management 76
14 Using Zero-Configuration 79
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 82
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2 82
Wireless Application Notes 86
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode 86
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode 90
3 MAC Filter 94
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) 96
5 Site Survey 101
6 Configure 8021x and WPA 104
Support Tool 109
1 LANWAN Packet Trace 109
Online Trace 109
Offline Trace 111
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal 112
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP 114
Using TFTP client software 114
Using TFTP command on Windows NT 116
Using TFTP command on UNIX 116
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files 117
CI Command Reference 119
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
5
FAQ
ZyNOS FAQ
1 What is ZyNOS
ZyNOS is ZyXELs proprietary Network Operating System It is the platform on
all Prestige routers that delivers network services and applications It is
designed in a modular fashion so it is easy for developers to add new features
New ZyNOS software upgrades can be easily downloaded from our FTP sites
as they become available
2 Whatrsquos Multilingual Embedded Web Configurator
Multilinggual Embedded Web Configurator means that it can display with 3
kinds of languanges English French and German By factory default it
displays with English and you can change it in Web GUI
3 How do I access the P-660HW-Dx v2 Command Line Interface (CLI)
The Command Line Interface is for the Administrator use only and it could be
accessed via telnet session
Note It is protected by super password lsquo1234rsquo by factory default
4 How do I update the firmware and configuration file
You can do this if you access the P-660HW-Dx v2 as Administrator You can
upload the firmware and configuration file to Prestige from Web Condigurator
or using FTP or TFTP client software You CAN NOT upload the firmware and
configuration file via Telnet because the Telnet connection will be dropped
during uploading the firmware Please do not power off the router right after the
FTP or TFTP uploading is finished the router will upload the firmware to its
flash at this moment
Note There may be firmware that could not be upgraded from Web
Configurator In this case ZyXEL will prepare special Upload Software
for you Please read the firmware release note carefully when you want to
upload a new fireware
5 How do I upgradebackup the ZyNOS firmware by using TFTP client
program via LAN
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to transfer the firmware to P-660HW-Dx v2
using TFTP program via LAN The procedure for uploading ZyNOS via TFTP
is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
6
a Use the TELNET client program in your PC to login to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
b Enter CI command sys stdio 0 to disable Stdio idle timeout
c To upgrade firmware use TFTP client program to put firmware in file
ras in the Prestige After data transfer is finished the P-660HW-Dx v2
will program the upgraded firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
d To backup your firmware use the TFTP client program to get file ras
from the Prestige
6 How do I restore P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations by using TFTP client
program via LAN
a Use the TELNET client program in your PC to login to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
b Enter CI command sys stdio 0 disable Stdio idle timeout
c To backup the P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations use TFTP client
program to get file rom-0 from the P-660HW-Dx v2
d To restore the P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations use the TFTP client
program to put your configuration in file rom-0 in the P-660HW-Dx v2
7 What should I do if I forget the system password
In case you forget the system password you can erase the current
configuration and restore factory defaults this way
Use the RESET button on the rear panel of P-660HW-Dx v2 to reset the
router After the router is reset the LAN IP address will be reset to
19216811 the common user password will be reset to user the
Administrator password will be reset to bdquo1234rsquo
8 How to use the Reset button
a Turn your P-660HW-Dx v2 on Make sure the Power LED is on (not
blinking)
b Press the RESET button for longer than one second and shorter than
five seconds and release it If the Power LED begins to blink the
P-660HW-Dx v2‟s wireless auto security function-OTIST has been
enabled
c Press the RESET button for six seconds and then release it If the
Power LED begins to blink the default configuration has been restored
and the P-660HW-Dx v2 restarts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
7
9 What is SUA When should I use SUA
SUA (Single User Account) is a unique feature supported by Prestige router
which allows multiple people to access Internet concurrently for the cost of a
single user account
When Prestige acting as SUA receives a packet from a local client destined for
the outside Internet it replaces the source address in the IP packet header
with its own address and the source port in the TCP or UDP header with
another value chosen out of a local pool It then recomputes the appropriate
header checksums and forwards the packet to the Internet as if it is originated
from Prestige using the IP address assigned by ISP When reply packets from
the external Internet are received by Prestige the original IP source address
and TCPUDP source port numbers are written into the destination fields of the
packet (since it is now moving in the opposite direction) the checksums are
recomputed and the packet is delivered to its true destination This is because
SUA keeps a table of the IP addresses and port numbers of the local systems
currently using it
10 What is the difference between SUA and Full Feature NAT
When you edit a remote node in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt Remote Node -gt Edit there will be three options for you
None
SUA Only
Full Feature
SUA (Single User Account) in previous ZyNOS versions is a NAT set with 2
rules Many-to-One and Server With SUA visible servers had to be mapped
to different ports since the servers share only one global IP
The P-660HW-Dx v2 now has Full Feature NAT which supports five types of
IPPort mapping One to One Many to One Many to Many Overload Many to
Many No Overload and Server You can make special application when you
select Full Feature NAT For example With multiple global IP addresses
multiple severs using the same port (eg FTP servers using port 2120) are
allowed on the LAN for outside access
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports NAT sets on a remote node basis They are
reusable but only one set is allowed for each remote node The P-660HW-Dx
v2 supports 8 sets since there are 8 remote nodes
By fatory default the NAT is select as SUA in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt General -gt NAT Setup
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
8
11 Is it possible to access a server running behind SUA from the outside
Internet How can I do it
Yes it is possible because P-660HW-Dx v2 delivers the packet to the local
server by looking up to a SUA server table Therefore to make a local server
accessible to the outside users the port number and the inside IP address of
the server must be configured (You can configure it in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding)
12 When do I need select Full Feature NAT
Make multiple local servers on the LAN accessible from outside with
multiple global IP addresses
With SUA visible servers had to be mapped to different ports since the
servers share only one global IP But when you select Full Feature you can
make multiple local servers (mapping the same port or not) on the LAN
accessible from outside with multiple global IP addresses
Support Non-NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some MIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address Thus users on the same
network can not login to the same server simultaneously In this case it is
better to use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types
thus each user login to the server using a unique global IP address
13 What IPPort mapping does Multi-NAT support
Multi-NAT supports five types of IPport mapping One to One Many to One
Many to Many Overload Many to Many No Overload and Server The details
of the mapping between ILA and IGA are described as below Here we define
the local IP addresses as the Internal Local Addresses (ILA) and the global IP
addresses as the Inside Global Address (IGA)
One to One In One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps one ILA
to one IGA
Many to One In Many-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps
multiple ILA to one IGA This is equivalent to SUA (ie PAT port
address translation) ZyXELs Single User Account feature that previous
ZyNOS routers supported (the SUA is optional in todays Prestige
routers)
Many to Many Overload In Many-to-Many Overload mode the
P-660HW-Dx v2 maps the multiple ILA to shared IGA
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
9
Many One-to-One In Many One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2
maps each ILA to unique IGA
Server In Server mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps multiple inside
servers to one global IP address This allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types behind the NAT for outside access Note if
you want to map each server to one unique IGA please use the
One-to-One mode
The following table summarizes the five types
NAT Type IP Mapping
One-to-One ILA1lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-One
(SUAPAT)
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-Many
Overload
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA1
ILA4lt---gtIGA2
Many
One-to-One
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA3
ILA4lt---gtIGA4
Server Server 1 IPlt---gtIGA1
Server 2 IPlt---gtIGA1
14 How many network users can the SUANAT support
The Prestige does not limit the number of the users but the number of the
sessions The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports 2048 sessions that you can use the
ip nat session command in CLI to see You can also use bdquoip nat hashTable
wanif0‟ to view the current active NAT sessions
15 What are Device filters and Protocol filters
In ZyNOS the filters have been separated into two groups One group is
called device filter group and the other is called protocol filter
group Generic filters belong to the device filter group TCPIP and IPX filters
belong to the protocol filter group You can configure the filter rule in CLI
Note In ZyNOS you can not mix different filter groups in the same filter set
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
10
16 How can I protect against IP spoofing attacks
The P-660HW-Dx v2s filter sets provide a means to protect against IP
spoofing attacks The basic scheme is as follows
For the input data filter
Deny packets from the outside that claim to be from the inside
Allow everything that is not spoofing us
Filter rule setup
Filter type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Source IP Addr =abcd
Source IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action Not Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
For the output data filters
Deny bounce back packet
Allow packets that originate from us
Filter rule setup
Filter Type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Destination IP Addr =abcd
Destination IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action No Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
11
Product FAQ
1 How can I manage P-660HW-Dx v2
Multilingual Embedded Web GUI for Local and Remote management
CLI (Command-line interface)
Telnet support (Administrator Password Protected ) for remote
configuration change and status monitoring
FTP TFTP sever firmware upgrade and configuration backup and
restore are supported(Administrator Password Protected)
2 What is the default password for Web Configurator
There are two different accounts for P-660HW-Dx v2 Web Configurator
Common User Account and Administrator Account
By factory default the password for the two accounts are
Common User Account user
Administrator Account 1234
You can change the password after you logging in the Web Configurator
Please record your new password whenever you change it The system
will lock you out if you have forgotten your password
3 Whatrsquos the difference between lsquoCommon User Accountrsquo and
lsquoAdministrator Accountrsquo
For Common User Account it can only access the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 and check the current system status
For Administrator Account besides accessing the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 it can also access Winzard setup Advanced setup of
P-660HW-Dx v2
Moreover only with Administrator Password you could manage the
P-660HW-Dx v2 via FTPTFTP or Telnet
4 How do I know the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address assigned by the
ISP
You can view My WAN IP ltfrom ISPgt xxxx shown in Web Configurator
bdquoStatus-gtDevice Information -gtWAN Information‟ to check this IP address
5 What is the micro filter or splitter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
12
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
6 The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Bridge and Router mode whats the
difference between them
When the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet which means
only the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use bridge mode which works as an ADSL modem to
connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account and limit
only one computer to access the Internet
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to add another Internet sharing device
like a router In this case we use the router mode which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
7 How do I know I am using PPPoE
PPPoE requires a user account to login to the providers server If you need to
configure a user name and password on your computer to connect to the ISP
you are probably using PPPoE If you are simply connected to the Internet
when you turn on your computer you probably are not You can also check
your ISP or the information sheet given by the ISP Please choose PPPoE as
the encapsulation type in the P-660HW-Dx v2 if the ISP uses PPPoE
8 Why does my provider use PPPoE
PPPoE emulates a familiar Dial-Up connection It allows your ISP to provide
services using their existing network configuration over the broadband
connections Besides PPPoE supports a broad range of existing applications
and service including authentication accounting secure access and
configuration management
9 What is DDNS
The Dynamic DNS service allows you to alias a dynamic IP address to a static
hostname allowing your computer to be more easily accessed from various
locations on the Internet To use the service you must first apply an account
from several free Web servers such as httpwwwdyndnsorg
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to reach our internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
13
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
updates this IP to DDNS server so that the server can update its IP-to-DNS
entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is updated the DNS
name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still usable
10 When do I need DDNS service
When you want your internal server to be accessed by using DNS name rather
than using the dynamic IP address we can use the DDNS service The DDNS
server allows to alias a dynamic IP address to a static hostname Whenever
the ISP assigns you a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2 sends this IP to the DDNS
server for its updates
11 What is DDNS wildcard Does the P-660HW-Dx v2 support DDNS
wildcard
Some DDNS servers support the wildcard feature which allows the hostname
yourhostdyndnsorg to be aliased to the same IP address as
yourhostdyndnsorg This feature is useful when there are multiple servers
inside and you want users to be able to use things such as
wwwyourhostdyndnsorg and still reach your hostname
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports DDNS wildcard that httpwwwdyndnsorg
supports When using wildcard you simply enter yourhostdyndnsorg in the
Host field in Menu 11 Configure Dynamic DNS
12 Can the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA handle IPSec packets sent by the
IPSec gateway
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA can handle IPSec ESP Tunneling mode We
know when packets go through SUA SUA will change the source IP address
and source port for the host To pass IPSec packets SUA must understand
the ESP packet with protocol number 50 replace the source IP address of the
IPSec gateway to the routers WAN IP address However SUA should not
change the source port of the UDP packets which are used for key
managements Because the remote gateway checks this source port during
connections the port thus is not allowed to be changed
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
14
13 How do I setup my P-660HW-Dx v2 for routing IPSec packets over
SUA
For outgoing IPSec tunnels no extra setting is required
For forwarding the inbound IPSec ESP tunnel A Default server set is required
You could configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding -gt Default Server Setup
It is because SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users So to make an internal server
for outside access we must specify the service port and the LAN IP of this
server in Web configurator Thus SUA is able to forward the incoming packets
to the requested service behind SUA and the outside users access the server
using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address So we have to configure the
internal IPsec client as a default server (unspecified service port) when it acts
a server gateway
14 What is Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping allocates the bandwidth to WAN dynamically and aims at
boosting the efficiency of the bandwidth If there are serveral VCs in the
P-660HW-Dx v2 but only one VC activated at one time the P-660HW-Dx v2
allocates all the Bandwidth to the VC and the VC gets full bandwidth If another
VCs are activated later the bandwidth is yield to other VCs after ward
15 Why do we perform traffic shaping in the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 must manage traffic fairly and provide bandwidth
allocation for different sorts of applications such as voice video and data All
applications have their own natural bit rate Large data transactions have a
fluctuating natural bit rate The P-660HW-Dx v2 is able to support variable
traffic among different virtual connections Certain traffic may be discarded if
the virtual connection experiences congestion Traffic shaping defines a set of
actions taken by the P-660HW-Dx v2 to avoid congestion traffic shaping takes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
15
measures to adapt to unpredictable fluctuations in traffic flows and other
problems among virtual connections
16 What do the parameters (PCR SCR MBS) mean
Traffic shaping parameters (PCR SCR MBS) can be set in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt ATM Setup
Peak Cell Rate(PCR) The maximum bandwidth allocated to this connection
The VC connection throughput is limited by PCR
Sustainable Cell Rate(SCR) The least guaranteed bandwidth of a VC
When there are multi-VCs on the same line the VC throughput is guaranteed
by SCR
Maximum Burst Size(MBS) The amount of cells transmitted through this
VC at the Peak Cell Rate before yielding to other VCs Total bandwidth of the
line is dedicated to single VC if there is only one VC on the line However as
the other VC asking the bandwidth the MBS defines the maximum number of
cells transmitted via this VC with Peak Cell rate before yielding to other VCs
The P-660HW-Dx v2 holds the parameters for shaping the traffic among its
virtual channels If you do not need traffic shaping please set SCR = 0 MBS =
0 and PCR as the maximum value according to the line rate (for example 23
Mbps line rate will result PCR as 5424 cellsec)
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
Constant bit rate(CBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that requires
the user to determine a fixed bandwidth requirement at the time the connection
is set up so that the data can be sent in a steady stream CBR service is often
used when transmitting fixed-rate uncompressed video
Unspecified bit rate(UBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that does
not guarantee any throughput levels and uses only available bandwidth UBR
is often used when transmitting data that can tolerate delays such as e-mail
Variable bit rate(VBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that allows
users to specify a throughput capacity (ie a peak rate) and a sustained rate
but data is not sent evenly You can select VBR for bursty traffic and
bandwidth sharing with other applications It contains two subclasses
Variable bit rate nonreal time (VBR-nRT)
Variable bit rate real time (VBR-RT)
18 What is content filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
16
Internet Content filter allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies
tailored to your needs Content filter gives you the ability to block web sites that
contain key words (that you specify) in the URL You can set a schedule for
when the P-660HW-Dx v2 performs content filtering You can also specify
trusted IP Addresses on LAN for which the P-660HW-Dx v2 will not perform
content filtering You can configure the details about it in Web Configurator
Advanced setup Security -gt Content Filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
17
ADSL FAQ
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems
ADSL provides a dedicated service over a single telephone line cable
modems offer a dedicated service over a shared media While cable modems
have greater downstream bandwidth capabilities (up to 30 Mbps) that
bandwidth is shared among all users on a line and will therefore vary perhaps
dramatically as more users in a neighborhood get online at the same time
Cable modem upstream traffic will in many cases be slower than ADSL either
because the particular cable modem is inherently slower or because of rate
reductions caused by contention for upstream bandwidth slots The big
difference between ADSL and cable modems however is the number of lines
available to each There are no more than 12 million homes passed today that
can support two-way cable modem transmissions and while the figure also
grows steadily it will not catch up with telephone lines for many years
Additionally many of the older cable networks are not capable of offering a
return channel consequently such networks will need significant upgrading
before they can offer high bandwidth services
2 What is the expected throughput
In our test we can get about 16Mbps data rate on 15Kft using the 26AWG
loop The shorter the loop the better the throughput is
3 What is the microfilter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up
You can see the DSL LED Green on the P-660HW-Dx v2s front panel is on
when the ADSL physical layer is up
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL
Depending on the line quality the P-660HW-Dx v2 uses Fall Back and Fall
Forward to automatically adjust the date rate
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
18
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing
Though the LLC-based multiplexing can carry multiple protocols over a single
VC it requires extra header information to identify the protocol being carried
on the virtual circuit (VC) The VC-based multiplexing needs a separate VC for
carrying each protocol but it does not need the extra headers Therefore the
VC-based multiplexing is more efficient
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics
You can use the following CI commands to check the ADSL line
statistics
CIgt wan adsl perfdata
CIgt wan adsl status
CIgt wan adsl linedata far
CIgt wan adsl linedata near
You can also do it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Diagnostic -gt DSL Line -gt DSL Status
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector
The signaling pins on the P-660HW-Dx v2s ADSL connector are pin 3 and pin
4 The middle two pins for a RJ11 cable
9 What is triple play
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
19
More and more TelcoISPs are providing three kinds of services (VoIP Video
and Internet) over one existing ADSL connection
The different services (such as video VoIP and Internet access) require
different Qulity of Service
The high priority is Voice (VoIP) data
The Medium priority is Video (IPTV) data
The low priority is internet access such as ftp etc hellip
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus you can configure each PVC separately to assign different
QoS to different application
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
20
Firewall FAQ
General
1 What is a network firewall
A firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control
policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to
protect a trusted network from an untrusted network The firewall can be
thought of two mechanisms One to block the traffic and the other to permit
traffic
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure
The P-660HW-Dx v2 is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks such as Ping of Death SYN Flood LAND
attack IP Spoofing etc It also uses stateful packet inspection to determine if
an inbound connection is allowed through the firewall to the private LAN The
P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Network Address Translation (NAT) which
translates the private local addresses to one or multiple public addresses This
adds a level of security since the clients on the private LAN are invisible to the
Internet
3 What are the basic types of firewalls
Conceptually there are three types of firewalls
1 Packet Filtering Firewall
2 Application-level Firewall
3 Stateful Inspection Firewall
Packet Filtering Firewalls generally make their decisions based on the header
information in individual packets These headers information include the
source destination addresses and ports of the packets
Application-level Firewalls generally are hosts running proxy servers which
permit no traffic directly between networks and which perform logging and
auditing of traffic passing through them A proxy server is an application
gateway or circuit-level gateway that runs on top of general operating system
such as UNIX or Windows NT It hides valuable data by requiring users to
communicate with secure systems by mean of a proxy A key drawback of this
device is performance
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
21
Stateful Inspection Firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against
defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP
address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the
integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols The flexible
nature of Stateful Inspection firewalls generally provides the best speed and
transparency however they may lack the granular application level access
control or caching that some proxies support
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2
1 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall inspects packets contents and IP
headers It is applicable to all protocols that understands data in the
packet is intended for other layers from network layer up to the
application layer
2 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall performs stateful inspection It takes into
account the state of connections it handles so that for example a
legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request
for that packet and allowed in Conversely an incoming packet
masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be
blocked
3 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall uses session filtering ie smart rules
that enhance the filtering process and control the network session
rather than control individual packets in a session
4 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall is fast It uses a hashing function to
search the matched session cache instead of going through every
individual rule for a packet
5 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall provides email service to notify you for
routine reports and when alerts occur
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet filtering and
NAT built-in
With the spectacular growth of the Internet and online access companies that
do business on the Internet face greater security threats Although packet filter
and NAT restrict access to particular computers and networks however for
the other companies this security may be insufficient because packets filters
typically cannot maintain session state Thus for greater security a firewall is
considered
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a
connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable
a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
22
There are four types of DoS attacks
1 Those that exploits bugs in a TCPIP implementation such as Ping of
Death and Teardrop
2 Those that exploits weaknesses in the TCPIP specification such as
SYN Flood and LAND Attacks
3 Brute-force attacks that flood a network with useless data such as
Smurf attack
4 IP Spoofing
7 What is Ping of Death attack
Ping of Death uses a PING utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the
maximum 65535 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification The oversize
packet is then sent to an unsuspecting system Systems may crash hang or
reboot
8 What is Teardrop attack
Teardrop attack exploits weakness in the reassemble of the IP packet
fragments As data is transmitted through a network IP packets are often
broken up into smaller chunks Each fragment looks like the original packet
except that it contains an offset field The Teardrop program creates a series of
IP fragments with overlapping offset fields When these fragments are
reassembled at the destination some systems will crash hang or reboot
9 What is SYN Flood attack
SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each
packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response While the
targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK it queues up all
outstanding SYN-ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue
SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when
an internal timer (which is set a relatively long intervals) terminates the TCP
three-way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all
incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users
10 What is LAND attack
In a LAN attack hackers flood SYN packets to the network with a spoofed
source IP address of the targeted system This makes it appear as if the host
computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the
target system tries to respond to itself
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
23
11 What is Brute-force attack
A Brute-force attack such as Smurf attack targets a feature in the IP
specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting to quickly flood the
target network with useless data A Smurf hacker flood a destination IP
address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network the router will
broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network If there
are numerous hosts this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request
packet the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the intermediary
network but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address
known as the victim network This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all
available bandwidth making communications impossible
12 What is IP Spoofing attack
Many DoS attacks also use IP Spoofing as part of their attack IP Spoofing
may be used to break into systems to hide the hackers identity or to magnify
the effect of the DoS attack IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain
unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking
that the communications are coming from within the trusted network To
engage in IP Spoofing a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it
appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed
through the router or firewall
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
There are two default ACLs pre-configured in the P-660HW-Dx v2 one allows
all connections from LAN to WAN and the other blocks all connections from
WAN to LAN except of the DHCP packets
Configuration
1 How do I configure the firewall
You can use the Web Configurator to configure the firewall for P-660HW-Dx v2
By factory default if you connect your PC to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 you can access Web Configurator via bdquohttp19216811‟
Note Donrsquot forget to type in the Administrator Password
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall
There are several ways to protect others from touching the settings of your
firewall
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
24
1 Change the default Administrator password since it is required when
setting up the firewall
2 Limit who can access to your P-660HW-Dx v2‟s Web Configurator or
CLI You can enter the IP address of the secured LAN host in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt
[Service] -gtSecured Client IP to allow special access to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
The default value in this field is 0000 which means you do not care which
host is trying to telnet your P-660HW-Dx v2 or accessthe Web
Configurator of
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN
There are four reasons that WWWTelnet from WAN is blocked
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable Telnet from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow WWWTelnet connection
from WAN The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
WWW (For accessing Web Configurator)
Source IP= Remote trusted host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP80
Action=Forward
TELNET (For accessing Command Line Interface)
Source IP= Telnet Client host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP23
Action=Forward
(2)You have disabled WWWTelnet service in Web Configurator Advanced
setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
25
(3) WWWTelnet service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host
entered in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote
MGNT
(4)A filter set which blocks WWWTelnet from WAN is applied to WAN node
You can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using FTP over
WAN
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable FTP from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow FTP connection from WAN
The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
Source IP= FTP host
Destination IP= P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP
Service= FTP TCP21 TCP20
Action=Forward
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
26
(2) You have disabled FTP service in Web Configurator Advanced setup
Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(3) FTP service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host entered
in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(4) A filter set which blocks FTP from WAN is applied to WAN node You
can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
Log and Alert
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the firewall log immediately when the packet
matches a firewall rule The log for Default Firewall Policy (LAN to WAN WAN
to LAN WAN to WAN) is generated automatically with factory default setting
but you can change it in Web Configurator
2 What does the log show to us
The log supports up to 128 entries There are 5 columns for each entry Please
see the example shown below
3 How do I view the firewall log
All logs generated in P-660HW-Dx v2 including firewall logs IPSec logs
system logs are migrated to centralized logs So you can view firewall logs in
Centralized logs Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs
-gtView Log
The log keeps 128 entries the new entries will overwrite the old entries when
the log has over 128 entries
Before you can view firewall logs there are two steps you need to do
(1) Enable log function in Centralized logs setup via either one of the following
methods
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
27
Web configuration Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log
Settings check Access Control and Attacks options depending on
your real situation
CI command sys logs category [access | attack]
(2) Enable log function in firewall default policy or in firewall rules
After the above two steps you can view firewall logs via
Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gtView
Log
View the log by CI command sys logs disp
You can also view Centralized logs via mail or syslog please configure mail
server or Unix Syslog server in Web configuration Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the alert when an attack is detected by the
firewall and sends it via Email So to send the alert you must configure the
mail server and Email address using Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings You can also specify how frequently
you want to receive the alert in it
5 What is the difference between the log and alert
A log entry is just added to the log inside the P-660HW-Dx v2 and e-mailed
together with all other log entries at the scheduled time as configured An alert
is e-mailed immediately after an attacked is detected
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
28
Wireless FAQ
General FAQ
1 What is a Wireless LAN
Wireless LANs provide all the functionality of wired LANs without the need for
physical connections (wires) Data is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier
and transmitted through the ether Typical bit-rates are 11Mbps and 54Mbps
although in practice data throughput is half of this Wireless LANs can be
formed simply by equipping PCs with wireless NICs If connectivity to a wired
LAN is required an Access Point (AP) is used as a bridging device APs are
typically located close to the centre of the wireless client population
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN
Mobility Wireless LAN systems can provide LAN users with access to
real-time information anywhere in their organization This mobility supports
productivity and service opportunities not possible with wired networks
Installation Speed and Simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be
fast and easy and can eliminate the need to pull cable through walls and
ceilings
Installation Flexibility Wireless technology allows the network to go where
wire cannot go
Reduced Cost-of-Ownership While the initial investment required for
wireless LAN hardware can be higher than the cost of wired LAN hardware
overall installation expenses and life-cycle costs can be significantly lower
Long-term cost benefits are greatest in dynamic environments requiring
frequent moves and changes
Scalability Wireless LAN systems can be configured in a variety of topologies
to meet the needs of specific applications and installations Configurations are
easily changed and range from peer-to-peer networks suitable for a small
number of users to full infrastructure networks of thousands of users that
enable roaming over a broad area
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN
The speed of Wireless LAN is still relatively slower than wired LAN The setup
cost of Wireless LAN is relative high because the equipment cost including
access point and PCMCIA Wireless LAN card is higher than hubs and CAT 5
cables
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
29
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks
Airports hotels and even coffee shops like Starbucks are deploying 80211
networks so people can wirelessly surf the Internet with their laptops
5 What is an Access Point
The AP (access point also known as a base station) is the wireless server that
with an antenna and a wired Ethernet connection that broadcasts information
using radio signals AP typically acts as a bridge for the clients It can pass
information to wireless LAN cards that have been installed in computers or
laptops allowing those computers to connect to the campus network and the
Internet without wires
6 Whatrsquos the difference between IEEE80211abg
The IEEE 80211 is a wireless LAN industry standard and the objective of
IEEE 80211 is to make sure that different manufactures wireless LAN devices
can communicate to each other Below is a brief comparison for the
IEEE80211 abg
Publish
Time
Frequency
Band(GHZ)
Data Rate(Mbps) Compatibility
IEEE80211a 1999 UNII Band
515~5825
691218243648
54
Only work with
80211a
devices
IEEE80211b 1999 ISM Band
24~24835
125511 -
IEEE80211g 2001 ISM Band
24~24835
691218243648
54
Backward
compatible with
80211b
devices
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
Yes As long as the products comply to the same IEEE 80211 standard The
Wi-Fi logo is used to define 80211b compatible products Wi-Fi5 is a
compatibility standard for 80211a products running in the 5GHz band
8 What is Wi-Fi
The Wi-Fi logo signifies that a product is interoperable with wireless
networking equipment from other vendors A Wi-Fi logo product has been
tested and certified by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA)
The Socket Wireless LAN Card is Wi-Fi certified and that means that it will
work (interoperate) with any brand of Access Point that is also Wi-Fi certified
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band
Various spread spectrum radio communication applications use the 24 GHz
band This includes WLAN systems (not necessarily of the type IEEE
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
30
80211b) cordless phones wireless medical telemetry equipment and
Bluetoothtrade short-range wireless applications which include connecting
printers to computers and connecting modems or hands-free kits to mobile
phones
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device
Any time devices are operated in the same frequency band there is the
potential for interference
Both the 80211bg and Bluetooth devices occupy the same24-to-2483-GHz
unlicensed frequency range-the same band But a Bluetooth device would not
interfere with other 80211 devices much more than another 80211 device
would interefere While more collisions are possible with the introduction of a
Bluetooth device they are also possible with the introduction of another 80211
device or a new 24 GHz cordless phone for that matter But BlueTooth
devices are usually low-power so the effects that a Bluetooth device may have
on an 80211 network if any arent far-reaching
11 Can radio signals pass through wall
Transmitting through a wall is possible depending upon the material used in its
construction In general metals and substances with a high water content do
not allow radio waves to pass through Metals reflect radio waves and concrete
attenuates radio waves The amount of attenuation suffered in passing through
concrete will be a function of its thickness and amount of metal re-enforcement
used
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference among WLAN
products
Factors of interference
(1) Obstacles walls ceilings furniturehellip etc
(2) Building Materials metal door aluminum studs
(3) Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors
Solution
(1) Minimizing the number of walls and ceilings
(2) Antenna is positioned for best reception
(3) Keep WLAN products away from electrical devices eg microwaves
monitors electric motorshellip etc
(4) Add additional APs if necessary
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN
WLANs are generally privately owned wireless systems that are deployed in a
corporation warehouse hospital or educational campus setting Data rates
are high and there are no per-packet charges for data transmission
WWANs are generally publicly shared data networks designed to provide
coverage in metropolitan areas and along traffic corridors WWANs are owned
by a service provider or carrier Data rates are low and charges are based on
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
31
usage Specialized applications are characteristically designed around short
burst messaging
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage any
hardware
Yes it will not harm the hardware but the module will not be detected and
work after inserting to the slot You need to reboot the router to initialize the
module
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
The wireless security modes supported on P-660HW-Dx v2 are Static
WEP WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK and WPA2
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
It supports IEEE 80211bgg+ standard
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering
Yes it supports up to 32 MAC Address filtering
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption
Yes it means that the AP on P-660HW-Dx v2 will automatically decelerate
when devices move beyond the optimal range or other interference is present
If the device moves back within the range of a higher-speed transmission the
connection will automatically speed up again Rate shifting is a physical-layer
mechanism transparent to the user and the upper layers of the protocol stack
Advanced FAQ
1 What is Ad Hoc mode
A wireless network consists of a number of stations without using an access
point or any connection to a wired network
2 What is Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure mode implies connectivity to a wired communications
infrastructure If such connectivity is required the Access Points must be used
to connect to the wired LAN backbone Wireless clients have their
configurations set for infrastructure mode in order to utilise access points
relaying
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area
This depends on the surrounding terrain the diameter of the client population
and the number of clients If an area is large with dispersed pockets of
populations then extension points can be used for extend coverage
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
32
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (DSSS)
DSSS spreads its signal continuously over a wide frequency band DSSS
maps the information bearing bit-pattern at the sending station into a higher
data rate bit sequence using a chipping code The chipping code (also known
as processing gain) introduces redundancy which allows data recovery if
certain bit errors occur during transmission The FCC rules the minimum
processing gain should be 10 typical systems use processing gains of 20
IEEE 80211b specifies the use of DSSS
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (FHSS)
FHSS uses a narrowband carrier which hops through a predefined sequence
of several frequencies at a specific rate This avoids problems with fixed
channel narrowband noise and simple jamming Both transmitter and receiver
must have their hopping sequences synchronized to create the effect of a
single logical channel To an unsynchronised receiver an FHSS transmission
appears to be short-duration impulse noise 80211 may use FHSS or DSSS
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
No Provided the antenna is optimally designed for 24GHz or 5GHz operation
WLAN NICs often include an internal antenna which may provide sufficient
reception
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range
This frequency range has been set aside by the FCC and is generally labeled
the ISM band A few years ago Apple and several other large corporations
requested that the FCC allow the development of wireless networks within this
frequency range What we have today is a protocol and system that allows for
unlicensed use of radios within a prescribed power level The ISM band is
populated by Industrial Scientific and Medical devices that are all low power
devices but can interfere with each other
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID)
SSID is a configurable identification that allows clients to communicate to the
appropriate base station With proper configuration only clients that are
configured with the same SSID can communicate with base stations having
the same SSID SSID from a security point of view acts as a simple single
shared password between base stations and clients
9 What is an ESSID
ESSID stands for Extended Service Set Identifier and identifies the wireless
LAN The ESSID of the mobile device must match the ESSID of the AP to
communicate with the AP The ESSID is a 32-character maximum string and is
case-sensitive
Security FAQ
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Points
radio link
To secure the date across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Point‟s radio link we
could select any one of the security mode Static 64128256 bit WEP
WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK WPA2
2 What is WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security mechanism defined within the
80211 standard and designed to make the security of the wireless medium
equal to that of a cable (wire) WEP data encryption was designed to prevent
access to the network by intruders and to prevent the capture of wireless
LAN traffic through eavesdropping WEP allows the administrator to define a
set of respective Keys for each wireless network user based on a Key
String passed through the WEP encryption algorithm Access is denied by
anyone who does not have an assigned key Note WEP has shown to have
fundamental flaws in its key generation processing
3 What is WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN You can refer to
the User Guide for more information about it
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP
40 bit WEP and 64 bit WEP are the same encryption level and can interoperate
The lower level of WEP encryption uses a 40 bit (10 Hex character) as secret
key (set by user) and a 24 bit Initialization Vector (not under user control)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
34
(40+24=64) Some vendors refer to this level of WEP as 40 bit others as 64
bit
5 What is a WEP key
A WEP key is a user defined string of characters used to encrypt and decrypt
data
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP
No 128-bit WEP will not communicate with 64-bit WEP Although 128 bit WEP
also uses a 24 bit Initialization Vector but it uses a 104 bit as secret key Users
need to use the same encryption level in order to make a connection
7 Can the SSID be encrypted
No WEP only encrypts the data packets not the 80211 management
packetsThe SSID is in the beacon and probe management messages and
SSID goes over the air in clear text This makes obtaining the SSID easy by
sniffing 80211 wireless traffic
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff the SSID
Many APs by default have broadcasting the SSID turned on Sniffers typically
will find the SSID in the broadcast beacon packets Turning off the broadcast of
SSID in the beacon message (a common practice) does not prevent getting
the SSID since the SSID is sent in the clear in the probe message when a
client associates to an AP a sniffer just has to wait for a valid user to associate
to the network to see the SSID
9 What are Insertion Attacks
The insertion attacks are based on placing unauthorized devices on the
wireless network without going through a security process and review
10 What is Wireless Sniffer
An attacker can sniff and capture legitimate traffic Many of the sniffer tools for
Ethernet are based on capturing the first part of the connection session where
the data would typically include the username and password An intruder can
masquerade as that user by using this captured information An intruder who
monitors the wireless network can apply this same attack principle on the
wireless
11 What is OTIST How do I use it
OTIST is acronym for ZyXEL‟s bdquoOne Touch Intelligent Security Technology‟
It enables P-660HW-Dx v2 and ZyXEL‟s OTIST supported Wireless adapters
to establish connections of the WPA-PSK security mode automatically with
just one touch at the reset button on rear panel
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
35
To use this function on P-660HW-Dx v2 you could press the reset button on
P-660HW-Dx v2 for 1~5 seconds the OTIST is actived The P-660HW-Dx v2
will enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA-PSK automatically if no
WLAN security has been set The default setup key for OTIST is bdquo01234567‟
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
36
Application Notes
General Application Notes
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode
Setup your workstation
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
If the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet that means only
the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as an ADSL bridge
modem to connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account
and limit only one computer to access the Internet
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
To connect your computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN port the computer
must have an Ethernet adapter card installed For connecting a single
computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2 we use a Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
In most cases the IP address of the computer is assigned by the ISP
dynamically so you have to configure the computer as a DHCP client which
obtains the IP from the ISP using DHCP protocol The ISP may also provide
the gateway DNS via DHCP if they are available Otherwise please enter the
static IP addresses for all that the ISP gives to you in the network TCPIP
settings For Windows we check the option Obtain an IP address
automatically in its TCPIP setup please see the example shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
37
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
bridge mode We will use Web Configurator to guide you through the related
menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as bridge mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
(2)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
38
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For example
LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
(2) Turn off DHCP Server and configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 in
Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN We use 19216811 as
the LAN IP for P-660HW-Dx v2 in this case
Step 1 Disactive DHCP Server and apply it
Step 2 Assign an IP to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx v2 eg
19216811
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to install an Internet sharing device like
a router In this case we use the P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
Connect the LAN ports of all computers to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 using Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
Since the P-660HW-Dx v2 is set to DHCP server as default so you need only
to configure the workstations as the DHCP clients in the networking settings In
this case the IP address of the computer is assigned by the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 can also provide the DNS to the clients via DHCP if it is
available For this setup in Windows we check the option Obtain an IP
address automatically in its TCPIP setup Please see the example shown
below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
39
Set up your P-660HW-Dx v2 under routing mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
Routing mode for routing traffic We will use Web Configurator to guide you
through the related menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as routing mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For
example LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
IP Address
Assignment
Set to Dynamic if the ISP provides the IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2
dynamically Otherwise set to Static and enter the IP in the IP
Address field
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
40
(2) Configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 and the DHCP settings in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
What is DHCP Relay
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In addition to the
DHCP server feature the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports the DHCP relay function
When it is configured as DHCP server it assigns the IP addresses to the LAN
clients When it is configured as DHCP relay it is responsible for forwarding
the requests and responses negotiating between the DHCP clients and the
server See figure 1
Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
We could set the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay by the following command
in CLI
Ip dhcp enif0 mode relay
Ip dhcp enif0 relay server [Server IP Address]
4 SUA Notes
Tested SUANAT Applications (eg Cu-SeeMe ICQ NetMeeting)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
41
Introduction
Generally SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users However some applications
such as Cu-SeeMe and ICQ will need to connect to the local user behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 In such case a SUA server must be configured to forward
the incoming packets to the true destination behind SUA After the required
server are configured in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding the internal server or client applications can be accessed
by using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP Address
SUA Supporting Table
The following are the required Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding for the various applications running SUA mode
ZyXEL SUA Supporting Table1
Application
Required Settings in Port Forwarding
PortIP
Outgoing Connection Incoming
Connection
HTTP None 80client IP
FTP None 21client IP
TELNET None 23client IP
(and active Telnet
service from WAN)
POP3 None 110client IP
SMTP None 25client IP
mIRC
None for Chat
For DCC please set
DefaultClient IP
Windows PPTP None 1723client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
42
ICQ 99a None for Chat
For DCC please set
ICQ -gt preference -gt
connections -gt firewall
and set the firewall time
out to 80 seconds in
firewall setting
Defaultclient IP
ICQ 2000b None for Chat None for Chat
ICQ Phone 2000b None 6701client IP
Cornell 11 Cu-SeeMe None 7648client IP
White Pine 312 Cu-SeeMe2 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
White Pine 40 Cu-SeeMe 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
Microsoft NetMeeting 21 amp
3013
None 1720client IP
1503client IP
Cisco IPTV 200 None
RealPlayer G2 None
VDOLive None
Quake1064 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeII2305 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeIII105 beta None
StartCraft 6112client IP
Quick Time 40 None
pcAnywhere 80 None
5631client IP
5632client IP
22client IP
IPsec (ESP tunneling mode) None (one client only) DefaultClient
Microsoft Messenger Service
30 6901client IP 6901client IP
Microsoft Messenger Service
46 47 50hellip
(none UPnP)6
None for Chat File
transfer Video and Voice
None for Chat File
transfer Video and
Voice
Net2Phone None 6701client IP
Network Time Protocol (NTP) None 123 server IP
Win2k Terminal Server None 3389server IP
Remote Anything None 3996 - 4000client IP
Virtual Network Computing None 5500client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
43
(VNC) 5800client IP
5900client IP
AIM (AOL Instant Messenger) None for Chat and IM None for Chat and
IM
e-Donkey None 4661 - 4662client IP
POLYCOM Video
Conferencing None Defaultclient IP
iVISTA 41 None 80server IP
Microsoft Xbox Live7 None NA 1 Since SUA enables your LAN to appear as a single computer to the Internet
it is not possible to configure similar servers on the same LAN behind SUA 2 Because White Pine Cu-SeeMe uses dedicate ports (port 7648 amp port 24032)
to transmit and receive data therefore only one local Cu-SeeMe is allowed
within the same LAN 3 In SUA mode only one local NetMeeting user is allowed because the
outsiders can not distinguish between local users using the same internet IP 4 Certain Quake servers do not allow multiple users to login using the same
unique IP so only one Quake user will be allowed in this case Moreover
when a Quake server is configured behind SUA P-660HW-Dx v2 will not be
able to provide information of that server on the internet 5 Quake II has the same limitations as that of Quake I 6 P-660HW-Dx v2 supports MSN Messenger 46 47 50hellip video voice
pass-through NAT In addition for the Windows OS supported UPnP
(Universal Plug and Play) such as Windows XP and Windows ME UPnP
supported in P-660HW-Dx v2 is an alternative solution to pass through MSN
Messenger video voice traffic For more detail please refer to UPnP
application note 7 P-660HW-Dx v2 support Microsoft Xbox Live with factory default
configuration
Configurations
For example if the workstation operating Cu-SeeMe has an IP of 192168134
then the default SUA server must be set to 192168134 The peer Cu-SeeMe
user can reach this workstation by using P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
44
which can be obtained from Web Configurator
Configure an Internal Server behind SUA
Introduction
If you wish you can make internal servers (eg Web ftp or mail server)
accessible for outside users even though SUA makes your LAN appear as a
single machine to the outside world A service is identified by the port number
Also since you need to specify the IP address of a server behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 a server must have a fixed IP address and not be a DHCP
client whose IP address potentially changes each time P-660HW-Dx v2 is
powered on
In addition to the servers for specific services SUA supports a default server
A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for is
forwarded to the default server If the default server is not defined the service
request is simply discarded
Configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
45
To make a server visible to the outside world specify the port number of the
service and the inside address of the server in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The outside users can access
the local server using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address which can be
obtained from Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information
For example
Configuring an internal Web server for outside access (suppose the
Server IP Address is 192168110)
(1) Fill in the service name and server IP Address press button bdquoAdd‟
(2) If add successfully the Web Configurator will display message
bdquoConfiguration updated successfully‟ at the bottom You can see the port
forwarding rule on the same page the default port for Web Server is 80
(3) If you want to change the port for Web Server you could press button
bdquoModify‟ on corresponding rule then modify and apply it
Default port numbers for some services
Service Port Number
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
46
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
Configure a PPTP server behind SUA
Introduction
PPTP is a tunneling protocol defined by the PPTP forum that allows PPP
packets to be encapsulated within Internet Protocol (IP) packets and
forwarded over any IP network including the Internet itself
In order to run the Windows 9x PPTP client you must be able to establish an
IP connection with a tunnel server such as the Windows NT Server 40
Remote Access Server
Windows Dial-Up Networking uses the Internet standard Point-to-Point (PPP)
to provide a secure optimized multiple-protocol network connection over
dial-up telephone lines All data sent over this connection can be encrypted
and compressed and multiple network level protocols (TCPIP NetBEUI and
IPX) can be run correctly Windows NT Domain Login level security is
preserved even across the Internet
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
47
Window98 PPTP Client Internet NT RAS Server Protocol Stack
PPTP appears as new modem type (Virtual Private Networking Adapter) that
can be selected when setting up a connection in the Dial-Up Networking folder
The VPN Adapter type does not appear elsewhere in the system Since PPTP
encapsulates its data stream in the PPP protocol the VPN requires a second
dial-up adapter This second dial-up adapter for VPN is added during the
installation phase of the Upgrade in addition to the first dial-up adapter that
provides PPP support for the analog or ISDN modem
The PPTP is supported in Windows NT and Windows 98 already For
Windows 95 it needs to be upgraded by the Dial-Up Networking 12 upgrade
Configuration
This application note explains how to establish a PPTP connection with a
remote private network in the P-660HW-Dx v2 SUA case In ZyNOS all PPTP
packets can be forwarded to the internal PPTP Server (WinNT server) behind
SUA The port number of the PPTP has to be entered in the Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding on
P-660HW-Dx v2 to forward to the appropriate private IP address of Windows
NT server
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
48
Example
The following example shows how to dial to an ISP via the P-660HW-Dx v2
and then establish a tunnel to a private network There will be three items that
you need to set up for PPTP application these are PPTP server (WinNT)
PPTP client (Win9x) and the P-660HW-Dx v2
(1) PPTP server setup (WinNT)
Add the VPN service from Control Panel -gtNetwork
Add an user account for PPTP logged on user
Enable RAS port
Select the network protocols from RAS such as IPX TCPIP NetBEUI
Set the Internet gateway to P-660HW-Dx v2
(2) PPTP client setup (Win9x)
Add one VPN connection from Dial-Up Networking by entering the
correct username amp password and the IP address of the P-660HW-Dx
v2s Internet IP address for logging to NT RAS server
Set the Internet gateway to the router that is connecting to ISP
(3) P-660HW-Dx v2 setup
Before making a VPN connection from Win9x to WinNT server you
need to connect P-660HW-Dx v2 router to your ISP first
Enter the IP address of the PPTP server (WinNT server) and the
port number for PPTP as shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
49
Select service name as bdquoPPTP‟ fill in the Server IP Address then press button
bdquoAdd‟
When you have finished the above settings you can ping to the remote Win9x
client from WinNT This ping command is used to demonstrate that remote
the Win9x can be reached across the Internet If the Internet connection
between two LANs is achievable you can place a VPN call from the remote
Win9x client
For example Cping 203661132
When a dial-up connection to ISP is established a default gateway is assigned
to the router traffic through that connection Therefore the output below shows
the default gateway of the Win9x client after the dial-up connection has been
established
Before making a VPN connection from the Win9x client to the NT server you
need to know the exact Internet IP address that the ISP assigns to
P-660HW-Dx v2 router in SUA mode and enter this IP address in the VPN
dial-up dialog box You can check this Internet IP address from PNC Monitor or
S Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information If the Internet IP address
is a fixed IP address provided by ISP in SUA mode then you can always use
this IP address for reaching the VPN server
In the following example the IP address 1401131225 is dynamically
assigned by ISP You must enter this IP address in the VPN Server dialog box
for reaching the PPTP server After the VPN link is established you can start
the network protocol application such as IP IPX and NetBEUI
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
50
5 Using Full Feature NAT
When P-660HW-Dx v2 is in Routing mode you can select NAT Option as
Full Feature in Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit
Key Settings
Field Options Description
Network Address
Translation
Full Feature
When you select this option you can select
Address Mapping Set Number 1~8 in the
pull-down menu on the right
None NAT is disabled when you select this option
SUA Only
When you select this option this remote node
will use default SUA Address Mapping Set
You can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat
lookup 255‟ It‟s a read-only sets with two
rules Many-to-One and server mapping
Select Full Feature when you require other
mapping types
Configuring NAT
Address Mapping Sets and NAT Server Sets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
51
The P-660HW-Dx v2 has 8 remote nodes and so allows you to configure 8
NAT Address Mapping Sets You must specify which NAT Address Mapping
Set (1~8) to use in the remote node when you select Full Feature NAT
You can edit 10 rules for each Address Mapping Set You can edit the rules for
Address Mapping Sets 1 in Web Configurator The other Address Mapping
Sets 2~8 can only be configured in CLI (Command Line Interface)
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports We
can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Port Forwarding To use the NAT server sets you‟ve configured a Server
rule must be set up inside the NAT Address Mapping set Please see NAT
Server Sets for further information on how to apply it
When you select SUA Only the P-660HW-Dx v2 will use a default SUA
Address Mapping set for it It has two rules Many-to-One and Server You
can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat lookup 255‟
Please note that the fields in this menu are read-only However the settings of
the rule set 2 can be modified in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The following table explains the fields in this
above screen
Field Description OptionExample
set This is sequence number for Address Mapping Sets 255 for SUA
Internal
Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA)
0000 for the
Many-to-One type
Local End
IP
This is the starting local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0000 and the
End IP is 255255255255
255255255255
Global Start
IP
This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you
have a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start
IP
0000
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
52
Global End
IP This is the ending global IP address (IGA) NA
Type This is the NAT mapping types Many-to-One and
Server
Here we‟ll guide you to configure Address Mapping Sets from Web
Configurator and CLI (Since in Web Configurator we can only edit the rules
for Address Mapping Sets 1 The other Address Mapping Sets 2~8 can only
be configured in CLI)
Now lets begin with Web Configurator
Firstly let‟s come to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping
This menu is for Address Mapping Set 1 you can edit 10 Address Mapping
Rules for Set 1 You can edit or remove a rule by clicking the two buttons on
the rule table
Click the bdquoEditrsquo Button on the rule 1 then you can enter the window in which
you can edit an individual rule and configure the Mapping Type Local and
Global StartEnd IPs
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
53
The following table describes the fields in this screen
Field Description OptionExample
Type You can select one of the five mapping types from the
pull-down menu
1 One-to-One
2 Many-to-One
3 Many-to-Many
Overload
4 Many-to-Many No
Overload
5 Server
Local
IP
Start This is the starting local IP address (ILA) 0000
End
This is the ending local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0000 and the
End IP as 255255255255 This field is NA for
One-to-One type
255255255255
Global
IP
Start This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you have
a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start IP 0000
End
This is the ending global IP address (IGA) This
field is NA for One-to-One Many-to-One and Server
types
2001164
Note For all Local and Global IPs the End IP address must begin after the IP
Start address ie you cannot have an End IP address beginning before the
Start IP address
Configure Address Mapping Sets in CLI
Setp 1 Telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 (We suppose the LAN IP Address of
P-660HW-Dx v2 is 19216811)
Step 2 Select one Address Mapping Set (1~8) by command bdquoip nat
addrmap map [map ] [set name]‟ (set name is optional) Suppose we
configure set 2 in the example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
54
Setp 3 Set NAT address mapping rule for the Address Mapping Set you just
configured (Set 2 in this example) by command bdquoip nat addrmap rule [rule]
[insert | edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP] [global start IP] [global
end IP] [server set ]‟ Suppose we set a Many-to-One rule for set 2 by
command bdquoip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 1 192168110 192168120 172111
172111‟
Setp 4 Save the configuration by command bdquoip nat addrmap save‟ You can
apply the Address Mapping Set 2 to remote nodes in Web Configurator when
you select Full Feature NAT See the intire process as follows
Set 5 You can lookup the successfully configured Address Mapping Sets by
command bdquoip nat addrmap disp‟
Key Settings
CI Command Description
ip nat addrmap map [map] [set
name]
Select NAT address mapping set and set mapping set
name but set name is optional
Example
gt ip nat addrmap map 2 Test
ip nat addrmap rule [rule] [insert |
edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP]
[global start IP] [global end IP] [server
set ]
Set NAT address mapping rule If the ldquotyperdquo is not
ldquoinside-serverrdquo then the ldquotyperdquo field will still need a
dummy value like ldquo0rdquo
Type is 0 - 4 = one-to-one many-to-one
many-to-many-overload many-to-many-non overload
inside-server
Example
gt ip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 3 192168110
192168120 172111 172111
ip nat addrmap clear [map] [rule] Clear the selected rule of the set
ip nat addrmap freememory Discard Changes
ip nat addrmap disp Display nat set information
ip nat addrmap save Save settings
ip nat server load [set] Load the server sets of NAT into buffer
ip nat server disp [1] ldquodisp 1rdquo means to display the NAT server set in buffer
if parameter ldquo1rdquo is omitted then it will display all the
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
55
server sets
ip nat server save Save the NAT server set buffer into flash
ip nat server clear [set] Clear the server set [set] must use ldquosaverdquo command
to let it save into flash
ip nat server edit [rule] active Activate the rule [rule] rule number is 1 to 24 the
number 25-36 is for UPNP application
ip nat server edit [rule] svrport ltstart
portgt ltend portgt
Configure the port range from ltstart port gt to ltend
portgt
ip nat server edit [rule] remotehost
ltstart IPgt ltend IPgt
Configure the IP address range of remote host (Leave
it to be default value if you don‟t need this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] leasetime
ltsecondsgt
Configure the lease time (Leave it to be default value if
you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] rulename
ltstringgt
Configure the name of the rule (Leave it to be default
value if you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] forwardip ltIP
addressgt Configure the LAN IP address to be forwarded
ip nat server edit [rule] protocol
ltTCP|UDP|ALLgt
Configure the protocol to be used TCP UDP or ALL
(it must be capital)
NAT Server Sets
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports
(similar to the old SUA menu of before) If you wish you can make inside
servers for different services eg Web or FTP visible to the outside users
even though NAT makes your network appears as a single machine to the
outside world A server is identified by the port number eg Web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21
As an example (see the following figure) if you have a Web server at
192168136 and a FTP server at 192168133 then you need to specify for
port 80 (Web) the server at IP address 192168136 and for port 21 (FTP)
another at IP address 192168133
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
56
Please note that a server can support more than one service eg a server
can provide both FTP and Mail service while another provides only Web
service
The following procedures show how to configure a server behind NAT
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
Step 2 Select the service name from the pull-down menu and fill in the server
Address on bdquoServer IP Address‟ then click button bdquoAdd‟ to save it
Step 3 You could click the button bdquoEdit‟ on the rule to modify the Service name
Server IP Address StartEnd Port
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please
refer RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers
Service Port Number
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol)
1723
Examples
Internet Access Only
Internet Access with an Internal Server
Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
(1) Internet Access Only
In our Internet Access example we only need one rule where all our ILAs map
to one IGA assigned by the ISP You can just use the default SUA NAT or you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
57
could select Full Feature NAT and select an Address Mapping Set with a
Many-to-One Rule See the following figure
(2) Internet Access with an Internal Server
In this case we do exactly as the figure (use the convenient pre-configured
SUA Only set) and also go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
NAT -gt Port Forwarding to specify the Internet Server behind the NAT as
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
58
below
(3) Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
(One-to-One Many-to-One Server Set mapping types are used)
In this case we have 3 IGAs from the ISP We have two very busy internal FTP
servers and also an internal general server for the web and mail In this case
we want to assign the 3 IGAs by the following way using 4 NAT rules
Rule 1 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
Rule 3 (Many-to-One type) to map the other clients to IGA3 (200003)
Rule 4 (Server type) to map a web server and mail server with ILA3
(192168120) to IGA3 Type Server allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types to other machines behind NAT on the LAN
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
59
Step 1 In this case we need to map ILA to more than one IGA therefore we
must choose the Full Feature option from the NAT field in currently active
remote node and assign IGA3 to P-660HW-Dx v2‟s WAN IP Address
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping to begin configuring Address Mapping Set 1 We can see
there are 10 blank rule table that could be configured See the following setup
for the four rules in our case
Rule 1 Setup Select One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 Setup Selecting One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
60
Rule 3 Setup Select Many-to-One type to map the other clients to IGA3
(200003)
Rule 4 Setup Select Server type to map our web server and mail server with
ILA3 (192168120) to IGA3
Menu Network -gt NAT -gt Address Mapping should look as follows now
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
61
Step 3 Now we configure all other incoming traffic to go to our web server and
mail server from Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
(4) Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some mIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address In this case it is better to
use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types thus each
user login to the server using a unique global IP address The following figure
illustrates this
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
62
One rule configured for using Many-to-Many No Overload mapping type is
shown below
We can also do this by configure threeOne-to-One mapping type rules
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
What is DDNS
The DDNS service an IP Registry provides a public central database where
information such as email addresses hostnames IPs etc can be stored and
retrieved This solves the problems if your DNS server uses an IP associated
with dynamic IPs
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to access the internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
must inform the DDNS server the change of this IP so that the server can
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
63
update its IP-to-DNS entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is
updated the DNS name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still
usable
The DDNS servers the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports currently is
WWWDYNDNSORG where you apply the DNS from and update the WAN IP
to
Setup the DDNS
1 Before configuring the DDNS settings in the P-660HW-Dx v2 you must
register an account from the DDNS server such as
WWWDYNDNSORG first After the registration you have a hostname
for your internal server and a password using to update the IP to the
DDNS server
2 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Dynamic DNS
Select Active Dynamic DNS option
Key Settings
Option Description
Service Provider Enter the DDNS server in this field Currently we support
WWWDYNDNSORG
Active Toggle to Yes
Host Name Enter the hostname you subscribe from the above DDNS server
For example zyxelcomtw
User Name Enter the user name that the DDNS server gives to you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
64
Password Enter the password that the DDNS server gives to you
Enable Wildcard
Enter the hostname for the wildcard function that the
WWWDYNDNSORG supports Note that Wildcard option is
available only when the provider is httpwwwdyndnsorg
7 Network Management Using SNMP
ZyXEL SNMP Implementation
ZyXEL currently includes SNMP support in some P-660HW-Dx v2 routers It is
implemented based on the SNMPv1 so it will be able to communicate with
SNMPv1 NMSs Further users can also add ZyXELs private MIB in the NMS
to monitor and control additional system variables The ZyXELs private MIB
tree is shown in figure 3 For SNMPv1 operation ZyXEL permits one
community string so that the router can belong to only one community and
allows trap messages to be sent to only one NMS manager
Some traps are sent to the SNMP manager when anyone of the following
events happens
1 coldStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine coldstarts the trap will be sent after booting
2 warmStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine warmstarts the trap will be sent after booting
3 linkDown (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is down the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
4 linkUp (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is up the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
5 authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215)
When receiving any SNMP get or set requirement with wrong community
this trap is sent to the manager
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
65
6 whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-MIB)
When the system is going to restart (warmstart) the trap will be sent with the
reason of restart before rebooting
(1) For intentional reboot
In some cases (download new files CI command sys reboot ) reboot is
done intentionally And traps with the message System reboot by user will
be sent
(2) For fatal error
System has to reboot for some fatal errors And traps with the message of the
fatal code will be sent
Downloading ZyXELs private MIB
Configure the P-660HW-Dx v2 for SNMP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
66
The SNMP related settings in P-660HW-Dx v2 are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt SNMP The
following steps describe a simple setup procedure for configuring all SNMP
settings
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Get
Community
Enter the correct Get Community This Get Community must match the
Get- and GetNext community requested from the NMS The default is
public
Set
Community
Enter the correct Set Community This Set Community must match the
Set-community requested from the NMS The default is public
Trusted
Host
Enter the IP address of the NMS The P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will only
respond to SNMP messages coming from this IP address If 0000 is
entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will respond to all NMS
managers
Trap
Community
Enter the community name in each sent trap to the NMS This Trap
Community must match what the NMS is expecting The default is
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
67
public
Trap
Destination
Enter the IP address of the NMS that you wish to send the traps to If
0000 is entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will not send trap any
NMS manager
Note You may need to edit a firewall rule to permit SNMP Packets
8 Using syslog
You can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt
Logs -gt Log Settings -gt Syslog logging
Key Settings
Active Select it to active UNIX Syslog
Syslog IP Address Enter the IP address of the UNIX server that you wish to
send the syslog
Log Facility Select from the 7 different local options The log facility lets you
log the message in different server files Refer to your UNIX manual
9 Using IP Alias
What is IP Alias
In a typical environment a LAN router is required to connect two local
networks The P-660HW-Dx v2 can connect three local networks to the ISP or
a remote node we call this function as IP Alias In this case an internal
router is not required For example the network manager can divide the local
network into three networks and connect them to the Internet using
P-660HW-Dx v2s single user account See the figure below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
68
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports three virtual LAN interfaces via its single
physical Ethernet interface The first network can be configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN -gt DHCP Setup The second
and third networks that we call IP Alias 1 and IP Alias 2 can be configured
in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias
There are three internal virtual LAN interfaces for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to route
the packets fromto the three networks correctly They are enif0 for the major
network enif00 for the IP alias 1 and enif01 for the IP alias 2 Therefore
three routes are created in the P-660HW-Dx v2 as shown below when the
three networks are configured If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP is also enabled
the IP pool for the clients can be any of the three networks
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
69
You can edit filter rule to accept or deny LAN packets fromto the IP alias 12
go through the P-660HW-Dx v2 by command in CLI
lan index [index number]
Usage index number =1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt [set]
Usage set= the corresponding filter set number you‟ve configured
lan save
IP Alias Setup
(1) Edit the first network in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
LAN -gt IPDHCP Setup by configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s first LAN IP
address
Key Settings
DHCP
Setup
If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP server is enabled the IP pool for the clients
can be any of the three networks
TCPIP
Setup
Enter the first LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This will create the
first route in the enif0 interface
(2) Edit the second and third networks in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias by
configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s second and third LAN IP addresses
Key Settings
IP Alias 1 Active it and enter the second LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the second route in the enif00 interface
IP Alias 2 Active it and enter the third LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the third route in the enif01 interface
10 Using IP Policy Routing
What is IP Policy Routing (IPPR)
Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router
takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides
a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet
forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator
Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis
prior to the normal routing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
70
traffic among multiple paths For example if a network has both the Internet
and remote node connections we can route the Web packets to the Internet
using one policy and route the FTP packets to the remote LAN using another
policy See the figure below
Use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths
Benefits
Source-Based Routing - Network administrators can use policy-based
routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections
Quality of Service (QoS)- Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the
precedence or TOS (Type of Service) values in the IP header at the periphery
of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic
Cost Savings- IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on
high-bandwidth high-cost path while using low-path for batch traffic
Load Sharing- Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic
among multiple paths
How does the IPPR work
A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet
meets the criteria The action is taken only when all the criteria are met The
criteria include the source address and port IP protocol (ICMP UDP TCP
etc) destination address and port TOS and precedence (fields in the IP
header) and length The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between
interactive and bulk traffic Interactive applications eg Telnet tend to have
short packets while bulk traffic eg file transfer tends to have large packets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
71
The actions that can be taken include routing the packet to a different gateway
(and hence the outgoing interface) and the TOS and precedence fields in the
IP header IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of ZyNOS in style
and in implementation The policies are divided into sets where related
policies are grouped together A use defines the policies before applying them
to an interface or a remote node in the same fashion as the filters There are
12 policy sets with 6 policies in each set
Setup the IP Policy Routing
Setp 1 Set the index of IP routing policy set rule by command bdquoip
policyrouting set index [set] [rule]‟ Suppose set=1 rule=1 in this
example
Step 2 Suppose we‟d like to edit the rule like this
Policy Set Name=Test
Active= Yes
Criteria
IP Protocol = 6
Type of Service= Dont Care Packet length= 0
Precedence = Dont Care Len Comp= NA
Source
addr start= 19216812 end= 192168120
port start= 0 end= NA
Destination
addr start= 0000 end= NA
port start= 80 end= 80
Action= Matched
Gateway addr = 1921681254 Log= No
Type of Service= No Change
Precedence = No Change
This policy example forces the Web packets originated from the clients with IP
addresses from 19216812 to 192168120 be routed to the remote LAN via
the gateway 1921681254
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
ip policyrouting set name Test
(Set the name as Test of IP routing policy rule )
ip policyrouting set active yes
(Enable the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria protocol 6
(Set the protocol ID as 6(TCP) for the rule)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
72
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the criteria type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria packetlength 0
(Set the packet length as 0 for the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcip 19216812 192168120
(Set the source IP address for the rule Start=19216812 end=192168120)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcport 0
(Set the source port for the rule Start=0)
ip policyrouting set criteria destip 0000
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=0000)
ip policyrouting set criteria destport 80 80
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=80 end=80)
ip policyrouting set action actmatched
(Set the action for the rule Matched)
ip policyrouting set action gatewaytype 0
(Set gateway type for the rule Gateway Address)
ip policyrouting set action gatewayaddr 1921681254
(Set the gateway address for the rule 1921681254)
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the action type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the action precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set action log no
(Set log option for the rule no log)
ip polictrouting set save
(Save the rule)
Step 3 Apply the IP policy routing There are two interfaces to apply the policy
set they are the LAN interface and WAN interface It depends where the
gateway specified in the policy rule is located If the gateway you specified is
located on the local LAN you apply the policy set in LAN interface If the
gateway you specified is located on the remote WAN site you apply the policy
set in WAN interface
Apply to WAN Interface (Suppose we apply it to remote node 1 in the
example)
wan node index 1
wan node ippolicy 1
11 Using Call Scheduling
What is Call Scheduling
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
73
Call scheduling enables the mechanism for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to run the
remote node connection according to the pre-defined schedule This feature is
just like the scheduler in a video recorder which records the program according
to the specified time Users can apply at most 4 schedule sets in Remote Node
The remote node configured with the schedule set could be Forced On
Forced Down Enable Dial-On-Demand or Disable Dial-On-Demand on
specified date and time
How to configure a Call Scheduling
You can configure a call scheduling in CLI
Suppose we want to edit a call schedule set like this
Call Schedule Set =1
Set name=Test
Active= Yes
Start Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 - 12 - 27
How Often= Once
Once
Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 -12 -27
Start Time(hhmm)= 12 00
Duration(hhmm)= 16 00
Action= Enable Dial-on-demand
This schedule example permits a demand call on the line on 1200 am
2005-12-27 The maximum length of time this connection is allowed is 16
hours
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
wan callsch index 1
(Set call schedule index = 1 You must apply this command first before you
begin to configure call schedule)
wan callsch name Test
(Set the schedule name as Test)
wan callsch active Yes
(Enable schedule)
wan callsch startdate 2005 12 27
(Set schedule start date as 2005-12-27)
wan callsch oncedate 2005 12 27
(Set the schedule used just once it works on 2005-12-27)
wan callsch starttime 12 00
(Set the schedule start time as 1200)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
74
wan callsch duration 16 00
(Set schedule duration time as 16 hours)
wan callsch action 2
(Set action as dial-on-demand)
wan callsch save
(Save the current call schedule set)
Key Settings
Start Date
Start date of this schedule rule It can be unmatched with weekday
setting For example if Start Date is 20001002(Monday) but Monday
setting in weekday can be No
Forced On The node will always keep up during the setting period It is equivalent
to diable the idel timeout
Forced Down The node will always keep doen during the setting period The
connected remote node will be dropped
Enable
Dial-On-Demand The remote node accepts Dial-on-demand during this period
Disable
Dial-On-Demand
The remote node denies any demand dial during the period For the
existing connected nodes it will be dropped after idle timeout and no
triggered up
Start Time
Duration Start Time and Duration of this schedule
Apply the schedule to the Remote node
Multiple scheduling rules can program in a Remote node and they have
priority For example if we program the sets as 1234 in remote node then
the set 1 will override set 234 set 2 will override 34 and so on
We can apply the schedule to the remote node in CLI by the commands
wan node index []index]
wan node callsch [index]
wan node save
For example if we want to apply the call schedule set 1 to remote node 1 we
could use the commands
wan node index 1
wan node callsch 1
wan node save
Time Service in P-660HW-Dx v2
There is no RTC (Real-Time Clock) chip so the P-660HW-Dx v2 should launch
a mechanism to get current time and date from external server in boot time
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
75
Time service is implemented by the Daytime protocol(RFC-867) Time
protocol(RFC-868) and NTP protocol(RFC-1305) You have to assign an IP
address of a time server and then the P-660HW-Dx v2 will get the date time
and time-zone information from this server You can configure it in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt System -gt Time Setting
12 Using IP Multicast
What is IP Multicast
Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in two ways - unicast or broadcast
Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts Host groups
are identified by class D IP addresses ie those with 1110 as their
higher-order bits In dotted decimal notation host group addresses range from
224000 to 239255255255 Among them 224001 is assigned to the
permanent IP hosts group and 224002 is assigned to the multicast routers
group
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is the protocol used to support
multicast groups The latest version is version 2 (see RFC2236) IP hosts use
IGMP to report their multicast group membership to any immediate-neighbor
multicast routers so the multicast routers can decide if a multicast packet
needs to be forwarded At start up the P-660HW-Dx v2 queries all directly
connected networks to gather group membership
After that the P-660HW-Dx v2 updates the information by periodic queries
The P-660HW-Dx v2 implementation of IGMP is also compatible with version 1
The multicast setting can be turned on or off on Ethernet and remote nodes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
76
IP Multicast Setup
(1) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt LAN -gt IP -gt Advanced Setup
(2) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s remote node in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt Multicast
Key Settings
Multicast IGMP-v1 for IGMP version 1 IGMP-v2 for IGMP version 2
13 Using Bandwidth Management
Why Bandwidth Management (BWM)
Nowadays we have many different traffic types for Internet applications Some
traffic may consume high bandwidth such as FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
Some other traffic may not require high bandwidth but they require stable
supply of bandwidth such as VoIP traffic The VoIP quality would not be good
if all of the outgoing bandwidth is occupied via FTP Additionally chances are
that you would like to grant higher bandwidth for somebody special who is
using specific IP address in your network All of these are reasons why we
need bandwidth management
Using BWM
Setp 1 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gtSummary activate bandwidth management on the interface you
would like to manage We enable the BWM function on WAN interface in this
example
Enter the total speed for this interface that you want to allocate using
bandwidth management This appears as the bandwidth budget of the
interface‟s root class
Select how you want the bandwidth to be allocated Priority-Based means
bandwidth is allocated via priority so the traffic with highest priority would be
served first then the second priority is served secondly and so on If
Fairness-Based is chosen then the bandwidth is allocated by ratio Which
means if A class needs 300 kbps B class needs 600 kbps then the ratio of A
and Bs actual bandwidth is 12 So if we get 450 kbps in total then A would
get 150 kbps B would get 300 kbps We select Priority-Based in this
example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
77
Key Settings
Active
Check the box to enable BWM on the interface Note that if you would like
to manage traffic from WAN to LAN you should apply BWM on LAN
interface If you would like to management traffic from WAN to DMZ
please apply BWM on DMZ interface
Speed Enter the total speed to manage on this interface This value is the budget
of the class trees root
Scheduler
Choose the principle to allocate bandwidth on this interface
Priority-Based allocates bandwidth via priority Fairness-Based allocates
bandwidth by ratio
Maximize
Bandwidth
Usage
Check this box if you would like to give residuary bandwidth from Interface
to the classes who need more bandwidth than configured amount Do not
select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a
bandwidth class or you want to limit the bandwidth of each class at the
configured value (Please note that to meat the second condition you
should also disable Use All Managed Bandwidth in the BWM rule)
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Rule Setup select the interface Service Priority and Allocated
Bandwidth for this rule then click button bdquoAdd‟ to apply this rule
Step 3 You can modify the rule by clicking the button lsquoEditrsquo on the rule
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
78
Key Settings
RuleName Give this rule a name for example WWW
BW Budget Configure the bandwidth you would like to allocate to this rule
Priority Enter a number between 0 and 7 to set the priority of this class The
higher the number the higher the priority The default setting is 3
Use All
Managed
Bandwidth
Check this box if you would like to let this class to borrow bandwidth from
its parents when the required bandwidth is higher than the configured
amount Do not check this if you want to limit the bandwidth of this class
at the configured value(Please note that you should also disable
Maximize Bandwidth Usage on the interface to meet the condition)
Service Select User-defined SIP FTP or H323 to specify the traffic types
Destination
IP Address Enter the IP address of destination that meets this class
Destination
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
Destination
Port Enter the destination port number of the traffic
Source IP
Address
Enter the IP address of source that meats this class Note that for traffic
from LAN to WAN since BWM is before NAT you should use the IP
address before NAT processing
Source
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
79
Source Port Enter the source port number of the traffic
Protocol ID Enter the protocol number for the traffic 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP or 17 for
UDP
After configuration BWM you can check current bandwidth of the configured
traffic in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Monitor
14 Using Zero-Configuration
Zero-Configuration and VC auto-hunting
Zero-Configure feature can help customer to reduce the burden of setting
efforts Whenever system ADSL links up system will send out some probing
patterns system will analyze the packets returned from ISP and decide which
services the ISP may provide Because ADSL is based on a ATM network so
system have to pre-configured a VPIVCI hunting pool before Auto-Configure
function begins to work
The Zero-Configuration feature can hunt the encapsulation and VPIVCI value
and system will automatically configure itself if the hunting result is
successfully This feature has two constraints
1 It supports the ISP provides one kind of service (PPPoEPPPoA etc)
only otherwise the hunting will get confusing and failed
2 VC auto-hunting only supports dynamic WAN IP address If the router is
set a static WAN IP address VC auto-hunting function will be disabled
The entry of hunting pool must also contain the VPI VCI and which kinds of
hunting patterns you wish to send Whenever system send out all the probing
patterns with specific VPIVCI system will wait for 5~10 seconds and get the
response from ISP the response patterns will decide which kinds of ADSL
services of the line will be After that system will save back the correct VPI
VCI and also services (encapsulation) type into profile of WAN interface
Configure the VC auto-hunting preconfigured table
(1) Display auto-haunting preconfigured table by using command from CLI
wan atm vchunt display
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
80
(2) Add items to the auto-haunting preconfigured table by using commands
wan atm vchunt add ltremoteNodeIndexgt ltvpigt ltvcigt ltservice
bit(hex)gt
wan atm vchunt save
Note ltremote nodegt input the remote node index 1-8
ltvpigt vpi value
ltvcigt vci value
ltservicegt it‟s a hex value bit0PPPoEVC (1) bit1PPPoELLC (2)
bit2PPPoAVC (4) bit3PPPoALLC (8) bit4EnetVC (16) bit5 EnetLLC (32)
For example
(1) If you need service PPPoELLC and EnetLLC then the service bits will be
2+32 = 34 (decimal) = 22 (hex) you must input 22
(2) If you want to enable all service for VC hunting the service bits will be
1+2+4+8+16+32=63(decimal)= 3f (hex) you must input 3f
Need to perform save after this by command bdquowan atm vchunt save‟
(3) Delete items from the auto-haunting preconfigured table by useing
command
wan atm vchunt remove ltremote nodegt ltvpigt ltvcigt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
81
Using Zero configuration
You can enabledisable Zero Configuration in Network -gt WAN -gt Advanced
Setup
(1) After configure the auto-haunting preconfigured table You just need a PC
connected to the device LAN Ethernet port with the DSL sync up
(2) Open your web browser to access a Web site It should prompt and request
for your username password of your ISP account if your ISP provide PPPoE
or PPPoA service
(3) After key-in the correct info it will than test the connection If it is
successful it will than close the browser and you can open a new browser to
surf the Internet If the connection test fail it will go back to the page ask for
user name and password
(4) Basically the zero configuration only work on the VC that was preconigured
in the auto-haunting preconfigured table
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2
The common triple play scenario is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
82
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus we could assign different parameters to the PVC (CBR
UBR VBR-RT VBR-nRT) to guarantee different applications
We could configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 via CLI The command is
sys tripleplay set portbase ltEportIDgt ltPVCIDgt
For example sys tripleplay portbase set 1 1
sys tripleplay portbase set 2 2
sys tripleplay portbase set 3 3
The traffic from Ethernet port 1 must be forwarded to PVC1 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet port 2 must be forwarded to PVC2 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet Port3 must be forwarded to PVC3 vice versa
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to configure up to twelve filter sets with six
rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system You can apply up to
four filter sets to a particular port to block multiple types of packets With each
filter set having up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for
a single port
The packet filter function on P-660HW-Dx v2 is the same as before just that
you could only configure the filter set and apply them by command in CLI It‟s
very complex for common users to do it So here‟s the recommendation
(1) Usually if you want to block special packets you could edit a firewall rule in
Web Configurator
032
VOIP Server
IPTV Server
Internet
Server
Others
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
ATUR IP-DSLAM VL-Switch
CPE Access Network ISP
034
055
VOIP Telephone
Video Client
Clients surfing
Internet
Other clients
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
PVC1
PVC2
PVC3
PVC4 132
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
83
(2) By factory default ZyXEL has preconfigured many filter sets for your
reference you can check them by command
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Usage set 1~12 rule 1~6 Commonly the preconfigured filter sets are as
follows ltset 2 rule 1~6gt ltset 3 rule 1gt ltset 4 rule 1gt
sys filter set display
For example
This could satisfy mostly requirement You could select any of them to apply to
the WAN node or LAN Interface on demand The command is as follows
Apply to WAN node
wan node index ltnodegt
Usage node= 1~8 corresponding to the remote node 1~8
wan node filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt
ltset3gt ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to one remote node
wan node save
Apply to LAN Interface
lan index [index]
Usage index=1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
84
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt ltset3gt
ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to LAN Interface
lan save
(3) If you are very advanced user you could edit filter set by the following
command
sys filter set [set] [rule]
Usage Set up a filter set index to edit a set
set 1~12
rule 1~6
sys filter set type [typeID]
Usage typeID tcpip or generic
Note In one filter set you should configure all the rules in one type either
tcpip or generic
sys filter set enable
Usage Enable(active) the rule
sys filter set helliphellip(You could configure a filter rule on demand the newest
command is available on release note)
sys filter set save
Usage Don‟t forget to save the rule everytime you‟ve configured it
Reference Commands
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Set the index of filter set rule you must apply this
command first before you begin to configure the
filter rules
sys filter set name [set name] Set the name of filter set
sys filter set type [tcpip | generic] Set the type of filter rule
sys filter set enable Enable the rule
sys filter set disable Disable the rule
sys filter set protocol [protocol ] Set the protocol ID of the rule
sys filter set sourceroute [yes|no] Set the sourceroute yesno
sys filter set destip [address] [subnet
mask]
Set the destination IP address and subnet mask of
the rule
sys filter set destport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|notequal|less|greater]
Set the destination port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set srcip [address] [subnet
mask] Set the source IP address and subnet mask
sys filter set srcport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|not
Set the source port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
85
equal|less|greater] equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set tcpEstab [yes|no] Set TCP establish option
sys filter set more [yes|no] Set the more option to yesno
sys filter set log [type 0-3= none | match|
notmatch | both ]
Set the log type (it could be 0-3 =none match not
match both)
sys filter set actmatch[type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for match
sys filter set actnomatch [type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for not match
sys filter set offset [] Set offset for the generic rule
sys filter set length [] Set the length for generic rule
sys filter set mask [] Set the mask for generic rule
sys filter set value [(depend on length in
hex)] Set the value for generic rule
sys filter set clear Clear the current filter set
sys filter set save Save the filter set parameters
sys filter set display [set][rule] Display Filter set information Wo parameter it will
display buffer information
sys filter set freememory Discard Changes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
86
Wireless Application Notes
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode
Ad hoc Introduction
What is Ad Hoc mode
Ad hoc mode is a wireless network consists of a number of stations without
access points Without using an access point or any connection to a wired
network a client unit in Ad hoc operation mode can communicate directly to
other client units just as using a cross over Ethernet cable connecting 2 hosts
together via a NIC card for direct connection when configured in Ad hoc mode
without an access point being present Ad hoc operation is ideal for small
networks of no more than 2-4 computers Larger networks would require the
use of one or perhaps several access points
Configuration for Wireless Station A
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
87
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
88
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Configuration for Wireless Station B
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
89
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
90
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Step 7 Station A now are able to connect to Station B
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure Introduction
For Infrastructure WLANs multiple Access Points (APs) like the WLAN to the
wired network and allow users to efficiently share network resources The
Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also
mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
91
Configure Wireless Access Point to Infrastructure mode using Web
configurator
To configure Infrastructure mode of your P-660HW-Dx v2 wireless AP please
follow the steps below
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gt General Configure the basic parameters for Wireless LAN
Step 2 You could click the button bdquoAdvanced Setup‟ for more detailed
configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
92
Configuration Wireless Station to Infrastructure mode
To configure Infrastructure mode on your ZyAIR G-200 Wireless Network
Adapter please follow the following steps
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
93
Step 3 Select Infrastructure from the operation mode pull down menu fill in an
SSID or leave it as any if you wish to connect to any AP than press Apply
Change to take effect
Step 4 Click on Site Survey tab and press search all the available AP will be
listed
Step 5 Double click on the AP you want to associated with
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
94
Step 6 After the client have associated with the selected AP The linked APs
channel current linkup rate SSID link quality and signal strength will show on
the Link Info page You now successfully associate with the selected AP with
Infrastructure Mode
3 MAC Filter
MAC Filter Overview
Users can use MAC Filter as a method to restrict unauthorized stations from
accessing the APs ZyXELs APs provide the capability for checking MAC
address of the station before allowing it to connect to the network This
provides an additional layer of control layer in that only stations with registered
MAC addresses can connect This approach requires that the list of MAC
addresses be configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
95
ZyXEL MAC Filter Implementation
ZyXELs MAC Filter Implementation allows users to define a list to allow or
block association from STAs The filter set allows users to input 12 entries in
the list If Allow Association is selected all other STAs which are not on the list
will be denied Otherwise if Deny Association is selected all other STAs which
are not on the list will be allowed for association Users can choose either way
to configure their filter rule
Configure the WLAN MAC Filter
The MAC Filter related settings in ZyXEL APs are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gtMAC Filter
Before you configure the MAC filter you need to know the MAC address of the
client first If not knowing what your MAC address is please enter a command
ipconfig all after DOS prompt to get the MAC (physical) address of your
wireless client
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gtMAC Filter active MAC Filter
Step 2 Enter the MAC Addresses of wireless cards in the filter set to allow or
deny association from these cards
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Filter Action
Allow or block association from MAC addresses contained in this list If Allow
Association is selected in this field hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list
will be allowed to associate with AP If Deny Association is selected in this field
hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list will be blocked
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
96
MAC Address This field specifies those MAC Addresses that you want to add in the list
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
Introduction
The 80211 standard describes the communication that occurs in wireless
LANs
The Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm is used to protect wireless
communication from eavesdropping because wireless transmissions are
easier to intercept than transmissions over wired networks and wireless is a
shared medium everything that is transmitted or received over a wireless
network can be intercepted
WEP relies on a secret key that is shared between a mobile station (eg a
laptop with a wireless Ethernet card) and an access point (ie a base station)
The secret key is used to encrypt packets before they are transmitted and an
integrity check is used to ensure that packages are not modified during the
transition The standard does not discuss how the shared key is established In
practice most installations use a single key that is shared between all mobile
stations and access points APs You can refer to the User Guide for more
detailed information about it
Setting up the Access Point
You can set up the Access Point from Web configurator Advanced Setup
Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General (You can also configure it via CLI)
Step 1 Select bdquoStatic WEP‟ from the pull down menu bdquoSecurity Mode‟ in Web
Configurator
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
97
Step 2 Set up WEP Key in the Web Configurator You need to set the one of
the following parameters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 5 characters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 10 hexadecimal digits
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 13 characters
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 26 hexadecimal digits
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 29 characters
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 58 hexadecimal digits
There are two ways you can configure the WEP Key
(1) You can put in a special WEP key in the bdquoWEP Key‟ menu directly
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
98
(2) You can also put in an arbitrary sequence of characters in the
bdquoPassphrase‟ and then press button bdquoGenerate‟ to let the P-660HW-Dx v2
generate WEP Key for you
Setting up the Station
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar or right click
the utility icon then select Show Config Utility
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
99
The utility will pop up on your windows screen
Note If the utility icon doesnt exist in your task bar click Start -gt
Programs -gt helliphellip to start the utility
Step 2 Select the Configuration tab
Select bdquoSet Security‟ to configure encryption type and parameters
correspond with access point
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
100
Note You should select Key 1 as default Transmit Key since the P-660HW-Dx
v2 is supposed to use Key 1 by default
Key settings
The WEP Encryption type of station has to equal to the access point
Check ASCII field for characters WEP key or uncheck ASCII field for
Hexadecimal digits WEP key
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
101
Hexadecimal digits dont need to precede by 0x
For example
64-bits with characters WEP key Key1= 2e3f4
64-bits with hexadecimal digits WEP key Key1= 123456789A
5 Site Survey
Introduction
What is Site Survey
An RF site survey is a MAP to RF contour of RF coverage in a particular
facility With wireless system it is very difficult to predict the propagation of
radio waves and detect the presence of interfering signals Walls doors
elevator shafts and other obstacles offer different degree of attenuation This
will cause the RF coverage pattern be irregular and hard to predict
Site survey can help us overcome these problem and even provide us a map
of RF coverage of the facility
Preparation
Below are the steps to complete a simple site survey with simple tools
1 First you will need to obtain a facility diagram such as blueprints This is
for you to mark and take record on
2 Visually inspect the facility walk through the facility to verify the accuracy of
the diagram and mark down any large obstacle you see that may effect the RF
signal such as metal shelf metal desk etc on the diagram
3 Identify users area when doing so ask a question where is wireless
coverage needed and where does not and note and take note on the diagram
this is information is needed to determine the number of AP required
4 Determine the preliminary access point location on the facility diagram base
on the service area needed obstacles power wall jack considerations
Survey on Site
Step 1 With the diagram with all information you gathered in the preparation
phase Now you are ready to make the survey
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
102
Step 2 Install an access point at the preliminary location
Step 3 Use a notebook with wireless client installed and run its utility An utility
will provide information such as connection speed current used channel
associated rate link quality signal strength and etc information as shown in
utility below
Step 4 Its always a good idea to start with putting the access point at the
corner of the room and walk away from the access point in a systematic
manner Record the changes at point where transfer rate drop and the link
quality and signal strength information on the diagram as you go alone
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
103
Step 5 When you reach the farthest point of connection mark the spot Now
you move the access point to this new spot as have already determine the
farthest point of the access point installation spot if wireless service is required
from corner of the room
Step 6 Repeat step 1~5 and now you should be able to mark an RF coverage
area as illustrated in above picutre
Step 7 You may need more than one access point is the RF coverage area
hasn‟t covered all the wireless service area you needed
Step 8 Repeat step 1~6 of survey on site as necessary upon completion you
will have a diagram and information of site survey As illustrated below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
104
Note If there are more than one access point is needed be sure to make the
adjacent access point service area over lap one another So the wireless
station is able to roam For more information please refer to roaming at
6 Configure 8021x and WPA
What is the WPA Functionality
Configuration for Access Point
Configuration for your PC
What is WPA Functionality
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
105
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN
Here comes WPA-PSK Application example for your reference
Configuration for Access point
The IEEE 8021x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the
authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management
Authentication can be done using local user database internal to the
P-660HW-Dx v2 (authenticate up to 32 users) or an external RADIUS server
for an unlimited number of users
Step 1 To change your P-660HW-Dx v2s authentication settings login Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General
-gtSecurity
Step 2 Select lsquoSecurity Mode‟ as WAP-PSK
Step 3 Type the Pre Shared Key in the Pre-Shared Key field
Step 4 Click Apply to finish
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
106
Configuration for your PC
Step 1 Double click on your wireless utility icon in your windows task bar the
utility will pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select the configuration tab type in the SSID (Service Set Identifier)
select the operating Mode as Infrastructure and select proper channel
Step 3 Click Set Security to configure the security parameters
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
107
Step 4 Click OK for finish and begin to Site survey Connect to the AP as you
have configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
108
Step 5 Click Link Info tab if the PC associated and authenticated with AP
successfully we will see the following information
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
109
Support Tool
1 LANWAN Packet Trace
The Prestige packet trace records and analyzes packets running on LAN and
WAN interfaces It is designed for users with technical backgrounds who are
interested in the details of the packet flow on LAN or WAN end of Prestige It is
also very helpful for diagnostics if you have compatibility problems with your
ISP or if you want to know the details of a packet for configuring a filter rule
The format of the display is as following
Packet
[index] [timersecond][channel-receivetransmit][length] [protocol]
[sourceIPport] [destIPport]
There are two ways to dump the trace
Online Trace--display the trace real time on screen
Offline Trace--capture the trace first and display later
The details for capturing the trace in CLI as follows
First of all you need to telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 firstly The password is
Administrator passwords bdquoadmin‟ by default
Online Trace
(1) Trace LAN packet
Disable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
none
Enable to capture the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
110
(2) Trace WAN packet
Disable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
none
Enable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
111
Offline Trace
Disable the capture of the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel
mpoa00 none
Enable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Wait for packet passing through the Prestige over LAN
Disable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw off amp sys trcl sw off
Display the trace briefly by entering sys trcp brief
Display specific packets by using sys trcp parse ltfrom_indexgt ltto_indexgt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
112
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal
Step 1 Initiate a hyper terminal connection from your PC(suppose you
connected to the LAN port of P-660HW-Dx v2)
Step 2 Click the bdquoproperties‟ to configure parameters to telnet to the
P-660HW-Dx v2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
113
Step 3 So that after you invoke the relevant commands you could save the
logs you‟ve captured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
114
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP
Using TFTP client software
Uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Uploaddownload Prestige configurations via LAN
(1) Using TFTP to uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout
in Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 Enter the IP address of the Prestige
Step 5To upload the firmware please save the remote file as ras to
Prestige After the transfer is complete the Prestige will program the upgraded
firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
115
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige The local file is the source
file of the ZyNOS firmware that is available in your hard disk The remote file is
the file name that will be saved in Prestige Check the port number 69 and
512-Octet blocks for TFTP Check Binary mode for file transfering
(2) Using TFTP to uploaddownload SMT configurations via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 To download the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please get the
remote file rom-0 from the Prestige
Step 5 To upload the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please save the
remote file as rom-0 in the Prestige
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
116
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige
The local file is the source file of your configuration file that is available
in your hard disk
The remote file is the file name that will be saved in Prestige
Check the port number 69 and 512-Octet blocks for TFTP
Check Binary mode for file transfering
Using TFTP command on Windows NT
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Download ZyNOS via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] get ras [localfile]
Step 4 Upload P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] put
[localfile] rom-0
Step 5 Download P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP]
get rom-0 [localfile]
Using TFTP command on UNIX
Before you begin
1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Example
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ telnet 19216811
Trying 19216811
Connected to 19216811
Escape character is ^]
Password
rasgt sys stdio 0
(Open a new window)
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get rom-0 [local-rom] lt- change to binary mode
lt- download configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-rom] rom-0 lt- upload configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get ras [local-ras ] lt- download firmware
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-ras] ras lt- upload firmware
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
117
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files
In addition to upload the firmware and configuration file via the console port
and TFTP client you can also upload the firmware and configuration files to
the Prestige using FTP
To use this feature your workstation must have a FTP client software See the
example shown below
Using FTP client software
Note The remote file name for the firmware is ras and the configuration file is
rom-0
Step 1 Use FTP client from your workstation to connect to the Prestige by
entering the IP address of the Prestige
Step2 Press Enter key to ignore the username because the Prestige does
not check the username
Step 3 Enter the CLI password as the FTP login password the default is
admin
Step 4 Enter command bin to set the transfer type to binary
Step 5 Use put command to transfer the file to the Prestige
Example
Step 1 Connect to the Prestige by entering the Prestiges IP and Administrator
password in the FTP software Set the transfer type to Auto-Detect or
Binary
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
118
Step 2 Press OK to ignore the Username prompt
Step 3 To upload the firmware file we transfer the local ras file to overwrite
the remote ras file
To upload the configuration file we transfer the local rom-0 to overwrite
the remote rom-0 file
Step 4 The Prestige reboots automatically after the uploading is finished
Please do not power off the router at this moment
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
119
CI Command Reference
Command Syntax and General User Interface
CI has the following command syntax
command ltiface | device gt subcommand [param]
command subcommand [param]
command | help
command subcommand | help
General user interface
1 Shows the following commands and all major (sub)commands
2 exit Exit Subcommand
To get the latest CI Command list
The latest CI Command list is available in release note of every ZyXEL
firmware release Please goto ZyXEL public WEB site
httpwwwzyxelcomsupportdownload_indexphp to download firmware
package (zip) you should unzip the package to get the release note in PDF
format
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
1
FAQ 5
ZyNOS FAQ 5
1 What is ZyNOS 5
2 What‟s Multilingual Embedded Web Configurator 5
3 How do I access the P-660HW-Dx v2 Command Line Interface (CLI) 5
4 How do I update the firmware and configuration file 5
5 How do I upgradebackup the ZyNOS firmware by using TFTP client
program via LAN 5
6 How do I restore P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations by using TFTP client
program via LAN 6
7 What should I do if I forget the system password 6
8 How to use the Reset button 6
9 What is SUA When should I use SUA 6
10 What is the difference between SUA and Full Feature NAT 7
11 Is it possible to access a server running behind SUA from the outside
Internet How can I do it 7
12 When do I need select Full Feature NAT 8
13 What IPPort mapping does Multi-NAT support 8
14 How many network users can the SUANAT support 9
15 What are Device filters and Protocol filters 9
16 How can I protect against IP spoofing attacks 9
Product FAQ 11
1 How can I manage P-660HW-Dx v2 11
2 What is the default password for Web Configurator 11
3 What‟s the difference between bdquoCommon User Account‟ and
bdquoAdministrator Account‟ 11
4 How do I know the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address assigned by the
ISP 11
5 What is the micro filter or splitter used for 11
6 The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Bridge and Router mode whats the
difference between them 12
7 How do I know I am using PPPoE 12
8 Why does my provider use PPPoE 12
9 What is DDNS 12
10 When do I need DDNS service 13
11 What is DDNS wildcard Does the P-660HW-Dx v2 support DDNS
wildcard 13
12 Can the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA handle IPSec packets sent by the
IPSec gateway 13
13 How do I setup my P-660HW-Dx v2 for routing IPSec packets over
SUA 14
14 What is Traffic Shaping 14
15 Why do we perform traffic shaping in the P-660HW-Dx v2 14
16 What do the parameters (PCR SCR MBS) mean 15
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
2
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
15
18 What is content filter 15
ADSL FAQ 17
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems 17
2 What is the expected throughput 17
3 What is the microfilter used for 17
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up 17
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL 17
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing 18
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics 18
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector 18
9 What is triple play 18
Firewall FAQ 20
General 20
1 What is a network firewall 20
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure 20
3 What are the basic types of firewalls 20
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2 21
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet
filtering and NAT built-in 21
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack 21
7 What is Ping of Death attack 22
8 What is Teardrop attack 22
9 What is SYN Flood attack 22
10 What is LAND attack 22
11 What is Brute-force attack 23
12 What is IP Spoofing attack 23
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
23
Configuration 23
1 How do I configure the firewall 23
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall 23
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN 24
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using
FTP over WAN 25
Log and Alert 26
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log 26
2 What does the log show to us 26
3 How do I view the firewall log 26
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert 27
5 What is the difference between the log and alert 27
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
3
Wireless FAQ 28
General FAQ 28
1 What is a Wireless LAN 28
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN 28
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN 28
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks 29
5 What is an Access Point 29
6 What‟s the difference between IEEE80211abg 29
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
29
8 What is Wi-Fi 29
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band 29
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device 30
11 Can radio signals pass through wall 30
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference
among WLAN products 30
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN 30
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage
any hardware 31
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
31
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support 31
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering 31
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption 31
Advanced FAQ 31
1 What is Ad Hoc mode 31
2 What is Infrastructure mode 31
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area 31
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash
(DSSS) 32
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash
(FHSS) 32
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
32
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range 32
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID) 32
9 What is an ESSID 32
Security FAQ 33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access
Points radio link 33
2 What is WEP 33
3 What is WPA 33
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP 34
5 What is a WEP key 34
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
4
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP 34
7 Can the SSID be encrypted 34
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff
the SSID 34
9 What are Insertion Attacks 34
10 What is Wireless Sniffer 34
11 What is OTIST How do I use it 34
Application Notes 36
General Application Notes 36
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode 36
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
38
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay 40
4 SUA Notes 40
5 Using Full Feature NAT 50
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS) 62
7 Network Management Using SNMP 64
8 Using syslog 67
9 Using IP Alias 67
10 Using IP Policy Routing 69
11 Using Call Scheduling 73
12 Using IP Multicast 75
13 Using Bandwidth Management 76
14 Using Zero-Configuration 79
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 82
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2 82
Wireless Application Notes 86
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode 86
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode 90
3 MAC Filter 94
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) 96
5 Site Survey 101
6 Configure 8021x and WPA 104
Support Tool 109
1 LANWAN Packet Trace 109
Online Trace 109
Offline Trace 111
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal 112
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP 114
Using TFTP client software 114
Using TFTP command on Windows NT 116
Using TFTP command on UNIX 116
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files 117
CI Command Reference 119
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
5
FAQ
ZyNOS FAQ
1 What is ZyNOS
ZyNOS is ZyXELs proprietary Network Operating System It is the platform on
all Prestige routers that delivers network services and applications It is
designed in a modular fashion so it is easy for developers to add new features
New ZyNOS software upgrades can be easily downloaded from our FTP sites
as they become available
2 Whatrsquos Multilingual Embedded Web Configurator
Multilinggual Embedded Web Configurator means that it can display with 3
kinds of languanges English French and German By factory default it
displays with English and you can change it in Web GUI
3 How do I access the P-660HW-Dx v2 Command Line Interface (CLI)
The Command Line Interface is for the Administrator use only and it could be
accessed via telnet session
Note It is protected by super password lsquo1234rsquo by factory default
4 How do I update the firmware and configuration file
You can do this if you access the P-660HW-Dx v2 as Administrator You can
upload the firmware and configuration file to Prestige from Web Condigurator
or using FTP or TFTP client software You CAN NOT upload the firmware and
configuration file via Telnet because the Telnet connection will be dropped
during uploading the firmware Please do not power off the router right after the
FTP or TFTP uploading is finished the router will upload the firmware to its
flash at this moment
Note There may be firmware that could not be upgraded from Web
Configurator In this case ZyXEL will prepare special Upload Software
for you Please read the firmware release note carefully when you want to
upload a new fireware
5 How do I upgradebackup the ZyNOS firmware by using TFTP client
program via LAN
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to transfer the firmware to P-660HW-Dx v2
using TFTP program via LAN The procedure for uploading ZyNOS via TFTP
is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
6
a Use the TELNET client program in your PC to login to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
b Enter CI command sys stdio 0 to disable Stdio idle timeout
c To upgrade firmware use TFTP client program to put firmware in file
ras in the Prestige After data transfer is finished the P-660HW-Dx v2
will program the upgraded firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
d To backup your firmware use the TFTP client program to get file ras
from the Prestige
6 How do I restore P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations by using TFTP client
program via LAN
a Use the TELNET client program in your PC to login to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
b Enter CI command sys stdio 0 disable Stdio idle timeout
c To backup the P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations use TFTP client
program to get file rom-0 from the P-660HW-Dx v2
d To restore the P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations use the TFTP client
program to put your configuration in file rom-0 in the P-660HW-Dx v2
7 What should I do if I forget the system password
In case you forget the system password you can erase the current
configuration and restore factory defaults this way
Use the RESET button on the rear panel of P-660HW-Dx v2 to reset the
router After the router is reset the LAN IP address will be reset to
19216811 the common user password will be reset to user the
Administrator password will be reset to bdquo1234rsquo
8 How to use the Reset button
a Turn your P-660HW-Dx v2 on Make sure the Power LED is on (not
blinking)
b Press the RESET button for longer than one second and shorter than
five seconds and release it If the Power LED begins to blink the
P-660HW-Dx v2‟s wireless auto security function-OTIST has been
enabled
c Press the RESET button for six seconds and then release it If the
Power LED begins to blink the default configuration has been restored
and the P-660HW-Dx v2 restarts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
7
9 What is SUA When should I use SUA
SUA (Single User Account) is a unique feature supported by Prestige router
which allows multiple people to access Internet concurrently for the cost of a
single user account
When Prestige acting as SUA receives a packet from a local client destined for
the outside Internet it replaces the source address in the IP packet header
with its own address and the source port in the TCP or UDP header with
another value chosen out of a local pool It then recomputes the appropriate
header checksums and forwards the packet to the Internet as if it is originated
from Prestige using the IP address assigned by ISP When reply packets from
the external Internet are received by Prestige the original IP source address
and TCPUDP source port numbers are written into the destination fields of the
packet (since it is now moving in the opposite direction) the checksums are
recomputed and the packet is delivered to its true destination This is because
SUA keeps a table of the IP addresses and port numbers of the local systems
currently using it
10 What is the difference between SUA and Full Feature NAT
When you edit a remote node in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt Remote Node -gt Edit there will be three options for you
None
SUA Only
Full Feature
SUA (Single User Account) in previous ZyNOS versions is a NAT set with 2
rules Many-to-One and Server With SUA visible servers had to be mapped
to different ports since the servers share only one global IP
The P-660HW-Dx v2 now has Full Feature NAT which supports five types of
IPPort mapping One to One Many to One Many to Many Overload Many to
Many No Overload and Server You can make special application when you
select Full Feature NAT For example With multiple global IP addresses
multiple severs using the same port (eg FTP servers using port 2120) are
allowed on the LAN for outside access
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports NAT sets on a remote node basis They are
reusable but only one set is allowed for each remote node The P-660HW-Dx
v2 supports 8 sets since there are 8 remote nodes
By fatory default the NAT is select as SUA in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt General -gt NAT Setup
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
8
11 Is it possible to access a server running behind SUA from the outside
Internet How can I do it
Yes it is possible because P-660HW-Dx v2 delivers the packet to the local
server by looking up to a SUA server table Therefore to make a local server
accessible to the outside users the port number and the inside IP address of
the server must be configured (You can configure it in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding)
12 When do I need select Full Feature NAT
Make multiple local servers on the LAN accessible from outside with
multiple global IP addresses
With SUA visible servers had to be mapped to different ports since the
servers share only one global IP But when you select Full Feature you can
make multiple local servers (mapping the same port or not) on the LAN
accessible from outside with multiple global IP addresses
Support Non-NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some MIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address Thus users on the same
network can not login to the same server simultaneously In this case it is
better to use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types
thus each user login to the server using a unique global IP address
13 What IPPort mapping does Multi-NAT support
Multi-NAT supports five types of IPport mapping One to One Many to One
Many to Many Overload Many to Many No Overload and Server The details
of the mapping between ILA and IGA are described as below Here we define
the local IP addresses as the Internal Local Addresses (ILA) and the global IP
addresses as the Inside Global Address (IGA)
One to One In One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps one ILA
to one IGA
Many to One In Many-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps
multiple ILA to one IGA This is equivalent to SUA (ie PAT port
address translation) ZyXELs Single User Account feature that previous
ZyNOS routers supported (the SUA is optional in todays Prestige
routers)
Many to Many Overload In Many-to-Many Overload mode the
P-660HW-Dx v2 maps the multiple ILA to shared IGA
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
9
Many One-to-One In Many One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2
maps each ILA to unique IGA
Server In Server mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps multiple inside
servers to one global IP address This allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types behind the NAT for outside access Note if
you want to map each server to one unique IGA please use the
One-to-One mode
The following table summarizes the five types
NAT Type IP Mapping
One-to-One ILA1lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-One
(SUAPAT)
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-Many
Overload
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA1
ILA4lt---gtIGA2
Many
One-to-One
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA3
ILA4lt---gtIGA4
Server Server 1 IPlt---gtIGA1
Server 2 IPlt---gtIGA1
14 How many network users can the SUANAT support
The Prestige does not limit the number of the users but the number of the
sessions The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports 2048 sessions that you can use the
ip nat session command in CLI to see You can also use bdquoip nat hashTable
wanif0‟ to view the current active NAT sessions
15 What are Device filters and Protocol filters
In ZyNOS the filters have been separated into two groups One group is
called device filter group and the other is called protocol filter
group Generic filters belong to the device filter group TCPIP and IPX filters
belong to the protocol filter group You can configure the filter rule in CLI
Note In ZyNOS you can not mix different filter groups in the same filter set
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
10
16 How can I protect against IP spoofing attacks
The P-660HW-Dx v2s filter sets provide a means to protect against IP
spoofing attacks The basic scheme is as follows
For the input data filter
Deny packets from the outside that claim to be from the inside
Allow everything that is not spoofing us
Filter rule setup
Filter type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Source IP Addr =abcd
Source IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action Not Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
For the output data filters
Deny bounce back packet
Allow packets that originate from us
Filter rule setup
Filter Type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Destination IP Addr =abcd
Destination IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action No Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
11
Product FAQ
1 How can I manage P-660HW-Dx v2
Multilingual Embedded Web GUI for Local and Remote management
CLI (Command-line interface)
Telnet support (Administrator Password Protected ) for remote
configuration change and status monitoring
FTP TFTP sever firmware upgrade and configuration backup and
restore are supported(Administrator Password Protected)
2 What is the default password for Web Configurator
There are two different accounts for P-660HW-Dx v2 Web Configurator
Common User Account and Administrator Account
By factory default the password for the two accounts are
Common User Account user
Administrator Account 1234
You can change the password after you logging in the Web Configurator
Please record your new password whenever you change it The system
will lock you out if you have forgotten your password
3 Whatrsquos the difference between lsquoCommon User Accountrsquo and
lsquoAdministrator Accountrsquo
For Common User Account it can only access the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 and check the current system status
For Administrator Account besides accessing the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 it can also access Winzard setup Advanced setup of
P-660HW-Dx v2
Moreover only with Administrator Password you could manage the
P-660HW-Dx v2 via FTPTFTP or Telnet
4 How do I know the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address assigned by the
ISP
You can view My WAN IP ltfrom ISPgt xxxx shown in Web Configurator
bdquoStatus-gtDevice Information -gtWAN Information‟ to check this IP address
5 What is the micro filter or splitter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
12
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
6 The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Bridge and Router mode whats the
difference between them
When the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet which means
only the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use bridge mode which works as an ADSL modem to
connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account and limit
only one computer to access the Internet
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to add another Internet sharing device
like a router In this case we use the router mode which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
7 How do I know I am using PPPoE
PPPoE requires a user account to login to the providers server If you need to
configure a user name and password on your computer to connect to the ISP
you are probably using PPPoE If you are simply connected to the Internet
when you turn on your computer you probably are not You can also check
your ISP or the information sheet given by the ISP Please choose PPPoE as
the encapsulation type in the P-660HW-Dx v2 if the ISP uses PPPoE
8 Why does my provider use PPPoE
PPPoE emulates a familiar Dial-Up connection It allows your ISP to provide
services using their existing network configuration over the broadband
connections Besides PPPoE supports a broad range of existing applications
and service including authentication accounting secure access and
configuration management
9 What is DDNS
The Dynamic DNS service allows you to alias a dynamic IP address to a static
hostname allowing your computer to be more easily accessed from various
locations on the Internet To use the service you must first apply an account
from several free Web servers such as httpwwwdyndnsorg
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to reach our internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
13
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
updates this IP to DDNS server so that the server can update its IP-to-DNS
entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is updated the DNS
name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still usable
10 When do I need DDNS service
When you want your internal server to be accessed by using DNS name rather
than using the dynamic IP address we can use the DDNS service The DDNS
server allows to alias a dynamic IP address to a static hostname Whenever
the ISP assigns you a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2 sends this IP to the DDNS
server for its updates
11 What is DDNS wildcard Does the P-660HW-Dx v2 support DDNS
wildcard
Some DDNS servers support the wildcard feature which allows the hostname
yourhostdyndnsorg to be aliased to the same IP address as
yourhostdyndnsorg This feature is useful when there are multiple servers
inside and you want users to be able to use things such as
wwwyourhostdyndnsorg and still reach your hostname
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports DDNS wildcard that httpwwwdyndnsorg
supports When using wildcard you simply enter yourhostdyndnsorg in the
Host field in Menu 11 Configure Dynamic DNS
12 Can the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA handle IPSec packets sent by the
IPSec gateway
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA can handle IPSec ESP Tunneling mode We
know when packets go through SUA SUA will change the source IP address
and source port for the host To pass IPSec packets SUA must understand
the ESP packet with protocol number 50 replace the source IP address of the
IPSec gateway to the routers WAN IP address However SUA should not
change the source port of the UDP packets which are used for key
managements Because the remote gateway checks this source port during
connections the port thus is not allowed to be changed
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
14
13 How do I setup my P-660HW-Dx v2 for routing IPSec packets over
SUA
For outgoing IPSec tunnels no extra setting is required
For forwarding the inbound IPSec ESP tunnel A Default server set is required
You could configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding -gt Default Server Setup
It is because SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users So to make an internal server
for outside access we must specify the service port and the LAN IP of this
server in Web configurator Thus SUA is able to forward the incoming packets
to the requested service behind SUA and the outside users access the server
using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address So we have to configure the
internal IPsec client as a default server (unspecified service port) when it acts
a server gateway
14 What is Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping allocates the bandwidth to WAN dynamically and aims at
boosting the efficiency of the bandwidth If there are serveral VCs in the
P-660HW-Dx v2 but only one VC activated at one time the P-660HW-Dx v2
allocates all the Bandwidth to the VC and the VC gets full bandwidth If another
VCs are activated later the bandwidth is yield to other VCs after ward
15 Why do we perform traffic shaping in the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 must manage traffic fairly and provide bandwidth
allocation for different sorts of applications such as voice video and data All
applications have their own natural bit rate Large data transactions have a
fluctuating natural bit rate The P-660HW-Dx v2 is able to support variable
traffic among different virtual connections Certain traffic may be discarded if
the virtual connection experiences congestion Traffic shaping defines a set of
actions taken by the P-660HW-Dx v2 to avoid congestion traffic shaping takes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
15
measures to adapt to unpredictable fluctuations in traffic flows and other
problems among virtual connections
16 What do the parameters (PCR SCR MBS) mean
Traffic shaping parameters (PCR SCR MBS) can be set in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt ATM Setup
Peak Cell Rate(PCR) The maximum bandwidth allocated to this connection
The VC connection throughput is limited by PCR
Sustainable Cell Rate(SCR) The least guaranteed bandwidth of a VC
When there are multi-VCs on the same line the VC throughput is guaranteed
by SCR
Maximum Burst Size(MBS) The amount of cells transmitted through this
VC at the Peak Cell Rate before yielding to other VCs Total bandwidth of the
line is dedicated to single VC if there is only one VC on the line However as
the other VC asking the bandwidth the MBS defines the maximum number of
cells transmitted via this VC with Peak Cell rate before yielding to other VCs
The P-660HW-Dx v2 holds the parameters for shaping the traffic among its
virtual channels If you do not need traffic shaping please set SCR = 0 MBS =
0 and PCR as the maximum value according to the line rate (for example 23
Mbps line rate will result PCR as 5424 cellsec)
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
Constant bit rate(CBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that requires
the user to determine a fixed bandwidth requirement at the time the connection
is set up so that the data can be sent in a steady stream CBR service is often
used when transmitting fixed-rate uncompressed video
Unspecified bit rate(UBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that does
not guarantee any throughput levels and uses only available bandwidth UBR
is often used when transmitting data that can tolerate delays such as e-mail
Variable bit rate(VBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that allows
users to specify a throughput capacity (ie a peak rate) and a sustained rate
but data is not sent evenly You can select VBR for bursty traffic and
bandwidth sharing with other applications It contains two subclasses
Variable bit rate nonreal time (VBR-nRT)
Variable bit rate real time (VBR-RT)
18 What is content filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
16
Internet Content filter allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies
tailored to your needs Content filter gives you the ability to block web sites that
contain key words (that you specify) in the URL You can set a schedule for
when the P-660HW-Dx v2 performs content filtering You can also specify
trusted IP Addresses on LAN for which the P-660HW-Dx v2 will not perform
content filtering You can configure the details about it in Web Configurator
Advanced setup Security -gt Content Filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
17
ADSL FAQ
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems
ADSL provides a dedicated service over a single telephone line cable
modems offer a dedicated service over a shared media While cable modems
have greater downstream bandwidth capabilities (up to 30 Mbps) that
bandwidth is shared among all users on a line and will therefore vary perhaps
dramatically as more users in a neighborhood get online at the same time
Cable modem upstream traffic will in many cases be slower than ADSL either
because the particular cable modem is inherently slower or because of rate
reductions caused by contention for upstream bandwidth slots The big
difference between ADSL and cable modems however is the number of lines
available to each There are no more than 12 million homes passed today that
can support two-way cable modem transmissions and while the figure also
grows steadily it will not catch up with telephone lines for many years
Additionally many of the older cable networks are not capable of offering a
return channel consequently such networks will need significant upgrading
before they can offer high bandwidth services
2 What is the expected throughput
In our test we can get about 16Mbps data rate on 15Kft using the 26AWG
loop The shorter the loop the better the throughput is
3 What is the microfilter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up
You can see the DSL LED Green on the P-660HW-Dx v2s front panel is on
when the ADSL physical layer is up
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL
Depending on the line quality the P-660HW-Dx v2 uses Fall Back and Fall
Forward to automatically adjust the date rate
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
18
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing
Though the LLC-based multiplexing can carry multiple protocols over a single
VC it requires extra header information to identify the protocol being carried
on the virtual circuit (VC) The VC-based multiplexing needs a separate VC for
carrying each protocol but it does not need the extra headers Therefore the
VC-based multiplexing is more efficient
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics
You can use the following CI commands to check the ADSL line
statistics
CIgt wan adsl perfdata
CIgt wan adsl status
CIgt wan adsl linedata far
CIgt wan adsl linedata near
You can also do it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Diagnostic -gt DSL Line -gt DSL Status
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector
The signaling pins on the P-660HW-Dx v2s ADSL connector are pin 3 and pin
4 The middle two pins for a RJ11 cable
9 What is triple play
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
19
More and more TelcoISPs are providing three kinds of services (VoIP Video
and Internet) over one existing ADSL connection
The different services (such as video VoIP and Internet access) require
different Qulity of Service
The high priority is Voice (VoIP) data
The Medium priority is Video (IPTV) data
The low priority is internet access such as ftp etc hellip
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus you can configure each PVC separately to assign different
QoS to different application
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
20
Firewall FAQ
General
1 What is a network firewall
A firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control
policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to
protect a trusted network from an untrusted network The firewall can be
thought of two mechanisms One to block the traffic and the other to permit
traffic
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure
The P-660HW-Dx v2 is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks such as Ping of Death SYN Flood LAND
attack IP Spoofing etc It also uses stateful packet inspection to determine if
an inbound connection is allowed through the firewall to the private LAN The
P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Network Address Translation (NAT) which
translates the private local addresses to one or multiple public addresses This
adds a level of security since the clients on the private LAN are invisible to the
Internet
3 What are the basic types of firewalls
Conceptually there are three types of firewalls
1 Packet Filtering Firewall
2 Application-level Firewall
3 Stateful Inspection Firewall
Packet Filtering Firewalls generally make their decisions based on the header
information in individual packets These headers information include the
source destination addresses and ports of the packets
Application-level Firewalls generally are hosts running proxy servers which
permit no traffic directly between networks and which perform logging and
auditing of traffic passing through them A proxy server is an application
gateway or circuit-level gateway that runs on top of general operating system
such as UNIX or Windows NT It hides valuable data by requiring users to
communicate with secure systems by mean of a proxy A key drawback of this
device is performance
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
21
Stateful Inspection Firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against
defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP
address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the
integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols The flexible
nature of Stateful Inspection firewalls generally provides the best speed and
transparency however they may lack the granular application level access
control or caching that some proxies support
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2
1 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall inspects packets contents and IP
headers It is applicable to all protocols that understands data in the
packet is intended for other layers from network layer up to the
application layer
2 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall performs stateful inspection It takes into
account the state of connections it handles so that for example a
legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request
for that packet and allowed in Conversely an incoming packet
masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be
blocked
3 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall uses session filtering ie smart rules
that enhance the filtering process and control the network session
rather than control individual packets in a session
4 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall is fast It uses a hashing function to
search the matched session cache instead of going through every
individual rule for a packet
5 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall provides email service to notify you for
routine reports and when alerts occur
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet filtering and
NAT built-in
With the spectacular growth of the Internet and online access companies that
do business on the Internet face greater security threats Although packet filter
and NAT restrict access to particular computers and networks however for
the other companies this security may be insufficient because packets filters
typically cannot maintain session state Thus for greater security a firewall is
considered
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a
connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable
a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
22
There are four types of DoS attacks
1 Those that exploits bugs in a TCPIP implementation such as Ping of
Death and Teardrop
2 Those that exploits weaknesses in the TCPIP specification such as
SYN Flood and LAND Attacks
3 Brute-force attacks that flood a network with useless data such as
Smurf attack
4 IP Spoofing
7 What is Ping of Death attack
Ping of Death uses a PING utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the
maximum 65535 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification The oversize
packet is then sent to an unsuspecting system Systems may crash hang or
reboot
8 What is Teardrop attack
Teardrop attack exploits weakness in the reassemble of the IP packet
fragments As data is transmitted through a network IP packets are often
broken up into smaller chunks Each fragment looks like the original packet
except that it contains an offset field The Teardrop program creates a series of
IP fragments with overlapping offset fields When these fragments are
reassembled at the destination some systems will crash hang or reboot
9 What is SYN Flood attack
SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each
packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response While the
targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK it queues up all
outstanding SYN-ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue
SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when
an internal timer (which is set a relatively long intervals) terminates the TCP
three-way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all
incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users
10 What is LAND attack
In a LAN attack hackers flood SYN packets to the network with a spoofed
source IP address of the targeted system This makes it appear as if the host
computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the
target system tries to respond to itself
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
23
11 What is Brute-force attack
A Brute-force attack such as Smurf attack targets a feature in the IP
specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting to quickly flood the
target network with useless data A Smurf hacker flood a destination IP
address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network the router will
broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network If there
are numerous hosts this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request
packet the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the intermediary
network but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address
known as the victim network This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all
available bandwidth making communications impossible
12 What is IP Spoofing attack
Many DoS attacks also use IP Spoofing as part of their attack IP Spoofing
may be used to break into systems to hide the hackers identity or to magnify
the effect of the DoS attack IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain
unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking
that the communications are coming from within the trusted network To
engage in IP Spoofing a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it
appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed
through the router or firewall
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
There are two default ACLs pre-configured in the P-660HW-Dx v2 one allows
all connections from LAN to WAN and the other blocks all connections from
WAN to LAN except of the DHCP packets
Configuration
1 How do I configure the firewall
You can use the Web Configurator to configure the firewall for P-660HW-Dx v2
By factory default if you connect your PC to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 you can access Web Configurator via bdquohttp19216811‟
Note Donrsquot forget to type in the Administrator Password
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall
There are several ways to protect others from touching the settings of your
firewall
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
24
1 Change the default Administrator password since it is required when
setting up the firewall
2 Limit who can access to your P-660HW-Dx v2‟s Web Configurator or
CLI You can enter the IP address of the secured LAN host in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt
[Service] -gtSecured Client IP to allow special access to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
The default value in this field is 0000 which means you do not care which
host is trying to telnet your P-660HW-Dx v2 or accessthe Web
Configurator of
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN
There are four reasons that WWWTelnet from WAN is blocked
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable Telnet from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow WWWTelnet connection
from WAN The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
WWW (For accessing Web Configurator)
Source IP= Remote trusted host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP80
Action=Forward
TELNET (For accessing Command Line Interface)
Source IP= Telnet Client host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP23
Action=Forward
(2)You have disabled WWWTelnet service in Web Configurator Advanced
setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
25
(3) WWWTelnet service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host
entered in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote
MGNT
(4)A filter set which blocks WWWTelnet from WAN is applied to WAN node
You can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using FTP over
WAN
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable FTP from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow FTP connection from WAN
The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
Source IP= FTP host
Destination IP= P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP
Service= FTP TCP21 TCP20
Action=Forward
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
26
(2) You have disabled FTP service in Web Configurator Advanced setup
Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(3) FTP service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host entered
in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(4) A filter set which blocks FTP from WAN is applied to WAN node You
can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
Log and Alert
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the firewall log immediately when the packet
matches a firewall rule The log for Default Firewall Policy (LAN to WAN WAN
to LAN WAN to WAN) is generated automatically with factory default setting
but you can change it in Web Configurator
2 What does the log show to us
The log supports up to 128 entries There are 5 columns for each entry Please
see the example shown below
3 How do I view the firewall log
All logs generated in P-660HW-Dx v2 including firewall logs IPSec logs
system logs are migrated to centralized logs So you can view firewall logs in
Centralized logs Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs
-gtView Log
The log keeps 128 entries the new entries will overwrite the old entries when
the log has over 128 entries
Before you can view firewall logs there are two steps you need to do
(1) Enable log function in Centralized logs setup via either one of the following
methods
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
27
Web configuration Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log
Settings check Access Control and Attacks options depending on
your real situation
CI command sys logs category [access | attack]
(2) Enable log function in firewall default policy or in firewall rules
After the above two steps you can view firewall logs via
Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gtView
Log
View the log by CI command sys logs disp
You can also view Centralized logs via mail or syslog please configure mail
server or Unix Syslog server in Web configuration Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the alert when an attack is detected by the
firewall and sends it via Email So to send the alert you must configure the
mail server and Email address using Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings You can also specify how frequently
you want to receive the alert in it
5 What is the difference between the log and alert
A log entry is just added to the log inside the P-660HW-Dx v2 and e-mailed
together with all other log entries at the scheduled time as configured An alert
is e-mailed immediately after an attacked is detected
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
28
Wireless FAQ
General FAQ
1 What is a Wireless LAN
Wireless LANs provide all the functionality of wired LANs without the need for
physical connections (wires) Data is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier
and transmitted through the ether Typical bit-rates are 11Mbps and 54Mbps
although in practice data throughput is half of this Wireless LANs can be
formed simply by equipping PCs with wireless NICs If connectivity to a wired
LAN is required an Access Point (AP) is used as a bridging device APs are
typically located close to the centre of the wireless client population
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN
Mobility Wireless LAN systems can provide LAN users with access to
real-time information anywhere in their organization This mobility supports
productivity and service opportunities not possible with wired networks
Installation Speed and Simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be
fast and easy and can eliminate the need to pull cable through walls and
ceilings
Installation Flexibility Wireless technology allows the network to go where
wire cannot go
Reduced Cost-of-Ownership While the initial investment required for
wireless LAN hardware can be higher than the cost of wired LAN hardware
overall installation expenses and life-cycle costs can be significantly lower
Long-term cost benefits are greatest in dynamic environments requiring
frequent moves and changes
Scalability Wireless LAN systems can be configured in a variety of topologies
to meet the needs of specific applications and installations Configurations are
easily changed and range from peer-to-peer networks suitable for a small
number of users to full infrastructure networks of thousands of users that
enable roaming over a broad area
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN
The speed of Wireless LAN is still relatively slower than wired LAN The setup
cost of Wireless LAN is relative high because the equipment cost including
access point and PCMCIA Wireless LAN card is higher than hubs and CAT 5
cables
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
29
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks
Airports hotels and even coffee shops like Starbucks are deploying 80211
networks so people can wirelessly surf the Internet with their laptops
5 What is an Access Point
The AP (access point also known as a base station) is the wireless server that
with an antenna and a wired Ethernet connection that broadcasts information
using radio signals AP typically acts as a bridge for the clients It can pass
information to wireless LAN cards that have been installed in computers or
laptops allowing those computers to connect to the campus network and the
Internet without wires
6 Whatrsquos the difference between IEEE80211abg
The IEEE 80211 is a wireless LAN industry standard and the objective of
IEEE 80211 is to make sure that different manufactures wireless LAN devices
can communicate to each other Below is a brief comparison for the
IEEE80211 abg
Publish
Time
Frequency
Band(GHZ)
Data Rate(Mbps) Compatibility
IEEE80211a 1999 UNII Band
515~5825
691218243648
54
Only work with
80211a
devices
IEEE80211b 1999 ISM Band
24~24835
125511 -
IEEE80211g 2001 ISM Band
24~24835
691218243648
54
Backward
compatible with
80211b
devices
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
Yes As long as the products comply to the same IEEE 80211 standard The
Wi-Fi logo is used to define 80211b compatible products Wi-Fi5 is a
compatibility standard for 80211a products running in the 5GHz band
8 What is Wi-Fi
The Wi-Fi logo signifies that a product is interoperable with wireless
networking equipment from other vendors A Wi-Fi logo product has been
tested and certified by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA)
The Socket Wireless LAN Card is Wi-Fi certified and that means that it will
work (interoperate) with any brand of Access Point that is also Wi-Fi certified
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band
Various spread spectrum radio communication applications use the 24 GHz
band This includes WLAN systems (not necessarily of the type IEEE
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
30
80211b) cordless phones wireless medical telemetry equipment and
Bluetoothtrade short-range wireless applications which include connecting
printers to computers and connecting modems or hands-free kits to mobile
phones
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device
Any time devices are operated in the same frequency band there is the
potential for interference
Both the 80211bg and Bluetooth devices occupy the same24-to-2483-GHz
unlicensed frequency range-the same band But a Bluetooth device would not
interfere with other 80211 devices much more than another 80211 device
would interefere While more collisions are possible with the introduction of a
Bluetooth device they are also possible with the introduction of another 80211
device or a new 24 GHz cordless phone for that matter But BlueTooth
devices are usually low-power so the effects that a Bluetooth device may have
on an 80211 network if any arent far-reaching
11 Can radio signals pass through wall
Transmitting through a wall is possible depending upon the material used in its
construction In general metals and substances with a high water content do
not allow radio waves to pass through Metals reflect radio waves and concrete
attenuates radio waves The amount of attenuation suffered in passing through
concrete will be a function of its thickness and amount of metal re-enforcement
used
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference among WLAN
products
Factors of interference
(1) Obstacles walls ceilings furniturehellip etc
(2) Building Materials metal door aluminum studs
(3) Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors
Solution
(1) Minimizing the number of walls and ceilings
(2) Antenna is positioned for best reception
(3) Keep WLAN products away from electrical devices eg microwaves
monitors electric motorshellip etc
(4) Add additional APs if necessary
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN
WLANs are generally privately owned wireless systems that are deployed in a
corporation warehouse hospital or educational campus setting Data rates
are high and there are no per-packet charges for data transmission
WWANs are generally publicly shared data networks designed to provide
coverage in metropolitan areas and along traffic corridors WWANs are owned
by a service provider or carrier Data rates are low and charges are based on
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
31
usage Specialized applications are characteristically designed around short
burst messaging
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage any
hardware
Yes it will not harm the hardware but the module will not be detected and
work after inserting to the slot You need to reboot the router to initialize the
module
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
The wireless security modes supported on P-660HW-Dx v2 are Static
WEP WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK and WPA2
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
It supports IEEE 80211bgg+ standard
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering
Yes it supports up to 32 MAC Address filtering
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption
Yes it means that the AP on P-660HW-Dx v2 will automatically decelerate
when devices move beyond the optimal range or other interference is present
If the device moves back within the range of a higher-speed transmission the
connection will automatically speed up again Rate shifting is a physical-layer
mechanism transparent to the user and the upper layers of the protocol stack
Advanced FAQ
1 What is Ad Hoc mode
A wireless network consists of a number of stations without using an access
point or any connection to a wired network
2 What is Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure mode implies connectivity to a wired communications
infrastructure If such connectivity is required the Access Points must be used
to connect to the wired LAN backbone Wireless clients have their
configurations set for infrastructure mode in order to utilise access points
relaying
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area
This depends on the surrounding terrain the diameter of the client population
and the number of clients If an area is large with dispersed pockets of
populations then extension points can be used for extend coverage
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
32
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (DSSS)
DSSS spreads its signal continuously over a wide frequency band DSSS
maps the information bearing bit-pattern at the sending station into a higher
data rate bit sequence using a chipping code The chipping code (also known
as processing gain) introduces redundancy which allows data recovery if
certain bit errors occur during transmission The FCC rules the minimum
processing gain should be 10 typical systems use processing gains of 20
IEEE 80211b specifies the use of DSSS
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (FHSS)
FHSS uses a narrowband carrier which hops through a predefined sequence
of several frequencies at a specific rate This avoids problems with fixed
channel narrowband noise and simple jamming Both transmitter and receiver
must have their hopping sequences synchronized to create the effect of a
single logical channel To an unsynchronised receiver an FHSS transmission
appears to be short-duration impulse noise 80211 may use FHSS or DSSS
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
No Provided the antenna is optimally designed for 24GHz or 5GHz operation
WLAN NICs often include an internal antenna which may provide sufficient
reception
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range
This frequency range has been set aside by the FCC and is generally labeled
the ISM band A few years ago Apple and several other large corporations
requested that the FCC allow the development of wireless networks within this
frequency range What we have today is a protocol and system that allows for
unlicensed use of radios within a prescribed power level The ISM band is
populated by Industrial Scientific and Medical devices that are all low power
devices but can interfere with each other
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID)
SSID is a configurable identification that allows clients to communicate to the
appropriate base station With proper configuration only clients that are
configured with the same SSID can communicate with base stations having
the same SSID SSID from a security point of view acts as a simple single
shared password between base stations and clients
9 What is an ESSID
ESSID stands for Extended Service Set Identifier and identifies the wireless
LAN The ESSID of the mobile device must match the ESSID of the AP to
communicate with the AP The ESSID is a 32-character maximum string and is
case-sensitive
Security FAQ
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Points
radio link
To secure the date across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Point‟s radio link we
could select any one of the security mode Static 64128256 bit WEP
WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK WPA2
2 What is WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security mechanism defined within the
80211 standard and designed to make the security of the wireless medium
equal to that of a cable (wire) WEP data encryption was designed to prevent
access to the network by intruders and to prevent the capture of wireless
LAN traffic through eavesdropping WEP allows the administrator to define a
set of respective Keys for each wireless network user based on a Key
String passed through the WEP encryption algorithm Access is denied by
anyone who does not have an assigned key Note WEP has shown to have
fundamental flaws in its key generation processing
3 What is WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN You can refer to
the User Guide for more information about it
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP
40 bit WEP and 64 bit WEP are the same encryption level and can interoperate
The lower level of WEP encryption uses a 40 bit (10 Hex character) as secret
key (set by user) and a 24 bit Initialization Vector (not under user control)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
34
(40+24=64) Some vendors refer to this level of WEP as 40 bit others as 64
bit
5 What is a WEP key
A WEP key is a user defined string of characters used to encrypt and decrypt
data
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP
No 128-bit WEP will not communicate with 64-bit WEP Although 128 bit WEP
also uses a 24 bit Initialization Vector but it uses a 104 bit as secret key Users
need to use the same encryption level in order to make a connection
7 Can the SSID be encrypted
No WEP only encrypts the data packets not the 80211 management
packetsThe SSID is in the beacon and probe management messages and
SSID goes over the air in clear text This makes obtaining the SSID easy by
sniffing 80211 wireless traffic
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff the SSID
Many APs by default have broadcasting the SSID turned on Sniffers typically
will find the SSID in the broadcast beacon packets Turning off the broadcast of
SSID in the beacon message (a common practice) does not prevent getting
the SSID since the SSID is sent in the clear in the probe message when a
client associates to an AP a sniffer just has to wait for a valid user to associate
to the network to see the SSID
9 What are Insertion Attacks
The insertion attacks are based on placing unauthorized devices on the
wireless network without going through a security process and review
10 What is Wireless Sniffer
An attacker can sniff and capture legitimate traffic Many of the sniffer tools for
Ethernet are based on capturing the first part of the connection session where
the data would typically include the username and password An intruder can
masquerade as that user by using this captured information An intruder who
monitors the wireless network can apply this same attack principle on the
wireless
11 What is OTIST How do I use it
OTIST is acronym for ZyXEL‟s bdquoOne Touch Intelligent Security Technology‟
It enables P-660HW-Dx v2 and ZyXEL‟s OTIST supported Wireless adapters
to establish connections of the WPA-PSK security mode automatically with
just one touch at the reset button on rear panel
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
35
To use this function on P-660HW-Dx v2 you could press the reset button on
P-660HW-Dx v2 for 1~5 seconds the OTIST is actived The P-660HW-Dx v2
will enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA-PSK automatically if no
WLAN security has been set The default setup key for OTIST is bdquo01234567‟
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
36
Application Notes
General Application Notes
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode
Setup your workstation
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
If the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet that means only
the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as an ADSL bridge
modem to connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account
and limit only one computer to access the Internet
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
To connect your computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN port the computer
must have an Ethernet adapter card installed For connecting a single
computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2 we use a Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
In most cases the IP address of the computer is assigned by the ISP
dynamically so you have to configure the computer as a DHCP client which
obtains the IP from the ISP using DHCP protocol The ISP may also provide
the gateway DNS via DHCP if they are available Otherwise please enter the
static IP addresses for all that the ISP gives to you in the network TCPIP
settings For Windows we check the option Obtain an IP address
automatically in its TCPIP setup please see the example shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
37
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
bridge mode We will use Web Configurator to guide you through the related
menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as bridge mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
(2)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
38
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For example
LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
(2) Turn off DHCP Server and configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 in
Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN We use 19216811 as
the LAN IP for P-660HW-Dx v2 in this case
Step 1 Disactive DHCP Server and apply it
Step 2 Assign an IP to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx v2 eg
19216811
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to install an Internet sharing device like
a router In this case we use the P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
Connect the LAN ports of all computers to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 using Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
Since the P-660HW-Dx v2 is set to DHCP server as default so you need only
to configure the workstations as the DHCP clients in the networking settings In
this case the IP address of the computer is assigned by the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 can also provide the DNS to the clients via DHCP if it is
available For this setup in Windows we check the option Obtain an IP
address automatically in its TCPIP setup Please see the example shown
below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
39
Set up your P-660HW-Dx v2 under routing mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
Routing mode for routing traffic We will use Web Configurator to guide you
through the related menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as routing mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For
example LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
IP Address
Assignment
Set to Dynamic if the ISP provides the IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2
dynamically Otherwise set to Static and enter the IP in the IP
Address field
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
40
(2) Configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 and the DHCP settings in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
What is DHCP Relay
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In addition to the
DHCP server feature the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports the DHCP relay function
When it is configured as DHCP server it assigns the IP addresses to the LAN
clients When it is configured as DHCP relay it is responsible for forwarding
the requests and responses negotiating between the DHCP clients and the
server See figure 1
Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
We could set the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay by the following command
in CLI
Ip dhcp enif0 mode relay
Ip dhcp enif0 relay server [Server IP Address]
4 SUA Notes
Tested SUANAT Applications (eg Cu-SeeMe ICQ NetMeeting)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
41
Introduction
Generally SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users However some applications
such as Cu-SeeMe and ICQ will need to connect to the local user behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 In such case a SUA server must be configured to forward
the incoming packets to the true destination behind SUA After the required
server are configured in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding the internal server or client applications can be accessed
by using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP Address
SUA Supporting Table
The following are the required Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding for the various applications running SUA mode
ZyXEL SUA Supporting Table1
Application
Required Settings in Port Forwarding
PortIP
Outgoing Connection Incoming
Connection
HTTP None 80client IP
FTP None 21client IP
TELNET None 23client IP
(and active Telnet
service from WAN)
POP3 None 110client IP
SMTP None 25client IP
mIRC
None for Chat
For DCC please set
DefaultClient IP
Windows PPTP None 1723client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
42
ICQ 99a None for Chat
For DCC please set
ICQ -gt preference -gt
connections -gt firewall
and set the firewall time
out to 80 seconds in
firewall setting
Defaultclient IP
ICQ 2000b None for Chat None for Chat
ICQ Phone 2000b None 6701client IP
Cornell 11 Cu-SeeMe None 7648client IP
White Pine 312 Cu-SeeMe2 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
White Pine 40 Cu-SeeMe 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
Microsoft NetMeeting 21 amp
3013
None 1720client IP
1503client IP
Cisco IPTV 200 None
RealPlayer G2 None
VDOLive None
Quake1064 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeII2305 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeIII105 beta None
StartCraft 6112client IP
Quick Time 40 None
pcAnywhere 80 None
5631client IP
5632client IP
22client IP
IPsec (ESP tunneling mode) None (one client only) DefaultClient
Microsoft Messenger Service
30 6901client IP 6901client IP
Microsoft Messenger Service
46 47 50hellip
(none UPnP)6
None for Chat File
transfer Video and Voice
None for Chat File
transfer Video and
Voice
Net2Phone None 6701client IP
Network Time Protocol (NTP) None 123 server IP
Win2k Terminal Server None 3389server IP
Remote Anything None 3996 - 4000client IP
Virtual Network Computing None 5500client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
43
(VNC) 5800client IP
5900client IP
AIM (AOL Instant Messenger) None for Chat and IM None for Chat and
IM
e-Donkey None 4661 - 4662client IP
POLYCOM Video
Conferencing None Defaultclient IP
iVISTA 41 None 80server IP
Microsoft Xbox Live7 None NA 1 Since SUA enables your LAN to appear as a single computer to the Internet
it is not possible to configure similar servers on the same LAN behind SUA 2 Because White Pine Cu-SeeMe uses dedicate ports (port 7648 amp port 24032)
to transmit and receive data therefore only one local Cu-SeeMe is allowed
within the same LAN 3 In SUA mode only one local NetMeeting user is allowed because the
outsiders can not distinguish between local users using the same internet IP 4 Certain Quake servers do not allow multiple users to login using the same
unique IP so only one Quake user will be allowed in this case Moreover
when a Quake server is configured behind SUA P-660HW-Dx v2 will not be
able to provide information of that server on the internet 5 Quake II has the same limitations as that of Quake I 6 P-660HW-Dx v2 supports MSN Messenger 46 47 50hellip video voice
pass-through NAT In addition for the Windows OS supported UPnP
(Universal Plug and Play) such as Windows XP and Windows ME UPnP
supported in P-660HW-Dx v2 is an alternative solution to pass through MSN
Messenger video voice traffic For more detail please refer to UPnP
application note 7 P-660HW-Dx v2 support Microsoft Xbox Live with factory default
configuration
Configurations
For example if the workstation operating Cu-SeeMe has an IP of 192168134
then the default SUA server must be set to 192168134 The peer Cu-SeeMe
user can reach this workstation by using P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
44
which can be obtained from Web Configurator
Configure an Internal Server behind SUA
Introduction
If you wish you can make internal servers (eg Web ftp or mail server)
accessible for outside users even though SUA makes your LAN appear as a
single machine to the outside world A service is identified by the port number
Also since you need to specify the IP address of a server behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 a server must have a fixed IP address and not be a DHCP
client whose IP address potentially changes each time P-660HW-Dx v2 is
powered on
In addition to the servers for specific services SUA supports a default server
A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for is
forwarded to the default server If the default server is not defined the service
request is simply discarded
Configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
45
To make a server visible to the outside world specify the port number of the
service and the inside address of the server in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The outside users can access
the local server using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address which can be
obtained from Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information
For example
Configuring an internal Web server for outside access (suppose the
Server IP Address is 192168110)
(1) Fill in the service name and server IP Address press button bdquoAdd‟
(2) If add successfully the Web Configurator will display message
bdquoConfiguration updated successfully‟ at the bottom You can see the port
forwarding rule on the same page the default port for Web Server is 80
(3) If you want to change the port for Web Server you could press button
bdquoModify‟ on corresponding rule then modify and apply it
Default port numbers for some services
Service Port Number
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
46
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
Configure a PPTP server behind SUA
Introduction
PPTP is a tunneling protocol defined by the PPTP forum that allows PPP
packets to be encapsulated within Internet Protocol (IP) packets and
forwarded over any IP network including the Internet itself
In order to run the Windows 9x PPTP client you must be able to establish an
IP connection with a tunnel server such as the Windows NT Server 40
Remote Access Server
Windows Dial-Up Networking uses the Internet standard Point-to-Point (PPP)
to provide a secure optimized multiple-protocol network connection over
dial-up telephone lines All data sent over this connection can be encrypted
and compressed and multiple network level protocols (TCPIP NetBEUI and
IPX) can be run correctly Windows NT Domain Login level security is
preserved even across the Internet
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
47
Window98 PPTP Client Internet NT RAS Server Protocol Stack
PPTP appears as new modem type (Virtual Private Networking Adapter) that
can be selected when setting up a connection in the Dial-Up Networking folder
The VPN Adapter type does not appear elsewhere in the system Since PPTP
encapsulates its data stream in the PPP protocol the VPN requires a second
dial-up adapter This second dial-up adapter for VPN is added during the
installation phase of the Upgrade in addition to the first dial-up adapter that
provides PPP support for the analog or ISDN modem
The PPTP is supported in Windows NT and Windows 98 already For
Windows 95 it needs to be upgraded by the Dial-Up Networking 12 upgrade
Configuration
This application note explains how to establish a PPTP connection with a
remote private network in the P-660HW-Dx v2 SUA case In ZyNOS all PPTP
packets can be forwarded to the internal PPTP Server (WinNT server) behind
SUA The port number of the PPTP has to be entered in the Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding on
P-660HW-Dx v2 to forward to the appropriate private IP address of Windows
NT server
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
48
Example
The following example shows how to dial to an ISP via the P-660HW-Dx v2
and then establish a tunnel to a private network There will be three items that
you need to set up for PPTP application these are PPTP server (WinNT)
PPTP client (Win9x) and the P-660HW-Dx v2
(1) PPTP server setup (WinNT)
Add the VPN service from Control Panel -gtNetwork
Add an user account for PPTP logged on user
Enable RAS port
Select the network protocols from RAS such as IPX TCPIP NetBEUI
Set the Internet gateway to P-660HW-Dx v2
(2) PPTP client setup (Win9x)
Add one VPN connection from Dial-Up Networking by entering the
correct username amp password and the IP address of the P-660HW-Dx
v2s Internet IP address for logging to NT RAS server
Set the Internet gateway to the router that is connecting to ISP
(3) P-660HW-Dx v2 setup
Before making a VPN connection from Win9x to WinNT server you
need to connect P-660HW-Dx v2 router to your ISP first
Enter the IP address of the PPTP server (WinNT server) and the
port number for PPTP as shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
49
Select service name as bdquoPPTP‟ fill in the Server IP Address then press button
bdquoAdd‟
When you have finished the above settings you can ping to the remote Win9x
client from WinNT This ping command is used to demonstrate that remote
the Win9x can be reached across the Internet If the Internet connection
between two LANs is achievable you can place a VPN call from the remote
Win9x client
For example Cping 203661132
When a dial-up connection to ISP is established a default gateway is assigned
to the router traffic through that connection Therefore the output below shows
the default gateway of the Win9x client after the dial-up connection has been
established
Before making a VPN connection from the Win9x client to the NT server you
need to know the exact Internet IP address that the ISP assigns to
P-660HW-Dx v2 router in SUA mode and enter this IP address in the VPN
dial-up dialog box You can check this Internet IP address from PNC Monitor or
S Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information If the Internet IP address
is a fixed IP address provided by ISP in SUA mode then you can always use
this IP address for reaching the VPN server
In the following example the IP address 1401131225 is dynamically
assigned by ISP You must enter this IP address in the VPN Server dialog box
for reaching the PPTP server After the VPN link is established you can start
the network protocol application such as IP IPX and NetBEUI
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
50
5 Using Full Feature NAT
When P-660HW-Dx v2 is in Routing mode you can select NAT Option as
Full Feature in Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit
Key Settings
Field Options Description
Network Address
Translation
Full Feature
When you select this option you can select
Address Mapping Set Number 1~8 in the
pull-down menu on the right
None NAT is disabled when you select this option
SUA Only
When you select this option this remote node
will use default SUA Address Mapping Set
You can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat
lookup 255‟ It‟s a read-only sets with two
rules Many-to-One and server mapping
Select Full Feature when you require other
mapping types
Configuring NAT
Address Mapping Sets and NAT Server Sets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
51
The P-660HW-Dx v2 has 8 remote nodes and so allows you to configure 8
NAT Address Mapping Sets You must specify which NAT Address Mapping
Set (1~8) to use in the remote node when you select Full Feature NAT
You can edit 10 rules for each Address Mapping Set You can edit the rules for
Address Mapping Sets 1 in Web Configurator The other Address Mapping
Sets 2~8 can only be configured in CLI (Command Line Interface)
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports We
can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Port Forwarding To use the NAT server sets you‟ve configured a Server
rule must be set up inside the NAT Address Mapping set Please see NAT
Server Sets for further information on how to apply it
When you select SUA Only the P-660HW-Dx v2 will use a default SUA
Address Mapping set for it It has two rules Many-to-One and Server You
can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat lookup 255‟
Please note that the fields in this menu are read-only However the settings of
the rule set 2 can be modified in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The following table explains the fields in this
above screen
Field Description OptionExample
set This is sequence number for Address Mapping Sets 255 for SUA
Internal
Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA)
0000 for the
Many-to-One type
Local End
IP
This is the starting local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0000 and the
End IP is 255255255255
255255255255
Global Start
IP
This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you
have a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start
IP
0000
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
52
Global End
IP This is the ending global IP address (IGA) NA
Type This is the NAT mapping types Many-to-One and
Server
Here we‟ll guide you to configure Address Mapping Sets from Web
Configurator and CLI (Since in Web Configurator we can only edit the rules
for Address Mapping Sets 1 The other Address Mapping Sets 2~8 can only
be configured in CLI)
Now lets begin with Web Configurator
Firstly let‟s come to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping
This menu is for Address Mapping Set 1 you can edit 10 Address Mapping
Rules for Set 1 You can edit or remove a rule by clicking the two buttons on
the rule table
Click the bdquoEditrsquo Button on the rule 1 then you can enter the window in which
you can edit an individual rule and configure the Mapping Type Local and
Global StartEnd IPs
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
53
The following table describes the fields in this screen
Field Description OptionExample
Type You can select one of the five mapping types from the
pull-down menu
1 One-to-One
2 Many-to-One
3 Many-to-Many
Overload
4 Many-to-Many No
Overload
5 Server
Local
IP
Start This is the starting local IP address (ILA) 0000
End
This is the ending local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0000 and the
End IP as 255255255255 This field is NA for
One-to-One type
255255255255
Global
IP
Start This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you have
a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start IP 0000
End
This is the ending global IP address (IGA) This
field is NA for One-to-One Many-to-One and Server
types
2001164
Note For all Local and Global IPs the End IP address must begin after the IP
Start address ie you cannot have an End IP address beginning before the
Start IP address
Configure Address Mapping Sets in CLI
Setp 1 Telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 (We suppose the LAN IP Address of
P-660HW-Dx v2 is 19216811)
Step 2 Select one Address Mapping Set (1~8) by command bdquoip nat
addrmap map [map ] [set name]‟ (set name is optional) Suppose we
configure set 2 in the example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
54
Setp 3 Set NAT address mapping rule for the Address Mapping Set you just
configured (Set 2 in this example) by command bdquoip nat addrmap rule [rule]
[insert | edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP] [global start IP] [global
end IP] [server set ]‟ Suppose we set a Many-to-One rule for set 2 by
command bdquoip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 1 192168110 192168120 172111
172111‟
Setp 4 Save the configuration by command bdquoip nat addrmap save‟ You can
apply the Address Mapping Set 2 to remote nodes in Web Configurator when
you select Full Feature NAT See the intire process as follows
Set 5 You can lookup the successfully configured Address Mapping Sets by
command bdquoip nat addrmap disp‟
Key Settings
CI Command Description
ip nat addrmap map [map] [set
name]
Select NAT address mapping set and set mapping set
name but set name is optional
Example
gt ip nat addrmap map 2 Test
ip nat addrmap rule [rule] [insert |
edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP]
[global start IP] [global end IP] [server
set ]
Set NAT address mapping rule If the ldquotyperdquo is not
ldquoinside-serverrdquo then the ldquotyperdquo field will still need a
dummy value like ldquo0rdquo
Type is 0 - 4 = one-to-one many-to-one
many-to-many-overload many-to-many-non overload
inside-server
Example
gt ip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 3 192168110
192168120 172111 172111
ip nat addrmap clear [map] [rule] Clear the selected rule of the set
ip nat addrmap freememory Discard Changes
ip nat addrmap disp Display nat set information
ip nat addrmap save Save settings
ip nat server load [set] Load the server sets of NAT into buffer
ip nat server disp [1] ldquodisp 1rdquo means to display the NAT server set in buffer
if parameter ldquo1rdquo is omitted then it will display all the
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
55
server sets
ip nat server save Save the NAT server set buffer into flash
ip nat server clear [set] Clear the server set [set] must use ldquosaverdquo command
to let it save into flash
ip nat server edit [rule] active Activate the rule [rule] rule number is 1 to 24 the
number 25-36 is for UPNP application
ip nat server edit [rule] svrport ltstart
portgt ltend portgt
Configure the port range from ltstart port gt to ltend
portgt
ip nat server edit [rule] remotehost
ltstart IPgt ltend IPgt
Configure the IP address range of remote host (Leave
it to be default value if you don‟t need this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] leasetime
ltsecondsgt
Configure the lease time (Leave it to be default value if
you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] rulename
ltstringgt
Configure the name of the rule (Leave it to be default
value if you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] forwardip ltIP
addressgt Configure the LAN IP address to be forwarded
ip nat server edit [rule] protocol
ltTCP|UDP|ALLgt
Configure the protocol to be used TCP UDP or ALL
(it must be capital)
NAT Server Sets
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports
(similar to the old SUA menu of before) If you wish you can make inside
servers for different services eg Web or FTP visible to the outside users
even though NAT makes your network appears as a single machine to the
outside world A server is identified by the port number eg Web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21
As an example (see the following figure) if you have a Web server at
192168136 and a FTP server at 192168133 then you need to specify for
port 80 (Web) the server at IP address 192168136 and for port 21 (FTP)
another at IP address 192168133
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
56
Please note that a server can support more than one service eg a server
can provide both FTP and Mail service while another provides only Web
service
The following procedures show how to configure a server behind NAT
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
Step 2 Select the service name from the pull-down menu and fill in the server
Address on bdquoServer IP Address‟ then click button bdquoAdd‟ to save it
Step 3 You could click the button bdquoEdit‟ on the rule to modify the Service name
Server IP Address StartEnd Port
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please
refer RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers
Service Port Number
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol)
1723
Examples
Internet Access Only
Internet Access with an Internal Server
Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
(1) Internet Access Only
In our Internet Access example we only need one rule where all our ILAs map
to one IGA assigned by the ISP You can just use the default SUA NAT or you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
57
could select Full Feature NAT and select an Address Mapping Set with a
Many-to-One Rule See the following figure
(2) Internet Access with an Internal Server
In this case we do exactly as the figure (use the convenient pre-configured
SUA Only set) and also go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
NAT -gt Port Forwarding to specify the Internet Server behind the NAT as
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
58
below
(3) Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
(One-to-One Many-to-One Server Set mapping types are used)
In this case we have 3 IGAs from the ISP We have two very busy internal FTP
servers and also an internal general server for the web and mail In this case
we want to assign the 3 IGAs by the following way using 4 NAT rules
Rule 1 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
Rule 3 (Many-to-One type) to map the other clients to IGA3 (200003)
Rule 4 (Server type) to map a web server and mail server with ILA3
(192168120) to IGA3 Type Server allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types to other machines behind NAT on the LAN
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
59
Step 1 In this case we need to map ILA to more than one IGA therefore we
must choose the Full Feature option from the NAT field in currently active
remote node and assign IGA3 to P-660HW-Dx v2‟s WAN IP Address
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping to begin configuring Address Mapping Set 1 We can see
there are 10 blank rule table that could be configured See the following setup
for the four rules in our case
Rule 1 Setup Select One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 Setup Selecting One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
60
Rule 3 Setup Select Many-to-One type to map the other clients to IGA3
(200003)
Rule 4 Setup Select Server type to map our web server and mail server with
ILA3 (192168120) to IGA3
Menu Network -gt NAT -gt Address Mapping should look as follows now
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
61
Step 3 Now we configure all other incoming traffic to go to our web server and
mail server from Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
(4) Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some mIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address In this case it is better to
use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types thus each
user login to the server using a unique global IP address The following figure
illustrates this
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
62
One rule configured for using Many-to-Many No Overload mapping type is
shown below
We can also do this by configure threeOne-to-One mapping type rules
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
What is DDNS
The DDNS service an IP Registry provides a public central database where
information such as email addresses hostnames IPs etc can be stored and
retrieved This solves the problems if your DNS server uses an IP associated
with dynamic IPs
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to access the internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
must inform the DDNS server the change of this IP so that the server can
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
63
update its IP-to-DNS entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is
updated the DNS name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still
usable
The DDNS servers the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports currently is
WWWDYNDNSORG where you apply the DNS from and update the WAN IP
to
Setup the DDNS
1 Before configuring the DDNS settings in the P-660HW-Dx v2 you must
register an account from the DDNS server such as
WWWDYNDNSORG first After the registration you have a hostname
for your internal server and a password using to update the IP to the
DDNS server
2 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Dynamic DNS
Select Active Dynamic DNS option
Key Settings
Option Description
Service Provider Enter the DDNS server in this field Currently we support
WWWDYNDNSORG
Active Toggle to Yes
Host Name Enter the hostname you subscribe from the above DDNS server
For example zyxelcomtw
User Name Enter the user name that the DDNS server gives to you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
64
Password Enter the password that the DDNS server gives to you
Enable Wildcard
Enter the hostname for the wildcard function that the
WWWDYNDNSORG supports Note that Wildcard option is
available only when the provider is httpwwwdyndnsorg
7 Network Management Using SNMP
ZyXEL SNMP Implementation
ZyXEL currently includes SNMP support in some P-660HW-Dx v2 routers It is
implemented based on the SNMPv1 so it will be able to communicate with
SNMPv1 NMSs Further users can also add ZyXELs private MIB in the NMS
to monitor and control additional system variables The ZyXELs private MIB
tree is shown in figure 3 For SNMPv1 operation ZyXEL permits one
community string so that the router can belong to only one community and
allows trap messages to be sent to only one NMS manager
Some traps are sent to the SNMP manager when anyone of the following
events happens
1 coldStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine coldstarts the trap will be sent after booting
2 warmStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine warmstarts the trap will be sent after booting
3 linkDown (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is down the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
4 linkUp (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is up the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
5 authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215)
When receiving any SNMP get or set requirement with wrong community
this trap is sent to the manager
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
65
6 whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-MIB)
When the system is going to restart (warmstart) the trap will be sent with the
reason of restart before rebooting
(1) For intentional reboot
In some cases (download new files CI command sys reboot ) reboot is
done intentionally And traps with the message System reboot by user will
be sent
(2) For fatal error
System has to reboot for some fatal errors And traps with the message of the
fatal code will be sent
Downloading ZyXELs private MIB
Configure the P-660HW-Dx v2 for SNMP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
66
The SNMP related settings in P-660HW-Dx v2 are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt SNMP The
following steps describe a simple setup procedure for configuring all SNMP
settings
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Get
Community
Enter the correct Get Community This Get Community must match the
Get- and GetNext community requested from the NMS The default is
public
Set
Community
Enter the correct Set Community This Set Community must match the
Set-community requested from the NMS The default is public
Trusted
Host
Enter the IP address of the NMS The P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will only
respond to SNMP messages coming from this IP address If 0000 is
entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will respond to all NMS
managers
Trap
Community
Enter the community name in each sent trap to the NMS This Trap
Community must match what the NMS is expecting The default is
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
67
public
Trap
Destination
Enter the IP address of the NMS that you wish to send the traps to If
0000 is entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will not send trap any
NMS manager
Note You may need to edit a firewall rule to permit SNMP Packets
8 Using syslog
You can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt
Logs -gt Log Settings -gt Syslog logging
Key Settings
Active Select it to active UNIX Syslog
Syslog IP Address Enter the IP address of the UNIX server that you wish to
send the syslog
Log Facility Select from the 7 different local options The log facility lets you
log the message in different server files Refer to your UNIX manual
9 Using IP Alias
What is IP Alias
In a typical environment a LAN router is required to connect two local
networks The P-660HW-Dx v2 can connect three local networks to the ISP or
a remote node we call this function as IP Alias In this case an internal
router is not required For example the network manager can divide the local
network into three networks and connect them to the Internet using
P-660HW-Dx v2s single user account See the figure below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
68
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports three virtual LAN interfaces via its single
physical Ethernet interface The first network can be configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN -gt DHCP Setup The second
and third networks that we call IP Alias 1 and IP Alias 2 can be configured
in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias
There are three internal virtual LAN interfaces for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to route
the packets fromto the three networks correctly They are enif0 for the major
network enif00 for the IP alias 1 and enif01 for the IP alias 2 Therefore
three routes are created in the P-660HW-Dx v2 as shown below when the
three networks are configured If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP is also enabled
the IP pool for the clients can be any of the three networks
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
69
You can edit filter rule to accept or deny LAN packets fromto the IP alias 12
go through the P-660HW-Dx v2 by command in CLI
lan index [index number]
Usage index number =1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt [set]
Usage set= the corresponding filter set number you‟ve configured
lan save
IP Alias Setup
(1) Edit the first network in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
LAN -gt IPDHCP Setup by configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s first LAN IP
address
Key Settings
DHCP
Setup
If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP server is enabled the IP pool for the clients
can be any of the three networks
TCPIP
Setup
Enter the first LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This will create the
first route in the enif0 interface
(2) Edit the second and third networks in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias by
configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s second and third LAN IP addresses
Key Settings
IP Alias 1 Active it and enter the second LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the second route in the enif00 interface
IP Alias 2 Active it and enter the third LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the third route in the enif01 interface
10 Using IP Policy Routing
What is IP Policy Routing (IPPR)
Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router
takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides
a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet
forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator
Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis
prior to the normal routing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
70
traffic among multiple paths For example if a network has both the Internet
and remote node connections we can route the Web packets to the Internet
using one policy and route the FTP packets to the remote LAN using another
policy See the figure below
Use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths
Benefits
Source-Based Routing - Network administrators can use policy-based
routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections
Quality of Service (QoS)- Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the
precedence or TOS (Type of Service) values in the IP header at the periphery
of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic
Cost Savings- IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on
high-bandwidth high-cost path while using low-path for batch traffic
Load Sharing- Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic
among multiple paths
How does the IPPR work
A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet
meets the criteria The action is taken only when all the criteria are met The
criteria include the source address and port IP protocol (ICMP UDP TCP
etc) destination address and port TOS and precedence (fields in the IP
header) and length The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between
interactive and bulk traffic Interactive applications eg Telnet tend to have
short packets while bulk traffic eg file transfer tends to have large packets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
71
The actions that can be taken include routing the packet to a different gateway
(and hence the outgoing interface) and the TOS and precedence fields in the
IP header IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of ZyNOS in style
and in implementation The policies are divided into sets where related
policies are grouped together A use defines the policies before applying them
to an interface or a remote node in the same fashion as the filters There are
12 policy sets with 6 policies in each set
Setup the IP Policy Routing
Setp 1 Set the index of IP routing policy set rule by command bdquoip
policyrouting set index [set] [rule]‟ Suppose set=1 rule=1 in this
example
Step 2 Suppose we‟d like to edit the rule like this
Policy Set Name=Test
Active= Yes
Criteria
IP Protocol = 6
Type of Service= Dont Care Packet length= 0
Precedence = Dont Care Len Comp= NA
Source
addr start= 19216812 end= 192168120
port start= 0 end= NA
Destination
addr start= 0000 end= NA
port start= 80 end= 80
Action= Matched
Gateway addr = 1921681254 Log= No
Type of Service= No Change
Precedence = No Change
This policy example forces the Web packets originated from the clients with IP
addresses from 19216812 to 192168120 be routed to the remote LAN via
the gateway 1921681254
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
ip policyrouting set name Test
(Set the name as Test of IP routing policy rule )
ip policyrouting set active yes
(Enable the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria protocol 6
(Set the protocol ID as 6(TCP) for the rule)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
72
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the criteria type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria packetlength 0
(Set the packet length as 0 for the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcip 19216812 192168120
(Set the source IP address for the rule Start=19216812 end=192168120)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcport 0
(Set the source port for the rule Start=0)
ip policyrouting set criteria destip 0000
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=0000)
ip policyrouting set criteria destport 80 80
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=80 end=80)
ip policyrouting set action actmatched
(Set the action for the rule Matched)
ip policyrouting set action gatewaytype 0
(Set gateway type for the rule Gateway Address)
ip policyrouting set action gatewayaddr 1921681254
(Set the gateway address for the rule 1921681254)
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the action type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the action precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set action log no
(Set log option for the rule no log)
ip polictrouting set save
(Save the rule)
Step 3 Apply the IP policy routing There are two interfaces to apply the policy
set they are the LAN interface and WAN interface It depends where the
gateway specified in the policy rule is located If the gateway you specified is
located on the local LAN you apply the policy set in LAN interface If the
gateway you specified is located on the remote WAN site you apply the policy
set in WAN interface
Apply to WAN Interface (Suppose we apply it to remote node 1 in the
example)
wan node index 1
wan node ippolicy 1
11 Using Call Scheduling
What is Call Scheduling
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
73
Call scheduling enables the mechanism for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to run the
remote node connection according to the pre-defined schedule This feature is
just like the scheduler in a video recorder which records the program according
to the specified time Users can apply at most 4 schedule sets in Remote Node
The remote node configured with the schedule set could be Forced On
Forced Down Enable Dial-On-Demand or Disable Dial-On-Demand on
specified date and time
How to configure a Call Scheduling
You can configure a call scheduling in CLI
Suppose we want to edit a call schedule set like this
Call Schedule Set =1
Set name=Test
Active= Yes
Start Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 - 12 - 27
How Often= Once
Once
Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 -12 -27
Start Time(hhmm)= 12 00
Duration(hhmm)= 16 00
Action= Enable Dial-on-demand
This schedule example permits a demand call on the line on 1200 am
2005-12-27 The maximum length of time this connection is allowed is 16
hours
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
wan callsch index 1
(Set call schedule index = 1 You must apply this command first before you
begin to configure call schedule)
wan callsch name Test
(Set the schedule name as Test)
wan callsch active Yes
(Enable schedule)
wan callsch startdate 2005 12 27
(Set schedule start date as 2005-12-27)
wan callsch oncedate 2005 12 27
(Set the schedule used just once it works on 2005-12-27)
wan callsch starttime 12 00
(Set the schedule start time as 1200)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
74
wan callsch duration 16 00
(Set schedule duration time as 16 hours)
wan callsch action 2
(Set action as dial-on-demand)
wan callsch save
(Save the current call schedule set)
Key Settings
Start Date
Start date of this schedule rule It can be unmatched with weekday
setting For example if Start Date is 20001002(Monday) but Monday
setting in weekday can be No
Forced On The node will always keep up during the setting period It is equivalent
to diable the idel timeout
Forced Down The node will always keep doen during the setting period The
connected remote node will be dropped
Enable
Dial-On-Demand The remote node accepts Dial-on-demand during this period
Disable
Dial-On-Demand
The remote node denies any demand dial during the period For the
existing connected nodes it will be dropped after idle timeout and no
triggered up
Start Time
Duration Start Time and Duration of this schedule
Apply the schedule to the Remote node
Multiple scheduling rules can program in a Remote node and they have
priority For example if we program the sets as 1234 in remote node then
the set 1 will override set 234 set 2 will override 34 and so on
We can apply the schedule to the remote node in CLI by the commands
wan node index []index]
wan node callsch [index]
wan node save
For example if we want to apply the call schedule set 1 to remote node 1 we
could use the commands
wan node index 1
wan node callsch 1
wan node save
Time Service in P-660HW-Dx v2
There is no RTC (Real-Time Clock) chip so the P-660HW-Dx v2 should launch
a mechanism to get current time and date from external server in boot time
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
75
Time service is implemented by the Daytime protocol(RFC-867) Time
protocol(RFC-868) and NTP protocol(RFC-1305) You have to assign an IP
address of a time server and then the P-660HW-Dx v2 will get the date time
and time-zone information from this server You can configure it in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt System -gt Time Setting
12 Using IP Multicast
What is IP Multicast
Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in two ways - unicast or broadcast
Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts Host groups
are identified by class D IP addresses ie those with 1110 as their
higher-order bits In dotted decimal notation host group addresses range from
224000 to 239255255255 Among them 224001 is assigned to the
permanent IP hosts group and 224002 is assigned to the multicast routers
group
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is the protocol used to support
multicast groups The latest version is version 2 (see RFC2236) IP hosts use
IGMP to report their multicast group membership to any immediate-neighbor
multicast routers so the multicast routers can decide if a multicast packet
needs to be forwarded At start up the P-660HW-Dx v2 queries all directly
connected networks to gather group membership
After that the P-660HW-Dx v2 updates the information by periodic queries
The P-660HW-Dx v2 implementation of IGMP is also compatible with version 1
The multicast setting can be turned on or off on Ethernet and remote nodes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
76
IP Multicast Setup
(1) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt LAN -gt IP -gt Advanced Setup
(2) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s remote node in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt Multicast
Key Settings
Multicast IGMP-v1 for IGMP version 1 IGMP-v2 for IGMP version 2
13 Using Bandwidth Management
Why Bandwidth Management (BWM)
Nowadays we have many different traffic types for Internet applications Some
traffic may consume high bandwidth such as FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
Some other traffic may not require high bandwidth but they require stable
supply of bandwidth such as VoIP traffic The VoIP quality would not be good
if all of the outgoing bandwidth is occupied via FTP Additionally chances are
that you would like to grant higher bandwidth for somebody special who is
using specific IP address in your network All of these are reasons why we
need bandwidth management
Using BWM
Setp 1 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gtSummary activate bandwidth management on the interface you
would like to manage We enable the BWM function on WAN interface in this
example
Enter the total speed for this interface that you want to allocate using
bandwidth management This appears as the bandwidth budget of the
interface‟s root class
Select how you want the bandwidth to be allocated Priority-Based means
bandwidth is allocated via priority so the traffic with highest priority would be
served first then the second priority is served secondly and so on If
Fairness-Based is chosen then the bandwidth is allocated by ratio Which
means if A class needs 300 kbps B class needs 600 kbps then the ratio of A
and Bs actual bandwidth is 12 So if we get 450 kbps in total then A would
get 150 kbps B would get 300 kbps We select Priority-Based in this
example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
77
Key Settings
Active
Check the box to enable BWM on the interface Note that if you would like
to manage traffic from WAN to LAN you should apply BWM on LAN
interface If you would like to management traffic from WAN to DMZ
please apply BWM on DMZ interface
Speed Enter the total speed to manage on this interface This value is the budget
of the class trees root
Scheduler
Choose the principle to allocate bandwidth on this interface
Priority-Based allocates bandwidth via priority Fairness-Based allocates
bandwidth by ratio
Maximize
Bandwidth
Usage
Check this box if you would like to give residuary bandwidth from Interface
to the classes who need more bandwidth than configured amount Do not
select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a
bandwidth class or you want to limit the bandwidth of each class at the
configured value (Please note that to meat the second condition you
should also disable Use All Managed Bandwidth in the BWM rule)
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Rule Setup select the interface Service Priority and Allocated
Bandwidth for this rule then click button bdquoAdd‟ to apply this rule
Step 3 You can modify the rule by clicking the button lsquoEditrsquo on the rule
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
78
Key Settings
RuleName Give this rule a name for example WWW
BW Budget Configure the bandwidth you would like to allocate to this rule
Priority Enter a number between 0 and 7 to set the priority of this class The
higher the number the higher the priority The default setting is 3
Use All
Managed
Bandwidth
Check this box if you would like to let this class to borrow bandwidth from
its parents when the required bandwidth is higher than the configured
amount Do not check this if you want to limit the bandwidth of this class
at the configured value(Please note that you should also disable
Maximize Bandwidth Usage on the interface to meet the condition)
Service Select User-defined SIP FTP or H323 to specify the traffic types
Destination
IP Address Enter the IP address of destination that meets this class
Destination
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
Destination
Port Enter the destination port number of the traffic
Source IP
Address
Enter the IP address of source that meats this class Note that for traffic
from LAN to WAN since BWM is before NAT you should use the IP
address before NAT processing
Source
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
79
Source Port Enter the source port number of the traffic
Protocol ID Enter the protocol number for the traffic 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP or 17 for
UDP
After configuration BWM you can check current bandwidth of the configured
traffic in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Monitor
14 Using Zero-Configuration
Zero-Configuration and VC auto-hunting
Zero-Configure feature can help customer to reduce the burden of setting
efforts Whenever system ADSL links up system will send out some probing
patterns system will analyze the packets returned from ISP and decide which
services the ISP may provide Because ADSL is based on a ATM network so
system have to pre-configured a VPIVCI hunting pool before Auto-Configure
function begins to work
The Zero-Configuration feature can hunt the encapsulation and VPIVCI value
and system will automatically configure itself if the hunting result is
successfully This feature has two constraints
1 It supports the ISP provides one kind of service (PPPoEPPPoA etc)
only otherwise the hunting will get confusing and failed
2 VC auto-hunting only supports dynamic WAN IP address If the router is
set a static WAN IP address VC auto-hunting function will be disabled
The entry of hunting pool must also contain the VPI VCI and which kinds of
hunting patterns you wish to send Whenever system send out all the probing
patterns with specific VPIVCI system will wait for 5~10 seconds and get the
response from ISP the response patterns will decide which kinds of ADSL
services of the line will be After that system will save back the correct VPI
VCI and also services (encapsulation) type into profile of WAN interface
Configure the VC auto-hunting preconfigured table
(1) Display auto-haunting preconfigured table by using command from CLI
wan atm vchunt display
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
80
(2) Add items to the auto-haunting preconfigured table by using commands
wan atm vchunt add ltremoteNodeIndexgt ltvpigt ltvcigt ltservice
bit(hex)gt
wan atm vchunt save
Note ltremote nodegt input the remote node index 1-8
ltvpigt vpi value
ltvcigt vci value
ltservicegt it‟s a hex value bit0PPPoEVC (1) bit1PPPoELLC (2)
bit2PPPoAVC (4) bit3PPPoALLC (8) bit4EnetVC (16) bit5 EnetLLC (32)
For example
(1) If you need service PPPoELLC and EnetLLC then the service bits will be
2+32 = 34 (decimal) = 22 (hex) you must input 22
(2) If you want to enable all service for VC hunting the service bits will be
1+2+4+8+16+32=63(decimal)= 3f (hex) you must input 3f
Need to perform save after this by command bdquowan atm vchunt save‟
(3) Delete items from the auto-haunting preconfigured table by useing
command
wan atm vchunt remove ltremote nodegt ltvpigt ltvcigt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
81
Using Zero configuration
You can enabledisable Zero Configuration in Network -gt WAN -gt Advanced
Setup
(1) After configure the auto-haunting preconfigured table You just need a PC
connected to the device LAN Ethernet port with the DSL sync up
(2) Open your web browser to access a Web site It should prompt and request
for your username password of your ISP account if your ISP provide PPPoE
or PPPoA service
(3) After key-in the correct info it will than test the connection If it is
successful it will than close the browser and you can open a new browser to
surf the Internet If the connection test fail it will go back to the page ask for
user name and password
(4) Basically the zero configuration only work on the VC that was preconigured
in the auto-haunting preconfigured table
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2
The common triple play scenario is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
82
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus we could assign different parameters to the PVC (CBR
UBR VBR-RT VBR-nRT) to guarantee different applications
We could configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 via CLI The command is
sys tripleplay set portbase ltEportIDgt ltPVCIDgt
For example sys tripleplay portbase set 1 1
sys tripleplay portbase set 2 2
sys tripleplay portbase set 3 3
The traffic from Ethernet port 1 must be forwarded to PVC1 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet port 2 must be forwarded to PVC2 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet Port3 must be forwarded to PVC3 vice versa
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to configure up to twelve filter sets with six
rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system You can apply up to
four filter sets to a particular port to block multiple types of packets With each
filter set having up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for
a single port
The packet filter function on P-660HW-Dx v2 is the same as before just that
you could only configure the filter set and apply them by command in CLI It‟s
very complex for common users to do it So here‟s the recommendation
(1) Usually if you want to block special packets you could edit a firewall rule in
Web Configurator
032
VOIP Server
IPTV Server
Internet
Server
Others
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
ATUR IP-DSLAM VL-Switch
CPE Access Network ISP
034
055
VOIP Telephone
Video Client
Clients surfing
Internet
Other clients
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
PVC1
PVC2
PVC3
PVC4 132
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
83
(2) By factory default ZyXEL has preconfigured many filter sets for your
reference you can check them by command
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Usage set 1~12 rule 1~6 Commonly the preconfigured filter sets are as
follows ltset 2 rule 1~6gt ltset 3 rule 1gt ltset 4 rule 1gt
sys filter set display
For example
This could satisfy mostly requirement You could select any of them to apply to
the WAN node or LAN Interface on demand The command is as follows
Apply to WAN node
wan node index ltnodegt
Usage node= 1~8 corresponding to the remote node 1~8
wan node filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt
ltset3gt ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to one remote node
wan node save
Apply to LAN Interface
lan index [index]
Usage index=1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
84
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt ltset3gt
ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to LAN Interface
lan save
(3) If you are very advanced user you could edit filter set by the following
command
sys filter set [set] [rule]
Usage Set up a filter set index to edit a set
set 1~12
rule 1~6
sys filter set type [typeID]
Usage typeID tcpip or generic
Note In one filter set you should configure all the rules in one type either
tcpip or generic
sys filter set enable
Usage Enable(active) the rule
sys filter set helliphellip(You could configure a filter rule on demand the newest
command is available on release note)
sys filter set save
Usage Don‟t forget to save the rule everytime you‟ve configured it
Reference Commands
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Set the index of filter set rule you must apply this
command first before you begin to configure the
filter rules
sys filter set name [set name] Set the name of filter set
sys filter set type [tcpip | generic] Set the type of filter rule
sys filter set enable Enable the rule
sys filter set disable Disable the rule
sys filter set protocol [protocol ] Set the protocol ID of the rule
sys filter set sourceroute [yes|no] Set the sourceroute yesno
sys filter set destip [address] [subnet
mask]
Set the destination IP address and subnet mask of
the rule
sys filter set destport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|notequal|less|greater]
Set the destination port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set srcip [address] [subnet
mask] Set the source IP address and subnet mask
sys filter set srcport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|not
Set the source port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
85
equal|less|greater] equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set tcpEstab [yes|no] Set TCP establish option
sys filter set more [yes|no] Set the more option to yesno
sys filter set log [type 0-3= none | match|
notmatch | both ]
Set the log type (it could be 0-3 =none match not
match both)
sys filter set actmatch[type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for match
sys filter set actnomatch [type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for not match
sys filter set offset [] Set offset for the generic rule
sys filter set length [] Set the length for generic rule
sys filter set mask [] Set the mask for generic rule
sys filter set value [(depend on length in
hex)] Set the value for generic rule
sys filter set clear Clear the current filter set
sys filter set save Save the filter set parameters
sys filter set display [set][rule] Display Filter set information Wo parameter it will
display buffer information
sys filter set freememory Discard Changes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
86
Wireless Application Notes
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode
Ad hoc Introduction
What is Ad Hoc mode
Ad hoc mode is a wireless network consists of a number of stations without
access points Without using an access point or any connection to a wired
network a client unit in Ad hoc operation mode can communicate directly to
other client units just as using a cross over Ethernet cable connecting 2 hosts
together via a NIC card for direct connection when configured in Ad hoc mode
without an access point being present Ad hoc operation is ideal for small
networks of no more than 2-4 computers Larger networks would require the
use of one or perhaps several access points
Configuration for Wireless Station A
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
87
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
88
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Configuration for Wireless Station B
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
89
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
90
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Step 7 Station A now are able to connect to Station B
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure Introduction
For Infrastructure WLANs multiple Access Points (APs) like the WLAN to the
wired network and allow users to efficiently share network resources The
Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also
mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
91
Configure Wireless Access Point to Infrastructure mode using Web
configurator
To configure Infrastructure mode of your P-660HW-Dx v2 wireless AP please
follow the steps below
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gt General Configure the basic parameters for Wireless LAN
Step 2 You could click the button bdquoAdvanced Setup‟ for more detailed
configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
92
Configuration Wireless Station to Infrastructure mode
To configure Infrastructure mode on your ZyAIR G-200 Wireless Network
Adapter please follow the following steps
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
93
Step 3 Select Infrastructure from the operation mode pull down menu fill in an
SSID or leave it as any if you wish to connect to any AP than press Apply
Change to take effect
Step 4 Click on Site Survey tab and press search all the available AP will be
listed
Step 5 Double click on the AP you want to associated with
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
94
Step 6 After the client have associated with the selected AP The linked APs
channel current linkup rate SSID link quality and signal strength will show on
the Link Info page You now successfully associate with the selected AP with
Infrastructure Mode
3 MAC Filter
MAC Filter Overview
Users can use MAC Filter as a method to restrict unauthorized stations from
accessing the APs ZyXELs APs provide the capability for checking MAC
address of the station before allowing it to connect to the network This
provides an additional layer of control layer in that only stations with registered
MAC addresses can connect This approach requires that the list of MAC
addresses be configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
95
ZyXEL MAC Filter Implementation
ZyXELs MAC Filter Implementation allows users to define a list to allow or
block association from STAs The filter set allows users to input 12 entries in
the list If Allow Association is selected all other STAs which are not on the list
will be denied Otherwise if Deny Association is selected all other STAs which
are not on the list will be allowed for association Users can choose either way
to configure their filter rule
Configure the WLAN MAC Filter
The MAC Filter related settings in ZyXEL APs are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gtMAC Filter
Before you configure the MAC filter you need to know the MAC address of the
client first If not knowing what your MAC address is please enter a command
ipconfig all after DOS prompt to get the MAC (physical) address of your
wireless client
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gtMAC Filter active MAC Filter
Step 2 Enter the MAC Addresses of wireless cards in the filter set to allow or
deny association from these cards
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Filter Action
Allow or block association from MAC addresses contained in this list If Allow
Association is selected in this field hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list
will be allowed to associate with AP If Deny Association is selected in this field
hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list will be blocked
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
96
MAC Address This field specifies those MAC Addresses that you want to add in the list
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
Introduction
The 80211 standard describes the communication that occurs in wireless
LANs
The Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm is used to protect wireless
communication from eavesdropping because wireless transmissions are
easier to intercept than transmissions over wired networks and wireless is a
shared medium everything that is transmitted or received over a wireless
network can be intercepted
WEP relies on a secret key that is shared between a mobile station (eg a
laptop with a wireless Ethernet card) and an access point (ie a base station)
The secret key is used to encrypt packets before they are transmitted and an
integrity check is used to ensure that packages are not modified during the
transition The standard does not discuss how the shared key is established In
practice most installations use a single key that is shared between all mobile
stations and access points APs You can refer to the User Guide for more
detailed information about it
Setting up the Access Point
You can set up the Access Point from Web configurator Advanced Setup
Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General (You can also configure it via CLI)
Step 1 Select bdquoStatic WEP‟ from the pull down menu bdquoSecurity Mode‟ in Web
Configurator
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
97
Step 2 Set up WEP Key in the Web Configurator You need to set the one of
the following parameters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 5 characters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 10 hexadecimal digits
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 13 characters
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 26 hexadecimal digits
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 29 characters
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 58 hexadecimal digits
There are two ways you can configure the WEP Key
(1) You can put in a special WEP key in the bdquoWEP Key‟ menu directly
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
98
(2) You can also put in an arbitrary sequence of characters in the
bdquoPassphrase‟ and then press button bdquoGenerate‟ to let the P-660HW-Dx v2
generate WEP Key for you
Setting up the Station
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar or right click
the utility icon then select Show Config Utility
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
99
The utility will pop up on your windows screen
Note If the utility icon doesnt exist in your task bar click Start -gt
Programs -gt helliphellip to start the utility
Step 2 Select the Configuration tab
Select bdquoSet Security‟ to configure encryption type and parameters
correspond with access point
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
100
Note You should select Key 1 as default Transmit Key since the P-660HW-Dx
v2 is supposed to use Key 1 by default
Key settings
The WEP Encryption type of station has to equal to the access point
Check ASCII field for characters WEP key or uncheck ASCII field for
Hexadecimal digits WEP key
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
101
Hexadecimal digits dont need to precede by 0x
For example
64-bits with characters WEP key Key1= 2e3f4
64-bits with hexadecimal digits WEP key Key1= 123456789A
5 Site Survey
Introduction
What is Site Survey
An RF site survey is a MAP to RF contour of RF coverage in a particular
facility With wireless system it is very difficult to predict the propagation of
radio waves and detect the presence of interfering signals Walls doors
elevator shafts and other obstacles offer different degree of attenuation This
will cause the RF coverage pattern be irregular and hard to predict
Site survey can help us overcome these problem and even provide us a map
of RF coverage of the facility
Preparation
Below are the steps to complete a simple site survey with simple tools
1 First you will need to obtain a facility diagram such as blueprints This is
for you to mark and take record on
2 Visually inspect the facility walk through the facility to verify the accuracy of
the diagram and mark down any large obstacle you see that may effect the RF
signal such as metal shelf metal desk etc on the diagram
3 Identify users area when doing so ask a question where is wireless
coverage needed and where does not and note and take note on the diagram
this is information is needed to determine the number of AP required
4 Determine the preliminary access point location on the facility diagram base
on the service area needed obstacles power wall jack considerations
Survey on Site
Step 1 With the diagram with all information you gathered in the preparation
phase Now you are ready to make the survey
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
102
Step 2 Install an access point at the preliminary location
Step 3 Use a notebook with wireless client installed and run its utility An utility
will provide information such as connection speed current used channel
associated rate link quality signal strength and etc information as shown in
utility below
Step 4 Its always a good idea to start with putting the access point at the
corner of the room and walk away from the access point in a systematic
manner Record the changes at point where transfer rate drop and the link
quality and signal strength information on the diagram as you go alone
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
103
Step 5 When you reach the farthest point of connection mark the spot Now
you move the access point to this new spot as have already determine the
farthest point of the access point installation spot if wireless service is required
from corner of the room
Step 6 Repeat step 1~5 and now you should be able to mark an RF coverage
area as illustrated in above picutre
Step 7 You may need more than one access point is the RF coverage area
hasn‟t covered all the wireless service area you needed
Step 8 Repeat step 1~6 of survey on site as necessary upon completion you
will have a diagram and information of site survey As illustrated below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
104
Note If there are more than one access point is needed be sure to make the
adjacent access point service area over lap one another So the wireless
station is able to roam For more information please refer to roaming at
6 Configure 8021x and WPA
What is the WPA Functionality
Configuration for Access Point
Configuration for your PC
What is WPA Functionality
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
105
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN
Here comes WPA-PSK Application example for your reference
Configuration for Access point
The IEEE 8021x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the
authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management
Authentication can be done using local user database internal to the
P-660HW-Dx v2 (authenticate up to 32 users) or an external RADIUS server
for an unlimited number of users
Step 1 To change your P-660HW-Dx v2s authentication settings login Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General
-gtSecurity
Step 2 Select lsquoSecurity Mode‟ as WAP-PSK
Step 3 Type the Pre Shared Key in the Pre-Shared Key field
Step 4 Click Apply to finish
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
106
Configuration for your PC
Step 1 Double click on your wireless utility icon in your windows task bar the
utility will pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select the configuration tab type in the SSID (Service Set Identifier)
select the operating Mode as Infrastructure and select proper channel
Step 3 Click Set Security to configure the security parameters
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
107
Step 4 Click OK for finish and begin to Site survey Connect to the AP as you
have configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
108
Step 5 Click Link Info tab if the PC associated and authenticated with AP
successfully we will see the following information
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
109
Support Tool
1 LANWAN Packet Trace
The Prestige packet trace records and analyzes packets running on LAN and
WAN interfaces It is designed for users with technical backgrounds who are
interested in the details of the packet flow on LAN or WAN end of Prestige It is
also very helpful for diagnostics if you have compatibility problems with your
ISP or if you want to know the details of a packet for configuring a filter rule
The format of the display is as following
Packet
[index] [timersecond][channel-receivetransmit][length] [protocol]
[sourceIPport] [destIPport]
There are two ways to dump the trace
Online Trace--display the trace real time on screen
Offline Trace--capture the trace first and display later
The details for capturing the trace in CLI as follows
First of all you need to telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 firstly The password is
Administrator passwords bdquoadmin‟ by default
Online Trace
(1) Trace LAN packet
Disable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
none
Enable to capture the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
110
(2) Trace WAN packet
Disable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
none
Enable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
111
Offline Trace
Disable the capture of the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel
mpoa00 none
Enable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Wait for packet passing through the Prestige over LAN
Disable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw off amp sys trcl sw off
Display the trace briefly by entering sys trcp brief
Display specific packets by using sys trcp parse ltfrom_indexgt ltto_indexgt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
112
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal
Step 1 Initiate a hyper terminal connection from your PC(suppose you
connected to the LAN port of P-660HW-Dx v2)
Step 2 Click the bdquoproperties‟ to configure parameters to telnet to the
P-660HW-Dx v2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
113
Step 3 So that after you invoke the relevant commands you could save the
logs you‟ve captured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
114
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP
Using TFTP client software
Uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Uploaddownload Prestige configurations via LAN
(1) Using TFTP to uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout
in Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 Enter the IP address of the Prestige
Step 5To upload the firmware please save the remote file as ras to
Prestige After the transfer is complete the Prestige will program the upgraded
firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
115
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige The local file is the source
file of the ZyNOS firmware that is available in your hard disk The remote file is
the file name that will be saved in Prestige Check the port number 69 and
512-Octet blocks for TFTP Check Binary mode for file transfering
(2) Using TFTP to uploaddownload SMT configurations via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 To download the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please get the
remote file rom-0 from the Prestige
Step 5 To upload the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please save the
remote file as rom-0 in the Prestige
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
116
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige
The local file is the source file of your configuration file that is available
in your hard disk
The remote file is the file name that will be saved in Prestige
Check the port number 69 and 512-Octet blocks for TFTP
Check Binary mode for file transfering
Using TFTP command on Windows NT
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Download ZyNOS via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] get ras [localfile]
Step 4 Upload P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] put
[localfile] rom-0
Step 5 Download P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP]
get rom-0 [localfile]
Using TFTP command on UNIX
Before you begin
1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Example
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ telnet 19216811
Trying 19216811
Connected to 19216811
Escape character is ^]
Password
rasgt sys stdio 0
(Open a new window)
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get rom-0 [local-rom] lt- change to binary mode
lt- download configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-rom] rom-0 lt- upload configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get ras [local-ras ] lt- download firmware
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-ras] ras lt- upload firmware
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
117
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files
In addition to upload the firmware and configuration file via the console port
and TFTP client you can also upload the firmware and configuration files to
the Prestige using FTP
To use this feature your workstation must have a FTP client software See the
example shown below
Using FTP client software
Note The remote file name for the firmware is ras and the configuration file is
rom-0
Step 1 Use FTP client from your workstation to connect to the Prestige by
entering the IP address of the Prestige
Step2 Press Enter key to ignore the username because the Prestige does
not check the username
Step 3 Enter the CLI password as the FTP login password the default is
admin
Step 4 Enter command bin to set the transfer type to binary
Step 5 Use put command to transfer the file to the Prestige
Example
Step 1 Connect to the Prestige by entering the Prestiges IP and Administrator
password in the FTP software Set the transfer type to Auto-Detect or
Binary
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
118
Step 2 Press OK to ignore the Username prompt
Step 3 To upload the firmware file we transfer the local ras file to overwrite
the remote ras file
To upload the configuration file we transfer the local rom-0 to overwrite
the remote rom-0 file
Step 4 The Prestige reboots automatically after the uploading is finished
Please do not power off the router at this moment
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
119
CI Command Reference
Command Syntax and General User Interface
CI has the following command syntax
command ltiface | device gt subcommand [param]
command subcommand [param]
command | help
command subcommand | help
General user interface
1 Shows the following commands and all major (sub)commands
2 exit Exit Subcommand
To get the latest CI Command list
The latest CI Command list is available in release note of every ZyXEL
firmware release Please goto ZyXEL public WEB site
httpwwwzyxelcomsupportdownload_indexphp to download firmware
package (zip) you should unzip the package to get the release note in PDF
format
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
2
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
15
18 What is content filter 15
ADSL FAQ 17
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems 17
2 What is the expected throughput 17
3 What is the microfilter used for 17
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up 17
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL 17
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing 18
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics 18
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector 18
9 What is triple play 18
Firewall FAQ 20
General 20
1 What is a network firewall 20
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure 20
3 What are the basic types of firewalls 20
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2 21
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet
filtering and NAT built-in 21
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack 21
7 What is Ping of Death attack 22
8 What is Teardrop attack 22
9 What is SYN Flood attack 22
10 What is LAND attack 22
11 What is Brute-force attack 23
12 What is IP Spoofing attack 23
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
23
Configuration 23
1 How do I configure the firewall 23
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall 23
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN 24
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using
FTP over WAN 25
Log and Alert 26
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log 26
2 What does the log show to us 26
3 How do I view the firewall log 26
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert 27
5 What is the difference between the log and alert 27
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
3
Wireless FAQ 28
General FAQ 28
1 What is a Wireless LAN 28
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN 28
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN 28
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks 29
5 What is an Access Point 29
6 What‟s the difference between IEEE80211abg 29
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
29
8 What is Wi-Fi 29
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band 29
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device 30
11 Can radio signals pass through wall 30
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference
among WLAN products 30
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN 30
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage
any hardware 31
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
31
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support 31
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering 31
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption 31
Advanced FAQ 31
1 What is Ad Hoc mode 31
2 What is Infrastructure mode 31
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area 31
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash
(DSSS) 32
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash
(FHSS) 32
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
32
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range 32
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID) 32
9 What is an ESSID 32
Security FAQ 33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access
Points radio link 33
2 What is WEP 33
3 What is WPA 33
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP 34
5 What is a WEP key 34
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
4
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP 34
7 Can the SSID be encrypted 34
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff
the SSID 34
9 What are Insertion Attacks 34
10 What is Wireless Sniffer 34
11 What is OTIST How do I use it 34
Application Notes 36
General Application Notes 36
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode 36
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
38
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay 40
4 SUA Notes 40
5 Using Full Feature NAT 50
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS) 62
7 Network Management Using SNMP 64
8 Using syslog 67
9 Using IP Alias 67
10 Using IP Policy Routing 69
11 Using Call Scheduling 73
12 Using IP Multicast 75
13 Using Bandwidth Management 76
14 Using Zero-Configuration 79
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 82
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2 82
Wireless Application Notes 86
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode 86
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode 90
3 MAC Filter 94
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) 96
5 Site Survey 101
6 Configure 8021x and WPA 104
Support Tool 109
1 LANWAN Packet Trace 109
Online Trace 109
Offline Trace 111
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal 112
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP 114
Using TFTP client software 114
Using TFTP command on Windows NT 116
Using TFTP command on UNIX 116
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files 117
CI Command Reference 119
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
5
FAQ
ZyNOS FAQ
1 What is ZyNOS
ZyNOS is ZyXELs proprietary Network Operating System It is the platform on
all Prestige routers that delivers network services and applications It is
designed in a modular fashion so it is easy for developers to add new features
New ZyNOS software upgrades can be easily downloaded from our FTP sites
as they become available
2 Whatrsquos Multilingual Embedded Web Configurator
Multilinggual Embedded Web Configurator means that it can display with 3
kinds of languanges English French and German By factory default it
displays with English and you can change it in Web GUI
3 How do I access the P-660HW-Dx v2 Command Line Interface (CLI)
The Command Line Interface is for the Administrator use only and it could be
accessed via telnet session
Note It is protected by super password lsquo1234rsquo by factory default
4 How do I update the firmware and configuration file
You can do this if you access the P-660HW-Dx v2 as Administrator You can
upload the firmware and configuration file to Prestige from Web Condigurator
or using FTP or TFTP client software You CAN NOT upload the firmware and
configuration file via Telnet because the Telnet connection will be dropped
during uploading the firmware Please do not power off the router right after the
FTP or TFTP uploading is finished the router will upload the firmware to its
flash at this moment
Note There may be firmware that could not be upgraded from Web
Configurator In this case ZyXEL will prepare special Upload Software
for you Please read the firmware release note carefully when you want to
upload a new fireware
5 How do I upgradebackup the ZyNOS firmware by using TFTP client
program via LAN
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to transfer the firmware to P-660HW-Dx v2
using TFTP program via LAN The procedure for uploading ZyNOS via TFTP
is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
6
a Use the TELNET client program in your PC to login to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
b Enter CI command sys stdio 0 to disable Stdio idle timeout
c To upgrade firmware use TFTP client program to put firmware in file
ras in the Prestige After data transfer is finished the P-660HW-Dx v2
will program the upgraded firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
d To backup your firmware use the TFTP client program to get file ras
from the Prestige
6 How do I restore P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations by using TFTP client
program via LAN
a Use the TELNET client program in your PC to login to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
b Enter CI command sys stdio 0 disable Stdio idle timeout
c To backup the P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations use TFTP client
program to get file rom-0 from the P-660HW-Dx v2
d To restore the P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations use the TFTP client
program to put your configuration in file rom-0 in the P-660HW-Dx v2
7 What should I do if I forget the system password
In case you forget the system password you can erase the current
configuration and restore factory defaults this way
Use the RESET button on the rear panel of P-660HW-Dx v2 to reset the
router After the router is reset the LAN IP address will be reset to
19216811 the common user password will be reset to user the
Administrator password will be reset to bdquo1234rsquo
8 How to use the Reset button
a Turn your P-660HW-Dx v2 on Make sure the Power LED is on (not
blinking)
b Press the RESET button for longer than one second and shorter than
five seconds and release it If the Power LED begins to blink the
P-660HW-Dx v2‟s wireless auto security function-OTIST has been
enabled
c Press the RESET button for six seconds and then release it If the
Power LED begins to blink the default configuration has been restored
and the P-660HW-Dx v2 restarts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
7
9 What is SUA When should I use SUA
SUA (Single User Account) is a unique feature supported by Prestige router
which allows multiple people to access Internet concurrently for the cost of a
single user account
When Prestige acting as SUA receives a packet from a local client destined for
the outside Internet it replaces the source address in the IP packet header
with its own address and the source port in the TCP or UDP header with
another value chosen out of a local pool It then recomputes the appropriate
header checksums and forwards the packet to the Internet as if it is originated
from Prestige using the IP address assigned by ISP When reply packets from
the external Internet are received by Prestige the original IP source address
and TCPUDP source port numbers are written into the destination fields of the
packet (since it is now moving in the opposite direction) the checksums are
recomputed and the packet is delivered to its true destination This is because
SUA keeps a table of the IP addresses and port numbers of the local systems
currently using it
10 What is the difference between SUA and Full Feature NAT
When you edit a remote node in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt Remote Node -gt Edit there will be three options for you
None
SUA Only
Full Feature
SUA (Single User Account) in previous ZyNOS versions is a NAT set with 2
rules Many-to-One and Server With SUA visible servers had to be mapped
to different ports since the servers share only one global IP
The P-660HW-Dx v2 now has Full Feature NAT which supports five types of
IPPort mapping One to One Many to One Many to Many Overload Many to
Many No Overload and Server You can make special application when you
select Full Feature NAT For example With multiple global IP addresses
multiple severs using the same port (eg FTP servers using port 2120) are
allowed on the LAN for outside access
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports NAT sets on a remote node basis They are
reusable but only one set is allowed for each remote node The P-660HW-Dx
v2 supports 8 sets since there are 8 remote nodes
By fatory default the NAT is select as SUA in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt General -gt NAT Setup
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
8
11 Is it possible to access a server running behind SUA from the outside
Internet How can I do it
Yes it is possible because P-660HW-Dx v2 delivers the packet to the local
server by looking up to a SUA server table Therefore to make a local server
accessible to the outside users the port number and the inside IP address of
the server must be configured (You can configure it in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding)
12 When do I need select Full Feature NAT
Make multiple local servers on the LAN accessible from outside with
multiple global IP addresses
With SUA visible servers had to be mapped to different ports since the
servers share only one global IP But when you select Full Feature you can
make multiple local servers (mapping the same port or not) on the LAN
accessible from outside with multiple global IP addresses
Support Non-NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some MIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address Thus users on the same
network can not login to the same server simultaneously In this case it is
better to use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types
thus each user login to the server using a unique global IP address
13 What IPPort mapping does Multi-NAT support
Multi-NAT supports five types of IPport mapping One to One Many to One
Many to Many Overload Many to Many No Overload and Server The details
of the mapping between ILA and IGA are described as below Here we define
the local IP addresses as the Internal Local Addresses (ILA) and the global IP
addresses as the Inside Global Address (IGA)
One to One In One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps one ILA
to one IGA
Many to One In Many-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps
multiple ILA to one IGA This is equivalent to SUA (ie PAT port
address translation) ZyXELs Single User Account feature that previous
ZyNOS routers supported (the SUA is optional in todays Prestige
routers)
Many to Many Overload In Many-to-Many Overload mode the
P-660HW-Dx v2 maps the multiple ILA to shared IGA
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
9
Many One-to-One In Many One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2
maps each ILA to unique IGA
Server In Server mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps multiple inside
servers to one global IP address This allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types behind the NAT for outside access Note if
you want to map each server to one unique IGA please use the
One-to-One mode
The following table summarizes the five types
NAT Type IP Mapping
One-to-One ILA1lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-One
(SUAPAT)
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-Many
Overload
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA1
ILA4lt---gtIGA2
Many
One-to-One
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA3
ILA4lt---gtIGA4
Server Server 1 IPlt---gtIGA1
Server 2 IPlt---gtIGA1
14 How many network users can the SUANAT support
The Prestige does not limit the number of the users but the number of the
sessions The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports 2048 sessions that you can use the
ip nat session command in CLI to see You can also use bdquoip nat hashTable
wanif0‟ to view the current active NAT sessions
15 What are Device filters and Protocol filters
In ZyNOS the filters have been separated into two groups One group is
called device filter group and the other is called protocol filter
group Generic filters belong to the device filter group TCPIP and IPX filters
belong to the protocol filter group You can configure the filter rule in CLI
Note In ZyNOS you can not mix different filter groups in the same filter set
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
10
16 How can I protect against IP spoofing attacks
The P-660HW-Dx v2s filter sets provide a means to protect against IP
spoofing attacks The basic scheme is as follows
For the input data filter
Deny packets from the outside that claim to be from the inside
Allow everything that is not spoofing us
Filter rule setup
Filter type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Source IP Addr =abcd
Source IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action Not Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
For the output data filters
Deny bounce back packet
Allow packets that originate from us
Filter rule setup
Filter Type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Destination IP Addr =abcd
Destination IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action No Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
11
Product FAQ
1 How can I manage P-660HW-Dx v2
Multilingual Embedded Web GUI for Local and Remote management
CLI (Command-line interface)
Telnet support (Administrator Password Protected ) for remote
configuration change and status monitoring
FTP TFTP sever firmware upgrade and configuration backup and
restore are supported(Administrator Password Protected)
2 What is the default password for Web Configurator
There are two different accounts for P-660HW-Dx v2 Web Configurator
Common User Account and Administrator Account
By factory default the password for the two accounts are
Common User Account user
Administrator Account 1234
You can change the password after you logging in the Web Configurator
Please record your new password whenever you change it The system
will lock you out if you have forgotten your password
3 Whatrsquos the difference between lsquoCommon User Accountrsquo and
lsquoAdministrator Accountrsquo
For Common User Account it can only access the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 and check the current system status
For Administrator Account besides accessing the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 it can also access Winzard setup Advanced setup of
P-660HW-Dx v2
Moreover only with Administrator Password you could manage the
P-660HW-Dx v2 via FTPTFTP or Telnet
4 How do I know the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address assigned by the
ISP
You can view My WAN IP ltfrom ISPgt xxxx shown in Web Configurator
bdquoStatus-gtDevice Information -gtWAN Information‟ to check this IP address
5 What is the micro filter or splitter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
12
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
6 The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Bridge and Router mode whats the
difference between them
When the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet which means
only the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use bridge mode which works as an ADSL modem to
connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account and limit
only one computer to access the Internet
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to add another Internet sharing device
like a router In this case we use the router mode which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
7 How do I know I am using PPPoE
PPPoE requires a user account to login to the providers server If you need to
configure a user name and password on your computer to connect to the ISP
you are probably using PPPoE If you are simply connected to the Internet
when you turn on your computer you probably are not You can also check
your ISP or the information sheet given by the ISP Please choose PPPoE as
the encapsulation type in the P-660HW-Dx v2 if the ISP uses PPPoE
8 Why does my provider use PPPoE
PPPoE emulates a familiar Dial-Up connection It allows your ISP to provide
services using their existing network configuration over the broadband
connections Besides PPPoE supports a broad range of existing applications
and service including authentication accounting secure access and
configuration management
9 What is DDNS
The Dynamic DNS service allows you to alias a dynamic IP address to a static
hostname allowing your computer to be more easily accessed from various
locations on the Internet To use the service you must first apply an account
from several free Web servers such as httpwwwdyndnsorg
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to reach our internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
13
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
updates this IP to DDNS server so that the server can update its IP-to-DNS
entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is updated the DNS
name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still usable
10 When do I need DDNS service
When you want your internal server to be accessed by using DNS name rather
than using the dynamic IP address we can use the DDNS service The DDNS
server allows to alias a dynamic IP address to a static hostname Whenever
the ISP assigns you a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2 sends this IP to the DDNS
server for its updates
11 What is DDNS wildcard Does the P-660HW-Dx v2 support DDNS
wildcard
Some DDNS servers support the wildcard feature which allows the hostname
yourhostdyndnsorg to be aliased to the same IP address as
yourhostdyndnsorg This feature is useful when there are multiple servers
inside and you want users to be able to use things such as
wwwyourhostdyndnsorg and still reach your hostname
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports DDNS wildcard that httpwwwdyndnsorg
supports When using wildcard you simply enter yourhostdyndnsorg in the
Host field in Menu 11 Configure Dynamic DNS
12 Can the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA handle IPSec packets sent by the
IPSec gateway
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA can handle IPSec ESP Tunneling mode We
know when packets go through SUA SUA will change the source IP address
and source port for the host To pass IPSec packets SUA must understand
the ESP packet with protocol number 50 replace the source IP address of the
IPSec gateway to the routers WAN IP address However SUA should not
change the source port of the UDP packets which are used for key
managements Because the remote gateway checks this source port during
connections the port thus is not allowed to be changed
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
14
13 How do I setup my P-660HW-Dx v2 for routing IPSec packets over
SUA
For outgoing IPSec tunnels no extra setting is required
For forwarding the inbound IPSec ESP tunnel A Default server set is required
You could configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding -gt Default Server Setup
It is because SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users So to make an internal server
for outside access we must specify the service port and the LAN IP of this
server in Web configurator Thus SUA is able to forward the incoming packets
to the requested service behind SUA and the outside users access the server
using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address So we have to configure the
internal IPsec client as a default server (unspecified service port) when it acts
a server gateway
14 What is Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping allocates the bandwidth to WAN dynamically and aims at
boosting the efficiency of the bandwidth If there are serveral VCs in the
P-660HW-Dx v2 but only one VC activated at one time the P-660HW-Dx v2
allocates all the Bandwidth to the VC and the VC gets full bandwidth If another
VCs are activated later the bandwidth is yield to other VCs after ward
15 Why do we perform traffic shaping in the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 must manage traffic fairly and provide bandwidth
allocation for different sorts of applications such as voice video and data All
applications have their own natural bit rate Large data transactions have a
fluctuating natural bit rate The P-660HW-Dx v2 is able to support variable
traffic among different virtual connections Certain traffic may be discarded if
the virtual connection experiences congestion Traffic shaping defines a set of
actions taken by the P-660HW-Dx v2 to avoid congestion traffic shaping takes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
15
measures to adapt to unpredictable fluctuations in traffic flows and other
problems among virtual connections
16 What do the parameters (PCR SCR MBS) mean
Traffic shaping parameters (PCR SCR MBS) can be set in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt ATM Setup
Peak Cell Rate(PCR) The maximum bandwidth allocated to this connection
The VC connection throughput is limited by PCR
Sustainable Cell Rate(SCR) The least guaranteed bandwidth of a VC
When there are multi-VCs on the same line the VC throughput is guaranteed
by SCR
Maximum Burst Size(MBS) The amount of cells transmitted through this
VC at the Peak Cell Rate before yielding to other VCs Total bandwidth of the
line is dedicated to single VC if there is only one VC on the line However as
the other VC asking the bandwidth the MBS defines the maximum number of
cells transmitted via this VC with Peak Cell rate before yielding to other VCs
The P-660HW-Dx v2 holds the parameters for shaping the traffic among its
virtual channels If you do not need traffic shaping please set SCR = 0 MBS =
0 and PCR as the maximum value according to the line rate (for example 23
Mbps line rate will result PCR as 5424 cellsec)
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
Constant bit rate(CBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that requires
the user to determine a fixed bandwidth requirement at the time the connection
is set up so that the data can be sent in a steady stream CBR service is often
used when transmitting fixed-rate uncompressed video
Unspecified bit rate(UBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that does
not guarantee any throughput levels and uses only available bandwidth UBR
is often used when transmitting data that can tolerate delays such as e-mail
Variable bit rate(VBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that allows
users to specify a throughput capacity (ie a peak rate) and a sustained rate
but data is not sent evenly You can select VBR for bursty traffic and
bandwidth sharing with other applications It contains two subclasses
Variable bit rate nonreal time (VBR-nRT)
Variable bit rate real time (VBR-RT)
18 What is content filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
16
Internet Content filter allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies
tailored to your needs Content filter gives you the ability to block web sites that
contain key words (that you specify) in the URL You can set a schedule for
when the P-660HW-Dx v2 performs content filtering You can also specify
trusted IP Addresses on LAN for which the P-660HW-Dx v2 will not perform
content filtering You can configure the details about it in Web Configurator
Advanced setup Security -gt Content Filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
17
ADSL FAQ
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems
ADSL provides a dedicated service over a single telephone line cable
modems offer a dedicated service over a shared media While cable modems
have greater downstream bandwidth capabilities (up to 30 Mbps) that
bandwidth is shared among all users on a line and will therefore vary perhaps
dramatically as more users in a neighborhood get online at the same time
Cable modem upstream traffic will in many cases be slower than ADSL either
because the particular cable modem is inherently slower or because of rate
reductions caused by contention for upstream bandwidth slots The big
difference between ADSL and cable modems however is the number of lines
available to each There are no more than 12 million homes passed today that
can support two-way cable modem transmissions and while the figure also
grows steadily it will not catch up with telephone lines for many years
Additionally many of the older cable networks are not capable of offering a
return channel consequently such networks will need significant upgrading
before they can offer high bandwidth services
2 What is the expected throughput
In our test we can get about 16Mbps data rate on 15Kft using the 26AWG
loop The shorter the loop the better the throughput is
3 What is the microfilter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up
You can see the DSL LED Green on the P-660HW-Dx v2s front panel is on
when the ADSL physical layer is up
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL
Depending on the line quality the P-660HW-Dx v2 uses Fall Back and Fall
Forward to automatically adjust the date rate
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
18
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing
Though the LLC-based multiplexing can carry multiple protocols over a single
VC it requires extra header information to identify the protocol being carried
on the virtual circuit (VC) The VC-based multiplexing needs a separate VC for
carrying each protocol but it does not need the extra headers Therefore the
VC-based multiplexing is more efficient
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics
You can use the following CI commands to check the ADSL line
statistics
CIgt wan adsl perfdata
CIgt wan adsl status
CIgt wan adsl linedata far
CIgt wan adsl linedata near
You can also do it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Diagnostic -gt DSL Line -gt DSL Status
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector
The signaling pins on the P-660HW-Dx v2s ADSL connector are pin 3 and pin
4 The middle two pins for a RJ11 cable
9 What is triple play
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
19
More and more TelcoISPs are providing three kinds of services (VoIP Video
and Internet) over one existing ADSL connection
The different services (such as video VoIP and Internet access) require
different Qulity of Service
The high priority is Voice (VoIP) data
The Medium priority is Video (IPTV) data
The low priority is internet access such as ftp etc hellip
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus you can configure each PVC separately to assign different
QoS to different application
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
20
Firewall FAQ
General
1 What is a network firewall
A firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control
policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to
protect a trusted network from an untrusted network The firewall can be
thought of two mechanisms One to block the traffic and the other to permit
traffic
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure
The P-660HW-Dx v2 is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks such as Ping of Death SYN Flood LAND
attack IP Spoofing etc It also uses stateful packet inspection to determine if
an inbound connection is allowed through the firewall to the private LAN The
P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Network Address Translation (NAT) which
translates the private local addresses to one or multiple public addresses This
adds a level of security since the clients on the private LAN are invisible to the
Internet
3 What are the basic types of firewalls
Conceptually there are three types of firewalls
1 Packet Filtering Firewall
2 Application-level Firewall
3 Stateful Inspection Firewall
Packet Filtering Firewalls generally make their decisions based on the header
information in individual packets These headers information include the
source destination addresses and ports of the packets
Application-level Firewalls generally are hosts running proxy servers which
permit no traffic directly between networks and which perform logging and
auditing of traffic passing through them A proxy server is an application
gateway or circuit-level gateway that runs on top of general operating system
such as UNIX or Windows NT It hides valuable data by requiring users to
communicate with secure systems by mean of a proxy A key drawback of this
device is performance
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
21
Stateful Inspection Firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against
defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP
address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the
integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols The flexible
nature of Stateful Inspection firewalls generally provides the best speed and
transparency however they may lack the granular application level access
control or caching that some proxies support
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2
1 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall inspects packets contents and IP
headers It is applicable to all protocols that understands data in the
packet is intended for other layers from network layer up to the
application layer
2 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall performs stateful inspection It takes into
account the state of connections it handles so that for example a
legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request
for that packet and allowed in Conversely an incoming packet
masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be
blocked
3 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall uses session filtering ie smart rules
that enhance the filtering process and control the network session
rather than control individual packets in a session
4 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall is fast It uses a hashing function to
search the matched session cache instead of going through every
individual rule for a packet
5 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall provides email service to notify you for
routine reports and when alerts occur
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet filtering and
NAT built-in
With the spectacular growth of the Internet and online access companies that
do business on the Internet face greater security threats Although packet filter
and NAT restrict access to particular computers and networks however for
the other companies this security may be insufficient because packets filters
typically cannot maintain session state Thus for greater security a firewall is
considered
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a
connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable
a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
22
There are four types of DoS attacks
1 Those that exploits bugs in a TCPIP implementation such as Ping of
Death and Teardrop
2 Those that exploits weaknesses in the TCPIP specification such as
SYN Flood and LAND Attacks
3 Brute-force attacks that flood a network with useless data such as
Smurf attack
4 IP Spoofing
7 What is Ping of Death attack
Ping of Death uses a PING utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the
maximum 65535 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification The oversize
packet is then sent to an unsuspecting system Systems may crash hang or
reboot
8 What is Teardrop attack
Teardrop attack exploits weakness in the reassemble of the IP packet
fragments As data is transmitted through a network IP packets are often
broken up into smaller chunks Each fragment looks like the original packet
except that it contains an offset field The Teardrop program creates a series of
IP fragments with overlapping offset fields When these fragments are
reassembled at the destination some systems will crash hang or reboot
9 What is SYN Flood attack
SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each
packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response While the
targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK it queues up all
outstanding SYN-ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue
SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when
an internal timer (which is set a relatively long intervals) terminates the TCP
three-way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all
incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users
10 What is LAND attack
In a LAN attack hackers flood SYN packets to the network with a spoofed
source IP address of the targeted system This makes it appear as if the host
computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the
target system tries to respond to itself
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
23
11 What is Brute-force attack
A Brute-force attack such as Smurf attack targets a feature in the IP
specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting to quickly flood the
target network with useless data A Smurf hacker flood a destination IP
address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network the router will
broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network If there
are numerous hosts this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request
packet the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the intermediary
network but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address
known as the victim network This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all
available bandwidth making communications impossible
12 What is IP Spoofing attack
Many DoS attacks also use IP Spoofing as part of their attack IP Spoofing
may be used to break into systems to hide the hackers identity or to magnify
the effect of the DoS attack IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain
unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking
that the communications are coming from within the trusted network To
engage in IP Spoofing a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it
appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed
through the router or firewall
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
There are two default ACLs pre-configured in the P-660HW-Dx v2 one allows
all connections from LAN to WAN and the other blocks all connections from
WAN to LAN except of the DHCP packets
Configuration
1 How do I configure the firewall
You can use the Web Configurator to configure the firewall for P-660HW-Dx v2
By factory default if you connect your PC to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 you can access Web Configurator via bdquohttp19216811‟
Note Donrsquot forget to type in the Administrator Password
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall
There are several ways to protect others from touching the settings of your
firewall
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
24
1 Change the default Administrator password since it is required when
setting up the firewall
2 Limit who can access to your P-660HW-Dx v2‟s Web Configurator or
CLI You can enter the IP address of the secured LAN host in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt
[Service] -gtSecured Client IP to allow special access to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
The default value in this field is 0000 which means you do not care which
host is trying to telnet your P-660HW-Dx v2 or accessthe Web
Configurator of
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN
There are four reasons that WWWTelnet from WAN is blocked
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable Telnet from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow WWWTelnet connection
from WAN The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
WWW (For accessing Web Configurator)
Source IP= Remote trusted host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP80
Action=Forward
TELNET (For accessing Command Line Interface)
Source IP= Telnet Client host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP23
Action=Forward
(2)You have disabled WWWTelnet service in Web Configurator Advanced
setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
25
(3) WWWTelnet service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host
entered in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote
MGNT
(4)A filter set which blocks WWWTelnet from WAN is applied to WAN node
You can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using FTP over
WAN
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable FTP from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow FTP connection from WAN
The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
Source IP= FTP host
Destination IP= P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP
Service= FTP TCP21 TCP20
Action=Forward
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
26
(2) You have disabled FTP service in Web Configurator Advanced setup
Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(3) FTP service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host entered
in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(4) A filter set which blocks FTP from WAN is applied to WAN node You
can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
Log and Alert
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the firewall log immediately when the packet
matches a firewall rule The log for Default Firewall Policy (LAN to WAN WAN
to LAN WAN to WAN) is generated automatically with factory default setting
but you can change it in Web Configurator
2 What does the log show to us
The log supports up to 128 entries There are 5 columns for each entry Please
see the example shown below
3 How do I view the firewall log
All logs generated in P-660HW-Dx v2 including firewall logs IPSec logs
system logs are migrated to centralized logs So you can view firewall logs in
Centralized logs Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs
-gtView Log
The log keeps 128 entries the new entries will overwrite the old entries when
the log has over 128 entries
Before you can view firewall logs there are two steps you need to do
(1) Enable log function in Centralized logs setup via either one of the following
methods
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
27
Web configuration Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log
Settings check Access Control and Attacks options depending on
your real situation
CI command sys logs category [access | attack]
(2) Enable log function in firewall default policy or in firewall rules
After the above two steps you can view firewall logs via
Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gtView
Log
View the log by CI command sys logs disp
You can also view Centralized logs via mail or syslog please configure mail
server or Unix Syslog server in Web configuration Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the alert when an attack is detected by the
firewall and sends it via Email So to send the alert you must configure the
mail server and Email address using Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings You can also specify how frequently
you want to receive the alert in it
5 What is the difference between the log and alert
A log entry is just added to the log inside the P-660HW-Dx v2 and e-mailed
together with all other log entries at the scheduled time as configured An alert
is e-mailed immediately after an attacked is detected
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
28
Wireless FAQ
General FAQ
1 What is a Wireless LAN
Wireless LANs provide all the functionality of wired LANs without the need for
physical connections (wires) Data is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier
and transmitted through the ether Typical bit-rates are 11Mbps and 54Mbps
although in practice data throughput is half of this Wireless LANs can be
formed simply by equipping PCs with wireless NICs If connectivity to a wired
LAN is required an Access Point (AP) is used as a bridging device APs are
typically located close to the centre of the wireless client population
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN
Mobility Wireless LAN systems can provide LAN users with access to
real-time information anywhere in their organization This mobility supports
productivity and service opportunities not possible with wired networks
Installation Speed and Simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be
fast and easy and can eliminate the need to pull cable through walls and
ceilings
Installation Flexibility Wireless technology allows the network to go where
wire cannot go
Reduced Cost-of-Ownership While the initial investment required for
wireless LAN hardware can be higher than the cost of wired LAN hardware
overall installation expenses and life-cycle costs can be significantly lower
Long-term cost benefits are greatest in dynamic environments requiring
frequent moves and changes
Scalability Wireless LAN systems can be configured in a variety of topologies
to meet the needs of specific applications and installations Configurations are
easily changed and range from peer-to-peer networks suitable for a small
number of users to full infrastructure networks of thousands of users that
enable roaming over a broad area
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN
The speed of Wireless LAN is still relatively slower than wired LAN The setup
cost of Wireless LAN is relative high because the equipment cost including
access point and PCMCIA Wireless LAN card is higher than hubs and CAT 5
cables
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
29
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks
Airports hotels and even coffee shops like Starbucks are deploying 80211
networks so people can wirelessly surf the Internet with their laptops
5 What is an Access Point
The AP (access point also known as a base station) is the wireless server that
with an antenna and a wired Ethernet connection that broadcasts information
using radio signals AP typically acts as a bridge for the clients It can pass
information to wireless LAN cards that have been installed in computers or
laptops allowing those computers to connect to the campus network and the
Internet without wires
6 Whatrsquos the difference between IEEE80211abg
The IEEE 80211 is a wireless LAN industry standard and the objective of
IEEE 80211 is to make sure that different manufactures wireless LAN devices
can communicate to each other Below is a brief comparison for the
IEEE80211 abg
Publish
Time
Frequency
Band(GHZ)
Data Rate(Mbps) Compatibility
IEEE80211a 1999 UNII Band
515~5825
691218243648
54
Only work with
80211a
devices
IEEE80211b 1999 ISM Band
24~24835
125511 -
IEEE80211g 2001 ISM Band
24~24835
691218243648
54
Backward
compatible with
80211b
devices
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
Yes As long as the products comply to the same IEEE 80211 standard The
Wi-Fi logo is used to define 80211b compatible products Wi-Fi5 is a
compatibility standard for 80211a products running in the 5GHz band
8 What is Wi-Fi
The Wi-Fi logo signifies that a product is interoperable with wireless
networking equipment from other vendors A Wi-Fi logo product has been
tested and certified by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA)
The Socket Wireless LAN Card is Wi-Fi certified and that means that it will
work (interoperate) with any brand of Access Point that is also Wi-Fi certified
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band
Various spread spectrum radio communication applications use the 24 GHz
band This includes WLAN systems (not necessarily of the type IEEE
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
30
80211b) cordless phones wireless medical telemetry equipment and
Bluetoothtrade short-range wireless applications which include connecting
printers to computers and connecting modems or hands-free kits to mobile
phones
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device
Any time devices are operated in the same frequency band there is the
potential for interference
Both the 80211bg and Bluetooth devices occupy the same24-to-2483-GHz
unlicensed frequency range-the same band But a Bluetooth device would not
interfere with other 80211 devices much more than another 80211 device
would interefere While more collisions are possible with the introduction of a
Bluetooth device they are also possible with the introduction of another 80211
device or a new 24 GHz cordless phone for that matter But BlueTooth
devices are usually low-power so the effects that a Bluetooth device may have
on an 80211 network if any arent far-reaching
11 Can radio signals pass through wall
Transmitting through a wall is possible depending upon the material used in its
construction In general metals and substances with a high water content do
not allow radio waves to pass through Metals reflect radio waves and concrete
attenuates radio waves The amount of attenuation suffered in passing through
concrete will be a function of its thickness and amount of metal re-enforcement
used
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference among WLAN
products
Factors of interference
(1) Obstacles walls ceilings furniturehellip etc
(2) Building Materials metal door aluminum studs
(3) Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors
Solution
(1) Minimizing the number of walls and ceilings
(2) Antenna is positioned for best reception
(3) Keep WLAN products away from electrical devices eg microwaves
monitors electric motorshellip etc
(4) Add additional APs if necessary
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN
WLANs are generally privately owned wireless systems that are deployed in a
corporation warehouse hospital or educational campus setting Data rates
are high and there are no per-packet charges for data transmission
WWANs are generally publicly shared data networks designed to provide
coverage in metropolitan areas and along traffic corridors WWANs are owned
by a service provider or carrier Data rates are low and charges are based on
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
31
usage Specialized applications are characteristically designed around short
burst messaging
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage any
hardware
Yes it will not harm the hardware but the module will not be detected and
work after inserting to the slot You need to reboot the router to initialize the
module
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
The wireless security modes supported on P-660HW-Dx v2 are Static
WEP WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK and WPA2
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
It supports IEEE 80211bgg+ standard
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering
Yes it supports up to 32 MAC Address filtering
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption
Yes it means that the AP on P-660HW-Dx v2 will automatically decelerate
when devices move beyond the optimal range or other interference is present
If the device moves back within the range of a higher-speed transmission the
connection will automatically speed up again Rate shifting is a physical-layer
mechanism transparent to the user and the upper layers of the protocol stack
Advanced FAQ
1 What is Ad Hoc mode
A wireless network consists of a number of stations without using an access
point or any connection to a wired network
2 What is Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure mode implies connectivity to a wired communications
infrastructure If such connectivity is required the Access Points must be used
to connect to the wired LAN backbone Wireless clients have their
configurations set for infrastructure mode in order to utilise access points
relaying
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area
This depends on the surrounding terrain the diameter of the client population
and the number of clients If an area is large with dispersed pockets of
populations then extension points can be used for extend coverage
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
32
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (DSSS)
DSSS spreads its signal continuously over a wide frequency band DSSS
maps the information bearing bit-pattern at the sending station into a higher
data rate bit sequence using a chipping code The chipping code (also known
as processing gain) introduces redundancy which allows data recovery if
certain bit errors occur during transmission The FCC rules the minimum
processing gain should be 10 typical systems use processing gains of 20
IEEE 80211b specifies the use of DSSS
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (FHSS)
FHSS uses a narrowband carrier which hops through a predefined sequence
of several frequencies at a specific rate This avoids problems with fixed
channel narrowband noise and simple jamming Both transmitter and receiver
must have their hopping sequences synchronized to create the effect of a
single logical channel To an unsynchronised receiver an FHSS transmission
appears to be short-duration impulse noise 80211 may use FHSS or DSSS
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
No Provided the antenna is optimally designed for 24GHz or 5GHz operation
WLAN NICs often include an internal antenna which may provide sufficient
reception
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range
This frequency range has been set aside by the FCC and is generally labeled
the ISM band A few years ago Apple and several other large corporations
requested that the FCC allow the development of wireless networks within this
frequency range What we have today is a protocol and system that allows for
unlicensed use of radios within a prescribed power level The ISM band is
populated by Industrial Scientific and Medical devices that are all low power
devices but can interfere with each other
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID)
SSID is a configurable identification that allows clients to communicate to the
appropriate base station With proper configuration only clients that are
configured with the same SSID can communicate with base stations having
the same SSID SSID from a security point of view acts as a simple single
shared password between base stations and clients
9 What is an ESSID
ESSID stands for Extended Service Set Identifier and identifies the wireless
LAN The ESSID of the mobile device must match the ESSID of the AP to
communicate with the AP The ESSID is a 32-character maximum string and is
case-sensitive
Security FAQ
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Points
radio link
To secure the date across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Point‟s radio link we
could select any one of the security mode Static 64128256 bit WEP
WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK WPA2
2 What is WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security mechanism defined within the
80211 standard and designed to make the security of the wireless medium
equal to that of a cable (wire) WEP data encryption was designed to prevent
access to the network by intruders and to prevent the capture of wireless
LAN traffic through eavesdropping WEP allows the administrator to define a
set of respective Keys for each wireless network user based on a Key
String passed through the WEP encryption algorithm Access is denied by
anyone who does not have an assigned key Note WEP has shown to have
fundamental flaws in its key generation processing
3 What is WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN You can refer to
the User Guide for more information about it
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP
40 bit WEP and 64 bit WEP are the same encryption level and can interoperate
The lower level of WEP encryption uses a 40 bit (10 Hex character) as secret
key (set by user) and a 24 bit Initialization Vector (not under user control)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
34
(40+24=64) Some vendors refer to this level of WEP as 40 bit others as 64
bit
5 What is a WEP key
A WEP key is a user defined string of characters used to encrypt and decrypt
data
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP
No 128-bit WEP will not communicate with 64-bit WEP Although 128 bit WEP
also uses a 24 bit Initialization Vector but it uses a 104 bit as secret key Users
need to use the same encryption level in order to make a connection
7 Can the SSID be encrypted
No WEP only encrypts the data packets not the 80211 management
packetsThe SSID is in the beacon and probe management messages and
SSID goes over the air in clear text This makes obtaining the SSID easy by
sniffing 80211 wireless traffic
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff the SSID
Many APs by default have broadcasting the SSID turned on Sniffers typically
will find the SSID in the broadcast beacon packets Turning off the broadcast of
SSID in the beacon message (a common practice) does not prevent getting
the SSID since the SSID is sent in the clear in the probe message when a
client associates to an AP a sniffer just has to wait for a valid user to associate
to the network to see the SSID
9 What are Insertion Attacks
The insertion attacks are based on placing unauthorized devices on the
wireless network without going through a security process and review
10 What is Wireless Sniffer
An attacker can sniff and capture legitimate traffic Many of the sniffer tools for
Ethernet are based on capturing the first part of the connection session where
the data would typically include the username and password An intruder can
masquerade as that user by using this captured information An intruder who
monitors the wireless network can apply this same attack principle on the
wireless
11 What is OTIST How do I use it
OTIST is acronym for ZyXEL‟s bdquoOne Touch Intelligent Security Technology‟
It enables P-660HW-Dx v2 and ZyXEL‟s OTIST supported Wireless adapters
to establish connections of the WPA-PSK security mode automatically with
just one touch at the reset button on rear panel
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
35
To use this function on P-660HW-Dx v2 you could press the reset button on
P-660HW-Dx v2 for 1~5 seconds the OTIST is actived The P-660HW-Dx v2
will enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA-PSK automatically if no
WLAN security has been set The default setup key for OTIST is bdquo01234567‟
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
36
Application Notes
General Application Notes
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode
Setup your workstation
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
If the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet that means only
the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as an ADSL bridge
modem to connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account
and limit only one computer to access the Internet
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
To connect your computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN port the computer
must have an Ethernet adapter card installed For connecting a single
computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2 we use a Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
In most cases the IP address of the computer is assigned by the ISP
dynamically so you have to configure the computer as a DHCP client which
obtains the IP from the ISP using DHCP protocol The ISP may also provide
the gateway DNS via DHCP if they are available Otherwise please enter the
static IP addresses for all that the ISP gives to you in the network TCPIP
settings For Windows we check the option Obtain an IP address
automatically in its TCPIP setup please see the example shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
37
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
bridge mode We will use Web Configurator to guide you through the related
menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as bridge mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
(2)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
38
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For example
LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
(2) Turn off DHCP Server and configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 in
Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN We use 19216811 as
the LAN IP for P-660HW-Dx v2 in this case
Step 1 Disactive DHCP Server and apply it
Step 2 Assign an IP to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx v2 eg
19216811
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to install an Internet sharing device like
a router In this case we use the P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
Connect the LAN ports of all computers to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 using Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
Since the P-660HW-Dx v2 is set to DHCP server as default so you need only
to configure the workstations as the DHCP clients in the networking settings In
this case the IP address of the computer is assigned by the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 can also provide the DNS to the clients via DHCP if it is
available For this setup in Windows we check the option Obtain an IP
address automatically in its TCPIP setup Please see the example shown
below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
39
Set up your P-660HW-Dx v2 under routing mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
Routing mode for routing traffic We will use Web Configurator to guide you
through the related menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as routing mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For
example LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
IP Address
Assignment
Set to Dynamic if the ISP provides the IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2
dynamically Otherwise set to Static and enter the IP in the IP
Address field
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
40
(2) Configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 and the DHCP settings in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
What is DHCP Relay
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In addition to the
DHCP server feature the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports the DHCP relay function
When it is configured as DHCP server it assigns the IP addresses to the LAN
clients When it is configured as DHCP relay it is responsible for forwarding
the requests and responses negotiating between the DHCP clients and the
server See figure 1
Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
We could set the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay by the following command
in CLI
Ip dhcp enif0 mode relay
Ip dhcp enif0 relay server [Server IP Address]
4 SUA Notes
Tested SUANAT Applications (eg Cu-SeeMe ICQ NetMeeting)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
41
Introduction
Generally SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users However some applications
such as Cu-SeeMe and ICQ will need to connect to the local user behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 In such case a SUA server must be configured to forward
the incoming packets to the true destination behind SUA After the required
server are configured in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding the internal server or client applications can be accessed
by using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP Address
SUA Supporting Table
The following are the required Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding for the various applications running SUA mode
ZyXEL SUA Supporting Table1
Application
Required Settings in Port Forwarding
PortIP
Outgoing Connection Incoming
Connection
HTTP None 80client IP
FTP None 21client IP
TELNET None 23client IP
(and active Telnet
service from WAN)
POP3 None 110client IP
SMTP None 25client IP
mIRC
None for Chat
For DCC please set
DefaultClient IP
Windows PPTP None 1723client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
42
ICQ 99a None for Chat
For DCC please set
ICQ -gt preference -gt
connections -gt firewall
and set the firewall time
out to 80 seconds in
firewall setting
Defaultclient IP
ICQ 2000b None for Chat None for Chat
ICQ Phone 2000b None 6701client IP
Cornell 11 Cu-SeeMe None 7648client IP
White Pine 312 Cu-SeeMe2 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
White Pine 40 Cu-SeeMe 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
Microsoft NetMeeting 21 amp
3013
None 1720client IP
1503client IP
Cisco IPTV 200 None
RealPlayer G2 None
VDOLive None
Quake1064 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeII2305 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeIII105 beta None
StartCraft 6112client IP
Quick Time 40 None
pcAnywhere 80 None
5631client IP
5632client IP
22client IP
IPsec (ESP tunneling mode) None (one client only) DefaultClient
Microsoft Messenger Service
30 6901client IP 6901client IP
Microsoft Messenger Service
46 47 50hellip
(none UPnP)6
None for Chat File
transfer Video and Voice
None for Chat File
transfer Video and
Voice
Net2Phone None 6701client IP
Network Time Protocol (NTP) None 123 server IP
Win2k Terminal Server None 3389server IP
Remote Anything None 3996 - 4000client IP
Virtual Network Computing None 5500client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
43
(VNC) 5800client IP
5900client IP
AIM (AOL Instant Messenger) None for Chat and IM None for Chat and
IM
e-Donkey None 4661 - 4662client IP
POLYCOM Video
Conferencing None Defaultclient IP
iVISTA 41 None 80server IP
Microsoft Xbox Live7 None NA 1 Since SUA enables your LAN to appear as a single computer to the Internet
it is not possible to configure similar servers on the same LAN behind SUA 2 Because White Pine Cu-SeeMe uses dedicate ports (port 7648 amp port 24032)
to transmit and receive data therefore only one local Cu-SeeMe is allowed
within the same LAN 3 In SUA mode only one local NetMeeting user is allowed because the
outsiders can not distinguish between local users using the same internet IP 4 Certain Quake servers do not allow multiple users to login using the same
unique IP so only one Quake user will be allowed in this case Moreover
when a Quake server is configured behind SUA P-660HW-Dx v2 will not be
able to provide information of that server on the internet 5 Quake II has the same limitations as that of Quake I 6 P-660HW-Dx v2 supports MSN Messenger 46 47 50hellip video voice
pass-through NAT In addition for the Windows OS supported UPnP
(Universal Plug and Play) such as Windows XP and Windows ME UPnP
supported in P-660HW-Dx v2 is an alternative solution to pass through MSN
Messenger video voice traffic For more detail please refer to UPnP
application note 7 P-660HW-Dx v2 support Microsoft Xbox Live with factory default
configuration
Configurations
For example if the workstation operating Cu-SeeMe has an IP of 192168134
then the default SUA server must be set to 192168134 The peer Cu-SeeMe
user can reach this workstation by using P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
44
which can be obtained from Web Configurator
Configure an Internal Server behind SUA
Introduction
If you wish you can make internal servers (eg Web ftp or mail server)
accessible for outside users even though SUA makes your LAN appear as a
single machine to the outside world A service is identified by the port number
Also since you need to specify the IP address of a server behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 a server must have a fixed IP address and not be a DHCP
client whose IP address potentially changes each time P-660HW-Dx v2 is
powered on
In addition to the servers for specific services SUA supports a default server
A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for is
forwarded to the default server If the default server is not defined the service
request is simply discarded
Configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
45
To make a server visible to the outside world specify the port number of the
service and the inside address of the server in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The outside users can access
the local server using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address which can be
obtained from Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information
For example
Configuring an internal Web server for outside access (suppose the
Server IP Address is 192168110)
(1) Fill in the service name and server IP Address press button bdquoAdd‟
(2) If add successfully the Web Configurator will display message
bdquoConfiguration updated successfully‟ at the bottom You can see the port
forwarding rule on the same page the default port for Web Server is 80
(3) If you want to change the port for Web Server you could press button
bdquoModify‟ on corresponding rule then modify and apply it
Default port numbers for some services
Service Port Number
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
46
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
Configure a PPTP server behind SUA
Introduction
PPTP is a tunneling protocol defined by the PPTP forum that allows PPP
packets to be encapsulated within Internet Protocol (IP) packets and
forwarded over any IP network including the Internet itself
In order to run the Windows 9x PPTP client you must be able to establish an
IP connection with a tunnel server such as the Windows NT Server 40
Remote Access Server
Windows Dial-Up Networking uses the Internet standard Point-to-Point (PPP)
to provide a secure optimized multiple-protocol network connection over
dial-up telephone lines All data sent over this connection can be encrypted
and compressed and multiple network level protocols (TCPIP NetBEUI and
IPX) can be run correctly Windows NT Domain Login level security is
preserved even across the Internet
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
47
Window98 PPTP Client Internet NT RAS Server Protocol Stack
PPTP appears as new modem type (Virtual Private Networking Adapter) that
can be selected when setting up a connection in the Dial-Up Networking folder
The VPN Adapter type does not appear elsewhere in the system Since PPTP
encapsulates its data stream in the PPP protocol the VPN requires a second
dial-up adapter This second dial-up adapter for VPN is added during the
installation phase of the Upgrade in addition to the first dial-up adapter that
provides PPP support for the analog or ISDN modem
The PPTP is supported in Windows NT and Windows 98 already For
Windows 95 it needs to be upgraded by the Dial-Up Networking 12 upgrade
Configuration
This application note explains how to establish a PPTP connection with a
remote private network in the P-660HW-Dx v2 SUA case In ZyNOS all PPTP
packets can be forwarded to the internal PPTP Server (WinNT server) behind
SUA The port number of the PPTP has to be entered in the Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding on
P-660HW-Dx v2 to forward to the appropriate private IP address of Windows
NT server
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
48
Example
The following example shows how to dial to an ISP via the P-660HW-Dx v2
and then establish a tunnel to a private network There will be three items that
you need to set up for PPTP application these are PPTP server (WinNT)
PPTP client (Win9x) and the P-660HW-Dx v2
(1) PPTP server setup (WinNT)
Add the VPN service from Control Panel -gtNetwork
Add an user account for PPTP logged on user
Enable RAS port
Select the network protocols from RAS such as IPX TCPIP NetBEUI
Set the Internet gateway to P-660HW-Dx v2
(2) PPTP client setup (Win9x)
Add one VPN connection from Dial-Up Networking by entering the
correct username amp password and the IP address of the P-660HW-Dx
v2s Internet IP address for logging to NT RAS server
Set the Internet gateway to the router that is connecting to ISP
(3) P-660HW-Dx v2 setup
Before making a VPN connection from Win9x to WinNT server you
need to connect P-660HW-Dx v2 router to your ISP first
Enter the IP address of the PPTP server (WinNT server) and the
port number for PPTP as shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
49
Select service name as bdquoPPTP‟ fill in the Server IP Address then press button
bdquoAdd‟
When you have finished the above settings you can ping to the remote Win9x
client from WinNT This ping command is used to demonstrate that remote
the Win9x can be reached across the Internet If the Internet connection
between two LANs is achievable you can place a VPN call from the remote
Win9x client
For example Cping 203661132
When a dial-up connection to ISP is established a default gateway is assigned
to the router traffic through that connection Therefore the output below shows
the default gateway of the Win9x client after the dial-up connection has been
established
Before making a VPN connection from the Win9x client to the NT server you
need to know the exact Internet IP address that the ISP assigns to
P-660HW-Dx v2 router in SUA mode and enter this IP address in the VPN
dial-up dialog box You can check this Internet IP address from PNC Monitor or
S Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information If the Internet IP address
is a fixed IP address provided by ISP in SUA mode then you can always use
this IP address for reaching the VPN server
In the following example the IP address 1401131225 is dynamically
assigned by ISP You must enter this IP address in the VPN Server dialog box
for reaching the PPTP server After the VPN link is established you can start
the network protocol application such as IP IPX and NetBEUI
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
50
5 Using Full Feature NAT
When P-660HW-Dx v2 is in Routing mode you can select NAT Option as
Full Feature in Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit
Key Settings
Field Options Description
Network Address
Translation
Full Feature
When you select this option you can select
Address Mapping Set Number 1~8 in the
pull-down menu on the right
None NAT is disabled when you select this option
SUA Only
When you select this option this remote node
will use default SUA Address Mapping Set
You can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat
lookup 255‟ It‟s a read-only sets with two
rules Many-to-One and server mapping
Select Full Feature when you require other
mapping types
Configuring NAT
Address Mapping Sets and NAT Server Sets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
51
The P-660HW-Dx v2 has 8 remote nodes and so allows you to configure 8
NAT Address Mapping Sets You must specify which NAT Address Mapping
Set (1~8) to use in the remote node when you select Full Feature NAT
You can edit 10 rules for each Address Mapping Set You can edit the rules for
Address Mapping Sets 1 in Web Configurator The other Address Mapping
Sets 2~8 can only be configured in CLI (Command Line Interface)
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports We
can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Port Forwarding To use the NAT server sets you‟ve configured a Server
rule must be set up inside the NAT Address Mapping set Please see NAT
Server Sets for further information on how to apply it
When you select SUA Only the P-660HW-Dx v2 will use a default SUA
Address Mapping set for it It has two rules Many-to-One and Server You
can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat lookup 255‟
Please note that the fields in this menu are read-only However the settings of
the rule set 2 can be modified in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The following table explains the fields in this
above screen
Field Description OptionExample
set This is sequence number for Address Mapping Sets 255 for SUA
Internal
Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA)
0000 for the
Many-to-One type
Local End
IP
This is the starting local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0000 and the
End IP is 255255255255
255255255255
Global Start
IP
This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you
have a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start
IP
0000
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
52
Global End
IP This is the ending global IP address (IGA) NA
Type This is the NAT mapping types Many-to-One and
Server
Here we‟ll guide you to configure Address Mapping Sets from Web
Configurator and CLI (Since in Web Configurator we can only edit the rules
for Address Mapping Sets 1 The other Address Mapping Sets 2~8 can only
be configured in CLI)
Now lets begin with Web Configurator
Firstly let‟s come to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping
This menu is for Address Mapping Set 1 you can edit 10 Address Mapping
Rules for Set 1 You can edit or remove a rule by clicking the two buttons on
the rule table
Click the bdquoEditrsquo Button on the rule 1 then you can enter the window in which
you can edit an individual rule and configure the Mapping Type Local and
Global StartEnd IPs
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
53
The following table describes the fields in this screen
Field Description OptionExample
Type You can select one of the five mapping types from the
pull-down menu
1 One-to-One
2 Many-to-One
3 Many-to-Many
Overload
4 Many-to-Many No
Overload
5 Server
Local
IP
Start This is the starting local IP address (ILA) 0000
End
This is the ending local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0000 and the
End IP as 255255255255 This field is NA for
One-to-One type
255255255255
Global
IP
Start This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you have
a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start IP 0000
End
This is the ending global IP address (IGA) This
field is NA for One-to-One Many-to-One and Server
types
2001164
Note For all Local and Global IPs the End IP address must begin after the IP
Start address ie you cannot have an End IP address beginning before the
Start IP address
Configure Address Mapping Sets in CLI
Setp 1 Telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 (We suppose the LAN IP Address of
P-660HW-Dx v2 is 19216811)
Step 2 Select one Address Mapping Set (1~8) by command bdquoip nat
addrmap map [map ] [set name]‟ (set name is optional) Suppose we
configure set 2 in the example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
54
Setp 3 Set NAT address mapping rule for the Address Mapping Set you just
configured (Set 2 in this example) by command bdquoip nat addrmap rule [rule]
[insert | edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP] [global start IP] [global
end IP] [server set ]‟ Suppose we set a Many-to-One rule for set 2 by
command bdquoip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 1 192168110 192168120 172111
172111‟
Setp 4 Save the configuration by command bdquoip nat addrmap save‟ You can
apply the Address Mapping Set 2 to remote nodes in Web Configurator when
you select Full Feature NAT See the intire process as follows
Set 5 You can lookup the successfully configured Address Mapping Sets by
command bdquoip nat addrmap disp‟
Key Settings
CI Command Description
ip nat addrmap map [map] [set
name]
Select NAT address mapping set and set mapping set
name but set name is optional
Example
gt ip nat addrmap map 2 Test
ip nat addrmap rule [rule] [insert |
edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP]
[global start IP] [global end IP] [server
set ]
Set NAT address mapping rule If the ldquotyperdquo is not
ldquoinside-serverrdquo then the ldquotyperdquo field will still need a
dummy value like ldquo0rdquo
Type is 0 - 4 = one-to-one many-to-one
many-to-many-overload many-to-many-non overload
inside-server
Example
gt ip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 3 192168110
192168120 172111 172111
ip nat addrmap clear [map] [rule] Clear the selected rule of the set
ip nat addrmap freememory Discard Changes
ip nat addrmap disp Display nat set information
ip nat addrmap save Save settings
ip nat server load [set] Load the server sets of NAT into buffer
ip nat server disp [1] ldquodisp 1rdquo means to display the NAT server set in buffer
if parameter ldquo1rdquo is omitted then it will display all the
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
55
server sets
ip nat server save Save the NAT server set buffer into flash
ip nat server clear [set] Clear the server set [set] must use ldquosaverdquo command
to let it save into flash
ip nat server edit [rule] active Activate the rule [rule] rule number is 1 to 24 the
number 25-36 is for UPNP application
ip nat server edit [rule] svrport ltstart
portgt ltend portgt
Configure the port range from ltstart port gt to ltend
portgt
ip nat server edit [rule] remotehost
ltstart IPgt ltend IPgt
Configure the IP address range of remote host (Leave
it to be default value if you don‟t need this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] leasetime
ltsecondsgt
Configure the lease time (Leave it to be default value if
you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] rulename
ltstringgt
Configure the name of the rule (Leave it to be default
value if you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] forwardip ltIP
addressgt Configure the LAN IP address to be forwarded
ip nat server edit [rule] protocol
ltTCP|UDP|ALLgt
Configure the protocol to be used TCP UDP or ALL
(it must be capital)
NAT Server Sets
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports
(similar to the old SUA menu of before) If you wish you can make inside
servers for different services eg Web or FTP visible to the outside users
even though NAT makes your network appears as a single machine to the
outside world A server is identified by the port number eg Web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21
As an example (see the following figure) if you have a Web server at
192168136 and a FTP server at 192168133 then you need to specify for
port 80 (Web) the server at IP address 192168136 and for port 21 (FTP)
another at IP address 192168133
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
56
Please note that a server can support more than one service eg a server
can provide both FTP and Mail service while another provides only Web
service
The following procedures show how to configure a server behind NAT
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
Step 2 Select the service name from the pull-down menu and fill in the server
Address on bdquoServer IP Address‟ then click button bdquoAdd‟ to save it
Step 3 You could click the button bdquoEdit‟ on the rule to modify the Service name
Server IP Address StartEnd Port
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please
refer RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers
Service Port Number
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol)
1723
Examples
Internet Access Only
Internet Access with an Internal Server
Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
(1) Internet Access Only
In our Internet Access example we only need one rule where all our ILAs map
to one IGA assigned by the ISP You can just use the default SUA NAT or you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
57
could select Full Feature NAT and select an Address Mapping Set with a
Many-to-One Rule See the following figure
(2) Internet Access with an Internal Server
In this case we do exactly as the figure (use the convenient pre-configured
SUA Only set) and also go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
NAT -gt Port Forwarding to specify the Internet Server behind the NAT as
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
58
below
(3) Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
(One-to-One Many-to-One Server Set mapping types are used)
In this case we have 3 IGAs from the ISP We have two very busy internal FTP
servers and also an internal general server for the web and mail In this case
we want to assign the 3 IGAs by the following way using 4 NAT rules
Rule 1 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
Rule 3 (Many-to-One type) to map the other clients to IGA3 (200003)
Rule 4 (Server type) to map a web server and mail server with ILA3
(192168120) to IGA3 Type Server allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types to other machines behind NAT on the LAN
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
59
Step 1 In this case we need to map ILA to more than one IGA therefore we
must choose the Full Feature option from the NAT field in currently active
remote node and assign IGA3 to P-660HW-Dx v2‟s WAN IP Address
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping to begin configuring Address Mapping Set 1 We can see
there are 10 blank rule table that could be configured See the following setup
for the four rules in our case
Rule 1 Setup Select One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 Setup Selecting One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
60
Rule 3 Setup Select Many-to-One type to map the other clients to IGA3
(200003)
Rule 4 Setup Select Server type to map our web server and mail server with
ILA3 (192168120) to IGA3
Menu Network -gt NAT -gt Address Mapping should look as follows now
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
61
Step 3 Now we configure all other incoming traffic to go to our web server and
mail server from Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
(4) Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some mIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address In this case it is better to
use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types thus each
user login to the server using a unique global IP address The following figure
illustrates this
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
62
One rule configured for using Many-to-Many No Overload mapping type is
shown below
We can also do this by configure threeOne-to-One mapping type rules
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
What is DDNS
The DDNS service an IP Registry provides a public central database where
information such as email addresses hostnames IPs etc can be stored and
retrieved This solves the problems if your DNS server uses an IP associated
with dynamic IPs
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to access the internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
must inform the DDNS server the change of this IP so that the server can
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
63
update its IP-to-DNS entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is
updated the DNS name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still
usable
The DDNS servers the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports currently is
WWWDYNDNSORG where you apply the DNS from and update the WAN IP
to
Setup the DDNS
1 Before configuring the DDNS settings in the P-660HW-Dx v2 you must
register an account from the DDNS server such as
WWWDYNDNSORG first After the registration you have a hostname
for your internal server and a password using to update the IP to the
DDNS server
2 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Dynamic DNS
Select Active Dynamic DNS option
Key Settings
Option Description
Service Provider Enter the DDNS server in this field Currently we support
WWWDYNDNSORG
Active Toggle to Yes
Host Name Enter the hostname you subscribe from the above DDNS server
For example zyxelcomtw
User Name Enter the user name that the DDNS server gives to you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
64
Password Enter the password that the DDNS server gives to you
Enable Wildcard
Enter the hostname for the wildcard function that the
WWWDYNDNSORG supports Note that Wildcard option is
available only when the provider is httpwwwdyndnsorg
7 Network Management Using SNMP
ZyXEL SNMP Implementation
ZyXEL currently includes SNMP support in some P-660HW-Dx v2 routers It is
implemented based on the SNMPv1 so it will be able to communicate with
SNMPv1 NMSs Further users can also add ZyXELs private MIB in the NMS
to monitor and control additional system variables The ZyXELs private MIB
tree is shown in figure 3 For SNMPv1 operation ZyXEL permits one
community string so that the router can belong to only one community and
allows trap messages to be sent to only one NMS manager
Some traps are sent to the SNMP manager when anyone of the following
events happens
1 coldStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine coldstarts the trap will be sent after booting
2 warmStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine warmstarts the trap will be sent after booting
3 linkDown (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is down the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
4 linkUp (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is up the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
5 authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215)
When receiving any SNMP get or set requirement with wrong community
this trap is sent to the manager
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
65
6 whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-MIB)
When the system is going to restart (warmstart) the trap will be sent with the
reason of restart before rebooting
(1) For intentional reboot
In some cases (download new files CI command sys reboot ) reboot is
done intentionally And traps with the message System reboot by user will
be sent
(2) For fatal error
System has to reboot for some fatal errors And traps with the message of the
fatal code will be sent
Downloading ZyXELs private MIB
Configure the P-660HW-Dx v2 for SNMP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
66
The SNMP related settings in P-660HW-Dx v2 are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt SNMP The
following steps describe a simple setup procedure for configuring all SNMP
settings
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Get
Community
Enter the correct Get Community This Get Community must match the
Get- and GetNext community requested from the NMS The default is
public
Set
Community
Enter the correct Set Community This Set Community must match the
Set-community requested from the NMS The default is public
Trusted
Host
Enter the IP address of the NMS The P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will only
respond to SNMP messages coming from this IP address If 0000 is
entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will respond to all NMS
managers
Trap
Community
Enter the community name in each sent trap to the NMS This Trap
Community must match what the NMS is expecting The default is
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
67
public
Trap
Destination
Enter the IP address of the NMS that you wish to send the traps to If
0000 is entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will not send trap any
NMS manager
Note You may need to edit a firewall rule to permit SNMP Packets
8 Using syslog
You can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt
Logs -gt Log Settings -gt Syslog logging
Key Settings
Active Select it to active UNIX Syslog
Syslog IP Address Enter the IP address of the UNIX server that you wish to
send the syslog
Log Facility Select from the 7 different local options The log facility lets you
log the message in different server files Refer to your UNIX manual
9 Using IP Alias
What is IP Alias
In a typical environment a LAN router is required to connect two local
networks The P-660HW-Dx v2 can connect three local networks to the ISP or
a remote node we call this function as IP Alias In this case an internal
router is not required For example the network manager can divide the local
network into three networks and connect them to the Internet using
P-660HW-Dx v2s single user account See the figure below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
68
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports three virtual LAN interfaces via its single
physical Ethernet interface The first network can be configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN -gt DHCP Setup The second
and third networks that we call IP Alias 1 and IP Alias 2 can be configured
in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias
There are three internal virtual LAN interfaces for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to route
the packets fromto the three networks correctly They are enif0 for the major
network enif00 for the IP alias 1 and enif01 for the IP alias 2 Therefore
three routes are created in the P-660HW-Dx v2 as shown below when the
three networks are configured If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP is also enabled
the IP pool for the clients can be any of the three networks
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
69
You can edit filter rule to accept or deny LAN packets fromto the IP alias 12
go through the P-660HW-Dx v2 by command in CLI
lan index [index number]
Usage index number =1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt [set]
Usage set= the corresponding filter set number you‟ve configured
lan save
IP Alias Setup
(1) Edit the first network in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
LAN -gt IPDHCP Setup by configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s first LAN IP
address
Key Settings
DHCP
Setup
If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP server is enabled the IP pool for the clients
can be any of the three networks
TCPIP
Setup
Enter the first LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This will create the
first route in the enif0 interface
(2) Edit the second and third networks in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias by
configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s second and third LAN IP addresses
Key Settings
IP Alias 1 Active it and enter the second LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the second route in the enif00 interface
IP Alias 2 Active it and enter the third LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the third route in the enif01 interface
10 Using IP Policy Routing
What is IP Policy Routing (IPPR)
Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router
takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides
a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet
forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator
Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis
prior to the normal routing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
70
traffic among multiple paths For example if a network has both the Internet
and remote node connections we can route the Web packets to the Internet
using one policy and route the FTP packets to the remote LAN using another
policy See the figure below
Use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths
Benefits
Source-Based Routing - Network administrators can use policy-based
routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections
Quality of Service (QoS)- Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the
precedence or TOS (Type of Service) values in the IP header at the periphery
of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic
Cost Savings- IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on
high-bandwidth high-cost path while using low-path for batch traffic
Load Sharing- Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic
among multiple paths
How does the IPPR work
A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet
meets the criteria The action is taken only when all the criteria are met The
criteria include the source address and port IP protocol (ICMP UDP TCP
etc) destination address and port TOS and precedence (fields in the IP
header) and length The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between
interactive and bulk traffic Interactive applications eg Telnet tend to have
short packets while bulk traffic eg file transfer tends to have large packets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
71
The actions that can be taken include routing the packet to a different gateway
(and hence the outgoing interface) and the TOS and precedence fields in the
IP header IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of ZyNOS in style
and in implementation The policies are divided into sets where related
policies are grouped together A use defines the policies before applying them
to an interface or a remote node in the same fashion as the filters There are
12 policy sets with 6 policies in each set
Setup the IP Policy Routing
Setp 1 Set the index of IP routing policy set rule by command bdquoip
policyrouting set index [set] [rule]‟ Suppose set=1 rule=1 in this
example
Step 2 Suppose we‟d like to edit the rule like this
Policy Set Name=Test
Active= Yes
Criteria
IP Protocol = 6
Type of Service= Dont Care Packet length= 0
Precedence = Dont Care Len Comp= NA
Source
addr start= 19216812 end= 192168120
port start= 0 end= NA
Destination
addr start= 0000 end= NA
port start= 80 end= 80
Action= Matched
Gateway addr = 1921681254 Log= No
Type of Service= No Change
Precedence = No Change
This policy example forces the Web packets originated from the clients with IP
addresses from 19216812 to 192168120 be routed to the remote LAN via
the gateway 1921681254
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
ip policyrouting set name Test
(Set the name as Test of IP routing policy rule )
ip policyrouting set active yes
(Enable the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria protocol 6
(Set the protocol ID as 6(TCP) for the rule)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
72
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the criteria type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria packetlength 0
(Set the packet length as 0 for the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcip 19216812 192168120
(Set the source IP address for the rule Start=19216812 end=192168120)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcport 0
(Set the source port for the rule Start=0)
ip policyrouting set criteria destip 0000
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=0000)
ip policyrouting set criteria destport 80 80
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=80 end=80)
ip policyrouting set action actmatched
(Set the action for the rule Matched)
ip policyrouting set action gatewaytype 0
(Set gateway type for the rule Gateway Address)
ip policyrouting set action gatewayaddr 1921681254
(Set the gateway address for the rule 1921681254)
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the action type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the action precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set action log no
(Set log option for the rule no log)
ip polictrouting set save
(Save the rule)
Step 3 Apply the IP policy routing There are two interfaces to apply the policy
set they are the LAN interface and WAN interface It depends where the
gateway specified in the policy rule is located If the gateway you specified is
located on the local LAN you apply the policy set in LAN interface If the
gateway you specified is located on the remote WAN site you apply the policy
set in WAN interface
Apply to WAN Interface (Suppose we apply it to remote node 1 in the
example)
wan node index 1
wan node ippolicy 1
11 Using Call Scheduling
What is Call Scheduling
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
73
Call scheduling enables the mechanism for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to run the
remote node connection according to the pre-defined schedule This feature is
just like the scheduler in a video recorder which records the program according
to the specified time Users can apply at most 4 schedule sets in Remote Node
The remote node configured with the schedule set could be Forced On
Forced Down Enable Dial-On-Demand or Disable Dial-On-Demand on
specified date and time
How to configure a Call Scheduling
You can configure a call scheduling in CLI
Suppose we want to edit a call schedule set like this
Call Schedule Set =1
Set name=Test
Active= Yes
Start Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 - 12 - 27
How Often= Once
Once
Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 -12 -27
Start Time(hhmm)= 12 00
Duration(hhmm)= 16 00
Action= Enable Dial-on-demand
This schedule example permits a demand call on the line on 1200 am
2005-12-27 The maximum length of time this connection is allowed is 16
hours
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
wan callsch index 1
(Set call schedule index = 1 You must apply this command first before you
begin to configure call schedule)
wan callsch name Test
(Set the schedule name as Test)
wan callsch active Yes
(Enable schedule)
wan callsch startdate 2005 12 27
(Set schedule start date as 2005-12-27)
wan callsch oncedate 2005 12 27
(Set the schedule used just once it works on 2005-12-27)
wan callsch starttime 12 00
(Set the schedule start time as 1200)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
74
wan callsch duration 16 00
(Set schedule duration time as 16 hours)
wan callsch action 2
(Set action as dial-on-demand)
wan callsch save
(Save the current call schedule set)
Key Settings
Start Date
Start date of this schedule rule It can be unmatched with weekday
setting For example if Start Date is 20001002(Monday) but Monday
setting in weekday can be No
Forced On The node will always keep up during the setting period It is equivalent
to diable the idel timeout
Forced Down The node will always keep doen during the setting period The
connected remote node will be dropped
Enable
Dial-On-Demand The remote node accepts Dial-on-demand during this period
Disable
Dial-On-Demand
The remote node denies any demand dial during the period For the
existing connected nodes it will be dropped after idle timeout and no
triggered up
Start Time
Duration Start Time and Duration of this schedule
Apply the schedule to the Remote node
Multiple scheduling rules can program in a Remote node and they have
priority For example if we program the sets as 1234 in remote node then
the set 1 will override set 234 set 2 will override 34 and so on
We can apply the schedule to the remote node in CLI by the commands
wan node index []index]
wan node callsch [index]
wan node save
For example if we want to apply the call schedule set 1 to remote node 1 we
could use the commands
wan node index 1
wan node callsch 1
wan node save
Time Service in P-660HW-Dx v2
There is no RTC (Real-Time Clock) chip so the P-660HW-Dx v2 should launch
a mechanism to get current time and date from external server in boot time
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
75
Time service is implemented by the Daytime protocol(RFC-867) Time
protocol(RFC-868) and NTP protocol(RFC-1305) You have to assign an IP
address of a time server and then the P-660HW-Dx v2 will get the date time
and time-zone information from this server You can configure it in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt System -gt Time Setting
12 Using IP Multicast
What is IP Multicast
Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in two ways - unicast or broadcast
Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts Host groups
are identified by class D IP addresses ie those with 1110 as their
higher-order bits In dotted decimal notation host group addresses range from
224000 to 239255255255 Among them 224001 is assigned to the
permanent IP hosts group and 224002 is assigned to the multicast routers
group
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is the protocol used to support
multicast groups The latest version is version 2 (see RFC2236) IP hosts use
IGMP to report their multicast group membership to any immediate-neighbor
multicast routers so the multicast routers can decide if a multicast packet
needs to be forwarded At start up the P-660HW-Dx v2 queries all directly
connected networks to gather group membership
After that the P-660HW-Dx v2 updates the information by periodic queries
The P-660HW-Dx v2 implementation of IGMP is also compatible with version 1
The multicast setting can be turned on or off on Ethernet and remote nodes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
76
IP Multicast Setup
(1) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt LAN -gt IP -gt Advanced Setup
(2) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s remote node in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt Multicast
Key Settings
Multicast IGMP-v1 for IGMP version 1 IGMP-v2 for IGMP version 2
13 Using Bandwidth Management
Why Bandwidth Management (BWM)
Nowadays we have many different traffic types for Internet applications Some
traffic may consume high bandwidth such as FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
Some other traffic may not require high bandwidth but they require stable
supply of bandwidth such as VoIP traffic The VoIP quality would not be good
if all of the outgoing bandwidth is occupied via FTP Additionally chances are
that you would like to grant higher bandwidth for somebody special who is
using specific IP address in your network All of these are reasons why we
need bandwidth management
Using BWM
Setp 1 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gtSummary activate bandwidth management on the interface you
would like to manage We enable the BWM function on WAN interface in this
example
Enter the total speed for this interface that you want to allocate using
bandwidth management This appears as the bandwidth budget of the
interface‟s root class
Select how you want the bandwidth to be allocated Priority-Based means
bandwidth is allocated via priority so the traffic with highest priority would be
served first then the second priority is served secondly and so on If
Fairness-Based is chosen then the bandwidth is allocated by ratio Which
means if A class needs 300 kbps B class needs 600 kbps then the ratio of A
and Bs actual bandwidth is 12 So if we get 450 kbps in total then A would
get 150 kbps B would get 300 kbps We select Priority-Based in this
example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
77
Key Settings
Active
Check the box to enable BWM on the interface Note that if you would like
to manage traffic from WAN to LAN you should apply BWM on LAN
interface If you would like to management traffic from WAN to DMZ
please apply BWM on DMZ interface
Speed Enter the total speed to manage on this interface This value is the budget
of the class trees root
Scheduler
Choose the principle to allocate bandwidth on this interface
Priority-Based allocates bandwidth via priority Fairness-Based allocates
bandwidth by ratio
Maximize
Bandwidth
Usage
Check this box if you would like to give residuary bandwidth from Interface
to the classes who need more bandwidth than configured amount Do not
select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a
bandwidth class or you want to limit the bandwidth of each class at the
configured value (Please note that to meat the second condition you
should also disable Use All Managed Bandwidth in the BWM rule)
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Rule Setup select the interface Service Priority and Allocated
Bandwidth for this rule then click button bdquoAdd‟ to apply this rule
Step 3 You can modify the rule by clicking the button lsquoEditrsquo on the rule
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
78
Key Settings
RuleName Give this rule a name for example WWW
BW Budget Configure the bandwidth you would like to allocate to this rule
Priority Enter a number between 0 and 7 to set the priority of this class The
higher the number the higher the priority The default setting is 3
Use All
Managed
Bandwidth
Check this box if you would like to let this class to borrow bandwidth from
its parents when the required bandwidth is higher than the configured
amount Do not check this if you want to limit the bandwidth of this class
at the configured value(Please note that you should also disable
Maximize Bandwidth Usage on the interface to meet the condition)
Service Select User-defined SIP FTP or H323 to specify the traffic types
Destination
IP Address Enter the IP address of destination that meets this class
Destination
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
Destination
Port Enter the destination port number of the traffic
Source IP
Address
Enter the IP address of source that meats this class Note that for traffic
from LAN to WAN since BWM is before NAT you should use the IP
address before NAT processing
Source
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
79
Source Port Enter the source port number of the traffic
Protocol ID Enter the protocol number for the traffic 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP or 17 for
UDP
After configuration BWM you can check current bandwidth of the configured
traffic in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Monitor
14 Using Zero-Configuration
Zero-Configuration and VC auto-hunting
Zero-Configure feature can help customer to reduce the burden of setting
efforts Whenever system ADSL links up system will send out some probing
patterns system will analyze the packets returned from ISP and decide which
services the ISP may provide Because ADSL is based on a ATM network so
system have to pre-configured a VPIVCI hunting pool before Auto-Configure
function begins to work
The Zero-Configuration feature can hunt the encapsulation and VPIVCI value
and system will automatically configure itself if the hunting result is
successfully This feature has two constraints
1 It supports the ISP provides one kind of service (PPPoEPPPoA etc)
only otherwise the hunting will get confusing and failed
2 VC auto-hunting only supports dynamic WAN IP address If the router is
set a static WAN IP address VC auto-hunting function will be disabled
The entry of hunting pool must also contain the VPI VCI and which kinds of
hunting patterns you wish to send Whenever system send out all the probing
patterns with specific VPIVCI system will wait for 5~10 seconds and get the
response from ISP the response patterns will decide which kinds of ADSL
services of the line will be After that system will save back the correct VPI
VCI and also services (encapsulation) type into profile of WAN interface
Configure the VC auto-hunting preconfigured table
(1) Display auto-haunting preconfigured table by using command from CLI
wan atm vchunt display
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
80
(2) Add items to the auto-haunting preconfigured table by using commands
wan atm vchunt add ltremoteNodeIndexgt ltvpigt ltvcigt ltservice
bit(hex)gt
wan atm vchunt save
Note ltremote nodegt input the remote node index 1-8
ltvpigt vpi value
ltvcigt vci value
ltservicegt it‟s a hex value bit0PPPoEVC (1) bit1PPPoELLC (2)
bit2PPPoAVC (4) bit3PPPoALLC (8) bit4EnetVC (16) bit5 EnetLLC (32)
For example
(1) If you need service PPPoELLC and EnetLLC then the service bits will be
2+32 = 34 (decimal) = 22 (hex) you must input 22
(2) If you want to enable all service for VC hunting the service bits will be
1+2+4+8+16+32=63(decimal)= 3f (hex) you must input 3f
Need to perform save after this by command bdquowan atm vchunt save‟
(3) Delete items from the auto-haunting preconfigured table by useing
command
wan atm vchunt remove ltremote nodegt ltvpigt ltvcigt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
81
Using Zero configuration
You can enabledisable Zero Configuration in Network -gt WAN -gt Advanced
Setup
(1) After configure the auto-haunting preconfigured table You just need a PC
connected to the device LAN Ethernet port with the DSL sync up
(2) Open your web browser to access a Web site It should prompt and request
for your username password of your ISP account if your ISP provide PPPoE
or PPPoA service
(3) After key-in the correct info it will than test the connection If it is
successful it will than close the browser and you can open a new browser to
surf the Internet If the connection test fail it will go back to the page ask for
user name and password
(4) Basically the zero configuration only work on the VC that was preconigured
in the auto-haunting preconfigured table
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2
The common triple play scenario is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
82
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus we could assign different parameters to the PVC (CBR
UBR VBR-RT VBR-nRT) to guarantee different applications
We could configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 via CLI The command is
sys tripleplay set portbase ltEportIDgt ltPVCIDgt
For example sys tripleplay portbase set 1 1
sys tripleplay portbase set 2 2
sys tripleplay portbase set 3 3
The traffic from Ethernet port 1 must be forwarded to PVC1 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet port 2 must be forwarded to PVC2 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet Port3 must be forwarded to PVC3 vice versa
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to configure up to twelve filter sets with six
rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system You can apply up to
four filter sets to a particular port to block multiple types of packets With each
filter set having up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for
a single port
The packet filter function on P-660HW-Dx v2 is the same as before just that
you could only configure the filter set and apply them by command in CLI It‟s
very complex for common users to do it So here‟s the recommendation
(1) Usually if you want to block special packets you could edit a firewall rule in
Web Configurator
032
VOIP Server
IPTV Server
Internet
Server
Others
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
ATUR IP-DSLAM VL-Switch
CPE Access Network ISP
034
055
VOIP Telephone
Video Client
Clients surfing
Internet
Other clients
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
PVC1
PVC2
PVC3
PVC4 132
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
83
(2) By factory default ZyXEL has preconfigured many filter sets for your
reference you can check them by command
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Usage set 1~12 rule 1~6 Commonly the preconfigured filter sets are as
follows ltset 2 rule 1~6gt ltset 3 rule 1gt ltset 4 rule 1gt
sys filter set display
For example
This could satisfy mostly requirement You could select any of them to apply to
the WAN node or LAN Interface on demand The command is as follows
Apply to WAN node
wan node index ltnodegt
Usage node= 1~8 corresponding to the remote node 1~8
wan node filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt
ltset3gt ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to one remote node
wan node save
Apply to LAN Interface
lan index [index]
Usage index=1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
84
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt ltset3gt
ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to LAN Interface
lan save
(3) If you are very advanced user you could edit filter set by the following
command
sys filter set [set] [rule]
Usage Set up a filter set index to edit a set
set 1~12
rule 1~6
sys filter set type [typeID]
Usage typeID tcpip or generic
Note In one filter set you should configure all the rules in one type either
tcpip or generic
sys filter set enable
Usage Enable(active) the rule
sys filter set helliphellip(You could configure a filter rule on demand the newest
command is available on release note)
sys filter set save
Usage Don‟t forget to save the rule everytime you‟ve configured it
Reference Commands
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Set the index of filter set rule you must apply this
command first before you begin to configure the
filter rules
sys filter set name [set name] Set the name of filter set
sys filter set type [tcpip | generic] Set the type of filter rule
sys filter set enable Enable the rule
sys filter set disable Disable the rule
sys filter set protocol [protocol ] Set the protocol ID of the rule
sys filter set sourceroute [yes|no] Set the sourceroute yesno
sys filter set destip [address] [subnet
mask]
Set the destination IP address and subnet mask of
the rule
sys filter set destport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|notequal|less|greater]
Set the destination port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set srcip [address] [subnet
mask] Set the source IP address and subnet mask
sys filter set srcport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|not
Set the source port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
85
equal|less|greater] equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set tcpEstab [yes|no] Set TCP establish option
sys filter set more [yes|no] Set the more option to yesno
sys filter set log [type 0-3= none | match|
notmatch | both ]
Set the log type (it could be 0-3 =none match not
match both)
sys filter set actmatch[type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for match
sys filter set actnomatch [type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for not match
sys filter set offset [] Set offset for the generic rule
sys filter set length [] Set the length for generic rule
sys filter set mask [] Set the mask for generic rule
sys filter set value [(depend on length in
hex)] Set the value for generic rule
sys filter set clear Clear the current filter set
sys filter set save Save the filter set parameters
sys filter set display [set][rule] Display Filter set information Wo parameter it will
display buffer information
sys filter set freememory Discard Changes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
86
Wireless Application Notes
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode
Ad hoc Introduction
What is Ad Hoc mode
Ad hoc mode is a wireless network consists of a number of stations without
access points Without using an access point or any connection to a wired
network a client unit in Ad hoc operation mode can communicate directly to
other client units just as using a cross over Ethernet cable connecting 2 hosts
together via a NIC card for direct connection when configured in Ad hoc mode
without an access point being present Ad hoc operation is ideal for small
networks of no more than 2-4 computers Larger networks would require the
use of one or perhaps several access points
Configuration for Wireless Station A
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
87
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
88
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Configuration for Wireless Station B
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
89
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
90
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Step 7 Station A now are able to connect to Station B
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure Introduction
For Infrastructure WLANs multiple Access Points (APs) like the WLAN to the
wired network and allow users to efficiently share network resources The
Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also
mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
91
Configure Wireless Access Point to Infrastructure mode using Web
configurator
To configure Infrastructure mode of your P-660HW-Dx v2 wireless AP please
follow the steps below
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gt General Configure the basic parameters for Wireless LAN
Step 2 You could click the button bdquoAdvanced Setup‟ for more detailed
configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
92
Configuration Wireless Station to Infrastructure mode
To configure Infrastructure mode on your ZyAIR G-200 Wireless Network
Adapter please follow the following steps
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
93
Step 3 Select Infrastructure from the operation mode pull down menu fill in an
SSID or leave it as any if you wish to connect to any AP than press Apply
Change to take effect
Step 4 Click on Site Survey tab and press search all the available AP will be
listed
Step 5 Double click on the AP you want to associated with
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
94
Step 6 After the client have associated with the selected AP The linked APs
channel current linkup rate SSID link quality and signal strength will show on
the Link Info page You now successfully associate with the selected AP with
Infrastructure Mode
3 MAC Filter
MAC Filter Overview
Users can use MAC Filter as a method to restrict unauthorized stations from
accessing the APs ZyXELs APs provide the capability for checking MAC
address of the station before allowing it to connect to the network This
provides an additional layer of control layer in that only stations with registered
MAC addresses can connect This approach requires that the list of MAC
addresses be configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
95
ZyXEL MAC Filter Implementation
ZyXELs MAC Filter Implementation allows users to define a list to allow or
block association from STAs The filter set allows users to input 12 entries in
the list If Allow Association is selected all other STAs which are not on the list
will be denied Otherwise if Deny Association is selected all other STAs which
are not on the list will be allowed for association Users can choose either way
to configure their filter rule
Configure the WLAN MAC Filter
The MAC Filter related settings in ZyXEL APs are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gtMAC Filter
Before you configure the MAC filter you need to know the MAC address of the
client first If not knowing what your MAC address is please enter a command
ipconfig all after DOS prompt to get the MAC (physical) address of your
wireless client
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gtMAC Filter active MAC Filter
Step 2 Enter the MAC Addresses of wireless cards in the filter set to allow or
deny association from these cards
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Filter Action
Allow or block association from MAC addresses contained in this list If Allow
Association is selected in this field hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list
will be allowed to associate with AP If Deny Association is selected in this field
hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list will be blocked
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
96
MAC Address This field specifies those MAC Addresses that you want to add in the list
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
Introduction
The 80211 standard describes the communication that occurs in wireless
LANs
The Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm is used to protect wireless
communication from eavesdropping because wireless transmissions are
easier to intercept than transmissions over wired networks and wireless is a
shared medium everything that is transmitted or received over a wireless
network can be intercepted
WEP relies on a secret key that is shared between a mobile station (eg a
laptop with a wireless Ethernet card) and an access point (ie a base station)
The secret key is used to encrypt packets before they are transmitted and an
integrity check is used to ensure that packages are not modified during the
transition The standard does not discuss how the shared key is established In
practice most installations use a single key that is shared between all mobile
stations and access points APs You can refer to the User Guide for more
detailed information about it
Setting up the Access Point
You can set up the Access Point from Web configurator Advanced Setup
Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General (You can also configure it via CLI)
Step 1 Select bdquoStatic WEP‟ from the pull down menu bdquoSecurity Mode‟ in Web
Configurator
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
97
Step 2 Set up WEP Key in the Web Configurator You need to set the one of
the following parameters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 5 characters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 10 hexadecimal digits
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 13 characters
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 26 hexadecimal digits
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 29 characters
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 58 hexadecimal digits
There are two ways you can configure the WEP Key
(1) You can put in a special WEP key in the bdquoWEP Key‟ menu directly
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
98
(2) You can also put in an arbitrary sequence of characters in the
bdquoPassphrase‟ and then press button bdquoGenerate‟ to let the P-660HW-Dx v2
generate WEP Key for you
Setting up the Station
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar or right click
the utility icon then select Show Config Utility
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
99
The utility will pop up on your windows screen
Note If the utility icon doesnt exist in your task bar click Start -gt
Programs -gt helliphellip to start the utility
Step 2 Select the Configuration tab
Select bdquoSet Security‟ to configure encryption type and parameters
correspond with access point
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
100
Note You should select Key 1 as default Transmit Key since the P-660HW-Dx
v2 is supposed to use Key 1 by default
Key settings
The WEP Encryption type of station has to equal to the access point
Check ASCII field for characters WEP key or uncheck ASCII field for
Hexadecimal digits WEP key
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
101
Hexadecimal digits dont need to precede by 0x
For example
64-bits with characters WEP key Key1= 2e3f4
64-bits with hexadecimal digits WEP key Key1= 123456789A
5 Site Survey
Introduction
What is Site Survey
An RF site survey is a MAP to RF contour of RF coverage in a particular
facility With wireless system it is very difficult to predict the propagation of
radio waves and detect the presence of interfering signals Walls doors
elevator shafts and other obstacles offer different degree of attenuation This
will cause the RF coverage pattern be irregular and hard to predict
Site survey can help us overcome these problem and even provide us a map
of RF coverage of the facility
Preparation
Below are the steps to complete a simple site survey with simple tools
1 First you will need to obtain a facility diagram such as blueprints This is
for you to mark and take record on
2 Visually inspect the facility walk through the facility to verify the accuracy of
the diagram and mark down any large obstacle you see that may effect the RF
signal such as metal shelf metal desk etc on the diagram
3 Identify users area when doing so ask a question where is wireless
coverage needed and where does not and note and take note on the diagram
this is information is needed to determine the number of AP required
4 Determine the preliminary access point location on the facility diagram base
on the service area needed obstacles power wall jack considerations
Survey on Site
Step 1 With the diagram with all information you gathered in the preparation
phase Now you are ready to make the survey
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
102
Step 2 Install an access point at the preliminary location
Step 3 Use a notebook with wireless client installed and run its utility An utility
will provide information such as connection speed current used channel
associated rate link quality signal strength and etc information as shown in
utility below
Step 4 Its always a good idea to start with putting the access point at the
corner of the room and walk away from the access point in a systematic
manner Record the changes at point where transfer rate drop and the link
quality and signal strength information on the diagram as you go alone
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
103
Step 5 When you reach the farthest point of connection mark the spot Now
you move the access point to this new spot as have already determine the
farthest point of the access point installation spot if wireless service is required
from corner of the room
Step 6 Repeat step 1~5 and now you should be able to mark an RF coverage
area as illustrated in above picutre
Step 7 You may need more than one access point is the RF coverage area
hasn‟t covered all the wireless service area you needed
Step 8 Repeat step 1~6 of survey on site as necessary upon completion you
will have a diagram and information of site survey As illustrated below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
104
Note If there are more than one access point is needed be sure to make the
adjacent access point service area over lap one another So the wireless
station is able to roam For more information please refer to roaming at
6 Configure 8021x and WPA
What is the WPA Functionality
Configuration for Access Point
Configuration for your PC
What is WPA Functionality
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
105
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN
Here comes WPA-PSK Application example for your reference
Configuration for Access point
The IEEE 8021x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the
authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management
Authentication can be done using local user database internal to the
P-660HW-Dx v2 (authenticate up to 32 users) or an external RADIUS server
for an unlimited number of users
Step 1 To change your P-660HW-Dx v2s authentication settings login Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General
-gtSecurity
Step 2 Select lsquoSecurity Mode‟ as WAP-PSK
Step 3 Type the Pre Shared Key in the Pre-Shared Key field
Step 4 Click Apply to finish
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
106
Configuration for your PC
Step 1 Double click on your wireless utility icon in your windows task bar the
utility will pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select the configuration tab type in the SSID (Service Set Identifier)
select the operating Mode as Infrastructure and select proper channel
Step 3 Click Set Security to configure the security parameters
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
107
Step 4 Click OK for finish and begin to Site survey Connect to the AP as you
have configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
108
Step 5 Click Link Info tab if the PC associated and authenticated with AP
successfully we will see the following information
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
109
Support Tool
1 LANWAN Packet Trace
The Prestige packet trace records and analyzes packets running on LAN and
WAN interfaces It is designed for users with technical backgrounds who are
interested in the details of the packet flow on LAN or WAN end of Prestige It is
also very helpful for diagnostics if you have compatibility problems with your
ISP or if you want to know the details of a packet for configuring a filter rule
The format of the display is as following
Packet
[index] [timersecond][channel-receivetransmit][length] [protocol]
[sourceIPport] [destIPport]
There are two ways to dump the trace
Online Trace--display the trace real time on screen
Offline Trace--capture the trace first and display later
The details for capturing the trace in CLI as follows
First of all you need to telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 firstly The password is
Administrator passwords bdquoadmin‟ by default
Online Trace
(1) Trace LAN packet
Disable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
none
Enable to capture the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
110
(2) Trace WAN packet
Disable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
none
Enable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
111
Offline Trace
Disable the capture of the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel
mpoa00 none
Enable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Wait for packet passing through the Prestige over LAN
Disable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw off amp sys trcl sw off
Display the trace briefly by entering sys trcp brief
Display specific packets by using sys trcp parse ltfrom_indexgt ltto_indexgt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
112
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal
Step 1 Initiate a hyper terminal connection from your PC(suppose you
connected to the LAN port of P-660HW-Dx v2)
Step 2 Click the bdquoproperties‟ to configure parameters to telnet to the
P-660HW-Dx v2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
113
Step 3 So that after you invoke the relevant commands you could save the
logs you‟ve captured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
114
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP
Using TFTP client software
Uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Uploaddownload Prestige configurations via LAN
(1) Using TFTP to uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout
in Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 Enter the IP address of the Prestige
Step 5To upload the firmware please save the remote file as ras to
Prestige After the transfer is complete the Prestige will program the upgraded
firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
115
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige The local file is the source
file of the ZyNOS firmware that is available in your hard disk The remote file is
the file name that will be saved in Prestige Check the port number 69 and
512-Octet blocks for TFTP Check Binary mode for file transfering
(2) Using TFTP to uploaddownload SMT configurations via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 To download the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please get the
remote file rom-0 from the Prestige
Step 5 To upload the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please save the
remote file as rom-0 in the Prestige
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
116
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige
The local file is the source file of your configuration file that is available
in your hard disk
The remote file is the file name that will be saved in Prestige
Check the port number 69 and 512-Octet blocks for TFTP
Check Binary mode for file transfering
Using TFTP command on Windows NT
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Download ZyNOS via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] get ras [localfile]
Step 4 Upload P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] put
[localfile] rom-0
Step 5 Download P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP]
get rom-0 [localfile]
Using TFTP command on UNIX
Before you begin
1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Example
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ telnet 19216811
Trying 19216811
Connected to 19216811
Escape character is ^]
Password
rasgt sys stdio 0
(Open a new window)
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get rom-0 [local-rom] lt- change to binary mode
lt- download configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-rom] rom-0 lt- upload configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get ras [local-ras ] lt- download firmware
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-ras] ras lt- upload firmware
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
117
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files
In addition to upload the firmware and configuration file via the console port
and TFTP client you can also upload the firmware and configuration files to
the Prestige using FTP
To use this feature your workstation must have a FTP client software See the
example shown below
Using FTP client software
Note The remote file name for the firmware is ras and the configuration file is
rom-0
Step 1 Use FTP client from your workstation to connect to the Prestige by
entering the IP address of the Prestige
Step2 Press Enter key to ignore the username because the Prestige does
not check the username
Step 3 Enter the CLI password as the FTP login password the default is
admin
Step 4 Enter command bin to set the transfer type to binary
Step 5 Use put command to transfer the file to the Prestige
Example
Step 1 Connect to the Prestige by entering the Prestiges IP and Administrator
password in the FTP software Set the transfer type to Auto-Detect or
Binary
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
118
Step 2 Press OK to ignore the Username prompt
Step 3 To upload the firmware file we transfer the local ras file to overwrite
the remote ras file
To upload the configuration file we transfer the local rom-0 to overwrite
the remote rom-0 file
Step 4 The Prestige reboots automatically after the uploading is finished
Please do not power off the router at this moment
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
119
CI Command Reference
Command Syntax and General User Interface
CI has the following command syntax
command ltiface | device gt subcommand [param]
command subcommand [param]
command | help
command subcommand | help
General user interface
1 Shows the following commands and all major (sub)commands
2 exit Exit Subcommand
To get the latest CI Command list
The latest CI Command list is available in release note of every ZyXEL
firmware release Please goto ZyXEL public WEB site
httpwwwzyxelcomsupportdownload_indexphp to download firmware
package (zip) you should unzip the package to get the release note in PDF
format
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
3
Wireless FAQ 28
General FAQ 28
1 What is a Wireless LAN 28
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN 28
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN 28
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks 29
5 What is an Access Point 29
6 What‟s the difference between IEEE80211abg 29
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
29
8 What is Wi-Fi 29
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band 29
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device 30
11 Can radio signals pass through wall 30
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference
among WLAN products 30
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN 30
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage
any hardware 31
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
31
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support 31
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering 31
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption 31
Advanced FAQ 31
1 What is Ad Hoc mode 31
2 What is Infrastructure mode 31
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area 31
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash
(DSSS) 32
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash
(FHSS) 32
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
32
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range 32
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID) 32
9 What is an ESSID 32
Security FAQ 33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access
Points radio link 33
2 What is WEP 33
3 What is WPA 33
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP 34
5 What is a WEP key 34
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
4
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP 34
7 Can the SSID be encrypted 34
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff
the SSID 34
9 What are Insertion Attacks 34
10 What is Wireless Sniffer 34
11 What is OTIST How do I use it 34
Application Notes 36
General Application Notes 36
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode 36
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
38
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay 40
4 SUA Notes 40
5 Using Full Feature NAT 50
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS) 62
7 Network Management Using SNMP 64
8 Using syslog 67
9 Using IP Alias 67
10 Using IP Policy Routing 69
11 Using Call Scheduling 73
12 Using IP Multicast 75
13 Using Bandwidth Management 76
14 Using Zero-Configuration 79
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 82
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2 82
Wireless Application Notes 86
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode 86
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode 90
3 MAC Filter 94
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) 96
5 Site Survey 101
6 Configure 8021x and WPA 104
Support Tool 109
1 LANWAN Packet Trace 109
Online Trace 109
Offline Trace 111
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal 112
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP 114
Using TFTP client software 114
Using TFTP command on Windows NT 116
Using TFTP command on UNIX 116
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files 117
CI Command Reference 119
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
5
FAQ
ZyNOS FAQ
1 What is ZyNOS
ZyNOS is ZyXELs proprietary Network Operating System It is the platform on
all Prestige routers that delivers network services and applications It is
designed in a modular fashion so it is easy for developers to add new features
New ZyNOS software upgrades can be easily downloaded from our FTP sites
as they become available
2 Whatrsquos Multilingual Embedded Web Configurator
Multilinggual Embedded Web Configurator means that it can display with 3
kinds of languanges English French and German By factory default it
displays with English and you can change it in Web GUI
3 How do I access the P-660HW-Dx v2 Command Line Interface (CLI)
The Command Line Interface is for the Administrator use only and it could be
accessed via telnet session
Note It is protected by super password lsquo1234rsquo by factory default
4 How do I update the firmware and configuration file
You can do this if you access the P-660HW-Dx v2 as Administrator You can
upload the firmware and configuration file to Prestige from Web Condigurator
or using FTP or TFTP client software You CAN NOT upload the firmware and
configuration file via Telnet because the Telnet connection will be dropped
during uploading the firmware Please do not power off the router right after the
FTP or TFTP uploading is finished the router will upload the firmware to its
flash at this moment
Note There may be firmware that could not be upgraded from Web
Configurator In this case ZyXEL will prepare special Upload Software
for you Please read the firmware release note carefully when you want to
upload a new fireware
5 How do I upgradebackup the ZyNOS firmware by using TFTP client
program via LAN
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to transfer the firmware to P-660HW-Dx v2
using TFTP program via LAN The procedure for uploading ZyNOS via TFTP
is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
6
a Use the TELNET client program in your PC to login to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
b Enter CI command sys stdio 0 to disable Stdio idle timeout
c To upgrade firmware use TFTP client program to put firmware in file
ras in the Prestige After data transfer is finished the P-660HW-Dx v2
will program the upgraded firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
d To backup your firmware use the TFTP client program to get file ras
from the Prestige
6 How do I restore P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations by using TFTP client
program via LAN
a Use the TELNET client program in your PC to login to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
b Enter CI command sys stdio 0 disable Stdio idle timeout
c To backup the P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations use TFTP client
program to get file rom-0 from the P-660HW-Dx v2
d To restore the P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations use the TFTP client
program to put your configuration in file rom-0 in the P-660HW-Dx v2
7 What should I do if I forget the system password
In case you forget the system password you can erase the current
configuration and restore factory defaults this way
Use the RESET button on the rear panel of P-660HW-Dx v2 to reset the
router After the router is reset the LAN IP address will be reset to
19216811 the common user password will be reset to user the
Administrator password will be reset to bdquo1234rsquo
8 How to use the Reset button
a Turn your P-660HW-Dx v2 on Make sure the Power LED is on (not
blinking)
b Press the RESET button for longer than one second and shorter than
five seconds and release it If the Power LED begins to blink the
P-660HW-Dx v2‟s wireless auto security function-OTIST has been
enabled
c Press the RESET button for six seconds and then release it If the
Power LED begins to blink the default configuration has been restored
and the P-660HW-Dx v2 restarts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
7
9 What is SUA When should I use SUA
SUA (Single User Account) is a unique feature supported by Prestige router
which allows multiple people to access Internet concurrently for the cost of a
single user account
When Prestige acting as SUA receives a packet from a local client destined for
the outside Internet it replaces the source address in the IP packet header
with its own address and the source port in the TCP or UDP header with
another value chosen out of a local pool It then recomputes the appropriate
header checksums and forwards the packet to the Internet as if it is originated
from Prestige using the IP address assigned by ISP When reply packets from
the external Internet are received by Prestige the original IP source address
and TCPUDP source port numbers are written into the destination fields of the
packet (since it is now moving in the opposite direction) the checksums are
recomputed and the packet is delivered to its true destination This is because
SUA keeps a table of the IP addresses and port numbers of the local systems
currently using it
10 What is the difference between SUA and Full Feature NAT
When you edit a remote node in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt Remote Node -gt Edit there will be three options for you
None
SUA Only
Full Feature
SUA (Single User Account) in previous ZyNOS versions is a NAT set with 2
rules Many-to-One and Server With SUA visible servers had to be mapped
to different ports since the servers share only one global IP
The P-660HW-Dx v2 now has Full Feature NAT which supports five types of
IPPort mapping One to One Many to One Many to Many Overload Many to
Many No Overload and Server You can make special application when you
select Full Feature NAT For example With multiple global IP addresses
multiple severs using the same port (eg FTP servers using port 2120) are
allowed on the LAN for outside access
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports NAT sets on a remote node basis They are
reusable but only one set is allowed for each remote node The P-660HW-Dx
v2 supports 8 sets since there are 8 remote nodes
By fatory default the NAT is select as SUA in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt General -gt NAT Setup
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
8
11 Is it possible to access a server running behind SUA from the outside
Internet How can I do it
Yes it is possible because P-660HW-Dx v2 delivers the packet to the local
server by looking up to a SUA server table Therefore to make a local server
accessible to the outside users the port number and the inside IP address of
the server must be configured (You can configure it in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding)
12 When do I need select Full Feature NAT
Make multiple local servers on the LAN accessible from outside with
multiple global IP addresses
With SUA visible servers had to be mapped to different ports since the
servers share only one global IP But when you select Full Feature you can
make multiple local servers (mapping the same port or not) on the LAN
accessible from outside with multiple global IP addresses
Support Non-NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some MIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address Thus users on the same
network can not login to the same server simultaneously In this case it is
better to use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types
thus each user login to the server using a unique global IP address
13 What IPPort mapping does Multi-NAT support
Multi-NAT supports five types of IPport mapping One to One Many to One
Many to Many Overload Many to Many No Overload and Server The details
of the mapping between ILA and IGA are described as below Here we define
the local IP addresses as the Internal Local Addresses (ILA) and the global IP
addresses as the Inside Global Address (IGA)
One to One In One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps one ILA
to one IGA
Many to One In Many-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps
multiple ILA to one IGA This is equivalent to SUA (ie PAT port
address translation) ZyXELs Single User Account feature that previous
ZyNOS routers supported (the SUA is optional in todays Prestige
routers)
Many to Many Overload In Many-to-Many Overload mode the
P-660HW-Dx v2 maps the multiple ILA to shared IGA
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
9
Many One-to-One In Many One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2
maps each ILA to unique IGA
Server In Server mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps multiple inside
servers to one global IP address This allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types behind the NAT for outside access Note if
you want to map each server to one unique IGA please use the
One-to-One mode
The following table summarizes the five types
NAT Type IP Mapping
One-to-One ILA1lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-One
(SUAPAT)
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-Many
Overload
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA1
ILA4lt---gtIGA2
Many
One-to-One
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA3
ILA4lt---gtIGA4
Server Server 1 IPlt---gtIGA1
Server 2 IPlt---gtIGA1
14 How many network users can the SUANAT support
The Prestige does not limit the number of the users but the number of the
sessions The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports 2048 sessions that you can use the
ip nat session command in CLI to see You can also use bdquoip nat hashTable
wanif0‟ to view the current active NAT sessions
15 What are Device filters and Protocol filters
In ZyNOS the filters have been separated into two groups One group is
called device filter group and the other is called protocol filter
group Generic filters belong to the device filter group TCPIP and IPX filters
belong to the protocol filter group You can configure the filter rule in CLI
Note In ZyNOS you can not mix different filter groups in the same filter set
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
10
16 How can I protect against IP spoofing attacks
The P-660HW-Dx v2s filter sets provide a means to protect against IP
spoofing attacks The basic scheme is as follows
For the input data filter
Deny packets from the outside that claim to be from the inside
Allow everything that is not spoofing us
Filter rule setup
Filter type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Source IP Addr =abcd
Source IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action Not Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
For the output data filters
Deny bounce back packet
Allow packets that originate from us
Filter rule setup
Filter Type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Destination IP Addr =abcd
Destination IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action No Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
11
Product FAQ
1 How can I manage P-660HW-Dx v2
Multilingual Embedded Web GUI for Local and Remote management
CLI (Command-line interface)
Telnet support (Administrator Password Protected ) for remote
configuration change and status monitoring
FTP TFTP sever firmware upgrade and configuration backup and
restore are supported(Administrator Password Protected)
2 What is the default password for Web Configurator
There are two different accounts for P-660HW-Dx v2 Web Configurator
Common User Account and Administrator Account
By factory default the password for the two accounts are
Common User Account user
Administrator Account 1234
You can change the password after you logging in the Web Configurator
Please record your new password whenever you change it The system
will lock you out if you have forgotten your password
3 Whatrsquos the difference between lsquoCommon User Accountrsquo and
lsquoAdministrator Accountrsquo
For Common User Account it can only access the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 and check the current system status
For Administrator Account besides accessing the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 it can also access Winzard setup Advanced setup of
P-660HW-Dx v2
Moreover only with Administrator Password you could manage the
P-660HW-Dx v2 via FTPTFTP or Telnet
4 How do I know the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address assigned by the
ISP
You can view My WAN IP ltfrom ISPgt xxxx shown in Web Configurator
bdquoStatus-gtDevice Information -gtWAN Information‟ to check this IP address
5 What is the micro filter or splitter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
12
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
6 The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Bridge and Router mode whats the
difference between them
When the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet which means
only the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use bridge mode which works as an ADSL modem to
connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account and limit
only one computer to access the Internet
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to add another Internet sharing device
like a router In this case we use the router mode which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
7 How do I know I am using PPPoE
PPPoE requires a user account to login to the providers server If you need to
configure a user name and password on your computer to connect to the ISP
you are probably using PPPoE If you are simply connected to the Internet
when you turn on your computer you probably are not You can also check
your ISP or the information sheet given by the ISP Please choose PPPoE as
the encapsulation type in the P-660HW-Dx v2 if the ISP uses PPPoE
8 Why does my provider use PPPoE
PPPoE emulates a familiar Dial-Up connection It allows your ISP to provide
services using their existing network configuration over the broadband
connections Besides PPPoE supports a broad range of existing applications
and service including authentication accounting secure access and
configuration management
9 What is DDNS
The Dynamic DNS service allows you to alias a dynamic IP address to a static
hostname allowing your computer to be more easily accessed from various
locations on the Internet To use the service you must first apply an account
from several free Web servers such as httpwwwdyndnsorg
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to reach our internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
13
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
updates this IP to DDNS server so that the server can update its IP-to-DNS
entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is updated the DNS
name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still usable
10 When do I need DDNS service
When you want your internal server to be accessed by using DNS name rather
than using the dynamic IP address we can use the DDNS service The DDNS
server allows to alias a dynamic IP address to a static hostname Whenever
the ISP assigns you a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2 sends this IP to the DDNS
server for its updates
11 What is DDNS wildcard Does the P-660HW-Dx v2 support DDNS
wildcard
Some DDNS servers support the wildcard feature which allows the hostname
yourhostdyndnsorg to be aliased to the same IP address as
yourhostdyndnsorg This feature is useful when there are multiple servers
inside and you want users to be able to use things such as
wwwyourhostdyndnsorg and still reach your hostname
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports DDNS wildcard that httpwwwdyndnsorg
supports When using wildcard you simply enter yourhostdyndnsorg in the
Host field in Menu 11 Configure Dynamic DNS
12 Can the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA handle IPSec packets sent by the
IPSec gateway
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA can handle IPSec ESP Tunneling mode We
know when packets go through SUA SUA will change the source IP address
and source port for the host To pass IPSec packets SUA must understand
the ESP packet with protocol number 50 replace the source IP address of the
IPSec gateway to the routers WAN IP address However SUA should not
change the source port of the UDP packets which are used for key
managements Because the remote gateway checks this source port during
connections the port thus is not allowed to be changed
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
14
13 How do I setup my P-660HW-Dx v2 for routing IPSec packets over
SUA
For outgoing IPSec tunnels no extra setting is required
For forwarding the inbound IPSec ESP tunnel A Default server set is required
You could configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding -gt Default Server Setup
It is because SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users So to make an internal server
for outside access we must specify the service port and the LAN IP of this
server in Web configurator Thus SUA is able to forward the incoming packets
to the requested service behind SUA and the outside users access the server
using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address So we have to configure the
internal IPsec client as a default server (unspecified service port) when it acts
a server gateway
14 What is Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping allocates the bandwidth to WAN dynamically and aims at
boosting the efficiency of the bandwidth If there are serveral VCs in the
P-660HW-Dx v2 but only one VC activated at one time the P-660HW-Dx v2
allocates all the Bandwidth to the VC and the VC gets full bandwidth If another
VCs are activated later the bandwidth is yield to other VCs after ward
15 Why do we perform traffic shaping in the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 must manage traffic fairly and provide bandwidth
allocation for different sorts of applications such as voice video and data All
applications have their own natural bit rate Large data transactions have a
fluctuating natural bit rate The P-660HW-Dx v2 is able to support variable
traffic among different virtual connections Certain traffic may be discarded if
the virtual connection experiences congestion Traffic shaping defines a set of
actions taken by the P-660HW-Dx v2 to avoid congestion traffic shaping takes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
15
measures to adapt to unpredictable fluctuations in traffic flows and other
problems among virtual connections
16 What do the parameters (PCR SCR MBS) mean
Traffic shaping parameters (PCR SCR MBS) can be set in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt ATM Setup
Peak Cell Rate(PCR) The maximum bandwidth allocated to this connection
The VC connection throughput is limited by PCR
Sustainable Cell Rate(SCR) The least guaranteed bandwidth of a VC
When there are multi-VCs on the same line the VC throughput is guaranteed
by SCR
Maximum Burst Size(MBS) The amount of cells transmitted through this
VC at the Peak Cell Rate before yielding to other VCs Total bandwidth of the
line is dedicated to single VC if there is only one VC on the line However as
the other VC asking the bandwidth the MBS defines the maximum number of
cells transmitted via this VC with Peak Cell rate before yielding to other VCs
The P-660HW-Dx v2 holds the parameters for shaping the traffic among its
virtual channels If you do not need traffic shaping please set SCR = 0 MBS =
0 and PCR as the maximum value according to the line rate (for example 23
Mbps line rate will result PCR as 5424 cellsec)
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
Constant bit rate(CBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that requires
the user to determine a fixed bandwidth requirement at the time the connection
is set up so that the data can be sent in a steady stream CBR service is often
used when transmitting fixed-rate uncompressed video
Unspecified bit rate(UBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that does
not guarantee any throughput levels and uses only available bandwidth UBR
is often used when transmitting data that can tolerate delays such as e-mail
Variable bit rate(VBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that allows
users to specify a throughput capacity (ie a peak rate) and a sustained rate
but data is not sent evenly You can select VBR for bursty traffic and
bandwidth sharing with other applications It contains two subclasses
Variable bit rate nonreal time (VBR-nRT)
Variable bit rate real time (VBR-RT)
18 What is content filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
16
Internet Content filter allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies
tailored to your needs Content filter gives you the ability to block web sites that
contain key words (that you specify) in the URL You can set a schedule for
when the P-660HW-Dx v2 performs content filtering You can also specify
trusted IP Addresses on LAN for which the P-660HW-Dx v2 will not perform
content filtering You can configure the details about it in Web Configurator
Advanced setup Security -gt Content Filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
17
ADSL FAQ
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems
ADSL provides a dedicated service over a single telephone line cable
modems offer a dedicated service over a shared media While cable modems
have greater downstream bandwidth capabilities (up to 30 Mbps) that
bandwidth is shared among all users on a line and will therefore vary perhaps
dramatically as more users in a neighborhood get online at the same time
Cable modem upstream traffic will in many cases be slower than ADSL either
because the particular cable modem is inherently slower or because of rate
reductions caused by contention for upstream bandwidth slots The big
difference between ADSL and cable modems however is the number of lines
available to each There are no more than 12 million homes passed today that
can support two-way cable modem transmissions and while the figure also
grows steadily it will not catch up with telephone lines for many years
Additionally many of the older cable networks are not capable of offering a
return channel consequently such networks will need significant upgrading
before they can offer high bandwidth services
2 What is the expected throughput
In our test we can get about 16Mbps data rate on 15Kft using the 26AWG
loop The shorter the loop the better the throughput is
3 What is the microfilter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up
You can see the DSL LED Green on the P-660HW-Dx v2s front panel is on
when the ADSL physical layer is up
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL
Depending on the line quality the P-660HW-Dx v2 uses Fall Back and Fall
Forward to automatically adjust the date rate
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
18
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing
Though the LLC-based multiplexing can carry multiple protocols over a single
VC it requires extra header information to identify the protocol being carried
on the virtual circuit (VC) The VC-based multiplexing needs a separate VC for
carrying each protocol but it does not need the extra headers Therefore the
VC-based multiplexing is more efficient
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics
You can use the following CI commands to check the ADSL line
statistics
CIgt wan adsl perfdata
CIgt wan adsl status
CIgt wan adsl linedata far
CIgt wan adsl linedata near
You can also do it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Diagnostic -gt DSL Line -gt DSL Status
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector
The signaling pins on the P-660HW-Dx v2s ADSL connector are pin 3 and pin
4 The middle two pins for a RJ11 cable
9 What is triple play
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
19
More and more TelcoISPs are providing three kinds of services (VoIP Video
and Internet) over one existing ADSL connection
The different services (such as video VoIP and Internet access) require
different Qulity of Service
The high priority is Voice (VoIP) data
The Medium priority is Video (IPTV) data
The low priority is internet access such as ftp etc hellip
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus you can configure each PVC separately to assign different
QoS to different application
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
20
Firewall FAQ
General
1 What is a network firewall
A firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control
policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to
protect a trusted network from an untrusted network The firewall can be
thought of two mechanisms One to block the traffic and the other to permit
traffic
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure
The P-660HW-Dx v2 is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks such as Ping of Death SYN Flood LAND
attack IP Spoofing etc It also uses stateful packet inspection to determine if
an inbound connection is allowed through the firewall to the private LAN The
P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Network Address Translation (NAT) which
translates the private local addresses to one or multiple public addresses This
adds a level of security since the clients on the private LAN are invisible to the
Internet
3 What are the basic types of firewalls
Conceptually there are three types of firewalls
1 Packet Filtering Firewall
2 Application-level Firewall
3 Stateful Inspection Firewall
Packet Filtering Firewalls generally make their decisions based on the header
information in individual packets These headers information include the
source destination addresses and ports of the packets
Application-level Firewalls generally are hosts running proxy servers which
permit no traffic directly between networks and which perform logging and
auditing of traffic passing through them A proxy server is an application
gateway or circuit-level gateway that runs on top of general operating system
such as UNIX or Windows NT It hides valuable data by requiring users to
communicate with secure systems by mean of a proxy A key drawback of this
device is performance
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
21
Stateful Inspection Firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against
defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP
address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the
integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols The flexible
nature of Stateful Inspection firewalls generally provides the best speed and
transparency however they may lack the granular application level access
control or caching that some proxies support
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2
1 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall inspects packets contents and IP
headers It is applicable to all protocols that understands data in the
packet is intended for other layers from network layer up to the
application layer
2 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall performs stateful inspection It takes into
account the state of connections it handles so that for example a
legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request
for that packet and allowed in Conversely an incoming packet
masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be
blocked
3 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall uses session filtering ie smart rules
that enhance the filtering process and control the network session
rather than control individual packets in a session
4 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall is fast It uses a hashing function to
search the matched session cache instead of going through every
individual rule for a packet
5 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall provides email service to notify you for
routine reports and when alerts occur
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet filtering and
NAT built-in
With the spectacular growth of the Internet and online access companies that
do business on the Internet face greater security threats Although packet filter
and NAT restrict access to particular computers and networks however for
the other companies this security may be insufficient because packets filters
typically cannot maintain session state Thus for greater security a firewall is
considered
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a
connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable
a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
22
There are four types of DoS attacks
1 Those that exploits bugs in a TCPIP implementation such as Ping of
Death and Teardrop
2 Those that exploits weaknesses in the TCPIP specification such as
SYN Flood and LAND Attacks
3 Brute-force attacks that flood a network with useless data such as
Smurf attack
4 IP Spoofing
7 What is Ping of Death attack
Ping of Death uses a PING utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the
maximum 65535 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification The oversize
packet is then sent to an unsuspecting system Systems may crash hang or
reboot
8 What is Teardrop attack
Teardrop attack exploits weakness in the reassemble of the IP packet
fragments As data is transmitted through a network IP packets are often
broken up into smaller chunks Each fragment looks like the original packet
except that it contains an offset field The Teardrop program creates a series of
IP fragments with overlapping offset fields When these fragments are
reassembled at the destination some systems will crash hang or reboot
9 What is SYN Flood attack
SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each
packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response While the
targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK it queues up all
outstanding SYN-ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue
SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when
an internal timer (which is set a relatively long intervals) terminates the TCP
three-way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all
incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users
10 What is LAND attack
In a LAN attack hackers flood SYN packets to the network with a spoofed
source IP address of the targeted system This makes it appear as if the host
computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the
target system tries to respond to itself
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
23
11 What is Brute-force attack
A Brute-force attack such as Smurf attack targets a feature in the IP
specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting to quickly flood the
target network with useless data A Smurf hacker flood a destination IP
address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network the router will
broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network If there
are numerous hosts this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request
packet the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the intermediary
network but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address
known as the victim network This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all
available bandwidth making communications impossible
12 What is IP Spoofing attack
Many DoS attacks also use IP Spoofing as part of their attack IP Spoofing
may be used to break into systems to hide the hackers identity or to magnify
the effect of the DoS attack IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain
unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking
that the communications are coming from within the trusted network To
engage in IP Spoofing a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it
appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed
through the router or firewall
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
There are two default ACLs pre-configured in the P-660HW-Dx v2 one allows
all connections from LAN to WAN and the other blocks all connections from
WAN to LAN except of the DHCP packets
Configuration
1 How do I configure the firewall
You can use the Web Configurator to configure the firewall for P-660HW-Dx v2
By factory default if you connect your PC to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 you can access Web Configurator via bdquohttp19216811‟
Note Donrsquot forget to type in the Administrator Password
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall
There are several ways to protect others from touching the settings of your
firewall
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
24
1 Change the default Administrator password since it is required when
setting up the firewall
2 Limit who can access to your P-660HW-Dx v2‟s Web Configurator or
CLI You can enter the IP address of the secured LAN host in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt
[Service] -gtSecured Client IP to allow special access to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
The default value in this field is 0000 which means you do not care which
host is trying to telnet your P-660HW-Dx v2 or accessthe Web
Configurator of
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN
There are four reasons that WWWTelnet from WAN is blocked
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable Telnet from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow WWWTelnet connection
from WAN The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
WWW (For accessing Web Configurator)
Source IP= Remote trusted host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP80
Action=Forward
TELNET (For accessing Command Line Interface)
Source IP= Telnet Client host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP23
Action=Forward
(2)You have disabled WWWTelnet service in Web Configurator Advanced
setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
25
(3) WWWTelnet service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host
entered in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote
MGNT
(4)A filter set which blocks WWWTelnet from WAN is applied to WAN node
You can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using FTP over
WAN
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable FTP from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow FTP connection from WAN
The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
Source IP= FTP host
Destination IP= P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP
Service= FTP TCP21 TCP20
Action=Forward
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
26
(2) You have disabled FTP service in Web Configurator Advanced setup
Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(3) FTP service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host entered
in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(4) A filter set which blocks FTP from WAN is applied to WAN node You
can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
Log and Alert
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the firewall log immediately when the packet
matches a firewall rule The log for Default Firewall Policy (LAN to WAN WAN
to LAN WAN to WAN) is generated automatically with factory default setting
but you can change it in Web Configurator
2 What does the log show to us
The log supports up to 128 entries There are 5 columns for each entry Please
see the example shown below
3 How do I view the firewall log
All logs generated in P-660HW-Dx v2 including firewall logs IPSec logs
system logs are migrated to centralized logs So you can view firewall logs in
Centralized logs Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs
-gtView Log
The log keeps 128 entries the new entries will overwrite the old entries when
the log has over 128 entries
Before you can view firewall logs there are two steps you need to do
(1) Enable log function in Centralized logs setup via either one of the following
methods
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
27
Web configuration Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log
Settings check Access Control and Attacks options depending on
your real situation
CI command sys logs category [access | attack]
(2) Enable log function in firewall default policy or in firewall rules
After the above two steps you can view firewall logs via
Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gtView
Log
View the log by CI command sys logs disp
You can also view Centralized logs via mail or syslog please configure mail
server or Unix Syslog server in Web configuration Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the alert when an attack is detected by the
firewall and sends it via Email So to send the alert you must configure the
mail server and Email address using Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings You can also specify how frequently
you want to receive the alert in it
5 What is the difference between the log and alert
A log entry is just added to the log inside the P-660HW-Dx v2 and e-mailed
together with all other log entries at the scheduled time as configured An alert
is e-mailed immediately after an attacked is detected
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
28
Wireless FAQ
General FAQ
1 What is a Wireless LAN
Wireless LANs provide all the functionality of wired LANs without the need for
physical connections (wires) Data is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier
and transmitted through the ether Typical bit-rates are 11Mbps and 54Mbps
although in practice data throughput is half of this Wireless LANs can be
formed simply by equipping PCs with wireless NICs If connectivity to a wired
LAN is required an Access Point (AP) is used as a bridging device APs are
typically located close to the centre of the wireless client population
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN
Mobility Wireless LAN systems can provide LAN users with access to
real-time information anywhere in their organization This mobility supports
productivity and service opportunities not possible with wired networks
Installation Speed and Simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be
fast and easy and can eliminate the need to pull cable through walls and
ceilings
Installation Flexibility Wireless technology allows the network to go where
wire cannot go
Reduced Cost-of-Ownership While the initial investment required for
wireless LAN hardware can be higher than the cost of wired LAN hardware
overall installation expenses and life-cycle costs can be significantly lower
Long-term cost benefits are greatest in dynamic environments requiring
frequent moves and changes
Scalability Wireless LAN systems can be configured in a variety of topologies
to meet the needs of specific applications and installations Configurations are
easily changed and range from peer-to-peer networks suitable for a small
number of users to full infrastructure networks of thousands of users that
enable roaming over a broad area
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN
The speed of Wireless LAN is still relatively slower than wired LAN The setup
cost of Wireless LAN is relative high because the equipment cost including
access point and PCMCIA Wireless LAN card is higher than hubs and CAT 5
cables
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
29
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks
Airports hotels and even coffee shops like Starbucks are deploying 80211
networks so people can wirelessly surf the Internet with their laptops
5 What is an Access Point
The AP (access point also known as a base station) is the wireless server that
with an antenna and a wired Ethernet connection that broadcasts information
using radio signals AP typically acts as a bridge for the clients It can pass
information to wireless LAN cards that have been installed in computers or
laptops allowing those computers to connect to the campus network and the
Internet without wires
6 Whatrsquos the difference between IEEE80211abg
The IEEE 80211 is a wireless LAN industry standard and the objective of
IEEE 80211 is to make sure that different manufactures wireless LAN devices
can communicate to each other Below is a brief comparison for the
IEEE80211 abg
Publish
Time
Frequency
Band(GHZ)
Data Rate(Mbps) Compatibility
IEEE80211a 1999 UNII Band
515~5825
691218243648
54
Only work with
80211a
devices
IEEE80211b 1999 ISM Band
24~24835
125511 -
IEEE80211g 2001 ISM Band
24~24835
691218243648
54
Backward
compatible with
80211b
devices
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
Yes As long as the products comply to the same IEEE 80211 standard The
Wi-Fi logo is used to define 80211b compatible products Wi-Fi5 is a
compatibility standard for 80211a products running in the 5GHz band
8 What is Wi-Fi
The Wi-Fi logo signifies that a product is interoperable with wireless
networking equipment from other vendors A Wi-Fi logo product has been
tested and certified by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA)
The Socket Wireless LAN Card is Wi-Fi certified and that means that it will
work (interoperate) with any brand of Access Point that is also Wi-Fi certified
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band
Various spread spectrum radio communication applications use the 24 GHz
band This includes WLAN systems (not necessarily of the type IEEE
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
30
80211b) cordless phones wireless medical telemetry equipment and
Bluetoothtrade short-range wireless applications which include connecting
printers to computers and connecting modems or hands-free kits to mobile
phones
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device
Any time devices are operated in the same frequency band there is the
potential for interference
Both the 80211bg and Bluetooth devices occupy the same24-to-2483-GHz
unlicensed frequency range-the same band But a Bluetooth device would not
interfere with other 80211 devices much more than another 80211 device
would interefere While more collisions are possible with the introduction of a
Bluetooth device they are also possible with the introduction of another 80211
device or a new 24 GHz cordless phone for that matter But BlueTooth
devices are usually low-power so the effects that a Bluetooth device may have
on an 80211 network if any arent far-reaching
11 Can radio signals pass through wall
Transmitting through a wall is possible depending upon the material used in its
construction In general metals and substances with a high water content do
not allow radio waves to pass through Metals reflect radio waves and concrete
attenuates radio waves The amount of attenuation suffered in passing through
concrete will be a function of its thickness and amount of metal re-enforcement
used
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference among WLAN
products
Factors of interference
(1) Obstacles walls ceilings furniturehellip etc
(2) Building Materials metal door aluminum studs
(3) Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors
Solution
(1) Minimizing the number of walls and ceilings
(2) Antenna is positioned for best reception
(3) Keep WLAN products away from electrical devices eg microwaves
monitors electric motorshellip etc
(4) Add additional APs if necessary
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN
WLANs are generally privately owned wireless systems that are deployed in a
corporation warehouse hospital or educational campus setting Data rates
are high and there are no per-packet charges for data transmission
WWANs are generally publicly shared data networks designed to provide
coverage in metropolitan areas and along traffic corridors WWANs are owned
by a service provider or carrier Data rates are low and charges are based on
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
31
usage Specialized applications are characteristically designed around short
burst messaging
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage any
hardware
Yes it will not harm the hardware but the module will not be detected and
work after inserting to the slot You need to reboot the router to initialize the
module
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
The wireless security modes supported on P-660HW-Dx v2 are Static
WEP WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK and WPA2
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
It supports IEEE 80211bgg+ standard
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering
Yes it supports up to 32 MAC Address filtering
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption
Yes it means that the AP on P-660HW-Dx v2 will automatically decelerate
when devices move beyond the optimal range or other interference is present
If the device moves back within the range of a higher-speed transmission the
connection will automatically speed up again Rate shifting is a physical-layer
mechanism transparent to the user and the upper layers of the protocol stack
Advanced FAQ
1 What is Ad Hoc mode
A wireless network consists of a number of stations without using an access
point or any connection to a wired network
2 What is Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure mode implies connectivity to a wired communications
infrastructure If such connectivity is required the Access Points must be used
to connect to the wired LAN backbone Wireless clients have their
configurations set for infrastructure mode in order to utilise access points
relaying
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area
This depends on the surrounding terrain the diameter of the client population
and the number of clients If an area is large with dispersed pockets of
populations then extension points can be used for extend coverage
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
32
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (DSSS)
DSSS spreads its signal continuously over a wide frequency band DSSS
maps the information bearing bit-pattern at the sending station into a higher
data rate bit sequence using a chipping code The chipping code (also known
as processing gain) introduces redundancy which allows data recovery if
certain bit errors occur during transmission The FCC rules the minimum
processing gain should be 10 typical systems use processing gains of 20
IEEE 80211b specifies the use of DSSS
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (FHSS)
FHSS uses a narrowband carrier which hops through a predefined sequence
of several frequencies at a specific rate This avoids problems with fixed
channel narrowband noise and simple jamming Both transmitter and receiver
must have their hopping sequences synchronized to create the effect of a
single logical channel To an unsynchronised receiver an FHSS transmission
appears to be short-duration impulse noise 80211 may use FHSS or DSSS
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
No Provided the antenna is optimally designed for 24GHz or 5GHz operation
WLAN NICs often include an internal antenna which may provide sufficient
reception
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range
This frequency range has been set aside by the FCC and is generally labeled
the ISM band A few years ago Apple and several other large corporations
requested that the FCC allow the development of wireless networks within this
frequency range What we have today is a protocol and system that allows for
unlicensed use of radios within a prescribed power level The ISM band is
populated by Industrial Scientific and Medical devices that are all low power
devices but can interfere with each other
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID)
SSID is a configurable identification that allows clients to communicate to the
appropriate base station With proper configuration only clients that are
configured with the same SSID can communicate with base stations having
the same SSID SSID from a security point of view acts as a simple single
shared password between base stations and clients
9 What is an ESSID
ESSID stands for Extended Service Set Identifier and identifies the wireless
LAN The ESSID of the mobile device must match the ESSID of the AP to
communicate with the AP The ESSID is a 32-character maximum string and is
case-sensitive
Security FAQ
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Points
radio link
To secure the date across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Point‟s radio link we
could select any one of the security mode Static 64128256 bit WEP
WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK WPA2
2 What is WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security mechanism defined within the
80211 standard and designed to make the security of the wireless medium
equal to that of a cable (wire) WEP data encryption was designed to prevent
access to the network by intruders and to prevent the capture of wireless
LAN traffic through eavesdropping WEP allows the administrator to define a
set of respective Keys for each wireless network user based on a Key
String passed through the WEP encryption algorithm Access is denied by
anyone who does not have an assigned key Note WEP has shown to have
fundamental flaws in its key generation processing
3 What is WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN You can refer to
the User Guide for more information about it
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP
40 bit WEP and 64 bit WEP are the same encryption level and can interoperate
The lower level of WEP encryption uses a 40 bit (10 Hex character) as secret
key (set by user) and a 24 bit Initialization Vector (not under user control)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
34
(40+24=64) Some vendors refer to this level of WEP as 40 bit others as 64
bit
5 What is a WEP key
A WEP key is a user defined string of characters used to encrypt and decrypt
data
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP
No 128-bit WEP will not communicate with 64-bit WEP Although 128 bit WEP
also uses a 24 bit Initialization Vector but it uses a 104 bit as secret key Users
need to use the same encryption level in order to make a connection
7 Can the SSID be encrypted
No WEP only encrypts the data packets not the 80211 management
packetsThe SSID is in the beacon and probe management messages and
SSID goes over the air in clear text This makes obtaining the SSID easy by
sniffing 80211 wireless traffic
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff the SSID
Many APs by default have broadcasting the SSID turned on Sniffers typically
will find the SSID in the broadcast beacon packets Turning off the broadcast of
SSID in the beacon message (a common practice) does not prevent getting
the SSID since the SSID is sent in the clear in the probe message when a
client associates to an AP a sniffer just has to wait for a valid user to associate
to the network to see the SSID
9 What are Insertion Attacks
The insertion attacks are based on placing unauthorized devices on the
wireless network without going through a security process and review
10 What is Wireless Sniffer
An attacker can sniff and capture legitimate traffic Many of the sniffer tools for
Ethernet are based on capturing the first part of the connection session where
the data would typically include the username and password An intruder can
masquerade as that user by using this captured information An intruder who
monitors the wireless network can apply this same attack principle on the
wireless
11 What is OTIST How do I use it
OTIST is acronym for ZyXEL‟s bdquoOne Touch Intelligent Security Technology‟
It enables P-660HW-Dx v2 and ZyXEL‟s OTIST supported Wireless adapters
to establish connections of the WPA-PSK security mode automatically with
just one touch at the reset button on rear panel
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
35
To use this function on P-660HW-Dx v2 you could press the reset button on
P-660HW-Dx v2 for 1~5 seconds the OTIST is actived The P-660HW-Dx v2
will enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA-PSK automatically if no
WLAN security has been set The default setup key for OTIST is bdquo01234567‟
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
36
Application Notes
General Application Notes
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode
Setup your workstation
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
If the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet that means only
the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as an ADSL bridge
modem to connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account
and limit only one computer to access the Internet
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
To connect your computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN port the computer
must have an Ethernet adapter card installed For connecting a single
computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2 we use a Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
In most cases the IP address of the computer is assigned by the ISP
dynamically so you have to configure the computer as a DHCP client which
obtains the IP from the ISP using DHCP protocol The ISP may also provide
the gateway DNS via DHCP if they are available Otherwise please enter the
static IP addresses for all that the ISP gives to you in the network TCPIP
settings For Windows we check the option Obtain an IP address
automatically in its TCPIP setup please see the example shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
37
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
bridge mode We will use Web Configurator to guide you through the related
menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as bridge mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
(2)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
38
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For example
LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
(2) Turn off DHCP Server and configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 in
Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN We use 19216811 as
the LAN IP for P-660HW-Dx v2 in this case
Step 1 Disactive DHCP Server and apply it
Step 2 Assign an IP to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx v2 eg
19216811
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to install an Internet sharing device like
a router In this case we use the P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
Connect the LAN ports of all computers to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 using Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
Since the P-660HW-Dx v2 is set to DHCP server as default so you need only
to configure the workstations as the DHCP clients in the networking settings In
this case the IP address of the computer is assigned by the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 can also provide the DNS to the clients via DHCP if it is
available For this setup in Windows we check the option Obtain an IP
address automatically in its TCPIP setup Please see the example shown
below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
39
Set up your P-660HW-Dx v2 under routing mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
Routing mode for routing traffic We will use Web Configurator to guide you
through the related menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as routing mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For
example LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
IP Address
Assignment
Set to Dynamic if the ISP provides the IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2
dynamically Otherwise set to Static and enter the IP in the IP
Address field
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
40
(2) Configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 and the DHCP settings in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
What is DHCP Relay
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In addition to the
DHCP server feature the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports the DHCP relay function
When it is configured as DHCP server it assigns the IP addresses to the LAN
clients When it is configured as DHCP relay it is responsible for forwarding
the requests and responses negotiating between the DHCP clients and the
server See figure 1
Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
We could set the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay by the following command
in CLI
Ip dhcp enif0 mode relay
Ip dhcp enif0 relay server [Server IP Address]
4 SUA Notes
Tested SUANAT Applications (eg Cu-SeeMe ICQ NetMeeting)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
41
Introduction
Generally SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users However some applications
such as Cu-SeeMe and ICQ will need to connect to the local user behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 In such case a SUA server must be configured to forward
the incoming packets to the true destination behind SUA After the required
server are configured in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding the internal server or client applications can be accessed
by using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP Address
SUA Supporting Table
The following are the required Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding for the various applications running SUA mode
ZyXEL SUA Supporting Table1
Application
Required Settings in Port Forwarding
PortIP
Outgoing Connection Incoming
Connection
HTTP None 80client IP
FTP None 21client IP
TELNET None 23client IP
(and active Telnet
service from WAN)
POP3 None 110client IP
SMTP None 25client IP
mIRC
None for Chat
For DCC please set
DefaultClient IP
Windows PPTP None 1723client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
42
ICQ 99a None for Chat
For DCC please set
ICQ -gt preference -gt
connections -gt firewall
and set the firewall time
out to 80 seconds in
firewall setting
Defaultclient IP
ICQ 2000b None for Chat None for Chat
ICQ Phone 2000b None 6701client IP
Cornell 11 Cu-SeeMe None 7648client IP
White Pine 312 Cu-SeeMe2 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
White Pine 40 Cu-SeeMe 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
Microsoft NetMeeting 21 amp
3013
None 1720client IP
1503client IP
Cisco IPTV 200 None
RealPlayer G2 None
VDOLive None
Quake1064 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeII2305 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeIII105 beta None
StartCraft 6112client IP
Quick Time 40 None
pcAnywhere 80 None
5631client IP
5632client IP
22client IP
IPsec (ESP tunneling mode) None (one client only) DefaultClient
Microsoft Messenger Service
30 6901client IP 6901client IP
Microsoft Messenger Service
46 47 50hellip
(none UPnP)6
None for Chat File
transfer Video and Voice
None for Chat File
transfer Video and
Voice
Net2Phone None 6701client IP
Network Time Protocol (NTP) None 123 server IP
Win2k Terminal Server None 3389server IP
Remote Anything None 3996 - 4000client IP
Virtual Network Computing None 5500client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
43
(VNC) 5800client IP
5900client IP
AIM (AOL Instant Messenger) None for Chat and IM None for Chat and
IM
e-Donkey None 4661 - 4662client IP
POLYCOM Video
Conferencing None Defaultclient IP
iVISTA 41 None 80server IP
Microsoft Xbox Live7 None NA 1 Since SUA enables your LAN to appear as a single computer to the Internet
it is not possible to configure similar servers on the same LAN behind SUA 2 Because White Pine Cu-SeeMe uses dedicate ports (port 7648 amp port 24032)
to transmit and receive data therefore only one local Cu-SeeMe is allowed
within the same LAN 3 In SUA mode only one local NetMeeting user is allowed because the
outsiders can not distinguish between local users using the same internet IP 4 Certain Quake servers do not allow multiple users to login using the same
unique IP so only one Quake user will be allowed in this case Moreover
when a Quake server is configured behind SUA P-660HW-Dx v2 will not be
able to provide information of that server on the internet 5 Quake II has the same limitations as that of Quake I 6 P-660HW-Dx v2 supports MSN Messenger 46 47 50hellip video voice
pass-through NAT In addition for the Windows OS supported UPnP
(Universal Plug and Play) such as Windows XP and Windows ME UPnP
supported in P-660HW-Dx v2 is an alternative solution to pass through MSN
Messenger video voice traffic For more detail please refer to UPnP
application note 7 P-660HW-Dx v2 support Microsoft Xbox Live with factory default
configuration
Configurations
For example if the workstation operating Cu-SeeMe has an IP of 192168134
then the default SUA server must be set to 192168134 The peer Cu-SeeMe
user can reach this workstation by using P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
44
which can be obtained from Web Configurator
Configure an Internal Server behind SUA
Introduction
If you wish you can make internal servers (eg Web ftp or mail server)
accessible for outside users even though SUA makes your LAN appear as a
single machine to the outside world A service is identified by the port number
Also since you need to specify the IP address of a server behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 a server must have a fixed IP address and not be a DHCP
client whose IP address potentially changes each time P-660HW-Dx v2 is
powered on
In addition to the servers for specific services SUA supports a default server
A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for is
forwarded to the default server If the default server is not defined the service
request is simply discarded
Configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
45
To make a server visible to the outside world specify the port number of the
service and the inside address of the server in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The outside users can access
the local server using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address which can be
obtained from Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information
For example
Configuring an internal Web server for outside access (suppose the
Server IP Address is 192168110)
(1) Fill in the service name and server IP Address press button bdquoAdd‟
(2) If add successfully the Web Configurator will display message
bdquoConfiguration updated successfully‟ at the bottom You can see the port
forwarding rule on the same page the default port for Web Server is 80
(3) If you want to change the port for Web Server you could press button
bdquoModify‟ on corresponding rule then modify and apply it
Default port numbers for some services
Service Port Number
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
46
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
Configure a PPTP server behind SUA
Introduction
PPTP is a tunneling protocol defined by the PPTP forum that allows PPP
packets to be encapsulated within Internet Protocol (IP) packets and
forwarded over any IP network including the Internet itself
In order to run the Windows 9x PPTP client you must be able to establish an
IP connection with a tunnel server such as the Windows NT Server 40
Remote Access Server
Windows Dial-Up Networking uses the Internet standard Point-to-Point (PPP)
to provide a secure optimized multiple-protocol network connection over
dial-up telephone lines All data sent over this connection can be encrypted
and compressed and multiple network level protocols (TCPIP NetBEUI and
IPX) can be run correctly Windows NT Domain Login level security is
preserved even across the Internet
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
47
Window98 PPTP Client Internet NT RAS Server Protocol Stack
PPTP appears as new modem type (Virtual Private Networking Adapter) that
can be selected when setting up a connection in the Dial-Up Networking folder
The VPN Adapter type does not appear elsewhere in the system Since PPTP
encapsulates its data stream in the PPP protocol the VPN requires a second
dial-up adapter This second dial-up adapter for VPN is added during the
installation phase of the Upgrade in addition to the first dial-up adapter that
provides PPP support for the analog or ISDN modem
The PPTP is supported in Windows NT and Windows 98 already For
Windows 95 it needs to be upgraded by the Dial-Up Networking 12 upgrade
Configuration
This application note explains how to establish a PPTP connection with a
remote private network in the P-660HW-Dx v2 SUA case In ZyNOS all PPTP
packets can be forwarded to the internal PPTP Server (WinNT server) behind
SUA The port number of the PPTP has to be entered in the Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding on
P-660HW-Dx v2 to forward to the appropriate private IP address of Windows
NT server
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
48
Example
The following example shows how to dial to an ISP via the P-660HW-Dx v2
and then establish a tunnel to a private network There will be three items that
you need to set up for PPTP application these are PPTP server (WinNT)
PPTP client (Win9x) and the P-660HW-Dx v2
(1) PPTP server setup (WinNT)
Add the VPN service from Control Panel -gtNetwork
Add an user account for PPTP logged on user
Enable RAS port
Select the network protocols from RAS such as IPX TCPIP NetBEUI
Set the Internet gateway to P-660HW-Dx v2
(2) PPTP client setup (Win9x)
Add one VPN connection from Dial-Up Networking by entering the
correct username amp password and the IP address of the P-660HW-Dx
v2s Internet IP address for logging to NT RAS server
Set the Internet gateway to the router that is connecting to ISP
(3) P-660HW-Dx v2 setup
Before making a VPN connection from Win9x to WinNT server you
need to connect P-660HW-Dx v2 router to your ISP first
Enter the IP address of the PPTP server (WinNT server) and the
port number for PPTP as shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
49
Select service name as bdquoPPTP‟ fill in the Server IP Address then press button
bdquoAdd‟
When you have finished the above settings you can ping to the remote Win9x
client from WinNT This ping command is used to demonstrate that remote
the Win9x can be reached across the Internet If the Internet connection
between two LANs is achievable you can place a VPN call from the remote
Win9x client
For example Cping 203661132
When a dial-up connection to ISP is established a default gateway is assigned
to the router traffic through that connection Therefore the output below shows
the default gateway of the Win9x client after the dial-up connection has been
established
Before making a VPN connection from the Win9x client to the NT server you
need to know the exact Internet IP address that the ISP assigns to
P-660HW-Dx v2 router in SUA mode and enter this IP address in the VPN
dial-up dialog box You can check this Internet IP address from PNC Monitor or
S Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information If the Internet IP address
is a fixed IP address provided by ISP in SUA mode then you can always use
this IP address for reaching the VPN server
In the following example the IP address 1401131225 is dynamically
assigned by ISP You must enter this IP address in the VPN Server dialog box
for reaching the PPTP server After the VPN link is established you can start
the network protocol application such as IP IPX and NetBEUI
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
50
5 Using Full Feature NAT
When P-660HW-Dx v2 is in Routing mode you can select NAT Option as
Full Feature in Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit
Key Settings
Field Options Description
Network Address
Translation
Full Feature
When you select this option you can select
Address Mapping Set Number 1~8 in the
pull-down menu on the right
None NAT is disabled when you select this option
SUA Only
When you select this option this remote node
will use default SUA Address Mapping Set
You can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat
lookup 255‟ It‟s a read-only sets with two
rules Many-to-One and server mapping
Select Full Feature when you require other
mapping types
Configuring NAT
Address Mapping Sets and NAT Server Sets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
51
The P-660HW-Dx v2 has 8 remote nodes and so allows you to configure 8
NAT Address Mapping Sets You must specify which NAT Address Mapping
Set (1~8) to use in the remote node when you select Full Feature NAT
You can edit 10 rules for each Address Mapping Set You can edit the rules for
Address Mapping Sets 1 in Web Configurator The other Address Mapping
Sets 2~8 can only be configured in CLI (Command Line Interface)
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports We
can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Port Forwarding To use the NAT server sets you‟ve configured a Server
rule must be set up inside the NAT Address Mapping set Please see NAT
Server Sets for further information on how to apply it
When you select SUA Only the P-660HW-Dx v2 will use a default SUA
Address Mapping set for it It has two rules Many-to-One and Server You
can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat lookup 255‟
Please note that the fields in this menu are read-only However the settings of
the rule set 2 can be modified in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The following table explains the fields in this
above screen
Field Description OptionExample
set This is sequence number for Address Mapping Sets 255 for SUA
Internal
Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA)
0000 for the
Many-to-One type
Local End
IP
This is the starting local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0000 and the
End IP is 255255255255
255255255255
Global Start
IP
This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you
have a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start
IP
0000
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
52
Global End
IP This is the ending global IP address (IGA) NA
Type This is the NAT mapping types Many-to-One and
Server
Here we‟ll guide you to configure Address Mapping Sets from Web
Configurator and CLI (Since in Web Configurator we can only edit the rules
for Address Mapping Sets 1 The other Address Mapping Sets 2~8 can only
be configured in CLI)
Now lets begin with Web Configurator
Firstly let‟s come to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping
This menu is for Address Mapping Set 1 you can edit 10 Address Mapping
Rules for Set 1 You can edit or remove a rule by clicking the two buttons on
the rule table
Click the bdquoEditrsquo Button on the rule 1 then you can enter the window in which
you can edit an individual rule and configure the Mapping Type Local and
Global StartEnd IPs
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
53
The following table describes the fields in this screen
Field Description OptionExample
Type You can select one of the five mapping types from the
pull-down menu
1 One-to-One
2 Many-to-One
3 Many-to-Many
Overload
4 Many-to-Many No
Overload
5 Server
Local
IP
Start This is the starting local IP address (ILA) 0000
End
This is the ending local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0000 and the
End IP as 255255255255 This field is NA for
One-to-One type
255255255255
Global
IP
Start This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you have
a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start IP 0000
End
This is the ending global IP address (IGA) This
field is NA for One-to-One Many-to-One and Server
types
2001164
Note For all Local and Global IPs the End IP address must begin after the IP
Start address ie you cannot have an End IP address beginning before the
Start IP address
Configure Address Mapping Sets in CLI
Setp 1 Telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 (We suppose the LAN IP Address of
P-660HW-Dx v2 is 19216811)
Step 2 Select one Address Mapping Set (1~8) by command bdquoip nat
addrmap map [map ] [set name]‟ (set name is optional) Suppose we
configure set 2 in the example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
54
Setp 3 Set NAT address mapping rule for the Address Mapping Set you just
configured (Set 2 in this example) by command bdquoip nat addrmap rule [rule]
[insert | edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP] [global start IP] [global
end IP] [server set ]‟ Suppose we set a Many-to-One rule for set 2 by
command bdquoip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 1 192168110 192168120 172111
172111‟
Setp 4 Save the configuration by command bdquoip nat addrmap save‟ You can
apply the Address Mapping Set 2 to remote nodes in Web Configurator when
you select Full Feature NAT See the intire process as follows
Set 5 You can lookup the successfully configured Address Mapping Sets by
command bdquoip nat addrmap disp‟
Key Settings
CI Command Description
ip nat addrmap map [map] [set
name]
Select NAT address mapping set and set mapping set
name but set name is optional
Example
gt ip nat addrmap map 2 Test
ip nat addrmap rule [rule] [insert |
edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP]
[global start IP] [global end IP] [server
set ]
Set NAT address mapping rule If the ldquotyperdquo is not
ldquoinside-serverrdquo then the ldquotyperdquo field will still need a
dummy value like ldquo0rdquo
Type is 0 - 4 = one-to-one many-to-one
many-to-many-overload many-to-many-non overload
inside-server
Example
gt ip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 3 192168110
192168120 172111 172111
ip nat addrmap clear [map] [rule] Clear the selected rule of the set
ip nat addrmap freememory Discard Changes
ip nat addrmap disp Display nat set information
ip nat addrmap save Save settings
ip nat server load [set] Load the server sets of NAT into buffer
ip nat server disp [1] ldquodisp 1rdquo means to display the NAT server set in buffer
if parameter ldquo1rdquo is omitted then it will display all the
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
55
server sets
ip nat server save Save the NAT server set buffer into flash
ip nat server clear [set] Clear the server set [set] must use ldquosaverdquo command
to let it save into flash
ip nat server edit [rule] active Activate the rule [rule] rule number is 1 to 24 the
number 25-36 is for UPNP application
ip nat server edit [rule] svrport ltstart
portgt ltend portgt
Configure the port range from ltstart port gt to ltend
portgt
ip nat server edit [rule] remotehost
ltstart IPgt ltend IPgt
Configure the IP address range of remote host (Leave
it to be default value if you don‟t need this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] leasetime
ltsecondsgt
Configure the lease time (Leave it to be default value if
you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] rulename
ltstringgt
Configure the name of the rule (Leave it to be default
value if you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] forwardip ltIP
addressgt Configure the LAN IP address to be forwarded
ip nat server edit [rule] protocol
ltTCP|UDP|ALLgt
Configure the protocol to be used TCP UDP or ALL
(it must be capital)
NAT Server Sets
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports
(similar to the old SUA menu of before) If you wish you can make inside
servers for different services eg Web or FTP visible to the outside users
even though NAT makes your network appears as a single machine to the
outside world A server is identified by the port number eg Web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21
As an example (see the following figure) if you have a Web server at
192168136 and a FTP server at 192168133 then you need to specify for
port 80 (Web) the server at IP address 192168136 and for port 21 (FTP)
another at IP address 192168133
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
56
Please note that a server can support more than one service eg a server
can provide both FTP and Mail service while another provides only Web
service
The following procedures show how to configure a server behind NAT
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
Step 2 Select the service name from the pull-down menu and fill in the server
Address on bdquoServer IP Address‟ then click button bdquoAdd‟ to save it
Step 3 You could click the button bdquoEdit‟ on the rule to modify the Service name
Server IP Address StartEnd Port
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please
refer RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers
Service Port Number
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol)
1723
Examples
Internet Access Only
Internet Access with an Internal Server
Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
(1) Internet Access Only
In our Internet Access example we only need one rule where all our ILAs map
to one IGA assigned by the ISP You can just use the default SUA NAT or you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
57
could select Full Feature NAT and select an Address Mapping Set with a
Many-to-One Rule See the following figure
(2) Internet Access with an Internal Server
In this case we do exactly as the figure (use the convenient pre-configured
SUA Only set) and also go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
NAT -gt Port Forwarding to specify the Internet Server behind the NAT as
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
58
below
(3) Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
(One-to-One Many-to-One Server Set mapping types are used)
In this case we have 3 IGAs from the ISP We have two very busy internal FTP
servers and also an internal general server for the web and mail In this case
we want to assign the 3 IGAs by the following way using 4 NAT rules
Rule 1 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
Rule 3 (Many-to-One type) to map the other clients to IGA3 (200003)
Rule 4 (Server type) to map a web server and mail server with ILA3
(192168120) to IGA3 Type Server allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types to other machines behind NAT on the LAN
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
59
Step 1 In this case we need to map ILA to more than one IGA therefore we
must choose the Full Feature option from the NAT field in currently active
remote node and assign IGA3 to P-660HW-Dx v2‟s WAN IP Address
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping to begin configuring Address Mapping Set 1 We can see
there are 10 blank rule table that could be configured See the following setup
for the four rules in our case
Rule 1 Setup Select One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 Setup Selecting One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
60
Rule 3 Setup Select Many-to-One type to map the other clients to IGA3
(200003)
Rule 4 Setup Select Server type to map our web server and mail server with
ILA3 (192168120) to IGA3
Menu Network -gt NAT -gt Address Mapping should look as follows now
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
61
Step 3 Now we configure all other incoming traffic to go to our web server and
mail server from Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
(4) Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some mIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address In this case it is better to
use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types thus each
user login to the server using a unique global IP address The following figure
illustrates this
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
62
One rule configured for using Many-to-Many No Overload mapping type is
shown below
We can also do this by configure threeOne-to-One mapping type rules
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
What is DDNS
The DDNS service an IP Registry provides a public central database where
information such as email addresses hostnames IPs etc can be stored and
retrieved This solves the problems if your DNS server uses an IP associated
with dynamic IPs
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to access the internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
must inform the DDNS server the change of this IP so that the server can
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
63
update its IP-to-DNS entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is
updated the DNS name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still
usable
The DDNS servers the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports currently is
WWWDYNDNSORG where you apply the DNS from and update the WAN IP
to
Setup the DDNS
1 Before configuring the DDNS settings in the P-660HW-Dx v2 you must
register an account from the DDNS server such as
WWWDYNDNSORG first After the registration you have a hostname
for your internal server and a password using to update the IP to the
DDNS server
2 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Dynamic DNS
Select Active Dynamic DNS option
Key Settings
Option Description
Service Provider Enter the DDNS server in this field Currently we support
WWWDYNDNSORG
Active Toggle to Yes
Host Name Enter the hostname you subscribe from the above DDNS server
For example zyxelcomtw
User Name Enter the user name that the DDNS server gives to you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
64
Password Enter the password that the DDNS server gives to you
Enable Wildcard
Enter the hostname for the wildcard function that the
WWWDYNDNSORG supports Note that Wildcard option is
available only when the provider is httpwwwdyndnsorg
7 Network Management Using SNMP
ZyXEL SNMP Implementation
ZyXEL currently includes SNMP support in some P-660HW-Dx v2 routers It is
implemented based on the SNMPv1 so it will be able to communicate with
SNMPv1 NMSs Further users can also add ZyXELs private MIB in the NMS
to monitor and control additional system variables The ZyXELs private MIB
tree is shown in figure 3 For SNMPv1 operation ZyXEL permits one
community string so that the router can belong to only one community and
allows trap messages to be sent to only one NMS manager
Some traps are sent to the SNMP manager when anyone of the following
events happens
1 coldStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine coldstarts the trap will be sent after booting
2 warmStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine warmstarts the trap will be sent after booting
3 linkDown (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is down the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
4 linkUp (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is up the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
5 authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215)
When receiving any SNMP get or set requirement with wrong community
this trap is sent to the manager
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
65
6 whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-MIB)
When the system is going to restart (warmstart) the trap will be sent with the
reason of restart before rebooting
(1) For intentional reboot
In some cases (download new files CI command sys reboot ) reboot is
done intentionally And traps with the message System reboot by user will
be sent
(2) For fatal error
System has to reboot for some fatal errors And traps with the message of the
fatal code will be sent
Downloading ZyXELs private MIB
Configure the P-660HW-Dx v2 for SNMP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
66
The SNMP related settings in P-660HW-Dx v2 are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt SNMP The
following steps describe a simple setup procedure for configuring all SNMP
settings
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Get
Community
Enter the correct Get Community This Get Community must match the
Get- and GetNext community requested from the NMS The default is
public
Set
Community
Enter the correct Set Community This Set Community must match the
Set-community requested from the NMS The default is public
Trusted
Host
Enter the IP address of the NMS The P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will only
respond to SNMP messages coming from this IP address If 0000 is
entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will respond to all NMS
managers
Trap
Community
Enter the community name in each sent trap to the NMS This Trap
Community must match what the NMS is expecting The default is
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
67
public
Trap
Destination
Enter the IP address of the NMS that you wish to send the traps to If
0000 is entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will not send trap any
NMS manager
Note You may need to edit a firewall rule to permit SNMP Packets
8 Using syslog
You can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt
Logs -gt Log Settings -gt Syslog logging
Key Settings
Active Select it to active UNIX Syslog
Syslog IP Address Enter the IP address of the UNIX server that you wish to
send the syslog
Log Facility Select from the 7 different local options The log facility lets you
log the message in different server files Refer to your UNIX manual
9 Using IP Alias
What is IP Alias
In a typical environment a LAN router is required to connect two local
networks The P-660HW-Dx v2 can connect three local networks to the ISP or
a remote node we call this function as IP Alias In this case an internal
router is not required For example the network manager can divide the local
network into three networks and connect them to the Internet using
P-660HW-Dx v2s single user account See the figure below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
68
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports three virtual LAN interfaces via its single
physical Ethernet interface The first network can be configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN -gt DHCP Setup The second
and third networks that we call IP Alias 1 and IP Alias 2 can be configured
in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias
There are three internal virtual LAN interfaces for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to route
the packets fromto the three networks correctly They are enif0 for the major
network enif00 for the IP alias 1 and enif01 for the IP alias 2 Therefore
three routes are created in the P-660HW-Dx v2 as shown below when the
three networks are configured If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP is also enabled
the IP pool for the clients can be any of the three networks
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
69
You can edit filter rule to accept or deny LAN packets fromto the IP alias 12
go through the P-660HW-Dx v2 by command in CLI
lan index [index number]
Usage index number =1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt [set]
Usage set= the corresponding filter set number you‟ve configured
lan save
IP Alias Setup
(1) Edit the first network in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
LAN -gt IPDHCP Setup by configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s first LAN IP
address
Key Settings
DHCP
Setup
If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP server is enabled the IP pool for the clients
can be any of the three networks
TCPIP
Setup
Enter the first LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This will create the
first route in the enif0 interface
(2) Edit the second and third networks in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias by
configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s second and third LAN IP addresses
Key Settings
IP Alias 1 Active it and enter the second LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the second route in the enif00 interface
IP Alias 2 Active it and enter the third LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the third route in the enif01 interface
10 Using IP Policy Routing
What is IP Policy Routing (IPPR)
Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router
takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides
a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet
forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator
Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis
prior to the normal routing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
70
traffic among multiple paths For example if a network has both the Internet
and remote node connections we can route the Web packets to the Internet
using one policy and route the FTP packets to the remote LAN using another
policy See the figure below
Use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths
Benefits
Source-Based Routing - Network administrators can use policy-based
routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections
Quality of Service (QoS)- Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the
precedence or TOS (Type of Service) values in the IP header at the periphery
of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic
Cost Savings- IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on
high-bandwidth high-cost path while using low-path for batch traffic
Load Sharing- Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic
among multiple paths
How does the IPPR work
A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet
meets the criteria The action is taken only when all the criteria are met The
criteria include the source address and port IP protocol (ICMP UDP TCP
etc) destination address and port TOS and precedence (fields in the IP
header) and length The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between
interactive and bulk traffic Interactive applications eg Telnet tend to have
short packets while bulk traffic eg file transfer tends to have large packets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
71
The actions that can be taken include routing the packet to a different gateway
(and hence the outgoing interface) and the TOS and precedence fields in the
IP header IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of ZyNOS in style
and in implementation The policies are divided into sets where related
policies are grouped together A use defines the policies before applying them
to an interface or a remote node in the same fashion as the filters There are
12 policy sets with 6 policies in each set
Setup the IP Policy Routing
Setp 1 Set the index of IP routing policy set rule by command bdquoip
policyrouting set index [set] [rule]‟ Suppose set=1 rule=1 in this
example
Step 2 Suppose we‟d like to edit the rule like this
Policy Set Name=Test
Active= Yes
Criteria
IP Protocol = 6
Type of Service= Dont Care Packet length= 0
Precedence = Dont Care Len Comp= NA
Source
addr start= 19216812 end= 192168120
port start= 0 end= NA
Destination
addr start= 0000 end= NA
port start= 80 end= 80
Action= Matched
Gateway addr = 1921681254 Log= No
Type of Service= No Change
Precedence = No Change
This policy example forces the Web packets originated from the clients with IP
addresses from 19216812 to 192168120 be routed to the remote LAN via
the gateway 1921681254
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
ip policyrouting set name Test
(Set the name as Test of IP routing policy rule )
ip policyrouting set active yes
(Enable the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria protocol 6
(Set the protocol ID as 6(TCP) for the rule)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
72
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the criteria type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria packetlength 0
(Set the packet length as 0 for the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcip 19216812 192168120
(Set the source IP address for the rule Start=19216812 end=192168120)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcport 0
(Set the source port for the rule Start=0)
ip policyrouting set criteria destip 0000
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=0000)
ip policyrouting set criteria destport 80 80
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=80 end=80)
ip policyrouting set action actmatched
(Set the action for the rule Matched)
ip policyrouting set action gatewaytype 0
(Set gateway type for the rule Gateway Address)
ip policyrouting set action gatewayaddr 1921681254
(Set the gateway address for the rule 1921681254)
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the action type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the action precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set action log no
(Set log option for the rule no log)
ip polictrouting set save
(Save the rule)
Step 3 Apply the IP policy routing There are two interfaces to apply the policy
set they are the LAN interface and WAN interface It depends where the
gateway specified in the policy rule is located If the gateway you specified is
located on the local LAN you apply the policy set in LAN interface If the
gateway you specified is located on the remote WAN site you apply the policy
set in WAN interface
Apply to WAN Interface (Suppose we apply it to remote node 1 in the
example)
wan node index 1
wan node ippolicy 1
11 Using Call Scheduling
What is Call Scheduling
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
73
Call scheduling enables the mechanism for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to run the
remote node connection according to the pre-defined schedule This feature is
just like the scheduler in a video recorder which records the program according
to the specified time Users can apply at most 4 schedule sets in Remote Node
The remote node configured with the schedule set could be Forced On
Forced Down Enable Dial-On-Demand or Disable Dial-On-Demand on
specified date and time
How to configure a Call Scheduling
You can configure a call scheduling in CLI
Suppose we want to edit a call schedule set like this
Call Schedule Set =1
Set name=Test
Active= Yes
Start Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 - 12 - 27
How Often= Once
Once
Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 -12 -27
Start Time(hhmm)= 12 00
Duration(hhmm)= 16 00
Action= Enable Dial-on-demand
This schedule example permits a demand call on the line on 1200 am
2005-12-27 The maximum length of time this connection is allowed is 16
hours
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
wan callsch index 1
(Set call schedule index = 1 You must apply this command first before you
begin to configure call schedule)
wan callsch name Test
(Set the schedule name as Test)
wan callsch active Yes
(Enable schedule)
wan callsch startdate 2005 12 27
(Set schedule start date as 2005-12-27)
wan callsch oncedate 2005 12 27
(Set the schedule used just once it works on 2005-12-27)
wan callsch starttime 12 00
(Set the schedule start time as 1200)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
74
wan callsch duration 16 00
(Set schedule duration time as 16 hours)
wan callsch action 2
(Set action as dial-on-demand)
wan callsch save
(Save the current call schedule set)
Key Settings
Start Date
Start date of this schedule rule It can be unmatched with weekday
setting For example if Start Date is 20001002(Monday) but Monday
setting in weekday can be No
Forced On The node will always keep up during the setting period It is equivalent
to diable the idel timeout
Forced Down The node will always keep doen during the setting period The
connected remote node will be dropped
Enable
Dial-On-Demand The remote node accepts Dial-on-demand during this period
Disable
Dial-On-Demand
The remote node denies any demand dial during the period For the
existing connected nodes it will be dropped after idle timeout and no
triggered up
Start Time
Duration Start Time and Duration of this schedule
Apply the schedule to the Remote node
Multiple scheduling rules can program in a Remote node and they have
priority For example if we program the sets as 1234 in remote node then
the set 1 will override set 234 set 2 will override 34 and so on
We can apply the schedule to the remote node in CLI by the commands
wan node index []index]
wan node callsch [index]
wan node save
For example if we want to apply the call schedule set 1 to remote node 1 we
could use the commands
wan node index 1
wan node callsch 1
wan node save
Time Service in P-660HW-Dx v2
There is no RTC (Real-Time Clock) chip so the P-660HW-Dx v2 should launch
a mechanism to get current time and date from external server in boot time
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
75
Time service is implemented by the Daytime protocol(RFC-867) Time
protocol(RFC-868) and NTP protocol(RFC-1305) You have to assign an IP
address of a time server and then the P-660HW-Dx v2 will get the date time
and time-zone information from this server You can configure it in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt System -gt Time Setting
12 Using IP Multicast
What is IP Multicast
Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in two ways - unicast or broadcast
Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts Host groups
are identified by class D IP addresses ie those with 1110 as their
higher-order bits In dotted decimal notation host group addresses range from
224000 to 239255255255 Among them 224001 is assigned to the
permanent IP hosts group and 224002 is assigned to the multicast routers
group
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is the protocol used to support
multicast groups The latest version is version 2 (see RFC2236) IP hosts use
IGMP to report their multicast group membership to any immediate-neighbor
multicast routers so the multicast routers can decide if a multicast packet
needs to be forwarded At start up the P-660HW-Dx v2 queries all directly
connected networks to gather group membership
After that the P-660HW-Dx v2 updates the information by periodic queries
The P-660HW-Dx v2 implementation of IGMP is also compatible with version 1
The multicast setting can be turned on or off on Ethernet and remote nodes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
76
IP Multicast Setup
(1) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt LAN -gt IP -gt Advanced Setup
(2) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s remote node in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt Multicast
Key Settings
Multicast IGMP-v1 for IGMP version 1 IGMP-v2 for IGMP version 2
13 Using Bandwidth Management
Why Bandwidth Management (BWM)
Nowadays we have many different traffic types for Internet applications Some
traffic may consume high bandwidth such as FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
Some other traffic may not require high bandwidth but they require stable
supply of bandwidth such as VoIP traffic The VoIP quality would not be good
if all of the outgoing bandwidth is occupied via FTP Additionally chances are
that you would like to grant higher bandwidth for somebody special who is
using specific IP address in your network All of these are reasons why we
need bandwidth management
Using BWM
Setp 1 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gtSummary activate bandwidth management on the interface you
would like to manage We enable the BWM function on WAN interface in this
example
Enter the total speed for this interface that you want to allocate using
bandwidth management This appears as the bandwidth budget of the
interface‟s root class
Select how you want the bandwidth to be allocated Priority-Based means
bandwidth is allocated via priority so the traffic with highest priority would be
served first then the second priority is served secondly and so on If
Fairness-Based is chosen then the bandwidth is allocated by ratio Which
means if A class needs 300 kbps B class needs 600 kbps then the ratio of A
and Bs actual bandwidth is 12 So if we get 450 kbps in total then A would
get 150 kbps B would get 300 kbps We select Priority-Based in this
example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
77
Key Settings
Active
Check the box to enable BWM on the interface Note that if you would like
to manage traffic from WAN to LAN you should apply BWM on LAN
interface If you would like to management traffic from WAN to DMZ
please apply BWM on DMZ interface
Speed Enter the total speed to manage on this interface This value is the budget
of the class trees root
Scheduler
Choose the principle to allocate bandwidth on this interface
Priority-Based allocates bandwidth via priority Fairness-Based allocates
bandwidth by ratio
Maximize
Bandwidth
Usage
Check this box if you would like to give residuary bandwidth from Interface
to the classes who need more bandwidth than configured amount Do not
select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a
bandwidth class or you want to limit the bandwidth of each class at the
configured value (Please note that to meat the second condition you
should also disable Use All Managed Bandwidth in the BWM rule)
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Rule Setup select the interface Service Priority and Allocated
Bandwidth for this rule then click button bdquoAdd‟ to apply this rule
Step 3 You can modify the rule by clicking the button lsquoEditrsquo on the rule
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
78
Key Settings
RuleName Give this rule a name for example WWW
BW Budget Configure the bandwidth you would like to allocate to this rule
Priority Enter a number between 0 and 7 to set the priority of this class The
higher the number the higher the priority The default setting is 3
Use All
Managed
Bandwidth
Check this box if you would like to let this class to borrow bandwidth from
its parents when the required bandwidth is higher than the configured
amount Do not check this if you want to limit the bandwidth of this class
at the configured value(Please note that you should also disable
Maximize Bandwidth Usage on the interface to meet the condition)
Service Select User-defined SIP FTP or H323 to specify the traffic types
Destination
IP Address Enter the IP address of destination that meets this class
Destination
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
Destination
Port Enter the destination port number of the traffic
Source IP
Address
Enter the IP address of source that meats this class Note that for traffic
from LAN to WAN since BWM is before NAT you should use the IP
address before NAT processing
Source
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
79
Source Port Enter the source port number of the traffic
Protocol ID Enter the protocol number for the traffic 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP or 17 for
UDP
After configuration BWM you can check current bandwidth of the configured
traffic in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Monitor
14 Using Zero-Configuration
Zero-Configuration and VC auto-hunting
Zero-Configure feature can help customer to reduce the burden of setting
efforts Whenever system ADSL links up system will send out some probing
patterns system will analyze the packets returned from ISP and decide which
services the ISP may provide Because ADSL is based on a ATM network so
system have to pre-configured a VPIVCI hunting pool before Auto-Configure
function begins to work
The Zero-Configuration feature can hunt the encapsulation and VPIVCI value
and system will automatically configure itself if the hunting result is
successfully This feature has two constraints
1 It supports the ISP provides one kind of service (PPPoEPPPoA etc)
only otherwise the hunting will get confusing and failed
2 VC auto-hunting only supports dynamic WAN IP address If the router is
set a static WAN IP address VC auto-hunting function will be disabled
The entry of hunting pool must also contain the VPI VCI and which kinds of
hunting patterns you wish to send Whenever system send out all the probing
patterns with specific VPIVCI system will wait for 5~10 seconds and get the
response from ISP the response patterns will decide which kinds of ADSL
services of the line will be After that system will save back the correct VPI
VCI and also services (encapsulation) type into profile of WAN interface
Configure the VC auto-hunting preconfigured table
(1) Display auto-haunting preconfigured table by using command from CLI
wan atm vchunt display
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
80
(2) Add items to the auto-haunting preconfigured table by using commands
wan atm vchunt add ltremoteNodeIndexgt ltvpigt ltvcigt ltservice
bit(hex)gt
wan atm vchunt save
Note ltremote nodegt input the remote node index 1-8
ltvpigt vpi value
ltvcigt vci value
ltservicegt it‟s a hex value bit0PPPoEVC (1) bit1PPPoELLC (2)
bit2PPPoAVC (4) bit3PPPoALLC (8) bit4EnetVC (16) bit5 EnetLLC (32)
For example
(1) If you need service PPPoELLC and EnetLLC then the service bits will be
2+32 = 34 (decimal) = 22 (hex) you must input 22
(2) If you want to enable all service for VC hunting the service bits will be
1+2+4+8+16+32=63(decimal)= 3f (hex) you must input 3f
Need to perform save after this by command bdquowan atm vchunt save‟
(3) Delete items from the auto-haunting preconfigured table by useing
command
wan atm vchunt remove ltremote nodegt ltvpigt ltvcigt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
81
Using Zero configuration
You can enabledisable Zero Configuration in Network -gt WAN -gt Advanced
Setup
(1) After configure the auto-haunting preconfigured table You just need a PC
connected to the device LAN Ethernet port with the DSL sync up
(2) Open your web browser to access a Web site It should prompt and request
for your username password of your ISP account if your ISP provide PPPoE
or PPPoA service
(3) After key-in the correct info it will than test the connection If it is
successful it will than close the browser and you can open a new browser to
surf the Internet If the connection test fail it will go back to the page ask for
user name and password
(4) Basically the zero configuration only work on the VC that was preconigured
in the auto-haunting preconfigured table
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2
The common triple play scenario is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
82
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus we could assign different parameters to the PVC (CBR
UBR VBR-RT VBR-nRT) to guarantee different applications
We could configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 via CLI The command is
sys tripleplay set portbase ltEportIDgt ltPVCIDgt
For example sys tripleplay portbase set 1 1
sys tripleplay portbase set 2 2
sys tripleplay portbase set 3 3
The traffic from Ethernet port 1 must be forwarded to PVC1 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet port 2 must be forwarded to PVC2 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet Port3 must be forwarded to PVC3 vice versa
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to configure up to twelve filter sets with six
rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system You can apply up to
four filter sets to a particular port to block multiple types of packets With each
filter set having up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for
a single port
The packet filter function on P-660HW-Dx v2 is the same as before just that
you could only configure the filter set and apply them by command in CLI It‟s
very complex for common users to do it So here‟s the recommendation
(1) Usually if you want to block special packets you could edit a firewall rule in
Web Configurator
032
VOIP Server
IPTV Server
Internet
Server
Others
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
ATUR IP-DSLAM VL-Switch
CPE Access Network ISP
034
055
VOIP Telephone
Video Client
Clients surfing
Internet
Other clients
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
PVC1
PVC2
PVC3
PVC4 132
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
83
(2) By factory default ZyXEL has preconfigured many filter sets for your
reference you can check them by command
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Usage set 1~12 rule 1~6 Commonly the preconfigured filter sets are as
follows ltset 2 rule 1~6gt ltset 3 rule 1gt ltset 4 rule 1gt
sys filter set display
For example
This could satisfy mostly requirement You could select any of them to apply to
the WAN node or LAN Interface on demand The command is as follows
Apply to WAN node
wan node index ltnodegt
Usage node= 1~8 corresponding to the remote node 1~8
wan node filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt
ltset3gt ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to one remote node
wan node save
Apply to LAN Interface
lan index [index]
Usage index=1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
84
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt ltset3gt
ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to LAN Interface
lan save
(3) If you are very advanced user you could edit filter set by the following
command
sys filter set [set] [rule]
Usage Set up a filter set index to edit a set
set 1~12
rule 1~6
sys filter set type [typeID]
Usage typeID tcpip or generic
Note In one filter set you should configure all the rules in one type either
tcpip or generic
sys filter set enable
Usage Enable(active) the rule
sys filter set helliphellip(You could configure a filter rule on demand the newest
command is available on release note)
sys filter set save
Usage Don‟t forget to save the rule everytime you‟ve configured it
Reference Commands
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Set the index of filter set rule you must apply this
command first before you begin to configure the
filter rules
sys filter set name [set name] Set the name of filter set
sys filter set type [tcpip | generic] Set the type of filter rule
sys filter set enable Enable the rule
sys filter set disable Disable the rule
sys filter set protocol [protocol ] Set the protocol ID of the rule
sys filter set sourceroute [yes|no] Set the sourceroute yesno
sys filter set destip [address] [subnet
mask]
Set the destination IP address and subnet mask of
the rule
sys filter set destport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|notequal|less|greater]
Set the destination port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set srcip [address] [subnet
mask] Set the source IP address and subnet mask
sys filter set srcport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|not
Set the source port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
85
equal|less|greater] equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set tcpEstab [yes|no] Set TCP establish option
sys filter set more [yes|no] Set the more option to yesno
sys filter set log [type 0-3= none | match|
notmatch | both ]
Set the log type (it could be 0-3 =none match not
match both)
sys filter set actmatch[type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for match
sys filter set actnomatch [type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for not match
sys filter set offset [] Set offset for the generic rule
sys filter set length [] Set the length for generic rule
sys filter set mask [] Set the mask for generic rule
sys filter set value [(depend on length in
hex)] Set the value for generic rule
sys filter set clear Clear the current filter set
sys filter set save Save the filter set parameters
sys filter set display [set][rule] Display Filter set information Wo parameter it will
display buffer information
sys filter set freememory Discard Changes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
86
Wireless Application Notes
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode
Ad hoc Introduction
What is Ad Hoc mode
Ad hoc mode is a wireless network consists of a number of stations without
access points Without using an access point or any connection to a wired
network a client unit in Ad hoc operation mode can communicate directly to
other client units just as using a cross over Ethernet cable connecting 2 hosts
together via a NIC card for direct connection when configured in Ad hoc mode
without an access point being present Ad hoc operation is ideal for small
networks of no more than 2-4 computers Larger networks would require the
use of one or perhaps several access points
Configuration for Wireless Station A
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
87
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
88
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Configuration for Wireless Station B
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
89
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
90
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Step 7 Station A now are able to connect to Station B
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure Introduction
For Infrastructure WLANs multiple Access Points (APs) like the WLAN to the
wired network and allow users to efficiently share network resources The
Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also
mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
91
Configure Wireless Access Point to Infrastructure mode using Web
configurator
To configure Infrastructure mode of your P-660HW-Dx v2 wireless AP please
follow the steps below
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gt General Configure the basic parameters for Wireless LAN
Step 2 You could click the button bdquoAdvanced Setup‟ for more detailed
configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
92
Configuration Wireless Station to Infrastructure mode
To configure Infrastructure mode on your ZyAIR G-200 Wireless Network
Adapter please follow the following steps
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
93
Step 3 Select Infrastructure from the operation mode pull down menu fill in an
SSID or leave it as any if you wish to connect to any AP than press Apply
Change to take effect
Step 4 Click on Site Survey tab and press search all the available AP will be
listed
Step 5 Double click on the AP you want to associated with
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
94
Step 6 After the client have associated with the selected AP The linked APs
channel current linkup rate SSID link quality and signal strength will show on
the Link Info page You now successfully associate with the selected AP with
Infrastructure Mode
3 MAC Filter
MAC Filter Overview
Users can use MAC Filter as a method to restrict unauthorized stations from
accessing the APs ZyXELs APs provide the capability for checking MAC
address of the station before allowing it to connect to the network This
provides an additional layer of control layer in that only stations with registered
MAC addresses can connect This approach requires that the list of MAC
addresses be configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
95
ZyXEL MAC Filter Implementation
ZyXELs MAC Filter Implementation allows users to define a list to allow or
block association from STAs The filter set allows users to input 12 entries in
the list If Allow Association is selected all other STAs which are not on the list
will be denied Otherwise if Deny Association is selected all other STAs which
are not on the list will be allowed for association Users can choose either way
to configure their filter rule
Configure the WLAN MAC Filter
The MAC Filter related settings in ZyXEL APs are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gtMAC Filter
Before you configure the MAC filter you need to know the MAC address of the
client first If not knowing what your MAC address is please enter a command
ipconfig all after DOS prompt to get the MAC (physical) address of your
wireless client
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gtMAC Filter active MAC Filter
Step 2 Enter the MAC Addresses of wireless cards in the filter set to allow or
deny association from these cards
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Filter Action
Allow or block association from MAC addresses contained in this list If Allow
Association is selected in this field hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list
will be allowed to associate with AP If Deny Association is selected in this field
hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list will be blocked
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
96
MAC Address This field specifies those MAC Addresses that you want to add in the list
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
Introduction
The 80211 standard describes the communication that occurs in wireless
LANs
The Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm is used to protect wireless
communication from eavesdropping because wireless transmissions are
easier to intercept than transmissions over wired networks and wireless is a
shared medium everything that is transmitted or received over a wireless
network can be intercepted
WEP relies on a secret key that is shared between a mobile station (eg a
laptop with a wireless Ethernet card) and an access point (ie a base station)
The secret key is used to encrypt packets before they are transmitted and an
integrity check is used to ensure that packages are not modified during the
transition The standard does not discuss how the shared key is established In
practice most installations use a single key that is shared between all mobile
stations and access points APs You can refer to the User Guide for more
detailed information about it
Setting up the Access Point
You can set up the Access Point from Web configurator Advanced Setup
Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General (You can also configure it via CLI)
Step 1 Select bdquoStatic WEP‟ from the pull down menu bdquoSecurity Mode‟ in Web
Configurator
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
97
Step 2 Set up WEP Key in the Web Configurator You need to set the one of
the following parameters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 5 characters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 10 hexadecimal digits
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 13 characters
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 26 hexadecimal digits
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 29 characters
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 58 hexadecimal digits
There are two ways you can configure the WEP Key
(1) You can put in a special WEP key in the bdquoWEP Key‟ menu directly
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
98
(2) You can also put in an arbitrary sequence of characters in the
bdquoPassphrase‟ and then press button bdquoGenerate‟ to let the P-660HW-Dx v2
generate WEP Key for you
Setting up the Station
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar or right click
the utility icon then select Show Config Utility
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
99
The utility will pop up on your windows screen
Note If the utility icon doesnt exist in your task bar click Start -gt
Programs -gt helliphellip to start the utility
Step 2 Select the Configuration tab
Select bdquoSet Security‟ to configure encryption type and parameters
correspond with access point
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
100
Note You should select Key 1 as default Transmit Key since the P-660HW-Dx
v2 is supposed to use Key 1 by default
Key settings
The WEP Encryption type of station has to equal to the access point
Check ASCII field for characters WEP key or uncheck ASCII field for
Hexadecimal digits WEP key
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
101
Hexadecimal digits dont need to precede by 0x
For example
64-bits with characters WEP key Key1= 2e3f4
64-bits with hexadecimal digits WEP key Key1= 123456789A
5 Site Survey
Introduction
What is Site Survey
An RF site survey is a MAP to RF contour of RF coverage in a particular
facility With wireless system it is very difficult to predict the propagation of
radio waves and detect the presence of interfering signals Walls doors
elevator shafts and other obstacles offer different degree of attenuation This
will cause the RF coverage pattern be irregular and hard to predict
Site survey can help us overcome these problem and even provide us a map
of RF coverage of the facility
Preparation
Below are the steps to complete a simple site survey with simple tools
1 First you will need to obtain a facility diagram such as blueprints This is
for you to mark and take record on
2 Visually inspect the facility walk through the facility to verify the accuracy of
the diagram and mark down any large obstacle you see that may effect the RF
signal such as metal shelf metal desk etc on the diagram
3 Identify users area when doing so ask a question where is wireless
coverage needed and where does not and note and take note on the diagram
this is information is needed to determine the number of AP required
4 Determine the preliminary access point location on the facility diagram base
on the service area needed obstacles power wall jack considerations
Survey on Site
Step 1 With the diagram with all information you gathered in the preparation
phase Now you are ready to make the survey
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
102
Step 2 Install an access point at the preliminary location
Step 3 Use a notebook with wireless client installed and run its utility An utility
will provide information such as connection speed current used channel
associated rate link quality signal strength and etc information as shown in
utility below
Step 4 Its always a good idea to start with putting the access point at the
corner of the room and walk away from the access point in a systematic
manner Record the changes at point where transfer rate drop and the link
quality and signal strength information on the diagram as you go alone
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
103
Step 5 When you reach the farthest point of connection mark the spot Now
you move the access point to this new spot as have already determine the
farthest point of the access point installation spot if wireless service is required
from corner of the room
Step 6 Repeat step 1~5 and now you should be able to mark an RF coverage
area as illustrated in above picutre
Step 7 You may need more than one access point is the RF coverage area
hasn‟t covered all the wireless service area you needed
Step 8 Repeat step 1~6 of survey on site as necessary upon completion you
will have a diagram and information of site survey As illustrated below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
104
Note If there are more than one access point is needed be sure to make the
adjacent access point service area over lap one another So the wireless
station is able to roam For more information please refer to roaming at
6 Configure 8021x and WPA
What is the WPA Functionality
Configuration for Access Point
Configuration for your PC
What is WPA Functionality
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
105
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN
Here comes WPA-PSK Application example for your reference
Configuration for Access point
The IEEE 8021x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the
authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management
Authentication can be done using local user database internal to the
P-660HW-Dx v2 (authenticate up to 32 users) or an external RADIUS server
for an unlimited number of users
Step 1 To change your P-660HW-Dx v2s authentication settings login Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General
-gtSecurity
Step 2 Select lsquoSecurity Mode‟ as WAP-PSK
Step 3 Type the Pre Shared Key in the Pre-Shared Key field
Step 4 Click Apply to finish
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
106
Configuration for your PC
Step 1 Double click on your wireless utility icon in your windows task bar the
utility will pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select the configuration tab type in the SSID (Service Set Identifier)
select the operating Mode as Infrastructure and select proper channel
Step 3 Click Set Security to configure the security parameters
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
107
Step 4 Click OK for finish and begin to Site survey Connect to the AP as you
have configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
108
Step 5 Click Link Info tab if the PC associated and authenticated with AP
successfully we will see the following information
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
109
Support Tool
1 LANWAN Packet Trace
The Prestige packet trace records and analyzes packets running on LAN and
WAN interfaces It is designed for users with technical backgrounds who are
interested in the details of the packet flow on LAN or WAN end of Prestige It is
also very helpful for diagnostics if you have compatibility problems with your
ISP or if you want to know the details of a packet for configuring a filter rule
The format of the display is as following
Packet
[index] [timersecond][channel-receivetransmit][length] [protocol]
[sourceIPport] [destIPport]
There are two ways to dump the trace
Online Trace--display the trace real time on screen
Offline Trace--capture the trace first and display later
The details for capturing the trace in CLI as follows
First of all you need to telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 firstly The password is
Administrator passwords bdquoadmin‟ by default
Online Trace
(1) Trace LAN packet
Disable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
none
Enable to capture the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
110
(2) Trace WAN packet
Disable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
none
Enable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
111
Offline Trace
Disable the capture of the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel
mpoa00 none
Enable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Wait for packet passing through the Prestige over LAN
Disable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw off amp sys trcl sw off
Display the trace briefly by entering sys trcp brief
Display specific packets by using sys trcp parse ltfrom_indexgt ltto_indexgt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
112
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal
Step 1 Initiate a hyper terminal connection from your PC(suppose you
connected to the LAN port of P-660HW-Dx v2)
Step 2 Click the bdquoproperties‟ to configure parameters to telnet to the
P-660HW-Dx v2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
113
Step 3 So that after you invoke the relevant commands you could save the
logs you‟ve captured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
114
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP
Using TFTP client software
Uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Uploaddownload Prestige configurations via LAN
(1) Using TFTP to uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout
in Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 Enter the IP address of the Prestige
Step 5To upload the firmware please save the remote file as ras to
Prestige After the transfer is complete the Prestige will program the upgraded
firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
115
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige The local file is the source
file of the ZyNOS firmware that is available in your hard disk The remote file is
the file name that will be saved in Prestige Check the port number 69 and
512-Octet blocks for TFTP Check Binary mode for file transfering
(2) Using TFTP to uploaddownload SMT configurations via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 To download the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please get the
remote file rom-0 from the Prestige
Step 5 To upload the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please save the
remote file as rom-0 in the Prestige
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
116
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige
The local file is the source file of your configuration file that is available
in your hard disk
The remote file is the file name that will be saved in Prestige
Check the port number 69 and 512-Octet blocks for TFTP
Check Binary mode for file transfering
Using TFTP command on Windows NT
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Download ZyNOS via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] get ras [localfile]
Step 4 Upload P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] put
[localfile] rom-0
Step 5 Download P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP]
get rom-0 [localfile]
Using TFTP command on UNIX
Before you begin
1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Example
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ telnet 19216811
Trying 19216811
Connected to 19216811
Escape character is ^]
Password
rasgt sys stdio 0
(Open a new window)
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get rom-0 [local-rom] lt- change to binary mode
lt- download configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-rom] rom-0 lt- upload configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get ras [local-ras ] lt- download firmware
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-ras] ras lt- upload firmware
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
117
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files
In addition to upload the firmware and configuration file via the console port
and TFTP client you can also upload the firmware and configuration files to
the Prestige using FTP
To use this feature your workstation must have a FTP client software See the
example shown below
Using FTP client software
Note The remote file name for the firmware is ras and the configuration file is
rom-0
Step 1 Use FTP client from your workstation to connect to the Prestige by
entering the IP address of the Prestige
Step2 Press Enter key to ignore the username because the Prestige does
not check the username
Step 3 Enter the CLI password as the FTP login password the default is
admin
Step 4 Enter command bin to set the transfer type to binary
Step 5 Use put command to transfer the file to the Prestige
Example
Step 1 Connect to the Prestige by entering the Prestiges IP and Administrator
password in the FTP software Set the transfer type to Auto-Detect or
Binary
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
118
Step 2 Press OK to ignore the Username prompt
Step 3 To upload the firmware file we transfer the local ras file to overwrite
the remote ras file
To upload the configuration file we transfer the local rom-0 to overwrite
the remote rom-0 file
Step 4 The Prestige reboots automatically after the uploading is finished
Please do not power off the router at this moment
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
119
CI Command Reference
Command Syntax and General User Interface
CI has the following command syntax
command ltiface | device gt subcommand [param]
command subcommand [param]
command | help
command subcommand | help
General user interface
1 Shows the following commands and all major (sub)commands
2 exit Exit Subcommand
To get the latest CI Command list
The latest CI Command list is available in release note of every ZyXEL
firmware release Please goto ZyXEL public WEB site
httpwwwzyxelcomsupportdownload_indexphp to download firmware
package (zip) you should unzip the package to get the release note in PDF
format
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
4
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP 34
7 Can the SSID be encrypted 34
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff
the SSID 34
9 What are Insertion Attacks 34
10 What is Wireless Sniffer 34
11 What is OTIST How do I use it 34
Application Notes 36
General Application Notes 36
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode 36
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
38
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay 40
4 SUA Notes 40
5 Using Full Feature NAT 50
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS) 62
7 Network Management Using SNMP 64
8 Using syslog 67
9 Using IP Alias 67
10 Using IP Policy Routing 69
11 Using Call Scheduling 73
12 Using IP Multicast 75
13 Using Bandwidth Management 76
14 Using Zero-Configuration 79
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 82
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2 82
Wireless Application Notes 86
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode 86
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode 90
3 MAC Filter 94
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) 96
5 Site Survey 101
6 Configure 8021x and WPA 104
Support Tool 109
1 LANWAN Packet Trace 109
Online Trace 109
Offline Trace 111
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal 112
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP 114
Using TFTP client software 114
Using TFTP command on Windows NT 116
Using TFTP command on UNIX 116
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files 117
CI Command Reference 119
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
5
FAQ
ZyNOS FAQ
1 What is ZyNOS
ZyNOS is ZyXELs proprietary Network Operating System It is the platform on
all Prestige routers that delivers network services and applications It is
designed in a modular fashion so it is easy for developers to add new features
New ZyNOS software upgrades can be easily downloaded from our FTP sites
as they become available
2 Whatrsquos Multilingual Embedded Web Configurator
Multilinggual Embedded Web Configurator means that it can display with 3
kinds of languanges English French and German By factory default it
displays with English and you can change it in Web GUI
3 How do I access the P-660HW-Dx v2 Command Line Interface (CLI)
The Command Line Interface is for the Administrator use only and it could be
accessed via telnet session
Note It is protected by super password lsquo1234rsquo by factory default
4 How do I update the firmware and configuration file
You can do this if you access the P-660HW-Dx v2 as Administrator You can
upload the firmware and configuration file to Prestige from Web Condigurator
or using FTP or TFTP client software You CAN NOT upload the firmware and
configuration file via Telnet because the Telnet connection will be dropped
during uploading the firmware Please do not power off the router right after the
FTP or TFTP uploading is finished the router will upload the firmware to its
flash at this moment
Note There may be firmware that could not be upgraded from Web
Configurator In this case ZyXEL will prepare special Upload Software
for you Please read the firmware release note carefully when you want to
upload a new fireware
5 How do I upgradebackup the ZyNOS firmware by using TFTP client
program via LAN
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to transfer the firmware to P-660HW-Dx v2
using TFTP program via LAN The procedure for uploading ZyNOS via TFTP
is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
6
a Use the TELNET client program in your PC to login to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
b Enter CI command sys stdio 0 to disable Stdio idle timeout
c To upgrade firmware use TFTP client program to put firmware in file
ras in the Prestige After data transfer is finished the P-660HW-Dx v2
will program the upgraded firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
d To backup your firmware use the TFTP client program to get file ras
from the Prestige
6 How do I restore P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations by using TFTP client
program via LAN
a Use the TELNET client program in your PC to login to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
b Enter CI command sys stdio 0 disable Stdio idle timeout
c To backup the P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations use TFTP client
program to get file rom-0 from the P-660HW-Dx v2
d To restore the P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations use the TFTP client
program to put your configuration in file rom-0 in the P-660HW-Dx v2
7 What should I do if I forget the system password
In case you forget the system password you can erase the current
configuration and restore factory defaults this way
Use the RESET button on the rear panel of P-660HW-Dx v2 to reset the
router After the router is reset the LAN IP address will be reset to
19216811 the common user password will be reset to user the
Administrator password will be reset to bdquo1234rsquo
8 How to use the Reset button
a Turn your P-660HW-Dx v2 on Make sure the Power LED is on (not
blinking)
b Press the RESET button for longer than one second and shorter than
five seconds and release it If the Power LED begins to blink the
P-660HW-Dx v2‟s wireless auto security function-OTIST has been
enabled
c Press the RESET button for six seconds and then release it If the
Power LED begins to blink the default configuration has been restored
and the P-660HW-Dx v2 restarts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
7
9 What is SUA When should I use SUA
SUA (Single User Account) is a unique feature supported by Prestige router
which allows multiple people to access Internet concurrently for the cost of a
single user account
When Prestige acting as SUA receives a packet from a local client destined for
the outside Internet it replaces the source address in the IP packet header
with its own address and the source port in the TCP or UDP header with
another value chosen out of a local pool It then recomputes the appropriate
header checksums and forwards the packet to the Internet as if it is originated
from Prestige using the IP address assigned by ISP When reply packets from
the external Internet are received by Prestige the original IP source address
and TCPUDP source port numbers are written into the destination fields of the
packet (since it is now moving in the opposite direction) the checksums are
recomputed and the packet is delivered to its true destination This is because
SUA keeps a table of the IP addresses and port numbers of the local systems
currently using it
10 What is the difference between SUA and Full Feature NAT
When you edit a remote node in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt Remote Node -gt Edit there will be three options for you
None
SUA Only
Full Feature
SUA (Single User Account) in previous ZyNOS versions is a NAT set with 2
rules Many-to-One and Server With SUA visible servers had to be mapped
to different ports since the servers share only one global IP
The P-660HW-Dx v2 now has Full Feature NAT which supports five types of
IPPort mapping One to One Many to One Many to Many Overload Many to
Many No Overload and Server You can make special application when you
select Full Feature NAT For example With multiple global IP addresses
multiple severs using the same port (eg FTP servers using port 2120) are
allowed on the LAN for outside access
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports NAT sets on a remote node basis They are
reusable but only one set is allowed for each remote node The P-660HW-Dx
v2 supports 8 sets since there are 8 remote nodes
By fatory default the NAT is select as SUA in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt General -gt NAT Setup
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
8
11 Is it possible to access a server running behind SUA from the outside
Internet How can I do it
Yes it is possible because P-660HW-Dx v2 delivers the packet to the local
server by looking up to a SUA server table Therefore to make a local server
accessible to the outside users the port number and the inside IP address of
the server must be configured (You can configure it in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding)
12 When do I need select Full Feature NAT
Make multiple local servers on the LAN accessible from outside with
multiple global IP addresses
With SUA visible servers had to be mapped to different ports since the
servers share only one global IP But when you select Full Feature you can
make multiple local servers (mapping the same port or not) on the LAN
accessible from outside with multiple global IP addresses
Support Non-NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some MIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address Thus users on the same
network can not login to the same server simultaneously In this case it is
better to use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types
thus each user login to the server using a unique global IP address
13 What IPPort mapping does Multi-NAT support
Multi-NAT supports five types of IPport mapping One to One Many to One
Many to Many Overload Many to Many No Overload and Server The details
of the mapping between ILA and IGA are described as below Here we define
the local IP addresses as the Internal Local Addresses (ILA) and the global IP
addresses as the Inside Global Address (IGA)
One to One In One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps one ILA
to one IGA
Many to One In Many-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps
multiple ILA to one IGA This is equivalent to SUA (ie PAT port
address translation) ZyXELs Single User Account feature that previous
ZyNOS routers supported (the SUA is optional in todays Prestige
routers)
Many to Many Overload In Many-to-Many Overload mode the
P-660HW-Dx v2 maps the multiple ILA to shared IGA
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
9
Many One-to-One In Many One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2
maps each ILA to unique IGA
Server In Server mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps multiple inside
servers to one global IP address This allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types behind the NAT for outside access Note if
you want to map each server to one unique IGA please use the
One-to-One mode
The following table summarizes the five types
NAT Type IP Mapping
One-to-One ILA1lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-One
(SUAPAT)
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-Many
Overload
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA1
ILA4lt---gtIGA2
Many
One-to-One
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA3
ILA4lt---gtIGA4
Server Server 1 IPlt---gtIGA1
Server 2 IPlt---gtIGA1
14 How many network users can the SUANAT support
The Prestige does not limit the number of the users but the number of the
sessions The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports 2048 sessions that you can use the
ip nat session command in CLI to see You can also use bdquoip nat hashTable
wanif0‟ to view the current active NAT sessions
15 What are Device filters and Protocol filters
In ZyNOS the filters have been separated into two groups One group is
called device filter group and the other is called protocol filter
group Generic filters belong to the device filter group TCPIP and IPX filters
belong to the protocol filter group You can configure the filter rule in CLI
Note In ZyNOS you can not mix different filter groups in the same filter set
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
10
16 How can I protect against IP spoofing attacks
The P-660HW-Dx v2s filter sets provide a means to protect against IP
spoofing attacks The basic scheme is as follows
For the input data filter
Deny packets from the outside that claim to be from the inside
Allow everything that is not spoofing us
Filter rule setup
Filter type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Source IP Addr =abcd
Source IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action Not Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
For the output data filters
Deny bounce back packet
Allow packets that originate from us
Filter rule setup
Filter Type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Destination IP Addr =abcd
Destination IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action No Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
11
Product FAQ
1 How can I manage P-660HW-Dx v2
Multilingual Embedded Web GUI for Local and Remote management
CLI (Command-line interface)
Telnet support (Administrator Password Protected ) for remote
configuration change and status monitoring
FTP TFTP sever firmware upgrade and configuration backup and
restore are supported(Administrator Password Protected)
2 What is the default password for Web Configurator
There are two different accounts for P-660HW-Dx v2 Web Configurator
Common User Account and Administrator Account
By factory default the password for the two accounts are
Common User Account user
Administrator Account 1234
You can change the password after you logging in the Web Configurator
Please record your new password whenever you change it The system
will lock you out if you have forgotten your password
3 Whatrsquos the difference between lsquoCommon User Accountrsquo and
lsquoAdministrator Accountrsquo
For Common User Account it can only access the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 and check the current system status
For Administrator Account besides accessing the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 it can also access Winzard setup Advanced setup of
P-660HW-Dx v2
Moreover only with Administrator Password you could manage the
P-660HW-Dx v2 via FTPTFTP or Telnet
4 How do I know the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address assigned by the
ISP
You can view My WAN IP ltfrom ISPgt xxxx shown in Web Configurator
bdquoStatus-gtDevice Information -gtWAN Information‟ to check this IP address
5 What is the micro filter or splitter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
12
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
6 The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Bridge and Router mode whats the
difference between them
When the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet which means
only the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use bridge mode which works as an ADSL modem to
connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account and limit
only one computer to access the Internet
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to add another Internet sharing device
like a router In this case we use the router mode which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
7 How do I know I am using PPPoE
PPPoE requires a user account to login to the providers server If you need to
configure a user name and password on your computer to connect to the ISP
you are probably using PPPoE If you are simply connected to the Internet
when you turn on your computer you probably are not You can also check
your ISP or the information sheet given by the ISP Please choose PPPoE as
the encapsulation type in the P-660HW-Dx v2 if the ISP uses PPPoE
8 Why does my provider use PPPoE
PPPoE emulates a familiar Dial-Up connection It allows your ISP to provide
services using their existing network configuration over the broadband
connections Besides PPPoE supports a broad range of existing applications
and service including authentication accounting secure access and
configuration management
9 What is DDNS
The Dynamic DNS service allows you to alias a dynamic IP address to a static
hostname allowing your computer to be more easily accessed from various
locations on the Internet To use the service you must first apply an account
from several free Web servers such as httpwwwdyndnsorg
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to reach our internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
13
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
updates this IP to DDNS server so that the server can update its IP-to-DNS
entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is updated the DNS
name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still usable
10 When do I need DDNS service
When you want your internal server to be accessed by using DNS name rather
than using the dynamic IP address we can use the DDNS service The DDNS
server allows to alias a dynamic IP address to a static hostname Whenever
the ISP assigns you a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2 sends this IP to the DDNS
server for its updates
11 What is DDNS wildcard Does the P-660HW-Dx v2 support DDNS
wildcard
Some DDNS servers support the wildcard feature which allows the hostname
yourhostdyndnsorg to be aliased to the same IP address as
yourhostdyndnsorg This feature is useful when there are multiple servers
inside and you want users to be able to use things such as
wwwyourhostdyndnsorg and still reach your hostname
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports DDNS wildcard that httpwwwdyndnsorg
supports When using wildcard you simply enter yourhostdyndnsorg in the
Host field in Menu 11 Configure Dynamic DNS
12 Can the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA handle IPSec packets sent by the
IPSec gateway
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA can handle IPSec ESP Tunneling mode We
know when packets go through SUA SUA will change the source IP address
and source port for the host To pass IPSec packets SUA must understand
the ESP packet with protocol number 50 replace the source IP address of the
IPSec gateway to the routers WAN IP address However SUA should not
change the source port of the UDP packets which are used for key
managements Because the remote gateway checks this source port during
connections the port thus is not allowed to be changed
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
14
13 How do I setup my P-660HW-Dx v2 for routing IPSec packets over
SUA
For outgoing IPSec tunnels no extra setting is required
For forwarding the inbound IPSec ESP tunnel A Default server set is required
You could configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding -gt Default Server Setup
It is because SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users So to make an internal server
for outside access we must specify the service port and the LAN IP of this
server in Web configurator Thus SUA is able to forward the incoming packets
to the requested service behind SUA and the outside users access the server
using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address So we have to configure the
internal IPsec client as a default server (unspecified service port) when it acts
a server gateway
14 What is Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping allocates the bandwidth to WAN dynamically and aims at
boosting the efficiency of the bandwidth If there are serveral VCs in the
P-660HW-Dx v2 but only one VC activated at one time the P-660HW-Dx v2
allocates all the Bandwidth to the VC and the VC gets full bandwidth If another
VCs are activated later the bandwidth is yield to other VCs after ward
15 Why do we perform traffic shaping in the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 must manage traffic fairly and provide bandwidth
allocation for different sorts of applications such as voice video and data All
applications have their own natural bit rate Large data transactions have a
fluctuating natural bit rate The P-660HW-Dx v2 is able to support variable
traffic among different virtual connections Certain traffic may be discarded if
the virtual connection experiences congestion Traffic shaping defines a set of
actions taken by the P-660HW-Dx v2 to avoid congestion traffic shaping takes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
15
measures to adapt to unpredictable fluctuations in traffic flows and other
problems among virtual connections
16 What do the parameters (PCR SCR MBS) mean
Traffic shaping parameters (PCR SCR MBS) can be set in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt ATM Setup
Peak Cell Rate(PCR) The maximum bandwidth allocated to this connection
The VC connection throughput is limited by PCR
Sustainable Cell Rate(SCR) The least guaranteed bandwidth of a VC
When there are multi-VCs on the same line the VC throughput is guaranteed
by SCR
Maximum Burst Size(MBS) The amount of cells transmitted through this
VC at the Peak Cell Rate before yielding to other VCs Total bandwidth of the
line is dedicated to single VC if there is only one VC on the line However as
the other VC asking the bandwidth the MBS defines the maximum number of
cells transmitted via this VC with Peak Cell rate before yielding to other VCs
The P-660HW-Dx v2 holds the parameters for shaping the traffic among its
virtual channels If you do not need traffic shaping please set SCR = 0 MBS =
0 and PCR as the maximum value according to the line rate (for example 23
Mbps line rate will result PCR as 5424 cellsec)
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
Constant bit rate(CBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that requires
the user to determine a fixed bandwidth requirement at the time the connection
is set up so that the data can be sent in a steady stream CBR service is often
used when transmitting fixed-rate uncompressed video
Unspecified bit rate(UBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that does
not guarantee any throughput levels and uses only available bandwidth UBR
is often used when transmitting data that can tolerate delays such as e-mail
Variable bit rate(VBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that allows
users to specify a throughput capacity (ie a peak rate) and a sustained rate
but data is not sent evenly You can select VBR for bursty traffic and
bandwidth sharing with other applications It contains two subclasses
Variable bit rate nonreal time (VBR-nRT)
Variable bit rate real time (VBR-RT)
18 What is content filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
16
Internet Content filter allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies
tailored to your needs Content filter gives you the ability to block web sites that
contain key words (that you specify) in the URL You can set a schedule for
when the P-660HW-Dx v2 performs content filtering You can also specify
trusted IP Addresses on LAN for which the P-660HW-Dx v2 will not perform
content filtering You can configure the details about it in Web Configurator
Advanced setup Security -gt Content Filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
17
ADSL FAQ
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems
ADSL provides a dedicated service over a single telephone line cable
modems offer a dedicated service over a shared media While cable modems
have greater downstream bandwidth capabilities (up to 30 Mbps) that
bandwidth is shared among all users on a line and will therefore vary perhaps
dramatically as more users in a neighborhood get online at the same time
Cable modem upstream traffic will in many cases be slower than ADSL either
because the particular cable modem is inherently slower or because of rate
reductions caused by contention for upstream bandwidth slots The big
difference between ADSL and cable modems however is the number of lines
available to each There are no more than 12 million homes passed today that
can support two-way cable modem transmissions and while the figure also
grows steadily it will not catch up with telephone lines for many years
Additionally many of the older cable networks are not capable of offering a
return channel consequently such networks will need significant upgrading
before they can offer high bandwidth services
2 What is the expected throughput
In our test we can get about 16Mbps data rate on 15Kft using the 26AWG
loop The shorter the loop the better the throughput is
3 What is the microfilter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up
You can see the DSL LED Green on the P-660HW-Dx v2s front panel is on
when the ADSL physical layer is up
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL
Depending on the line quality the P-660HW-Dx v2 uses Fall Back and Fall
Forward to automatically adjust the date rate
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
18
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing
Though the LLC-based multiplexing can carry multiple protocols over a single
VC it requires extra header information to identify the protocol being carried
on the virtual circuit (VC) The VC-based multiplexing needs a separate VC for
carrying each protocol but it does not need the extra headers Therefore the
VC-based multiplexing is more efficient
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics
You can use the following CI commands to check the ADSL line
statistics
CIgt wan adsl perfdata
CIgt wan adsl status
CIgt wan adsl linedata far
CIgt wan adsl linedata near
You can also do it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Diagnostic -gt DSL Line -gt DSL Status
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector
The signaling pins on the P-660HW-Dx v2s ADSL connector are pin 3 and pin
4 The middle two pins for a RJ11 cable
9 What is triple play
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
19
More and more TelcoISPs are providing three kinds of services (VoIP Video
and Internet) over one existing ADSL connection
The different services (such as video VoIP and Internet access) require
different Qulity of Service
The high priority is Voice (VoIP) data
The Medium priority is Video (IPTV) data
The low priority is internet access such as ftp etc hellip
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus you can configure each PVC separately to assign different
QoS to different application
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
20
Firewall FAQ
General
1 What is a network firewall
A firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control
policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to
protect a trusted network from an untrusted network The firewall can be
thought of two mechanisms One to block the traffic and the other to permit
traffic
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure
The P-660HW-Dx v2 is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks such as Ping of Death SYN Flood LAND
attack IP Spoofing etc It also uses stateful packet inspection to determine if
an inbound connection is allowed through the firewall to the private LAN The
P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Network Address Translation (NAT) which
translates the private local addresses to one or multiple public addresses This
adds a level of security since the clients on the private LAN are invisible to the
Internet
3 What are the basic types of firewalls
Conceptually there are three types of firewalls
1 Packet Filtering Firewall
2 Application-level Firewall
3 Stateful Inspection Firewall
Packet Filtering Firewalls generally make their decisions based on the header
information in individual packets These headers information include the
source destination addresses and ports of the packets
Application-level Firewalls generally are hosts running proxy servers which
permit no traffic directly between networks and which perform logging and
auditing of traffic passing through them A proxy server is an application
gateway or circuit-level gateway that runs on top of general operating system
such as UNIX or Windows NT It hides valuable data by requiring users to
communicate with secure systems by mean of a proxy A key drawback of this
device is performance
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
21
Stateful Inspection Firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against
defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP
address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the
integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols The flexible
nature of Stateful Inspection firewalls generally provides the best speed and
transparency however they may lack the granular application level access
control or caching that some proxies support
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2
1 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall inspects packets contents and IP
headers It is applicable to all protocols that understands data in the
packet is intended for other layers from network layer up to the
application layer
2 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall performs stateful inspection It takes into
account the state of connections it handles so that for example a
legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request
for that packet and allowed in Conversely an incoming packet
masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be
blocked
3 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall uses session filtering ie smart rules
that enhance the filtering process and control the network session
rather than control individual packets in a session
4 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall is fast It uses a hashing function to
search the matched session cache instead of going through every
individual rule for a packet
5 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall provides email service to notify you for
routine reports and when alerts occur
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet filtering and
NAT built-in
With the spectacular growth of the Internet and online access companies that
do business on the Internet face greater security threats Although packet filter
and NAT restrict access to particular computers and networks however for
the other companies this security may be insufficient because packets filters
typically cannot maintain session state Thus for greater security a firewall is
considered
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a
connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable
a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
22
There are four types of DoS attacks
1 Those that exploits bugs in a TCPIP implementation such as Ping of
Death and Teardrop
2 Those that exploits weaknesses in the TCPIP specification such as
SYN Flood and LAND Attacks
3 Brute-force attacks that flood a network with useless data such as
Smurf attack
4 IP Spoofing
7 What is Ping of Death attack
Ping of Death uses a PING utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the
maximum 65535 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification The oversize
packet is then sent to an unsuspecting system Systems may crash hang or
reboot
8 What is Teardrop attack
Teardrop attack exploits weakness in the reassemble of the IP packet
fragments As data is transmitted through a network IP packets are often
broken up into smaller chunks Each fragment looks like the original packet
except that it contains an offset field The Teardrop program creates a series of
IP fragments with overlapping offset fields When these fragments are
reassembled at the destination some systems will crash hang or reboot
9 What is SYN Flood attack
SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each
packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response While the
targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK it queues up all
outstanding SYN-ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue
SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when
an internal timer (which is set a relatively long intervals) terminates the TCP
three-way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all
incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users
10 What is LAND attack
In a LAN attack hackers flood SYN packets to the network with a spoofed
source IP address of the targeted system This makes it appear as if the host
computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the
target system tries to respond to itself
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
23
11 What is Brute-force attack
A Brute-force attack such as Smurf attack targets a feature in the IP
specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting to quickly flood the
target network with useless data A Smurf hacker flood a destination IP
address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network the router will
broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network If there
are numerous hosts this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request
packet the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the intermediary
network but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address
known as the victim network This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all
available bandwidth making communications impossible
12 What is IP Spoofing attack
Many DoS attacks also use IP Spoofing as part of their attack IP Spoofing
may be used to break into systems to hide the hackers identity or to magnify
the effect of the DoS attack IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain
unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking
that the communications are coming from within the trusted network To
engage in IP Spoofing a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it
appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed
through the router or firewall
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
There are two default ACLs pre-configured in the P-660HW-Dx v2 one allows
all connections from LAN to WAN and the other blocks all connections from
WAN to LAN except of the DHCP packets
Configuration
1 How do I configure the firewall
You can use the Web Configurator to configure the firewall for P-660HW-Dx v2
By factory default if you connect your PC to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 you can access Web Configurator via bdquohttp19216811‟
Note Donrsquot forget to type in the Administrator Password
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall
There are several ways to protect others from touching the settings of your
firewall
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
24
1 Change the default Administrator password since it is required when
setting up the firewall
2 Limit who can access to your P-660HW-Dx v2‟s Web Configurator or
CLI You can enter the IP address of the secured LAN host in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt
[Service] -gtSecured Client IP to allow special access to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
The default value in this field is 0000 which means you do not care which
host is trying to telnet your P-660HW-Dx v2 or accessthe Web
Configurator of
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN
There are four reasons that WWWTelnet from WAN is blocked
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable Telnet from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow WWWTelnet connection
from WAN The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
WWW (For accessing Web Configurator)
Source IP= Remote trusted host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP80
Action=Forward
TELNET (For accessing Command Line Interface)
Source IP= Telnet Client host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP23
Action=Forward
(2)You have disabled WWWTelnet service in Web Configurator Advanced
setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
25
(3) WWWTelnet service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host
entered in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote
MGNT
(4)A filter set which blocks WWWTelnet from WAN is applied to WAN node
You can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using FTP over
WAN
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable FTP from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow FTP connection from WAN
The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
Source IP= FTP host
Destination IP= P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP
Service= FTP TCP21 TCP20
Action=Forward
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
26
(2) You have disabled FTP service in Web Configurator Advanced setup
Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(3) FTP service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host entered
in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(4) A filter set which blocks FTP from WAN is applied to WAN node You
can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
Log and Alert
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the firewall log immediately when the packet
matches a firewall rule The log for Default Firewall Policy (LAN to WAN WAN
to LAN WAN to WAN) is generated automatically with factory default setting
but you can change it in Web Configurator
2 What does the log show to us
The log supports up to 128 entries There are 5 columns for each entry Please
see the example shown below
3 How do I view the firewall log
All logs generated in P-660HW-Dx v2 including firewall logs IPSec logs
system logs are migrated to centralized logs So you can view firewall logs in
Centralized logs Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs
-gtView Log
The log keeps 128 entries the new entries will overwrite the old entries when
the log has over 128 entries
Before you can view firewall logs there are two steps you need to do
(1) Enable log function in Centralized logs setup via either one of the following
methods
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
27
Web configuration Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log
Settings check Access Control and Attacks options depending on
your real situation
CI command sys logs category [access | attack]
(2) Enable log function in firewall default policy or in firewall rules
After the above two steps you can view firewall logs via
Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gtView
Log
View the log by CI command sys logs disp
You can also view Centralized logs via mail or syslog please configure mail
server or Unix Syslog server in Web configuration Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the alert when an attack is detected by the
firewall and sends it via Email So to send the alert you must configure the
mail server and Email address using Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings You can also specify how frequently
you want to receive the alert in it
5 What is the difference between the log and alert
A log entry is just added to the log inside the P-660HW-Dx v2 and e-mailed
together with all other log entries at the scheduled time as configured An alert
is e-mailed immediately after an attacked is detected
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
28
Wireless FAQ
General FAQ
1 What is a Wireless LAN
Wireless LANs provide all the functionality of wired LANs without the need for
physical connections (wires) Data is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier
and transmitted through the ether Typical bit-rates are 11Mbps and 54Mbps
although in practice data throughput is half of this Wireless LANs can be
formed simply by equipping PCs with wireless NICs If connectivity to a wired
LAN is required an Access Point (AP) is used as a bridging device APs are
typically located close to the centre of the wireless client population
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN
Mobility Wireless LAN systems can provide LAN users with access to
real-time information anywhere in their organization This mobility supports
productivity and service opportunities not possible with wired networks
Installation Speed and Simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be
fast and easy and can eliminate the need to pull cable through walls and
ceilings
Installation Flexibility Wireless technology allows the network to go where
wire cannot go
Reduced Cost-of-Ownership While the initial investment required for
wireless LAN hardware can be higher than the cost of wired LAN hardware
overall installation expenses and life-cycle costs can be significantly lower
Long-term cost benefits are greatest in dynamic environments requiring
frequent moves and changes
Scalability Wireless LAN systems can be configured in a variety of topologies
to meet the needs of specific applications and installations Configurations are
easily changed and range from peer-to-peer networks suitable for a small
number of users to full infrastructure networks of thousands of users that
enable roaming over a broad area
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN
The speed of Wireless LAN is still relatively slower than wired LAN The setup
cost of Wireless LAN is relative high because the equipment cost including
access point and PCMCIA Wireless LAN card is higher than hubs and CAT 5
cables
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
29
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks
Airports hotels and even coffee shops like Starbucks are deploying 80211
networks so people can wirelessly surf the Internet with their laptops
5 What is an Access Point
The AP (access point also known as a base station) is the wireless server that
with an antenna and a wired Ethernet connection that broadcasts information
using radio signals AP typically acts as a bridge for the clients It can pass
information to wireless LAN cards that have been installed in computers or
laptops allowing those computers to connect to the campus network and the
Internet without wires
6 Whatrsquos the difference between IEEE80211abg
The IEEE 80211 is a wireless LAN industry standard and the objective of
IEEE 80211 is to make sure that different manufactures wireless LAN devices
can communicate to each other Below is a brief comparison for the
IEEE80211 abg
Publish
Time
Frequency
Band(GHZ)
Data Rate(Mbps) Compatibility
IEEE80211a 1999 UNII Band
515~5825
691218243648
54
Only work with
80211a
devices
IEEE80211b 1999 ISM Band
24~24835
125511 -
IEEE80211g 2001 ISM Band
24~24835
691218243648
54
Backward
compatible with
80211b
devices
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
Yes As long as the products comply to the same IEEE 80211 standard The
Wi-Fi logo is used to define 80211b compatible products Wi-Fi5 is a
compatibility standard for 80211a products running in the 5GHz band
8 What is Wi-Fi
The Wi-Fi logo signifies that a product is interoperable with wireless
networking equipment from other vendors A Wi-Fi logo product has been
tested and certified by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA)
The Socket Wireless LAN Card is Wi-Fi certified and that means that it will
work (interoperate) with any brand of Access Point that is also Wi-Fi certified
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band
Various spread spectrum radio communication applications use the 24 GHz
band This includes WLAN systems (not necessarily of the type IEEE
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
30
80211b) cordless phones wireless medical telemetry equipment and
Bluetoothtrade short-range wireless applications which include connecting
printers to computers and connecting modems or hands-free kits to mobile
phones
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device
Any time devices are operated in the same frequency band there is the
potential for interference
Both the 80211bg and Bluetooth devices occupy the same24-to-2483-GHz
unlicensed frequency range-the same band But a Bluetooth device would not
interfere with other 80211 devices much more than another 80211 device
would interefere While more collisions are possible with the introduction of a
Bluetooth device they are also possible with the introduction of another 80211
device or a new 24 GHz cordless phone for that matter But BlueTooth
devices are usually low-power so the effects that a Bluetooth device may have
on an 80211 network if any arent far-reaching
11 Can radio signals pass through wall
Transmitting through a wall is possible depending upon the material used in its
construction In general metals and substances with a high water content do
not allow radio waves to pass through Metals reflect radio waves and concrete
attenuates radio waves The amount of attenuation suffered in passing through
concrete will be a function of its thickness and amount of metal re-enforcement
used
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference among WLAN
products
Factors of interference
(1) Obstacles walls ceilings furniturehellip etc
(2) Building Materials metal door aluminum studs
(3) Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors
Solution
(1) Minimizing the number of walls and ceilings
(2) Antenna is positioned for best reception
(3) Keep WLAN products away from electrical devices eg microwaves
monitors electric motorshellip etc
(4) Add additional APs if necessary
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN
WLANs are generally privately owned wireless systems that are deployed in a
corporation warehouse hospital or educational campus setting Data rates
are high and there are no per-packet charges for data transmission
WWANs are generally publicly shared data networks designed to provide
coverage in metropolitan areas and along traffic corridors WWANs are owned
by a service provider or carrier Data rates are low and charges are based on
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
31
usage Specialized applications are characteristically designed around short
burst messaging
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage any
hardware
Yes it will not harm the hardware but the module will not be detected and
work after inserting to the slot You need to reboot the router to initialize the
module
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
The wireless security modes supported on P-660HW-Dx v2 are Static
WEP WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK and WPA2
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
It supports IEEE 80211bgg+ standard
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering
Yes it supports up to 32 MAC Address filtering
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption
Yes it means that the AP on P-660HW-Dx v2 will automatically decelerate
when devices move beyond the optimal range or other interference is present
If the device moves back within the range of a higher-speed transmission the
connection will automatically speed up again Rate shifting is a physical-layer
mechanism transparent to the user and the upper layers of the protocol stack
Advanced FAQ
1 What is Ad Hoc mode
A wireless network consists of a number of stations without using an access
point or any connection to a wired network
2 What is Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure mode implies connectivity to a wired communications
infrastructure If such connectivity is required the Access Points must be used
to connect to the wired LAN backbone Wireless clients have their
configurations set for infrastructure mode in order to utilise access points
relaying
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area
This depends on the surrounding terrain the diameter of the client population
and the number of clients If an area is large with dispersed pockets of
populations then extension points can be used for extend coverage
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
32
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (DSSS)
DSSS spreads its signal continuously over a wide frequency band DSSS
maps the information bearing bit-pattern at the sending station into a higher
data rate bit sequence using a chipping code The chipping code (also known
as processing gain) introduces redundancy which allows data recovery if
certain bit errors occur during transmission The FCC rules the minimum
processing gain should be 10 typical systems use processing gains of 20
IEEE 80211b specifies the use of DSSS
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (FHSS)
FHSS uses a narrowband carrier which hops through a predefined sequence
of several frequencies at a specific rate This avoids problems with fixed
channel narrowband noise and simple jamming Both transmitter and receiver
must have their hopping sequences synchronized to create the effect of a
single logical channel To an unsynchronised receiver an FHSS transmission
appears to be short-duration impulse noise 80211 may use FHSS or DSSS
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
No Provided the antenna is optimally designed for 24GHz or 5GHz operation
WLAN NICs often include an internal antenna which may provide sufficient
reception
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range
This frequency range has been set aside by the FCC and is generally labeled
the ISM band A few years ago Apple and several other large corporations
requested that the FCC allow the development of wireless networks within this
frequency range What we have today is a protocol and system that allows for
unlicensed use of radios within a prescribed power level The ISM band is
populated by Industrial Scientific and Medical devices that are all low power
devices but can interfere with each other
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID)
SSID is a configurable identification that allows clients to communicate to the
appropriate base station With proper configuration only clients that are
configured with the same SSID can communicate with base stations having
the same SSID SSID from a security point of view acts as a simple single
shared password between base stations and clients
9 What is an ESSID
ESSID stands for Extended Service Set Identifier and identifies the wireless
LAN The ESSID of the mobile device must match the ESSID of the AP to
communicate with the AP The ESSID is a 32-character maximum string and is
case-sensitive
Security FAQ
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Points
radio link
To secure the date across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Point‟s radio link we
could select any one of the security mode Static 64128256 bit WEP
WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK WPA2
2 What is WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security mechanism defined within the
80211 standard and designed to make the security of the wireless medium
equal to that of a cable (wire) WEP data encryption was designed to prevent
access to the network by intruders and to prevent the capture of wireless
LAN traffic through eavesdropping WEP allows the administrator to define a
set of respective Keys for each wireless network user based on a Key
String passed through the WEP encryption algorithm Access is denied by
anyone who does not have an assigned key Note WEP has shown to have
fundamental flaws in its key generation processing
3 What is WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN You can refer to
the User Guide for more information about it
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP
40 bit WEP and 64 bit WEP are the same encryption level and can interoperate
The lower level of WEP encryption uses a 40 bit (10 Hex character) as secret
key (set by user) and a 24 bit Initialization Vector (not under user control)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
34
(40+24=64) Some vendors refer to this level of WEP as 40 bit others as 64
bit
5 What is a WEP key
A WEP key is a user defined string of characters used to encrypt and decrypt
data
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP
No 128-bit WEP will not communicate with 64-bit WEP Although 128 bit WEP
also uses a 24 bit Initialization Vector but it uses a 104 bit as secret key Users
need to use the same encryption level in order to make a connection
7 Can the SSID be encrypted
No WEP only encrypts the data packets not the 80211 management
packetsThe SSID is in the beacon and probe management messages and
SSID goes over the air in clear text This makes obtaining the SSID easy by
sniffing 80211 wireless traffic
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff the SSID
Many APs by default have broadcasting the SSID turned on Sniffers typically
will find the SSID in the broadcast beacon packets Turning off the broadcast of
SSID in the beacon message (a common practice) does not prevent getting
the SSID since the SSID is sent in the clear in the probe message when a
client associates to an AP a sniffer just has to wait for a valid user to associate
to the network to see the SSID
9 What are Insertion Attacks
The insertion attacks are based on placing unauthorized devices on the
wireless network without going through a security process and review
10 What is Wireless Sniffer
An attacker can sniff and capture legitimate traffic Many of the sniffer tools for
Ethernet are based on capturing the first part of the connection session where
the data would typically include the username and password An intruder can
masquerade as that user by using this captured information An intruder who
monitors the wireless network can apply this same attack principle on the
wireless
11 What is OTIST How do I use it
OTIST is acronym for ZyXEL‟s bdquoOne Touch Intelligent Security Technology‟
It enables P-660HW-Dx v2 and ZyXEL‟s OTIST supported Wireless adapters
to establish connections of the WPA-PSK security mode automatically with
just one touch at the reset button on rear panel
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
35
To use this function on P-660HW-Dx v2 you could press the reset button on
P-660HW-Dx v2 for 1~5 seconds the OTIST is actived The P-660HW-Dx v2
will enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA-PSK automatically if no
WLAN security has been set The default setup key for OTIST is bdquo01234567‟
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
36
Application Notes
General Application Notes
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode
Setup your workstation
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
If the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet that means only
the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as an ADSL bridge
modem to connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account
and limit only one computer to access the Internet
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
To connect your computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN port the computer
must have an Ethernet adapter card installed For connecting a single
computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2 we use a Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
In most cases the IP address of the computer is assigned by the ISP
dynamically so you have to configure the computer as a DHCP client which
obtains the IP from the ISP using DHCP protocol The ISP may also provide
the gateway DNS via DHCP if they are available Otherwise please enter the
static IP addresses for all that the ISP gives to you in the network TCPIP
settings For Windows we check the option Obtain an IP address
automatically in its TCPIP setup please see the example shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
37
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
bridge mode We will use Web Configurator to guide you through the related
menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as bridge mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
(2)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
38
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For example
LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
(2) Turn off DHCP Server and configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 in
Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN We use 19216811 as
the LAN IP for P-660HW-Dx v2 in this case
Step 1 Disactive DHCP Server and apply it
Step 2 Assign an IP to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx v2 eg
19216811
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to install an Internet sharing device like
a router In this case we use the P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
Connect the LAN ports of all computers to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 using Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
Since the P-660HW-Dx v2 is set to DHCP server as default so you need only
to configure the workstations as the DHCP clients in the networking settings In
this case the IP address of the computer is assigned by the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 can also provide the DNS to the clients via DHCP if it is
available For this setup in Windows we check the option Obtain an IP
address automatically in its TCPIP setup Please see the example shown
below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
39
Set up your P-660HW-Dx v2 under routing mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
Routing mode for routing traffic We will use Web Configurator to guide you
through the related menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as routing mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For
example LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
IP Address
Assignment
Set to Dynamic if the ISP provides the IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2
dynamically Otherwise set to Static and enter the IP in the IP
Address field
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
40
(2) Configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 and the DHCP settings in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
What is DHCP Relay
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In addition to the
DHCP server feature the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports the DHCP relay function
When it is configured as DHCP server it assigns the IP addresses to the LAN
clients When it is configured as DHCP relay it is responsible for forwarding
the requests and responses negotiating between the DHCP clients and the
server See figure 1
Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
We could set the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay by the following command
in CLI
Ip dhcp enif0 mode relay
Ip dhcp enif0 relay server [Server IP Address]
4 SUA Notes
Tested SUANAT Applications (eg Cu-SeeMe ICQ NetMeeting)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
41
Introduction
Generally SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users However some applications
such as Cu-SeeMe and ICQ will need to connect to the local user behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 In such case a SUA server must be configured to forward
the incoming packets to the true destination behind SUA After the required
server are configured in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding the internal server or client applications can be accessed
by using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP Address
SUA Supporting Table
The following are the required Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding for the various applications running SUA mode
ZyXEL SUA Supporting Table1
Application
Required Settings in Port Forwarding
PortIP
Outgoing Connection Incoming
Connection
HTTP None 80client IP
FTP None 21client IP
TELNET None 23client IP
(and active Telnet
service from WAN)
POP3 None 110client IP
SMTP None 25client IP
mIRC
None for Chat
For DCC please set
DefaultClient IP
Windows PPTP None 1723client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
42
ICQ 99a None for Chat
For DCC please set
ICQ -gt preference -gt
connections -gt firewall
and set the firewall time
out to 80 seconds in
firewall setting
Defaultclient IP
ICQ 2000b None for Chat None for Chat
ICQ Phone 2000b None 6701client IP
Cornell 11 Cu-SeeMe None 7648client IP
White Pine 312 Cu-SeeMe2 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
White Pine 40 Cu-SeeMe 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
Microsoft NetMeeting 21 amp
3013
None 1720client IP
1503client IP
Cisco IPTV 200 None
RealPlayer G2 None
VDOLive None
Quake1064 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeII2305 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeIII105 beta None
StartCraft 6112client IP
Quick Time 40 None
pcAnywhere 80 None
5631client IP
5632client IP
22client IP
IPsec (ESP tunneling mode) None (one client only) DefaultClient
Microsoft Messenger Service
30 6901client IP 6901client IP
Microsoft Messenger Service
46 47 50hellip
(none UPnP)6
None for Chat File
transfer Video and Voice
None for Chat File
transfer Video and
Voice
Net2Phone None 6701client IP
Network Time Protocol (NTP) None 123 server IP
Win2k Terminal Server None 3389server IP
Remote Anything None 3996 - 4000client IP
Virtual Network Computing None 5500client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
43
(VNC) 5800client IP
5900client IP
AIM (AOL Instant Messenger) None for Chat and IM None for Chat and
IM
e-Donkey None 4661 - 4662client IP
POLYCOM Video
Conferencing None Defaultclient IP
iVISTA 41 None 80server IP
Microsoft Xbox Live7 None NA 1 Since SUA enables your LAN to appear as a single computer to the Internet
it is not possible to configure similar servers on the same LAN behind SUA 2 Because White Pine Cu-SeeMe uses dedicate ports (port 7648 amp port 24032)
to transmit and receive data therefore only one local Cu-SeeMe is allowed
within the same LAN 3 In SUA mode only one local NetMeeting user is allowed because the
outsiders can not distinguish between local users using the same internet IP 4 Certain Quake servers do not allow multiple users to login using the same
unique IP so only one Quake user will be allowed in this case Moreover
when a Quake server is configured behind SUA P-660HW-Dx v2 will not be
able to provide information of that server on the internet 5 Quake II has the same limitations as that of Quake I 6 P-660HW-Dx v2 supports MSN Messenger 46 47 50hellip video voice
pass-through NAT In addition for the Windows OS supported UPnP
(Universal Plug and Play) such as Windows XP and Windows ME UPnP
supported in P-660HW-Dx v2 is an alternative solution to pass through MSN
Messenger video voice traffic For more detail please refer to UPnP
application note 7 P-660HW-Dx v2 support Microsoft Xbox Live with factory default
configuration
Configurations
For example if the workstation operating Cu-SeeMe has an IP of 192168134
then the default SUA server must be set to 192168134 The peer Cu-SeeMe
user can reach this workstation by using P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
44
which can be obtained from Web Configurator
Configure an Internal Server behind SUA
Introduction
If you wish you can make internal servers (eg Web ftp or mail server)
accessible for outside users even though SUA makes your LAN appear as a
single machine to the outside world A service is identified by the port number
Also since you need to specify the IP address of a server behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 a server must have a fixed IP address and not be a DHCP
client whose IP address potentially changes each time P-660HW-Dx v2 is
powered on
In addition to the servers for specific services SUA supports a default server
A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for is
forwarded to the default server If the default server is not defined the service
request is simply discarded
Configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
45
To make a server visible to the outside world specify the port number of the
service and the inside address of the server in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The outside users can access
the local server using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address which can be
obtained from Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information
For example
Configuring an internal Web server for outside access (suppose the
Server IP Address is 192168110)
(1) Fill in the service name and server IP Address press button bdquoAdd‟
(2) If add successfully the Web Configurator will display message
bdquoConfiguration updated successfully‟ at the bottom You can see the port
forwarding rule on the same page the default port for Web Server is 80
(3) If you want to change the port for Web Server you could press button
bdquoModify‟ on corresponding rule then modify and apply it
Default port numbers for some services
Service Port Number
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
46
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
Configure a PPTP server behind SUA
Introduction
PPTP is a tunneling protocol defined by the PPTP forum that allows PPP
packets to be encapsulated within Internet Protocol (IP) packets and
forwarded over any IP network including the Internet itself
In order to run the Windows 9x PPTP client you must be able to establish an
IP connection with a tunnel server such as the Windows NT Server 40
Remote Access Server
Windows Dial-Up Networking uses the Internet standard Point-to-Point (PPP)
to provide a secure optimized multiple-protocol network connection over
dial-up telephone lines All data sent over this connection can be encrypted
and compressed and multiple network level protocols (TCPIP NetBEUI and
IPX) can be run correctly Windows NT Domain Login level security is
preserved even across the Internet
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
47
Window98 PPTP Client Internet NT RAS Server Protocol Stack
PPTP appears as new modem type (Virtual Private Networking Adapter) that
can be selected when setting up a connection in the Dial-Up Networking folder
The VPN Adapter type does not appear elsewhere in the system Since PPTP
encapsulates its data stream in the PPP protocol the VPN requires a second
dial-up adapter This second dial-up adapter for VPN is added during the
installation phase of the Upgrade in addition to the first dial-up adapter that
provides PPP support for the analog or ISDN modem
The PPTP is supported in Windows NT and Windows 98 already For
Windows 95 it needs to be upgraded by the Dial-Up Networking 12 upgrade
Configuration
This application note explains how to establish a PPTP connection with a
remote private network in the P-660HW-Dx v2 SUA case In ZyNOS all PPTP
packets can be forwarded to the internal PPTP Server (WinNT server) behind
SUA The port number of the PPTP has to be entered in the Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding on
P-660HW-Dx v2 to forward to the appropriate private IP address of Windows
NT server
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
48
Example
The following example shows how to dial to an ISP via the P-660HW-Dx v2
and then establish a tunnel to a private network There will be three items that
you need to set up for PPTP application these are PPTP server (WinNT)
PPTP client (Win9x) and the P-660HW-Dx v2
(1) PPTP server setup (WinNT)
Add the VPN service from Control Panel -gtNetwork
Add an user account for PPTP logged on user
Enable RAS port
Select the network protocols from RAS such as IPX TCPIP NetBEUI
Set the Internet gateway to P-660HW-Dx v2
(2) PPTP client setup (Win9x)
Add one VPN connection from Dial-Up Networking by entering the
correct username amp password and the IP address of the P-660HW-Dx
v2s Internet IP address for logging to NT RAS server
Set the Internet gateway to the router that is connecting to ISP
(3) P-660HW-Dx v2 setup
Before making a VPN connection from Win9x to WinNT server you
need to connect P-660HW-Dx v2 router to your ISP first
Enter the IP address of the PPTP server (WinNT server) and the
port number for PPTP as shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
49
Select service name as bdquoPPTP‟ fill in the Server IP Address then press button
bdquoAdd‟
When you have finished the above settings you can ping to the remote Win9x
client from WinNT This ping command is used to demonstrate that remote
the Win9x can be reached across the Internet If the Internet connection
between two LANs is achievable you can place a VPN call from the remote
Win9x client
For example Cping 203661132
When a dial-up connection to ISP is established a default gateway is assigned
to the router traffic through that connection Therefore the output below shows
the default gateway of the Win9x client after the dial-up connection has been
established
Before making a VPN connection from the Win9x client to the NT server you
need to know the exact Internet IP address that the ISP assigns to
P-660HW-Dx v2 router in SUA mode and enter this IP address in the VPN
dial-up dialog box You can check this Internet IP address from PNC Monitor or
S Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information If the Internet IP address
is a fixed IP address provided by ISP in SUA mode then you can always use
this IP address for reaching the VPN server
In the following example the IP address 1401131225 is dynamically
assigned by ISP You must enter this IP address in the VPN Server dialog box
for reaching the PPTP server After the VPN link is established you can start
the network protocol application such as IP IPX and NetBEUI
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
50
5 Using Full Feature NAT
When P-660HW-Dx v2 is in Routing mode you can select NAT Option as
Full Feature in Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit
Key Settings
Field Options Description
Network Address
Translation
Full Feature
When you select this option you can select
Address Mapping Set Number 1~8 in the
pull-down menu on the right
None NAT is disabled when you select this option
SUA Only
When you select this option this remote node
will use default SUA Address Mapping Set
You can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat
lookup 255‟ It‟s a read-only sets with two
rules Many-to-One and server mapping
Select Full Feature when you require other
mapping types
Configuring NAT
Address Mapping Sets and NAT Server Sets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
51
The P-660HW-Dx v2 has 8 remote nodes and so allows you to configure 8
NAT Address Mapping Sets You must specify which NAT Address Mapping
Set (1~8) to use in the remote node when you select Full Feature NAT
You can edit 10 rules for each Address Mapping Set You can edit the rules for
Address Mapping Sets 1 in Web Configurator The other Address Mapping
Sets 2~8 can only be configured in CLI (Command Line Interface)
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports We
can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Port Forwarding To use the NAT server sets you‟ve configured a Server
rule must be set up inside the NAT Address Mapping set Please see NAT
Server Sets for further information on how to apply it
When you select SUA Only the P-660HW-Dx v2 will use a default SUA
Address Mapping set for it It has two rules Many-to-One and Server You
can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat lookup 255‟
Please note that the fields in this menu are read-only However the settings of
the rule set 2 can be modified in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The following table explains the fields in this
above screen
Field Description OptionExample
set This is sequence number for Address Mapping Sets 255 for SUA
Internal
Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA)
0000 for the
Many-to-One type
Local End
IP
This is the starting local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0000 and the
End IP is 255255255255
255255255255
Global Start
IP
This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you
have a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start
IP
0000
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
52
Global End
IP This is the ending global IP address (IGA) NA
Type This is the NAT mapping types Many-to-One and
Server
Here we‟ll guide you to configure Address Mapping Sets from Web
Configurator and CLI (Since in Web Configurator we can only edit the rules
for Address Mapping Sets 1 The other Address Mapping Sets 2~8 can only
be configured in CLI)
Now lets begin with Web Configurator
Firstly let‟s come to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping
This menu is for Address Mapping Set 1 you can edit 10 Address Mapping
Rules for Set 1 You can edit or remove a rule by clicking the two buttons on
the rule table
Click the bdquoEditrsquo Button on the rule 1 then you can enter the window in which
you can edit an individual rule and configure the Mapping Type Local and
Global StartEnd IPs
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
53
The following table describes the fields in this screen
Field Description OptionExample
Type You can select one of the five mapping types from the
pull-down menu
1 One-to-One
2 Many-to-One
3 Many-to-Many
Overload
4 Many-to-Many No
Overload
5 Server
Local
IP
Start This is the starting local IP address (ILA) 0000
End
This is the ending local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0000 and the
End IP as 255255255255 This field is NA for
One-to-One type
255255255255
Global
IP
Start This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you have
a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start IP 0000
End
This is the ending global IP address (IGA) This
field is NA for One-to-One Many-to-One and Server
types
2001164
Note For all Local and Global IPs the End IP address must begin after the IP
Start address ie you cannot have an End IP address beginning before the
Start IP address
Configure Address Mapping Sets in CLI
Setp 1 Telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 (We suppose the LAN IP Address of
P-660HW-Dx v2 is 19216811)
Step 2 Select one Address Mapping Set (1~8) by command bdquoip nat
addrmap map [map ] [set name]‟ (set name is optional) Suppose we
configure set 2 in the example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
54
Setp 3 Set NAT address mapping rule for the Address Mapping Set you just
configured (Set 2 in this example) by command bdquoip nat addrmap rule [rule]
[insert | edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP] [global start IP] [global
end IP] [server set ]‟ Suppose we set a Many-to-One rule for set 2 by
command bdquoip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 1 192168110 192168120 172111
172111‟
Setp 4 Save the configuration by command bdquoip nat addrmap save‟ You can
apply the Address Mapping Set 2 to remote nodes in Web Configurator when
you select Full Feature NAT See the intire process as follows
Set 5 You can lookup the successfully configured Address Mapping Sets by
command bdquoip nat addrmap disp‟
Key Settings
CI Command Description
ip nat addrmap map [map] [set
name]
Select NAT address mapping set and set mapping set
name but set name is optional
Example
gt ip nat addrmap map 2 Test
ip nat addrmap rule [rule] [insert |
edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP]
[global start IP] [global end IP] [server
set ]
Set NAT address mapping rule If the ldquotyperdquo is not
ldquoinside-serverrdquo then the ldquotyperdquo field will still need a
dummy value like ldquo0rdquo
Type is 0 - 4 = one-to-one many-to-one
many-to-many-overload many-to-many-non overload
inside-server
Example
gt ip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 3 192168110
192168120 172111 172111
ip nat addrmap clear [map] [rule] Clear the selected rule of the set
ip nat addrmap freememory Discard Changes
ip nat addrmap disp Display nat set information
ip nat addrmap save Save settings
ip nat server load [set] Load the server sets of NAT into buffer
ip nat server disp [1] ldquodisp 1rdquo means to display the NAT server set in buffer
if parameter ldquo1rdquo is omitted then it will display all the
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
55
server sets
ip nat server save Save the NAT server set buffer into flash
ip nat server clear [set] Clear the server set [set] must use ldquosaverdquo command
to let it save into flash
ip nat server edit [rule] active Activate the rule [rule] rule number is 1 to 24 the
number 25-36 is for UPNP application
ip nat server edit [rule] svrport ltstart
portgt ltend portgt
Configure the port range from ltstart port gt to ltend
portgt
ip nat server edit [rule] remotehost
ltstart IPgt ltend IPgt
Configure the IP address range of remote host (Leave
it to be default value if you don‟t need this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] leasetime
ltsecondsgt
Configure the lease time (Leave it to be default value if
you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] rulename
ltstringgt
Configure the name of the rule (Leave it to be default
value if you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] forwardip ltIP
addressgt Configure the LAN IP address to be forwarded
ip nat server edit [rule] protocol
ltTCP|UDP|ALLgt
Configure the protocol to be used TCP UDP or ALL
(it must be capital)
NAT Server Sets
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports
(similar to the old SUA menu of before) If you wish you can make inside
servers for different services eg Web or FTP visible to the outside users
even though NAT makes your network appears as a single machine to the
outside world A server is identified by the port number eg Web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21
As an example (see the following figure) if you have a Web server at
192168136 and a FTP server at 192168133 then you need to specify for
port 80 (Web) the server at IP address 192168136 and for port 21 (FTP)
another at IP address 192168133
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
56
Please note that a server can support more than one service eg a server
can provide both FTP and Mail service while another provides only Web
service
The following procedures show how to configure a server behind NAT
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
Step 2 Select the service name from the pull-down menu and fill in the server
Address on bdquoServer IP Address‟ then click button bdquoAdd‟ to save it
Step 3 You could click the button bdquoEdit‟ on the rule to modify the Service name
Server IP Address StartEnd Port
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please
refer RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers
Service Port Number
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol)
1723
Examples
Internet Access Only
Internet Access with an Internal Server
Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
(1) Internet Access Only
In our Internet Access example we only need one rule where all our ILAs map
to one IGA assigned by the ISP You can just use the default SUA NAT or you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
57
could select Full Feature NAT and select an Address Mapping Set with a
Many-to-One Rule See the following figure
(2) Internet Access with an Internal Server
In this case we do exactly as the figure (use the convenient pre-configured
SUA Only set) and also go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
NAT -gt Port Forwarding to specify the Internet Server behind the NAT as
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
58
below
(3) Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
(One-to-One Many-to-One Server Set mapping types are used)
In this case we have 3 IGAs from the ISP We have two very busy internal FTP
servers and also an internal general server for the web and mail In this case
we want to assign the 3 IGAs by the following way using 4 NAT rules
Rule 1 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
Rule 3 (Many-to-One type) to map the other clients to IGA3 (200003)
Rule 4 (Server type) to map a web server and mail server with ILA3
(192168120) to IGA3 Type Server allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types to other machines behind NAT on the LAN
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
59
Step 1 In this case we need to map ILA to more than one IGA therefore we
must choose the Full Feature option from the NAT field in currently active
remote node and assign IGA3 to P-660HW-Dx v2‟s WAN IP Address
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping to begin configuring Address Mapping Set 1 We can see
there are 10 blank rule table that could be configured See the following setup
for the four rules in our case
Rule 1 Setup Select One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 Setup Selecting One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
60
Rule 3 Setup Select Many-to-One type to map the other clients to IGA3
(200003)
Rule 4 Setup Select Server type to map our web server and mail server with
ILA3 (192168120) to IGA3
Menu Network -gt NAT -gt Address Mapping should look as follows now
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
61
Step 3 Now we configure all other incoming traffic to go to our web server and
mail server from Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
(4) Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some mIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address In this case it is better to
use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types thus each
user login to the server using a unique global IP address The following figure
illustrates this
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
62
One rule configured for using Many-to-Many No Overload mapping type is
shown below
We can also do this by configure threeOne-to-One mapping type rules
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
What is DDNS
The DDNS service an IP Registry provides a public central database where
information such as email addresses hostnames IPs etc can be stored and
retrieved This solves the problems if your DNS server uses an IP associated
with dynamic IPs
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to access the internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
must inform the DDNS server the change of this IP so that the server can
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
63
update its IP-to-DNS entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is
updated the DNS name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still
usable
The DDNS servers the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports currently is
WWWDYNDNSORG where you apply the DNS from and update the WAN IP
to
Setup the DDNS
1 Before configuring the DDNS settings in the P-660HW-Dx v2 you must
register an account from the DDNS server such as
WWWDYNDNSORG first After the registration you have a hostname
for your internal server and a password using to update the IP to the
DDNS server
2 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Dynamic DNS
Select Active Dynamic DNS option
Key Settings
Option Description
Service Provider Enter the DDNS server in this field Currently we support
WWWDYNDNSORG
Active Toggle to Yes
Host Name Enter the hostname you subscribe from the above DDNS server
For example zyxelcomtw
User Name Enter the user name that the DDNS server gives to you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
64
Password Enter the password that the DDNS server gives to you
Enable Wildcard
Enter the hostname for the wildcard function that the
WWWDYNDNSORG supports Note that Wildcard option is
available only when the provider is httpwwwdyndnsorg
7 Network Management Using SNMP
ZyXEL SNMP Implementation
ZyXEL currently includes SNMP support in some P-660HW-Dx v2 routers It is
implemented based on the SNMPv1 so it will be able to communicate with
SNMPv1 NMSs Further users can also add ZyXELs private MIB in the NMS
to monitor and control additional system variables The ZyXELs private MIB
tree is shown in figure 3 For SNMPv1 operation ZyXEL permits one
community string so that the router can belong to only one community and
allows trap messages to be sent to only one NMS manager
Some traps are sent to the SNMP manager when anyone of the following
events happens
1 coldStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine coldstarts the trap will be sent after booting
2 warmStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine warmstarts the trap will be sent after booting
3 linkDown (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is down the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
4 linkUp (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is up the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
5 authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215)
When receiving any SNMP get or set requirement with wrong community
this trap is sent to the manager
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
65
6 whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-MIB)
When the system is going to restart (warmstart) the trap will be sent with the
reason of restart before rebooting
(1) For intentional reboot
In some cases (download new files CI command sys reboot ) reboot is
done intentionally And traps with the message System reboot by user will
be sent
(2) For fatal error
System has to reboot for some fatal errors And traps with the message of the
fatal code will be sent
Downloading ZyXELs private MIB
Configure the P-660HW-Dx v2 for SNMP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
66
The SNMP related settings in P-660HW-Dx v2 are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt SNMP The
following steps describe a simple setup procedure for configuring all SNMP
settings
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Get
Community
Enter the correct Get Community This Get Community must match the
Get- and GetNext community requested from the NMS The default is
public
Set
Community
Enter the correct Set Community This Set Community must match the
Set-community requested from the NMS The default is public
Trusted
Host
Enter the IP address of the NMS The P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will only
respond to SNMP messages coming from this IP address If 0000 is
entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will respond to all NMS
managers
Trap
Community
Enter the community name in each sent trap to the NMS This Trap
Community must match what the NMS is expecting The default is
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
67
public
Trap
Destination
Enter the IP address of the NMS that you wish to send the traps to If
0000 is entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will not send trap any
NMS manager
Note You may need to edit a firewall rule to permit SNMP Packets
8 Using syslog
You can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt
Logs -gt Log Settings -gt Syslog logging
Key Settings
Active Select it to active UNIX Syslog
Syslog IP Address Enter the IP address of the UNIX server that you wish to
send the syslog
Log Facility Select from the 7 different local options The log facility lets you
log the message in different server files Refer to your UNIX manual
9 Using IP Alias
What is IP Alias
In a typical environment a LAN router is required to connect two local
networks The P-660HW-Dx v2 can connect three local networks to the ISP or
a remote node we call this function as IP Alias In this case an internal
router is not required For example the network manager can divide the local
network into three networks and connect them to the Internet using
P-660HW-Dx v2s single user account See the figure below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
68
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports three virtual LAN interfaces via its single
physical Ethernet interface The first network can be configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN -gt DHCP Setup The second
and third networks that we call IP Alias 1 and IP Alias 2 can be configured
in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias
There are three internal virtual LAN interfaces for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to route
the packets fromto the three networks correctly They are enif0 for the major
network enif00 for the IP alias 1 and enif01 for the IP alias 2 Therefore
three routes are created in the P-660HW-Dx v2 as shown below when the
three networks are configured If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP is also enabled
the IP pool for the clients can be any of the three networks
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
69
You can edit filter rule to accept or deny LAN packets fromto the IP alias 12
go through the P-660HW-Dx v2 by command in CLI
lan index [index number]
Usage index number =1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt [set]
Usage set= the corresponding filter set number you‟ve configured
lan save
IP Alias Setup
(1) Edit the first network in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
LAN -gt IPDHCP Setup by configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s first LAN IP
address
Key Settings
DHCP
Setup
If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP server is enabled the IP pool for the clients
can be any of the three networks
TCPIP
Setup
Enter the first LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This will create the
first route in the enif0 interface
(2) Edit the second and third networks in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias by
configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s second and third LAN IP addresses
Key Settings
IP Alias 1 Active it and enter the second LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the second route in the enif00 interface
IP Alias 2 Active it and enter the third LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the third route in the enif01 interface
10 Using IP Policy Routing
What is IP Policy Routing (IPPR)
Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router
takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides
a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet
forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator
Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis
prior to the normal routing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
70
traffic among multiple paths For example if a network has both the Internet
and remote node connections we can route the Web packets to the Internet
using one policy and route the FTP packets to the remote LAN using another
policy See the figure below
Use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths
Benefits
Source-Based Routing - Network administrators can use policy-based
routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections
Quality of Service (QoS)- Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the
precedence or TOS (Type of Service) values in the IP header at the periphery
of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic
Cost Savings- IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on
high-bandwidth high-cost path while using low-path for batch traffic
Load Sharing- Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic
among multiple paths
How does the IPPR work
A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet
meets the criteria The action is taken only when all the criteria are met The
criteria include the source address and port IP protocol (ICMP UDP TCP
etc) destination address and port TOS and precedence (fields in the IP
header) and length The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between
interactive and bulk traffic Interactive applications eg Telnet tend to have
short packets while bulk traffic eg file transfer tends to have large packets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
71
The actions that can be taken include routing the packet to a different gateway
(and hence the outgoing interface) and the TOS and precedence fields in the
IP header IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of ZyNOS in style
and in implementation The policies are divided into sets where related
policies are grouped together A use defines the policies before applying them
to an interface or a remote node in the same fashion as the filters There are
12 policy sets with 6 policies in each set
Setup the IP Policy Routing
Setp 1 Set the index of IP routing policy set rule by command bdquoip
policyrouting set index [set] [rule]‟ Suppose set=1 rule=1 in this
example
Step 2 Suppose we‟d like to edit the rule like this
Policy Set Name=Test
Active= Yes
Criteria
IP Protocol = 6
Type of Service= Dont Care Packet length= 0
Precedence = Dont Care Len Comp= NA
Source
addr start= 19216812 end= 192168120
port start= 0 end= NA
Destination
addr start= 0000 end= NA
port start= 80 end= 80
Action= Matched
Gateway addr = 1921681254 Log= No
Type of Service= No Change
Precedence = No Change
This policy example forces the Web packets originated from the clients with IP
addresses from 19216812 to 192168120 be routed to the remote LAN via
the gateway 1921681254
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
ip policyrouting set name Test
(Set the name as Test of IP routing policy rule )
ip policyrouting set active yes
(Enable the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria protocol 6
(Set the protocol ID as 6(TCP) for the rule)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
72
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the criteria type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria packetlength 0
(Set the packet length as 0 for the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcip 19216812 192168120
(Set the source IP address for the rule Start=19216812 end=192168120)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcport 0
(Set the source port for the rule Start=0)
ip policyrouting set criteria destip 0000
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=0000)
ip policyrouting set criteria destport 80 80
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=80 end=80)
ip policyrouting set action actmatched
(Set the action for the rule Matched)
ip policyrouting set action gatewaytype 0
(Set gateway type for the rule Gateway Address)
ip policyrouting set action gatewayaddr 1921681254
(Set the gateway address for the rule 1921681254)
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the action type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the action precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set action log no
(Set log option for the rule no log)
ip polictrouting set save
(Save the rule)
Step 3 Apply the IP policy routing There are two interfaces to apply the policy
set they are the LAN interface and WAN interface It depends where the
gateway specified in the policy rule is located If the gateway you specified is
located on the local LAN you apply the policy set in LAN interface If the
gateway you specified is located on the remote WAN site you apply the policy
set in WAN interface
Apply to WAN Interface (Suppose we apply it to remote node 1 in the
example)
wan node index 1
wan node ippolicy 1
11 Using Call Scheduling
What is Call Scheduling
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
73
Call scheduling enables the mechanism for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to run the
remote node connection according to the pre-defined schedule This feature is
just like the scheduler in a video recorder which records the program according
to the specified time Users can apply at most 4 schedule sets in Remote Node
The remote node configured with the schedule set could be Forced On
Forced Down Enable Dial-On-Demand or Disable Dial-On-Demand on
specified date and time
How to configure a Call Scheduling
You can configure a call scheduling in CLI
Suppose we want to edit a call schedule set like this
Call Schedule Set =1
Set name=Test
Active= Yes
Start Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 - 12 - 27
How Often= Once
Once
Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 -12 -27
Start Time(hhmm)= 12 00
Duration(hhmm)= 16 00
Action= Enable Dial-on-demand
This schedule example permits a demand call on the line on 1200 am
2005-12-27 The maximum length of time this connection is allowed is 16
hours
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
wan callsch index 1
(Set call schedule index = 1 You must apply this command first before you
begin to configure call schedule)
wan callsch name Test
(Set the schedule name as Test)
wan callsch active Yes
(Enable schedule)
wan callsch startdate 2005 12 27
(Set schedule start date as 2005-12-27)
wan callsch oncedate 2005 12 27
(Set the schedule used just once it works on 2005-12-27)
wan callsch starttime 12 00
(Set the schedule start time as 1200)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
74
wan callsch duration 16 00
(Set schedule duration time as 16 hours)
wan callsch action 2
(Set action as dial-on-demand)
wan callsch save
(Save the current call schedule set)
Key Settings
Start Date
Start date of this schedule rule It can be unmatched with weekday
setting For example if Start Date is 20001002(Monday) but Monday
setting in weekday can be No
Forced On The node will always keep up during the setting period It is equivalent
to diable the idel timeout
Forced Down The node will always keep doen during the setting period The
connected remote node will be dropped
Enable
Dial-On-Demand The remote node accepts Dial-on-demand during this period
Disable
Dial-On-Demand
The remote node denies any demand dial during the period For the
existing connected nodes it will be dropped after idle timeout and no
triggered up
Start Time
Duration Start Time and Duration of this schedule
Apply the schedule to the Remote node
Multiple scheduling rules can program in a Remote node and they have
priority For example if we program the sets as 1234 in remote node then
the set 1 will override set 234 set 2 will override 34 and so on
We can apply the schedule to the remote node in CLI by the commands
wan node index []index]
wan node callsch [index]
wan node save
For example if we want to apply the call schedule set 1 to remote node 1 we
could use the commands
wan node index 1
wan node callsch 1
wan node save
Time Service in P-660HW-Dx v2
There is no RTC (Real-Time Clock) chip so the P-660HW-Dx v2 should launch
a mechanism to get current time and date from external server in boot time
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
75
Time service is implemented by the Daytime protocol(RFC-867) Time
protocol(RFC-868) and NTP protocol(RFC-1305) You have to assign an IP
address of a time server and then the P-660HW-Dx v2 will get the date time
and time-zone information from this server You can configure it in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt System -gt Time Setting
12 Using IP Multicast
What is IP Multicast
Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in two ways - unicast or broadcast
Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts Host groups
are identified by class D IP addresses ie those with 1110 as their
higher-order bits In dotted decimal notation host group addresses range from
224000 to 239255255255 Among them 224001 is assigned to the
permanent IP hosts group and 224002 is assigned to the multicast routers
group
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is the protocol used to support
multicast groups The latest version is version 2 (see RFC2236) IP hosts use
IGMP to report their multicast group membership to any immediate-neighbor
multicast routers so the multicast routers can decide if a multicast packet
needs to be forwarded At start up the P-660HW-Dx v2 queries all directly
connected networks to gather group membership
After that the P-660HW-Dx v2 updates the information by periodic queries
The P-660HW-Dx v2 implementation of IGMP is also compatible with version 1
The multicast setting can be turned on or off on Ethernet and remote nodes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
76
IP Multicast Setup
(1) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt LAN -gt IP -gt Advanced Setup
(2) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s remote node in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt Multicast
Key Settings
Multicast IGMP-v1 for IGMP version 1 IGMP-v2 for IGMP version 2
13 Using Bandwidth Management
Why Bandwidth Management (BWM)
Nowadays we have many different traffic types for Internet applications Some
traffic may consume high bandwidth such as FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
Some other traffic may not require high bandwidth but they require stable
supply of bandwidth such as VoIP traffic The VoIP quality would not be good
if all of the outgoing bandwidth is occupied via FTP Additionally chances are
that you would like to grant higher bandwidth for somebody special who is
using specific IP address in your network All of these are reasons why we
need bandwidth management
Using BWM
Setp 1 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gtSummary activate bandwidth management on the interface you
would like to manage We enable the BWM function on WAN interface in this
example
Enter the total speed for this interface that you want to allocate using
bandwidth management This appears as the bandwidth budget of the
interface‟s root class
Select how you want the bandwidth to be allocated Priority-Based means
bandwidth is allocated via priority so the traffic with highest priority would be
served first then the second priority is served secondly and so on If
Fairness-Based is chosen then the bandwidth is allocated by ratio Which
means if A class needs 300 kbps B class needs 600 kbps then the ratio of A
and Bs actual bandwidth is 12 So if we get 450 kbps in total then A would
get 150 kbps B would get 300 kbps We select Priority-Based in this
example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
77
Key Settings
Active
Check the box to enable BWM on the interface Note that if you would like
to manage traffic from WAN to LAN you should apply BWM on LAN
interface If you would like to management traffic from WAN to DMZ
please apply BWM on DMZ interface
Speed Enter the total speed to manage on this interface This value is the budget
of the class trees root
Scheduler
Choose the principle to allocate bandwidth on this interface
Priority-Based allocates bandwidth via priority Fairness-Based allocates
bandwidth by ratio
Maximize
Bandwidth
Usage
Check this box if you would like to give residuary bandwidth from Interface
to the classes who need more bandwidth than configured amount Do not
select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a
bandwidth class or you want to limit the bandwidth of each class at the
configured value (Please note that to meat the second condition you
should also disable Use All Managed Bandwidth in the BWM rule)
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Rule Setup select the interface Service Priority and Allocated
Bandwidth for this rule then click button bdquoAdd‟ to apply this rule
Step 3 You can modify the rule by clicking the button lsquoEditrsquo on the rule
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
78
Key Settings
RuleName Give this rule a name for example WWW
BW Budget Configure the bandwidth you would like to allocate to this rule
Priority Enter a number between 0 and 7 to set the priority of this class The
higher the number the higher the priority The default setting is 3
Use All
Managed
Bandwidth
Check this box if you would like to let this class to borrow bandwidth from
its parents when the required bandwidth is higher than the configured
amount Do not check this if you want to limit the bandwidth of this class
at the configured value(Please note that you should also disable
Maximize Bandwidth Usage on the interface to meet the condition)
Service Select User-defined SIP FTP or H323 to specify the traffic types
Destination
IP Address Enter the IP address of destination that meets this class
Destination
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
Destination
Port Enter the destination port number of the traffic
Source IP
Address
Enter the IP address of source that meats this class Note that for traffic
from LAN to WAN since BWM is before NAT you should use the IP
address before NAT processing
Source
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
79
Source Port Enter the source port number of the traffic
Protocol ID Enter the protocol number for the traffic 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP or 17 for
UDP
After configuration BWM you can check current bandwidth of the configured
traffic in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Monitor
14 Using Zero-Configuration
Zero-Configuration and VC auto-hunting
Zero-Configure feature can help customer to reduce the burden of setting
efforts Whenever system ADSL links up system will send out some probing
patterns system will analyze the packets returned from ISP and decide which
services the ISP may provide Because ADSL is based on a ATM network so
system have to pre-configured a VPIVCI hunting pool before Auto-Configure
function begins to work
The Zero-Configuration feature can hunt the encapsulation and VPIVCI value
and system will automatically configure itself if the hunting result is
successfully This feature has two constraints
1 It supports the ISP provides one kind of service (PPPoEPPPoA etc)
only otherwise the hunting will get confusing and failed
2 VC auto-hunting only supports dynamic WAN IP address If the router is
set a static WAN IP address VC auto-hunting function will be disabled
The entry of hunting pool must also contain the VPI VCI and which kinds of
hunting patterns you wish to send Whenever system send out all the probing
patterns with specific VPIVCI system will wait for 5~10 seconds and get the
response from ISP the response patterns will decide which kinds of ADSL
services of the line will be After that system will save back the correct VPI
VCI and also services (encapsulation) type into profile of WAN interface
Configure the VC auto-hunting preconfigured table
(1) Display auto-haunting preconfigured table by using command from CLI
wan atm vchunt display
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
80
(2) Add items to the auto-haunting preconfigured table by using commands
wan atm vchunt add ltremoteNodeIndexgt ltvpigt ltvcigt ltservice
bit(hex)gt
wan atm vchunt save
Note ltremote nodegt input the remote node index 1-8
ltvpigt vpi value
ltvcigt vci value
ltservicegt it‟s a hex value bit0PPPoEVC (1) bit1PPPoELLC (2)
bit2PPPoAVC (4) bit3PPPoALLC (8) bit4EnetVC (16) bit5 EnetLLC (32)
For example
(1) If you need service PPPoELLC and EnetLLC then the service bits will be
2+32 = 34 (decimal) = 22 (hex) you must input 22
(2) If you want to enable all service for VC hunting the service bits will be
1+2+4+8+16+32=63(decimal)= 3f (hex) you must input 3f
Need to perform save after this by command bdquowan atm vchunt save‟
(3) Delete items from the auto-haunting preconfigured table by useing
command
wan atm vchunt remove ltremote nodegt ltvpigt ltvcigt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
81
Using Zero configuration
You can enabledisable Zero Configuration in Network -gt WAN -gt Advanced
Setup
(1) After configure the auto-haunting preconfigured table You just need a PC
connected to the device LAN Ethernet port with the DSL sync up
(2) Open your web browser to access a Web site It should prompt and request
for your username password of your ISP account if your ISP provide PPPoE
or PPPoA service
(3) After key-in the correct info it will than test the connection If it is
successful it will than close the browser and you can open a new browser to
surf the Internet If the connection test fail it will go back to the page ask for
user name and password
(4) Basically the zero configuration only work on the VC that was preconigured
in the auto-haunting preconfigured table
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2
The common triple play scenario is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
82
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus we could assign different parameters to the PVC (CBR
UBR VBR-RT VBR-nRT) to guarantee different applications
We could configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 via CLI The command is
sys tripleplay set portbase ltEportIDgt ltPVCIDgt
For example sys tripleplay portbase set 1 1
sys tripleplay portbase set 2 2
sys tripleplay portbase set 3 3
The traffic from Ethernet port 1 must be forwarded to PVC1 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet port 2 must be forwarded to PVC2 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet Port3 must be forwarded to PVC3 vice versa
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to configure up to twelve filter sets with six
rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system You can apply up to
four filter sets to a particular port to block multiple types of packets With each
filter set having up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for
a single port
The packet filter function on P-660HW-Dx v2 is the same as before just that
you could only configure the filter set and apply them by command in CLI It‟s
very complex for common users to do it So here‟s the recommendation
(1) Usually if you want to block special packets you could edit a firewall rule in
Web Configurator
032
VOIP Server
IPTV Server
Internet
Server
Others
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
ATUR IP-DSLAM VL-Switch
CPE Access Network ISP
034
055
VOIP Telephone
Video Client
Clients surfing
Internet
Other clients
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
PVC1
PVC2
PVC3
PVC4 132
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
83
(2) By factory default ZyXEL has preconfigured many filter sets for your
reference you can check them by command
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Usage set 1~12 rule 1~6 Commonly the preconfigured filter sets are as
follows ltset 2 rule 1~6gt ltset 3 rule 1gt ltset 4 rule 1gt
sys filter set display
For example
This could satisfy mostly requirement You could select any of them to apply to
the WAN node or LAN Interface on demand The command is as follows
Apply to WAN node
wan node index ltnodegt
Usage node= 1~8 corresponding to the remote node 1~8
wan node filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt
ltset3gt ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to one remote node
wan node save
Apply to LAN Interface
lan index [index]
Usage index=1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
84
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt ltset3gt
ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to LAN Interface
lan save
(3) If you are very advanced user you could edit filter set by the following
command
sys filter set [set] [rule]
Usage Set up a filter set index to edit a set
set 1~12
rule 1~6
sys filter set type [typeID]
Usage typeID tcpip or generic
Note In one filter set you should configure all the rules in one type either
tcpip or generic
sys filter set enable
Usage Enable(active) the rule
sys filter set helliphellip(You could configure a filter rule on demand the newest
command is available on release note)
sys filter set save
Usage Don‟t forget to save the rule everytime you‟ve configured it
Reference Commands
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Set the index of filter set rule you must apply this
command first before you begin to configure the
filter rules
sys filter set name [set name] Set the name of filter set
sys filter set type [tcpip | generic] Set the type of filter rule
sys filter set enable Enable the rule
sys filter set disable Disable the rule
sys filter set protocol [protocol ] Set the protocol ID of the rule
sys filter set sourceroute [yes|no] Set the sourceroute yesno
sys filter set destip [address] [subnet
mask]
Set the destination IP address and subnet mask of
the rule
sys filter set destport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|notequal|less|greater]
Set the destination port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set srcip [address] [subnet
mask] Set the source IP address and subnet mask
sys filter set srcport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|not
Set the source port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
85
equal|less|greater] equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set tcpEstab [yes|no] Set TCP establish option
sys filter set more [yes|no] Set the more option to yesno
sys filter set log [type 0-3= none | match|
notmatch | both ]
Set the log type (it could be 0-3 =none match not
match both)
sys filter set actmatch[type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for match
sys filter set actnomatch [type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for not match
sys filter set offset [] Set offset for the generic rule
sys filter set length [] Set the length for generic rule
sys filter set mask [] Set the mask for generic rule
sys filter set value [(depend on length in
hex)] Set the value for generic rule
sys filter set clear Clear the current filter set
sys filter set save Save the filter set parameters
sys filter set display [set][rule] Display Filter set information Wo parameter it will
display buffer information
sys filter set freememory Discard Changes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
86
Wireless Application Notes
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode
Ad hoc Introduction
What is Ad Hoc mode
Ad hoc mode is a wireless network consists of a number of stations without
access points Without using an access point or any connection to a wired
network a client unit in Ad hoc operation mode can communicate directly to
other client units just as using a cross over Ethernet cable connecting 2 hosts
together via a NIC card for direct connection when configured in Ad hoc mode
without an access point being present Ad hoc operation is ideal for small
networks of no more than 2-4 computers Larger networks would require the
use of one or perhaps several access points
Configuration for Wireless Station A
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
87
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
88
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Configuration for Wireless Station B
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
89
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
90
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Step 7 Station A now are able to connect to Station B
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure Introduction
For Infrastructure WLANs multiple Access Points (APs) like the WLAN to the
wired network and allow users to efficiently share network resources The
Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also
mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
91
Configure Wireless Access Point to Infrastructure mode using Web
configurator
To configure Infrastructure mode of your P-660HW-Dx v2 wireless AP please
follow the steps below
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gt General Configure the basic parameters for Wireless LAN
Step 2 You could click the button bdquoAdvanced Setup‟ for more detailed
configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
92
Configuration Wireless Station to Infrastructure mode
To configure Infrastructure mode on your ZyAIR G-200 Wireless Network
Adapter please follow the following steps
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
93
Step 3 Select Infrastructure from the operation mode pull down menu fill in an
SSID or leave it as any if you wish to connect to any AP than press Apply
Change to take effect
Step 4 Click on Site Survey tab and press search all the available AP will be
listed
Step 5 Double click on the AP you want to associated with
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
94
Step 6 After the client have associated with the selected AP The linked APs
channel current linkup rate SSID link quality and signal strength will show on
the Link Info page You now successfully associate with the selected AP with
Infrastructure Mode
3 MAC Filter
MAC Filter Overview
Users can use MAC Filter as a method to restrict unauthorized stations from
accessing the APs ZyXELs APs provide the capability for checking MAC
address of the station before allowing it to connect to the network This
provides an additional layer of control layer in that only stations with registered
MAC addresses can connect This approach requires that the list of MAC
addresses be configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
95
ZyXEL MAC Filter Implementation
ZyXELs MAC Filter Implementation allows users to define a list to allow or
block association from STAs The filter set allows users to input 12 entries in
the list If Allow Association is selected all other STAs which are not on the list
will be denied Otherwise if Deny Association is selected all other STAs which
are not on the list will be allowed for association Users can choose either way
to configure their filter rule
Configure the WLAN MAC Filter
The MAC Filter related settings in ZyXEL APs are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gtMAC Filter
Before you configure the MAC filter you need to know the MAC address of the
client first If not knowing what your MAC address is please enter a command
ipconfig all after DOS prompt to get the MAC (physical) address of your
wireless client
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gtMAC Filter active MAC Filter
Step 2 Enter the MAC Addresses of wireless cards in the filter set to allow or
deny association from these cards
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Filter Action
Allow or block association from MAC addresses contained in this list If Allow
Association is selected in this field hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list
will be allowed to associate with AP If Deny Association is selected in this field
hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list will be blocked
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
96
MAC Address This field specifies those MAC Addresses that you want to add in the list
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
Introduction
The 80211 standard describes the communication that occurs in wireless
LANs
The Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm is used to protect wireless
communication from eavesdropping because wireless transmissions are
easier to intercept than transmissions over wired networks and wireless is a
shared medium everything that is transmitted or received over a wireless
network can be intercepted
WEP relies on a secret key that is shared between a mobile station (eg a
laptop with a wireless Ethernet card) and an access point (ie a base station)
The secret key is used to encrypt packets before they are transmitted and an
integrity check is used to ensure that packages are not modified during the
transition The standard does not discuss how the shared key is established In
practice most installations use a single key that is shared between all mobile
stations and access points APs You can refer to the User Guide for more
detailed information about it
Setting up the Access Point
You can set up the Access Point from Web configurator Advanced Setup
Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General (You can also configure it via CLI)
Step 1 Select bdquoStatic WEP‟ from the pull down menu bdquoSecurity Mode‟ in Web
Configurator
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
97
Step 2 Set up WEP Key in the Web Configurator You need to set the one of
the following parameters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 5 characters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 10 hexadecimal digits
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 13 characters
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 26 hexadecimal digits
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 29 characters
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 58 hexadecimal digits
There are two ways you can configure the WEP Key
(1) You can put in a special WEP key in the bdquoWEP Key‟ menu directly
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
98
(2) You can also put in an arbitrary sequence of characters in the
bdquoPassphrase‟ and then press button bdquoGenerate‟ to let the P-660HW-Dx v2
generate WEP Key for you
Setting up the Station
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar or right click
the utility icon then select Show Config Utility
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
99
The utility will pop up on your windows screen
Note If the utility icon doesnt exist in your task bar click Start -gt
Programs -gt helliphellip to start the utility
Step 2 Select the Configuration tab
Select bdquoSet Security‟ to configure encryption type and parameters
correspond with access point
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
100
Note You should select Key 1 as default Transmit Key since the P-660HW-Dx
v2 is supposed to use Key 1 by default
Key settings
The WEP Encryption type of station has to equal to the access point
Check ASCII field for characters WEP key or uncheck ASCII field for
Hexadecimal digits WEP key
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
101
Hexadecimal digits dont need to precede by 0x
For example
64-bits with characters WEP key Key1= 2e3f4
64-bits with hexadecimal digits WEP key Key1= 123456789A
5 Site Survey
Introduction
What is Site Survey
An RF site survey is a MAP to RF contour of RF coverage in a particular
facility With wireless system it is very difficult to predict the propagation of
radio waves and detect the presence of interfering signals Walls doors
elevator shafts and other obstacles offer different degree of attenuation This
will cause the RF coverage pattern be irregular and hard to predict
Site survey can help us overcome these problem and even provide us a map
of RF coverage of the facility
Preparation
Below are the steps to complete a simple site survey with simple tools
1 First you will need to obtain a facility diagram such as blueprints This is
for you to mark and take record on
2 Visually inspect the facility walk through the facility to verify the accuracy of
the diagram and mark down any large obstacle you see that may effect the RF
signal such as metal shelf metal desk etc on the diagram
3 Identify users area when doing so ask a question where is wireless
coverage needed and where does not and note and take note on the diagram
this is information is needed to determine the number of AP required
4 Determine the preliminary access point location on the facility diagram base
on the service area needed obstacles power wall jack considerations
Survey on Site
Step 1 With the diagram with all information you gathered in the preparation
phase Now you are ready to make the survey
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
102
Step 2 Install an access point at the preliminary location
Step 3 Use a notebook with wireless client installed and run its utility An utility
will provide information such as connection speed current used channel
associated rate link quality signal strength and etc information as shown in
utility below
Step 4 Its always a good idea to start with putting the access point at the
corner of the room and walk away from the access point in a systematic
manner Record the changes at point where transfer rate drop and the link
quality and signal strength information on the diagram as you go alone
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
103
Step 5 When you reach the farthest point of connection mark the spot Now
you move the access point to this new spot as have already determine the
farthest point of the access point installation spot if wireless service is required
from corner of the room
Step 6 Repeat step 1~5 and now you should be able to mark an RF coverage
area as illustrated in above picutre
Step 7 You may need more than one access point is the RF coverage area
hasn‟t covered all the wireless service area you needed
Step 8 Repeat step 1~6 of survey on site as necessary upon completion you
will have a diagram and information of site survey As illustrated below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
104
Note If there are more than one access point is needed be sure to make the
adjacent access point service area over lap one another So the wireless
station is able to roam For more information please refer to roaming at
6 Configure 8021x and WPA
What is the WPA Functionality
Configuration for Access Point
Configuration for your PC
What is WPA Functionality
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
105
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN
Here comes WPA-PSK Application example for your reference
Configuration for Access point
The IEEE 8021x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the
authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management
Authentication can be done using local user database internal to the
P-660HW-Dx v2 (authenticate up to 32 users) or an external RADIUS server
for an unlimited number of users
Step 1 To change your P-660HW-Dx v2s authentication settings login Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General
-gtSecurity
Step 2 Select lsquoSecurity Mode‟ as WAP-PSK
Step 3 Type the Pre Shared Key in the Pre-Shared Key field
Step 4 Click Apply to finish
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
106
Configuration for your PC
Step 1 Double click on your wireless utility icon in your windows task bar the
utility will pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select the configuration tab type in the SSID (Service Set Identifier)
select the operating Mode as Infrastructure and select proper channel
Step 3 Click Set Security to configure the security parameters
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
107
Step 4 Click OK for finish and begin to Site survey Connect to the AP as you
have configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
108
Step 5 Click Link Info tab if the PC associated and authenticated with AP
successfully we will see the following information
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
109
Support Tool
1 LANWAN Packet Trace
The Prestige packet trace records and analyzes packets running on LAN and
WAN interfaces It is designed for users with technical backgrounds who are
interested in the details of the packet flow on LAN or WAN end of Prestige It is
also very helpful for diagnostics if you have compatibility problems with your
ISP or if you want to know the details of a packet for configuring a filter rule
The format of the display is as following
Packet
[index] [timersecond][channel-receivetransmit][length] [protocol]
[sourceIPport] [destIPport]
There are two ways to dump the trace
Online Trace--display the trace real time on screen
Offline Trace--capture the trace first and display later
The details for capturing the trace in CLI as follows
First of all you need to telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 firstly The password is
Administrator passwords bdquoadmin‟ by default
Online Trace
(1) Trace LAN packet
Disable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
none
Enable to capture the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
110
(2) Trace WAN packet
Disable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
none
Enable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
111
Offline Trace
Disable the capture of the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel
mpoa00 none
Enable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Wait for packet passing through the Prestige over LAN
Disable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw off amp sys trcl sw off
Display the trace briefly by entering sys trcp brief
Display specific packets by using sys trcp parse ltfrom_indexgt ltto_indexgt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
112
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal
Step 1 Initiate a hyper terminal connection from your PC(suppose you
connected to the LAN port of P-660HW-Dx v2)
Step 2 Click the bdquoproperties‟ to configure parameters to telnet to the
P-660HW-Dx v2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
113
Step 3 So that after you invoke the relevant commands you could save the
logs you‟ve captured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
114
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP
Using TFTP client software
Uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Uploaddownload Prestige configurations via LAN
(1) Using TFTP to uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout
in Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 Enter the IP address of the Prestige
Step 5To upload the firmware please save the remote file as ras to
Prestige After the transfer is complete the Prestige will program the upgraded
firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
115
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige The local file is the source
file of the ZyNOS firmware that is available in your hard disk The remote file is
the file name that will be saved in Prestige Check the port number 69 and
512-Octet blocks for TFTP Check Binary mode for file transfering
(2) Using TFTP to uploaddownload SMT configurations via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 To download the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please get the
remote file rom-0 from the Prestige
Step 5 To upload the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please save the
remote file as rom-0 in the Prestige
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
116
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige
The local file is the source file of your configuration file that is available
in your hard disk
The remote file is the file name that will be saved in Prestige
Check the port number 69 and 512-Octet blocks for TFTP
Check Binary mode for file transfering
Using TFTP command on Windows NT
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Download ZyNOS via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] get ras [localfile]
Step 4 Upload P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] put
[localfile] rom-0
Step 5 Download P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP]
get rom-0 [localfile]
Using TFTP command on UNIX
Before you begin
1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Example
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ telnet 19216811
Trying 19216811
Connected to 19216811
Escape character is ^]
Password
rasgt sys stdio 0
(Open a new window)
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get rom-0 [local-rom] lt- change to binary mode
lt- download configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-rom] rom-0 lt- upload configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get ras [local-ras ] lt- download firmware
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-ras] ras lt- upload firmware
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
117
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files
In addition to upload the firmware and configuration file via the console port
and TFTP client you can also upload the firmware and configuration files to
the Prestige using FTP
To use this feature your workstation must have a FTP client software See the
example shown below
Using FTP client software
Note The remote file name for the firmware is ras and the configuration file is
rom-0
Step 1 Use FTP client from your workstation to connect to the Prestige by
entering the IP address of the Prestige
Step2 Press Enter key to ignore the username because the Prestige does
not check the username
Step 3 Enter the CLI password as the FTP login password the default is
admin
Step 4 Enter command bin to set the transfer type to binary
Step 5 Use put command to transfer the file to the Prestige
Example
Step 1 Connect to the Prestige by entering the Prestiges IP and Administrator
password in the FTP software Set the transfer type to Auto-Detect or
Binary
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
118
Step 2 Press OK to ignore the Username prompt
Step 3 To upload the firmware file we transfer the local ras file to overwrite
the remote ras file
To upload the configuration file we transfer the local rom-0 to overwrite
the remote rom-0 file
Step 4 The Prestige reboots automatically after the uploading is finished
Please do not power off the router at this moment
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
119
CI Command Reference
Command Syntax and General User Interface
CI has the following command syntax
command ltiface | device gt subcommand [param]
command subcommand [param]
command | help
command subcommand | help
General user interface
1 Shows the following commands and all major (sub)commands
2 exit Exit Subcommand
To get the latest CI Command list
The latest CI Command list is available in release note of every ZyXEL
firmware release Please goto ZyXEL public WEB site
httpwwwzyxelcomsupportdownload_indexphp to download firmware
package (zip) you should unzip the package to get the release note in PDF
format
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
5
FAQ
ZyNOS FAQ
1 What is ZyNOS
ZyNOS is ZyXELs proprietary Network Operating System It is the platform on
all Prestige routers that delivers network services and applications It is
designed in a modular fashion so it is easy for developers to add new features
New ZyNOS software upgrades can be easily downloaded from our FTP sites
as they become available
2 Whatrsquos Multilingual Embedded Web Configurator
Multilinggual Embedded Web Configurator means that it can display with 3
kinds of languanges English French and German By factory default it
displays with English and you can change it in Web GUI
3 How do I access the P-660HW-Dx v2 Command Line Interface (CLI)
The Command Line Interface is for the Administrator use only and it could be
accessed via telnet session
Note It is protected by super password lsquo1234rsquo by factory default
4 How do I update the firmware and configuration file
You can do this if you access the P-660HW-Dx v2 as Administrator You can
upload the firmware and configuration file to Prestige from Web Condigurator
or using FTP or TFTP client software You CAN NOT upload the firmware and
configuration file via Telnet because the Telnet connection will be dropped
during uploading the firmware Please do not power off the router right after the
FTP or TFTP uploading is finished the router will upload the firmware to its
flash at this moment
Note There may be firmware that could not be upgraded from Web
Configurator In this case ZyXEL will prepare special Upload Software
for you Please read the firmware release note carefully when you want to
upload a new fireware
5 How do I upgradebackup the ZyNOS firmware by using TFTP client
program via LAN
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to transfer the firmware to P-660HW-Dx v2
using TFTP program via LAN The procedure for uploading ZyNOS via TFTP
is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
6
a Use the TELNET client program in your PC to login to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
b Enter CI command sys stdio 0 to disable Stdio idle timeout
c To upgrade firmware use TFTP client program to put firmware in file
ras in the Prestige After data transfer is finished the P-660HW-Dx v2
will program the upgraded firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
d To backup your firmware use the TFTP client program to get file ras
from the Prestige
6 How do I restore P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations by using TFTP client
program via LAN
a Use the TELNET client program in your PC to login to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
b Enter CI command sys stdio 0 disable Stdio idle timeout
c To backup the P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations use TFTP client
program to get file rom-0 from the P-660HW-Dx v2
d To restore the P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations use the TFTP client
program to put your configuration in file rom-0 in the P-660HW-Dx v2
7 What should I do if I forget the system password
In case you forget the system password you can erase the current
configuration and restore factory defaults this way
Use the RESET button on the rear panel of P-660HW-Dx v2 to reset the
router After the router is reset the LAN IP address will be reset to
19216811 the common user password will be reset to user the
Administrator password will be reset to bdquo1234rsquo
8 How to use the Reset button
a Turn your P-660HW-Dx v2 on Make sure the Power LED is on (not
blinking)
b Press the RESET button for longer than one second and shorter than
five seconds and release it If the Power LED begins to blink the
P-660HW-Dx v2‟s wireless auto security function-OTIST has been
enabled
c Press the RESET button for six seconds and then release it If the
Power LED begins to blink the default configuration has been restored
and the P-660HW-Dx v2 restarts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
7
9 What is SUA When should I use SUA
SUA (Single User Account) is a unique feature supported by Prestige router
which allows multiple people to access Internet concurrently for the cost of a
single user account
When Prestige acting as SUA receives a packet from a local client destined for
the outside Internet it replaces the source address in the IP packet header
with its own address and the source port in the TCP or UDP header with
another value chosen out of a local pool It then recomputes the appropriate
header checksums and forwards the packet to the Internet as if it is originated
from Prestige using the IP address assigned by ISP When reply packets from
the external Internet are received by Prestige the original IP source address
and TCPUDP source port numbers are written into the destination fields of the
packet (since it is now moving in the opposite direction) the checksums are
recomputed and the packet is delivered to its true destination This is because
SUA keeps a table of the IP addresses and port numbers of the local systems
currently using it
10 What is the difference between SUA and Full Feature NAT
When you edit a remote node in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt Remote Node -gt Edit there will be three options for you
None
SUA Only
Full Feature
SUA (Single User Account) in previous ZyNOS versions is a NAT set with 2
rules Many-to-One and Server With SUA visible servers had to be mapped
to different ports since the servers share only one global IP
The P-660HW-Dx v2 now has Full Feature NAT which supports five types of
IPPort mapping One to One Many to One Many to Many Overload Many to
Many No Overload and Server You can make special application when you
select Full Feature NAT For example With multiple global IP addresses
multiple severs using the same port (eg FTP servers using port 2120) are
allowed on the LAN for outside access
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports NAT sets on a remote node basis They are
reusable but only one set is allowed for each remote node The P-660HW-Dx
v2 supports 8 sets since there are 8 remote nodes
By fatory default the NAT is select as SUA in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt General -gt NAT Setup
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
8
11 Is it possible to access a server running behind SUA from the outside
Internet How can I do it
Yes it is possible because P-660HW-Dx v2 delivers the packet to the local
server by looking up to a SUA server table Therefore to make a local server
accessible to the outside users the port number and the inside IP address of
the server must be configured (You can configure it in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding)
12 When do I need select Full Feature NAT
Make multiple local servers on the LAN accessible from outside with
multiple global IP addresses
With SUA visible servers had to be mapped to different ports since the
servers share only one global IP But when you select Full Feature you can
make multiple local servers (mapping the same port or not) on the LAN
accessible from outside with multiple global IP addresses
Support Non-NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some MIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address Thus users on the same
network can not login to the same server simultaneously In this case it is
better to use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types
thus each user login to the server using a unique global IP address
13 What IPPort mapping does Multi-NAT support
Multi-NAT supports five types of IPport mapping One to One Many to One
Many to Many Overload Many to Many No Overload and Server The details
of the mapping between ILA and IGA are described as below Here we define
the local IP addresses as the Internal Local Addresses (ILA) and the global IP
addresses as the Inside Global Address (IGA)
One to One In One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps one ILA
to one IGA
Many to One In Many-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps
multiple ILA to one IGA This is equivalent to SUA (ie PAT port
address translation) ZyXELs Single User Account feature that previous
ZyNOS routers supported (the SUA is optional in todays Prestige
routers)
Many to Many Overload In Many-to-Many Overload mode the
P-660HW-Dx v2 maps the multiple ILA to shared IGA
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
9
Many One-to-One In Many One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2
maps each ILA to unique IGA
Server In Server mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps multiple inside
servers to one global IP address This allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types behind the NAT for outside access Note if
you want to map each server to one unique IGA please use the
One-to-One mode
The following table summarizes the five types
NAT Type IP Mapping
One-to-One ILA1lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-One
(SUAPAT)
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-Many
Overload
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA1
ILA4lt---gtIGA2
Many
One-to-One
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA3
ILA4lt---gtIGA4
Server Server 1 IPlt---gtIGA1
Server 2 IPlt---gtIGA1
14 How many network users can the SUANAT support
The Prestige does not limit the number of the users but the number of the
sessions The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports 2048 sessions that you can use the
ip nat session command in CLI to see You can also use bdquoip nat hashTable
wanif0‟ to view the current active NAT sessions
15 What are Device filters and Protocol filters
In ZyNOS the filters have been separated into two groups One group is
called device filter group and the other is called protocol filter
group Generic filters belong to the device filter group TCPIP and IPX filters
belong to the protocol filter group You can configure the filter rule in CLI
Note In ZyNOS you can not mix different filter groups in the same filter set
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
10
16 How can I protect against IP spoofing attacks
The P-660HW-Dx v2s filter sets provide a means to protect against IP
spoofing attacks The basic scheme is as follows
For the input data filter
Deny packets from the outside that claim to be from the inside
Allow everything that is not spoofing us
Filter rule setup
Filter type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Source IP Addr =abcd
Source IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action Not Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
For the output data filters
Deny bounce back packet
Allow packets that originate from us
Filter rule setup
Filter Type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Destination IP Addr =abcd
Destination IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action No Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
11
Product FAQ
1 How can I manage P-660HW-Dx v2
Multilingual Embedded Web GUI for Local and Remote management
CLI (Command-line interface)
Telnet support (Administrator Password Protected ) for remote
configuration change and status monitoring
FTP TFTP sever firmware upgrade and configuration backup and
restore are supported(Administrator Password Protected)
2 What is the default password for Web Configurator
There are two different accounts for P-660HW-Dx v2 Web Configurator
Common User Account and Administrator Account
By factory default the password for the two accounts are
Common User Account user
Administrator Account 1234
You can change the password after you logging in the Web Configurator
Please record your new password whenever you change it The system
will lock you out if you have forgotten your password
3 Whatrsquos the difference between lsquoCommon User Accountrsquo and
lsquoAdministrator Accountrsquo
For Common User Account it can only access the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 and check the current system status
For Administrator Account besides accessing the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 it can also access Winzard setup Advanced setup of
P-660HW-Dx v2
Moreover only with Administrator Password you could manage the
P-660HW-Dx v2 via FTPTFTP or Telnet
4 How do I know the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address assigned by the
ISP
You can view My WAN IP ltfrom ISPgt xxxx shown in Web Configurator
bdquoStatus-gtDevice Information -gtWAN Information‟ to check this IP address
5 What is the micro filter or splitter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
12
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
6 The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Bridge and Router mode whats the
difference between them
When the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet which means
only the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use bridge mode which works as an ADSL modem to
connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account and limit
only one computer to access the Internet
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to add another Internet sharing device
like a router In this case we use the router mode which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
7 How do I know I am using PPPoE
PPPoE requires a user account to login to the providers server If you need to
configure a user name and password on your computer to connect to the ISP
you are probably using PPPoE If you are simply connected to the Internet
when you turn on your computer you probably are not You can also check
your ISP or the information sheet given by the ISP Please choose PPPoE as
the encapsulation type in the P-660HW-Dx v2 if the ISP uses PPPoE
8 Why does my provider use PPPoE
PPPoE emulates a familiar Dial-Up connection It allows your ISP to provide
services using their existing network configuration over the broadband
connections Besides PPPoE supports a broad range of existing applications
and service including authentication accounting secure access and
configuration management
9 What is DDNS
The Dynamic DNS service allows you to alias a dynamic IP address to a static
hostname allowing your computer to be more easily accessed from various
locations on the Internet To use the service you must first apply an account
from several free Web servers such as httpwwwdyndnsorg
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to reach our internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
13
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
updates this IP to DDNS server so that the server can update its IP-to-DNS
entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is updated the DNS
name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still usable
10 When do I need DDNS service
When you want your internal server to be accessed by using DNS name rather
than using the dynamic IP address we can use the DDNS service The DDNS
server allows to alias a dynamic IP address to a static hostname Whenever
the ISP assigns you a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2 sends this IP to the DDNS
server for its updates
11 What is DDNS wildcard Does the P-660HW-Dx v2 support DDNS
wildcard
Some DDNS servers support the wildcard feature which allows the hostname
yourhostdyndnsorg to be aliased to the same IP address as
yourhostdyndnsorg This feature is useful when there are multiple servers
inside and you want users to be able to use things such as
wwwyourhostdyndnsorg and still reach your hostname
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports DDNS wildcard that httpwwwdyndnsorg
supports When using wildcard you simply enter yourhostdyndnsorg in the
Host field in Menu 11 Configure Dynamic DNS
12 Can the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA handle IPSec packets sent by the
IPSec gateway
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA can handle IPSec ESP Tunneling mode We
know when packets go through SUA SUA will change the source IP address
and source port for the host To pass IPSec packets SUA must understand
the ESP packet with protocol number 50 replace the source IP address of the
IPSec gateway to the routers WAN IP address However SUA should not
change the source port of the UDP packets which are used for key
managements Because the remote gateway checks this source port during
connections the port thus is not allowed to be changed
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
14
13 How do I setup my P-660HW-Dx v2 for routing IPSec packets over
SUA
For outgoing IPSec tunnels no extra setting is required
For forwarding the inbound IPSec ESP tunnel A Default server set is required
You could configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding -gt Default Server Setup
It is because SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users So to make an internal server
for outside access we must specify the service port and the LAN IP of this
server in Web configurator Thus SUA is able to forward the incoming packets
to the requested service behind SUA and the outside users access the server
using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address So we have to configure the
internal IPsec client as a default server (unspecified service port) when it acts
a server gateway
14 What is Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping allocates the bandwidth to WAN dynamically and aims at
boosting the efficiency of the bandwidth If there are serveral VCs in the
P-660HW-Dx v2 but only one VC activated at one time the P-660HW-Dx v2
allocates all the Bandwidth to the VC and the VC gets full bandwidth If another
VCs are activated later the bandwidth is yield to other VCs after ward
15 Why do we perform traffic shaping in the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 must manage traffic fairly and provide bandwidth
allocation for different sorts of applications such as voice video and data All
applications have their own natural bit rate Large data transactions have a
fluctuating natural bit rate The P-660HW-Dx v2 is able to support variable
traffic among different virtual connections Certain traffic may be discarded if
the virtual connection experiences congestion Traffic shaping defines a set of
actions taken by the P-660HW-Dx v2 to avoid congestion traffic shaping takes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
15
measures to adapt to unpredictable fluctuations in traffic flows and other
problems among virtual connections
16 What do the parameters (PCR SCR MBS) mean
Traffic shaping parameters (PCR SCR MBS) can be set in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt ATM Setup
Peak Cell Rate(PCR) The maximum bandwidth allocated to this connection
The VC connection throughput is limited by PCR
Sustainable Cell Rate(SCR) The least guaranteed bandwidth of a VC
When there are multi-VCs on the same line the VC throughput is guaranteed
by SCR
Maximum Burst Size(MBS) The amount of cells transmitted through this
VC at the Peak Cell Rate before yielding to other VCs Total bandwidth of the
line is dedicated to single VC if there is only one VC on the line However as
the other VC asking the bandwidth the MBS defines the maximum number of
cells transmitted via this VC with Peak Cell rate before yielding to other VCs
The P-660HW-Dx v2 holds the parameters for shaping the traffic among its
virtual channels If you do not need traffic shaping please set SCR = 0 MBS =
0 and PCR as the maximum value according to the line rate (for example 23
Mbps line rate will result PCR as 5424 cellsec)
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
Constant bit rate(CBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that requires
the user to determine a fixed bandwidth requirement at the time the connection
is set up so that the data can be sent in a steady stream CBR service is often
used when transmitting fixed-rate uncompressed video
Unspecified bit rate(UBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that does
not guarantee any throughput levels and uses only available bandwidth UBR
is often used when transmitting data that can tolerate delays such as e-mail
Variable bit rate(VBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that allows
users to specify a throughput capacity (ie a peak rate) and a sustained rate
but data is not sent evenly You can select VBR for bursty traffic and
bandwidth sharing with other applications It contains two subclasses
Variable bit rate nonreal time (VBR-nRT)
Variable bit rate real time (VBR-RT)
18 What is content filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
16
Internet Content filter allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies
tailored to your needs Content filter gives you the ability to block web sites that
contain key words (that you specify) in the URL You can set a schedule for
when the P-660HW-Dx v2 performs content filtering You can also specify
trusted IP Addresses on LAN for which the P-660HW-Dx v2 will not perform
content filtering You can configure the details about it in Web Configurator
Advanced setup Security -gt Content Filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
17
ADSL FAQ
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems
ADSL provides a dedicated service over a single telephone line cable
modems offer a dedicated service over a shared media While cable modems
have greater downstream bandwidth capabilities (up to 30 Mbps) that
bandwidth is shared among all users on a line and will therefore vary perhaps
dramatically as more users in a neighborhood get online at the same time
Cable modem upstream traffic will in many cases be slower than ADSL either
because the particular cable modem is inherently slower or because of rate
reductions caused by contention for upstream bandwidth slots The big
difference between ADSL and cable modems however is the number of lines
available to each There are no more than 12 million homes passed today that
can support two-way cable modem transmissions and while the figure also
grows steadily it will not catch up with telephone lines for many years
Additionally many of the older cable networks are not capable of offering a
return channel consequently such networks will need significant upgrading
before they can offer high bandwidth services
2 What is the expected throughput
In our test we can get about 16Mbps data rate on 15Kft using the 26AWG
loop The shorter the loop the better the throughput is
3 What is the microfilter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up
You can see the DSL LED Green on the P-660HW-Dx v2s front panel is on
when the ADSL physical layer is up
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL
Depending on the line quality the P-660HW-Dx v2 uses Fall Back and Fall
Forward to automatically adjust the date rate
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
18
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing
Though the LLC-based multiplexing can carry multiple protocols over a single
VC it requires extra header information to identify the protocol being carried
on the virtual circuit (VC) The VC-based multiplexing needs a separate VC for
carrying each protocol but it does not need the extra headers Therefore the
VC-based multiplexing is more efficient
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics
You can use the following CI commands to check the ADSL line
statistics
CIgt wan adsl perfdata
CIgt wan adsl status
CIgt wan adsl linedata far
CIgt wan adsl linedata near
You can also do it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Diagnostic -gt DSL Line -gt DSL Status
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector
The signaling pins on the P-660HW-Dx v2s ADSL connector are pin 3 and pin
4 The middle two pins for a RJ11 cable
9 What is triple play
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
19
More and more TelcoISPs are providing three kinds of services (VoIP Video
and Internet) over one existing ADSL connection
The different services (such as video VoIP and Internet access) require
different Qulity of Service
The high priority is Voice (VoIP) data
The Medium priority is Video (IPTV) data
The low priority is internet access such as ftp etc hellip
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus you can configure each PVC separately to assign different
QoS to different application
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
20
Firewall FAQ
General
1 What is a network firewall
A firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control
policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to
protect a trusted network from an untrusted network The firewall can be
thought of two mechanisms One to block the traffic and the other to permit
traffic
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure
The P-660HW-Dx v2 is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks such as Ping of Death SYN Flood LAND
attack IP Spoofing etc It also uses stateful packet inspection to determine if
an inbound connection is allowed through the firewall to the private LAN The
P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Network Address Translation (NAT) which
translates the private local addresses to one or multiple public addresses This
adds a level of security since the clients on the private LAN are invisible to the
Internet
3 What are the basic types of firewalls
Conceptually there are three types of firewalls
1 Packet Filtering Firewall
2 Application-level Firewall
3 Stateful Inspection Firewall
Packet Filtering Firewalls generally make their decisions based on the header
information in individual packets These headers information include the
source destination addresses and ports of the packets
Application-level Firewalls generally are hosts running proxy servers which
permit no traffic directly between networks and which perform logging and
auditing of traffic passing through them A proxy server is an application
gateway or circuit-level gateway that runs on top of general operating system
such as UNIX or Windows NT It hides valuable data by requiring users to
communicate with secure systems by mean of a proxy A key drawback of this
device is performance
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
21
Stateful Inspection Firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against
defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP
address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the
integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols The flexible
nature of Stateful Inspection firewalls generally provides the best speed and
transparency however they may lack the granular application level access
control or caching that some proxies support
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2
1 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall inspects packets contents and IP
headers It is applicable to all protocols that understands data in the
packet is intended for other layers from network layer up to the
application layer
2 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall performs stateful inspection It takes into
account the state of connections it handles so that for example a
legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request
for that packet and allowed in Conversely an incoming packet
masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be
blocked
3 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall uses session filtering ie smart rules
that enhance the filtering process and control the network session
rather than control individual packets in a session
4 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall is fast It uses a hashing function to
search the matched session cache instead of going through every
individual rule for a packet
5 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall provides email service to notify you for
routine reports and when alerts occur
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet filtering and
NAT built-in
With the spectacular growth of the Internet and online access companies that
do business on the Internet face greater security threats Although packet filter
and NAT restrict access to particular computers and networks however for
the other companies this security may be insufficient because packets filters
typically cannot maintain session state Thus for greater security a firewall is
considered
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a
connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable
a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
22
There are four types of DoS attacks
1 Those that exploits bugs in a TCPIP implementation such as Ping of
Death and Teardrop
2 Those that exploits weaknesses in the TCPIP specification such as
SYN Flood and LAND Attacks
3 Brute-force attacks that flood a network with useless data such as
Smurf attack
4 IP Spoofing
7 What is Ping of Death attack
Ping of Death uses a PING utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the
maximum 65535 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification The oversize
packet is then sent to an unsuspecting system Systems may crash hang or
reboot
8 What is Teardrop attack
Teardrop attack exploits weakness in the reassemble of the IP packet
fragments As data is transmitted through a network IP packets are often
broken up into smaller chunks Each fragment looks like the original packet
except that it contains an offset field The Teardrop program creates a series of
IP fragments with overlapping offset fields When these fragments are
reassembled at the destination some systems will crash hang or reboot
9 What is SYN Flood attack
SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each
packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response While the
targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK it queues up all
outstanding SYN-ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue
SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when
an internal timer (which is set a relatively long intervals) terminates the TCP
three-way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all
incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users
10 What is LAND attack
In a LAN attack hackers flood SYN packets to the network with a spoofed
source IP address of the targeted system This makes it appear as if the host
computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the
target system tries to respond to itself
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
23
11 What is Brute-force attack
A Brute-force attack such as Smurf attack targets a feature in the IP
specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting to quickly flood the
target network with useless data A Smurf hacker flood a destination IP
address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network the router will
broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network If there
are numerous hosts this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request
packet the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the intermediary
network but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address
known as the victim network This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all
available bandwidth making communications impossible
12 What is IP Spoofing attack
Many DoS attacks also use IP Spoofing as part of their attack IP Spoofing
may be used to break into systems to hide the hackers identity or to magnify
the effect of the DoS attack IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain
unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking
that the communications are coming from within the trusted network To
engage in IP Spoofing a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it
appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed
through the router or firewall
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
There are two default ACLs pre-configured in the P-660HW-Dx v2 one allows
all connections from LAN to WAN and the other blocks all connections from
WAN to LAN except of the DHCP packets
Configuration
1 How do I configure the firewall
You can use the Web Configurator to configure the firewall for P-660HW-Dx v2
By factory default if you connect your PC to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 you can access Web Configurator via bdquohttp19216811‟
Note Donrsquot forget to type in the Administrator Password
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall
There are several ways to protect others from touching the settings of your
firewall
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
24
1 Change the default Administrator password since it is required when
setting up the firewall
2 Limit who can access to your P-660HW-Dx v2‟s Web Configurator or
CLI You can enter the IP address of the secured LAN host in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt
[Service] -gtSecured Client IP to allow special access to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
The default value in this field is 0000 which means you do not care which
host is trying to telnet your P-660HW-Dx v2 or accessthe Web
Configurator of
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN
There are four reasons that WWWTelnet from WAN is blocked
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable Telnet from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow WWWTelnet connection
from WAN The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
WWW (For accessing Web Configurator)
Source IP= Remote trusted host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP80
Action=Forward
TELNET (For accessing Command Line Interface)
Source IP= Telnet Client host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP23
Action=Forward
(2)You have disabled WWWTelnet service in Web Configurator Advanced
setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
25
(3) WWWTelnet service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host
entered in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote
MGNT
(4)A filter set which blocks WWWTelnet from WAN is applied to WAN node
You can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using FTP over
WAN
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable FTP from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow FTP connection from WAN
The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
Source IP= FTP host
Destination IP= P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP
Service= FTP TCP21 TCP20
Action=Forward
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
26
(2) You have disabled FTP service in Web Configurator Advanced setup
Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(3) FTP service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host entered
in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(4) A filter set which blocks FTP from WAN is applied to WAN node You
can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
Log and Alert
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the firewall log immediately when the packet
matches a firewall rule The log for Default Firewall Policy (LAN to WAN WAN
to LAN WAN to WAN) is generated automatically with factory default setting
but you can change it in Web Configurator
2 What does the log show to us
The log supports up to 128 entries There are 5 columns for each entry Please
see the example shown below
3 How do I view the firewall log
All logs generated in P-660HW-Dx v2 including firewall logs IPSec logs
system logs are migrated to centralized logs So you can view firewall logs in
Centralized logs Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs
-gtView Log
The log keeps 128 entries the new entries will overwrite the old entries when
the log has over 128 entries
Before you can view firewall logs there are two steps you need to do
(1) Enable log function in Centralized logs setup via either one of the following
methods
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
27
Web configuration Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log
Settings check Access Control and Attacks options depending on
your real situation
CI command sys logs category [access | attack]
(2) Enable log function in firewall default policy or in firewall rules
After the above two steps you can view firewall logs via
Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gtView
Log
View the log by CI command sys logs disp
You can also view Centralized logs via mail or syslog please configure mail
server or Unix Syslog server in Web configuration Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the alert when an attack is detected by the
firewall and sends it via Email So to send the alert you must configure the
mail server and Email address using Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings You can also specify how frequently
you want to receive the alert in it
5 What is the difference between the log and alert
A log entry is just added to the log inside the P-660HW-Dx v2 and e-mailed
together with all other log entries at the scheduled time as configured An alert
is e-mailed immediately after an attacked is detected
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
28
Wireless FAQ
General FAQ
1 What is a Wireless LAN
Wireless LANs provide all the functionality of wired LANs without the need for
physical connections (wires) Data is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier
and transmitted through the ether Typical bit-rates are 11Mbps and 54Mbps
although in practice data throughput is half of this Wireless LANs can be
formed simply by equipping PCs with wireless NICs If connectivity to a wired
LAN is required an Access Point (AP) is used as a bridging device APs are
typically located close to the centre of the wireless client population
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN
Mobility Wireless LAN systems can provide LAN users with access to
real-time information anywhere in their organization This mobility supports
productivity and service opportunities not possible with wired networks
Installation Speed and Simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be
fast and easy and can eliminate the need to pull cable through walls and
ceilings
Installation Flexibility Wireless technology allows the network to go where
wire cannot go
Reduced Cost-of-Ownership While the initial investment required for
wireless LAN hardware can be higher than the cost of wired LAN hardware
overall installation expenses and life-cycle costs can be significantly lower
Long-term cost benefits are greatest in dynamic environments requiring
frequent moves and changes
Scalability Wireless LAN systems can be configured in a variety of topologies
to meet the needs of specific applications and installations Configurations are
easily changed and range from peer-to-peer networks suitable for a small
number of users to full infrastructure networks of thousands of users that
enable roaming over a broad area
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN
The speed of Wireless LAN is still relatively slower than wired LAN The setup
cost of Wireless LAN is relative high because the equipment cost including
access point and PCMCIA Wireless LAN card is higher than hubs and CAT 5
cables
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
29
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks
Airports hotels and even coffee shops like Starbucks are deploying 80211
networks so people can wirelessly surf the Internet with their laptops
5 What is an Access Point
The AP (access point also known as a base station) is the wireless server that
with an antenna and a wired Ethernet connection that broadcasts information
using radio signals AP typically acts as a bridge for the clients It can pass
information to wireless LAN cards that have been installed in computers or
laptops allowing those computers to connect to the campus network and the
Internet without wires
6 Whatrsquos the difference between IEEE80211abg
The IEEE 80211 is a wireless LAN industry standard and the objective of
IEEE 80211 is to make sure that different manufactures wireless LAN devices
can communicate to each other Below is a brief comparison for the
IEEE80211 abg
Publish
Time
Frequency
Band(GHZ)
Data Rate(Mbps) Compatibility
IEEE80211a 1999 UNII Band
515~5825
691218243648
54
Only work with
80211a
devices
IEEE80211b 1999 ISM Band
24~24835
125511 -
IEEE80211g 2001 ISM Band
24~24835
691218243648
54
Backward
compatible with
80211b
devices
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
Yes As long as the products comply to the same IEEE 80211 standard The
Wi-Fi logo is used to define 80211b compatible products Wi-Fi5 is a
compatibility standard for 80211a products running in the 5GHz band
8 What is Wi-Fi
The Wi-Fi logo signifies that a product is interoperable with wireless
networking equipment from other vendors A Wi-Fi logo product has been
tested and certified by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA)
The Socket Wireless LAN Card is Wi-Fi certified and that means that it will
work (interoperate) with any brand of Access Point that is also Wi-Fi certified
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band
Various spread spectrum radio communication applications use the 24 GHz
band This includes WLAN systems (not necessarily of the type IEEE
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
30
80211b) cordless phones wireless medical telemetry equipment and
Bluetoothtrade short-range wireless applications which include connecting
printers to computers and connecting modems or hands-free kits to mobile
phones
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device
Any time devices are operated in the same frequency band there is the
potential for interference
Both the 80211bg and Bluetooth devices occupy the same24-to-2483-GHz
unlicensed frequency range-the same band But a Bluetooth device would not
interfere with other 80211 devices much more than another 80211 device
would interefere While more collisions are possible with the introduction of a
Bluetooth device they are also possible with the introduction of another 80211
device or a new 24 GHz cordless phone for that matter But BlueTooth
devices are usually low-power so the effects that a Bluetooth device may have
on an 80211 network if any arent far-reaching
11 Can radio signals pass through wall
Transmitting through a wall is possible depending upon the material used in its
construction In general metals and substances with a high water content do
not allow radio waves to pass through Metals reflect radio waves and concrete
attenuates radio waves The amount of attenuation suffered in passing through
concrete will be a function of its thickness and amount of metal re-enforcement
used
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference among WLAN
products
Factors of interference
(1) Obstacles walls ceilings furniturehellip etc
(2) Building Materials metal door aluminum studs
(3) Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors
Solution
(1) Minimizing the number of walls and ceilings
(2) Antenna is positioned for best reception
(3) Keep WLAN products away from electrical devices eg microwaves
monitors electric motorshellip etc
(4) Add additional APs if necessary
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN
WLANs are generally privately owned wireless systems that are deployed in a
corporation warehouse hospital or educational campus setting Data rates
are high and there are no per-packet charges for data transmission
WWANs are generally publicly shared data networks designed to provide
coverage in metropolitan areas and along traffic corridors WWANs are owned
by a service provider or carrier Data rates are low and charges are based on
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
31
usage Specialized applications are characteristically designed around short
burst messaging
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage any
hardware
Yes it will not harm the hardware but the module will not be detected and
work after inserting to the slot You need to reboot the router to initialize the
module
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
The wireless security modes supported on P-660HW-Dx v2 are Static
WEP WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK and WPA2
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
It supports IEEE 80211bgg+ standard
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering
Yes it supports up to 32 MAC Address filtering
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption
Yes it means that the AP on P-660HW-Dx v2 will automatically decelerate
when devices move beyond the optimal range or other interference is present
If the device moves back within the range of a higher-speed transmission the
connection will automatically speed up again Rate shifting is a physical-layer
mechanism transparent to the user and the upper layers of the protocol stack
Advanced FAQ
1 What is Ad Hoc mode
A wireless network consists of a number of stations without using an access
point or any connection to a wired network
2 What is Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure mode implies connectivity to a wired communications
infrastructure If such connectivity is required the Access Points must be used
to connect to the wired LAN backbone Wireless clients have their
configurations set for infrastructure mode in order to utilise access points
relaying
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area
This depends on the surrounding terrain the diameter of the client population
and the number of clients If an area is large with dispersed pockets of
populations then extension points can be used for extend coverage
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
32
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (DSSS)
DSSS spreads its signal continuously over a wide frequency band DSSS
maps the information bearing bit-pattern at the sending station into a higher
data rate bit sequence using a chipping code The chipping code (also known
as processing gain) introduces redundancy which allows data recovery if
certain bit errors occur during transmission The FCC rules the minimum
processing gain should be 10 typical systems use processing gains of 20
IEEE 80211b specifies the use of DSSS
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (FHSS)
FHSS uses a narrowband carrier which hops through a predefined sequence
of several frequencies at a specific rate This avoids problems with fixed
channel narrowband noise and simple jamming Both transmitter and receiver
must have their hopping sequences synchronized to create the effect of a
single logical channel To an unsynchronised receiver an FHSS transmission
appears to be short-duration impulse noise 80211 may use FHSS or DSSS
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
No Provided the antenna is optimally designed for 24GHz or 5GHz operation
WLAN NICs often include an internal antenna which may provide sufficient
reception
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range
This frequency range has been set aside by the FCC and is generally labeled
the ISM band A few years ago Apple and several other large corporations
requested that the FCC allow the development of wireless networks within this
frequency range What we have today is a protocol and system that allows for
unlicensed use of radios within a prescribed power level The ISM band is
populated by Industrial Scientific and Medical devices that are all low power
devices but can interfere with each other
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID)
SSID is a configurable identification that allows clients to communicate to the
appropriate base station With proper configuration only clients that are
configured with the same SSID can communicate with base stations having
the same SSID SSID from a security point of view acts as a simple single
shared password between base stations and clients
9 What is an ESSID
ESSID stands for Extended Service Set Identifier and identifies the wireless
LAN The ESSID of the mobile device must match the ESSID of the AP to
communicate with the AP The ESSID is a 32-character maximum string and is
case-sensitive
Security FAQ
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Points
radio link
To secure the date across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Point‟s radio link we
could select any one of the security mode Static 64128256 bit WEP
WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK WPA2
2 What is WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security mechanism defined within the
80211 standard and designed to make the security of the wireless medium
equal to that of a cable (wire) WEP data encryption was designed to prevent
access to the network by intruders and to prevent the capture of wireless
LAN traffic through eavesdropping WEP allows the administrator to define a
set of respective Keys for each wireless network user based on a Key
String passed through the WEP encryption algorithm Access is denied by
anyone who does not have an assigned key Note WEP has shown to have
fundamental flaws in its key generation processing
3 What is WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN You can refer to
the User Guide for more information about it
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP
40 bit WEP and 64 bit WEP are the same encryption level and can interoperate
The lower level of WEP encryption uses a 40 bit (10 Hex character) as secret
key (set by user) and a 24 bit Initialization Vector (not under user control)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
34
(40+24=64) Some vendors refer to this level of WEP as 40 bit others as 64
bit
5 What is a WEP key
A WEP key is a user defined string of characters used to encrypt and decrypt
data
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP
No 128-bit WEP will not communicate with 64-bit WEP Although 128 bit WEP
also uses a 24 bit Initialization Vector but it uses a 104 bit as secret key Users
need to use the same encryption level in order to make a connection
7 Can the SSID be encrypted
No WEP only encrypts the data packets not the 80211 management
packetsThe SSID is in the beacon and probe management messages and
SSID goes over the air in clear text This makes obtaining the SSID easy by
sniffing 80211 wireless traffic
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff the SSID
Many APs by default have broadcasting the SSID turned on Sniffers typically
will find the SSID in the broadcast beacon packets Turning off the broadcast of
SSID in the beacon message (a common practice) does not prevent getting
the SSID since the SSID is sent in the clear in the probe message when a
client associates to an AP a sniffer just has to wait for a valid user to associate
to the network to see the SSID
9 What are Insertion Attacks
The insertion attacks are based on placing unauthorized devices on the
wireless network without going through a security process and review
10 What is Wireless Sniffer
An attacker can sniff and capture legitimate traffic Many of the sniffer tools for
Ethernet are based on capturing the first part of the connection session where
the data would typically include the username and password An intruder can
masquerade as that user by using this captured information An intruder who
monitors the wireless network can apply this same attack principle on the
wireless
11 What is OTIST How do I use it
OTIST is acronym for ZyXEL‟s bdquoOne Touch Intelligent Security Technology‟
It enables P-660HW-Dx v2 and ZyXEL‟s OTIST supported Wireless adapters
to establish connections of the WPA-PSK security mode automatically with
just one touch at the reset button on rear panel
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
35
To use this function on P-660HW-Dx v2 you could press the reset button on
P-660HW-Dx v2 for 1~5 seconds the OTIST is actived The P-660HW-Dx v2
will enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA-PSK automatically if no
WLAN security has been set The default setup key for OTIST is bdquo01234567‟
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
36
Application Notes
General Application Notes
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode
Setup your workstation
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
If the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet that means only
the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as an ADSL bridge
modem to connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account
and limit only one computer to access the Internet
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
To connect your computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN port the computer
must have an Ethernet adapter card installed For connecting a single
computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2 we use a Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
In most cases the IP address of the computer is assigned by the ISP
dynamically so you have to configure the computer as a DHCP client which
obtains the IP from the ISP using DHCP protocol The ISP may also provide
the gateway DNS via DHCP if they are available Otherwise please enter the
static IP addresses for all that the ISP gives to you in the network TCPIP
settings For Windows we check the option Obtain an IP address
automatically in its TCPIP setup please see the example shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
37
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
bridge mode We will use Web Configurator to guide you through the related
menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as bridge mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
(2)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
38
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For example
LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
(2) Turn off DHCP Server and configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 in
Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN We use 19216811 as
the LAN IP for P-660HW-Dx v2 in this case
Step 1 Disactive DHCP Server and apply it
Step 2 Assign an IP to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx v2 eg
19216811
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to install an Internet sharing device like
a router In this case we use the P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
Connect the LAN ports of all computers to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 using Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
Since the P-660HW-Dx v2 is set to DHCP server as default so you need only
to configure the workstations as the DHCP clients in the networking settings In
this case the IP address of the computer is assigned by the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 can also provide the DNS to the clients via DHCP if it is
available For this setup in Windows we check the option Obtain an IP
address automatically in its TCPIP setup Please see the example shown
below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
39
Set up your P-660HW-Dx v2 under routing mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
Routing mode for routing traffic We will use Web Configurator to guide you
through the related menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as routing mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For
example LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
IP Address
Assignment
Set to Dynamic if the ISP provides the IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2
dynamically Otherwise set to Static and enter the IP in the IP
Address field
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
40
(2) Configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 and the DHCP settings in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
What is DHCP Relay
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In addition to the
DHCP server feature the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports the DHCP relay function
When it is configured as DHCP server it assigns the IP addresses to the LAN
clients When it is configured as DHCP relay it is responsible for forwarding
the requests and responses negotiating between the DHCP clients and the
server See figure 1
Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
We could set the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay by the following command
in CLI
Ip dhcp enif0 mode relay
Ip dhcp enif0 relay server [Server IP Address]
4 SUA Notes
Tested SUANAT Applications (eg Cu-SeeMe ICQ NetMeeting)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
41
Introduction
Generally SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users However some applications
such as Cu-SeeMe and ICQ will need to connect to the local user behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 In such case a SUA server must be configured to forward
the incoming packets to the true destination behind SUA After the required
server are configured in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding the internal server or client applications can be accessed
by using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP Address
SUA Supporting Table
The following are the required Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding for the various applications running SUA mode
ZyXEL SUA Supporting Table1
Application
Required Settings in Port Forwarding
PortIP
Outgoing Connection Incoming
Connection
HTTP None 80client IP
FTP None 21client IP
TELNET None 23client IP
(and active Telnet
service from WAN)
POP3 None 110client IP
SMTP None 25client IP
mIRC
None for Chat
For DCC please set
DefaultClient IP
Windows PPTP None 1723client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
42
ICQ 99a None for Chat
For DCC please set
ICQ -gt preference -gt
connections -gt firewall
and set the firewall time
out to 80 seconds in
firewall setting
Defaultclient IP
ICQ 2000b None for Chat None for Chat
ICQ Phone 2000b None 6701client IP
Cornell 11 Cu-SeeMe None 7648client IP
White Pine 312 Cu-SeeMe2 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
White Pine 40 Cu-SeeMe 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
Microsoft NetMeeting 21 amp
3013
None 1720client IP
1503client IP
Cisco IPTV 200 None
RealPlayer G2 None
VDOLive None
Quake1064 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeII2305 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeIII105 beta None
StartCraft 6112client IP
Quick Time 40 None
pcAnywhere 80 None
5631client IP
5632client IP
22client IP
IPsec (ESP tunneling mode) None (one client only) DefaultClient
Microsoft Messenger Service
30 6901client IP 6901client IP
Microsoft Messenger Service
46 47 50hellip
(none UPnP)6
None for Chat File
transfer Video and Voice
None for Chat File
transfer Video and
Voice
Net2Phone None 6701client IP
Network Time Protocol (NTP) None 123 server IP
Win2k Terminal Server None 3389server IP
Remote Anything None 3996 - 4000client IP
Virtual Network Computing None 5500client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
43
(VNC) 5800client IP
5900client IP
AIM (AOL Instant Messenger) None for Chat and IM None for Chat and
IM
e-Donkey None 4661 - 4662client IP
POLYCOM Video
Conferencing None Defaultclient IP
iVISTA 41 None 80server IP
Microsoft Xbox Live7 None NA 1 Since SUA enables your LAN to appear as a single computer to the Internet
it is not possible to configure similar servers on the same LAN behind SUA 2 Because White Pine Cu-SeeMe uses dedicate ports (port 7648 amp port 24032)
to transmit and receive data therefore only one local Cu-SeeMe is allowed
within the same LAN 3 In SUA mode only one local NetMeeting user is allowed because the
outsiders can not distinguish between local users using the same internet IP 4 Certain Quake servers do not allow multiple users to login using the same
unique IP so only one Quake user will be allowed in this case Moreover
when a Quake server is configured behind SUA P-660HW-Dx v2 will not be
able to provide information of that server on the internet 5 Quake II has the same limitations as that of Quake I 6 P-660HW-Dx v2 supports MSN Messenger 46 47 50hellip video voice
pass-through NAT In addition for the Windows OS supported UPnP
(Universal Plug and Play) such as Windows XP and Windows ME UPnP
supported in P-660HW-Dx v2 is an alternative solution to pass through MSN
Messenger video voice traffic For more detail please refer to UPnP
application note 7 P-660HW-Dx v2 support Microsoft Xbox Live with factory default
configuration
Configurations
For example if the workstation operating Cu-SeeMe has an IP of 192168134
then the default SUA server must be set to 192168134 The peer Cu-SeeMe
user can reach this workstation by using P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
44
which can be obtained from Web Configurator
Configure an Internal Server behind SUA
Introduction
If you wish you can make internal servers (eg Web ftp or mail server)
accessible for outside users even though SUA makes your LAN appear as a
single machine to the outside world A service is identified by the port number
Also since you need to specify the IP address of a server behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 a server must have a fixed IP address and not be a DHCP
client whose IP address potentially changes each time P-660HW-Dx v2 is
powered on
In addition to the servers for specific services SUA supports a default server
A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for is
forwarded to the default server If the default server is not defined the service
request is simply discarded
Configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
45
To make a server visible to the outside world specify the port number of the
service and the inside address of the server in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The outside users can access
the local server using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address which can be
obtained from Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information
For example
Configuring an internal Web server for outside access (suppose the
Server IP Address is 192168110)
(1) Fill in the service name and server IP Address press button bdquoAdd‟
(2) If add successfully the Web Configurator will display message
bdquoConfiguration updated successfully‟ at the bottom You can see the port
forwarding rule on the same page the default port for Web Server is 80
(3) If you want to change the port for Web Server you could press button
bdquoModify‟ on corresponding rule then modify and apply it
Default port numbers for some services
Service Port Number
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
46
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
Configure a PPTP server behind SUA
Introduction
PPTP is a tunneling protocol defined by the PPTP forum that allows PPP
packets to be encapsulated within Internet Protocol (IP) packets and
forwarded over any IP network including the Internet itself
In order to run the Windows 9x PPTP client you must be able to establish an
IP connection with a tunnel server such as the Windows NT Server 40
Remote Access Server
Windows Dial-Up Networking uses the Internet standard Point-to-Point (PPP)
to provide a secure optimized multiple-protocol network connection over
dial-up telephone lines All data sent over this connection can be encrypted
and compressed and multiple network level protocols (TCPIP NetBEUI and
IPX) can be run correctly Windows NT Domain Login level security is
preserved even across the Internet
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
47
Window98 PPTP Client Internet NT RAS Server Protocol Stack
PPTP appears as new modem type (Virtual Private Networking Adapter) that
can be selected when setting up a connection in the Dial-Up Networking folder
The VPN Adapter type does not appear elsewhere in the system Since PPTP
encapsulates its data stream in the PPP protocol the VPN requires a second
dial-up adapter This second dial-up adapter for VPN is added during the
installation phase of the Upgrade in addition to the first dial-up adapter that
provides PPP support for the analog or ISDN modem
The PPTP is supported in Windows NT and Windows 98 already For
Windows 95 it needs to be upgraded by the Dial-Up Networking 12 upgrade
Configuration
This application note explains how to establish a PPTP connection with a
remote private network in the P-660HW-Dx v2 SUA case In ZyNOS all PPTP
packets can be forwarded to the internal PPTP Server (WinNT server) behind
SUA The port number of the PPTP has to be entered in the Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding on
P-660HW-Dx v2 to forward to the appropriate private IP address of Windows
NT server
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
48
Example
The following example shows how to dial to an ISP via the P-660HW-Dx v2
and then establish a tunnel to a private network There will be three items that
you need to set up for PPTP application these are PPTP server (WinNT)
PPTP client (Win9x) and the P-660HW-Dx v2
(1) PPTP server setup (WinNT)
Add the VPN service from Control Panel -gtNetwork
Add an user account for PPTP logged on user
Enable RAS port
Select the network protocols from RAS such as IPX TCPIP NetBEUI
Set the Internet gateway to P-660HW-Dx v2
(2) PPTP client setup (Win9x)
Add one VPN connection from Dial-Up Networking by entering the
correct username amp password and the IP address of the P-660HW-Dx
v2s Internet IP address for logging to NT RAS server
Set the Internet gateway to the router that is connecting to ISP
(3) P-660HW-Dx v2 setup
Before making a VPN connection from Win9x to WinNT server you
need to connect P-660HW-Dx v2 router to your ISP first
Enter the IP address of the PPTP server (WinNT server) and the
port number for PPTP as shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
49
Select service name as bdquoPPTP‟ fill in the Server IP Address then press button
bdquoAdd‟
When you have finished the above settings you can ping to the remote Win9x
client from WinNT This ping command is used to demonstrate that remote
the Win9x can be reached across the Internet If the Internet connection
between two LANs is achievable you can place a VPN call from the remote
Win9x client
For example Cping 203661132
When a dial-up connection to ISP is established a default gateway is assigned
to the router traffic through that connection Therefore the output below shows
the default gateway of the Win9x client after the dial-up connection has been
established
Before making a VPN connection from the Win9x client to the NT server you
need to know the exact Internet IP address that the ISP assigns to
P-660HW-Dx v2 router in SUA mode and enter this IP address in the VPN
dial-up dialog box You can check this Internet IP address from PNC Monitor or
S Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information If the Internet IP address
is a fixed IP address provided by ISP in SUA mode then you can always use
this IP address for reaching the VPN server
In the following example the IP address 1401131225 is dynamically
assigned by ISP You must enter this IP address in the VPN Server dialog box
for reaching the PPTP server After the VPN link is established you can start
the network protocol application such as IP IPX and NetBEUI
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
50
5 Using Full Feature NAT
When P-660HW-Dx v2 is in Routing mode you can select NAT Option as
Full Feature in Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit
Key Settings
Field Options Description
Network Address
Translation
Full Feature
When you select this option you can select
Address Mapping Set Number 1~8 in the
pull-down menu on the right
None NAT is disabled when you select this option
SUA Only
When you select this option this remote node
will use default SUA Address Mapping Set
You can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat
lookup 255‟ It‟s a read-only sets with two
rules Many-to-One and server mapping
Select Full Feature when you require other
mapping types
Configuring NAT
Address Mapping Sets and NAT Server Sets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
51
The P-660HW-Dx v2 has 8 remote nodes and so allows you to configure 8
NAT Address Mapping Sets You must specify which NAT Address Mapping
Set (1~8) to use in the remote node when you select Full Feature NAT
You can edit 10 rules for each Address Mapping Set You can edit the rules for
Address Mapping Sets 1 in Web Configurator The other Address Mapping
Sets 2~8 can only be configured in CLI (Command Line Interface)
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports We
can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Port Forwarding To use the NAT server sets you‟ve configured a Server
rule must be set up inside the NAT Address Mapping set Please see NAT
Server Sets for further information on how to apply it
When you select SUA Only the P-660HW-Dx v2 will use a default SUA
Address Mapping set for it It has two rules Many-to-One and Server You
can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat lookup 255‟
Please note that the fields in this menu are read-only However the settings of
the rule set 2 can be modified in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The following table explains the fields in this
above screen
Field Description OptionExample
set This is sequence number for Address Mapping Sets 255 for SUA
Internal
Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA)
0000 for the
Many-to-One type
Local End
IP
This is the starting local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0000 and the
End IP is 255255255255
255255255255
Global Start
IP
This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you
have a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start
IP
0000
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
52
Global End
IP This is the ending global IP address (IGA) NA
Type This is the NAT mapping types Many-to-One and
Server
Here we‟ll guide you to configure Address Mapping Sets from Web
Configurator and CLI (Since in Web Configurator we can only edit the rules
for Address Mapping Sets 1 The other Address Mapping Sets 2~8 can only
be configured in CLI)
Now lets begin with Web Configurator
Firstly let‟s come to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping
This menu is for Address Mapping Set 1 you can edit 10 Address Mapping
Rules for Set 1 You can edit or remove a rule by clicking the two buttons on
the rule table
Click the bdquoEditrsquo Button on the rule 1 then you can enter the window in which
you can edit an individual rule and configure the Mapping Type Local and
Global StartEnd IPs
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
53
The following table describes the fields in this screen
Field Description OptionExample
Type You can select one of the five mapping types from the
pull-down menu
1 One-to-One
2 Many-to-One
3 Many-to-Many
Overload
4 Many-to-Many No
Overload
5 Server
Local
IP
Start This is the starting local IP address (ILA) 0000
End
This is the ending local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0000 and the
End IP as 255255255255 This field is NA for
One-to-One type
255255255255
Global
IP
Start This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you have
a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start IP 0000
End
This is the ending global IP address (IGA) This
field is NA for One-to-One Many-to-One and Server
types
2001164
Note For all Local and Global IPs the End IP address must begin after the IP
Start address ie you cannot have an End IP address beginning before the
Start IP address
Configure Address Mapping Sets in CLI
Setp 1 Telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 (We suppose the LAN IP Address of
P-660HW-Dx v2 is 19216811)
Step 2 Select one Address Mapping Set (1~8) by command bdquoip nat
addrmap map [map ] [set name]‟ (set name is optional) Suppose we
configure set 2 in the example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
54
Setp 3 Set NAT address mapping rule for the Address Mapping Set you just
configured (Set 2 in this example) by command bdquoip nat addrmap rule [rule]
[insert | edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP] [global start IP] [global
end IP] [server set ]‟ Suppose we set a Many-to-One rule for set 2 by
command bdquoip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 1 192168110 192168120 172111
172111‟
Setp 4 Save the configuration by command bdquoip nat addrmap save‟ You can
apply the Address Mapping Set 2 to remote nodes in Web Configurator when
you select Full Feature NAT See the intire process as follows
Set 5 You can lookup the successfully configured Address Mapping Sets by
command bdquoip nat addrmap disp‟
Key Settings
CI Command Description
ip nat addrmap map [map] [set
name]
Select NAT address mapping set and set mapping set
name but set name is optional
Example
gt ip nat addrmap map 2 Test
ip nat addrmap rule [rule] [insert |
edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP]
[global start IP] [global end IP] [server
set ]
Set NAT address mapping rule If the ldquotyperdquo is not
ldquoinside-serverrdquo then the ldquotyperdquo field will still need a
dummy value like ldquo0rdquo
Type is 0 - 4 = one-to-one many-to-one
many-to-many-overload many-to-many-non overload
inside-server
Example
gt ip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 3 192168110
192168120 172111 172111
ip nat addrmap clear [map] [rule] Clear the selected rule of the set
ip nat addrmap freememory Discard Changes
ip nat addrmap disp Display nat set information
ip nat addrmap save Save settings
ip nat server load [set] Load the server sets of NAT into buffer
ip nat server disp [1] ldquodisp 1rdquo means to display the NAT server set in buffer
if parameter ldquo1rdquo is omitted then it will display all the
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
55
server sets
ip nat server save Save the NAT server set buffer into flash
ip nat server clear [set] Clear the server set [set] must use ldquosaverdquo command
to let it save into flash
ip nat server edit [rule] active Activate the rule [rule] rule number is 1 to 24 the
number 25-36 is for UPNP application
ip nat server edit [rule] svrport ltstart
portgt ltend portgt
Configure the port range from ltstart port gt to ltend
portgt
ip nat server edit [rule] remotehost
ltstart IPgt ltend IPgt
Configure the IP address range of remote host (Leave
it to be default value if you don‟t need this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] leasetime
ltsecondsgt
Configure the lease time (Leave it to be default value if
you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] rulename
ltstringgt
Configure the name of the rule (Leave it to be default
value if you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] forwardip ltIP
addressgt Configure the LAN IP address to be forwarded
ip nat server edit [rule] protocol
ltTCP|UDP|ALLgt
Configure the protocol to be used TCP UDP or ALL
(it must be capital)
NAT Server Sets
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports
(similar to the old SUA menu of before) If you wish you can make inside
servers for different services eg Web or FTP visible to the outside users
even though NAT makes your network appears as a single machine to the
outside world A server is identified by the port number eg Web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21
As an example (see the following figure) if you have a Web server at
192168136 and a FTP server at 192168133 then you need to specify for
port 80 (Web) the server at IP address 192168136 and for port 21 (FTP)
another at IP address 192168133
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
56
Please note that a server can support more than one service eg a server
can provide both FTP and Mail service while another provides only Web
service
The following procedures show how to configure a server behind NAT
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
Step 2 Select the service name from the pull-down menu and fill in the server
Address on bdquoServer IP Address‟ then click button bdquoAdd‟ to save it
Step 3 You could click the button bdquoEdit‟ on the rule to modify the Service name
Server IP Address StartEnd Port
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please
refer RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers
Service Port Number
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol)
1723
Examples
Internet Access Only
Internet Access with an Internal Server
Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
(1) Internet Access Only
In our Internet Access example we only need one rule where all our ILAs map
to one IGA assigned by the ISP You can just use the default SUA NAT or you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
57
could select Full Feature NAT and select an Address Mapping Set with a
Many-to-One Rule See the following figure
(2) Internet Access with an Internal Server
In this case we do exactly as the figure (use the convenient pre-configured
SUA Only set) and also go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
NAT -gt Port Forwarding to specify the Internet Server behind the NAT as
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
58
below
(3) Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
(One-to-One Many-to-One Server Set mapping types are used)
In this case we have 3 IGAs from the ISP We have two very busy internal FTP
servers and also an internal general server for the web and mail In this case
we want to assign the 3 IGAs by the following way using 4 NAT rules
Rule 1 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
Rule 3 (Many-to-One type) to map the other clients to IGA3 (200003)
Rule 4 (Server type) to map a web server and mail server with ILA3
(192168120) to IGA3 Type Server allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types to other machines behind NAT on the LAN
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
59
Step 1 In this case we need to map ILA to more than one IGA therefore we
must choose the Full Feature option from the NAT field in currently active
remote node and assign IGA3 to P-660HW-Dx v2‟s WAN IP Address
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping to begin configuring Address Mapping Set 1 We can see
there are 10 blank rule table that could be configured See the following setup
for the four rules in our case
Rule 1 Setup Select One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 Setup Selecting One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
60
Rule 3 Setup Select Many-to-One type to map the other clients to IGA3
(200003)
Rule 4 Setup Select Server type to map our web server and mail server with
ILA3 (192168120) to IGA3
Menu Network -gt NAT -gt Address Mapping should look as follows now
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
61
Step 3 Now we configure all other incoming traffic to go to our web server and
mail server from Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
(4) Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some mIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address In this case it is better to
use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types thus each
user login to the server using a unique global IP address The following figure
illustrates this
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
62
One rule configured for using Many-to-Many No Overload mapping type is
shown below
We can also do this by configure threeOne-to-One mapping type rules
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
What is DDNS
The DDNS service an IP Registry provides a public central database where
information such as email addresses hostnames IPs etc can be stored and
retrieved This solves the problems if your DNS server uses an IP associated
with dynamic IPs
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to access the internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
must inform the DDNS server the change of this IP so that the server can
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
63
update its IP-to-DNS entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is
updated the DNS name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still
usable
The DDNS servers the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports currently is
WWWDYNDNSORG where you apply the DNS from and update the WAN IP
to
Setup the DDNS
1 Before configuring the DDNS settings in the P-660HW-Dx v2 you must
register an account from the DDNS server such as
WWWDYNDNSORG first After the registration you have a hostname
for your internal server and a password using to update the IP to the
DDNS server
2 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Dynamic DNS
Select Active Dynamic DNS option
Key Settings
Option Description
Service Provider Enter the DDNS server in this field Currently we support
WWWDYNDNSORG
Active Toggle to Yes
Host Name Enter the hostname you subscribe from the above DDNS server
For example zyxelcomtw
User Name Enter the user name that the DDNS server gives to you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
64
Password Enter the password that the DDNS server gives to you
Enable Wildcard
Enter the hostname for the wildcard function that the
WWWDYNDNSORG supports Note that Wildcard option is
available only when the provider is httpwwwdyndnsorg
7 Network Management Using SNMP
ZyXEL SNMP Implementation
ZyXEL currently includes SNMP support in some P-660HW-Dx v2 routers It is
implemented based on the SNMPv1 so it will be able to communicate with
SNMPv1 NMSs Further users can also add ZyXELs private MIB in the NMS
to monitor and control additional system variables The ZyXELs private MIB
tree is shown in figure 3 For SNMPv1 operation ZyXEL permits one
community string so that the router can belong to only one community and
allows trap messages to be sent to only one NMS manager
Some traps are sent to the SNMP manager when anyone of the following
events happens
1 coldStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine coldstarts the trap will be sent after booting
2 warmStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine warmstarts the trap will be sent after booting
3 linkDown (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is down the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
4 linkUp (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is up the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
5 authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215)
When receiving any SNMP get or set requirement with wrong community
this trap is sent to the manager
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
65
6 whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-MIB)
When the system is going to restart (warmstart) the trap will be sent with the
reason of restart before rebooting
(1) For intentional reboot
In some cases (download new files CI command sys reboot ) reboot is
done intentionally And traps with the message System reboot by user will
be sent
(2) For fatal error
System has to reboot for some fatal errors And traps with the message of the
fatal code will be sent
Downloading ZyXELs private MIB
Configure the P-660HW-Dx v2 for SNMP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
66
The SNMP related settings in P-660HW-Dx v2 are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt SNMP The
following steps describe a simple setup procedure for configuring all SNMP
settings
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Get
Community
Enter the correct Get Community This Get Community must match the
Get- and GetNext community requested from the NMS The default is
public
Set
Community
Enter the correct Set Community This Set Community must match the
Set-community requested from the NMS The default is public
Trusted
Host
Enter the IP address of the NMS The P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will only
respond to SNMP messages coming from this IP address If 0000 is
entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will respond to all NMS
managers
Trap
Community
Enter the community name in each sent trap to the NMS This Trap
Community must match what the NMS is expecting The default is
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
67
public
Trap
Destination
Enter the IP address of the NMS that you wish to send the traps to If
0000 is entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will not send trap any
NMS manager
Note You may need to edit a firewall rule to permit SNMP Packets
8 Using syslog
You can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt
Logs -gt Log Settings -gt Syslog logging
Key Settings
Active Select it to active UNIX Syslog
Syslog IP Address Enter the IP address of the UNIX server that you wish to
send the syslog
Log Facility Select from the 7 different local options The log facility lets you
log the message in different server files Refer to your UNIX manual
9 Using IP Alias
What is IP Alias
In a typical environment a LAN router is required to connect two local
networks The P-660HW-Dx v2 can connect three local networks to the ISP or
a remote node we call this function as IP Alias In this case an internal
router is not required For example the network manager can divide the local
network into three networks and connect them to the Internet using
P-660HW-Dx v2s single user account See the figure below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
68
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports three virtual LAN interfaces via its single
physical Ethernet interface The first network can be configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN -gt DHCP Setup The second
and third networks that we call IP Alias 1 and IP Alias 2 can be configured
in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias
There are three internal virtual LAN interfaces for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to route
the packets fromto the three networks correctly They are enif0 for the major
network enif00 for the IP alias 1 and enif01 for the IP alias 2 Therefore
three routes are created in the P-660HW-Dx v2 as shown below when the
three networks are configured If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP is also enabled
the IP pool for the clients can be any of the three networks
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
69
You can edit filter rule to accept or deny LAN packets fromto the IP alias 12
go through the P-660HW-Dx v2 by command in CLI
lan index [index number]
Usage index number =1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt [set]
Usage set= the corresponding filter set number you‟ve configured
lan save
IP Alias Setup
(1) Edit the first network in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
LAN -gt IPDHCP Setup by configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s first LAN IP
address
Key Settings
DHCP
Setup
If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP server is enabled the IP pool for the clients
can be any of the three networks
TCPIP
Setup
Enter the first LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This will create the
first route in the enif0 interface
(2) Edit the second and third networks in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias by
configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s second and third LAN IP addresses
Key Settings
IP Alias 1 Active it and enter the second LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the second route in the enif00 interface
IP Alias 2 Active it and enter the third LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the third route in the enif01 interface
10 Using IP Policy Routing
What is IP Policy Routing (IPPR)
Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router
takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides
a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet
forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator
Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis
prior to the normal routing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
70
traffic among multiple paths For example if a network has both the Internet
and remote node connections we can route the Web packets to the Internet
using one policy and route the FTP packets to the remote LAN using another
policy See the figure below
Use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths
Benefits
Source-Based Routing - Network administrators can use policy-based
routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections
Quality of Service (QoS)- Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the
precedence or TOS (Type of Service) values in the IP header at the periphery
of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic
Cost Savings- IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on
high-bandwidth high-cost path while using low-path for batch traffic
Load Sharing- Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic
among multiple paths
How does the IPPR work
A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet
meets the criteria The action is taken only when all the criteria are met The
criteria include the source address and port IP protocol (ICMP UDP TCP
etc) destination address and port TOS and precedence (fields in the IP
header) and length The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between
interactive and bulk traffic Interactive applications eg Telnet tend to have
short packets while bulk traffic eg file transfer tends to have large packets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
71
The actions that can be taken include routing the packet to a different gateway
(and hence the outgoing interface) and the TOS and precedence fields in the
IP header IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of ZyNOS in style
and in implementation The policies are divided into sets where related
policies are grouped together A use defines the policies before applying them
to an interface or a remote node in the same fashion as the filters There are
12 policy sets with 6 policies in each set
Setup the IP Policy Routing
Setp 1 Set the index of IP routing policy set rule by command bdquoip
policyrouting set index [set] [rule]‟ Suppose set=1 rule=1 in this
example
Step 2 Suppose we‟d like to edit the rule like this
Policy Set Name=Test
Active= Yes
Criteria
IP Protocol = 6
Type of Service= Dont Care Packet length= 0
Precedence = Dont Care Len Comp= NA
Source
addr start= 19216812 end= 192168120
port start= 0 end= NA
Destination
addr start= 0000 end= NA
port start= 80 end= 80
Action= Matched
Gateway addr = 1921681254 Log= No
Type of Service= No Change
Precedence = No Change
This policy example forces the Web packets originated from the clients with IP
addresses from 19216812 to 192168120 be routed to the remote LAN via
the gateway 1921681254
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
ip policyrouting set name Test
(Set the name as Test of IP routing policy rule )
ip policyrouting set active yes
(Enable the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria protocol 6
(Set the protocol ID as 6(TCP) for the rule)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
72
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the criteria type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria packetlength 0
(Set the packet length as 0 for the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcip 19216812 192168120
(Set the source IP address for the rule Start=19216812 end=192168120)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcport 0
(Set the source port for the rule Start=0)
ip policyrouting set criteria destip 0000
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=0000)
ip policyrouting set criteria destport 80 80
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=80 end=80)
ip policyrouting set action actmatched
(Set the action for the rule Matched)
ip policyrouting set action gatewaytype 0
(Set gateway type for the rule Gateway Address)
ip policyrouting set action gatewayaddr 1921681254
(Set the gateway address for the rule 1921681254)
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the action type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the action precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set action log no
(Set log option for the rule no log)
ip polictrouting set save
(Save the rule)
Step 3 Apply the IP policy routing There are two interfaces to apply the policy
set they are the LAN interface and WAN interface It depends where the
gateway specified in the policy rule is located If the gateway you specified is
located on the local LAN you apply the policy set in LAN interface If the
gateway you specified is located on the remote WAN site you apply the policy
set in WAN interface
Apply to WAN Interface (Suppose we apply it to remote node 1 in the
example)
wan node index 1
wan node ippolicy 1
11 Using Call Scheduling
What is Call Scheduling
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
73
Call scheduling enables the mechanism for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to run the
remote node connection according to the pre-defined schedule This feature is
just like the scheduler in a video recorder which records the program according
to the specified time Users can apply at most 4 schedule sets in Remote Node
The remote node configured with the schedule set could be Forced On
Forced Down Enable Dial-On-Demand or Disable Dial-On-Demand on
specified date and time
How to configure a Call Scheduling
You can configure a call scheduling in CLI
Suppose we want to edit a call schedule set like this
Call Schedule Set =1
Set name=Test
Active= Yes
Start Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 - 12 - 27
How Often= Once
Once
Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 -12 -27
Start Time(hhmm)= 12 00
Duration(hhmm)= 16 00
Action= Enable Dial-on-demand
This schedule example permits a demand call on the line on 1200 am
2005-12-27 The maximum length of time this connection is allowed is 16
hours
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
wan callsch index 1
(Set call schedule index = 1 You must apply this command first before you
begin to configure call schedule)
wan callsch name Test
(Set the schedule name as Test)
wan callsch active Yes
(Enable schedule)
wan callsch startdate 2005 12 27
(Set schedule start date as 2005-12-27)
wan callsch oncedate 2005 12 27
(Set the schedule used just once it works on 2005-12-27)
wan callsch starttime 12 00
(Set the schedule start time as 1200)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
74
wan callsch duration 16 00
(Set schedule duration time as 16 hours)
wan callsch action 2
(Set action as dial-on-demand)
wan callsch save
(Save the current call schedule set)
Key Settings
Start Date
Start date of this schedule rule It can be unmatched with weekday
setting For example if Start Date is 20001002(Monday) but Monday
setting in weekday can be No
Forced On The node will always keep up during the setting period It is equivalent
to diable the idel timeout
Forced Down The node will always keep doen during the setting period The
connected remote node will be dropped
Enable
Dial-On-Demand The remote node accepts Dial-on-demand during this period
Disable
Dial-On-Demand
The remote node denies any demand dial during the period For the
existing connected nodes it will be dropped after idle timeout and no
triggered up
Start Time
Duration Start Time and Duration of this schedule
Apply the schedule to the Remote node
Multiple scheduling rules can program in a Remote node and they have
priority For example if we program the sets as 1234 in remote node then
the set 1 will override set 234 set 2 will override 34 and so on
We can apply the schedule to the remote node in CLI by the commands
wan node index []index]
wan node callsch [index]
wan node save
For example if we want to apply the call schedule set 1 to remote node 1 we
could use the commands
wan node index 1
wan node callsch 1
wan node save
Time Service in P-660HW-Dx v2
There is no RTC (Real-Time Clock) chip so the P-660HW-Dx v2 should launch
a mechanism to get current time and date from external server in boot time
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
75
Time service is implemented by the Daytime protocol(RFC-867) Time
protocol(RFC-868) and NTP protocol(RFC-1305) You have to assign an IP
address of a time server and then the P-660HW-Dx v2 will get the date time
and time-zone information from this server You can configure it in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt System -gt Time Setting
12 Using IP Multicast
What is IP Multicast
Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in two ways - unicast or broadcast
Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts Host groups
are identified by class D IP addresses ie those with 1110 as their
higher-order bits In dotted decimal notation host group addresses range from
224000 to 239255255255 Among them 224001 is assigned to the
permanent IP hosts group and 224002 is assigned to the multicast routers
group
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is the protocol used to support
multicast groups The latest version is version 2 (see RFC2236) IP hosts use
IGMP to report their multicast group membership to any immediate-neighbor
multicast routers so the multicast routers can decide if a multicast packet
needs to be forwarded At start up the P-660HW-Dx v2 queries all directly
connected networks to gather group membership
After that the P-660HW-Dx v2 updates the information by periodic queries
The P-660HW-Dx v2 implementation of IGMP is also compatible with version 1
The multicast setting can be turned on or off on Ethernet and remote nodes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
76
IP Multicast Setup
(1) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt LAN -gt IP -gt Advanced Setup
(2) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s remote node in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt Multicast
Key Settings
Multicast IGMP-v1 for IGMP version 1 IGMP-v2 for IGMP version 2
13 Using Bandwidth Management
Why Bandwidth Management (BWM)
Nowadays we have many different traffic types for Internet applications Some
traffic may consume high bandwidth such as FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
Some other traffic may not require high bandwidth but they require stable
supply of bandwidth such as VoIP traffic The VoIP quality would not be good
if all of the outgoing bandwidth is occupied via FTP Additionally chances are
that you would like to grant higher bandwidth for somebody special who is
using specific IP address in your network All of these are reasons why we
need bandwidth management
Using BWM
Setp 1 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gtSummary activate bandwidth management on the interface you
would like to manage We enable the BWM function on WAN interface in this
example
Enter the total speed for this interface that you want to allocate using
bandwidth management This appears as the bandwidth budget of the
interface‟s root class
Select how you want the bandwidth to be allocated Priority-Based means
bandwidth is allocated via priority so the traffic with highest priority would be
served first then the second priority is served secondly and so on If
Fairness-Based is chosen then the bandwidth is allocated by ratio Which
means if A class needs 300 kbps B class needs 600 kbps then the ratio of A
and Bs actual bandwidth is 12 So if we get 450 kbps in total then A would
get 150 kbps B would get 300 kbps We select Priority-Based in this
example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
77
Key Settings
Active
Check the box to enable BWM on the interface Note that if you would like
to manage traffic from WAN to LAN you should apply BWM on LAN
interface If you would like to management traffic from WAN to DMZ
please apply BWM on DMZ interface
Speed Enter the total speed to manage on this interface This value is the budget
of the class trees root
Scheduler
Choose the principle to allocate bandwidth on this interface
Priority-Based allocates bandwidth via priority Fairness-Based allocates
bandwidth by ratio
Maximize
Bandwidth
Usage
Check this box if you would like to give residuary bandwidth from Interface
to the classes who need more bandwidth than configured amount Do not
select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a
bandwidth class or you want to limit the bandwidth of each class at the
configured value (Please note that to meat the second condition you
should also disable Use All Managed Bandwidth in the BWM rule)
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Rule Setup select the interface Service Priority and Allocated
Bandwidth for this rule then click button bdquoAdd‟ to apply this rule
Step 3 You can modify the rule by clicking the button lsquoEditrsquo on the rule
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
78
Key Settings
RuleName Give this rule a name for example WWW
BW Budget Configure the bandwidth you would like to allocate to this rule
Priority Enter a number between 0 and 7 to set the priority of this class The
higher the number the higher the priority The default setting is 3
Use All
Managed
Bandwidth
Check this box if you would like to let this class to borrow bandwidth from
its parents when the required bandwidth is higher than the configured
amount Do not check this if you want to limit the bandwidth of this class
at the configured value(Please note that you should also disable
Maximize Bandwidth Usage on the interface to meet the condition)
Service Select User-defined SIP FTP or H323 to specify the traffic types
Destination
IP Address Enter the IP address of destination that meets this class
Destination
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
Destination
Port Enter the destination port number of the traffic
Source IP
Address
Enter the IP address of source that meats this class Note that for traffic
from LAN to WAN since BWM is before NAT you should use the IP
address before NAT processing
Source
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
79
Source Port Enter the source port number of the traffic
Protocol ID Enter the protocol number for the traffic 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP or 17 for
UDP
After configuration BWM you can check current bandwidth of the configured
traffic in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Monitor
14 Using Zero-Configuration
Zero-Configuration and VC auto-hunting
Zero-Configure feature can help customer to reduce the burden of setting
efforts Whenever system ADSL links up system will send out some probing
patterns system will analyze the packets returned from ISP and decide which
services the ISP may provide Because ADSL is based on a ATM network so
system have to pre-configured a VPIVCI hunting pool before Auto-Configure
function begins to work
The Zero-Configuration feature can hunt the encapsulation and VPIVCI value
and system will automatically configure itself if the hunting result is
successfully This feature has two constraints
1 It supports the ISP provides one kind of service (PPPoEPPPoA etc)
only otherwise the hunting will get confusing and failed
2 VC auto-hunting only supports dynamic WAN IP address If the router is
set a static WAN IP address VC auto-hunting function will be disabled
The entry of hunting pool must also contain the VPI VCI and which kinds of
hunting patterns you wish to send Whenever system send out all the probing
patterns with specific VPIVCI system will wait for 5~10 seconds and get the
response from ISP the response patterns will decide which kinds of ADSL
services of the line will be After that system will save back the correct VPI
VCI and also services (encapsulation) type into profile of WAN interface
Configure the VC auto-hunting preconfigured table
(1) Display auto-haunting preconfigured table by using command from CLI
wan atm vchunt display
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
80
(2) Add items to the auto-haunting preconfigured table by using commands
wan atm vchunt add ltremoteNodeIndexgt ltvpigt ltvcigt ltservice
bit(hex)gt
wan atm vchunt save
Note ltremote nodegt input the remote node index 1-8
ltvpigt vpi value
ltvcigt vci value
ltservicegt it‟s a hex value bit0PPPoEVC (1) bit1PPPoELLC (2)
bit2PPPoAVC (4) bit3PPPoALLC (8) bit4EnetVC (16) bit5 EnetLLC (32)
For example
(1) If you need service PPPoELLC and EnetLLC then the service bits will be
2+32 = 34 (decimal) = 22 (hex) you must input 22
(2) If you want to enable all service for VC hunting the service bits will be
1+2+4+8+16+32=63(decimal)= 3f (hex) you must input 3f
Need to perform save after this by command bdquowan atm vchunt save‟
(3) Delete items from the auto-haunting preconfigured table by useing
command
wan atm vchunt remove ltremote nodegt ltvpigt ltvcigt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
81
Using Zero configuration
You can enabledisable Zero Configuration in Network -gt WAN -gt Advanced
Setup
(1) After configure the auto-haunting preconfigured table You just need a PC
connected to the device LAN Ethernet port with the DSL sync up
(2) Open your web browser to access a Web site It should prompt and request
for your username password of your ISP account if your ISP provide PPPoE
or PPPoA service
(3) After key-in the correct info it will than test the connection If it is
successful it will than close the browser and you can open a new browser to
surf the Internet If the connection test fail it will go back to the page ask for
user name and password
(4) Basically the zero configuration only work on the VC that was preconigured
in the auto-haunting preconfigured table
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2
The common triple play scenario is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
82
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus we could assign different parameters to the PVC (CBR
UBR VBR-RT VBR-nRT) to guarantee different applications
We could configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 via CLI The command is
sys tripleplay set portbase ltEportIDgt ltPVCIDgt
For example sys tripleplay portbase set 1 1
sys tripleplay portbase set 2 2
sys tripleplay portbase set 3 3
The traffic from Ethernet port 1 must be forwarded to PVC1 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet port 2 must be forwarded to PVC2 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet Port3 must be forwarded to PVC3 vice versa
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to configure up to twelve filter sets with six
rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system You can apply up to
four filter sets to a particular port to block multiple types of packets With each
filter set having up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for
a single port
The packet filter function on P-660HW-Dx v2 is the same as before just that
you could only configure the filter set and apply them by command in CLI It‟s
very complex for common users to do it So here‟s the recommendation
(1) Usually if you want to block special packets you could edit a firewall rule in
Web Configurator
032
VOIP Server
IPTV Server
Internet
Server
Others
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
ATUR IP-DSLAM VL-Switch
CPE Access Network ISP
034
055
VOIP Telephone
Video Client
Clients surfing
Internet
Other clients
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
PVC1
PVC2
PVC3
PVC4 132
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
83
(2) By factory default ZyXEL has preconfigured many filter sets for your
reference you can check them by command
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Usage set 1~12 rule 1~6 Commonly the preconfigured filter sets are as
follows ltset 2 rule 1~6gt ltset 3 rule 1gt ltset 4 rule 1gt
sys filter set display
For example
This could satisfy mostly requirement You could select any of them to apply to
the WAN node or LAN Interface on demand The command is as follows
Apply to WAN node
wan node index ltnodegt
Usage node= 1~8 corresponding to the remote node 1~8
wan node filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt
ltset3gt ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to one remote node
wan node save
Apply to LAN Interface
lan index [index]
Usage index=1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
84
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt ltset3gt
ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to LAN Interface
lan save
(3) If you are very advanced user you could edit filter set by the following
command
sys filter set [set] [rule]
Usage Set up a filter set index to edit a set
set 1~12
rule 1~6
sys filter set type [typeID]
Usage typeID tcpip or generic
Note In one filter set you should configure all the rules in one type either
tcpip or generic
sys filter set enable
Usage Enable(active) the rule
sys filter set helliphellip(You could configure a filter rule on demand the newest
command is available on release note)
sys filter set save
Usage Don‟t forget to save the rule everytime you‟ve configured it
Reference Commands
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Set the index of filter set rule you must apply this
command first before you begin to configure the
filter rules
sys filter set name [set name] Set the name of filter set
sys filter set type [tcpip | generic] Set the type of filter rule
sys filter set enable Enable the rule
sys filter set disable Disable the rule
sys filter set protocol [protocol ] Set the protocol ID of the rule
sys filter set sourceroute [yes|no] Set the sourceroute yesno
sys filter set destip [address] [subnet
mask]
Set the destination IP address and subnet mask of
the rule
sys filter set destport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|notequal|less|greater]
Set the destination port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set srcip [address] [subnet
mask] Set the source IP address and subnet mask
sys filter set srcport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|not
Set the source port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
85
equal|less|greater] equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set tcpEstab [yes|no] Set TCP establish option
sys filter set more [yes|no] Set the more option to yesno
sys filter set log [type 0-3= none | match|
notmatch | both ]
Set the log type (it could be 0-3 =none match not
match both)
sys filter set actmatch[type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for match
sys filter set actnomatch [type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for not match
sys filter set offset [] Set offset for the generic rule
sys filter set length [] Set the length for generic rule
sys filter set mask [] Set the mask for generic rule
sys filter set value [(depend on length in
hex)] Set the value for generic rule
sys filter set clear Clear the current filter set
sys filter set save Save the filter set parameters
sys filter set display [set][rule] Display Filter set information Wo parameter it will
display buffer information
sys filter set freememory Discard Changes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
86
Wireless Application Notes
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode
Ad hoc Introduction
What is Ad Hoc mode
Ad hoc mode is a wireless network consists of a number of stations without
access points Without using an access point or any connection to a wired
network a client unit in Ad hoc operation mode can communicate directly to
other client units just as using a cross over Ethernet cable connecting 2 hosts
together via a NIC card for direct connection when configured in Ad hoc mode
without an access point being present Ad hoc operation is ideal for small
networks of no more than 2-4 computers Larger networks would require the
use of one or perhaps several access points
Configuration for Wireless Station A
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
87
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
88
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Configuration for Wireless Station B
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
89
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
90
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Step 7 Station A now are able to connect to Station B
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure Introduction
For Infrastructure WLANs multiple Access Points (APs) like the WLAN to the
wired network and allow users to efficiently share network resources The
Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also
mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
91
Configure Wireless Access Point to Infrastructure mode using Web
configurator
To configure Infrastructure mode of your P-660HW-Dx v2 wireless AP please
follow the steps below
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gt General Configure the basic parameters for Wireless LAN
Step 2 You could click the button bdquoAdvanced Setup‟ for more detailed
configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
92
Configuration Wireless Station to Infrastructure mode
To configure Infrastructure mode on your ZyAIR G-200 Wireless Network
Adapter please follow the following steps
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
93
Step 3 Select Infrastructure from the operation mode pull down menu fill in an
SSID or leave it as any if you wish to connect to any AP than press Apply
Change to take effect
Step 4 Click on Site Survey tab and press search all the available AP will be
listed
Step 5 Double click on the AP you want to associated with
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
94
Step 6 After the client have associated with the selected AP The linked APs
channel current linkup rate SSID link quality and signal strength will show on
the Link Info page You now successfully associate with the selected AP with
Infrastructure Mode
3 MAC Filter
MAC Filter Overview
Users can use MAC Filter as a method to restrict unauthorized stations from
accessing the APs ZyXELs APs provide the capability for checking MAC
address of the station before allowing it to connect to the network This
provides an additional layer of control layer in that only stations with registered
MAC addresses can connect This approach requires that the list of MAC
addresses be configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
95
ZyXEL MAC Filter Implementation
ZyXELs MAC Filter Implementation allows users to define a list to allow or
block association from STAs The filter set allows users to input 12 entries in
the list If Allow Association is selected all other STAs which are not on the list
will be denied Otherwise if Deny Association is selected all other STAs which
are not on the list will be allowed for association Users can choose either way
to configure their filter rule
Configure the WLAN MAC Filter
The MAC Filter related settings in ZyXEL APs are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gtMAC Filter
Before you configure the MAC filter you need to know the MAC address of the
client first If not knowing what your MAC address is please enter a command
ipconfig all after DOS prompt to get the MAC (physical) address of your
wireless client
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gtMAC Filter active MAC Filter
Step 2 Enter the MAC Addresses of wireless cards in the filter set to allow or
deny association from these cards
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Filter Action
Allow or block association from MAC addresses contained in this list If Allow
Association is selected in this field hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list
will be allowed to associate with AP If Deny Association is selected in this field
hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list will be blocked
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
96
MAC Address This field specifies those MAC Addresses that you want to add in the list
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
Introduction
The 80211 standard describes the communication that occurs in wireless
LANs
The Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm is used to protect wireless
communication from eavesdropping because wireless transmissions are
easier to intercept than transmissions over wired networks and wireless is a
shared medium everything that is transmitted or received over a wireless
network can be intercepted
WEP relies on a secret key that is shared between a mobile station (eg a
laptop with a wireless Ethernet card) and an access point (ie a base station)
The secret key is used to encrypt packets before they are transmitted and an
integrity check is used to ensure that packages are not modified during the
transition The standard does not discuss how the shared key is established In
practice most installations use a single key that is shared between all mobile
stations and access points APs You can refer to the User Guide for more
detailed information about it
Setting up the Access Point
You can set up the Access Point from Web configurator Advanced Setup
Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General (You can also configure it via CLI)
Step 1 Select bdquoStatic WEP‟ from the pull down menu bdquoSecurity Mode‟ in Web
Configurator
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
97
Step 2 Set up WEP Key in the Web Configurator You need to set the one of
the following parameters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 5 characters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 10 hexadecimal digits
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 13 characters
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 26 hexadecimal digits
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 29 characters
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 58 hexadecimal digits
There are two ways you can configure the WEP Key
(1) You can put in a special WEP key in the bdquoWEP Key‟ menu directly
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
98
(2) You can also put in an arbitrary sequence of characters in the
bdquoPassphrase‟ and then press button bdquoGenerate‟ to let the P-660HW-Dx v2
generate WEP Key for you
Setting up the Station
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar or right click
the utility icon then select Show Config Utility
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
99
The utility will pop up on your windows screen
Note If the utility icon doesnt exist in your task bar click Start -gt
Programs -gt helliphellip to start the utility
Step 2 Select the Configuration tab
Select bdquoSet Security‟ to configure encryption type and parameters
correspond with access point
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
100
Note You should select Key 1 as default Transmit Key since the P-660HW-Dx
v2 is supposed to use Key 1 by default
Key settings
The WEP Encryption type of station has to equal to the access point
Check ASCII field for characters WEP key or uncheck ASCII field for
Hexadecimal digits WEP key
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
101
Hexadecimal digits dont need to precede by 0x
For example
64-bits with characters WEP key Key1= 2e3f4
64-bits with hexadecimal digits WEP key Key1= 123456789A
5 Site Survey
Introduction
What is Site Survey
An RF site survey is a MAP to RF contour of RF coverage in a particular
facility With wireless system it is very difficult to predict the propagation of
radio waves and detect the presence of interfering signals Walls doors
elevator shafts and other obstacles offer different degree of attenuation This
will cause the RF coverage pattern be irregular and hard to predict
Site survey can help us overcome these problem and even provide us a map
of RF coverage of the facility
Preparation
Below are the steps to complete a simple site survey with simple tools
1 First you will need to obtain a facility diagram such as blueprints This is
for you to mark and take record on
2 Visually inspect the facility walk through the facility to verify the accuracy of
the diagram and mark down any large obstacle you see that may effect the RF
signal such as metal shelf metal desk etc on the diagram
3 Identify users area when doing so ask a question where is wireless
coverage needed and where does not and note and take note on the diagram
this is information is needed to determine the number of AP required
4 Determine the preliminary access point location on the facility diagram base
on the service area needed obstacles power wall jack considerations
Survey on Site
Step 1 With the diagram with all information you gathered in the preparation
phase Now you are ready to make the survey
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
102
Step 2 Install an access point at the preliminary location
Step 3 Use a notebook with wireless client installed and run its utility An utility
will provide information such as connection speed current used channel
associated rate link quality signal strength and etc information as shown in
utility below
Step 4 Its always a good idea to start with putting the access point at the
corner of the room and walk away from the access point in a systematic
manner Record the changes at point where transfer rate drop and the link
quality and signal strength information on the diagram as you go alone
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
103
Step 5 When you reach the farthest point of connection mark the spot Now
you move the access point to this new spot as have already determine the
farthest point of the access point installation spot if wireless service is required
from corner of the room
Step 6 Repeat step 1~5 and now you should be able to mark an RF coverage
area as illustrated in above picutre
Step 7 You may need more than one access point is the RF coverage area
hasn‟t covered all the wireless service area you needed
Step 8 Repeat step 1~6 of survey on site as necessary upon completion you
will have a diagram and information of site survey As illustrated below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
104
Note If there are more than one access point is needed be sure to make the
adjacent access point service area over lap one another So the wireless
station is able to roam For more information please refer to roaming at
6 Configure 8021x and WPA
What is the WPA Functionality
Configuration for Access Point
Configuration for your PC
What is WPA Functionality
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
105
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN
Here comes WPA-PSK Application example for your reference
Configuration for Access point
The IEEE 8021x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the
authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management
Authentication can be done using local user database internal to the
P-660HW-Dx v2 (authenticate up to 32 users) or an external RADIUS server
for an unlimited number of users
Step 1 To change your P-660HW-Dx v2s authentication settings login Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General
-gtSecurity
Step 2 Select lsquoSecurity Mode‟ as WAP-PSK
Step 3 Type the Pre Shared Key in the Pre-Shared Key field
Step 4 Click Apply to finish
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
106
Configuration for your PC
Step 1 Double click on your wireless utility icon in your windows task bar the
utility will pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select the configuration tab type in the SSID (Service Set Identifier)
select the operating Mode as Infrastructure and select proper channel
Step 3 Click Set Security to configure the security parameters
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
107
Step 4 Click OK for finish and begin to Site survey Connect to the AP as you
have configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
108
Step 5 Click Link Info tab if the PC associated and authenticated with AP
successfully we will see the following information
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
109
Support Tool
1 LANWAN Packet Trace
The Prestige packet trace records and analyzes packets running on LAN and
WAN interfaces It is designed for users with technical backgrounds who are
interested in the details of the packet flow on LAN or WAN end of Prestige It is
also very helpful for diagnostics if you have compatibility problems with your
ISP or if you want to know the details of a packet for configuring a filter rule
The format of the display is as following
Packet
[index] [timersecond][channel-receivetransmit][length] [protocol]
[sourceIPport] [destIPport]
There are two ways to dump the trace
Online Trace--display the trace real time on screen
Offline Trace--capture the trace first and display later
The details for capturing the trace in CLI as follows
First of all you need to telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 firstly The password is
Administrator passwords bdquoadmin‟ by default
Online Trace
(1) Trace LAN packet
Disable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
none
Enable to capture the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
110
(2) Trace WAN packet
Disable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
none
Enable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
111
Offline Trace
Disable the capture of the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel
mpoa00 none
Enable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Wait for packet passing through the Prestige over LAN
Disable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw off amp sys trcl sw off
Display the trace briefly by entering sys trcp brief
Display specific packets by using sys trcp parse ltfrom_indexgt ltto_indexgt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
112
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal
Step 1 Initiate a hyper terminal connection from your PC(suppose you
connected to the LAN port of P-660HW-Dx v2)
Step 2 Click the bdquoproperties‟ to configure parameters to telnet to the
P-660HW-Dx v2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
113
Step 3 So that after you invoke the relevant commands you could save the
logs you‟ve captured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
114
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP
Using TFTP client software
Uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Uploaddownload Prestige configurations via LAN
(1) Using TFTP to uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout
in Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 Enter the IP address of the Prestige
Step 5To upload the firmware please save the remote file as ras to
Prestige After the transfer is complete the Prestige will program the upgraded
firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
115
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige The local file is the source
file of the ZyNOS firmware that is available in your hard disk The remote file is
the file name that will be saved in Prestige Check the port number 69 and
512-Octet blocks for TFTP Check Binary mode for file transfering
(2) Using TFTP to uploaddownload SMT configurations via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 To download the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please get the
remote file rom-0 from the Prestige
Step 5 To upload the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please save the
remote file as rom-0 in the Prestige
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
116
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige
The local file is the source file of your configuration file that is available
in your hard disk
The remote file is the file name that will be saved in Prestige
Check the port number 69 and 512-Octet blocks for TFTP
Check Binary mode for file transfering
Using TFTP command on Windows NT
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Download ZyNOS via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] get ras [localfile]
Step 4 Upload P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] put
[localfile] rom-0
Step 5 Download P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP]
get rom-0 [localfile]
Using TFTP command on UNIX
Before you begin
1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Example
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ telnet 19216811
Trying 19216811
Connected to 19216811
Escape character is ^]
Password
rasgt sys stdio 0
(Open a new window)
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get rom-0 [local-rom] lt- change to binary mode
lt- download configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-rom] rom-0 lt- upload configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get ras [local-ras ] lt- download firmware
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-ras] ras lt- upload firmware
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
117
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files
In addition to upload the firmware and configuration file via the console port
and TFTP client you can also upload the firmware and configuration files to
the Prestige using FTP
To use this feature your workstation must have a FTP client software See the
example shown below
Using FTP client software
Note The remote file name for the firmware is ras and the configuration file is
rom-0
Step 1 Use FTP client from your workstation to connect to the Prestige by
entering the IP address of the Prestige
Step2 Press Enter key to ignore the username because the Prestige does
not check the username
Step 3 Enter the CLI password as the FTP login password the default is
admin
Step 4 Enter command bin to set the transfer type to binary
Step 5 Use put command to transfer the file to the Prestige
Example
Step 1 Connect to the Prestige by entering the Prestiges IP and Administrator
password in the FTP software Set the transfer type to Auto-Detect or
Binary
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
118
Step 2 Press OK to ignore the Username prompt
Step 3 To upload the firmware file we transfer the local ras file to overwrite
the remote ras file
To upload the configuration file we transfer the local rom-0 to overwrite
the remote rom-0 file
Step 4 The Prestige reboots automatically after the uploading is finished
Please do not power off the router at this moment
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
119
CI Command Reference
Command Syntax and General User Interface
CI has the following command syntax
command ltiface | device gt subcommand [param]
command subcommand [param]
command | help
command subcommand | help
General user interface
1 Shows the following commands and all major (sub)commands
2 exit Exit Subcommand
To get the latest CI Command list
The latest CI Command list is available in release note of every ZyXEL
firmware release Please goto ZyXEL public WEB site
httpwwwzyxelcomsupportdownload_indexphp to download firmware
package (zip) you should unzip the package to get the release note in PDF
format
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
6
a Use the TELNET client program in your PC to login to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
b Enter CI command sys stdio 0 to disable Stdio idle timeout
c To upgrade firmware use TFTP client program to put firmware in file
ras in the Prestige After data transfer is finished the P-660HW-Dx v2
will program the upgraded firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
d To backup your firmware use the TFTP client program to get file ras
from the Prestige
6 How do I restore P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations by using TFTP client
program via LAN
a Use the TELNET client program in your PC to login to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
b Enter CI command sys stdio 0 disable Stdio idle timeout
c To backup the P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations use TFTP client
program to get file rom-0 from the P-660HW-Dx v2
d To restore the P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations use the TFTP client
program to put your configuration in file rom-0 in the P-660HW-Dx v2
7 What should I do if I forget the system password
In case you forget the system password you can erase the current
configuration and restore factory defaults this way
Use the RESET button on the rear panel of P-660HW-Dx v2 to reset the
router After the router is reset the LAN IP address will be reset to
19216811 the common user password will be reset to user the
Administrator password will be reset to bdquo1234rsquo
8 How to use the Reset button
a Turn your P-660HW-Dx v2 on Make sure the Power LED is on (not
blinking)
b Press the RESET button for longer than one second and shorter than
five seconds and release it If the Power LED begins to blink the
P-660HW-Dx v2‟s wireless auto security function-OTIST has been
enabled
c Press the RESET button for six seconds and then release it If the
Power LED begins to blink the default configuration has been restored
and the P-660HW-Dx v2 restarts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
7
9 What is SUA When should I use SUA
SUA (Single User Account) is a unique feature supported by Prestige router
which allows multiple people to access Internet concurrently for the cost of a
single user account
When Prestige acting as SUA receives a packet from a local client destined for
the outside Internet it replaces the source address in the IP packet header
with its own address and the source port in the TCP or UDP header with
another value chosen out of a local pool It then recomputes the appropriate
header checksums and forwards the packet to the Internet as if it is originated
from Prestige using the IP address assigned by ISP When reply packets from
the external Internet are received by Prestige the original IP source address
and TCPUDP source port numbers are written into the destination fields of the
packet (since it is now moving in the opposite direction) the checksums are
recomputed and the packet is delivered to its true destination This is because
SUA keeps a table of the IP addresses and port numbers of the local systems
currently using it
10 What is the difference between SUA and Full Feature NAT
When you edit a remote node in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt Remote Node -gt Edit there will be three options for you
None
SUA Only
Full Feature
SUA (Single User Account) in previous ZyNOS versions is a NAT set with 2
rules Many-to-One and Server With SUA visible servers had to be mapped
to different ports since the servers share only one global IP
The P-660HW-Dx v2 now has Full Feature NAT which supports five types of
IPPort mapping One to One Many to One Many to Many Overload Many to
Many No Overload and Server You can make special application when you
select Full Feature NAT For example With multiple global IP addresses
multiple severs using the same port (eg FTP servers using port 2120) are
allowed on the LAN for outside access
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports NAT sets on a remote node basis They are
reusable but only one set is allowed for each remote node The P-660HW-Dx
v2 supports 8 sets since there are 8 remote nodes
By fatory default the NAT is select as SUA in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt General -gt NAT Setup
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
8
11 Is it possible to access a server running behind SUA from the outside
Internet How can I do it
Yes it is possible because P-660HW-Dx v2 delivers the packet to the local
server by looking up to a SUA server table Therefore to make a local server
accessible to the outside users the port number and the inside IP address of
the server must be configured (You can configure it in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding)
12 When do I need select Full Feature NAT
Make multiple local servers on the LAN accessible from outside with
multiple global IP addresses
With SUA visible servers had to be mapped to different ports since the
servers share only one global IP But when you select Full Feature you can
make multiple local servers (mapping the same port or not) on the LAN
accessible from outside with multiple global IP addresses
Support Non-NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some MIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address Thus users on the same
network can not login to the same server simultaneously In this case it is
better to use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types
thus each user login to the server using a unique global IP address
13 What IPPort mapping does Multi-NAT support
Multi-NAT supports five types of IPport mapping One to One Many to One
Many to Many Overload Many to Many No Overload and Server The details
of the mapping between ILA and IGA are described as below Here we define
the local IP addresses as the Internal Local Addresses (ILA) and the global IP
addresses as the Inside Global Address (IGA)
One to One In One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps one ILA
to one IGA
Many to One In Many-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps
multiple ILA to one IGA This is equivalent to SUA (ie PAT port
address translation) ZyXELs Single User Account feature that previous
ZyNOS routers supported (the SUA is optional in todays Prestige
routers)
Many to Many Overload In Many-to-Many Overload mode the
P-660HW-Dx v2 maps the multiple ILA to shared IGA
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
9
Many One-to-One In Many One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2
maps each ILA to unique IGA
Server In Server mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps multiple inside
servers to one global IP address This allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types behind the NAT for outside access Note if
you want to map each server to one unique IGA please use the
One-to-One mode
The following table summarizes the five types
NAT Type IP Mapping
One-to-One ILA1lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-One
(SUAPAT)
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-Many
Overload
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA1
ILA4lt---gtIGA2
Many
One-to-One
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA3
ILA4lt---gtIGA4
Server Server 1 IPlt---gtIGA1
Server 2 IPlt---gtIGA1
14 How many network users can the SUANAT support
The Prestige does not limit the number of the users but the number of the
sessions The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports 2048 sessions that you can use the
ip nat session command in CLI to see You can also use bdquoip nat hashTable
wanif0‟ to view the current active NAT sessions
15 What are Device filters and Protocol filters
In ZyNOS the filters have been separated into two groups One group is
called device filter group and the other is called protocol filter
group Generic filters belong to the device filter group TCPIP and IPX filters
belong to the protocol filter group You can configure the filter rule in CLI
Note In ZyNOS you can not mix different filter groups in the same filter set
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
10
16 How can I protect against IP spoofing attacks
The P-660HW-Dx v2s filter sets provide a means to protect against IP
spoofing attacks The basic scheme is as follows
For the input data filter
Deny packets from the outside that claim to be from the inside
Allow everything that is not spoofing us
Filter rule setup
Filter type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Source IP Addr =abcd
Source IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action Not Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
For the output data filters
Deny bounce back packet
Allow packets that originate from us
Filter rule setup
Filter Type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Destination IP Addr =abcd
Destination IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action No Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
11
Product FAQ
1 How can I manage P-660HW-Dx v2
Multilingual Embedded Web GUI for Local and Remote management
CLI (Command-line interface)
Telnet support (Administrator Password Protected ) for remote
configuration change and status monitoring
FTP TFTP sever firmware upgrade and configuration backup and
restore are supported(Administrator Password Protected)
2 What is the default password for Web Configurator
There are two different accounts for P-660HW-Dx v2 Web Configurator
Common User Account and Administrator Account
By factory default the password for the two accounts are
Common User Account user
Administrator Account 1234
You can change the password after you logging in the Web Configurator
Please record your new password whenever you change it The system
will lock you out if you have forgotten your password
3 Whatrsquos the difference between lsquoCommon User Accountrsquo and
lsquoAdministrator Accountrsquo
For Common User Account it can only access the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 and check the current system status
For Administrator Account besides accessing the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 it can also access Winzard setup Advanced setup of
P-660HW-Dx v2
Moreover only with Administrator Password you could manage the
P-660HW-Dx v2 via FTPTFTP or Telnet
4 How do I know the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address assigned by the
ISP
You can view My WAN IP ltfrom ISPgt xxxx shown in Web Configurator
bdquoStatus-gtDevice Information -gtWAN Information‟ to check this IP address
5 What is the micro filter or splitter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
12
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
6 The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Bridge and Router mode whats the
difference between them
When the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet which means
only the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use bridge mode which works as an ADSL modem to
connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account and limit
only one computer to access the Internet
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to add another Internet sharing device
like a router In this case we use the router mode which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
7 How do I know I am using PPPoE
PPPoE requires a user account to login to the providers server If you need to
configure a user name and password on your computer to connect to the ISP
you are probably using PPPoE If you are simply connected to the Internet
when you turn on your computer you probably are not You can also check
your ISP or the information sheet given by the ISP Please choose PPPoE as
the encapsulation type in the P-660HW-Dx v2 if the ISP uses PPPoE
8 Why does my provider use PPPoE
PPPoE emulates a familiar Dial-Up connection It allows your ISP to provide
services using their existing network configuration over the broadband
connections Besides PPPoE supports a broad range of existing applications
and service including authentication accounting secure access and
configuration management
9 What is DDNS
The Dynamic DNS service allows you to alias a dynamic IP address to a static
hostname allowing your computer to be more easily accessed from various
locations on the Internet To use the service you must first apply an account
from several free Web servers such as httpwwwdyndnsorg
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to reach our internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
13
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
updates this IP to DDNS server so that the server can update its IP-to-DNS
entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is updated the DNS
name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still usable
10 When do I need DDNS service
When you want your internal server to be accessed by using DNS name rather
than using the dynamic IP address we can use the DDNS service The DDNS
server allows to alias a dynamic IP address to a static hostname Whenever
the ISP assigns you a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2 sends this IP to the DDNS
server for its updates
11 What is DDNS wildcard Does the P-660HW-Dx v2 support DDNS
wildcard
Some DDNS servers support the wildcard feature which allows the hostname
yourhostdyndnsorg to be aliased to the same IP address as
yourhostdyndnsorg This feature is useful when there are multiple servers
inside and you want users to be able to use things such as
wwwyourhostdyndnsorg and still reach your hostname
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports DDNS wildcard that httpwwwdyndnsorg
supports When using wildcard you simply enter yourhostdyndnsorg in the
Host field in Menu 11 Configure Dynamic DNS
12 Can the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA handle IPSec packets sent by the
IPSec gateway
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA can handle IPSec ESP Tunneling mode We
know when packets go through SUA SUA will change the source IP address
and source port for the host To pass IPSec packets SUA must understand
the ESP packet with protocol number 50 replace the source IP address of the
IPSec gateway to the routers WAN IP address However SUA should not
change the source port of the UDP packets which are used for key
managements Because the remote gateway checks this source port during
connections the port thus is not allowed to be changed
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
14
13 How do I setup my P-660HW-Dx v2 for routing IPSec packets over
SUA
For outgoing IPSec tunnels no extra setting is required
For forwarding the inbound IPSec ESP tunnel A Default server set is required
You could configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding -gt Default Server Setup
It is because SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users So to make an internal server
for outside access we must specify the service port and the LAN IP of this
server in Web configurator Thus SUA is able to forward the incoming packets
to the requested service behind SUA and the outside users access the server
using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address So we have to configure the
internal IPsec client as a default server (unspecified service port) when it acts
a server gateway
14 What is Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping allocates the bandwidth to WAN dynamically and aims at
boosting the efficiency of the bandwidth If there are serveral VCs in the
P-660HW-Dx v2 but only one VC activated at one time the P-660HW-Dx v2
allocates all the Bandwidth to the VC and the VC gets full bandwidth If another
VCs are activated later the bandwidth is yield to other VCs after ward
15 Why do we perform traffic shaping in the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 must manage traffic fairly and provide bandwidth
allocation for different sorts of applications such as voice video and data All
applications have their own natural bit rate Large data transactions have a
fluctuating natural bit rate The P-660HW-Dx v2 is able to support variable
traffic among different virtual connections Certain traffic may be discarded if
the virtual connection experiences congestion Traffic shaping defines a set of
actions taken by the P-660HW-Dx v2 to avoid congestion traffic shaping takes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
15
measures to adapt to unpredictable fluctuations in traffic flows and other
problems among virtual connections
16 What do the parameters (PCR SCR MBS) mean
Traffic shaping parameters (PCR SCR MBS) can be set in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt ATM Setup
Peak Cell Rate(PCR) The maximum bandwidth allocated to this connection
The VC connection throughput is limited by PCR
Sustainable Cell Rate(SCR) The least guaranteed bandwidth of a VC
When there are multi-VCs on the same line the VC throughput is guaranteed
by SCR
Maximum Burst Size(MBS) The amount of cells transmitted through this
VC at the Peak Cell Rate before yielding to other VCs Total bandwidth of the
line is dedicated to single VC if there is only one VC on the line However as
the other VC asking the bandwidth the MBS defines the maximum number of
cells transmitted via this VC with Peak Cell rate before yielding to other VCs
The P-660HW-Dx v2 holds the parameters for shaping the traffic among its
virtual channels If you do not need traffic shaping please set SCR = 0 MBS =
0 and PCR as the maximum value according to the line rate (for example 23
Mbps line rate will result PCR as 5424 cellsec)
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
Constant bit rate(CBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that requires
the user to determine a fixed bandwidth requirement at the time the connection
is set up so that the data can be sent in a steady stream CBR service is often
used when transmitting fixed-rate uncompressed video
Unspecified bit rate(UBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that does
not guarantee any throughput levels and uses only available bandwidth UBR
is often used when transmitting data that can tolerate delays such as e-mail
Variable bit rate(VBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that allows
users to specify a throughput capacity (ie a peak rate) and a sustained rate
but data is not sent evenly You can select VBR for bursty traffic and
bandwidth sharing with other applications It contains two subclasses
Variable bit rate nonreal time (VBR-nRT)
Variable bit rate real time (VBR-RT)
18 What is content filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
16
Internet Content filter allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies
tailored to your needs Content filter gives you the ability to block web sites that
contain key words (that you specify) in the URL You can set a schedule for
when the P-660HW-Dx v2 performs content filtering You can also specify
trusted IP Addresses on LAN for which the P-660HW-Dx v2 will not perform
content filtering You can configure the details about it in Web Configurator
Advanced setup Security -gt Content Filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
17
ADSL FAQ
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems
ADSL provides a dedicated service over a single telephone line cable
modems offer a dedicated service over a shared media While cable modems
have greater downstream bandwidth capabilities (up to 30 Mbps) that
bandwidth is shared among all users on a line and will therefore vary perhaps
dramatically as more users in a neighborhood get online at the same time
Cable modem upstream traffic will in many cases be slower than ADSL either
because the particular cable modem is inherently slower or because of rate
reductions caused by contention for upstream bandwidth slots The big
difference between ADSL and cable modems however is the number of lines
available to each There are no more than 12 million homes passed today that
can support two-way cable modem transmissions and while the figure also
grows steadily it will not catch up with telephone lines for many years
Additionally many of the older cable networks are not capable of offering a
return channel consequently such networks will need significant upgrading
before they can offer high bandwidth services
2 What is the expected throughput
In our test we can get about 16Mbps data rate on 15Kft using the 26AWG
loop The shorter the loop the better the throughput is
3 What is the microfilter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up
You can see the DSL LED Green on the P-660HW-Dx v2s front panel is on
when the ADSL physical layer is up
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL
Depending on the line quality the P-660HW-Dx v2 uses Fall Back and Fall
Forward to automatically adjust the date rate
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
18
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing
Though the LLC-based multiplexing can carry multiple protocols over a single
VC it requires extra header information to identify the protocol being carried
on the virtual circuit (VC) The VC-based multiplexing needs a separate VC for
carrying each protocol but it does not need the extra headers Therefore the
VC-based multiplexing is more efficient
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics
You can use the following CI commands to check the ADSL line
statistics
CIgt wan adsl perfdata
CIgt wan adsl status
CIgt wan adsl linedata far
CIgt wan adsl linedata near
You can also do it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Diagnostic -gt DSL Line -gt DSL Status
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector
The signaling pins on the P-660HW-Dx v2s ADSL connector are pin 3 and pin
4 The middle two pins for a RJ11 cable
9 What is triple play
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
19
More and more TelcoISPs are providing three kinds of services (VoIP Video
and Internet) over one existing ADSL connection
The different services (such as video VoIP and Internet access) require
different Qulity of Service
The high priority is Voice (VoIP) data
The Medium priority is Video (IPTV) data
The low priority is internet access such as ftp etc hellip
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus you can configure each PVC separately to assign different
QoS to different application
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
20
Firewall FAQ
General
1 What is a network firewall
A firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control
policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to
protect a trusted network from an untrusted network The firewall can be
thought of two mechanisms One to block the traffic and the other to permit
traffic
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure
The P-660HW-Dx v2 is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks such as Ping of Death SYN Flood LAND
attack IP Spoofing etc It also uses stateful packet inspection to determine if
an inbound connection is allowed through the firewall to the private LAN The
P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Network Address Translation (NAT) which
translates the private local addresses to one or multiple public addresses This
adds a level of security since the clients on the private LAN are invisible to the
Internet
3 What are the basic types of firewalls
Conceptually there are three types of firewalls
1 Packet Filtering Firewall
2 Application-level Firewall
3 Stateful Inspection Firewall
Packet Filtering Firewalls generally make their decisions based on the header
information in individual packets These headers information include the
source destination addresses and ports of the packets
Application-level Firewalls generally are hosts running proxy servers which
permit no traffic directly between networks and which perform logging and
auditing of traffic passing through them A proxy server is an application
gateway or circuit-level gateway that runs on top of general operating system
such as UNIX or Windows NT It hides valuable data by requiring users to
communicate with secure systems by mean of a proxy A key drawback of this
device is performance
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
21
Stateful Inspection Firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against
defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP
address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the
integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols The flexible
nature of Stateful Inspection firewalls generally provides the best speed and
transparency however they may lack the granular application level access
control or caching that some proxies support
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2
1 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall inspects packets contents and IP
headers It is applicable to all protocols that understands data in the
packet is intended for other layers from network layer up to the
application layer
2 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall performs stateful inspection It takes into
account the state of connections it handles so that for example a
legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request
for that packet and allowed in Conversely an incoming packet
masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be
blocked
3 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall uses session filtering ie smart rules
that enhance the filtering process and control the network session
rather than control individual packets in a session
4 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall is fast It uses a hashing function to
search the matched session cache instead of going through every
individual rule for a packet
5 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall provides email service to notify you for
routine reports and when alerts occur
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet filtering and
NAT built-in
With the spectacular growth of the Internet and online access companies that
do business on the Internet face greater security threats Although packet filter
and NAT restrict access to particular computers and networks however for
the other companies this security may be insufficient because packets filters
typically cannot maintain session state Thus for greater security a firewall is
considered
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a
connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable
a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
22
There are four types of DoS attacks
1 Those that exploits bugs in a TCPIP implementation such as Ping of
Death and Teardrop
2 Those that exploits weaknesses in the TCPIP specification such as
SYN Flood and LAND Attacks
3 Brute-force attacks that flood a network with useless data such as
Smurf attack
4 IP Spoofing
7 What is Ping of Death attack
Ping of Death uses a PING utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the
maximum 65535 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification The oversize
packet is then sent to an unsuspecting system Systems may crash hang or
reboot
8 What is Teardrop attack
Teardrop attack exploits weakness in the reassemble of the IP packet
fragments As data is transmitted through a network IP packets are often
broken up into smaller chunks Each fragment looks like the original packet
except that it contains an offset field The Teardrop program creates a series of
IP fragments with overlapping offset fields When these fragments are
reassembled at the destination some systems will crash hang or reboot
9 What is SYN Flood attack
SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each
packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response While the
targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK it queues up all
outstanding SYN-ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue
SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when
an internal timer (which is set a relatively long intervals) terminates the TCP
three-way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all
incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users
10 What is LAND attack
In a LAN attack hackers flood SYN packets to the network with a spoofed
source IP address of the targeted system This makes it appear as if the host
computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the
target system tries to respond to itself
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
23
11 What is Brute-force attack
A Brute-force attack such as Smurf attack targets a feature in the IP
specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting to quickly flood the
target network with useless data A Smurf hacker flood a destination IP
address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network the router will
broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network If there
are numerous hosts this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request
packet the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the intermediary
network but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address
known as the victim network This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all
available bandwidth making communications impossible
12 What is IP Spoofing attack
Many DoS attacks also use IP Spoofing as part of their attack IP Spoofing
may be used to break into systems to hide the hackers identity or to magnify
the effect of the DoS attack IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain
unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking
that the communications are coming from within the trusted network To
engage in IP Spoofing a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it
appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed
through the router or firewall
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
There are two default ACLs pre-configured in the P-660HW-Dx v2 one allows
all connections from LAN to WAN and the other blocks all connections from
WAN to LAN except of the DHCP packets
Configuration
1 How do I configure the firewall
You can use the Web Configurator to configure the firewall for P-660HW-Dx v2
By factory default if you connect your PC to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 you can access Web Configurator via bdquohttp19216811‟
Note Donrsquot forget to type in the Administrator Password
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall
There are several ways to protect others from touching the settings of your
firewall
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
24
1 Change the default Administrator password since it is required when
setting up the firewall
2 Limit who can access to your P-660HW-Dx v2‟s Web Configurator or
CLI You can enter the IP address of the secured LAN host in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt
[Service] -gtSecured Client IP to allow special access to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
The default value in this field is 0000 which means you do not care which
host is trying to telnet your P-660HW-Dx v2 or accessthe Web
Configurator of
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN
There are four reasons that WWWTelnet from WAN is blocked
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable Telnet from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow WWWTelnet connection
from WAN The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
WWW (For accessing Web Configurator)
Source IP= Remote trusted host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP80
Action=Forward
TELNET (For accessing Command Line Interface)
Source IP= Telnet Client host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP23
Action=Forward
(2)You have disabled WWWTelnet service in Web Configurator Advanced
setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
25
(3) WWWTelnet service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host
entered in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote
MGNT
(4)A filter set which blocks WWWTelnet from WAN is applied to WAN node
You can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using FTP over
WAN
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable FTP from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow FTP connection from WAN
The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
Source IP= FTP host
Destination IP= P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP
Service= FTP TCP21 TCP20
Action=Forward
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
26
(2) You have disabled FTP service in Web Configurator Advanced setup
Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(3) FTP service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host entered
in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(4) A filter set which blocks FTP from WAN is applied to WAN node You
can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
Log and Alert
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the firewall log immediately when the packet
matches a firewall rule The log for Default Firewall Policy (LAN to WAN WAN
to LAN WAN to WAN) is generated automatically with factory default setting
but you can change it in Web Configurator
2 What does the log show to us
The log supports up to 128 entries There are 5 columns for each entry Please
see the example shown below
3 How do I view the firewall log
All logs generated in P-660HW-Dx v2 including firewall logs IPSec logs
system logs are migrated to centralized logs So you can view firewall logs in
Centralized logs Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs
-gtView Log
The log keeps 128 entries the new entries will overwrite the old entries when
the log has over 128 entries
Before you can view firewall logs there are two steps you need to do
(1) Enable log function in Centralized logs setup via either one of the following
methods
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
27
Web configuration Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log
Settings check Access Control and Attacks options depending on
your real situation
CI command sys logs category [access | attack]
(2) Enable log function in firewall default policy or in firewall rules
After the above two steps you can view firewall logs via
Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gtView
Log
View the log by CI command sys logs disp
You can also view Centralized logs via mail or syslog please configure mail
server or Unix Syslog server in Web configuration Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the alert when an attack is detected by the
firewall and sends it via Email So to send the alert you must configure the
mail server and Email address using Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings You can also specify how frequently
you want to receive the alert in it
5 What is the difference between the log and alert
A log entry is just added to the log inside the P-660HW-Dx v2 and e-mailed
together with all other log entries at the scheduled time as configured An alert
is e-mailed immediately after an attacked is detected
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
28
Wireless FAQ
General FAQ
1 What is a Wireless LAN
Wireless LANs provide all the functionality of wired LANs without the need for
physical connections (wires) Data is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier
and transmitted through the ether Typical bit-rates are 11Mbps and 54Mbps
although in practice data throughput is half of this Wireless LANs can be
formed simply by equipping PCs with wireless NICs If connectivity to a wired
LAN is required an Access Point (AP) is used as a bridging device APs are
typically located close to the centre of the wireless client population
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN
Mobility Wireless LAN systems can provide LAN users with access to
real-time information anywhere in their organization This mobility supports
productivity and service opportunities not possible with wired networks
Installation Speed and Simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be
fast and easy and can eliminate the need to pull cable through walls and
ceilings
Installation Flexibility Wireless technology allows the network to go where
wire cannot go
Reduced Cost-of-Ownership While the initial investment required for
wireless LAN hardware can be higher than the cost of wired LAN hardware
overall installation expenses and life-cycle costs can be significantly lower
Long-term cost benefits are greatest in dynamic environments requiring
frequent moves and changes
Scalability Wireless LAN systems can be configured in a variety of topologies
to meet the needs of specific applications and installations Configurations are
easily changed and range from peer-to-peer networks suitable for a small
number of users to full infrastructure networks of thousands of users that
enable roaming over a broad area
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN
The speed of Wireless LAN is still relatively slower than wired LAN The setup
cost of Wireless LAN is relative high because the equipment cost including
access point and PCMCIA Wireless LAN card is higher than hubs and CAT 5
cables
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
29
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks
Airports hotels and even coffee shops like Starbucks are deploying 80211
networks so people can wirelessly surf the Internet with their laptops
5 What is an Access Point
The AP (access point also known as a base station) is the wireless server that
with an antenna and a wired Ethernet connection that broadcasts information
using radio signals AP typically acts as a bridge for the clients It can pass
information to wireless LAN cards that have been installed in computers or
laptops allowing those computers to connect to the campus network and the
Internet without wires
6 Whatrsquos the difference between IEEE80211abg
The IEEE 80211 is a wireless LAN industry standard and the objective of
IEEE 80211 is to make sure that different manufactures wireless LAN devices
can communicate to each other Below is a brief comparison for the
IEEE80211 abg
Publish
Time
Frequency
Band(GHZ)
Data Rate(Mbps) Compatibility
IEEE80211a 1999 UNII Band
515~5825
691218243648
54
Only work with
80211a
devices
IEEE80211b 1999 ISM Band
24~24835
125511 -
IEEE80211g 2001 ISM Band
24~24835
691218243648
54
Backward
compatible with
80211b
devices
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
Yes As long as the products comply to the same IEEE 80211 standard The
Wi-Fi logo is used to define 80211b compatible products Wi-Fi5 is a
compatibility standard for 80211a products running in the 5GHz band
8 What is Wi-Fi
The Wi-Fi logo signifies that a product is interoperable with wireless
networking equipment from other vendors A Wi-Fi logo product has been
tested and certified by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA)
The Socket Wireless LAN Card is Wi-Fi certified and that means that it will
work (interoperate) with any brand of Access Point that is also Wi-Fi certified
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band
Various spread spectrum radio communication applications use the 24 GHz
band This includes WLAN systems (not necessarily of the type IEEE
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
30
80211b) cordless phones wireless medical telemetry equipment and
Bluetoothtrade short-range wireless applications which include connecting
printers to computers and connecting modems or hands-free kits to mobile
phones
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device
Any time devices are operated in the same frequency band there is the
potential for interference
Both the 80211bg and Bluetooth devices occupy the same24-to-2483-GHz
unlicensed frequency range-the same band But a Bluetooth device would not
interfere with other 80211 devices much more than another 80211 device
would interefere While more collisions are possible with the introduction of a
Bluetooth device they are also possible with the introduction of another 80211
device or a new 24 GHz cordless phone for that matter But BlueTooth
devices are usually low-power so the effects that a Bluetooth device may have
on an 80211 network if any arent far-reaching
11 Can radio signals pass through wall
Transmitting through a wall is possible depending upon the material used in its
construction In general metals and substances with a high water content do
not allow radio waves to pass through Metals reflect radio waves and concrete
attenuates radio waves The amount of attenuation suffered in passing through
concrete will be a function of its thickness and amount of metal re-enforcement
used
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference among WLAN
products
Factors of interference
(1) Obstacles walls ceilings furniturehellip etc
(2) Building Materials metal door aluminum studs
(3) Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors
Solution
(1) Minimizing the number of walls and ceilings
(2) Antenna is positioned for best reception
(3) Keep WLAN products away from electrical devices eg microwaves
monitors electric motorshellip etc
(4) Add additional APs if necessary
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN
WLANs are generally privately owned wireless systems that are deployed in a
corporation warehouse hospital or educational campus setting Data rates
are high and there are no per-packet charges for data transmission
WWANs are generally publicly shared data networks designed to provide
coverage in metropolitan areas and along traffic corridors WWANs are owned
by a service provider or carrier Data rates are low and charges are based on
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
31
usage Specialized applications are characteristically designed around short
burst messaging
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage any
hardware
Yes it will not harm the hardware but the module will not be detected and
work after inserting to the slot You need to reboot the router to initialize the
module
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
The wireless security modes supported on P-660HW-Dx v2 are Static
WEP WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK and WPA2
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
It supports IEEE 80211bgg+ standard
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering
Yes it supports up to 32 MAC Address filtering
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption
Yes it means that the AP on P-660HW-Dx v2 will automatically decelerate
when devices move beyond the optimal range or other interference is present
If the device moves back within the range of a higher-speed transmission the
connection will automatically speed up again Rate shifting is a physical-layer
mechanism transparent to the user and the upper layers of the protocol stack
Advanced FAQ
1 What is Ad Hoc mode
A wireless network consists of a number of stations without using an access
point or any connection to a wired network
2 What is Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure mode implies connectivity to a wired communications
infrastructure If such connectivity is required the Access Points must be used
to connect to the wired LAN backbone Wireless clients have their
configurations set for infrastructure mode in order to utilise access points
relaying
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area
This depends on the surrounding terrain the diameter of the client population
and the number of clients If an area is large with dispersed pockets of
populations then extension points can be used for extend coverage
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
32
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (DSSS)
DSSS spreads its signal continuously over a wide frequency band DSSS
maps the information bearing bit-pattern at the sending station into a higher
data rate bit sequence using a chipping code The chipping code (also known
as processing gain) introduces redundancy which allows data recovery if
certain bit errors occur during transmission The FCC rules the minimum
processing gain should be 10 typical systems use processing gains of 20
IEEE 80211b specifies the use of DSSS
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (FHSS)
FHSS uses a narrowband carrier which hops through a predefined sequence
of several frequencies at a specific rate This avoids problems with fixed
channel narrowband noise and simple jamming Both transmitter and receiver
must have their hopping sequences synchronized to create the effect of a
single logical channel To an unsynchronised receiver an FHSS transmission
appears to be short-duration impulse noise 80211 may use FHSS or DSSS
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
No Provided the antenna is optimally designed for 24GHz or 5GHz operation
WLAN NICs often include an internal antenna which may provide sufficient
reception
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range
This frequency range has been set aside by the FCC and is generally labeled
the ISM band A few years ago Apple and several other large corporations
requested that the FCC allow the development of wireless networks within this
frequency range What we have today is a protocol and system that allows for
unlicensed use of radios within a prescribed power level The ISM band is
populated by Industrial Scientific and Medical devices that are all low power
devices but can interfere with each other
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID)
SSID is a configurable identification that allows clients to communicate to the
appropriate base station With proper configuration only clients that are
configured with the same SSID can communicate with base stations having
the same SSID SSID from a security point of view acts as a simple single
shared password between base stations and clients
9 What is an ESSID
ESSID stands for Extended Service Set Identifier and identifies the wireless
LAN The ESSID of the mobile device must match the ESSID of the AP to
communicate with the AP The ESSID is a 32-character maximum string and is
case-sensitive
Security FAQ
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Points
radio link
To secure the date across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Point‟s radio link we
could select any one of the security mode Static 64128256 bit WEP
WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK WPA2
2 What is WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security mechanism defined within the
80211 standard and designed to make the security of the wireless medium
equal to that of a cable (wire) WEP data encryption was designed to prevent
access to the network by intruders and to prevent the capture of wireless
LAN traffic through eavesdropping WEP allows the administrator to define a
set of respective Keys for each wireless network user based on a Key
String passed through the WEP encryption algorithm Access is denied by
anyone who does not have an assigned key Note WEP has shown to have
fundamental flaws in its key generation processing
3 What is WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN You can refer to
the User Guide for more information about it
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP
40 bit WEP and 64 bit WEP are the same encryption level and can interoperate
The lower level of WEP encryption uses a 40 bit (10 Hex character) as secret
key (set by user) and a 24 bit Initialization Vector (not under user control)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
34
(40+24=64) Some vendors refer to this level of WEP as 40 bit others as 64
bit
5 What is a WEP key
A WEP key is a user defined string of characters used to encrypt and decrypt
data
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP
No 128-bit WEP will not communicate with 64-bit WEP Although 128 bit WEP
also uses a 24 bit Initialization Vector but it uses a 104 bit as secret key Users
need to use the same encryption level in order to make a connection
7 Can the SSID be encrypted
No WEP only encrypts the data packets not the 80211 management
packetsThe SSID is in the beacon and probe management messages and
SSID goes over the air in clear text This makes obtaining the SSID easy by
sniffing 80211 wireless traffic
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff the SSID
Many APs by default have broadcasting the SSID turned on Sniffers typically
will find the SSID in the broadcast beacon packets Turning off the broadcast of
SSID in the beacon message (a common practice) does not prevent getting
the SSID since the SSID is sent in the clear in the probe message when a
client associates to an AP a sniffer just has to wait for a valid user to associate
to the network to see the SSID
9 What are Insertion Attacks
The insertion attacks are based on placing unauthorized devices on the
wireless network without going through a security process and review
10 What is Wireless Sniffer
An attacker can sniff and capture legitimate traffic Many of the sniffer tools for
Ethernet are based on capturing the first part of the connection session where
the data would typically include the username and password An intruder can
masquerade as that user by using this captured information An intruder who
monitors the wireless network can apply this same attack principle on the
wireless
11 What is OTIST How do I use it
OTIST is acronym for ZyXEL‟s bdquoOne Touch Intelligent Security Technology‟
It enables P-660HW-Dx v2 and ZyXEL‟s OTIST supported Wireless adapters
to establish connections of the WPA-PSK security mode automatically with
just one touch at the reset button on rear panel
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
35
To use this function on P-660HW-Dx v2 you could press the reset button on
P-660HW-Dx v2 for 1~5 seconds the OTIST is actived The P-660HW-Dx v2
will enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA-PSK automatically if no
WLAN security has been set The default setup key for OTIST is bdquo01234567‟
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
36
Application Notes
General Application Notes
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode
Setup your workstation
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
If the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet that means only
the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as an ADSL bridge
modem to connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account
and limit only one computer to access the Internet
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
To connect your computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN port the computer
must have an Ethernet adapter card installed For connecting a single
computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2 we use a Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
In most cases the IP address of the computer is assigned by the ISP
dynamically so you have to configure the computer as a DHCP client which
obtains the IP from the ISP using DHCP protocol The ISP may also provide
the gateway DNS via DHCP if they are available Otherwise please enter the
static IP addresses for all that the ISP gives to you in the network TCPIP
settings For Windows we check the option Obtain an IP address
automatically in its TCPIP setup please see the example shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
37
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
bridge mode We will use Web Configurator to guide you through the related
menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as bridge mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
(2)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
38
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For example
LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
(2) Turn off DHCP Server and configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 in
Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN We use 19216811 as
the LAN IP for P-660HW-Dx v2 in this case
Step 1 Disactive DHCP Server and apply it
Step 2 Assign an IP to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx v2 eg
19216811
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to install an Internet sharing device like
a router In this case we use the P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
Connect the LAN ports of all computers to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 using Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
Since the P-660HW-Dx v2 is set to DHCP server as default so you need only
to configure the workstations as the DHCP clients in the networking settings In
this case the IP address of the computer is assigned by the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 can also provide the DNS to the clients via DHCP if it is
available For this setup in Windows we check the option Obtain an IP
address automatically in its TCPIP setup Please see the example shown
below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
39
Set up your P-660HW-Dx v2 under routing mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
Routing mode for routing traffic We will use Web Configurator to guide you
through the related menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as routing mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For
example LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
IP Address
Assignment
Set to Dynamic if the ISP provides the IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2
dynamically Otherwise set to Static and enter the IP in the IP
Address field
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
40
(2) Configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 and the DHCP settings in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
What is DHCP Relay
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In addition to the
DHCP server feature the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports the DHCP relay function
When it is configured as DHCP server it assigns the IP addresses to the LAN
clients When it is configured as DHCP relay it is responsible for forwarding
the requests and responses negotiating between the DHCP clients and the
server See figure 1
Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
We could set the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay by the following command
in CLI
Ip dhcp enif0 mode relay
Ip dhcp enif0 relay server [Server IP Address]
4 SUA Notes
Tested SUANAT Applications (eg Cu-SeeMe ICQ NetMeeting)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
41
Introduction
Generally SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users However some applications
such as Cu-SeeMe and ICQ will need to connect to the local user behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 In such case a SUA server must be configured to forward
the incoming packets to the true destination behind SUA After the required
server are configured in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding the internal server or client applications can be accessed
by using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP Address
SUA Supporting Table
The following are the required Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding for the various applications running SUA mode
ZyXEL SUA Supporting Table1
Application
Required Settings in Port Forwarding
PortIP
Outgoing Connection Incoming
Connection
HTTP None 80client IP
FTP None 21client IP
TELNET None 23client IP
(and active Telnet
service from WAN)
POP3 None 110client IP
SMTP None 25client IP
mIRC
None for Chat
For DCC please set
DefaultClient IP
Windows PPTP None 1723client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
42
ICQ 99a None for Chat
For DCC please set
ICQ -gt preference -gt
connections -gt firewall
and set the firewall time
out to 80 seconds in
firewall setting
Defaultclient IP
ICQ 2000b None for Chat None for Chat
ICQ Phone 2000b None 6701client IP
Cornell 11 Cu-SeeMe None 7648client IP
White Pine 312 Cu-SeeMe2 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
White Pine 40 Cu-SeeMe 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
Microsoft NetMeeting 21 amp
3013
None 1720client IP
1503client IP
Cisco IPTV 200 None
RealPlayer G2 None
VDOLive None
Quake1064 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeII2305 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeIII105 beta None
StartCraft 6112client IP
Quick Time 40 None
pcAnywhere 80 None
5631client IP
5632client IP
22client IP
IPsec (ESP tunneling mode) None (one client only) DefaultClient
Microsoft Messenger Service
30 6901client IP 6901client IP
Microsoft Messenger Service
46 47 50hellip
(none UPnP)6
None for Chat File
transfer Video and Voice
None for Chat File
transfer Video and
Voice
Net2Phone None 6701client IP
Network Time Protocol (NTP) None 123 server IP
Win2k Terminal Server None 3389server IP
Remote Anything None 3996 - 4000client IP
Virtual Network Computing None 5500client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
43
(VNC) 5800client IP
5900client IP
AIM (AOL Instant Messenger) None for Chat and IM None for Chat and
IM
e-Donkey None 4661 - 4662client IP
POLYCOM Video
Conferencing None Defaultclient IP
iVISTA 41 None 80server IP
Microsoft Xbox Live7 None NA 1 Since SUA enables your LAN to appear as a single computer to the Internet
it is not possible to configure similar servers on the same LAN behind SUA 2 Because White Pine Cu-SeeMe uses dedicate ports (port 7648 amp port 24032)
to transmit and receive data therefore only one local Cu-SeeMe is allowed
within the same LAN 3 In SUA mode only one local NetMeeting user is allowed because the
outsiders can not distinguish between local users using the same internet IP 4 Certain Quake servers do not allow multiple users to login using the same
unique IP so only one Quake user will be allowed in this case Moreover
when a Quake server is configured behind SUA P-660HW-Dx v2 will not be
able to provide information of that server on the internet 5 Quake II has the same limitations as that of Quake I 6 P-660HW-Dx v2 supports MSN Messenger 46 47 50hellip video voice
pass-through NAT In addition for the Windows OS supported UPnP
(Universal Plug and Play) such as Windows XP and Windows ME UPnP
supported in P-660HW-Dx v2 is an alternative solution to pass through MSN
Messenger video voice traffic For more detail please refer to UPnP
application note 7 P-660HW-Dx v2 support Microsoft Xbox Live with factory default
configuration
Configurations
For example if the workstation operating Cu-SeeMe has an IP of 192168134
then the default SUA server must be set to 192168134 The peer Cu-SeeMe
user can reach this workstation by using P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
44
which can be obtained from Web Configurator
Configure an Internal Server behind SUA
Introduction
If you wish you can make internal servers (eg Web ftp or mail server)
accessible for outside users even though SUA makes your LAN appear as a
single machine to the outside world A service is identified by the port number
Also since you need to specify the IP address of a server behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 a server must have a fixed IP address and not be a DHCP
client whose IP address potentially changes each time P-660HW-Dx v2 is
powered on
In addition to the servers for specific services SUA supports a default server
A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for is
forwarded to the default server If the default server is not defined the service
request is simply discarded
Configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
45
To make a server visible to the outside world specify the port number of the
service and the inside address of the server in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The outside users can access
the local server using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address which can be
obtained from Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information
For example
Configuring an internal Web server for outside access (suppose the
Server IP Address is 192168110)
(1) Fill in the service name and server IP Address press button bdquoAdd‟
(2) If add successfully the Web Configurator will display message
bdquoConfiguration updated successfully‟ at the bottom You can see the port
forwarding rule on the same page the default port for Web Server is 80
(3) If you want to change the port for Web Server you could press button
bdquoModify‟ on corresponding rule then modify and apply it
Default port numbers for some services
Service Port Number
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
46
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
Configure a PPTP server behind SUA
Introduction
PPTP is a tunneling protocol defined by the PPTP forum that allows PPP
packets to be encapsulated within Internet Protocol (IP) packets and
forwarded over any IP network including the Internet itself
In order to run the Windows 9x PPTP client you must be able to establish an
IP connection with a tunnel server such as the Windows NT Server 40
Remote Access Server
Windows Dial-Up Networking uses the Internet standard Point-to-Point (PPP)
to provide a secure optimized multiple-protocol network connection over
dial-up telephone lines All data sent over this connection can be encrypted
and compressed and multiple network level protocols (TCPIP NetBEUI and
IPX) can be run correctly Windows NT Domain Login level security is
preserved even across the Internet
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
47
Window98 PPTP Client Internet NT RAS Server Protocol Stack
PPTP appears as new modem type (Virtual Private Networking Adapter) that
can be selected when setting up a connection in the Dial-Up Networking folder
The VPN Adapter type does not appear elsewhere in the system Since PPTP
encapsulates its data stream in the PPP protocol the VPN requires a second
dial-up adapter This second dial-up adapter for VPN is added during the
installation phase of the Upgrade in addition to the first dial-up adapter that
provides PPP support for the analog or ISDN modem
The PPTP is supported in Windows NT and Windows 98 already For
Windows 95 it needs to be upgraded by the Dial-Up Networking 12 upgrade
Configuration
This application note explains how to establish a PPTP connection with a
remote private network in the P-660HW-Dx v2 SUA case In ZyNOS all PPTP
packets can be forwarded to the internal PPTP Server (WinNT server) behind
SUA The port number of the PPTP has to be entered in the Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding on
P-660HW-Dx v2 to forward to the appropriate private IP address of Windows
NT server
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
48
Example
The following example shows how to dial to an ISP via the P-660HW-Dx v2
and then establish a tunnel to a private network There will be three items that
you need to set up for PPTP application these are PPTP server (WinNT)
PPTP client (Win9x) and the P-660HW-Dx v2
(1) PPTP server setup (WinNT)
Add the VPN service from Control Panel -gtNetwork
Add an user account for PPTP logged on user
Enable RAS port
Select the network protocols from RAS such as IPX TCPIP NetBEUI
Set the Internet gateway to P-660HW-Dx v2
(2) PPTP client setup (Win9x)
Add one VPN connection from Dial-Up Networking by entering the
correct username amp password and the IP address of the P-660HW-Dx
v2s Internet IP address for logging to NT RAS server
Set the Internet gateway to the router that is connecting to ISP
(3) P-660HW-Dx v2 setup
Before making a VPN connection from Win9x to WinNT server you
need to connect P-660HW-Dx v2 router to your ISP first
Enter the IP address of the PPTP server (WinNT server) and the
port number for PPTP as shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
49
Select service name as bdquoPPTP‟ fill in the Server IP Address then press button
bdquoAdd‟
When you have finished the above settings you can ping to the remote Win9x
client from WinNT This ping command is used to demonstrate that remote
the Win9x can be reached across the Internet If the Internet connection
between two LANs is achievable you can place a VPN call from the remote
Win9x client
For example Cping 203661132
When a dial-up connection to ISP is established a default gateway is assigned
to the router traffic through that connection Therefore the output below shows
the default gateway of the Win9x client after the dial-up connection has been
established
Before making a VPN connection from the Win9x client to the NT server you
need to know the exact Internet IP address that the ISP assigns to
P-660HW-Dx v2 router in SUA mode and enter this IP address in the VPN
dial-up dialog box You can check this Internet IP address from PNC Monitor or
S Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information If the Internet IP address
is a fixed IP address provided by ISP in SUA mode then you can always use
this IP address for reaching the VPN server
In the following example the IP address 1401131225 is dynamically
assigned by ISP You must enter this IP address in the VPN Server dialog box
for reaching the PPTP server After the VPN link is established you can start
the network protocol application such as IP IPX and NetBEUI
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
50
5 Using Full Feature NAT
When P-660HW-Dx v2 is in Routing mode you can select NAT Option as
Full Feature in Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit
Key Settings
Field Options Description
Network Address
Translation
Full Feature
When you select this option you can select
Address Mapping Set Number 1~8 in the
pull-down menu on the right
None NAT is disabled when you select this option
SUA Only
When you select this option this remote node
will use default SUA Address Mapping Set
You can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat
lookup 255‟ It‟s a read-only sets with two
rules Many-to-One and server mapping
Select Full Feature when you require other
mapping types
Configuring NAT
Address Mapping Sets and NAT Server Sets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
51
The P-660HW-Dx v2 has 8 remote nodes and so allows you to configure 8
NAT Address Mapping Sets You must specify which NAT Address Mapping
Set (1~8) to use in the remote node when you select Full Feature NAT
You can edit 10 rules for each Address Mapping Set You can edit the rules for
Address Mapping Sets 1 in Web Configurator The other Address Mapping
Sets 2~8 can only be configured in CLI (Command Line Interface)
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports We
can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Port Forwarding To use the NAT server sets you‟ve configured a Server
rule must be set up inside the NAT Address Mapping set Please see NAT
Server Sets for further information on how to apply it
When you select SUA Only the P-660HW-Dx v2 will use a default SUA
Address Mapping set for it It has two rules Many-to-One and Server You
can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat lookup 255‟
Please note that the fields in this menu are read-only However the settings of
the rule set 2 can be modified in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The following table explains the fields in this
above screen
Field Description OptionExample
set This is sequence number for Address Mapping Sets 255 for SUA
Internal
Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA)
0000 for the
Many-to-One type
Local End
IP
This is the starting local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0000 and the
End IP is 255255255255
255255255255
Global Start
IP
This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you
have a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start
IP
0000
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
52
Global End
IP This is the ending global IP address (IGA) NA
Type This is the NAT mapping types Many-to-One and
Server
Here we‟ll guide you to configure Address Mapping Sets from Web
Configurator and CLI (Since in Web Configurator we can only edit the rules
for Address Mapping Sets 1 The other Address Mapping Sets 2~8 can only
be configured in CLI)
Now lets begin with Web Configurator
Firstly let‟s come to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping
This menu is for Address Mapping Set 1 you can edit 10 Address Mapping
Rules for Set 1 You can edit or remove a rule by clicking the two buttons on
the rule table
Click the bdquoEditrsquo Button on the rule 1 then you can enter the window in which
you can edit an individual rule and configure the Mapping Type Local and
Global StartEnd IPs
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
53
The following table describes the fields in this screen
Field Description OptionExample
Type You can select one of the five mapping types from the
pull-down menu
1 One-to-One
2 Many-to-One
3 Many-to-Many
Overload
4 Many-to-Many No
Overload
5 Server
Local
IP
Start This is the starting local IP address (ILA) 0000
End
This is the ending local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0000 and the
End IP as 255255255255 This field is NA for
One-to-One type
255255255255
Global
IP
Start This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you have
a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start IP 0000
End
This is the ending global IP address (IGA) This
field is NA for One-to-One Many-to-One and Server
types
2001164
Note For all Local and Global IPs the End IP address must begin after the IP
Start address ie you cannot have an End IP address beginning before the
Start IP address
Configure Address Mapping Sets in CLI
Setp 1 Telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 (We suppose the LAN IP Address of
P-660HW-Dx v2 is 19216811)
Step 2 Select one Address Mapping Set (1~8) by command bdquoip nat
addrmap map [map ] [set name]‟ (set name is optional) Suppose we
configure set 2 in the example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
54
Setp 3 Set NAT address mapping rule for the Address Mapping Set you just
configured (Set 2 in this example) by command bdquoip nat addrmap rule [rule]
[insert | edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP] [global start IP] [global
end IP] [server set ]‟ Suppose we set a Many-to-One rule for set 2 by
command bdquoip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 1 192168110 192168120 172111
172111‟
Setp 4 Save the configuration by command bdquoip nat addrmap save‟ You can
apply the Address Mapping Set 2 to remote nodes in Web Configurator when
you select Full Feature NAT See the intire process as follows
Set 5 You can lookup the successfully configured Address Mapping Sets by
command bdquoip nat addrmap disp‟
Key Settings
CI Command Description
ip nat addrmap map [map] [set
name]
Select NAT address mapping set and set mapping set
name but set name is optional
Example
gt ip nat addrmap map 2 Test
ip nat addrmap rule [rule] [insert |
edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP]
[global start IP] [global end IP] [server
set ]
Set NAT address mapping rule If the ldquotyperdquo is not
ldquoinside-serverrdquo then the ldquotyperdquo field will still need a
dummy value like ldquo0rdquo
Type is 0 - 4 = one-to-one many-to-one
many-to-many-overload many-to-many-non overload
inside-server
Example
gt ip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 3 192168110
192168120 172111 172111
ip nat addrmap clear [map] [rule] Clear the selected rule of the set
ip nat addrmap freememory Discard Changes
ip nat addrmap disp Display nat set information
ip nat addrmap save Save settings
ip nat server load [set] Load the server sets of NAT into buffer
ip nat server disp [1] ldquodisp 1rdquo means to display the NAT server set in buffer
if parameter ldquo1rdquo is omitted then it will display all the
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
55
server sets
ip nat server save Save the NAT server set buffer into flash
ip nat server clear [set] Clear the server set [set] must use ldquosaverdquo command
to let it save into flash
ip nat server edit [rule] active Activate the rule [rule] rule number is 1 to 24 the
number 25-36 is for UPNP application
ip nat server edit [rule] svrport ltstart
portgt ltend portgt
Configure the port range from ltstart port gt to ltend
portgt
ip nat server edit [rule] remotehost
ltstart IPgt ltend IPgt
Configure the IP address range of remote host (Leave
it to be default value if you don‟t need this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] leasetime
ltsecondsgt
Configure the lease time (Leave it to be default value if
you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] rulename
ltstringgt
Configure the name of the rule (Leave it to be default
value if you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] forwardip ltIP
addressgt Configure the LAN IP address to be forwarded
ip nat server edit [rule] protocol
ltTCP|UDP|ALLgt
Configure the protocol to be used TCP UDP or ALL
(it must be capital)
NAT Server Sets
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports
(similar to the old SUA menu of before) If you wish you can make inside
servers for different services eg Web or FTP visible to the outside users
even though NAT makes your network appears as a single machine to the
outside world A server is identified by the port number eg Web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21
As an example (see the following figure) if you have a Web server at
192168136 and a FTP server at 192168133 then you need to specify for
port 80 (Web) the server at IP address 192168136 and for port 21 (FTP)
another at IP address 192168133
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
56
Please note that a server can support more than one service eg a server
can provide both FTP and Mail service while another provides only Web
service
The following procedures show how to configure a server behind NAT
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
Step 2 Select the service name from the pull-down menu and fill in the server
Address on bdquoServer IP Address‟ then click button bdquoAdd‟ to save it
Step 3 You could click the button bdquoEdit‟ on the rule to modify the Service name
Server IP Address StartEnd Port
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please
refer RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers
Service Port Number
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol)
1723
Examples
Internet Access Only
Internet Access with an Internal Server
Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
(1) Internet Access Only
In our Internet Access example we only need one rule where all our ILAs map
to one IGA assigned by the ISP You can just use the default SUA NAT or you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
57
could select Full Feature NAT and select an Address Mapping Set with a
Many-to-One Rule See the following figure
(2) Internet Access with an Internal Server
In this case we do exactly as the figure (use the convenient pre-configured
SUA Only set) and also go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
NAT -gt Port Forwarding to specify the Internet Server behind the NAT as
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
58
below
(3) Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
(One-to-One Many-to-One Server Set mapping types are used)
In this case we have 3 IGAs from the ISP We have two very busy internal FTP
servers and also an internal general server for the web and mail In this case
we want to assign the 3 IGAs by the following way using 4 NAT rules
Rule 1 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
Rule 3 (Many-to-One type) to map the other clients to IGA3 (200003)
Rule 4 (Server type) to map a web server and mail server with ILA3
(192168120) to IGA3 Type Server allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types to other machines behind NAT on the LAN
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
59
Step 1 In this case we need to map ILA to more than one IGA therefore we
must choose the Full Feature option from the NAT field in currently active
remote node and assign IGA3 to P-660HW-Dx v2‟s WAN IP Address
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping to begin configuring Address Mapping Set 1 We can see
there are 10 blank rule table that could be configured See the following setup
for the four rules in our case
Rule 1 Setup Select One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 Setup Selecting One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
60
Rule 3 Setup Select Many-to-One type to map the other clients to IGA3
(200003)
Rule 4 Setup Select Server type to map our web server and mail server with
ILA3 (192168120) to IGA3
Menu Network -gt NAT -gt Address Mapping should look as follows now
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
61
Step 3 Now we configure all other incoming traffic to go to our web server and
mail server from Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
(4) Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some mIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address In this case it is better to
use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types thus each
user login to the server using a unique global IP address The following figure
illustrates this
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
62
One rule configured for using Many-to-Many No Overload mapping type is
shown below
We can also do this by configure threeOne-to-One mapping type rules
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
What is DDNS
The DDNS service an IP Registry provides a public central database where
information such as email addresses hostnames IPs etc can be stored and
retrieved This solves the problems if your DNS server uses an IP associated
with dynamic IPs
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to access the internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
must inform the DDNS server the change of this IP so that the server can
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
63
update its IP-to-DNS entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is
updated the DNS name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still
usable
The DDNS servers the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports currently is
WWWDYNDNSORG where you apply the DNS from and update the WAN IP
to
Setup the DDNS
1 Before configuring the DDNS settings in the P-660HW-Dx v2 you must
register an account from the DDNS server such as
WWWDYNDNSORG first After the registration you have a hostname
for your internal server and a password using to update the IP to the
DDNS server
2 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Dynamic DNS
Select Active Dynamic DNS option
Key Settings
Option Description
Service Provider Enter the DDNS server in this field Currently we support
WWWDYNDNSORG
Active Toggle to Yes
Host Name Enter the hostname you subscribe from the above DDNS server
For example zyxelcomtw
User Name Enter the user name that the DDNS server gives to you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
64
Password Enter the password that the DDNS server gives to you
Enable Wildcard
Enter the hostname for the wildcard function that the
WWWDYNDNSORG supports Note that Wildcard option is
available only when the provider is httpwwwdyndnsorg
7 Network Management Using SNMP
ZyXEL SNMP Implementation
ZyXEL currently includes SNMP support in some P-660HW-Dx v2 routers It is
implemented based on the SNMPv1 so it will be able to communicate with
SNMPv1 NMSs Further users can also add ZyXELs private MIB in the NMS
to monitor and control additional system variables The ZyXELs private MIB
tree is shown in figure 3 For SNMPv1 operation ZyXEL permits one
community string so that the router can belong to only one community and
allows trap messages to be sent to only one NMS manager
Some traps are sent to the SNMP manager when anyone of the following
events happens
1 coldStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine coldstarts the trap will be sent after booting
2 warmStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine warmstarts the trap will be sent after booting
3 linkDown (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is down the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
4 linkUp (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is up the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
5 authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215)
When receiving any SNMP get or set requirement with wrong community
this trap is sent to the manager
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
65
6 whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-MIB)
When the system is going to restart (warmstart) the trap will be sent with the
reason of restart before rebooting
(1) For intentional reboot
In some cases (download new files CI command sys reboot ) reboot is
done intentionally And traps with the message System reboot by user will
be sent
(2) For fatal error
System has to reboot for some fatal errors And traps with the message of the
fatal code will be sent
Downloading ZyXELs private MIB
Configure the P-660HW-Dx v2 for SNMP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
66
The SNMP related settings in P-660HW-Dx v2 are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt SNMP The
following steps describe a simple setup procedure for configuring all SNMP
settings
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Get
Community
Enter the correct Get Community This Get Community must match the
Get- and GetNext community requested from the NMS The default is
public
Set
Community
Enter the correct Set Community This Set Community must match the
Set-community requested from the NMS The default is public
Trusted
Host
Enter the IP address of the NMS The P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will only
respond to SNMP messages coming from this IP address If 0000 is
entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will respond to all NMS
managers
Trap
Community
Enter the community name in each sent trap to the NMS This Trap
Community must match what the NMS is expecting The default is
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
67
public
Trap
Destination
Enter the IP address of the NMS that you wish to send the traps to If
0000 is entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will not send trap any
NMS manager
Note You may need to edit a firewall rule to permit SNMP Packets
8 Using syslog
You can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt
Logs -gt Log Settings -gt Syslog logging
Key Settings
Active Select it to active UNIX Syslog
Syslog IP Address Enter the IP address of the UNIX server that you wish to
send the syslog
Log Facility Select from the 7 different local options The log facility lets you
log the message in different server files Refer to your UNIX manual
9 Using IP Alias
What is IP Alias
In a typical environment a LAN router is required to connect two local
networks The P-660HW-Dx v2 can connect three local networks to the ISP or
a remote node we call this function as IP Alias In this case an internal
router is not required For example the network manager can divide the local
network into three networks and connect them to the Internet using
P-660HW-Dx v2s single user account See the figure below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
68
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports three virtual LAN interfaces via its single
physical Ethernet interface The first network can be configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN -gt DHCP Setup The second
and third networks that we call IP Alias 1 and IP Alias 2 can be configured
in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias
There are three internal virtual LAN interfaces for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to route
the packets fromto the three networks correctly They are enif0 for the major
network enif00 for the IP alias 1 and enif01 for the IP alias 2 Therefore
three routes are created in the P-660HW-Dx v2 as shown below when the
three networks are configured If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP is also enabled
the IP pool for the clients can be any of the three networks
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
69
You can edit filter rule to accept or deny LAN packets fromto the IP alias 12
go through the P-660HW-Dx v2 by command in CLI
lan index [index number]
Usage index number =1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt [set]
Usage set= the corresponding filter set number you‟ve configured
lan save
IP Alias Setup
(1) Edit the first network in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
LAN -gt IPDHCP Setup by configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s first LAN IP
address
Key Settings
DHCP
Setup
If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP server is enabled the IP pool for the clients
can be any of the three networks
TCPIP
Setup
Enter the first LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This will create the
first route in the enif0 interface
(2) Edit the second and third networks in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias by
configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s second and third LAN IP addresses
Key Settings
IP Alias 1 Active it and enter the second LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the second route in the enif00 interface
IP Alias 2 Active it and enter the third LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the third route in the enif01 interface
10 Using IP Policy Routing
What is IP Policy Routing (IPPR)
Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router
takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides
a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet
forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator
Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis
prior to the normal routing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
70
traffic among multiple paths For example if a network has both the Internet
and remote node connections we can route the Web packets to the Internet
using one policy and route the FTP packets to the remote LAN using another
policy See the figure below
Use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths
Benefits
Source-Based Routing - Network administrators can use policy-based
routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections
Quality of Service (QoS)- Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the
precedence or TOS (Type of Service) values in the IP header at the periphery
of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic
Cost Savings- IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on
high-bandwidth high-cost path while using low-path for batch traffic
Load Sharing- Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic
among multiple paths
How does the IPPR work
A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet
meets the criteria The action is taken only when all the criteria are met The
criteria include the source address and port IP protocol (ICMP UDP TCP
etc) destination address and port TOS and precedence (fields in the IP
header) and length The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between
interactive and bulk traffic Interactive applications eg Telnet tend to have
short packets while bulk traffic eg file transfer tends to have large packets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
71
The actions that can be taken include routing the packet to a different gateway
(and hence the outgoing interface) and the TOS and precedence fields in the
IP header IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of ZyNOS in style
and in implementation The policies are divided into sets where related
policies are grouped together A use defines the policies before applying them
to an interface or a remote node in the same fashion as the filters There are
12 policy sets with 6 policies in each set
Setup the IP Policy Routing
Setp 1 Set the index of IP routing policy set rule by command bdquoip
policyrouting set index [set] [rule]‟ Suppose set=1 rule=1 in this
example
Step 2 Suppose we‟d like to edit the rule like this
Policy Set Name=Test
Active= Yes
Criteria
IP Protocol = 6
Type of Service= Dont Care Packet length= 0
Precedence = Dont Care Len Comp= NA
Source
addr start= 19216812 end= 192168120
port start= 0 end= NA
Destination
addr start= 0000 end= NA
port start= 80 end= 80
Action= Matched
Gateway addr = 1921681254 Log= No
Type of Service= No Change
Precedence = No Change
This policy example forces the Web packets originated from the clients with IP
addresses from 19216812 to 192168120 be routed to the remote LAN via
the gateway 1921681254
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
ip policyrouting set name Test
(Set the name as Test of IP routing policy rule )
ip policyrouting set active yes
(Enable the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria protocol 6
(Set the protocol ID as 6(TCP) for the rule)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
72
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the criteria type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria packetlength 0
(Set the packet length as 0 for the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcip 19216812 192168120
(Set the source IP address for the rule Start=19216812 end=192168120)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcport 0
(Set the source port for the rule Start=0)
ip policyrouting set criteria destip 0000
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=0000)
ip policyrouting set criteria destport 80 80
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=80 end=80)
ip policyrouting set action actmatched
(Set the action for the rule Matched)
ip policyrouting set action gatewaytype 0
(Set gateway type for the rule Gateway Address)
ip policyrouting set action gatewayaddr 1921681254
(Set the gateway address for the rule 1921681254)
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the action type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the action precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set action log no
(Set log option for the rule no log)
ip polictrouting set save
(Save the rule)
Step 3 Apply the IP policy routing There are two interfaces to apply the policy
set they are the LAN interface and WAN interface It depends where the
gateway specified in the policy rule is located If the gateway you specified is
located on the local LAN you apply the policy set in LAN interface If the
gateway you specified is located on the remote WAN site you apply the policy
set in WAN interface
Apply to WAN Interface (Suppose we apply it to remote node 1 in the
example)
wan node index 1
wan node ippolicy 1
11 Using Call Scheduling
What is Call Scheduling
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
73
Call scheduling enables the mechanism for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to run the
remote node connection according to the pre-defined schedule This feature is
just like the scheduler in a video recorder which records the program according
to the specified time Users can apply at most 4 schedule sets in Remote Node
The remote node configured with the schedule set could be Forced On
Forced Down Enable Dial-On-Demand or Disable Dial-On-Demand on
specified date and time
How to configure a Call Scheduling
You can configure a call scheduling in CLI
Suppose we want to edit a call schedule set like this
Call Schedule Set =1
Set name=Test
Active= Yes
Start Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 - 12 - 27
How Often= Once
Once
Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 -12 -27
Start Time(hhmm)= 12 00
Duration(hhmm)= 16 00
Action= Enable Dial-on-demand
This schedule example permits a demand call on the line on 1200 am
2005-12-27 The maximum length of time this connection is allowed is 16
hours
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
wan callsch index 1
(Set call schedule index = 1 You must apply this command first before you
begin to configure call schedule)
wan callsch name Test
(Set the schedule name as Test)
wan callsch active Yes
(Enable schedule)
wan callsch startdate 2005 12 27
(Set schedule start date as 2005-12-27)
wan callsch oncedate 2005 12 27
(Set the schedule used just once it works on 2005-12-27)
wan callsch starttime 12 00
(Set the schedule start time as 1200)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
74
wan callsch duration 16 00
(Set schedule duration time as 16 hours)
wan callsch action 2
(Set action as dial-on-demand)
wan callsch save
(Save the current call schedule set)
Key Settings
Start Date
Start date of this schedule rule It can be unmatched with weekday
setting For example if Start Date is 20001002(Monday) but Monday
setting in weekday can be No
Forced On The node will always keep up during the setting period It is equivalent
to diable the idel timeout
Forced Down The node will always keep doen during the setting period The
connected remote node will be dropped
Enable
Dial-On-Demand The remote node accepts Dial-on-demand during this period
Disable
Dial-On-Demand
The remote node denies any demand dial during the period For the
existing connected nodes it will be dropped after idle timeout and no
triggered up
Start Time
Duration Start Time and Duration of this schedule
Apply the schedule to the Remote node
Multiple scheduling rules can program in a Remote node and they have
priority For example if we program the sets as 1234 in remote node then
the set 1 will override set 234 set 2 will override 34 and so on
We can apply the schedule to the remote node in CLI by the commands
wan node index []index]
wan node callsch [index]
wan node save
For example if we want to apply the call schedule set 1 to remote node 1 we
could use the commands
wan node index 1
wan node callsch 1
wan node save
Time Service in P-660HW-Dx v2
There is no RTC (Real-Time Clock) chip so the P-660HW-Dx v2 should launch
a mechanism to get current time and date from external server in boot time
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
75
Time service is implemented by the Daytime protocol(RFC-867) Time
protocol(RFC-868) and NTP protocol(RFC-1305) You have to assign an IP
address of a time server and then the P-660HW-Dx v2 will get the date time
and time-zone information from this server You can configure it in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt System -gt Time Setting
12 Using IP Multicast
What is IP Multicast
Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in two ways - unicast or broadcast
Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts Host groups
are identified by class D IP addresses ie those with 1110 as their
higher-order bits In dotted decimal notation host group addresses range from
224000 to 239255255255 Among them 224001 is assigned to the
permanent IP hosts group and 224002 is assigned to the multicast routers
group
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is the protocol used to support
multicast groups The latest version is version 2 (see RFC2236) IP hosts use
IGMP to report their multicast group membership to any immediate-neighbor
multicast routers so the multicast routers can decide if a multicast packet
needs to be forwarded At start up the P-660HW-Dx v2 queries all directly
connected networks to gather group membership
After that the P-660HW-Dx v2 updates the information by periodic queries
The P-660HW-Dx v2 implementation of IGMP is also compatible with version 1
The multicast setting can be turned on or off on Ethernet and remote nodes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
76
IP Multicast Setup
(1) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt LAN -gt IP -gt Advanced Setup
(2) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s remote node in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt Multicast
Key Settings
Multicast IGMP-v1 for IGMP version 1 IGMP-v2 for IGMP version 2
13 Using Bandwidth Management
Why Bandwidth Management (BWM)
Nowadays we have many different traffic types for Internet applications Some
traffic may consume high bandwidth such as FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
Some other traffic may not require high bandwidth but they require stable
supply of bandwidth such as VoIP traffic The VoIP quality would not be good
if all of the outgoing bandwidth is occupied via FTP Additionally chances are
that you would like to grant higher bandwidth for somebody special who is
using specific IP address in your network All of these are reasons why we
need bandwidth management
Using BWM
Setp 1 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gtSummary activate bandwidth management on the interface you
would like to manage We enable the BWM function on WAN interface in this
example
Enter the total speed for this interface that you want to allocate using
bandwidth management This appears as the bandwidth budget of the
interface‟s root class
Select how you want the bandwidth to be allocated Priority-Based means
bandwidth is allocated via priority so the traffic with highest priority would be
served first then the second priority is served secondly and so on If
Fairness-Based is chosen then the bandwidth is allocated by ratio Which
means if A class needs 300 kbps B class needs 600 kbps then the ratio of A
and Bs actual bandwidth is 12 So if we get 450 kbps in total then A would
get 150 kbps B would get 300 kbps We select Priority-Based in this
example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
77
Key Settings
Active
Check the box to enable BWM on the interface Note that if you would like
to manage traffic from WAN to LAN you should apply BWM on LAN
interface If you would like to management traffic from WAN to DMZ
please apply BWM on DMZ interface
Speed Enter the total speed to manage on this interface This value is the budget
of the class trees root
Scheduler
Choose the principle to allocate bandwidth on this interface
Priority-Based allocates bandwidth via priority Fairness-Based allocates
bandwidth by ratio
Maximize
Bandwidth
Usage
Check this box if you would like to give residuary bandwidth from Interface
to the classes who need more bandwidth than configured amount Do not
select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a
bandwidth class or you want to limit the bandwidth of each class at the
configured value (Please note that to meat the second condition you
should also disable Use All Managed Bandwidth in the BWM rule)
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Rule Setup select the interface Service Priority and Allocated
Bandwidth for this rule then click button bdquoAdd‟ to apply this rule
Step 3 You can modify the rule by clicking the button lsquoEditrsquo on the rule
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
78
Key Settings
RuleName Give this rule a name for example WWW
BW Budget Configure the bandwidth you would like to allocate to this rule
Priority Enter a number between 0 and 7 to set the priority of this class The
higher the number the higher the priority The default setting is 3
Use All
Managed
Bandwidth
Check this box if you would like to let this class to borrow bandwidth from
its parents when the required bandwidth is higher than the configured
amount Do not check this if you want to limit the bandwidth of this class
at the configured value(Please note that you should also disable
Maximize Bandwidth Usage on the interface to meet the condition)
Service Select User-defined SIP FTP or H323 to specify the traffic types
Destination
IP Address Enter the IP address of destination that meets this class
Destination
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
Destination
Port Enter the destination port number of the traffic
Source IP
Address
Enter the IP address of source that meats this class Note that for traffic
from LAN to WAN since BWM is before NAT you should use the IP
address before NAT processing
Source
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
79
Source Port Enter the source port number of the traffic
Protocol ID Enter the protocol number for the traffic 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP or 17 for
UDP
After configuration BWM you can check current bandwidth of the configured
traffic in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Monitor
14 Using Zero-Configuration
Zero-Configuration and VC auto-hunting
Zero-Configure feature can help customer to reduce the burden of setting
efforts Whenever system ADSL links up system will send out some probing
patterns system will analyze the packets returned from ISP and decide which
services the ISP may provide Because ADSL is based on a ATM network so
system have to pre-configured a VPIVCI hunting pool before Auto-Configure
function begins to work
The Zero-Configuration feature can hunt the encapsulation and VPIVCI value
and system will automatically configure itself if the hunting result is
successfully This feature has two constraints
1 It supports the ISP provides one kind of service (PPPoEPPPoA etc)
only otherwise the hunting will get confusing and failed
2 VC auto-hunting only supports dynamic WAN IP address If the router is
set a static WAN IP address VC auto-hunting function will be disabled
The entry of hunting pool must also contain the VPI VCI and which kinds of
hunting patterns you wish to send Whenever system send out all the probing
patterns with specific VPIVCI system will wait for 5~10 seconds and get the
response from ISP the response patterns will decide which kinds of ADSL
services of the line will be After that system will save back the correct VPI
VCI and also services (encapsulation) type into profile of WAN interface
Configure the VC auto-hunting preconfigured table
(1) Display auto-haunting preconfigured table by using command from CLI
wan atm vchunt display
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
80
(2) Add items to the auto-haunting preconfigured table by using commands
wan atm vchunt add ltremoteNodeIndexgt ltvpigt ltvcigt ltservice
bit(hex)gt
wan atm vchunt save
Note ltremote nodegt input the remote node index 1-8
ltvpigt vpi value
ltvcigt vci value
ltservicegt it‟s a hex value bit0PPPoEVC (1) bit1PPPoELLC (2)
bit2PPPoAVC (4) bit3PPPoALLC (8) bit4EnetVC (16) bit5 EnetLLC (32)
For example
(1) If you need service PPPoELLC and EnetLLC then the service bits will be
2+32 = 34 (decimal) = 22 (hex) you must input 22
(2) If you want to enable all service for VC hunting the service bits will be
1+2+4+8+16+32=63(decimal)= 3f (hex) you must input 3f
Need to perform save after this by command bdquowan atm vchunt save‟
(3) Delete items from the auto-haunting preconfigured table by useing
command
wan atm vchunt remove ltremote nodegt ltvpigt ltvcigt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
81
Using Zero configuration
You can enabledisable Zero Configuration in Network -gt WAN -gt Advanced
Setup
(1) After configure the auto-haunting preconfigured table You just need a PC
connected to the device LAN Ethernet port with the DSL sync up
(2) Open your web browser to access a Web site It should prompt and request
for your username password of your ISP account if your ISP provide PPPoE
or PPPoA service
(3) After key-in the correct info it will than test the connection If it is
successful it will than close the browser and you can open a new browser to
surf the Internet If the connection test fail it will go back to the page ask for
user name and password
(4) Basically the zero configuration only work on the VC that was preconigured
in the auto-haunting preconfigured table
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2
The common triple play scenario is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
82
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus we could assign different parameters to the PVC (CBR
UBR VBR-RT VBR-nRT) to guarantee different applications
We could configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 via CLI The command is
sys tripleplay set portbase ltEportIDgt ltPVCIDgt
For example sys tripleplay portbase set 1 1
sys tripleplay portbase set 2 2
sys tripleplay portbase set 3 3
The traffic from Ethernet port 1 must be forwarded to PVC1 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet port 2 must be forwarded to PVC2 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet Port3 must be forwarded to PVC3 vice versa
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to configure up to twelve filter sets with six
rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system You can apply up to
four filter sets to a particular port to block multiple types of packets With each
filter set having up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for
a single port
The packet filter function on P-660HW-Dx v2 is the same as before just that
you could only configure the filter set and apply them by command in CLI It‟s
very complex for common users to do it So here‟s the recommendation
(1) Usually if you want to block special packets you could edit a firewall rule in
Web Configurator
032
VOIP Server
IPTV Server
Internet
Server
Others
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
ATUR IP-DSLAM VL-Switch
CPE Access Network ISP
034
055
VOIP Telephone
Video Client
Clients surfing
Internet
Other clients
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
PVC1
PVC2
PVC3
PVC4 132
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
83
(2) By factory default ZyXEL has preconfigured many filter sets for your
reference you can check them by command
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Usage set 1~12 rule 1~6 Commonly the preconfigured filter sets are as
follows ltset 2 rule 1~6gt ltset 3 rule 1gt ltset 4 rule 1gt
sys filter set display
For example
This could satisfy mostly requirement You could select any of them to apply to
the WAN node or LAN Interface on demand The command is as follows
Apply to WAN node
wan node index ltnodegt
Usage node= 1~8 corresponding to the remote node 1~8
wan node filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt
ltset3gt ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to one remote node
wan node save
Apply to LAN Interface
lan index [index]
Usage index=1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
84
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt ltset3gt
ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to LAN Interface
lan save
(3) If you are very advanced user you could edit filter set by the following
command
sys filter set [set] [rule]
Usage Set up a filter set index to edit a set
set 1~12
rule 1~6
sys filter set type [typeID]
Usage typeID tcpip or generic
Note In one filter set you should configure all the rules in one type either
tcpip or generic
sys filter set enable
Usage Enable(active) the rule
sys filter set helliphellip(You could configure a filter rule on demand the newest
command is available on release note)
sys filter set save
Usage Don‟t forget to save the rule everytime you‟ve configured it
Reference Commands
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Set the index of filter set rule you must apply this
command first before you begin to configure the
filter rules
sys filter set name [set name] Set the name of filter set
sys filter set type [tcpip | generic] Set the type of filter rule
sys filter set enable Enable the rule
sys filter set disable Disable the rule
sys filter set protocol [protocol ] Set the protocol ID of the rule
sys filter set sourceroute [yes|no] Set the sourceroute yesno
sys filter set destip [address] [subnet
mask]
Set the destination IP address and subnet mask of
the rule
sys filter set destport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|notequal|less|greater]
Set the destination port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set srcip [address] [subnet
mask] Set the source IP address and subnet mask
sys filter set srcport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|not
Set the source port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
85
equal|less|greater] equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set tcpEstab [yes|no] Set TCP establish option
sys filter set more [yes|no] Set the more option to yesno
sys filter set log [type 0-3= none | match|
notmatch | both ]
Set the log type (it could be 0-3 =none match not
match both)
sys filter set actmatch[type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for match
sys filter set actnomatch [type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for not match
sys filter set offset [] Set offset for the generic rule
sys filter set length [] Set the length for generic rule
sys filter set mask [] Set the mask for generic rule
sys filter set value [(depend on length in
hex)] Set the value for generic rule
sys filter set clear Clear the current filter set
sys filter set save Save the filter set parameters
sys filter set display [set][rule] Display Filter set information Wo parameter it will
display buffer information
sys filter set freememory Discard Changes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
86
Wireless Application Notes
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode
Ad hoc Introduction
What is Ad Hoc mode
Ad hoc mode is a wireless network consists of a number of stations without
access points Without using an access point or any connection to a wired
network a client unit in Ad hoc operation mode can communicate directly to
other client units just as using a cross over Ethernet cable connecting 2 hosts
together via a NIC card for direct connection when configured in Ad hoc mode
without an access point being present Ad hoc operation is ideal for small
networks of no more than 2-4 computers Larger networks would require the
use of one or perhaps several access points
Configuration for Wireless Station A
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
87
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
88
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Configuration for Wireless Station B
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
89
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
90
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Step 7 Station A now are able to connect to Station B
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure Introduction
For Infrastructure WLANs multiple Access Points (APs) like the WLAN to the
wired network and allow users to efficiently share network resources The
Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also
mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
91
Configure Wireless Access Point to Infrastructure mode using Web
configurator
To configure Infrastructure mode of your P-660HW-Dx v2 wireless AP please
follow the steps below
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gt General Configure the basic parameters for Wireless LAN
Step 2 You could click the button bdquoAdvanced Setup‟ for more detailed
configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
92
Configuration Wireless Station to Infrastructure mode
To configure Infrastructure mode on your ZyAIR G-200 Wireless Network
Adapter please follow the following steps
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
93
Step 3 Select Infrastructure from the operation mode pull down menu fill in an
SSID or leave it as any if you wish to connect to any AP than press Apply
Change to take effect
Step 4 Click on Site Survey tab and press search all the available AP will be
listed
Step 5 Double click on the AP you want to associated with
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
94
Step 6 After the client have associated with the selected AP The linked APs
channel current linkup rate SSID link quality and signal strength will show on
the Link Info page You now successfully associate with the selected AP with
Infrastructure Mode
3 MAC Filter
MAC Filter Overview
Users can use MAC Filter as a method to restrict unauthorized stations from
accessing the APs ZyXELs APs provide the capability for checking MAC
address of the station before allowing it to connect to the network This
provides an additional layer of control layer in that only stations with registered
MAC addresses can connect This approach requires that the list of MAC
addresses be configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
95
ZyXEL MAC Filter Implementation
ZyXELs MAC Filter Implementation allows users to define a list to allow or
block association from STAs The filter set allows users to input 12 entries in
the list If Allow Association is selected all other STAs which are not on the list
will be denied Otherwise if Deny Association is selected all other STAs which
are not on the list will be allowed for association Users can choose either way
to configure their filter rule
Configure the WLAN MAC Filter
The MAC Filter related settings in ZyXEL APs are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gtMAC Filter
Before you configure the MAC filter you need to know the MAC address of the
client first If not knowing what your MAC address is please enter a command
ipconfig all after DOS prompt to get the MAC (physical) address of your
wireless client
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gtMAC Filter active MAC Filter
Step 2 Enter the MAC Addresses of wireless cards in the filter set to allow or
deny association from these cards
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Filter Action
Allow or block association from MAC addresses contained in this list If Allow
Association is selected in this field hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list
will be allowed to associate with AP If Deny Association is selected in this field
hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list will be blocked
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
96
MAC Address This field specifies those MAC Addresses that you want to add in the list
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
Introduction
The 80211 standard describes the communication that occurs in wireless
LANs
The Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm is used to protect wireless
communication from eavesdropping because wireless transmissions are
easier to intercept than transmissions over wired networks and wireless is a
shared medium everything that is transmitted or received over a wireless
network can be intercepted
WEP relies on a secret key that is shared between a mobile station (eg a
laptop with a wireless Ethernet card) and an access point (ie a base station)
The secret key is used to encrypt packets before they are transmitted and an
integrity check is used to ensure that packages are not modified during the
transition The standard does not discuss how the shared key is established In
practice most installations use a single key that is shared between all mobile
stations and access points APs You can refer to the User Guide for more
detailed information about it
Setting up the Access Point
You can set up the Access Point from Web configurator Advanced Setup
Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General (You can also configure it via CLI)
Step 1 Select bdquoStatic WEP‟ from the pull down menu bdquoSecurity Mode‟ in Web
Configurator
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
97
Step 2 Set up WEP Key in the Web Configurator You need to set the one of
the following parameters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 5 characters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 10 hexadecimal digits
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 13 characters
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 26 hexadecimal digits
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 29 characters
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 58 hexadecimal digits
There are two ways you can configure the WEP Key
(1) You can put in a special WEP key in the bdquoWEP Key‟ menu directly
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
98
(2) You can also put in an arbitrary sequence of characters in the
bdquoPassphrase‟ and then press button bdquoGenerate‟ to let the P-660HW-Dx v2
generate WEP Key for you
Setting up the Station
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar or right click
the utility icon then select Show Config Utility
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
99
The utility will pop up on your windows screen
Note If the utility icon doesnt exist in your task bar click Start -gt
Programs -gt helliphellip to start the utility
Step 2 Select the Configuration tab
Select bdquoSet Security‟ to configure encryption type and parameters
correspond with access point
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
100
Note You should select Key 1 as default Transmit Key since the P-660HW-Dx
v2 is supposed to use Key 1 by default
Key settings
The WEP Encryption type of station has to equal to the access point
Check ASCII field for characters WEP key or uncheck ASCII field for
Hexadecimal digits WEP key
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
101
Hexadecimal digits dont need to precede by 0x
For example
64-bits with characters WEP key Key1= 2e3f4
64-bits with hexadecimal digits WEP key Key1= 123456789A
5 Site Survey
Introduction
What is Site Survey
An RF site survey is a MAP to RF contour of RF coverage in a particular
facility With wireless system it is very difficult to predict the propagation of
radio waves and detect the presence of interfering signals Walls doors
elevator shafts and other obstacles offer different degree of attenuation This
will cause the RF coverage pattern be irregular and hard to predict
Site survey can help us overcome these problem and even provide us a map
of RF coverage of the facility
Preparation
Below are the steps to complete a simple site survey with simple tools
1 First you will need to obtain a facility diagram such as blueprints This is
for you to mark and take record on
2 Visually inspect the facility walk through the facility to verify the accuracy of
the diagram and mark down any large obstacle you see that may effect the RF
signal such as metal shelf metal desk etc on the diagram
3 Identify users area when doing so ask a question where is wireless
coverage needed and where does not and note and take note on the diagram
this is information is needed to determine the number of AP required
4 Determine the preliminary access point location on the facility diagram base
on the service area needed obstacles power wall jack considerations
Survey on Site
Step 1 With the diagram with all information you gathered in the preparation
phase Now you are ready to make the survey
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
102
Step 2 Install an access point at the preliminary location
Step 3 Use a notebook with wireless client installed and run its utility An utility
will provide information such as connection speed current used channel
associated rate link quality signal strength and etc information as shown in
utility below
Step 4 Its always a good idea to start with putting the access point at the
corner of the room and walk away from the access point in a systematic
manner Record the changes at point where transfer rate drop and the link
quality and signal strength information on the diagram as you go alone
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
103
Step 5 When you reach the farthest point of connection mark the spot Now
you move the access point to this new spot as have already determine the
farthest point of the access point installation spot if wireless service is required
from corner of the room
Step 6 Repeat step 1~5 and now you should be able to mark an RF coverage
area as illustrated in above picutre
Step 7 You may need more than one access point is the RF coverage area
hasn‟t covered all the wireless service area you needed
Step 8 Repeat step 1~6 of survey on site as necessary upon completion you
will have a diagram and information of site survey As illustrated below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
104
Note If there are more than one access point is needed be sure to make the
adjacent access point service area over lap one another So the wireless
station is able to roam For more information please refer to roaming at
6 Configure 8021x and WPA
What is the WPA Functionality
Configuration for Access Point
Configuration for your PC
What is WPA Functionality
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
105
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN
Here comes WPA-PSK Application example for your reference
Configuration for Access point
The IEEE 8021x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the
authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management
Authentication can be done using local user database internal to the
P-660HW-Dx v2 (authenticate up to 32 users) or an external RADIUS server
for an unlimited number of users
Step 1 To change your P-660HW-Dx v2s authentication settings login Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General
-gtSecurity
Step 2 Select lsquoSecurity Mode‟ as WAP-PSK
Step 3 Type the Pre Shared Key in the Pre-Shared Key field
Step 4 Click Apply to finish
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
106
Configuration for your PC
Step 1 Double click on your wireless utility icon in your windows task bar the
utility will pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select the configuration tab type in the SSID (Service Set Identifier)
select the operating Mode as Infrastructure and select proper channel
Step 3 Click Set Security to configure the security parameters
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
107
Step 4 Click OK for finish and begin to Site survey Connect to the AP as you
have configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
108
Step 5 Click Link Info tab if the PC associated and authenticated with AP
successfully we will see the following information
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
109
Support Tool
1 LANWAN Packet Trace
The Prestige packet trace records and analyzes packets running on LAN and
WAN interfaces It is designed for users with technical backgrounds who are
interested in the details of the packet flow on LAN or WAN end of Prestige It is
also very helpful for diagnostics if you have compatibility problems with your
ISP or if you want to know the details of a packet for configuring a filter rule
The format of the display is as following
Packet
[index] [timersecond][channel-receivetransmit][length] [protocol]
[sourceIPport] [destIPport]
There are two ways to dump the trace
Online Trace--display the trace real time on screen
Offline Trace--capture the trace first and display later
The details for capturing the trace in CLI as follows
First of all you need to telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 firstly The password is
Administrator passwords bdquoadmin‟ by default
Online Trace
(1) Trace LAN packet
Disable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
none
Enable to capture the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
110
(2) Trace WAN packet
Disable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
none
Enable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
111
Offline Trace
Disable the capture of the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel
mpoa00 none
Enable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Wait for packet passing through the Prestige over LAN
Disable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw off amp sys trcl sw off
Display the trace briefly by entering sys trcp brief
Display specific packets by using sys trcp parse ltfrom_indexgt ltto_indexgt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
112
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal
Step 1 Initiate a hyper terminal connection from your PC(suppose you
connected to the LAN port of P-660HW-Dx v2)
Step 2 Click the bdquoproperties‟ to configure parameters to telnet to the
P-660HW-Dx v2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
113
Step 3 So that after you invoke the relevant commands you could save the
logs you‟ve captured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
114
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP
Using TFTP client software
Uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Uploaddownload Prestige configurations via LAN
(1) Using TFTP to uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout
in Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 Enter the IP address of the Prestige
Step 5To upload the firmware please save the remote file as ras to
Prestige After the transfer is complete the Prestige will program the upgraded
firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
115
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige The local file is the source
file of the ZyNOS firmware that is available in your hard disk The remote file is
the file name that will be saved in Prestige Check the port number 69 and
512-Octet blocks for TFTP Check Binary mode for file transfering
(2) Using TFTP to uploaddownload SMT configurations via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 To download the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please get the
remote file rom-0 from the Prestige
Step 5 To upload the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please save the
remote file as rom-0 in the Prestige
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
116
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige
The local file is the source file of your configuration file that is available
in your hard disk
The remote file is the file name that will be saved in Prestige
Check the port number 69 and 512-Octet blocks for TFTP
Check Binary mode for file transfering
Using TFTP command on Windows NT
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Download ZyNOS via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] get ras [localfile]
Step 4 Upload P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] put
[localfile] rom-0
Step 5 Download P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP]
get rom-0 [localfile]
Using TFTP command on UNIX
Before you begin
1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Example
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ telnet 19216811
Trying 19216811
Connected to 19216811
Escape character is ^]
Password
rasgt sys stdio 0
(Open a new window)
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get rom-0 [local-rom] lt- change to binary mode
lt- download configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-rom] rom-0 lt- upload configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get ras [local-ras ] lt- download firmware
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-ras] ras lt- upload firmware
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
117
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files
In addition to upload the firmware and configuration file via the console port
and TFTP client you can also upload the firmware and configuration files to
the Prestige using FTP
To use this feature your workstation must have a FTP client software See the
example shown below
Using FTP client software
Note The remote file name for the firmware is ras and the configuration file is
rom-0
Step 1 Use FTP client from your workstation to connect to the Prestige by
entering the IP address of the Prestige
Step2 Press Enter key to ignore the username because the Prestige does
not check the username
Step 3 Enter the CLI password as the FTP login password the default is
admin
Step 4 Enter command bin to set the transfer type to binary
Step 5 Use put command to transfer the file to the Prestige
Example
Step 1 Connect to the Prestige by entering the Prestiges IP and Administrator
password in the FTP software Set the transfer type to Auto-Detect or
Binary
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
118
Step 2 Press OK to ignore the Username prompt
Step 3 To upload the firmware file we transfer the local ras file to overwrite
the remote ras file
To upload the configuration file we transfer the local rom-0 to overwrite
the remote rom-0 file
Step 4 The Prestige reboots automatically after the uploading is finished
Please do not power off the router at this moment
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
119
CI Command Reference
Command Syntax and General User Interface
CI has the following command syntax
command ltiface | device gt subcommand [param]
command subcommand [param]
command | help
command subcommand | help
General user interface
1 Shows the following commands and all major (sub)commands
2 exit Exit Subcommand
To get the latest CI Command list
The latest CI Command list is available in release note of every ZyXEL
firmware release Please goto ZyXEL public WEB site
httpwwwzyxelcomsupportdownload_indexphp to download firmware
package (zip) you should unzip the package to get the release note in PDF
format
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
7
9 What is SUA When should I use SUA
SUA (Single User Account) is a unique feature supported by Prestige router
which allows multiple people to access Internet concurrently for the cost of a
single user account
When Prestige acting as SUA receives a packet from a local client destined for
the outside Internet it replaces the source address in the IP packet header
with its own address and the source port in the TCP or UDP header with
another value chosen out of a local pool It then recomputes the appropriate
header checksums and forwards the packet to the Internet as if it is originated
from Prestige using the IP address assigned by ISP When reply packets from
the external Internet are received by Prestige the original IP source address
and TCPUDP source port numbers are written into the destination fields of the
packet (since it is now moving in the opposite direction) the checksums are
recomputed and the packet is delivered to its true destination This is because
SUA keeps a table of the IP addresses and port numbers of the local systems
currently using it
10 What is the difference between SUA and Full Feature NAT
When you edit a remote node in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt Remote Node -gt Edit there will be three options for you
None
SUA Only
Full Feature
SUA (Single User Account) in previous ZyNOS versions is a NAT set with 2
rules Many-to-One and Server With SUA visible servers had to be mapped
to different ports since the servers share only one global IP
The P-660HW-Dx v2 now has Full Feature NAT which supports five types of
IPPort mapping One to One Many to One Many to Many Overload Many to
Many No Overload and Server You can make special application when you
select Full Feature NAT For example With multiple global IP addresses
multiple severs using the same port (eg FTP servers using port 2120) are
allowed on the LAN for outside access
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports NAT sets on a remote node basis They are
reusable but only one set is allowed for each remote node The P-660HW-Dx
v2 supports 8 sets since there are 8 remote nodes
By fatory default the NAT is select as SUA in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt General -gt NAT Setup
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
8
11 Is it possible to access a server running behind SUA from the outside
Internet How can I do it
Yes it is possible because P-660HW-Dx v2 delivers the packet to the local
server by looking up to a SUA server table Therefore to make a local server
accessible to the outside users the port number and the inside IP address of
the server must be configured (You can configure it in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding)
12 When do I need select Full Feature NAT
Make multiple local servers on the LAN accessible from outside with
multiple global IP addresses
With SUA visible servers had to be mapped to different ports since the
servers share only one global IP But when you select Full Feature you can
make multiple local servers (mapping the same port or not) on the LAN
accessible from outside with multiple global IP addresses
Support Non-NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some MIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address Thus users on the same
network can not login to the same server simultaneously In this case it is
better to use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types
thus each user login to the server using a unique global IP address
13 What IPPort mapping does Multi-NAT support
Multi-NAT supports five types of IPport mapping One to One Many to One
Many to Many Overload Many to Many No Overload and Server The details
of the mapping between ILA and IGA are described as below Here we define
the local IP addresses as the Internal Local Addresses (ILA) and the global IP
addresses as the Inside Global Address (IGA)
One to One In One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps one ILA
to one IGA
Many to One In Many-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps
multiple ILA to one IGA This is equivalent to SUA (ie PAT port
address translation) ZyXELs Single User Account feature that previous
ZyNOS routers supported (the SUA is optional in todays Prestige
routers)
Many to Many Overload In Many-to-Many Overload mode the
P-660HW-Dx v2 maps the multiple ILA to shared IGA
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
9
Many One-to-One In Many One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2
maps each ILA to unique IGA
Server In Server mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps multiple inside
servers to one global IP address This allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types behind the NAT for outside access Note if
you want to map each server to one unique IGA please use the
One-to-One mode
The following table summarizes the five types
NAT Type IP Mapping
One-to-One ILA1lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-One
(SUAPAT)
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-Many
Overload
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA1
ILA4lt---gtIGA2
Many
One-to-One
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA3
ILA4lt---gtIGA4
Server Server 1 IPlt---gtIGA1
Server 2 IPlt---gtIGA1
14 How many network users can the SUANAT support
The Prestige does not limit the number of the users but the number of the
sessions The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports 2048 sessions that you can use the
ip nat session command in CLI to see You can also use bdquoip nat hashTable
wanif0‟ to view the current active NAT sessions
15 What are Device filters and Protocol filters
In ZyNOS the filters have been separated into two groups One group is
called device filter group and the other is called protocol filter
group Generic filters belong to the device filter group TCPIP and IPX filters
belong to the protocol filter group You can configure the filter rule in CLI
Note In ZyNOS you can not mix different filter groups in the same filter set
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
10
16 How can I protect against IP spoofing attacks
The P-660HW-Dx v2s filter sets provide a means to protect against IP
spoofing attacks The basic scheme is as follows
For the input data filter
Deny packets from the outside that claim to be from the inside
Allow everything that is not spoofing us
Filter rule setup
Filter type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Source IP Addr =abcd
Source IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action Not Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
For the output data filters
Deny bounce back packet
Allow packets that originate from us
Filter rule setup
Filter Type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Destination IP Addr =abcd
Destination IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action No Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
11
Product FAQ
1 How can I manage P-660HW-Dx v2
Multilingual Embedded Web GUI for Local and Remote management
CLI (Command-line interface)
Telnet support (Administrator Password Protected ) for remote
configuration change and status monitoring
FTP TFTP sever firmware upgrade and configuration backup and
restore are supported(Administrator Password Protected)
2 What is the default password for Web Configurator
There are two different accounts for P-660HW-Dx v2 Web Configurator
Common User Account and Administrator Account
By factory default the password for the two accounts are
Common User Account user
Administrator Account 1234
You can change the password after you logging in the Web Configurator
Please record your new password whenever you change it The system
will lock you out if you have forgotten your password
3 Whatrsquos the difference between lsquoCommon User Accountrsquo and
lsquoAdministrator Accountrsquo
For Common User Account it can only access the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 and check the current system status
For Administrator Account besides accessing the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 it can also access Winzard setup Advanced setup of
P-660HW-Dx v2
Moreover only with Administrator Password you could manage the
P-660HW-Dx v2 via FTPTFTP or Telnet
4 How do I know the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address assigned by the
ISP
You can view My WAN IP ltfrom ISPgt xxxx shown in Web Configurator
bdquoStatus-gtDevice Information -gtWAN Information‟ to check this IP address
5 What is the micro filter or splitter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
12
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
6 The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Bridge and Router mode whats the
difference between them
When the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet which means
only the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use bridge mode which works as an ADSL modem to
connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account and limit
only one computer to access the Internet
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to add another Internet sharing device
like a router In this case we use the router mode which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
7 How do I know I am using PPPoE
PPPoE requires a user account to login to the providers server If you need to
configure a user name and password on your computer to connect to the ISP
you are probably using PPPoE If you are simply connected to the Internet
when you turn on your computer you probably are not You can also check
your ISP or the information sheet given by the ISP Please choose PPPoE as
the encapsulation type in the P-660HW-Dx v2 if the ISP uses PPPoE
8 Why does my provider use PPPoE
PPPoE emulates a familiar Dial-Up connection It allows your ISP to provide
services using their existing network configuration over the broadband
connections Besides PPPoE supports a broad range of existing applications
and service including authentication accounting secure access and
configuration management
9 What is DDNS
The Dynamic DNS service allows you to alias a dynamic IP address to a static
hostname allowing your computer to be more easily accessed from various
locations on the Internet To use the service you must first apply an account
from several free Web servers such as httpwwwdyndnsorg
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to reach our internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
13
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
updates this IP to DDNS server so that the server can update its IP-to-DNS
entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is updated the DNS
name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still usable
10 When do I need DDNS service
When you want your internal server to be accessed by using DNS name rather
than using the dynamic IP address we can use the DDNS service The DDNS
server allows to alias a dynamic IP address to a static hostname Whenever
the ISP assigns you a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2 sends this IP to the DDNS
server for its updates
11 What is DDNS wildcard Does the P-660HW-Dx v2 support DDNS
wildcard
Some DDNS servers support the wildcard feature which allows the hostname
yourhostdyndnsorg to be aliased to the same IP address as
yourhostdyndnsorg This feature is useful when there are multiple servers
inside and you want users to be able to use things such as
wwwyourhostdyndnsorg and still reach your hostname
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports DDNS wildcard that httpwwwdyndnsorg
supports When using wildcard you simply enter yourhostdyndnsorg in the
Host field in Menu 11 Configure Dynamic DNS
12 Can the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA handle IPSec packets sent by the
IPSec gateway
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA can handle IPSec ESP Tunneling mode We
know when packets go through SUA SUA will change the source IP address
and source port for the host To pass IPSec packets SUA must understand
the ESP packet with protocol number 50 replace the source IP address of the
IPSec gateway to the routers WAN IP address However SUA should not
change the source port of the UDP packets which are used for key
managements Because the remote gateway checks this source port during
connections the port thus is not allowed to be changed
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
14
13 How do I setup my P-660HW-Dx v2 for routing IPSec packets over
SUA
For outgoing IPSec tunnels no extra setting is required
For forwarding the inbound IPSec ESP tunnel A Default server set is required
You could configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding -gt Default Server Setup
It is because SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users So to make an internal server
for outside access we must specify the service port and the LAN IP of this
server in Web configurator Thus SUA is able to forward the incoming packets
to the requested service behind SUA and the outside users access the server
using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address So we have to configure the
internal IPsec client as a default server (unspecified service port) when it acts
a server gateway
14 What is Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping allocates the bandwidth to WAN dynamically and aims at
boosting the efficiency of the bandwidth If there are serveral VCs in the
P-660HW-Dx v2 but only one VC activated at one time the P-660HW-Dx v2
allocates all the Bandwidth to the VC and the VC gets full bandwidth If another
VCs are activated later the bandwidth is yield to other VCs after ward
15 Why do we perform traffic shaping in the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 must manage traffic fairly and provide bandwidth
allocation for different sorts of applications such as voice video and data All
applications have their own natural bit rate Large data transactions have a
fluctuating natural bit rate The P-660HW-Dx v2 is able to support variable
traffic among different virtual connections Certain traffic may be discarded if
the virtual connection experiences congestion Traffic shaping defines a set of
actions taken by the P-660HW-Dx v2 to avoid congestion traffic shaping takes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
15
measures to adapt to unpredictable fluctuations in traffic flows and other
problems among virtual connections
16 What do the parameters (PCR SCR MBS) mean
Traffic shaping parameters (PCR SCR MBS) can be set in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt ATM Setup
Peak Cell Rate(PCR) The maximum bandwidth allocated to this connection
The VC connection throughput is limited by PCR
Sustainable Cell Rate(SCR) The least guaranteed bandwidth of a VC
When there are multi-VCs on the same line the VC throughput is guaranteed
by SCR
Maximum Burst Size(MBS) The amount of cells transmitted through this
VC at the Peak Cell Rate before yielding to other VCs Total bandwidth of the
line is dedicated to single VC if there is only one VC on the line However as
the other VC asking the bandwidth the MBS defines the maximum number of
cells transmitted via this VC with Peak Cell rate before yielding to other VCs
The P-660HW-Dx v2 holds the parameters for shaping the traffic among its
virtual channels If you do not need traffic shaping please set SCR = 0 MBS =
0 and PCR as the maximum value according to the line rate (for example 23
Mbps line rate will result PCR as 5424 cellsec)
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
Constant bit rate(CBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that requires
the user to determine a fixed bandwidth requirement at the time the connection
is set up so that the data can be sent in a steady stream CBR service is often
used when transmitting fixed-rate uncompressed video
Unspecified bit rate(UBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that does
not guarantee any throughput levels and uses only available bandwidth UBR
is often used when transmitting data that can tolerate delays such as e-mail
Variable bit rate(VBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that allows
users to specify a throughput capacity (ie a peak rate) and a sustained rate
but data is not sent evenly You can select VBR for bursty traffic and
bandwidth sharing with other applications It contains two subclasses
Variable bit rate nonreal time (VBR-nRT)
Variable bit rate real time (VBR-RT)
18 What is content filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
16
Internet Content filter allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies
tailored to your needs Content filter gives you the ability to block web sites that
contain key words (that you specify) in the URL You can set a schedule for
when the P-660HW-Dx v2 performs content filtering You can also specify
trusted IP Addresses on LAN for which the P-660HW-Dx v2 will not perform
content filtering You can configure the details about it in Web Configurator
Advanced setup Security -gt Content Filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
17
ADSL FAQ
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems
ADSL provides a dedicated service over a single telephone line cable
modems offer a dedicated service over a shared media While cable modems
have greater downstream bandwidth capabilities (up to 30 Mbps) that
bandwidth is shared among all users on a line and will therefore vary perhaps
dramatically as more users in a neighborhood get online at the same time
Cable modem upstream traffic will in many cases be slower than ADSL either
because the particular cable modem is inherently slower or because of rate
reductions caused by contention for upstream bandwidth slots The big
difference between ADSL and cable modems however is the number of lines
available to each There are no more than 12 million homes passed today that
can support two-way cable modem transmissions and while the figure also
grows steadily it will not catch up with telephone lines for many years
Additionally many of the older cable networks are not capable of offering a
return channel consequently such networks will need significant upgrading
before they can offer high bandwidth services
2 What is the expected throughput
In our test we can get about 16Mbps data rate on 15Kft using the 26AWG
loop The shorter the loop the better the throughput is
3 What is the microfilter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up
You can see the DSL LED Green on the P-660HW-Dx v2s front panel is on
when the ADSL physical layer is up
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL
Depending on the line quality the P-660HW-Dx v2 uses Fall Back and Fall
Forward to automatically adjust the date rate
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
18
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing
Though the LLC-based multiplexing can carry multiple protocols over a single
VC it requires extra header information to identify the protocol being carried
on the virtual circuit (VC) The VC-based multiplexing needs a separate VC for
carrying each protocol but it does not need the extra headers Therefore the
VC-based multiplexing is more efficient
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics
You can use the following CI commands to check the ADSL line
statistics
CIgt wan adsl perfdata
CIgt wan adsl status
CIgt wan adsl linedata far
CIgt wan adsl linedata near
You can also do it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Diagnostic -gt DSL Line -gt DSL Status
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector
The signaling pins on the P-660HW-Dx v2s ADSL connector are pin 3 and pin
4 The middle two pins for a RJ11 cable
9 What is triple play
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
19
More and more TelcoISPs are providing three kinds of services (VoIP Video
and Internet) over one existing ADSL connection
The different services (such as video VoIP and Internet access) require
different Qulity of Service
The high priority is Voice (VoIP) data
The Medium priority is Video (IPTV) data
The low priority is internet access such as ftp etc hellip
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus you can configure each PVC separately to assign different
QoS to different application
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
20
Firewall FAQ
General
1 What is a network firewall
A firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control
policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to
protect a trusted network from an untrusted network The firewall can be
thought of two mechanisms One to block the traffic and the other to permit
traffic
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure
The P-660HW-Dx v2 is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks such as Ping of Death SYN Flood LAND
attack IP Spoofing etc It also uses stateful packet inspection to determine if
an inbound connection is allowed through the firewall to the private LAN The
P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Network Address Translation (NAT) which
translates the private local addresses to one or multiple public addresses This
adds a level of security since the clients on the private LAN are invisible to the
Internet
3 What are the basic types of firewalls
Conceptually there are three types of firewalls
1 Packet Filtering Firewall
2 Application-level Firewall
3 Stateful Inspection Firewall
Packet Filtering Firewalls generally make their decisions based on the header
information in individual packets These headers information include the
source destination addresses and ports of the packets
Application-level Firewalls generally are hosts running proxy servers which
permit no traffic directly between networks and which perform logging and
auditing of traffic passing through them A proxy server is an application
gateway or circuit-level gateway that runs on top of general operating system
such as UNIX or Windows NT It hides valuable data by requiring users to
communicate with secure systems by mean of a proxy A key drawback of this
device is performance
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
21
Stateful Inspection Firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against
defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP
address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the
integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols The flexible
nature of Stateful Inspection firewalls generally provides the best speed and
transparency however they may lack the granular application level access
control or caching that some proxies support
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2
1 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall inspects packets contents and IP
headers It is applicable to all protocols that understands data in the
packet is intended for other layers from network layer up to the
application layer
2 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall performs stateful inspection It takes into
account the state of connections it handles so that for example a
legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request
for that packet and allowed in Conversely an incoming packet
masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be
blocked
3 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall uses session filtering ie smart rules
that enhance the filtering process and control the network session
rather than control individual packets in a session
4 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall is fast It uses a hashing function to
search the matched session cache instead of going through every
individual rule for a packet
5 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall provides email service to notify you for
routine reports and when alerts occur
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet filtering and
NAT built-in
With the spectacular growth of the Internet and online access companies that
do business on the Internet face greater security threats Although packet filter
and NAT restrict access to particular computers and networks however for
the other companies this security may be insufficient because packets filters
typically cannot maintain session state Thus for greater security a firewall is
considered
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a
connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable
a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
22
There are four types of DoS attacks
1 Those that exploits bugs in a TCPIP implementation such as Ping of
Death and Teardrop
2 Those that exploits weaknesses in the TCPIP specification such as
SYN Flood and LAND Attacks
3 Brute-force attacks that flood a network with useless data such as
Smurf attack
4 IP Spoofing
7 What is Ping of Death attack
Ping of Death uses a PING utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the
maximum 65535 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification The oversize
packet is then sent to an unsuspecting system Systems may crash hang or
reboot
8 What is Teardrop attack
Teardrop attack exploits weakness in the reassemble of the IP packet
fragments As data is transmitted through a network IP packets are often
broken up into smaller chunks Each fragment looks like the original packet
except that it contains an offset field The Teardrop program creates a series of
IP fragments with overlapping offset fields When these fragments are
reassembled at the destination some systems will crash hang or reboot
9 What is SYN Flood attack
SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each
packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response While the
targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK it queues up all
outstanding SYN-ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue
SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when
an internal timer (which is set a relatively long intervals) terminates the TCP
three-way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all
incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users
10 What is LAND attack
In a LAN attack hackers flood SYN packets to the network with a spoofed
source IP address of the targeted system This makes it appear as if the host
computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the
target system tries to respond to itself
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
23
11 What is Brute-force attack
A Brute-force attack such as Smurf attack targets a feature in the IP
specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting to quickly flood the
target network with useless data A Smurf hacker flood a destination IP
address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network the router will
broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network If there
are numerous hosts this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request
packet the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the intermediary
network but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address
known as the victim network This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all
available bandwidth making communications impossible
12 What is IP Spoofing attack
Many DoS attacks also use IP Spoofing as part of their attack IP Spoofing
may be used to break into systems to hide the hackers identity or to magnify
the effect of the DoS attack IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain
unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking
that the communications are coming from within the trusted network To
engage in IP Spoofing a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it
appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed
through the router or firewall
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
There are two default ACLs pre-configured in the P-660HW-Dx v2 one allows
all connections from LAN to WAN and the other blocks all connections from
WAN to LAN except of the DHCP packets
Configuration
1 How do I configure the firewall
You can use the Web Configurator to configure the firewall for P-660HW-Dx v2
By factory default if you connect your PC to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 you can access Web Configurator via bdquohttp19216811‟
Note Donrsquot forget to type in the Administrator Password
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall
There are several ways to protect others from touching the settings of your
firewall
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
24
1 Change the default Administrator password since it is required when
setting up the firewall
2 Limit who can access to your P-660HW-Dx v2‟s Web Configurator or
CLI You can enter the IP address of the secured LAN host in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt
[Service] -gtSecured Client IP to allow special access to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
The default value in this field is 0000 which means you do not care which
host is trying to telnet your P-660HW-Dx v2 or accessthe Web
Configurator of
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN
There are four reasons that WWWTelnet from WAN is blocked
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable Telnet from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow WWWTelnet connection
from WAN The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
WWW (For accessing Web Configurator)
Source IP= Remote trusted host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP80
Action=Forward
TELNET (For accessing Command Line Interface)
Source IP= Telnet Client host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP23
Action=Forward
(2)You have disabled WWWTelnet service in Web Configurator Advanced
setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
25
(3) WWWTelnet service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host
entered in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote
MGNT
(4)A filter set which blocks WWWTelnet from WAN is applied to WAN node
You can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using FTP over
WAN
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable FTP from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow FTP connection from WAN
The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
Source IP= FTP host
Destination IP= P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP
Service= FTP TCP21 TCP20
Action=Forward
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
26
(2) You have disabled FTP service in Web Configurator Advanced setup
Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(3) FTP service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host entered
in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(4) A filter set which blocks FTP from WAN is applied to WAN node You
can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
Log and Alert
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the firewall log immediately when the packet
matches a firewall rule The log for Default Firewall Policy (LAN to WAN WAN
to LAN WAN to WAN) is generated automatically with factory default setting
but you can change it in Web Configurator
2 What does the log show to us
The log supports up to 128 entries There are 5 columns for each entry Please
see the example shown below
3 How do I view the firewall log
All logs generated in P-660HW-Dx v2 including firewall logs IPSec logs
system logs are migrated to centralized logs So you can view firewall logs in
Centralized logs Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs
-gtView Log
The log keeps 128 entries the new entries will overwrite the old entries when
the log has over 128 entries
Before you can view firewall logs there are two steps you need to do
(1) Enable log function in Centralized logs setup via either one of the following
methods
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
27
Web configuration Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log
Settings check Access Control and Attacks options depending on
your real situation
CI command sys logs category [access | attack]
(2) Enable log function in firewall default policy or in firewall rules
After the above two steps you can view firewall logs via
Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gtView
Log
View the log by CI command sys logs disp
You can also view Centralized logs via mail or syslog please configure mail
server or Unix Syslog server in Web configuration Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the alert when an attack is detected by the
firewall and sends it via Email So to send the alert you must configure the
mail server and Email address using Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings You can also specify how frequently
you want to receive the alert in it
5 What is the difference between the log and alert
A log entry is just added to the log inside the P-660HW-Dx v2 and e-mailed
together with all other log entries at the scheduled time as configured An alert
is e-mailed immediately after an attacked is detected
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
28
Wireless FAQ
General FAQ
1 What is a Wireless LAN
Wireless LANs provide all the functionality of wired LANs without the need for
physical connections (wires) Data is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier
and transmitted through the ether Typical bit-rates are 11Mbps and 54Mbps
although in practice data throughput is half of this Wireless LANs can be
formed simply by equipping PCs with wireless NICs If connectivity to a wired
LAN is required an Access Point (AP) is used as a bridging device APs are
typically located close to the centre of the wireless client population
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN
Mobility Wireless LAN systems can provide LAN users with access to
real-time information anywhere in their organization This mobility supports
productivity and service opportunities not possible with wired networks
Installation Speed and Simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be
fast and easy and can eliminate the need to pull cable through walls and
ceilings
Installation Flexibility Wireless technology allows the network to go where
wire cannot go
Reduced Cost-of-Ownership While the initial investment required for
wireless LAN hardware can be higher than the cost of wired LAN hardware
overall installation expenses and life-cycle costs can be significantly lower
Long-term cost benefits are greatest in dynamic environments requiring
frequent moves and changes
Scalability Wireless LAN systems can be configured in a variety of topologies
to meet the needs of specific applications and installations Configurations are
easily changed and range from peer-to-peer networks suitable for a small
number of users to full infrastructure networks of thousands of users that
enable roaming over a broad area
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN
The speed of Wireless LAN is still relatively slower than wired LAN The setup
cost of Wireless LAN is relative high because the equipment cost including
access point and PCMCIA Wireless LAN card is higher than hubs and CAT 5
cables
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
29
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks
Airports hotels and even coffee shops like Starbucks are deploying 80211
networks so people can wirelessly surf the Internet with their laptops
5 What is an Access Point
The AP (access point also known as a base station) is the wireless server that
with an antenna and a wired Ethernet connection that broadcasts information
using radio signals AP typically acts as a bridge for the clients It can pass
information to wireless LAN cards that have been installed in computers or
laptops allowing those computers to connect to the campus network and the
Internet without wires
6 Whatrsquos the difference between IEEE80211abg
The IEEE 80211 is a wireless LAN industry standard and the objective of
IEEE 80211 is to make sure that different manufactures wireless LAN devices
can communicate to each other Below is a brief comparison for the
IEEE80211 abg
Publish
Time
Frequency
Band(GHZ)
Data Rate(Mbps) Compatibility
IEEE80211a 1999 UNII Band
515~5825
691218243648
54
Only work with
80211a
devices
IEEE80211b 1999 ISM Band
24~24835
125511 -
IEEE80211g 2001 ISM Band
24~24835
691218243648
54
Backward
compatible with
80211b
devices
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
Yes As long as the products comply to the same IEEE 80211 standard The
Wi-Fi logo is used to define 80211b compatible products Wi-Fi5 is a
compatibility standard for 80211a products running in the 5GHz band
8 What is Wi-Fi
The Wi-Fi logo signifies that a product is interoperable with wireless
networking equipment from other vendors A Wi-Fi logo product has been
tested and certified by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA)
The Socket Wireless LAN Card is Wi-Fi certified and that means that it will
work (interoperate) with any brand of Access Point that is also Wi-Fi certified
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band
Various spread spectrum radio communication applications use the 24 GHz
band This includes WLAN systems (not necessarily of the type IEEE
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
30
80211b) cordless phones wireless medical telemetry equipment and
Bluetoothtrade short-range wireless applications which include connecting
printers to computers and connecting modems or hands-free kits to mobile
phones
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device
Any time devices are operated in the same frequency band there is the
potential for interference
Both the 80211bg and Bluetooth devices occupy the same24-to-2483-GHz
unlicensed frequency range-the same band But a Bluetooth device would not
interfere with other 80211 devices much more than another 80211 device
would interefere While more collisions are possible with the introduction of a
Bluetooth device they are also possible with the introduction of another 80211
device or a new 24 GHz cordless phone for that matter But BlueTooth
devices are usually low-power so the effects that a Bluetooth device may have
on an 80211 network if any arent far-reaching
11 Can radio signals pass through wall
Transmitting through a wall is possible depending upon the material used in its
construction In general metals and substances with a high water content do
not allow radio waves to pass through Metals reflect radio waves and concrete
attenuates radio waves The amount of attenuation suffered in passing through
concrete will be a function of its thickness and amount of metal re-enforcement
used
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference among WLAN
products
Factors of interference
(1) Obstacles walls ceilings furniturehellip etc
(2) Building Materials metal door aluminum studs
(3) Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors
Solution
(1) Minimizing the number of walls and ceilings
(2) Antenna is positioned for best reception
(3) Keep WLAN products away from electrical devices eg microwaves
monitors electric motorshellip etc
(4) Add additional APs if necessary
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN
WLANs are generally privately owned wireless systems that are deployed in a
corporation warehouse hospital or educational campus setting Data rates
are high and there are no per-packet charges for data transmission
WWANs are generally publicly shared data networks designed to provide
coverage in metropolitan areas and along traffic corridors WWANs are owned
by a service provider or carrier Data rates are low and charges are based on
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
31
usage Specialized applications are characteristically designed around short
burst messaging
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage any
hardware
Yes it will not harm the hardware but the module will not be detected and
work after inserting to the slot You need to reboot the router to initialize the
module
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
The wireless security modes supported on P-660HW-Dx v2 are Static
WEP WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK and WPA2
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
It supports IEEE 80211bgg+ standard
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering
Yes it supports up to 32 MAC Address filtering
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption
Yes it means that the AP on P-660HW-Dx v2 will automatically decelerate
when devices move beyond the optimal range or other interference is present
If the device moves back within the range of a higher-speed transmission the
connection will automatically speed up again Rate shifting is a physical-layer
mechanism transparent to the user and the upper layers of the protocol stack
Advanced FAQ
1 What is Ad Hoc mode
A wireless network consists of a number of stations without using an access
point or any connection to a wired network
2 What is Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure mode implies connectivity to a wired communications
infrastructure If such connectivity is required the Access Points must be used
to connect to the wired LAN backbone Wireless clients have their
configurations set for infrastructure mode in order to utilise access points
relaying
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area
This depends on the surrounding terrain the diameter of the client population
and the number of clients If an area is large with dispersed pockets of
populations then extension points can be used for extend coverage
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
32
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (DSSS)
DSSS spreads its signal continuously over a wide frequency band DSSS
maps the information bearing bit-pattern at the sending station into a higher
data rate bit sequence using a chipping code The chipping code (also known
as processing gain) introduces redundancy which allows data recovery if
certain bit errors occur during transmission The FCC rules the minimum
processing gain should be 10 typical systems use processing gains of 20
IEEE 80211b specifies the use of DSSS
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (FHSS)
FHSS uses a narrowband carrier which hops through a predefined sequence
of several frequencies at a specific rate This avoids problems with fixed
channel narrowband noise and simple jamming Both transmitter and receiver
must have their hopping sequences synchronized to create the effect of a
single logical channel To an unsynchronised receiver an FHSS transmission
appears to be short-duration impulse noise 80211 may use FHSS or DSSS
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
No Provided the antenna is optimally designed for 24GHz or 5GHz operation
WLAN NICs often include an internal antenna which may provide sufficient
reception
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range
This frequency range has been set aside by the FCC and is generally labeled
the ISM band A few years ago Apple and several other large corporations
requested that the FCC allow the development of wireless networks within this
frequency range What we have today is a protocol and system that allows for
unlicensed use of radios within a prescribed power level The ISM band is
populated by Industrial Scientific and Medical devices that are all low power
devices but can interfere with each other
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID)
SSID is a configurable identification that allows clients to communicate to the
appropriate base station With proper configuration only clients that are
configured with the same SSID can communicate with base stations having
the same SSID SSID from a security point of view acts as a simple single
shared password between base stations and clients
9 What is an ESSID
ESSID stands for Extended Service Set Identifier and identifies the wireless
LAN The ESSID of the mobile device must match the ESSID of the AP to
communicate with the AP The ESSID is a 32-character maximum string and is
case-sensitive
Security FAQ
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Points
radio link
To secure the date across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Point‟s radio link we
could select any one of the security mode Static 64128256 bit WEP
WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK WPA2
2 What is WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security mechanism defined within the
80211 standard and designed to make the security of the wireless medium
equal to that of a cable (wire) WEP data encryption was designed to prevent
access to the network by intruders and to prevent the capture of wireless
LAN traffic through eavesdropping WEP allows the administrator to define a
set of respective Keys for each wireless network user based on a Key
String passed through the WEP encryption algorithm Access is denied by
anyone who does not have an assigned key Note WEP has shown to have
fundamental flaws in its key generation processing
3 What is WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN You can refer to
the User Guide for more information about it
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP
40 bit WEP and 64 bit WEP are the same encryption level and can interoperate
The lower level of WEP encryption uses a 40 bit (10 Hex character) as secret
key (set by user) and a 24 bit Initialization Vector (not under user control)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
34
(40+24=64) Some vendors refer to this level of WEP as 40 bit others as 64
bit
5 What is a WEP key
A WEP key is a user defined string of characters used to encrypt and decrypt
data
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP
No 128-bit WEP will not communicate with 64-bit WEP Although 128 bit WEP
also uses a 24 bit Initialization Vector but it uses a 104 bit as secret key Users
need to use the same encryption level in order to make a connection
7 Can the SSID be encrypted
No WEP only encrypts the data packets not the 80211 management
packetsThe SSID is in the beacon and probe management messages and
SSID goes over the air in clear text This makes obtaining the SSID easy by
sniffing 80211 wireless traffic
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff the SSID
Many APs by default have broadcasting the SSID turned on Sniffers typically
will find the SSID in the broadcast beacon packets Turning off the broadcast of
SSID in the beacon message (a common practice) does not prevent getting
the SSID since the SSID is sent in the clear in the probe message when a
client associates to an AP a sniffer just has to wait for a valid user to associate
to the network to see the SSID
9 What are Insertion Attacks
The insertion attacks are based on placing unauthorized devices on the
wireless network without going through a security process and review
10 What is Wireless Sniffer
An attacker can sniff and capture legitimate traffic Many of the sniffer tools for
Ethernet are based on capturing the first part of the connection session where
the data would typically include the username and password An intruder can
masquerade as that user by using this captured information An intruder who
monitors the wireless network can apply this same attack principle on the
wireless
11 What is OTIST How do I use it
OTIST is acronym for ZyXEL‟s bdquoOne Touch Intelligent Security Technology‟
It enables P-660HW-Dx v2 and ZyXEL‟s OTIST supported Wireless adapters
to establish connections of the WPA-PSK security mode automatically with
just one touch at the reset button on rear panel
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
35
To use this function on P-660HW-Dx v2 you could press the reset button on
P-660HW-Dx v2 for 1~5 seconds the OTIST is actived The P-660HW-Dx v2
will enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA-PSK automatically if no
WLAN security has been set The default setup key for OTIST is bdquo01234567‟
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
36
Application Notes
General Application Notes
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode
Setup your workstation
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
If the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet that means only
the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as an ADSL bridge
modem to connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account
and limit only one computer to access the Internet
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
To connect your computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN port the computer
must have an Ethernet adapter card installed For connecting a single
computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2 we use a Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
In most cases the IP address of the computer is assigned by the ISP
dynamically so you have to configure the computer as a DHCP client which
obtains the IP from the ISP using DHCP protocol The ISP may also provide
the gateway DNS via DHCP if they are available Otherwise please enter the
static IP addresses for all that the ISP gives to you in the network TCPIP
settings For Windows we check the option Obtain an IP address
automatically in its TCPIP setup please see the example shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
37
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
bridge mode We will use Web Configurator to guide you through the related
menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as bridge mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
(2)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
38
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For example
LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
(2) Turn off DHCP Server and configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 in
Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN We use 19216811 as
the LAN IP for P-660HW-Dx v2 in this case
Step 1 Disactive DHCP Server and apply it
Step 2 Assign an IP to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx v2 eg
19216811
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to install an Internet sharing device like
a router In this case we use the P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
Connect the LAN ports of all computers to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 using Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
Since the P-660HW-Dx v2 is set to DHCP server as default so you need only
to configure the workstations as the DHCP clients in the networking settings In
this case the IP address of the computer is assigned by the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 can also provide the DNS to the clients via DHCP if it is
available For this setup in Windows we check the option Obtain an IP
address automatically in its TCPIP setup Please see the example shown
below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
39
Set up your P-660HW-Dx v2 under routing mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
Routing mode for routing traffic We will use Web Configurator to guide you
through the related menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as routing mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For
example LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
IP Address
Assignment
Set to Dynamic if the ISP provides the IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2
dynamically Otherwise set to Static and enter the IP in the IP
Address field
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
40
(2) Configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 and the DHCP settings in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
What is DHCP Relay
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In addition to the
DHCP server feature the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports the DHCP relay function
When it is configured as DHCP server it assigns the IP addresses to the LAN
clients When it is configured as DHCP relay it is responsible for forwarding
the requests and responses negotiating between the DHCP clients and the
server See figure 1
Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
We could set the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay by the following command
in CLI
Ip dhcp enif0 mode relay
Ip dhcp enif0 relay server [Server IP Address]
4 SUA Notes
Tested SUANAT Applications (eg Cu-SeeMe ICQ NetMeeting)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
41
Introduction
Generally SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users However some applications
such as Cu-SeeMe and ICQ will need to connect to the local user behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 In such case a SUA server must be configured to forward
the incoming packets to the true destination behind SUA After the required
server are configured in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding the internal server or client applications can be accessed
by using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP Address
SUA Supporting Table
The following are the required Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding for the various applications running SUA mode
ZyXEL SUA Supporting Table1
Application
Required Settings in Port Forwarding
PortIP
Outgoing Connection Incoming
Connection
HTTP None 80client IP
FTP None 21client IP
TELNET None 23client IP
(and active Telnet
service from WAN)
POP3 None 110client IP
SMTP None 25client IP
mIRC
None for Chat
For DCC please set
DefaultClient IP
Windows PPTP None 1723client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
42
ICQ 99a None for Chat
For DCC please set
ICQ -gt preference -gt
connections -gt firewall
and set the firewall time
out to 80 seconds in
firewall setting
Defaultclient IP
ICQ 2000b None for Chat None for Chat
ICQ Phone 2000b None 6701client IP
Cornell 11 Cu-SeeMe None 7648client IP
White Pine 312 Cu-SeeMe2 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
White Pine 40 Cu-SeeMe 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
Microsoft NetMeeting 21 amp
3013
None 1720client IP
1503client IP
Cisco IPTV 200 None
RealPlayer G2 None
VDOLive None
Quake1064 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeII2305 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeIII105 beta None
StartCraft 6112client IP
Quick Time 40 None
pcAnywhere 80 None
5631client IP
5632client IP
22client IP
IPsec (ESP tunneling mode) None (one client only) DefaultClient
Microsoft Messenger Service
30 6901client IP 6901client IP
Microsoft Messenger Service
46 47 50hellip
(none UPnP)6
None for Chat File
transfer Video and Voice
None for Chat File
transfer Video and
Voice
Net2Phone None 6701client IP
Network Time Protocol (NTP) None 123 server IP
Win2k Terminal Server None 3389server IP
Remote Anything None 3996 - 4000client IP
Virtual Network Computing None 5500client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
43
(VNC) 5800client IP
5900client IP
AIM (AOL Instant Messenger) None for Chat and IM None for Chat and
IM
e-Donkey None 4661 - 4662client IP
POLYCOM Video
Conferencing None Defaultclient IP
iVISTA 41 None 80server IP
Microsoft Xbox Live7 None NA 1 Since SUA enables your LAN to appear as a single computer to the Internet
it is not possible to configure similar servers on the same LAN behind SUA 2 Because White Pine Cu-SeeMe uses dedicate ports (port 7648 amp port 24032)
to transmit and receive data therefore only one local Cu-SeeMe is allowed
within the same LAN 3 In SUA mode only one local NetMeeting user is allowed because the
outsiders can not distinguish between local users using the same internet IP 4 Certain Quake servers do not allow multiple users to login using the same
unique IP so only one Quake user will be allowed in this case Moreover
when a Quake server is configured behind SUA P-660HW-Dx v2 will not be
able to provide information of that server on the internet 5 Quake II has the same limitations as that of Quake I 6 P-660HW-Dx v2 supports MSN Messenger 46 47 50hellip video voice
pass-through NAT In addition for the Windows OS supported UPnP
(Universal Plug and Play) such as Windows XP and Windows ME UPnP
supported in P-660HW-Dx v2 is an alternative solution to pass through MSN
Messenger video voice traffic For more detail please refer to UPnP
application note 7 P-660HW-Dx v2 support Microsoft Xbox Live with factory default
configuration
Configurations
For example if the workstation operating Cu-SeeMe has an IP of 192168134
then the default SUA server must be set to 192168134 The peer Cu-SeeMe
user can reach this workstation by using P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
44
which can be obtained from Web Configurator
Configure an Internal Server behind SUA
Introduction
If you wish you can make internal servers (eg Web ftp or mail server)
accessible for outside users even though SUA makes your LAN appear as a
single machine to the outside world A service is identified by the port number
Also since you need to specify the IP address of a server behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 a server must have a fixed IP address and not be a DHCP
client whose IP address potentially changes each time P-660HW-Dx v2 is
powered on
In addition to the servers for specific services SUA supports a default server
A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for is
forwarded to the default server If the default server is not defined the service
request is simply discarded
Configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
45
To make a server visible to the outside world specify the port number of the
service and the inside address of the server in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The outside users can access
the local server using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address which can be
obtained from Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information
For example
Configuring an internal Web server for outside access (suppose the
Server IP Address is 192168110)
(1) Fill in the service name and server IP Address press button bdquoAdd‟
(2) If add successfully the Web Configurator will display message
bdquoConfiguration updated successfully‟ at the bottom You can see the port
forwarding rule on the same page the default port for Web Server is 80
(3) If you want to change the port for Web Server you could press button
bdquoModify‟ on corresponding rule then modify and apply it
Default port numbers for some services
Service Port Number
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
46
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
Configure a PPTP server behind SUA
Introduction
PPTP is a tunneling protocol defined by the PPTP forum that allows PPP
packets to be encapsulated within Internet Protocol (IP) packets and
forwarded over any IP network including the Internet itself
In order to run the Windows 9x PPTP client you must be able to establish an
IP connection with a tunnel server such as the Windows NT Server 40
Remote Access Server
Windows Dial-Up Networking uses the Internet standard Point-to-Point (PPP)
to provide a secure optimized multiple-protocol network connection over
dial-up telephone lines All data sent over this connection can be encrypted
and compressed and multiple network level protocols (TCPIP NetBEUI and
IPX) can be run correctly Windows NT Domain Login level security is
preserved even across the Internet
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
47
Window98 PPTP Client Internet NT RAS Server Protocol Stack
PPTP appears as new modem type (Virtual Private Networking Adapter) that
can be selected when setting up a connection in the Dial-Up Networking folder
The VPN Adapter type does not appear elsewhere in the system Since PPTP
encapsulates its data stream in the PPP protocol the VPN requires a second
dial-up adapter This second dial-up adapter for VPN is added during the
installation phase of the Upgrade in addition to the first dial-up adapter that
provides PPP support for the analog or ISDN modem
The PPTP is supported in Windows NT and Windows 98 already For
Windows 95 it needs to be upgraded by the Dial-Up Networking 12 upgrade
Configuration
This application note explains how to establish a PPTP connection with a
remote private network in the P-660HW-Dx v2 SUA case In ZyNOS all PPTP
packets can be forwarded to the internal PPTP Server (WinNT server) behind
SUA The port number of the PPTP has to be entered in the Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding on
P-660HW-Dx v2 to forward to the appropriate private IP address of Windows
NT server
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
48
Example
The following example shows how to dial to an ISP via the P-660HW-Dx v2
and then establish a tunnel to a private network There will be three items that
you need to set up for PPTP application these are PPTP server (WinNT)
PPTP client (Win9x) and the P-660HW-Dx v2
(1) PPTP server setup (WinNT)
Add the VPN service from Control Panel -gtNetwork
Add an user account for PPTP logged on user
Enable RAS port
Select the network protocols from RAS such as IPX TCPIP NetBEUI
Set the Internet gateway to P-660HW-Dx v2
(2) PPTP client setup (Win9x)
Add one VPN connection from Dial-Up Networking by entering the
correct username amp password and the IP address of the P-660HW-Dx
v2s Internet IP address for logging to NT RAS server
Set the Internet gateway to the router that is connecting to ISP
(3) P-660HW-Dx v2 setup
Before making a VPN connection from Win9x to WinNT server you
need to connect P-660HW-Dx v2 router to your ISP first
Enter the IP address of the PPTP server (WinNT server) and the
port number for PPTP as shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
49
Select service name as bdquoPPTP‟ fill in the Server IP Address then press button
bdquoAdd‟
When you have finished the above settings you can ping to the remote Win9x
client from WinNT This ping command is used to demonstrate that remote
the Win9x can be reached across the Internet If the Internet connection
between two LANs is achievable you can place a VPN call from the remote
Win9x client
For example Cping 203661132
When a dial-up connection to ISP is established a default gateway is assigned
to the router traffic through that connection Therefore the output below shows
the default gateway of the Win9x client after the dial-up connection has been
established
Before making a VPN connection from the Win9x client to the NT server you
need to know the exact Internet IP address that the ISP assigns to
P-660HW-Dx v2 router in SUA mode and enter this IP address in the VPN
dial-up dialog box You can check this Internet IP address from PNC Monitor or
S Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information If the Internet IP address
is a fixed IP address provided by ISP in SUA mode then you can always use
this IP address for reaching the VPN server
In the following example the IP address 1401131225 is dynamically
assigned by ISP You must enter this IP address in the VPN Server dialog box
for reaching the PPTP server After the VPN link is established you can start
the network protocol application such as IP IPX and NetBEUI
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
50
5 Using Full Feature NAT
When P-660HW-Dx v2 is in Routing mode you can select NAT Option as
Full Feature in Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit
Key Settings
Field Options Description
Network Address
Translation
Full Feature
When you select this option you can select
Address Mapping Set Number 1~8 in the
pull-down menu on the right
None NAT is disabled when you select this option
SUA Only
When you select this option this remote node
will use default SUA Address Mapping Set
You can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat
lookup 255‟ It‟s a read-only sets with two
rules Many-to-One and server mapping
Select Full Feature when you require other
mapping types
Configuring NAT
Address Mapping Sets and NAT Server Sets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
51
The P-660HW-Dx v2 has 8 remote nodes and so allows you to configure 8
NAT Address Mapping Sets You must specify which NAT Address Mapping
Set (1~8) to use in the remote node when you select Full Feature NAT
You can edit 10 rules for each Address Mapping Set You can edit the rules for
Address Mapping Sets 1 in Web Configurator The other Address Mapping
Sets 2~8 can only be configured in CLI (Command Line Interface)
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports We
can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Port Forwarding To use the NAT server sets you‟ve configured a Server
rule must be set up inside the NAT Address Mapping set Please see NAT
Server Sets for further information on how to apply it
When you select SUA Only the P-660HW-Dx v2 will use a default SUA
Address Mapping set for it It has two rules Many-to-One and Server You
can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat lookup 255‟
Please note that the fields in this menu are read-only However the settings of
the rule set 2 can be modified in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The following table explains the fields in this
above screen
Field Description OptionExample
set This is sequence number for Address Mapping Sets 255 for SUA
Internal
Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA)
0000 for the
Many-to-One type
Local End
IP
This is the starting local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0000 and the
End IP is 255255255255
255255255255
Global Start
IP
This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you
have a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start
IP
0000
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
52
Global End
IP This is the ending global IP address (IGA) NA
Type This is the NAT mapping types Many-to-One and
Server
Here we‟ll guide you to configure Address Mapping Sets from Web
Configurator and CLI (Since in Web Configurator we can only edit the rules
for Address Mapping Sets 1 The other Address Mapping Sets 2~8 can only
be configured in CLI)
Now lets begin with Web Configurator
Firstly let‟s come to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping
This menu is for Address Mapping Set 1 you can edit 10 Address Mapping
Rules for Set 1 You can edit or remove a rule by clicking the two buttons on
the rule table
Click the bdquoEditrsquo Button on the rule 1 then you can enter the window in which
you can edit an individual rule and configure the Mapping Type Local and
Global StartEnd IPs
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
53
The following table describes the fields in this screen
Field Description OptionExample
Type You can select one of the five mapping types from the
pull-down menu
1 One-to-One
2 Many-to-One
3 Many-to-Many
Overload
4 Many-to-Many No
Overload
5 Server
Local
IP
Start This is the starting local IP address (ILA) 0000
End
This is the ending local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0000 and the
End IP as 255255255255 This field is NA for
One-to-One type
255255255255
Global
IP
Start This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you have
a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start IP 0000
End
This is the ending global IP address (IGA) This
field is NA for One-to-One Many-to-One and Server
types
2001164
Note For all Local and Global IPs the End IP address must begin after the IP
Start address ie you cannot have an End IP address beginning before the
Start IP address
Configure Address Mapping Sets in CLI
Setp 1 Telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 (We suppose the LAN IP Address of
P-660HW-Dx v2 is 19216811)
Step 2 Select one Address Mapping Set (1~8) by command bdquoip nat
addrmap map [map ] [set name]‟ (set name is optional) Suppose we
configure set 2 in the example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
54
Setp 3 Set NAT address mapping rule for the Address Mapping Set you just
configured (Set 2 in this example) by command bdquoip nat addrmap rule [rule]
[insert | edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP] [global start IP] [global
end IP] [server set ]‟ Suppose we set a Many-to-One rule for set 2 by
command bdquoip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 1 192168110 192168120 172111
172111‟
Setp 4 Save the configuration by command bdquoip nat addrmap save‟ You can
apply the Address Mapping Set 2 to remote nodes in Web Configurator when
you select Full Feature NAT See the intire process as follows
Set 5 You can lookup the successfully configured Address Mapping Sets by
command bdquoip nat addrmap disp‟
Key Settings
CI Command Description
ip nat addrmap map [map] [set
name]
Select NAT address mapping set and set mapping set
name but set name is optional
Example
gt ip nat addrmap map 2 Test
ip nat addrmap rule [rule] [insert |
edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP]
[global start IP] [global end IP] [server
set ]
Set NAT address mapping rule If the ldquotyperdquo is not
ldquoinside-serverrdquo then the ldquotyperdquo field will still need a
dummy value like ldquo0rdquo
Type is 0 - 4 = one-to-one many-to-one
many-to-many-overload many-to-many-non overload
inside-server
Example
gt ip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 3 192168110
192168120 172111 172111
ip nat addrmap clear [map] [rule] Clear the selected rule of the set
ip nat addrmap freememory Discard Changes
ip nat addrmap disp Display nat set information
ip nat addrmap save Save settings
ip nat server load [set] Load the server sets of NAT into buffer
ip nat server disp [1] ldquodisp 1rdquo means to display the NAT server set in buffer
if parameter ldquo1rdquo is omitted then it will display all the
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
55
server sets
ip nat server save Save the NAT server set buffer into flash
ip nat server clear [set] Clear the server set [set] must use ldquosaverdquo command
to let it save into flash
ip nat server edit [rule] active Activate the rule [rule] rule number is 1 to 24 the
number 25-36 is for UPNP application
ip nat server edit [rule] svrport ltstart
portgt ltend portgt
Configure the port range from ltstart port gt to ltend
portgt
ip nat server edit [rule] remotehost
ltstart IPgt ltend IPgt
Configure the IP address range of remote host (Leave
it to be default value if you don‟t need this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] leasetime
ltsecondsgt
Configure the lease time (Leave it to be default value if
you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] rulename
ltstringgt
Configure the name of the rule (Leave it to be default
value if you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] forwardip ltIP
addressgt Configure the LAN IP address to be forwarded
ip nat server edit [rule] protocol
ltTCP|UDP|ALLgt
Configure the protocol to be used TCP UDP or ALL
(it must be capital)
NAT Server Sets
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports
(similar to the old SUA menu of before) If you wish you can make inside
servers for different services eg Web or FTP visible to the outside users
even though NAT makes your network appears as a single machine to the
outside world A server is identified by the port number eg Web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21
As an example (see the following figure) if you have a Web server at
192168136 and a FTP server at 192168133 then you need to specify for
port 80 (Web) the server at IP address 192168136 and for port 21 (FTP)
another at IP address 192168133
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
56
Please note that a server can support more than one service eg a server
can provide both FTP and Mail service while another provides only Web
service
The following procedures show how to configure a server behind NAT
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
Step 2 Select the service name from the pull-down menu and fill in the server
Address on bdquoServer IP Address‟ then click button bdquoAdd‟ to save it
Step 3 You could click the button bdquoEdit‟ on the rule to modify the Service name
Server IP Address StartEnd Port
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please
refer RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers
Service Port Number
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol)
1723
Examples
Internet Access Only
Internet Access with an Internal Server
Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
(1) Internet Access Only
In our Internet Access example we only need one rule where all our ILAs map
to one IGA assigned by the ISP You can just use the default SUA NAT or you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
57
could select Full Feature NAT and select an Address Mapping Set with a
Many-to-One Rule See the following figure
(2) Internet Access with an Internal Server
In this case we do exactly as the figure (use the convenient pre-configured
SUA Only set) and also go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
NAT -gt Port Forwarding to specify the Internet Server behind the NAT as
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
58
below
(3) Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
(One-to-One Many-to-One Server Set mapping types are used)
In this case we have 3 IGAs from the ISP We have two very busy internal FTP
servers and also an internal general server for the web and mail In this case
we want to assign the 3 IGAs by the following way using 4 NAT rules
Rule 1 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
Rule 3 (Many-to-One type) to map the other clients to IGA3 (200003)
Rule 4 (Server type) to map a web server and mail server with ILA3
(192168120) to IGA3 Type Server allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types to other machines behind NAT on the LAN
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
59
Step 1 In this case we need to map ILA to more than one IGA therefore we
must choose the Full Feature option from the NAT field in currently active
remote node and assign IGA3 to P-660HW-Dx v2‟s WAN IP Address
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping to begin configuring Address Mapping Set 1 We can see
there are 10 blank rule table that could be configured See the following setup
for the four rules in our case
Rule 1 Setup Select One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 Setup Selecting One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
60
Rule 3 Setup Select Many-to-One type to map the other clients to IGA3
(200003)
Rule 4 Setup Select Server type to map our web server and mail server with
ILA3 (192168120) to IGA3
Menu Network -gt NAT -gt Address Mapping should look as follows now
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
61
Step 3 Now we configure all other incoming traffic to go to our web server and
mail server from Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
(4) Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some mIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address In this case it is better to
use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types thus each
user login to the server using a unique global IP address The following figure
illustrates this
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
62
One rule configured for using Many-to-Many No Overload mapping type is
shown below
We can also do this by configure threeOne-to-One mapping type rules
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
What is DDNS
The DDNS service an IP Registry provides a public central database where
information such as email addresses hostnames IPs etc can be stored and
retrieved This solves the problems if your DNS server uses an IP associated
with dynamic IPs
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to access the internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
must inform the DDNS server the change of this IP so that the server can
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
63
update its IP-to-DNS entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is
updated the DNS name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still
usable
The DDNS servers the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports currently is
WWWDYNDNSORG where you apply the DNS from and update the WAN IP
to
Setup the DDNS
1 Before configuring the DDNS settings in the P-660HW-Dx v2 you must
register an account from the DDNS server such as
WWWDYNDNSORG first After the registration you have a hostname
for your internal server and a password using to update the IP to the
DDNS server
2 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Dynamic DNS
Select Active Dynamic DNS option
Key Settings
Option Description
Service Provider Enter the DDNS server in this field Currently we support
WWWDYNDNSORG
Active Toggle to Yes
Host Name Enter the hostname you subscribe from the above DDNS server
For example zyxelcomtw
User Name Enter the user name that the DDNS server gives to you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
64
Password Enter the password that the DDNS server gives to you
Enable Wildcard
Enter the hostname for the wildcard function that the
WWWDYNDNSORG supports Note that Wildcard option is
available only when the provider is httpwwwdyndnsorg
7 Network Management Using SNMP
ZyXEL SNMP Implementation
ZyXEL currently includes SNMP support in some P-660HW-Dx v2 routers It is
implemented based on the SNMPv1 so it will be able to communicate with
SNMPv1 NMSs Further users can also add ZyXELs private MIB in the NMS
to monitor and control additional system variables The ZyXELs private MIB
tree is shown in figure 3 For SNMPv1 operation ZyXEL permits one
community string so that the router can belong to only one community and
allows trap messages to be sent to only one NMS manager
Some traps are sent to the SNMP manager when anyone of the following
events happens
1 coldStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine coldstarts the trap will be sent after booting
2 warmStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine warmstarts the trap will be sent after booting
3 linkDown (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is down the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
4 linkUp (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is up the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
5 authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215)
When receiving any SNMP get or set requirement with wrong community
this trap is sent to the manager
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
65
6 whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-MIB)
When the system is going to restart (warmstart) the trap will be sent with the
reason of restart before rebooting
(1) For intentional reboot
In some cases (download new files CI command sys reboot ) reboot is
done intentionally And traps with the message System reboot by user will
be sent
(2) For fatal error
System has to reboot for some fatal errors And traps with the message of the
fatal code will be sent
Downloading ZyXELs private MIB
Configure the P-660HW-Dx v2 for SNMP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
66
The SNMP related settings in P-660HW-Dx v2 are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt SNMP The
following steps describe a simple setup procedure for configuring all SNMP
settings
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Get
Community
Enter the correct Get Community This Get Community must match the
Get- and GetNext community requested from the NMS The default is
public
Set
Community
Enter the correct Set Community This Set Community must match the
Set-community requested from the NMS The default is public
Trusted
Host
Enter the IP address of the NMS The P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will only
respond to SNMP messages coming from this IP address If 0000 is
entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will respond to all NMS
managers
Trap
Community
Enter the community name in each sent trap to the NMS This Trap
Community must match what the NMS is expecting The default is
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
67
public
Trap
Destination
Enter the IP address of the NMS that you wish to send the traps to If
0000 is entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will not send trap any
NMS manager
Note You may need to edit a firewall rule to permit SNMP Packets
8 Using syslog
You can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt
Logs -gt Log Settings -gt Syslog logging
Key Settings
Active Select it to active UNIX Syslog
Syslog IP Address Enter the IP address of the UNIX server that you wish to
send the syslog
Log Facility Select from the 7 different local options The log facility lets you
log the message in different server files Refer to your UNIX manual
9 Using IP Alias
What is IP Alias
In a typical environment a LAN router is required to connect two local
networks The P-660HW-Dx v2 can connect three local networks to the ISP or
a remote node we call this function as IP Alias In this case an internal
router is not required For example the network manager can divide the local
network into three networks and connect them to the Internet using
P-660HW-Dx v2s single user account See the figure below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
68
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports three virtual LAN interfaces via its single
physical Ethernet interface The first network can be configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN -gt DHCP Setup The second
and third networks that we call IP Alias 1 and IP Alias 2 can be configured
in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias
There are three internal virtual LAN interfaces for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to route
the packets fromto the three networks correctly They are enif0 for the major
network enif00 for the IP alias 1 and enif01 for the IP alias 2 Therefore
three routes are created in the P-660HW-Dx v2 as shown below when the
three networks are configured If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP is also enabled
the IP pool for the clients can be any of the three networks
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
69
You can edit filter rule to accept or deny LAN packets fromto the IP alias 12
go through the P-660HW-Dx v2 by command in CLI
lan index [index number]
Usage index number =1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt [set]
Usage set= the corresponding filter set number you‟ve configured
lan save
IP Alias Setup
(1) Edit the first network in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
LAN -gt IPDHCP Setup by configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s first LAN IP
address
Key Settings
DHCP
Setup
If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP server is enabled the IP pool for the clients
can be any of the three networks
TCPIP
Setup
Enter the first LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This will create the
first route in the enif0 interface
(2) Edit the second and third networks in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias by
configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s second and third LAN IP addresses
Key Settings
IP Alias 1 Active it and enter the second LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the second route in the enif00 interface
IP Alias 2 Active it and enter the third LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the third route in the enif01 interface
10 Using IP Policy Routing
What is IP Policy Routing (IPPR)
Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router
takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides
a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet
forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator
Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis
prior to the normal routing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
70
traffic among multiple paths For example if a network has both the Internet
and remote node connections we can route the Web packets to the Internet
using one policy and route the FTP packets to the remote LAN using another
policy See the figure below
Use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths
Benefits
Source-Based Routing - Network administrators can use policy-based
routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections
Quality of Service (QoS)- Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the
precedence or TOS (Type of Service) values in the IP header at the periphery
of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic
Cost Savings- IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on
high-bandwidth high-cost path while using low-path for batch traffic
Load Sharing- Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic
among multiple paths
How does the IPPR work
A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet
meets the criteria The action is taken only when all the criteria are met The
criteria include the source address and port IP protocol (ICMP UDP TCP
etc) destination address and port TOS and precedence (fields in the IP
header) and length The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between
interactive and bulk traffic Interactive applications eg Telnet tend to have
short packets while bulk traffic eg file transfer tends to have large packets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
71
The actions that can be taken include routing the packet to a different gateway
(and hence the outgoing interface) and the TOS and precedence fields in the
IP header IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of ZyNOS in style
and in implementation The policies are divided into sets where related
policies are grouped together A use defines the policies before applying them
to an interface or a remote node in the same fashion as the filters There are
12 policy sets with 6 policies in each set
Setup the IP Policy Routing
Setp 1 Set the index of IP routing policy set rule by command bdquoip
policyrouting set index [set] [rule]‟ Suppose set=1 rule=1 in this
example
Step 2 Suppose we‟d like to edit the rule like this
Policy Set Name=Test
Active= Yes
Criteria
IP Protocol = 6
Type of Service= Dont Care Packet length= 0
Precedence = Dont Care Len Comp= NA
Source
addr start= 19216812 end= 192168120
port start= 0 end= NA
Destination
addr start= 0000 end= NA
port start= 80 end= 80
Action= Matched
Gateway addr = 1921681254 Log= No
Type of Service= No Change
Precedence = No Change
This policy example forces the Web packets originated from the clients with IP
addresses from 19216812 to 192168120 be routed to the remote LAN via
the gateway 1921681254
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
ip policyrouting set name Test
(Set the name as Test of IP routing policy rule )
ip policyrouting set active yes
(Enable the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria protocol 6
(Set the protocol ID as 6(TCP) for the rule)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
72
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the criteria type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria packetlength 0
(Set the packet length as 0 for the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcip 19216812 192168120
(Set the source IP address for the rule Start=19216812 end=192168120)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcport 0
(Set the source port for the rule Start=0)
ip policyrouting set criteria destip 0000
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=0000)
ip policyrouting set criteria destport 80 80
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=80 end=80)
ip policyrouting set action actmatched
(Set the action for the rule Matched)
ip policyrouting set action gatewaytype 0
(Set gateway type for the rule Gateway Address)
ip policyrouting set action gatewayaddr 1921681254
(Set the gateway address for the rule 1921681254)
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the action type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the action precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set action log no
(Set log option for the rule no log)
ip polictrouting set save
(Save the rule)
Step 3 Apply the IP policy routing There are two interfaces to apply the policy
set they are the LAN interface and WAN interface It depends where the
gateway specified in the policy rule is located If the gateway you specified is
located on the local LAN you apply the policy set in LAN interface If the
gateway you specified is located on the remote WAN site you apply the policy
set in WAN interface
Apply to WAN Interface (Suppose we apply it to remote node 1 in the
example)
wan node index 1
wan node ippolicy 1
11 Using Call Scheduling
What is Call Scheduling
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
73
Call scheduling enables the mechanism for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to run the
remote node connection according to the pre-defined schedule This feature is
just like the scheduler in a video recorder which records the program according
to the specified time Users can apply at most 4 schedule sets in Remote Node
The remote node configured with the schedule set could be Forced On
Forced Down Enable Dial-On-Demand or Disable Dial-On-Demand on
specified date and time
How to configure a Call Scheduling
You can configure a call scheduling in CLI
Suppose we want to edit a call schedule set like this
Call Schedule Set =1
Set name=Test
Active= Yes
Start Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 - 12 - 27
How Often= Once
Once
Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 -12 -27
Start Time(hhmm)= 12 00
Duration(hhmm)= 16 00
Action= Enable Dial-on-demand
This schedule example permits a demand call on the line on 1200 am
2005-12-27 The maximum length of time this connection is allowed is 16
hours
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
wan callsch index 1
(Set call schedule index = 1 You must apply this command first before you
begin to configure call schedule)
wan callsch name Test
(Set the schedule name as Test)
wan callsch active Yes
(Enable schedule)
wan callsch startdate 2005 12 27
(Set schedule start date as 2005-12-27)
wan callsch oncedate 2005 12 27
(Set the schedule used just once it works on 2005-12-27)
wan callsch starttime 12 00
(Set the schedule start time as 1200)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
74
wan callsch duration 16 00
(Set schedule duration time as 16 hours)
wan callsch action 2
(Set action as dial-on-demand)
wan callsch save
(Save the current call schedule set)
Key Settings
Start Date
Start date of this schedule rule It can be unmatched with weekday
setting For example if Start Date is 20001002(Monday) but Monday
setting in weekday can be No
Forced On The node will always keep up during the setting period It is equivalent
to diable the idel timeout
Forced Down The node will always keep doen during the setting period The
connected remote node will be dropped
Enable
Dial-On-Demand The remote node accepts Dial-on-demand during this period
Disable
Dial-On-Demand
The remote node denies any demand dial during the period For the
existing connected nodes it will be dropped after idle timeout and no
triggered up
Start Time
Duration Start Time and Duration of this schedule
Apply the schedule to the Remote node
Multiple scheduling rules can program in a Remote node and they have
priority For example if we program the sets as 1234 in remote node then
the set 1 will override set 234 set 2 will override 34 and so on
We can apply the schedule to the remote node in CLI by the commands
wan node index []index]
wan node callsch [index]
wan node save
For example if we want to apply the call schedule set 1 to remote node 1 we
could use the commands
wan node index 1
wan node callsch 1
wan node save
Time Service in P-660HW-Dx v2
There is no RTC (Real-Time Clock) chip so the P-660HW-Dx v2 should launch
a mechanism to get current time and date from external server in boot time
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
75
Time service is implemented by the Daytime protocol(RFC-867) Time
protocol(RFC-868) and NTP protocol(RFC-1305) You have to assign an IP
address of a time server and then the P-660HW-Dx v2 will get the date time
and time-zone information from this server You can configure it in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt System -gt Time Setting
12 Using IP Multicast
What is IP Multicast
Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in two ways - unicast or broadcast
Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts Host groups
are identified by class D IP addresses ie those with 1110 as their
higher-order bits In dotted decimal notation host group addresses range from
224000 to 239255255255 Among them 224001 is assigned to the
permanent IP hosts group and 224002 is assigned to the multicast routers
group
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is the protocol used to support
multicast groups The latest version is version 2 (see RFC2236) IP hosts use
IGMP to report their multicast group membership to any immediate-neighbor
multicast routers so the multicast routers can decide if a multicast packet
needs to be forwarded At start up the P-660HW-Dx v2 queries all directly
connected networks to gather group membership
After that the P-660HW-Dx v2 updates the information by periodic queries
The P-660HW-Dx v2 implementation of IGMP is also compatible with version 1
The multicast setting can be turned on or off on Ethernet and remote nodes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
76
IP Multicast Setup
(1) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt LAN -gt IP -gt Advanced Setup
(2) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s remote node in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt Multicast
Key Settings
Multicast IGMP-v1 for IGMP version 1 IGMP-v2 for IGMP version 2
13 Using Bandwidth Management
Why Bandwidth Management (BWM)
Nowadays we have many different traffic types for Internet applications Some
traffic may consume high bandwidth such as FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
Some other traffic may not require high bandwidth but they require stable
supply of bandwidth such as VoIP traffic The VoIP quality would not be good
if all of the outgoing bandwidth is occupied via FTP Additionally chances are
that you would like to grant higher bandwidth for somebody special who is
using specific IP address in your network All of these are reasons why we
need bandwidth management
Using BWM
Setp 1 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gtSummary activate bandwidth management on the interface you
would like to manage We enable the BWM function on WAN interface in this
example
Enter the total speed for this interface that you want to allocate using
bandwidth management This appears as the bandwidth budget of the
interface‟s root class
Select how you want the bandwidth to be allocated Priority-Based means
bandwidth is allocated via priority so the traffic with highest priority would be
served first then the second priority is served secondly and so on If
Fairness-Based is chosen then the bandwidth is allocated by ratio Which
means if A class needs 300 kbps B class needs 600 kbps then the ratio of A
and Bs actual bandwidth is 12 So if we get 450 kbps in total then A would
get 150 kbps B would get 300 kbps We select Priority-Based in this
example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
77
Key Settings
Active
Check the box to enable BWM on the interface Note that if you would like
to manage traffic from WAN to LAN you should apply BWM on LAN
interface If you would like to management traffic from WAN to DMZ
please apply BWM on DMZ interface
Speed Enter the total speed to manage on this interface This value is the budget
of the class trees root
Scheduler
Choose the principle to allocate bandwidth on this interface
Priority-Based allocates bandwidth via priority Fairness-Based allocates
bandwidth by ratio
Maximize
Bandwidth
Usage
Check this box if you would like to give residuary bandwidth from Interface
to the classes who need more bandwidth than configured amount Do not
select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a
bandwidth class or you want to limit the bandwidth of each class at the
configured value (Please note that to meat the second condition you
should also disable Use All Managed Bandwidth in the BWM rule)
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Rule Setup select the interface Service Priority and Allocated
Bandwidth for this rule then click button bdquoAdd‟ to apply this rule
Step 3 You can modify the rule by clicking the button lsquoEditrsquo on the rule
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
78
Key Settings
RuleName Give this rule a name for example WWW
BW Budget Configure the bandwidth you would like to allocate to this rule
Priority Enter a number between 0 and 7 to set the priority of this class The
higher the number the higher the priority The default setting is 3
Use All
Managed
Bandwidth
Check this box if you would like to let this class to borrow bandwidth from
its parents when the required bandwidth is higher than the configured
amount Do not check this if you want to limit the bandwidth of this class
at the configured value(Please note that you should also disable
Maximize Bandwidth Usage on the interface to meet the condition)
Service Select User-defined SIP FTP or H323 to specify the traffic types
Destination
IP Address Enter the IP address of destination that meets this class
Destination
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
Destination
Port Enter the destination port number of the traffic
Source IP
Address
Enter the IP address of source that meats this class Note that for traffic
from LAN to WAN since BWM is before NAT you should use the IP
address before NAT processing
Source
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
79
Source Port Enter the source port number of the traffic
Protocol ID Enter the protocol number for the traffic 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP or 17 for
UDP
After configuration BWM you can check current bandwidth of the configured
traffic in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Monitor
14 Using Zero-Configuration
Zero-Configuration and VC auto-hunting
Zero-Configure feature can help customer to reduce the burden of setting
efforts Whenever system ADSL links up system will send out some probing
patterns system will analyze the packets returned from ISP and decide which
services the ISP may provide Because ADSL is based on a ATM network so
system have to pre-configured a VPIVCI hunting pool before Auto-Configure
function begins to work
The Zero-Configuration feature can hunt the encapsulation and VPIVCI value
and system will automatically configure itself if the hunting result is
successfully This feature has two constraints
1 It supports the ISP provides one kind of service (PPPoEPPPoA etc)
only otherwise the hunting will get confusing and failed
2 VC auto-hunting only supports dynamic WAN IP address If the router is
set a static WAN IP address VC auto-hunting function will be disabled
The entry of hunting pool must also contain the VPI VCI and which kinds of
hunting patterns you wish to send Whenever system send out all the probing
patterns with specific VPIVCI system will wait for 5~10 seconds and get the
response from ISP the response patterns will decide which kinds of ADSL
services of the line will be After that system will save back the correct VPI
VCI and also services (encapsulation) type into profile of WAN interface
Configure the VC auto-hunting preconfigured table
(1) Display auto-haunting preconfigured table by using command from CLI
wan atm vchunt display
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
80
(2) Add items to the auto-haunting preconfigured table by using commands
wan atm vchunt add ltremoteNodeIndexgt ltvpigt ltvcigt ltservice
bit(hex)gt
wan atm vchunt save
Note ltremote nodegt input the remote node index 1-8
ltvpigt vpi value
ltvcigt vci value
ltservicegt it‟s a hex value bit0PPPoEVC (1) bit1PPPoELLC (2)
bit2PPPoAVC (4) bit3PPPoALLC (8) bit4EnetVC (16) bit5 EnetLLC (32)
For example
(1) If you need service PPPoELLC and EnetLLC then the service bits will be
2+32 = 34 (decimal) = 22 (hex) you must input 22
(2) If you want to enable all service for VC hunting the service bits will be
1+2+4+8+16+32=63(decimal)= 3f (hex) you must input 3f
Need to perform save after this by command bdquowan atm vchunt save‟
(3) Delete items from the auto-haunting preconfigured table by useing
command
wan atm vchunt remove ltremote nodegt ltvpigt ltvcigt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
81
Using Zero configuration
You can enabledisable Zero Configuration in Network -gt WAN -gt Advanced
Setup
(1) After configure the auto-haunting preconfigured table You just need a PC
connected to the device LAN Ethernet port with the DSL sync up
(2) Open your web browser to access a Web site It should prompt and request
for your username password of your ISP account if your ISP provide PPPoE
or PPPoA service
(3) After key-in the correct info it will than test the connection If it is
successful it will than close the browser and you can open a new browser to
surf the Internet If the connection test fail it will go back to the page ask for
user name and password
(4) Basically the zero configuration only work on the VC that was preconigured
in the auto-haunting preconfigured table
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2
The common triple play scenario is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
82
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus we could assign different parameters to the PVC (CBR
UBR VBR-RT VBR-nRT) to guarantee different applications
We could configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 via CLI The command is
sys tripleplay set portbase ltEportIDgt ltPVCIDgt
For example sys tripleplay portbase set 1 1
sys tripleplay portbase set 2 2
sys tripleplay portbase set 3 3
The traffic from Ethernet port 1 must be forwarded to PVC1 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet port 2 must be forwarded to PVC2 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet Port3 must be forwarded to PVC3 vice versa
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to configure up to twelve filter sets with six
rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system You can apply up to
four filter sets to a particular port to block multiple types of packets With each
filter set having up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for
a single port
The packet filter function on P-660HW-Dx v2 is the same as before just that
you could only configure the filter set and apply them by command in CLI It‟s
very complex for common users to do it So here‟s the recommendation
(1) Usually if you want to block special packets you could edit a firewall rule in
Web Configurator
032
VOIP Server
IPTV Server
Internet
Server
Others
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
ATUR IP-DSLAM VL-Switch
CPE Access Network ISP
034
055
VOIP Telephone
Video Client
Clients surfing
Internet
Other clients
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
PVC1
PVC2
PVC3
PVC4 132
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
83
(2) By factory default ZyXEL has preconfigured many filter sets for your
reference you can check them by command
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Usage set 1~12 rule 1~6 Commonly the preconfigured filter sets are as
follows ltset 2 rule 1~6gt ltset 3 rule 1gt ltset 4 rule 1gt
sys filter set display
For example
This could satisfy mostly requirement You could select any of them to apply to
the WAN node or LAN Interface on demand The command is as follows
Apply to WAN node
wan node index ltnodegt
Usage node= 1~8 corresponding to the remote node 1~8
wan node filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt
ltset3gt ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to one remote node
wan node save
Apply to LAN Interface
lan index [index]
Usage index=1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
84
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt ltset3gt
ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to LAN Interface
lan save
(3) If you are very advanced user you could edit filter set by the following
command
sys filter set [set] [rule]
Usage Set up a filter set index to edit a set
set 1~12
rule 1~6
sys filter set type [typeID]
Usage typeID tcpip or generic
Note In one filter set you should configure all the rules in one type either
tcpip or generic
sys filter set enable
Usage Enable(active) the rule
sys filter set helliphellip(You could configure a filter rule on demand the newest
command is available on release note)
sys filter set save
Usage Don‟t forget to save the rule everytime you‟ve configured it
Reference Commands
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Set the index of filter set rule you must apply this
command first before you begin to configure the
filter rules
sys filter set name [set name] Set the name of filter set
sys filter set type [tcpip | generic] Set the type of filter rule
sys filter set enable Enable the rule
sys filter set disable Disable the rule
sys filter set protocol [protocol ] Set the protocol ID of the rule
sys filter set sourceroute [yes|no] Set the sourceroute yesno
sys filter set destip [address] [subnet
mask]
Set the destination IP address and subnet mask of
the rule
sys filter set destport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|notequal|less|greater]
Set the destination port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set srcip [address] [subnet
mask] Set the source IP address and subnet mask
sys filter set srcport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|not
Set the source port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
85
equal|less|greater] equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set tcpEstab [yes|no] Set TCP establish option
sys filter set more [yes|no] Set the more option to yesno
sys filter set log [type 0-3= none | match|
notmatch | both ]
Set the log type (it could be 0-3 =none match not
match both)
sys filter set actmatch[type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for match
sys filter set actnomatch [type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for not match
sys filter set offset [] Set offset for the generic rule
sys filter set length [] Set the length for generic rule
sys filter set mask [] Set the mask for generic rule
sys filter set value [(depend on length in
hex)] Set the value for generic rule
sys filter set clear Clear the current filter set
sys filter set save Save the filter set parameters
sys filter set display [set][rule] Display Filter set information Wo parameter it will
display buffer information
sys filter set freememory Discard Changes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
86
Wireless Application Notes
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode
Ad hoc Introduction
What is Ad Hoc mode
Ad hoc mode is a wireless network consists of a number of stations without
access points Without using an access point or any connection to a wired
network a client unit in Ad hoc operation mode can communicate directly to
other client units just as using a cross over Ethernet cable connecting 2 hosts
together via a NIC card for direct connection when configured in Ad hoc mode
without an access point being present Ad hoc operation is ideal for small
networks of no more than 2-4 computers Larger networks would require the
use of one or perhaps several access points
Configuration for Wireless Station A
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
87
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
88
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Configuration for Wireless Station B
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
89
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
90
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Step 7 Station A now are able to connect to Station B
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure Introduction
For Infrastructure WLANs multiple Access Points (APs) like the WLAN to the
wired network and allow users to efficiently share network resources The
Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also
mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
91
Configure Wireless Access Point to Infrastructure mode using Web
configurator
To configure Infrastructure mode of your P-660HW-Dx v2 wireless AP please
follow the steps below
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gt General Configure the basic parameters for Wireless LAN
Step 2 You could click the button bdquoAdvanced Setup‟ for more detailed
configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
92
Configuration Wireless Station to Infrastructure mode
To configure Infrastructure mode on your ZyAIR G-200 Wireless Network
Adapter please follow the following steps
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
93
Step 3 Select Infrastructure from the operation mode pull down menu fill in an
SSID or leave it as any if you wish to connect to any AP than press Apply
Change to take effect
Step 4 Click on Site Survey tab and press search all the available AP will be
listed
Step 5 Double click on the AP you want to associated with
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
94
Step 6 After the client have associated with the selected AP The linked APs
channel current linkup rate SSID link quality and signal strength will show on
the Link Info page You now successfully associate with the selected AP with
Infrastructure Mode
3 MAC Filter
MAC Filter Overview
Users can use MAC Filter as a method to restrict unauthorized stations from
accessing the APs ZyXELs APs provide the capability for checking MAC
address of the station before allowing it to connect to the network This
provides an additional layer of control layer in that only stations with registered
MAC addresses can connect This approach requires that the list of MAC
addresses be configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
95
ZyXEL MAC Filter Implementation
ZyXELs MAC Filter Implementation allows users to define a list to allow or
block association from STAs The filter set allows users to input 12 entries in
the list If Allow Association is selected all other STAs which are not on the list
will be denied Otherwise if Deny Association is selected all other STAs which
are not on the list will be allowed for association Users can choose either way
to configure their filter rule
Configure the WLAN MAC Filter
The MAC Filter related settings in ZyXEL APs are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gtMAC Filter
Before you configure the MAC filter you need to know the MAC address of the
client first If not knowing what your MAC address is please enter a command
ipconfig all after DOS prompt to get the MAC (physical) address of your
wireless client
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gtMAC Filter active MAC Filter
Step 2 Enter the MAC Addresses of wireless cards in the filter set to allow or
deny association from these cards
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Filter Action
Allow or block association from MAC addresses contained in this list If Allow
Association is selected in this field hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list
will be allowed to associate with AP If Deny Association is selected in this field
hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list will be blocked
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
96
MAC Address This field specifies those MAC Addresses that you want to add in the list
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
Introduction
The 80211 standard describes the communication that occurs in wireless
LANs
The Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm is used to protect wireless
communication from eavesdropping because wireless transmissions are
easier to intercept than transmissions over wired networks and wireless is a
shared medium everything that is transmitted or received over a wireless
network can be intercepted
WEP relies on a secret key that is shared between a mobile station (eg a
laptop with a wireless Ethernet card) and an access point (ie a base station)
The secret key is used to encrypt packets before they are transmitted and an
integrity check is used to ensure that packages are not modified during the
transition The standard does not discuss how the shared key is established In
practice most installations use a single key that is shared between all mobile
stations and access points APs You can refer to the User Guide for more
detailed information about it
Setting up the Access Point
You can set up the Access Point from Web configurator Advanced Setup
Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General (You can also configure it via CLI)
Step 1 Select bdquoStatic WEP‟ from the pull down menu bdquoSecurity Mode‟ in Web
Configurator
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
97
Step 2 Set up WEP Key in the Web Configurator You need to set the one of
the following parameters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 5 characters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 10 hexadecimal digits
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 13 characters
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 26 hexadecimal digits
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 29 characters
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 58 hexadecimal digits
There are two ways you can configure the WEP Key
(1) You can put in a special WEP key in the bdquoWEP Key‟ menu directly
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
98
(2) You can also put in an arbitrary sequence of characters in the
bdquoPassphrase‟ and then press button bdquoGenerate‟ to let the P-660HW-Dx v2
generate WEP Key for you
Setting up the Station
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar or right click
the utility icon then select Show Config Utility
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
99
The utility will pop up on your windows screen
Note If the utility icon doesnt exist in your task bar click Start -gt
Programs -gt helliphellip to start the utility
Step 2 Select the Configuration tab
Select bdquoSet Security‟ to configure encryption type and parameters
correspond with access point
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
100
Note You should select Key 1 as default Transmit Key since the P-660HW-Dx
v2 is supposed to use Key 1 by default
Key settings
The WEP Encryption type of station has to equal to the access point
Check ASCII field for characters WEP key or uncheck ASCII field for
Hexadecimal digits WEP key
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
101
Hexadecimal digits dont need to precede by 0x
For example
64-bits with characters WEP key Key1= 2e3f4
64-bits with hexadecimal digits WEP key Key1= 123456789A
5 Site Survey
Introduction
What is Site Survey
An RF site survey is a MAP to RF contour of RF coverage in a particular
facility With wireless system it is very difficult to predict the propagation of
radio waves and detect the presence of interfering signals Walls doors
elevator shafts and other obstacles offer different degree of attenuation This
will cause the RF coverage pattern be irregular and hard to predict
Site survey can help us overcome these problem and even provide us a map
of RF coverage of the facility
Preparation
Below are the steps to complete a simple site survey with simple tools
1 First you will need to obtain a facility diagram such as blueprints This is
for you to mark and take record on
2 Visually inspect the facility walk through the facility to verify the accuracy of
the diagram and mark down any large obstacle you see that may effect the RF
signal such as metal shelf metal desk etc on the diagram
3 Identify users area when doing so ask a question where is wireless
coverage needed and where does not and note and take note on the diagram
this is information is needed to determine the number of AP required
4 Determine the preliminary access point location on the facility diagram base
on the service area needed obstacles power wall jack considerations
Survey on Site
Step 1 With the diagram with all information you gathered in the preparation
phase Now you are ready to make the survey
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
102
Step 2 Install an access point at the preliminary location
Step 3 Use a notebook with wireless client installed and run its utility An utility
will provide information such as connection speed current used channel
associated rate link quality signal strength and etc information as shown in
utility below
Step 4 Its always a good idea to start with putting the access point at the
corner of the room and walk away from the access point in a systematic
manner Record the changes at point where transfer rate drop and the link
quality and signal strength information on the diagram as you go alone
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
103
Step 5 When you reach the farthest point of connection mark the spot Now
you move the access point to this new spot as have already determine the
farthest point of the access point installation spot if wireless service is required
from corner of the room
Step 6 Repeat step 1~5 and now you should be able to mark an RF coverage
area as illustrated in above picutre
Step 7 You may need more than one access point is the RF coverage area
hasn‟t covered all the wireless service area you needed
Step 8 Repeat step 1~6 of survey on site as necessary upon completion you
will have a diagram and information of site survey As illustrated below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
104
Note If there are more than one access point is needed be sure to make the
adjacent access point service area over lap one another So the wireless
station is able to roam For more information please refer to roaming at
6 Configure 8021x and WPA
What is the WPA Functionality
Configuration for Access Point
Configuration for your PC
What is WPA Functionality
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
105
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN
Here comes WPA-PSK Application example for your reference
Configuration for Access point
The IEEE 8021x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the
authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management
Authentication can be done using local user database internal to the
P-660HW-Dx v2 (authenticate up to 32 users) or an external RADIUS server
for an unlimited number of users
Step 1 To change your P-660HW-Dx v2s authentication settings login Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General
-gtSecurity
Step 2 Select lsquoSecurity Mode‟ as WAP-PSK
Step 3 Type the Pre Shared Key in the Pre-Shared Key field
Step 4 Click Apply to finish
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
106
Configuration for your PC
Step 1 Double click on your wireless utility icon in your windows task bar the
utility will pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select the configuration tab type in the SSID (Service Set Identifier)
select the operating Mode as Infrastructure and select proper channel
Step 3 Click Set Security to configure the security parameters
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
107
Step 4 Click OK for finish and begin to Site survey Connect to the AP as you
have configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
108
Step 5 Click Link Info tab if the PC associated and authenticated with AP
successfully we will see the following information
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
109
Support Tool
1 LANWAN Packet Trace
The Prestige packet trace records and analyzes packets running on LAN and
WAN interfaces It is designed for users with technical backgrounds who are
interested in the details of the packet flow on LAN or WAN end of Prestige It is
also very helpful for diagnostics if you have compatibility problems with your
ISP or if you want to know the details of a packet for configuring a filter rule
The format of the display is as following
Packet
[index] [timersecond][channel-receivetransmit][length] [protocol]
[sourceIPport] [destIPport]
There are two ways to dump the trace
Online Trace--display the trace real time on screen
Offline Trace--capture the trace first and display later
The details for capturing the trace in CLI as follows
First of all you need to telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 firstly The password is
Administrator passwords bdquoadmin‟ by default
Online Trace
(1) Trace LAN packet
Disable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
none
Enable to capture the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
110
(2) Trace WAN packet
Disable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
none
Enable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
111
Offline Trace
Disable the capture of the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel
mpoa00 none
Enable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Wait for packet passing through the Prestige over LAN
Disable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw off amp sys trcl sw off
Display the trace briefly by entering sys trcp brief
Display specific packets by using sys trcp parse ltfrom_indexgt ltto_indexgt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
112
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal
Step 1 Initiate a hyper terminal connection from your PC(suppose you
connected to the LAN port of P-660HW-Dx v2)
Step 2 Click the bdquoproperties‟ to configure parameters to telnet to the
P-660HW-Dx v2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
113
Step 3 So that after you invoke the relevant commands you could save the
logs you‟ve captured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
114
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP
Using TFTP client software
Uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Uploaddownload Prestige configurations via LAN
(1) Using TFTP to uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout
in Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 Enter the IP address of the Prestige
Step 5To upload the firmware please save the remote file as ras to
Prestige After the transfer is complete the Prestige will program the upgraded
firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
115
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige The local file is the source
file of the ZyNOS firmware that is available in your hard disk The remote file is
the file name that will be saved in Prestige Check the port number 69 and
512-Octet blocks for TFTP Check Binary mode for file transfering
(2) Using TFTP to uploaddownload SMT configurations via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 To download the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please get the
remote file rom-0 from the Prestige
Step 5 To upload the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please save the
remote file as rom-0 in the Prestige
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
116
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige
The local file is the source file of your configuration file that is available
in your hard disk
The remote file is the file name that will be saved in Prestige
Check the port number 69 and 512-Octet blocks for TFTP
Check Binary mode for file transfering
Using TFTP command on Windows NT
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Download ZyNOS via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] get ras [localfile]
Step 4 Upload P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] put
[localfile] rom-0
Step 5 Download P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP]
get rom-0 [localfile]
Using TFTP command on UNIX
Before you begin
1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Example
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ telnet 19216811
Trying 19216811
Connected to 19216811
Escape character is ^]
Password
rasgt sys stdio 0
(Open a new window)
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get rom-0 [local-rom] lt- change to binary mode
lt- download configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-rom] rom-0 lt- upload configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get ras [local-ras ] lt- download firmware
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-ras] ras lt- upload firmware
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
117
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files
In addition to upload the firmware and configuration file via the console port
and TFTP client you can also upload the firmware and configuration files to
the Prestige using FTP
To use this feature your workstation must have a FTP client software See the
example shown below
Using FTP client software
Note The remote file name for the firmware is ras and the configuration file is
rom-0
Step 1 Use FTP client from your workstation to connect to the Prestige by
entering the IP address of the Prestige
Step2 Press Enter key to ignore the username because the Prestige does
not check the username
Step 3 Enter the CLI password as the FTP login password the default is
admin
Step 4 Enter command bin to set the transfer type to binary
Step 5 Use put command to transfer the file to the Prestige
Example
Step 1 Connect to the Prestige by entering the Prestiges IP and Administrator
password in the FTP software Set the transfer type to Auto-Detect or
Binary
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
118
Step 2 Press OK to ignore the Username prompt
Step 3 To upload the firmware file we transfer the local ras file to overwrite
the remote ras file
To upload the configuration file we transfer the local rom-0 to overwrite
the remote rom-0 file
Step 4 The Prestige reboots automatically after the uploading is finished
Please do not power off the router at this moment
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
119
CI Command Reference
Command Syntax and General User Interface
CI has the following command syntax
command ltiface | device gt subcommand [param]
command subcommand [param]
command | help
command subcommand | help
General user interface
1 Shows the following commands and all major (sub)commands
2 exit Exit Subcommand
To get the latest CI Command list
The latest CI Command list is available in release note of every ZyXEL
firmware release Please goto ZyXEL public WEB site
httpwwwzyxelcomsupportdownload_indexphp to download firmware
package (zip) you should unzip the package to get the release note in PDF
format
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
8
11 Is it possible to access a server running behind SUA from the outside
Internet How can I do it
Yes it is possible because P-660HW-Dx v2 delivers the packet to the local
server by looking up to a SUA server table Therefore to make a local server
accessible to the outside users the port number and the inside IP address of
the server must be configured (You can configure it in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding)
12 When do I need select Full Feature NAT
Make multiple local servers on the LAN accessible from outside with
multiple global IP addresses
With SUA visible servers had to be mapped to different ports since the
servers share only one global IP But when you select Full Feature you can
make multiple local servers (mapping the same port or not) on the LAN
accessible from outside with multiple global IP addresses
Support Non-NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some MIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address Thus users on the same
network can not login to the same server simultaneously In this case it is
better to use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types
thus each user login to the server using a unique global IP address
13 What IPPort mapping does Multi-NAT support
Multi-NAT supports five types of IPport mapping One to One Many to One
Many to Many Overload Many to Many No Overload and Server The details
of the mapping between ILA and IGA are described as below Here we define
the local IP addresses as the Internal Local Addresses (ILA) and the global IP
addresses as the Inside Global Address (IGA)
One to One In One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps one ILA
to one IGA
Many to One In Many-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps
multiple ILA to one IGA This is equivalent to SUA (ie PAT port
address translation) ZyXELs Single User Account feature that previous
ZyNOS routers supported (the SUA is optional in todays Prestige
routers)
Many to Many Overload In Many-to-Many Overload mode the
P-660HW-Dx v2 maps the multiple ILA to shared IGA
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
9
Many One-to-One In Many One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2
maps each ILA to unique IGA
Server In Server mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps multiple inside
servers to one global IP address This allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types behind the NAT for outside access Note if
you want to map each server to one unique IGA please use the
One-to-One mode
The following table summarizes the five types
NAT Type IP Mapping
One-to-One ILA1lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-One
(SUAPAT)
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-Many
Overload
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA1
ILA4lt---gtIGA2
Many
One-to-One
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA3
ILA4lt---gtIGA4
Server Server 1 IPlt---gtIGA1
Server 2 IPlt---gtIGA1
14 How many network users can the SUANAT support
The Prestige does not limit the number of the users but the number of the
sessions The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports 2048 sessions that you can use the
ip nat session command in CLI to see You can also use bdquoip nat hashTable
wanif0‟ to view the current active NAT sessions
15 What are Device filters and Protocol filters
In ZyNOS the filters have been separated into two groups One group is
called device filter group and the other is called protocol filter
group Generic filters belong to the device filter group TCPIP and IPX filters
belong to the protocol filter group You can configure the filter rule in CLI
Note In ZyNOS you can not mix different filter groups in the same filter set
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
10
16 How can I protect against IP spoofing attacks
The P-660HW-Dx v2s filter sets provide a means to protect against IP
spoofing attacks The basic scheme is as follows
For the input data filter
Deny packets from the outside that claim to be from the inside
Allow everything that is not spoofing us
Filter rule setup
Filter type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Source IP Addr =abcd
Source IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action Not Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
For the output data filters
Deny bounce back packet
Allow packets that originate from us
Filter rule setup
Filter Type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Destination IP Addr =abcd
Destination IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action No Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
11
Product FAQ
1 How can I manage P-660HW-Dx v2
Multilingual Embedded Web GUI for Local and Remote management
CLI (Command-line interface)
Telnet support (Administrator Password Protected ) for remote
configuration change and status monitoring
FTP TFTP sever firmware upgrade and configuration backup and
restore are supported(Administrator Password Protected)
2 What is the default password for Web Configurator
There are two different accounts for P-660HW-Dx v2 Web Configurator
Common User Account and Administrator Account
By factory default the password for the two accounts are
Common User Account user
Administrator Account 1234
You can change the password after you logging in the Web Configurator
Please record your new password whenever you change it The system
will lock you out if you have forgotten your password
3 Whatrsquos the difference between lsquoCommon User Accountrsquo and
lsquoAdministrator Accountrsquo
For Common User Account it can only access the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 and check the current system status
For Administrator Account besides accessing the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 it can also access Winzard setup Advanced setup of
P-660HW-Dx v2
Moreover only with Administrator Password you could manage the
P-660HW-Dx v2 via FTPTFTP or Telnet
4 How do I know the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address assigned by the
ISP
You can view My WAN IP ltfrom ISPgt xxxx shown in Web Configurator
bdquoStatus-gtDevice Information -gtWAN Information‟ to check this IP address
5 What is the micro filter or splitter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
12
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
6 The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Bridge and Router mode whats the
difference between them
When the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet which means
only the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use bridge mode which works as an ADSL modem to
connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account and limit
only one computer to access the Internet
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to add another Internet sharing device
like a router In this case we use the router mode which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
7 How do I know I am using PPPoE
PPPoE requires a user account to login to the providers server If you need to
configure a user name and password on your computer to connect to the ISP
you are probably using PPPoE If you are simply connected to the Internet
when you turn on your computer you probably are not You can also check
your ISP or the information sheet given by the ISP Please choose PPPoE as
the encapsulation type in the P-660HW-Dx v2 if the ISP uses PPPoE
8 Why does my provider use PPPoE
PPPoE emulates a familiar Dial-Up connection It allows your ISP to provide
services using their existing network configuration over the broadband
connections Besides PPPoE supports a broad range of existing applications
and service including authentication accounting secure access and
configuration management
9 What is DDNS
The Dynamic DNS service allows you to alias a dynamic IP address to a static
hostname allowing your computer to be more easily accessed from various
locations on the Internet To use the service you must first apply an account
from several free Web servers such as httpwwwdyndnsorg
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to reach our internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
13
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
updates this IP to DDNS server so that the server can update its IP-to-DNS
entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is updated the DNS
name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still usable
10 When do I need DDNS service
When you want your internal server to be accessed by using DNS name rather
than using the dynamic IP address we can use the DDNS service The DDNS
server allows to alias a dynamic IP address to a static hostname Whenever
the ISP assigns you a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2 sends this IP to the DDNS
server for its updates
11 What is DDNS wildcard Does the P-660HW-Dx v2 support DDNS
wildcard
Some DDNS servers support the wildcard feature which allows the hostname
yourhostdyndnsorg to be aliased to the same IP address as
yourhostdyndnsorg This feature is useful when there are multiple servers
inside and you want users to be able to use things such as
wwwyourhostdyndnsorg and still reach your hostname
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports DDNS wildcard that httpwwwdyndnsorg
supports When using wildcard you simply enter yourhostdyndnsorg in the
Host field in Menu 11 Configure Dynamic DNS
12 Can the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA handle IPSec packets sent by the
IPSec gateway
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA can handle IPSec ESP Tunneling mode We
know when packets go through SUA SUA will change the source IP address
and source port for the host To pass IPSec packets SUA must understand
the ESP packet with protocol number 50 replace the source IP address of the
IPSec gateway to the routers WAN IP address However SUA should not
change the source port of the UDP packets which are used for key
managements Because the remote gateway checks this source port during
connections the port thus is not allowed to be changed
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
14
13 How do I setup my P-660HW-Dx v2 for routing IPSec packets over
SUA
For outgoing IPSec tunnels no extra setting is required
For forwarding the inbound IPSec ESP tunnel A Default server set is required
You could configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding -gt Default Server Setup
It is because SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users So to make an internal server
for outside access we must specify the service port and the LAN IP of this
server in Web configurator Thus SUA is able to forward the incoming packets
to the requested service behind SUA and the outside users access the server
using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address So we have to configure the
internal IPsec client as a default server (unspecified service port) when it acts
a server gateway
14 What is Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping allocates the bandwidth to WAN dynamically and aims at
boosting the efficiency of the bandwidth If there are serveral VCs in the
P-660HW-Dx v2 but only one VC activated at one time the P-660HW-Dx v2
allocates all the Bandwidth to the VC and the VC gets full bandwidth If another
VCs are activated later the bandwidth is yield to other VCs after ward
15 Why do we perform traffic shaping in the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 must manage traffic fairly and provide bandwidth
allocation for different sorts of applications such as voice video and data All
applications have their own natural bit rate Large data transactions have a
fluctuating natural bit rate The P-660HW-Dx v2 is able to support variable
traffic among different virtual connections Certain traffic may be discarded if
the virtual connection experiences congestion Traffic shaping defines a set of
actions taken by the P-660HW-Dx v2 to avoid congestion traffic shaping takes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
15
measures to adapt to unpredictable fluctuations in traffic flows and other
problems among virtual connections
16 What do the parameters (PCR SCR MBS) mean
Traffic shaping parameters (PCR SCR MBS) can be set in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt ATM Setup
Peak Cell Rate(PCR) The maximum bandwidth allocated to this connection
The VC connection throughput is limited by PCR
Sustainable Cell Rate(SCR) The least guaranteed bandwidth of a VC
When there are multi-VCs on the same line the VC throughput is guaranteed
by SCR
Maximum Burst Size(MBS) The amount of cells transmitted through this
VC at the Peak Cell Rate before yielding to other VCs Total bandwidth of the
line is dedicated to single VC if there is only one VC on the line However as
the other VC asking the bandwidth the MBS defines the maximum number of
cells transmitted via this VC with Peak Cell rate before yielding to other VCs
The P-660HW-Dx v2 holds the parameters for shaping the traffic among its
virtual channels If you do not need traffic shaping please set SCR = 0 MBS =
0 and PCR as the maximum value according to the line rate (for example 23
Mbps line rate will result PCR as 5424 cellsec)
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
Constant bit rate(CBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that requires
the user to determine a fixed bandwidth requirement at the time the connection
is set up so that the data can be sent in a steady stream CBR service is often
used when transmitting fixed-rate uncompressed video
Unspecified bit rate(UBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that does
not guarantee any throughput levels and uses only available bandwidth UBR
is often used when transmitting data that can tolerate delays such as e-mail
Variable bit rate(VBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that allows
users to specify a throughput capacity (ie a peak rate) and a sustained rate
but data is not sent evenly You can select VBR for bursty traffic and
bandwidth sharing with other applications It contains two subclasses
Variable bit rate nonreal time (VBR-nRT)
Variable bit rate real time (VBR-RT)
18 What is content filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
16
Internet Content filter allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies
tailored to your needs Content filter gives you the ability to block web sites that
contain key words (that you specify) in the URL You can set a schedule for
when the P-660HW-Dx v2 performs content filtering You can also specify
trusted IP Addresses on LAN for which the P-660HW-Dx v2 will not perform
content filtering You can configure the details about it in Web Configurator
Advanced setup Security -gt Content Filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
17
ADSL FAQ
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems
ADSL provides a dedicated service over a single telephone line cable
modems offer a dedicated service over a shared media While cable modems
have greater downstream bandwidth capabilities (up to 30 Mbps) that
bandwidth is shared among all users on a line and will therefore vary perhaps
dramatically as more users in a neighborhood get online at the same time
Cable modem upstream traffic will in many cases be slower than ADSL either
because the particular cable modem is inherently slower or because of rate
reductions caused by contention for upstream bandwidth slots The big
difference between ADSL and cable modems however is the number of lines
available to each There are no more than 12 million homes passed today that
can support two-way cable modem transmissions and while the figure also
grows steadily it will not catch up with telephone lines for many years
Additionally many of the older cable networks are not capable of offering a
return channel consequently such networks will need significant upgrading
before they can offer high bandwidth services
2 What is the expected throughput
In our test we can get about 16Mbps data rate on 15Kft using the 26AWG
loop The shorter the loop the better the throughput is
3 What is the microfilter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up
You can see the DSL LED Green on the P-660HW-Dx v2s front panel is on
when the ADSL physical layer is up
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL
Depending on the line quality the P-660HW-Dx v2 uses Fall Back and Fall
Forward to automatically adjust the date rate
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
18
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing
Though the LLC-based multiplexing can carry multiple protocols over a single
VC it requires extra header information to identify the protocol being carried
on the virtual circuit (VC) The VC-based multiplexing needs a separate VC for
carrying each protocol but it does not need the extra headers Therefore the
VC-based multiplexing is more efficient
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics
You can use the following CI commands to check the ADSL line
statistics
CIgt wan adsl perfdata
CIgt wan adsl status
CIgt wan adsl linedata far
CIgt wan adsl linedata near
You can also do it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Diagnostic -gt DSL Line -gt DSL Status
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector
The signaling pins on the P-660HW-Dx v2s ADSL connector are pin 3 and pin
4 The middle two pins for a RJ11 cable
9 What is triple play
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
19
More and more TelcoISPs are providing three kinds of services (VoIP Video
and Internet) over one existing ADSL connection
The different services (such as video VoIP and Internet access) require
different Qulity of Service
The high priority is Voice (VoIP) data
The Medium priority is Video (IPTV) data
The low priority is internet access such as ftp etc hellip
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus you can configure each PVC separately to assign different
QoS to different application
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
20
Firewall FAQ
General
1 What is a network firewall
A firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control
policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to
protect a trusted network from an untrusted network The firewall can be
thought of two mechanisms One to block the traffic and the other to permit
traffic
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure
The P-660HW-Dx v2 is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks such as Ping of Death SYN Flood LAND
attack IP Spoofing etc It also uses stateful packet inspection to determine if
an inbound connection is allowed through the firewall to the private LAN The
P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Network Address Translation (NAT) which
translates the private local addresses to one or multiple public addresses This
adds a level of security since the clients on the private LAN are invisible to the
Internet
3 What are the basic types of firewalls
Conceptually there are three types of firewalls
1 Packet Filtering Firewall
2 Application-level Firewall
3 Stateful Inspection Firewall
Packet Filtering Firewalls generally make their decisions based on the header
information in individual packets These headers information include the
source destination addresses and ports of the packets
Application-level Firewalls generally are hosts running proxy servers which
permit no traffic directly between networks and which perform logging and
auditing of traffic passing through them A proxy server is an application
gateway or circuit-level gateway that runs on top of general operating system
such as UNIX or Windows NT It hides valuable data by requiring users to
communicate with secure systems by mean of a proxy A key drawback of this
device is performance
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
21
Stateful Inspection Firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against
defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP
address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the
integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols The flexible
nature of Stateful Inspection firewalls generally provides the best speed and
transparency however they may lack the granular application level access
control or caching that some proxies support
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2
1 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall inspects packets contents and IP
headers It is applicable to all protocols that understands data in the
packet is intended for other layers from network layer up to the
application layer
2 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall performs stateful inspection It takes into
account the state of connections it handles so that for example a
legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request
for that packet and allowed in Conversely an incoming packet
masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be
blocked
3 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall uses session filtering ie smart rules
that enhance the filtering process and control the network session
rather than control individual packets in a session
4 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall is fast It uses a hashing function to
search the matched session cache instead of going through every
individual rule for a packet
5 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall provides email service to notify you for
routine reports and when alerts occur
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet filtering and
NAT built-in
With the spectacular growth of the Internet and online access companies that
do business on the Internet face greater security threats Although packet filter
and NAT restrict access to particular computers and networks however for
the other companies this security may be insufficient because packets filters
typically cannot maintain session state Thus for greater security a firewall is
considered
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a
connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable
a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
22
There are four types of DoS attacks
1 Those that exploits bugs in a TCPIP implementation such as Ping of
Death and Teardrop
2 Those that exploits weaknesses in the TCPIP specification such as
SYN Flood and LAND Attacks
3 Brute-force attacks that flood a network with useless data such as
Smurf attack
4 IP Spoofing
7 What is Ping of Death attack
Ping of Death uses a PING utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the
maximum 65535 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification The oversize
packet is then sent to an unsuspecting system Systems may crash hang or
reboot
8 What is Teardrop attack
Teardrop attack exploits weakness in the reassemble of the IP packet
fragments As data is transmitted through a network IP packets are often
broken up into smaller chunks Each fragment looks like the original packet
except that it contains an offset field The Teardrop program creates a series of
IP fragments with overlapping offset fields When these fragments are
reassembled at the destination some systems will crash hang or reboot
9 What is SYN Flood attack
SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each
packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response While the
targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK it queues up all
outstanding SYN-ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue
SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when
an internal timer (which is set a relatively long intervals) terminates the TCP
three-way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all
incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users
10 What is LAND attack
In a LAN attack hackers flood SYN packets to the network with a spoofed
source IP address of the targeted system This makes it appear as if the host
computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the
target system tries to respond to itself
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
23
11 What is Brute-force attack
A Brute-force attack such as Smurf attack targets a feature in the IP
specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting to quickly flood the
target network with useless data A Smurf hacker flood a destination IP
address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network the router will
broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network If there
are numerous hosts this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request
packet the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the intermediary
network but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address
known as the victim network This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all
available bandwidth making communications impossible
12 What is IP Spoofing attack
Many DoS attacks also use IP Spoofing as part of their attack IP Spoofing
may be used to break into systems to hide the hackers identity or to magnify
the effect of the DoS attack IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain
unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking
that the communications are coming from within the trusted network To
engage in IP Spoofing a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it
appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed
through the router or firewall
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
There are two default ACLs pre-configured in the P-660HW-Dx v2 one allows
all connections from LAN to WAN and the other blocks all connections from
WAN to LAN except of the DHCP packets
Configuration
1 How do I configure the firewall
You can use the Web Configurator to configure the firewall for P-660HW-Dx v2
By factory default if you connect your PC to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 you can access Web Configurator via bdquohttp19216811‟
Note Donrsquot forget to type in the Administrator Password
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall
There are several ways to protect others from touching the settings of your
firewall
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
24
1 Change the default Administrator password since it is required when
setting up the firewall
2 Limit who can access to your P-660HW-Dx v2‟s Web Configurator or
CLI You can enter the IP address of the secured LAN host in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt
[Service] -gtSecured Client IP to allow special access to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
The default value in this field is 0000 which means you do not care which
host is trying to telnet your P-660HW-Dx v2 or accessthe Web
Configurator of
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN
There are four reasons that WWWTelnet from WAN is blocked
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable Telnet from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow WWWTelnet connection
from WAN The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
WWW (For accessing Web Configurator)
Source IP= Remote trusted host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP80
Action=Forward
TELNET (For accessing Command Line Interface)
Source IP= Telnet Client host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP23
Action=Forward
(2)You have disabled WWWTelnet service in Web Configurator Advanced
setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
25
(3) WWWTelnet service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host
entered in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote
MGNT
(4)A filter set which blocks WWWTelnet from WAN is applied to WAN node
You can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using FTP over
WAN
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable FTP from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow FTP connection from WAN
The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
Source IP= FTP host
Destination IP= P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP
Service= FTP TCP21 TCP20
Action=Forward
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
26
(2) You have disabled FTP service in Web Configurator Advanced setup
Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(3) FTP service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host entered
in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(4) A filter set which blocks FTP from WAN is applied to WAN node You
can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
Log and Alert
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the firewall log immediately when the packet
matches a firewall rule The log for Default Firewall Policy (LAN to WAN WAN
to LAN WAN to WAN) is generated automatically with factory default setting
but you can change it in Web Configurator
2 What does the log show to us
The log supports up to 128 entries There are 5 columns for each entry Please
see the example shown below
3 How do I view the firewall log
All logs generated in P-660HW-Dx v2 including firewall logs IPSec logs
system logs are migrated to centralized logs So you can view firewall logs in
Centralized logs Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs
-gtView Log
The log keeps 128 entries the new entries will overwrite the old entries when
the log has over 128 entries
Before you can view firewall logs there are two steps you need to do
(1) Enable log function in Centralized logs setup via either one of the following
methods
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
27
Web configuration Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log
Settings check Access Control and Attacks options depending on
your real situation
CI command sys logs category [access | attack]
(2) Enable log function in firewall default policy or in firewall rules
After the above two steps you can view firewall logs via
Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gtView
Log
View the log by CI command sys logs disp
You can also view Centralized logs via mail or syslog please configure mail
server or Unix Syslog server in Web configuration Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the alert when an attack is detected by the
firewall and sends it via Email So to send the alert you must configure the
mail server and Email address using Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings You can also specify how frequently
you want to receive the alert in it
5 What is the difference between the log and alert
A log entry is just added to the log inside the P-660HW-Dx v2 and e-mailed
together with all other log entries at the scheduled time as configured An alert
is e-mailed immediately after an attacked is detected
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
28
Wireless FAQ
General FAQ
1 What is a Wireless LAN
Wireless LANs provide all the functionality of wired LANs without the need for
physical connections (wires) Data is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier
and transmitted through the ether Typical bit-rates are 11Mbps and 54Mbps
although in practice data throughput is half of this Wireless LANs can be
formed simply by equipping PCs with wireless NICs If connectivity to a wired
LAN is required an Access Point (AP) is used as a bridging device APs are
typically located close to the centre of the wireless client population
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN
Mobility Wireless LAN systems can provide LAN users with access to
real-time information anywhere in their organization This mobility supports
productivity and service opportunities not possible with wired networks
Installation Speed and Simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be
fast and easy and can eliminate the need to pull cable through walls and
ceilings
Installation Flexibility Wireless technology allows the network to go where
wire cannot go
Reduced Cost-of-Ownership While the initial investment required for
wireless LAN hardware can be higher than the cost of wired LAN hardware
overall installation expenses and life-cycle costs can be significantly lower
Long-term cost benefits are greatest in dynamic environments requiring
frequent moves and changes
Scalability Wireless LAN systems can be configured in a variety of topologies
to meet the needs of specific applications and installations Configurations are
easily changed and range from peer-to-peer networks suitable for a small
number of users to full infrastructure networks of thousands of users that
enable roaming over a broad area
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN
The speed of Wireless LAN is still relatively slower than wired LAN The setup
cost of Wireless LAN is relative high because the equipment cost including
access point and PCMCIA Wireless LAN card is higher than hubs and CAT 5
cables
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
29
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks
Airports hotels and even coffee shops like Starbucks are deploying 80211
networks so people can wirelessly surf the Internet with their laptops
5 What is an Access Point
The AP (access point also known as a base station) is the wireless server that
with an antenna and a wired Ethernet connection that broadcasts information
using radio signals AP typically acts as a bridge for the clients It can pass
information to wireless LAN cards that have been installed in computers or
laptops allowing those computers to connect to the campus network and the
Internet without wires
6 Whatrsquos the difference between IEEE80211abg
The IEEE 80211 is a wireless LAN industry standard and the objective of
IEEE 80211 is to make sure that different manufactures wireless LAN devices
can communicate to each other Below is a brief comparison for the
IEEE80211 abg
Publish
Time
Frequency
Band(GHZ)
Data Rate(Mbps) Compatibility
IEEE80211a 1999 UNII Band
515~5825
691218243648
54
Only work with
80211a
devices
IEEE80211b 1999 ISM Band
24~24835
125511 -
IEEE80211g 2001 ISM Band
24~24835
691218243648
54
Backward
compatible with
80211b
devices
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
Yes As long as the products comply to the same IEEE 80211 standard The
Wi-Fi logo is used to define 80211b compatible products Wi-Fi5 is a
compatibility standard for 80211a products running in the 5GHz band
8 What is Wi-Fi
The Wi-Fi logo signifies that a product is interoperable with wireless
networking equipment from other vendors A Wi-Fi logo product has been
tested and certified by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA)
The Socket Wireless LAN Card is Wi-Fi certified and that means that it will
work (interoperate) with any brand of Access Point that is also Wi-Fi certified
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band
Various spread spectrum radio communication applications use the 24 GHz
band This includes WLAN systems (not necessarily of the type IEEE
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
30
80211b) cordless phones wireless medical telemetry equipment and
Bluetoothtrade short-range wireless applications which include connecting
printers to computers and connecting modems or hands-free kits to mobile
phones
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device
Any time devices are operated in the same frequency band there is the
potential for interference
Both the 80211bg and Bluetooth devices occupy the same24-to-2483-GHz
unlicensed frequency range-the same band But a Bluetooth device would not
interfere with other 80211 devices much more than another 80211 device
would interefere While more collisions are possible with the introduction of a
Bluetooth device they are also possible with the introduction of another 80211
device or a new 24 GHz cordless phone for that matter But BlueTooth
devices are usually low-power so the effects that a Bluetooth device may have
on an 80211 network if any arent far-reaching
11 Can radio signals pass through wall
Transmitting through a wall is possible depending upon the material used in its
construction In general metals and substances with a high water content do
not allow radio waves to pass through Metals reflect radio waves and concrete
attenuates radio waves The amount of attenuation suffered in passing through
concrete will be a function of its thickness and amount of metal re-enforcement
used
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference among WLAN
products
Factors of interference
(1) Obstacles walls ceilings furniturehellip etc
(2) Building Materials metal door aluminum studs
(3) Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors
Solution
(1) Minimizing the number of walls and ceilings
(2) Antenna is positioned for best reception
(3) Keep WLAN products away from electrical devices eg microwaves
monitors electric motorshellip etc
(4) Add additional APs if necessary
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN
WLANs are generally privately owned wireless systems that are deployed in a
corporation warehouse hospital or educational campus setting Data rates
are high and there are no per-packet charges for data transmission
WWANs are generally publicly shared data networks designed to provide
coverage in metropolitan areas and along traffic corridors WWANs are owned
by a service provider or carrier Data rates are low and charges are based on
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
31
usage Specialized applications are characteristically designed around short
burst messaging
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage any
hardware
Yes it will not harm the hardware but the module will not be detected and
work after inserting to the slot You need to reboot the router to initialize the
module
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
The wireless security modes supported on P-660HW-Dx v2 are Static
WEP WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK and WPA2
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
It supports IEEE 80211bgg+ standard
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering
Yes it supports up to 32 MAC Address filtering
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption
Yes it means that the AP on P-660HW-Dx v2 will automatically decelerate
when devices move beyond the optimal range or other interference is present
If the device moves back within the range of a higher-speed transmission the
connection will automatically speed up again Rate shifting is a physical-layer
mechanism transparent to the user and the upper layers of the protocol stack
Advanced FAQ
1 What is Ad Hoc mode
A wireless network consists of a number of stations without using an access
point or any connection to a wired network
2 What is Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure mode implies connectivity to a wired communications
infrastructure If such connectivity is required the Access Points must be used
to connect to the wired LAN backbone Wireless clients have their
configurations set for infrastructure mode in order to utilise access points
relaying
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area
This depends on the surrounding terrain the diameter of the client population
and the number of clients If an area is large with dispersed pockets of
populations then extension points can be used for extend coverage
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
32
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (DSSS)
DSSS spreads its signal continuously over a wide frequency band DSSS
maps the information bearing bit-pattern at the sending station into a higher
data rate bit sequence using a chipping code The chipping code (also known
as processing gain) introduces redundancy which allows data recovery if
certain bit errors occur during transmission The FCC rules the minimum
processing gain should be 10 typical systems use processing gains of 20
IEEE 80211b specifies the use of DSSS
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (FHSS)
FHSS uses a narrowband carrier which hops through a predefined sequence
of several frequencies at a specific rate This avoids problems with fixed
channel narrowband noise and simple jamming Both transmitter and receiver
must have their hopping sequences synchronized to create the effect of a
single logical channel To an unsynchronised receiver an FHSS transmission
appears to be short-duration impulse noise 80211 may use FHSS or DSSS
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
No Provided the antenna is optimally designed for 24GHz or 5GHz operation
WLAN NICs often include an internal antenna which may provide sufficient
reception
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range
This frequency range has been set aside by the FCC and is generally labeled
the ISM band A few years ago Apple and several other large corporations
requested that the FCC allow the development of wireless networks within this
frequency range What we have today is a protocol and system that allows for
unlicensed use of radios within a prescribed power level The ISM band is
populated by Industrial Scientific and Medical devices that are all low power
devices but can interfere with each other
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID)
SSID is a configurable identification that allows clients to communicate to the
appropriate base station With proper configuration only clients that are
configured with the same SSID can communicate with base stations having
the same SSID SSID from a security point of view acts as a simple single
shared password between base stations and clients
9 What is an ESSID
ESSID stands for Extended Service Set Identifier and identifies the wireless
LAN The ESSID of the mobile device must match the ESSID of the AP to
communicate with the AP The ESSID is a 32-character maximum string and is
case-sensitive
Security FAQ
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Points
radio link
To secure the date across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Point‟s radio link we
could select any one of the security mode Static 64128256 bit WEP
WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK WPA2
2 What is WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security mechanism defined within the
80211 standard and designed to make the security of the wireless medium
equal to that of a cable (wire) WEP data encryption was designed to prevent
access to the network by intruders and to prevent the capture of wireless
LAN traffic through eavesdropping WEP allows the administrator to define a
set of respective Keys for each wireless network user based on a Key
String passed through the WEP encryption algorithm Access is denied by
anyone who does not have an assigned key Note WEP has shown to have
fundamental flaws in its key generation processing
3 What is WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN You can refer to
the User Guide for more information about it
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP
40 bit WEP and 64 bit WEP are the same encryption level and can interoperate
The lower level of WEP encryption uses a 40 bit (10 Hex character) as secret
key (set by user) and a 24 bit Initialization Vector (not under user control)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
34
(40+24=64) Some vendors refer to this level of WEP as 40 bit others as 64
bit
5 What is a WEP key
A WEP key is a user defined string of characters used to encrypt and decrypt
data
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP
No 128-bit WEP will not communicate with 64-bit WEP Although 128 bit WEP
also uses a 24 bit Initialization Vector but it uses a 104 bit as secret key Users
need to use the same encryption level in order to make a connection
7 Can the SSID be encrypted
No WEP only encrypts the data packets not the 80211 management
packetsThe SSID is in the beacon and probe management messages and
SSID goes over the air in clear text This makes obtaining the SSID easy by
sniffing 80211 wireless traffic
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff the SSID
Many APs by default have broadcasting the SSID turned on Sniffers typically
will find the SSID in the broadcast beacon packets Turning off the broadcast of
SSID in the beacon message (a common practice) does not prevent getting
the SSID since the SSID is sent in the clear in the probe message when a
client associates to an AP a sniffer just has to wait for a valid user to associate
to the network to see the SSID
9 What are Insertion Attacks
The insertion attacks are based on placing unauthorized devices on the
wireless network without going through a security process and review
10 What is Wireless Sniffer
An attacker can sniff and capture legitimate traffic Many of the sniffer tools for
Ethernet are based on capturing the first part of the connection session where
the data would typically include the username and password An intruder can
masquerade as that user by using this captured information An intruder who
monitors the wireless network can apply this same attack principle on the
wireless
11 What is OTIST How do I use it
OTIST is acronym for ZyXEL‟s bdquoOne Touch Intelligent Security Technology‟
It enables P-660HW-Dx v2 and ZyXEL‟s OTIST supported Wireless adapters
to establish connections of the WPA-PSK security mode automatically with
just one touch at the reset button on rear panel
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
35
To use this function on P-660HW-Dx v2 you could press the reset button on
P-660HW-Dx v2 for 1~5 seconds the OTIST is actived The P-660HW-Dx v2
will enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA-PSK automatically if no
WLAN security has been set The default setup key for OTIST is bdquo01234567‟
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
36
Application Notes
General Application Notes
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode
Setup your workstation
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
If the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet that means only
the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as an ADSL bridge
modem to connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account
and limit only one computer to access the Internet
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
To connect your computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN port the computer
must have an Ethernet adapter card installed For connecting a single
computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2 we use a Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
In most cases the IP address of the computer is assigned by the ISP
dynamically so you have to configure the computer as a DHCP client which
obtains the IP from the ISP using DHCP protocol The ISP may also provide
the gateway DNS via DHCP if they are available Otherwise please enter the
static IP addresses for all that the ISP gives to you in the network TCPIP
settings For Windows we check the option Obtain an IP address
automatically in its TCPIP setup please see the example shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
37
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
bridge mode We will use Web Configurator to guide you through the related
menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as bridge mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
(2)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
38
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For example
LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
(2) Turn off DHCP Server and configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 in
Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN We use 19216811 as
the LAN IP for P-660HW-Dx v2 in this case
Step 1 Disactive DHCP Server and apply it
Step 2 Assign an IP to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx v2 eg
19216811
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to install an Internet sharing device like
a router In this case we use the P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
Connect the LAN ports of all computers to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 using Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
Since the P-660HW-Dx v2 is set to DHCP server as default so you need only
to configure the workstations as the DHCP clients in the networking settings In
this case the IP address of the computer is assigned by the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 can also provide the DNS to the clients via DHCP if it is
available For this setup in Windows we check the option Obtain an IP
address automatically in its TCPIP setup Please see the example shown
below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
39
Set up your P-660HW-Dx v2 under routing mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
Routing mode for routing traffic We will use Web Configurator to guide you
through the related menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as routing mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For
example LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
IP Address
Assignment
Set to Dynamic if the ISP provides the IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2
dynamically Otherwise set to Static and enter the IP in the IP
Address field
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
40
(2) Configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 and the DHCP settings in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
What is DHCP Relay
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In addition to the
DHCP server feature the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports the DHCP relay function
When it is configured as DHCP server it assigns the IP addresses to the LAN
clients When it is configured as DHCP relay it is responsible for forwarding
the requests and responses negotiating between the DHCP clients and the
server See figure 1
Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
We could set the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay by the following command
in CLI
Ip dhcp enif0 mode relay
Ip dhcp enif0 relay server [Server IP Address]
4 SUA Notes
Tested SUANAT Applications (eg Cu-SeeMe ICQ NetMeeting)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
41
Introduction
Generally SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users However some applications
such as Cu-SeeMe and ICQ will need to connect to the local user behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 In such case a SUA server must be configured to forward
the incoming packets to the true destination behind SUA After the required
server are configured in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding the internal server or client applications can be accessed
by using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP Address
SUA Supporting Table
The following are the required Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding for the various applications running SUA mode
ZyXEL SUA Supporting Table1
Application
Required Settings in Port Forwarding
PortIP
Outgoing Connection Incoming
Connection
HTTP None 80client IP
FTP None 21client IP
TELNET None 23client IP
(and active Telnet
service from WAN)
POP3 None 110client IP
SMTP None 25client IP
mIRC
None for Chat
For DCC please set
DefaultClient IP
Windows PPTP None 1723client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
42
ICQ 99a None for Chat
For DCC please set
ICQ -gt preference -gt
connections -gt firewall
and set the firewall time
out to 80 seconds in
firewall setting
Defaultclient IP
ICQ 2000b None for Chat None for Chat
ICQ Phone 2000b None 6701client IP
Cornell 11 Cu-SeeMe None 7648client IP
White Pine 312 Cu-SeeMe2 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
White Pine 40 Cu-SeeMe 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
Microsoft NetMeeting 21 amp
3013
None 1720client IP
1503client IP
Cisco IPTV 200 None
RealPlayer G2 None
VDOLive None
Quake1064 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeII2305 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeIII105 beta None
StartCraft 6112client IP
Quick Time 40 None
pcAnywhere 80 None
5631client IP
5632client IP
22client IP
IPsec (ESP tunneling mode) None (one client only) DefaultClient
Microsoft Messenger Service
30 6901client IP 6901client IP
Microsoft Messenger Service
46 47 50hellip
(none UPnP)6
None for Chat File
transfer Video and Voice
None for Chat File
transfer Video and
Voice
Net2Phone None 6701client IP
Network Time Protocol (NTP) None 123 server IP
Win2k Terminal Server None 3389server IP
Remote Anything None 3996 - 4000client IP
Virtual Network Computing None 5500client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
43
(VNC) 5800client IP
5900client IP
AIM (AOL Instant Messenger) None for Chat and IM None for Chat and
IM
e-Donkey None 4661 - 4662client IP
POLYCOM Video
Conferencing None Defaultclient IP
iVISTA 41 None 80server IP
Microsoft Xbox Live7 None NA 1 Since SUA enables your LAN to appear as a single computer to the Internet
it is not possible to configure similar servers on the same LAN behind SUA 2 Because White Pine Cu-SeeMe uses dedicate ports (port 7648 amp port 24032)
to transmit and receive data therefore only one local Cu-SeeMe is allowed
within the same LAN 3 In SUA mode only one local NetMeeting user is allowed because the
outsiders can not distinguish between local users using the same internet IP 4 Certain Quake servers do not allow multiple users to login using the same
unique IP so only one Quake user will be allowed in this case Moreover
when a Quake server is configured behind SUA P-660HW-Dx v2 will not be
able to provide information of that server on the internet 5 Quake II has the same limitations as that of Quake I 6 P-660HW-Dx v2 supports MSN Messenger 46 47 50hellip video voice
pass-through NAT In addition for the Windows OS supported UPnP
(Universal Plug and Play) such as Windows XP and Windows ME UPnP
supported in P-660HW-Dx v2 is an alternative solution to pass through MSN
Messenger video voice traffic For more detail please refer to UPnP
application note 7 P-660HW-Dx v2 support Microsoft Xbox Live with factory default
configuration
Configurations
For example if the workstation operating Cu-SeeMe has an IP of 192168134
then the default SUA server must be set to 192168134 The peer Cu-SeeMe
user can reach this workstation by using P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
44
which can be obtained from Web Configurator
Configure an Internal Server behind SUA
Introduction
If you wish you can make internal servers (eg Web ftp or mail server)
accessible for outside users even though SUA makes your LAN appear as a
single machine to the outside world A service is identified by the port number
Also since you need to specify the IP address of a server behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 a server must have a fixed IP address and not be a DHCP
client whose IP address potentially changes each time P-660HW-Dx v2 is
powered on
In addition to the servers for specific services SUA supports a default server
A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for is
forwarded to the default server If the default server is not defined the service
request is simply discarded
Configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
45
To make a server visible to the outside world specify the port number of the
service and the inside address of the server in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The outside users can access
the local server using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address which can be
obtained from Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information
For example
Configuring an internal Web server for outside access (suppose the
Server IP Address is 192168110)
(1) Fill in the service name and server IP Address press button bdquoAdd‟
(2) If add successfully the Web Configurator will display message
bdquoConfiguration updated successfully‟ at the bottom You can see the port
forwarding rule on the same page the default port for Web Server is 80
(3) If you want to change the port for Web Server you could press button
bdquoModify‟ on corresponding rule then modify and apply it
Default port numbers for some services
Service Port Number
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
46
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
Configure a PPTP server behind SUA
Introduction
PPTP is a tunneling protocol defined by the PPTP forum that allows PPP
packets to be encapsulated within Internet Protocol (IP) packets and
forwarded over any IP network including the Internet itself
In order to run the Windows 9x PPTP client you must be able to establish an
IP connection with a tunnel server such as the Windows NT Server 40
Remote Access Server
Windows Dial-Up Networking uses the Internet standard Point-to-Point (PPP)
to provide a secure optimized multiple-protocol network connection over
dial-up telephone lines All data sent over this connection can be encrypted
and compressed and multiple network level protocols (TCPIP NetBEUI and
IPX) can be run correctly Windows NT Domain Login level security is
preserved even across the Internet
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
47
Window98 PPTP Client Internet NT RAS Server Protocol Stack
PPTP appears as new modem type (Virtual Private Networking Adapter) that
can be selected when setting up a connection in the Dial-Up Networking folder
The VPN Adapter type does not appear elsewhere in the system Since PPTP
encapsulates its data stream in the PPP protocol the VPN requires a second
dial-up adapter This second dial-up adapter for VPN is added during the
installation phase of the Upgrade in addition to the first dial-up adapter that
provides PPP support for the analog or ISDN modem
The PPTP is supported in Windows NT and Windows 98 already For
Windows 95 it needs to be upgraded by the Dial-Up Networking 12 upgrade
Configuration
This application note explains how to establish a PPTP connection with a
remote private network in the P-660HW-Dx v2 SUA case In ZyNOS all PPTP
packets can be forwarded to the internal PPTP Server (WinNT server) behind
SUA The port number of the PPTP has to be entered in the Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding on
P-660HW-Dx v2 to forward to the appropriate private IP address of Windows
NT server
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
48
Example
The following example shows how to dial to an ISP via the P-660HW-Dx v2
and then establish a tunnel to a private network There will be three items that
you need to set up for PPTP application these are PPTP server (WinNT)
PPTP client (Win9x) and the P-660HW-Dx v2
(1) PPTP server setup (WinNT)
Add the VPN service from Control Panel -gtNetwork
Add an user account for PPTP logged on user
Enable RAS port
Select the network protocols from RAS such as IPX TCPIP NetBEUI
Set the Internet gateway to P-660HW-Dx v2
(2) PPTP client setup (Win9x)
Add one VPN connection from Dial-Up Networking by entering the
correct username amp password and the IP address of the P-660HW-Dx
v2s Internet IP address for logging to NT RAS server
Set the Internet gateway to the router that is connecting to ISP
(3) P-660HW-Dx v2 setup
Before making a VPN connection from Win9x to WinNT server you
need to connect P-660HW-Dx v2 router to your ISP first
Enter the IP address of the PPTP server (WinNT server) and the
port number for PPTP as shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
49
Select service name as bdquoPPTP‟ fill in the Server IP Address then press button
bdquoAdd‟
When you have finished the above settings you can ping to the remote Win9x
client from WinNT This ping command is used to demonstrate that remote
the Win9x can be reached across the Internet If the Internet connection
between two LANs is achievable you can place a VPN call from the remote
Win9x client
For example Cping 203661132
When a dial-up connection to ISP is established a default gateway is assigned
to the router traffic through that connection Therefore the output below shows
the default gateway of the Win9x client after the dial-up connection has been
established
Before making a VPN connection from the Win9x client to the NT server you
need to know the exact Internet IP address that the ISP assigns to
P-660HW-Dx v2 router in SUA mode and enter this IP address in the VPN
dial-up dialog box You can check this Internet IP address from PNC Monitor or
S Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information If the Internet IP address
is a fixed IP address provided by ISP in SUA mode then you can always use
this IP address for reaching the VPN server
In the following example the IP address 1401131225 is dynamically
assigned by ISP You must enter this IP address in the VPN Server dialog box
for reaching the PPTP server After the VPN link is established you can start
the network protocol application such as IP IPX and NetBEUI
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
50
5 Using Full Feature NAT
When P-660HW-Dx v2 is in Routing mode you can select NAT Option as
Full Feature in Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit
Key Settings
Field Options Description
Network Address
Translation
Full Feature
When you select this option you can select
Address Mapping Set Number 1~8 in the
pull-down menu on the right
None NAT is disabled when you select this option
SUA Only
When you select this option this remote node
will use default SUA Address Mapping Set
You can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat
lookup 255‟ It‟s a read-only sets with two
rules Many-to-One and server mapping
Select Full Feature when you require other
mapping types
Configuring NAT
Address Mapping Sets and NAT Server Sets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
51
The P-660HW-Dx v2 has 8 remote nodes and so allows you to configure 8
NAT Address Mapping Sets You must specify which NAT Address Mapping
Set (1~8) to use in the remote node when you select Full Feature NAT
You can edit 10 rules for each Address Mapping Set You can edit the rules for
Address Mapping Sets 1 in Web Configurator The other Address Mapping
Sets 2~8 can only be configured in CLI (Command Line Interface)
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports We
can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Port Forwarding To use the NAT server sets you‟ve configured a Server
rule must be set up inside the NAT Address Mapping set Please see NAT
Server Sets for further information on how to apply it
When you select SUA Only the P-660HW-Dx v2 will use a default SUA
Address Mapping set for it It has two rules Many-to-One and Server You
can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat lookup 255‟
Please note that the fields in this menu are read-only However the settings of
the rule set 2 can be modified in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The following table explains the fields in this
above screen
Field Description OptionExample
set This is sequence number for Address Mapping Sets 255 for SUA
Internal
Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA)
0000 for the
Many-to-One type
Local End
IP
This is the starting local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0000 and the
End IP is 255255255255
255255255255
Global Start
IP
This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you
have a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start
IP
0000
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
52
Global End
IP This is the ending global IP address (IGA) NA
Type This is the NAT mapping types Many-to-One and
Server
Here we‟ll guide you to configure Address Mapping Sets from Web
Configurator and CLI (Since in Web Configurator we can only edit the rules
for Address Mapping Sets 1 The other Address Mapping Sets 2~8 can only
be configured in CLI)
Now lets begin with Web Configurator
Firstly let‟s come to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping
This menu is for Address Mapping Set 1 you can edit 10 Address Mapping
Rules for Set 1 You can edit or remove a rule by clicking the two buttons on
the rule table
Click the bdquoEditrsquo Button on the rule 1 then you can enter the window in which
you can edit an individual rule and configure the Mapping Type Local and
Global StartEnd IPs
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
53
The following table describes the fields in this screen
Field Description OptionExample
Type You can select one of the five mapping types from the
pull-down menu
1 One-to-One
2 Many-to-One
3 Many-to-Many
Overload
4 Many-to-Many No
Overload
5 Server
Local
IP
Start This is the starting local IP address (ILA) 0000
End
This is the ending local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0000 and the
End IP as 255255255255 This field is NA for
One-to-One type
255255255255
Global
IP
Start This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you have
a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start IP 0000
End
This is the ending global IP address (IGA) This
field is NA for One-to-One Many-to-One and Server
types
2001164
Note For all Local and Global IPs the End IP address must begin after the IP
Start address ie you cannot have an End IP address beginning before the
Start IP address
Configure Address Mapping Sets in CLI
Setp 1 Telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 (We suppose the LAN IP Address of
P-660HW-Dx v2 is 19216811)
Step 2 Select one Address Mapping Set (1~8) by command bdquoip nat
addrmap map [map ] [set name]‟ (set name is optional) Suppose we
configure set 2 in the example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
54
Setp 3 Set NAT address mapping rule for the Address Mapping Set you just
configured (Set 2 in this example) by command bdquoip nat addrmap rule [rule]
[insert | edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP] [global start IP] [global
end IP] [server set ]‟ Suppose we set a Many-to-One rule for set 2 by
command bdquoip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 1 192168110 192168120 172111
172111‟
Setp 4 Save the configuration by command bdquoip nat addrmap save‟ You can
apply the Address Mapping Set 2 to remote nodes in Web Configurator when
you select Full Feature NAT See the intire process as follows
Set 5 You can lookup the successfully configured Address Mapping Sets by
command bdquoip nat addrmap disp‟
Key Settings
CI Command Description
ip nat addrmap map [map] [set
name]
Select NAT address mapping set and set mapping set
name but set name is optional
Example
gt ip nat addrmap map 2 Test
ip nat addrmap rule [rule] [insert |
edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP]
[global start IP] [global end IP] [server
set ]
Set NAT address mapping rule If the ldquotyperdquo is not
ldquoinside-serverrdquo then the ldquotyperdquo field will still need a
dummy value like ldquo0rdquo
Type is 0 - 4 = one-to-one many-to-one
many-to-many-overload many-to-many-non overload
inside-server
Example
gt ip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 3 192168110
192168120 172111 172111
ip nat addrmap clear [map] [rule] Clear the selected rule of the set
ip nat addrmap freememory Discard Changes
ip nat addrmap disp Display nat set information
ip nat addrmap save Save settings
ip nat server load [set] Load the server sets of NAT into buffer
ip nat server disp [1] ldquodisp 1rdquo means to display the NAT server set in buffer
if parameter ldquo1rdquo is omitted then it will display all the
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
55
server sets
ip nat server save Save the NAT server set buffer into flash
ip nat server clear [set] Clear the server set [set] must use ldquosaverdquo command
to let it save into flash
ip nat server edit [rule] active Activate the rule [rule] rule number is 1 to 24 the
number 25-36 is for UPNP application
ip nat server edit [rule] svrport ltstart
portgt ltend portgt
Configure the port range from ltstart port gt to ltend
portgt
ip nat server edit [rule] remotehost
ltstart IPgt ltend IPgt
Configure the IP address range of remote host (Leave
it to be default value if you don‟t need this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] leasetime
ltsecondsgt
Configure the lease time (Leave it to be default value if
you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] rulename
ltstringgt
Configure the name of the rule (Leave it to be default
value if you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] forwardip ltIP
addressgt Configure the LAN IP address to be forwarded
ip nat server edit [rule] protocol
ltTCP|UDP|ALLgt
Configure the protocol to be used TCP UDP or ALL
(it must be capital)
NAT Server Sets
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports
(similar to the old SUA menu of before) If you wish you can make inside
servers for different services eg Web or FTP visible to the outside users
even though NAT makes your network appears as a single machine to the
outside world A server is identified by the port number eg Web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21
As an example (see the following figure) if you have a Web server at
192168136 and a FTP server at 192168133 then you need to specify for
port 80 (Web) the server at IP address 192168136 and for port 21 (FTP)
another at IP address 192168133
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
56
Please note that a server can support more than one service eg a server
can provide both FTP and Mail service while another provides only Web
service
The following procedures show how to configure a server behind NAT
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
Step 2 Select the service name from the pull-down menu and fill in the server
Address on bdquoServer IP Address‟ then click button bdquoAdd‟ to save it
Step 3 You could click the button bdquoEdit‟ on the rule to modify the Service name
Server IP Address StartEnd Port
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please
refer RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers
Service Port Number
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol)
1723
Examples
Internet Access Only
Internet Access with an Internal Server
Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
(1) Internet Access Only
In our Internet Access example we only need one rule where all our ILAs map
to one IGA assigned by the ISP You can just use the default SUA NAT or you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
57
could select Full Feature NAT and select an Address Mapping Set with a
Many-to-One Rule See the following figure
(2) Internet Access with an Internal Server
In this case we do exactly as the figure (use the convenient pre-configured
SUA Only set) and also go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
NAT -gt Port Forwarding to specify the Internet Server behind the NAT as
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
58
below
(3) Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
(One-to-One Many-to-One Server Set mapping types are used)
In this case we have 3 IGAs from the ISP We have two very busy internal FTP
servers and also an internal general server for the web and mail In this case
we want to assign the 3 IGAs by the following way using 4 NAT rules
Rule 1 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
Rule 3 (Many-to-One type) to map the other clients to IGA3 (200003)
Rule 4 (Server type) to map a web server and mail server with ILA3
(192168120) to IGA3 Type Server allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types to other machines behind NAT on the LAN
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
59
Step 1 In this case we need to map ILA to more than one IGA therefore we
must choose the Full Feature option from the NAT field in currently active
remote node and assign IGA3 to P-660HW-Dx v2‟s WAN IP Address
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping to begin configuring Address Mapping Set 1 We can see
there are 10 blank rule table that could be configured See the following setup
for the four rules in our case
Rule 1 Setup Select One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 Setup Selecting One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
60
Rule 3 Setup Select Many-to-One type to map the other clients to IGA3
(200003)
Rule 4 Setup Select Server type to map our web server and mail server with
ILA3 (192168120) to IGA3
Menu Network -gt NAT -gt Address Mapping should look as follows now
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
61
Step 3 Now we configure all other incoming traffic to go to our web server and
mail server from Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
(4) Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some mIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address In this case it is better to
use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types thus each
user login to the server using a unique global IP address The following figure
illustrates this
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
62
One rule configured for using Many-to-Many No Overload mapping type is
shown below
We can also do this by configure threeOne-to-One mapping type rules
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
What is DDNS
The DDNS service an IP Registry provides a public central database where
information such as email addresses hostnames IPs etc can be stored and
retrieved This solves the problems if your DNS server uses an IP associated
with dynamic IPs
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to access the internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
must inform the DDNS server the change of this IP so that the server can
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
63
update its IP-to-DNS entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is
updated the DNS name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still
usable
The DDNS servers the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports currently is
WWWDYNDNSORG where you apply the DNS from and update the WAN IP
to
Setup the DDNS
1 Before configuring the DDNS settings in the P-660HW-Dx v2 you must
register an account from the DDNS server such as
WWWDYNDNSORG first After the registration you have a hostname
for your internal server and a password using to update the IP to the
DDNS server
2 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Dynamic DNS
Select Active Dynamic DNS option
Key Settings
Option Description
Service Provider Enter the DDNS server in this field Currently we support
WWWDYNDNSORG
Active Toggle to Yes
Host Name Enter the hostname you subscribe from the above DDNS server
For example zyxelcomtw
User Name Enter the user name that the DDNS server gives to you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
64
Password Enter the password that the DDNS server gives to you
Enable Wildcard
Enter the hostname for the wildcard function that the
WWWDYNDNSORG supports Note that Wildcard option is
available only when the provider is httpwwwdyndnsorg
7 Network Management Using SNMP
ZyXEL SNMP Implementation
ZyXEL currently includes SNMP support in some P-660HW-Dx v2 routers It is
implemented based on the SNMPv1 so it will be able to communicate with
SNMPv1 NMSs Further users can also add ZyXELs private MIB in the NMS
to monitor and control additional system variables The ZyXELs private MIB
tree is shown in figure 3 For SNMPv1 operation ZyXEL permits one
community string so that the router can belong to only one community and
allows trap messages to be sent to only one NMS manager
Some traps are sent to the SNMP manager when anyone of the following
events happens
1 coldStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine coldstarts the trap will be sent after booting
2 warmStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine warmstarts the trap will be sent after booting
3 linkDown (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is down the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
4 linkUp (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is up the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
5 authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215)
When receiving any SNMP get or set requirement with wrong community
this trap is sent to the manager
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
65
6 whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-MIB)
When the system is going to restart (warmstart) the trap will be sent with the
reason of restart before rebooting
(1) For intentional reboot
In some cases (download new files CI command sys reboot ) reboot is
done intentionally And traps with the message System reboot by user will
be sent
(2) For fatal error
System has to reboot for some fatal errors And traps with the message of the
fatal code will be sent
Downloading ZyXELs private MIB
Configure the P-660HW-Dx v2 for SNMP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
66
The SNMP related settings in P-660HW-Dx v2 are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt SNMP The
following steps describe a simple setup procedure for configuring all SNMP
settings
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Get
Community
Enter the correct Get Community This Get Community must match the
Get- and GetNext community requested from the NMS The default is
public
Set
Community
Enter the correct Set Community This Set Community must match the
Set-community requested from the NMS The default is public
Trusted
Host
Enter the IP address of the NMS The P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will only
respond to SNMP messages coming from this IP address If 0000 is
entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will respond to all NMS
managers
Trap
Community
Enter the community name in each sent trap to the NMS This Trap
Community must match what the NMS is expecting The default is
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
67
public
Trap
Destination
Enter the IP address of the NMS that you wish to send the traps to If
0000 is entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will not send trap any
NMS manager
Note You may need to edit a firewall rule to permit SNMP Packets
8 Using syslog
You can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt
Logs -gt Log Settings -gt Syslog logging
Key Settings
Active Select it to active UNIX Syslog
Syslog IP Address Enter the IP address of the UNIX server that you wish to
send the syslog
Log Facility Select from the 7 different local options The log facility lets you
log the message in different server files Refer to your UNIX manual
9 Using IP Alias
What is IP Alias
In a typical environment a LAN router is required to connect two local
networks The P-660HW-Dx v2 can connect three local networks to the ISP or
a remote node we call this function as IP Alias In this case an internal
router is not required For example the network manager can divide the local
network into three networks and connect them to the Internet using
P-660HW-Dx v2s single user account See the figure below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
68
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports three virtual LAN interfaces via its single
physical Ethernet interface The first network can be configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN -gt DHCP Setup The second
and third networks that we call IP Alias 1 and IP Alias 2 can be configured
in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias
There are three internal virtual LAN interfaces for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to route
the packets fromto the three networks correctly They are enif0 for the major
network enif00 for the IP alias 1 and enif01 for the IP alias 2 Therefore
three routes are created in the P-660HW-Dx v2 as shown below when the
three networks are configured If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP is also enabled
the IP pool for the clients can be any of the three networks
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
69
You can edit filter rule to accept or deny LAN packets fromto the IP alias 12
go through the P-660HW-Dx v2 by command in CLI
lan index [index number]
Usage index number =1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt [set]
Usage set= the corresponding filter set number you‟ve configured
lan save
IP Alias Setup
(1) Edit the first network in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
LAN -gt IPDHCP Setup by configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s first LAN IP
address
Key Settings
DHCP
Setup
If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP server is enabled the IP pool for the clients
can be any of the three networks
TCPIP
Setup
Enter the first LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This will create the
first route in the enif0 interface
(2) Edit the second and third networks in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias by
configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s second and third LAN IP addresses
Key Settings
IP Alias 1 Active it and enter the second LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the second route in the enif00 interface
IP Alias 2 Active it and enter the third LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the third route in the enif01 interface
10 Using IP Policy Routing
What is IP Policy Routing (IPPR)
Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router
takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides
a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet
forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator
Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis
prior to the normal routing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
70
traffic among multiple paths For example if a network has both the Internet
and remote node connections we can route the Web packets to the Internet
using one policy and route the FTP packets to the remote LAN using another
policy See the figure below
Use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths
Benefits
Source-Based Routing - Network administrators can use policy-based
routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections
Quality of Service (QoS)- Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the
precedence or TOS (Type of Service) values in the IP header at the periphery
of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic
Cost Savings- IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on
high-bandwidth high-cost path while using low-path for batch traffic
Load Sharing- Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic
among multiple paths
How does the IPPR work
A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet
meets the criteria The action is taken only when all the criteria are met The
criteria include the source address and port IP protocol (ICMP UDP TCP
etc) destination address and port TOS and precedence (fields in the IP
header) and length The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between
interactive and bulk traffic Interactive applications eg Telnet tend to have
short packets while bulk traffic eg file transfer tends to have large packets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
71
The actions that can be taken include routing the packet to a different gateway
(and hence the outgoing interface) and the TOS and precedence fields in the
IP header IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of ZyNOS in style
and in implementation The policies are divided into sets where related
policies are grouped together A use defines the policies before applying them
to an interface or a remote node in the same fashion as the filters There are
12 policy sets with 6 policies in each set
Setup the IP Policy Routing
Setp 1 Set the index of IP routing policy set rule by command bdquoip
policyrouting set index [set] [rule]‟ Suppose set=1 rule=1 in this
example
Step 2 Suppose we‟d like to edit the rule like this
Policy Set Name=Test
Active= Yes
Criteria
IP Protocol = 6
Type of Service= Dont Care Packet length= 0
Precedence = Dont Care Len Comp= NA
Source
addr start= 19216812 end= 192168120
port start= 0 end= NA
Destination
addr start= 0000 end= NA
port start= 80 end= 80
Action= Matched
Gateway addr = 1921681254 Log= No
Type of Service= No Change
Precedence = No Change
This policy example forces the Web packets originated from the clients with IP
addresses from 19216812 to 192168120 be routed to the remote LAN via
the gateway 1921681254
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
ip policyrouting set name Test
(Set the name as Test of IP routing policy rule )
ip policyrouting set active yes
(Enable the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria protocol 6
(Set the protocol ID as 6(TCP) for the rule)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
72
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the criteria type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria packetlength 0
(Set the packet length as 0 for the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcip 19216812 192168120
(Set the source IP address for the rule Start=19216812 end=192168120)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcport 0
(Set the source port for the rule Start=0)
ip policyrouting set criteria destip 0000
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=0000)
ip policyrouting set criteria destport 80 80
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=80 end=80)
ip policyrouting set action actmatched
(Set the action for the rule Matched)
ip policyrouting set action gatewaytype 0
(Set gateway type for the rule Gateway Address)
ip policyrouting set action gatewayaddr 1921681254
(Set the gateway address for the rule 1921681254)
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the action type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the action precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set action log no
(Set log option for the rule no log)
ip polictrouting set save
(Save the rule)
Step 3 Apply the IP policy routing There are two interfaces to apply the policy
set they are the LAN interface and WAN interface It depends where the
gateway specified in the policy rule is located If the gateway you specified is
located on the local LAN you apply the policy set in LAN interface If the
gateway you specified is located on the remote WAN site you apply the policy
set in WAN interface
Apply to WAN Interface (Suppose we apply it to remote node 1 in the
example)
wan node index 1
wan node ippolicy 1
11 Using Call Scheduling
What is Call Scheduling
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
73
Call scheduling enables the mechanism for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to run the
remote node connection according to the pre-defined schedule This feature is
just like the scheduler in a video recorder which records the program according
to the specified time Users can apply at most 4 schedule sets in Remote Node
The remote node configured with the schedule set could be Forced On
Forced Down Enable Dial-On-Demand or Disable Dial-On-Demand on
specified date and time
How to configure a Call Scheduling
You can configure a call scheduling in CLI
Suppose we want to edit a call schedule set like this
Call Schedule Set =1
Set name=Test
Active= Yes
Start Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 - 12 - 27
How Often= Once
Once
Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 -12 -27
Start Time(hhmm)= 12 00
Duration(hhmm)= 16 00
Action= Enable Dial-on-demand
This schedule example permits a demand call on the line on 1200 am
2005-12-27 The maximum length of time this connection is allowed is 16
hours
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
wan callsch index 1
(Set call schedule index = 1 You must apply this command first before you
begin to configure call schedule)
wan callsch name Test
(Set the schedule name as Test)
wan callsch active Yes
(Enable schedule)
wan callsch startdate 2005 12 27
(Set schedule start date as 2005-12-27)
wan callsch oncedate 2005 12 27
(Set the schedule used just once it works on 2005-12-27)
wan callsch starttime 12 00
(Set the schedule start time as 1200)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
74
wan callsch duration 16 00
(Set schedule duration time as 16 hours)
wan callsch action 2
(Set action as dial-on-demand)
wan callsch save
(Save the current call schedule set)
Key Settings
Start Date
Start date of this schedule rule It can be unmatched with weekday
setting For example if Start Date is 20001002(Monday) but Monday
setting in weekday can be No
Forced On The node will always keep up during the setting period It is equivalent
to diable the idel timeout
Forced Down The node will always keep doen during the setting period The
connected remote node will be dropped
Enable
Dial-On-Demand The remote node accepts Dial-on-demand during this period
Disable
Dial-On-Demand
The remote node denies any demand dial during the period For the
existing connected nodes it will be dropped after idle timeout and no
triggered up
Start Time
Duration Start Time and Duration of this schedule
Apply the schedule to the Remote node
Multiple scheduling rules can program in a Remote node and they have
priority For example if we program the sets as 1234 in remote node then
the set 1 will override set 234 set 2 will override 34 and so on
We can apply the schedule to the remote node in CLI by the commands
wan node index []index]
wan node callsch [index]
wan node save
For example if we want to apply the call schedule set 1 to remote node 1 we
could use the commands
wan node index 1
wan node callsch 1
wan node save
Time Service in P-660HW-Dx v2
There is no RTC (Real-Time Clock) chip so the P-660HW-Dx v2 should launch
a mechanism to get current time and date from external server in boot time
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
75
Time service is implemented by the Daytime protocol(RFC-867) Time
protocol(RFC-868) and NTP protocol(RFC-1305) You have to assign an IP
address of a time server and then the P-660HW-Dx v2 will get the date time
and time-zone information from this server You can configure it in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt System -gt Time Setting
12 Using IP Multicast
What is IP Multicast
Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in two ways - unicast or broadcast
Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts Host groups
are identified by class D IP addresses ie those with 1110 as their
higher-order bits In dotted decimal notation host group addresses range from
224000 to 239255255255 Among them 224001 is assigned to the
permanent IP hosts group and 224002 is assigned to the multicast routers
group
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is the protocol used to support
multicast groups The latest version is version 2 (see RFC2236) IP hosts use
IGMP to report their multicast group membership to any immediate-neighbor
multicast routers so the multicast routers can decide if a multicast packet
needs to be forwarded At start up the P-660HW-Dx v2 queries all directly
connected networks to gather group membership
After that the P-660HW-Dx v2 updates the information by periodic queries
The P-660HW-Dx v2 implementation of IGMP is also compatible with version 1
The multicast setting can be turned on or off on Ethernet and remote nodes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
76
IP Multicast Setup
(1) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt LAN -gt IP -gt Advanced Setup
(2) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s remote node in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt Multicast
Key Settings
Multicast IGMP-v1 for IGMP version 1 IGMP-v2 for IGMP version 2
13 Using Bandwidth Management
Why Bandwidth Management (BWM)
Nowadays we have many different traffic types for Internet applications Some
traffic may consume high bandwidth such as FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
Some other traffic may not require high bandwidth but they require stable
supply of bandwidth such as VoIP traffic The VoIP quality would not be good
if all of the outgoing bandwidth is occupied via FTP Additionally chances are
that you would like to grant higher bandwidth for somebody special who is
using specific IP address in your network All of these are reasons why we
need bandwidth management
Using BWM
Setp 1 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gtSummary activate bandwidth management on the interface you
would like to manage We enable the BWM function on WAN interface in this
example
Enter the total speed for this interface that you want to allocate using
bandwidth management This appears as the bandwidth budget of the
interface‟s root class
Select how you want the bandwidth to be allocated Priority-Based means
bandwidth is allocated via priority so the traffic with highest priority would be
served first then the second priority is served secondly and so on If
Fairness-Based is chosen then the bandwidth is allocated by ratio Which
means if A class needs 300 kbps B class needs 600 kbps then the ratio of A
and Bs actual bandwidth is 12 So if we get 450 kbps in total then A would
get 150 kbps B would get 300 kbps We select Priority-Based in this
example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
77
Key Settings
Active
Check the box to enable BWM on the interface Note that if you would like
to manage traffic from WAN to LAN you should apply BWM on LAN
interface If you would like to management traffic from WAN to DMZ
please apply BWM on DMZ interface
Speed Enter the total speed to manage on this interface This value is the budget
of the class trees root
Scheduler
Choose the principle to allocate bandwidth on this interface
Priority-Based allocates bandwidth via priority Fairness-Based allocates
bandwidth by ratio
Maximize
Bandwidth
Usage
Check this box if you would like to give residuary bandwidth from Interface
to the classes who need more bandwidth than configured amount Do not
select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a
bandwidth class or you want to limit the bandwidth of each class at the
configured value (Please note that to meat the second condition you
should also disable Use All Managed Bandwidth in the BWM rule)
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Rule Setup select the interface Service Priority and Allocated
Bandwidth for this rule then click button bdquoAdd‟ to apply this rule
Step 3 You can modify the rule by clicking the button lsquoEditrsquo on the rule
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
78
Key Settings
RuleName Give this rule a name for example WWW
BW Budget Configure the bandwidth you would like to allocate to this rule
Priority Enter a number between 0 and 7 to set the priority of this class The
higher the number the higher the priority The default setting is 3
Use All
Managed
Bandwidth
Check this box if you would like to let this class to borrow bandwidth from
its parents when the required bandwidth is higher than the configured
amount Do not check this if you want to limit the bandwidth of this class
at the configured value(Please note that you should also disable
Maximize Bandwidth Usage on the interface to meet the condition)
Service Select User-defined SIP FTP or H323 to specify the traffic types
Destination
IP Address Enter the IP address of destination that meets this class
Destination
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
Destination
Port Enter the destination port number of the traffic
Source IP
Address
Enter the IP address of source that meats this class Note that for traffic
from LAN to WAN since BWM is before NAT you should use the IP
address before NAT processing
Source
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
79
Source Port Enter the source port number of the traffic
Protocol ID Enter the protocol number for the traffic 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP or 17 for
UDP
After configuration BWM you can check current bandwidth of the configured
traffic in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Monitor
14 Using Zero-Configuration
Zero-Configuration and VC auto-hunting
Zero-Configure feature can help customer to reduce the burden of setting
efforts Whenever system ADSL links up system will send out some probing
patterns system will analyze the packets returned from ISP and decide which
services the ISP may provide Because ADSL is based on a ATM network so
system have to pre-configured a VPIVCI hunting pool before Auto-Configure
function begins to work
The Zero-Configuration feature can hunt the encapsulation and VPIVCI value
and system will automatically configure itself if the hunting result is
successfully This feature has two constraints
1 It supports the ISP provides one kind of service (PPPoEPPPoA etc)
only otherwise the hunting will get confusing and failed
2 VC auto-hunting only supports dynamic WAN IP address If the router is
set a static WAN IP address VC auto-hunting function will be disabled
The entry of hunting pool must also contain the VPI VCI and which kinds of
hunting patterns you wish to send Whenever system send out all the probing
patterns with specific VPIVCI system will wait for 5~10 seconds and get the
response from ISP the response patterns will decide which kinds of ADSL
services of the line will be After that system will save back the correct VPI
VCI and also services (encapsulation) type into profile of WAN interface
Configure the VC auto-hunting preconfigured table
(1) Display auto-haunting preconfigured table by using command from CLI
wan atm vchunt display
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
80
(2) Add items to the auto-haunting preconfigured table by using commands
wan atm vchunt add ltremoteNodeIndexgt ltvpigt ltvcigt ltservice
bit(hex)gt
wan atm vchunt save
Note ltremote nodegt input the remote node index 1-8
ltvpigt vpi value
ltvcigt vci value
ltservicegt it‟s a hex value bit0PPPoEVC (1) bit1PPPoELLC (2)
bit2PPPoAVC (4) bit3PPPoALLC (8) bit4EnetVC (16) bit5 EnetLLC (32)
For example
(1) If you need service PPPoELLC and EnetLLC then the service bits will be
2+32 = 34 (decimal) = 22 (hex) you must input 22
(2) If you want to enable all service for VC hunting the service bits will be
1+2+4+8+16+32=63(decimal)= 3f (hex) you must input 3f
Need to perform save after this by command bdquowan atm vchunt save‟
(3) Delete items from the auto-haunting preconfigured table by useing
command
wan atm vchunt remove ltremote nodegt ltvpigt ltvcigt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
81
Using Zero configuration
You can enabledisable Zero Configuration in Network -gt WAN -gt Advanced
Setup
(1) After configure the auto-haunting preconfigured table You just need a PC
connected to the device LAN Ethernet port with the DSL sync up
(2) Open your web browser to access a Web site It should prompt and request
for your username password of your ISP account if your ISP provide PPPoE
or PPPoA service
(3) After key-in the correct info it will than test the connection If it is
successful it will than close the browser and you can open a new browser to
surf the Internet If the connection test fail it will go back to the page ask for
user name and password
(4) Basically the zero configuration only work on the VC that was preconigured
in the auto-haunting preconfigured table
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2
The common triple play scenario is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
82
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus we could assign different parameters to the PVC (CBR
UBR VBR-RT VBR-nRT) to guarantee different applications
We could configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 via CLI The command is
sys tripleplay set portbase ltEportIDgt ltPVCIDgt
For example sys tripleplay portbase set 1 1
sys tripleplay portbase set 2 2
sys tripleplay portbase set 3 3
The traffic from Ethernet port 1 must be forwarded to PVC1 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet port 2 must be forwarded to PVC2 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet Port3 must be forwarded to PVC3 vice versa
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to configure up to twelve filter sets with six
rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system You can apply up to
four filter sets to a particular port to block multiple types of packets With each
filter set having up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for
a single port
The packet filter function on P-660HW-Dx v2 is the same as before just that
you could only configure the filter set and apply them by command in CLI It‟s
very complex for common users to do it So here‟s the recommendation
(1) Usually if you want to block special packets you could edit a firewall rule in
Web Configurator
032
VOIP Server
IPTV Server
Internet
Server
Others
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
ATUR IP-DSLAM VL-Switch
CPE Access Network ISP
034
055
VOIP Telephone
Video Client
Clients surfing
Internet
Other clients
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
PVC1
PVC2
PVC3
PVC4 132
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
83
(2) By factory default ZyXEL has preconfigured many filter sets for your
reference you can check them by command
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Usage set 1~12 rule 1~6 Commonly the preconfigured filter sets are as
follows ltset 2 rule 1~6gt ltset 3 rule 1gt ltset 4 rule 1gt
sys filter set display
For example
This could satisfy mostly requirement You could select any of them to apply to
the WAN node or LAN Interface on demand The command is as follows
Apply to WAN node
wan node index ltnodegt
Usage node= 1~8 corresponding to the remote node 1~8
wan node filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt
ltset3gt ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to one remote node
wan node save
Apply to LAN Interface
lan index [index]
Usage index=1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
84
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt ltset3gt
ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to LAN Interface
lan save
(3) If you are very advanced user you could edit filter set by the following
command
sys filter set [set] [rule]
Usage Set up a filter set index to edit a set
set 1~12
rule 1~6
sys filter set type [typeID]
Usage typeID tcpip or generic
Note In one filter set you should configure all the rules in one type either
tcpip or generic
sys filter set enable
Usage Enable(active) the rule
sys filter set helliphellip(You could configure a filter rule on demand the newest
command is available on release note)
sys filter set save
Usage Don‟t forget to save the rule everytime you‟ve configured it
Reference Commands
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Set the index of filter set rule you must apply this
command first before you begin to configure the
filter rules
sys filter set name [set name] Set the name of filter set
sys filter set type [tcpip | generic] Set the type of filter rule
sys filter set enable Enable the rule
sys filter set disable Disable the rule
sys filter set protocol [protocol ] Set the protocol ID of the rule
sys filter set sourceroute [yes|no] Set the sourceroute yesno
sys filter set destip [address] [subnet
mask]
Set the destination IP address and subnet mask of
the rule
sys filter set destport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|notequal|less|greater]
Set the destination port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set srcip [address] [subnet
mask] Set the source IP address and subnet mask
sys filter set srcport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|not
Set the source port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
85
equal|less|greater] equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set tcpEstab [yes|no] Set TCP establish option
sys filter set more [yes|no] Set the more option to yesno
sys filter set log [type 0-3= none | match|
notmatch | both ]
Set the log type (it could be 0-3 =none match not
match both)
sys filter set actmatch[type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for match
sys filter set actnomatch [type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for not match
sys filter set offset [] Set offset for the generic rule
sys filter set length [] Set the length for generic rule
sys filter set mask [] Set the mask for generic rule
sys filter set value [(depend on length in
hex)] Set the value for generic rule
sys filter set clear Clear the current filter set
sys filter set save Save the filter set parameters
sys filter set display [set][rule] Display Filter set information Wo parameter it will
display buffer information
sys filter set freememory Discard Changes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
86
Wireless Application Notes
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode
Ad hoc Introduction
What is Ad Hoc mode
Ad hoc mode is a wireless network consists of a number of stations without
access points Without using an access point or any connection to a wired
network a client unit in Ad hoc operation mode can communicate directly to
other client units just as using a cross over Ethernet cable connecting 2 hosts
together via a NIC card for direct connection when configured in Ad hoc mode
without an access point being present Ad hoc operation is ideal for small
networks of no more than 2-4 computers Larger networks would require the
use of one or perhaps several access points
Configuration for Wireless Station A
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
87
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
88
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Configuration for Wireless Station B
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
89
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
90
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Step 7 Station A now are able to connect to Station B
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure Introduction
For Infrastructure WLANs multiple Access Points (APs) like the WLAN to the
wired network and allow users to efficiently share network resources The
Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also
mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
91
Configure Wireless Access Point to Infrastructure mode using Web
configurator
To configure Infrastructure mode of your P-660HW-Dx v2 wireless AP please
follow the steps below
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gt General Configure the basic parameters for Wireless LAN
Step 2 You could click the button bdquoAdvanced Setup‟ for more detailed
configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
92
Configuration Wireless Station to Infrastructure mode
To configure Infrastructure mode on your ZyAIR G-200 Wireless Network
Adapter please follow the following steps
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
93
Step 3 Select Infrastructure from the operation mode pull down menu fill in an
SSID or leave it as any if you wish to connect to any AP than press Apply
Change to take effect
Step 4 Click on Site Survey tab and press search all the available AP will be
listed
Step 5 Double click on the AP you want to associated with
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
94
Step 6 After the client have associated with the selected AP The linked APs
channel current linkup rate SSID link quality and signal strength will show on
the Link Info page You now successfully associate with the selected AP with
Infrastructure Mode
3 MAC Filter
MAC Filter Overview
Users can use MAC Filter as a method to restrict unauthorized stations from
accessing the APs ZyXELs APs provide the capability for checking MAC
address of the station before allowing it to connect to the network This
provides an additional layer of control layer in that only stations with registered
MAC addresses can connect This approach requires that the list of MAC
addresses be configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
95
ZyXEL MAC Filter Implementation
ZyXELs MAC Filter Implementation allows users to define a list to allow or
block association from STAs The filter set allows users to input 12 entries in
the list If Allow Association is selected all other STAs which are not on the list
will be denied Otherwise if Deny Association is selected all other STAs which
are not on the list will be allowed for association Users can choose either way
to configure their filter rule
Configure the WLAN MAC Filter
The MAC Filter related settings in ZyXEL APs are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gtMAC Filter
Before you configure the MAC filter you need to know the MAC address of the
client first If not knowing what your MAC address is please enter a command
ipconfig all after DOS prompt to get the MAC (physical) address of your
wireless client
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gtMAC Filter active MAC Filter
Step 2 Enter the MAC Addresses of wireless cards in the filter set to allow or
deny association from these cards
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Filter Action
Allow or block association from MAC addresses contained in this list If Allow
Association is selected in this field hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list
will be allowed to associate with AP If Deny Association is selected in this field
hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list will be blocked
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
96
MAC Address This field specifies those MAC Addresses that you want to add in the list
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
Introduction
The 80211 standard describes the communication that occurs in wireless
LANs
The Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm is used to protect wireless
communication from eavesdropping because wireless transmissions are
easier to intercept than transmissions over wired networks and wireless is a
shared medium everything that is transmitted or received over a wireless
network can be intercepted
WEP relies on a secret key that is shared between a mobile station (eg a
laptop with a wireless Ethernet card) and an access point (ie a base station)
The secret key is used to encrypt packets before they are transmitted and an
integrity check is used to ensure that packages are not modified during the
transition The standard does not discuss how the shared key is established In
practice most installations use a single key that is shared between all mobile
stations and access points APs You can refer to the User Guide for more
detailed information about it
Setting up the Access Point
You can set up the Access Point from Web configurator Advanced Setup
Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General (You can also configure it via CLI)
Step 1 Select bdquoStatic WEP‟ from the pull down menu bdquoSecurity Mode‟ in Web
Configurator
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
97
Step 2 Set up WEP Key in the Web Configurator You need to set the one of
the following parameters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 5 characters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 10 hexadecimal digits
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 13 characters
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 26 hexadecimal digits
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 29 characters
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 58 hexadecimal digits
There are two ways you can configure the WEP Key
(1) You can put in a special WEP key in the bdquoWEP Key‟ menu directly
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
98
(2) You can also put in an arbitrary sequence of characters in the
bdquoPassphrase‟ and then press button bdquoGenerate‟ to let the P-660HW-Dx v2
generate WEP Key for you
Setting up the Station
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar or right click
the utility icon then select Show Config Utility
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
99
The utility will pop up on your windows screen
Note If the utility icon doesnt exist in your task bar click Start -gt
Programs -gt helliphellip to start the utility
Step 2 Select the Configuration tab
Select bdquoSet Security‟ to configure encryption type and parameters
correspond with access point
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
100
Note You should select Key 1 as default Transmit Key since the P-660HW-Dx
v2 is supposed to use Key 1 by default
Key settings
The WEP Encryption type of station has to equal to the access point
Check ASCII field for characters WEP key or uncheck ASCII field for
Hexadecimal digits WEP key
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
101
Hexadecimal digits dont need to precede by 0x
For example
64-bits with characters WEP key Key1= 2e3f4
64-bits with hexadecimal digits WEP key Key1= 123456789A
5 Site Survey
Introduction
What is Site Survey
An RF site survey is a MAP to RF contour of RF coverage in a particular
facility With wireless system it is very difficult to predict the propagation of
radio waves and detect the presence of interfering signals Walls doors
elevator shafts and other obstacles offer different degree of attenuation This
will cause the RF coverage pattern be irregular and hard to predict
Site survey can help us overcome these problem and even provide us a map
of RF coverage of the facility
Preparation
Below are the steps to complete a simple site survey with simple tools
1 First you will need to obtain a facility diagram such as blueprints This is
for you to mark and take record on
2 Visually inspect the facility walk through the facility to verify the accuracy of
the diagram and mark down any large obstacle you see that may effect the RF
signal such as metal shelf metal desk etc on the diagram
3 Identify users area when doing so ask a question where is wireless
coverage needed and where does not and note and take note on the diagram
this is information is needed to determine the number of AP required
4 Determine the preliminary access point location on the facility diagram base
on the service area needed obstacles power wall jack considerations
Survey on Site
Step 1 With the diagram with all information you gathered in the preparation
phase Now you are ready to make the survey
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
102
Step 2 Install an access point at the preliminary location
Step 3 Use a notebook with wireless client installed and run its utility An utility
will provide information such as connection speed current used channel
associated rate link quality signal strength and etc information as shown in
utility below
Step 4 Its always a good idea to start with putting the access point at the
corner of the room and walk away from the access point in a systematic
manner Record the changes at point where transfer rate drop and the link
quality and signal strength information on the diagram as you go alone
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
103
Step 5 When you reach the farthest point of connection mark the spot Now
you move the access point to this new spot as have already determine the
farthest point of the access point installation spot if wireless service is required
from corner of the room
Step 6 Repeat step 1~5 and now you should be able to mark an RF coverage
area as illustrated in above picutre
Step 7 You may need more than one access point is the RF coverage area
hasn‟t covered all the wireless service area you needed
Step 8 Repeat step 1~6 of survey on site as necessary upon completion you
will have a diagram and information of site survey As illustrated below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
104
Note If there are more than one access point is needed be sure to make the
adjacent access point service area over lap one another So the wireless
station is able to roam For more information please refer to roaming at
6 Configure 8021x and WPA
What is the WPA Functionality
Configuration for Access Point
Configuration for your PC
What is WPA Functionality
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
105
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN
Here comes WPA-PSK Application example for your reference
Configuration for Access point
The IEEE 8021x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the
authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management
Authentication can be done using local user database internal to the
P-660HW-Dx v2 (authenticate up to 32 users) or an external RADIUS server
for an unlimited number of users
Step 1 To change your P-660HW-Dx v2s authentication settings login Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General
-gtSecurity
Step 2 Select lsquoSecurity Mode‟ as WAP-PSK
Step 3 Type the Pre Shared Key in the Pre-Shared Key field
Step 4 Click Apply to finish
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
106
Configuration for your PC
Step 1 Double click on your wireless utility icon in your windows task bar the
utility will pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select the configuration tab type in the SSID (Service Set Identifier)
select the operating Mode as Infrastructure and select proper channel
Step 3 Click Set Security to configure the security parameters
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
107
Step 4 Click OK for finish and begin to Site survey Connect to the AP as you
have configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
108
Step 5 Click Link Info tab if the PC associated and authenticated with AP
successfully we will see the following information
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
109
Support Tool
1 LANWAN Packet Trace
The Prestige packet trace records and analyzes packets running on LAN and
WAN interfaces It is designed for users with technical backgrounds who are
interested in the details of the packet flow on LAN or WAN end of Prestige It is
also very helpful for diagnostics if you have compatibility problems with your
ISP or if you want to know the details of a packet for configuring a filter rule
The format of the display is as following
Packet
[index] [timersecond][channel-receivetransmit][length] [protocol]
[sourceIPport] [destIPport]
There are two ways to dump the trace
Online Trace--display the trace real time on screen
Offline Trace--capture the trace first and display later
The details for capturing the trace in CLI as follows
First of all you need to telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 firstly The password is
Administrator passwords bdquoadmin‟ by default
Online Trace
(1) Trace LAN packet
Disable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
none
Enable to capture the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
110
(2) Trace WAN packet
Disable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
none
Enable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
111
Offline Trace
Disable the capture of the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel
mpoa00 none
Enable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Wait for packet passing through the Prestige over LAN
Disable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw off amp sys trcl sw off
Display the trace briefly by entering sys trcp brief
Display specific packets by using sys trcp parse ltfrom_indexgt ltto_indexgt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
112
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal
Step 1 Initiate a hyper terminal connection from your PC(suppose you
connected to the LAN port of P-660HW-Dx v2)
Step 2 Click the bdquoproperties‟ to configure parameters to telnet to the
P-660HW-Dx v2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
113
Step 3 So that after you invoke the relevant commands you could save the
logs you‟ve captured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
114
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP
Using TFTP client software
Uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Uploaddownload Prestige configurations via LAN
(1) Using TFTP to uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout
in Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 Enter the IP address of the Prestige
Step 5To upload the firmware please save the remote file as ras to
Prestige After the transfer is complete the Prestige will program the upgraded
firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
115
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige The local file is the source
file of the ZyNOS firmware that is available in your hard disk The remote file is
the file name that will be saved in Prestige Check the port number 69 and
512-Octet blocks for TFTP Check Binary mode for file transfering
(2) Using TFTP to uploaddownload SMT configurations via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 To download the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please get the
remote file rom-0 from the Prestige
Step 5 To upload the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please save the
remote file as rom-0 in the Prestige
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
116
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige
The local file is the source file of your configuration file that is available
in your hard disk
The remote file is the file name that will be saved in Prestige
Check the port number 69 and 512-Octet blocks for TFTP
Check Binary mode for file transfering
Using TFTP command on Windows NT
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Download ZyNOS via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] get ras [localfile]
Step 4 Upload P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] put
[localfile] rom-0
Step 5 Download P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP]
get rom-0 [localfile]
Using TFTP command on UNIX
Before you begin
1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Example
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ telnet 19216811
Trying 19216811
Connected to 19216811
Escape character is ^]
Password
rasgt sys stdio 0
(Open a new window)
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get rom-0 [local-rom] lt- change to binary mode
lt- download configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-rom] rom-0 lt- upload configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get ras [local-ras ] lt- download firmware
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-ras] ras lt- upload firmware
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
117
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files
In addition to upload the firmware and configuration file via the console port
and TFTP client you can also upload the firmware and configuration files to
the Prestige using FTP
To use this feature your workstation must have a FTP client software See the
example shown below
Using FTP client software
Note The remote file name for the firmware is ras and the configuration file is
rom-0
Step 1 Use FTP client from your workstation to connect to the Prestige by
entering the IP address of the Prestige
Step2 Press Enter key to ignore the username because the Prestige does
not check the username
Step 3 Enter the CLI password as the FTP login password the default is
admin
Step 4 Enter command bin to set the transfer type to binary
Step 5 Use put command to transfer the file to the Prestige
Example
Step 1 Connect to the Prestige by entering the Prestiges IP and Administrator
password in the FTP software Set the transfer type to Auto-Detect or
Binary
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
118
Step 2 Press OK to ignore the Username prompt
Step 3 To upload the firmware file we transfer the local ras file to overwrite
the remote ras file
To upload the configuration file we transfer the local rom-0 to overwrite
the remote rom-0 file
Step 4 The Prestige reboots automatically after the uploading is finished
Please do not power off the router at this moment
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
119
CI Command Reference
Command Syntax and General User Interface
CI has the following command syntax
command ltiface | device gt subcommand [param]
command subcommand [param]
command | help
command subcommand | help
General user interface
1 Shows the following commands and all major (sub)commands
2 exit Exit Subcommand
To get the latest CI Command list
The latest CI Command list is available in release note of every ZyXEL
firmware release Please goto ZyXEL public WEB site
httpwwwzyxelcomsupportdownload_indexphp to download firmware
package (zip) you should unzip the package to get the release note in PDF
format
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
9
Many One-to-One In Many One-to-One mode the P-660HW-Dx v2
maps each ILA to unique IGA
Server In Server mode the P-660HW-Dx v2 maps multiple inside
servers to one global IP address This allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types behind the NAT for outside access Note if
you want to map each server to one unique IGA please use the
One-to-One mode
The following table summarizes the five types
NAT Type IP Mapping
One-to-One ILA1lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-One
(SUAPAT)
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA1
Many-to-Many
Overload
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA1
ILA4lt---gtIGA2
Many
One-to-One
ILA1lt---gtIGA1
ILA2lt---gtIGA2
ILA3lt---gtIGA3
ILA4lt---gtIGA4
Server Server 1 IPlt---gtIGA1
Server 2 IPlt---gtIGA1
14 How many network users can the SUANAT support
The Prestige does not limit the number of the users but the number of the
sessions The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports 2048 sessions that you can use the
ip nat session command in CLI to see You can also use bdquoip nat hashTable
wanif0‟ to view the current active NAT sessions
15 What are Device filters and Protocol filters
In ZyNOS the filters have been separated into two groups One group is
called device filter group and the other is called protocol filter
group Generic filters belong to the device filter group TCPIP and IPX filters
belong to the protocol filter group You can configure the filter rule in CLI
Note In ZyNOS you can not mix different filter groups in the same filter set
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
10
16 How can I protect against IP spoofing attacks
The P-660HW-Dx v2s filter sets provide a means to protect against IP
spoofing attacks The basic scheme is as follows
For the input data filter
Deny packets from the outside that claim to be from the inside
Allow everything that is not spoofing us
Filter rule setup
Filter type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Source IP Addr =abcd
Source IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action Not Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
For the output data filters
Deny bounce back packet
Allow packets that originate from us
Filter rule setup
Filter Type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Destination IP Addr =abcd
Destination IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action No Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
11
Product FAQ
1 How can I manage P-660HW-Dx v2
Multilingual Embedded Web GUI for Local and Remote management
CLI (Command-line interface)
Telnet support (Administrator Password Protected ) for remote
configuration change and status monitoring
FTP TFTP sever firmware upgrade and configuration backup and
restore are supported(Administrator Password Protected)
2 What is the default password for Web Configurator
There are two different accounts for P-660HW-Dx v2 Web Configurator
Common User Account and Administrator Account
By factory default the password for the two accounts are
Common User Account user
Administrator Account 1234
You can change the password after you logging in the Web Configurator
Please record your new password whenever you change it The system
will lock you out if you have forgotten your password
3 Whatrsquos the difference between lsquoCommon User Accountrsquo and
lsquoAdministrator Accountrsquo
For Common User Account it can only access the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 and check the current system status
For Administrator Account besides accessing the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 it can also access Winzard setup Advanced setup of
P-660HW-Dx v2
Moreover only with Administrator Password you could manage the
P-660HW-Dx v2 via FTPTFTP or Telnet
4 How do I know the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address assigned by the
ISP
You can view My WAN IP ltfrom ISPgt xxxx shown in Web Configurator
bdquoStatus-gtDevice Information -gtWAN Information‟ to check this IP address
5 What is the micro filter or splitter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
12
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
6 The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Bridge and Router mode whats the
difference between them
When the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet which means
only the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use bridge mode which works as an ADSL modem to
connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account and limit
only one computer to access the Internet
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to add another Internet sharing device
like a router In this case we use the router mode which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
7 How do I know I am using PPPoE
PPPoE requires a user account to login to the providers server If you need to
configure a user name and password on your computer to connect to the ISP
you are probably using PPPoE If you are simply connected to the Internet
when you turn on your computer you probably are not You can also check
your ISP or the information sheet given by the ISP Please choose PPPoE as
the encapsulation type in the P-660HW-Dx v2 if the ISP uses PPPoE
8 Why does my provider use PPPoE
PPPoE emulates a familiar Dial-Up connection It allows your ISP to provide
services using their existing network configuration over the broadband
connections Besides PPPoE supports a broad range of existing applications
and service including authentication accounting secure access and
configuration management
9 What is DDNS
The Dynamic DNS service allows you to alias a dynamic IP address to a static
hostname allowing your computer to be more easily accessed from various
locations on the Internet To use the service you must first apply an account
from several free Web servers such as httpwwwdyndnsorg
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to reach our internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
13
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
updates this IP to DDNS server so that the server can update its IP-to-DNS
entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is updated the DNS
name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still usable
10 When do I need DDNS service
When you want your internal server to be accessed by using DNS name rather
than using the dynamic IP address we can use the DDNS service The DDNS
server allows to alias a dynamic IP address to a static hostname Whenever
the ISP assigns you a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2 sends this IP to the DDNS
server for its updates
11 What is DDNS wildcard Does the P-660HW-Dx v2 support DDNS
wildcard
Some DDNS servers support the wildcard feature which allows the hostname
yourhostdyndnsorg to be aliased to the same IP address as
yourhostdyndnsorg This feature is useful when there are multiple servers
inside and you want users to be able to use things such as
wwwyourhostdyndnsorg and still reach your hostname
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports DDNS wildcard that httpwwwdyndnsorg
supports When using wildcard you simply enter yourhostdyndnsorg in the
Host field in Menu 11 Configure Dynamic DNS
12 Can the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA handle IPSec packets sent by the
IPSec gateway
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA can handle IPSec ESP Tunneling mode We
know when packets go through SUA SUA will change the source IP address
and source port for the host To pass IPSec packets SUA must understand
the ESP packet with protocol number 50 replace the source IP address of the
IPSec gateway to the routers WAN IP address However SUA should not
change the source port of the UDP packets which are used for key
managements Because the remote gateway checks this source port during
connections the port thus is not allowed to be changed
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
14
13 How do I setup my P-660HW-Dx v2 for routing IPSec packets over
SUA
For outgoing IPSec tunnels no extra setting is required
For forwarding the inbound IPSec ESP tunnel A Default server set is required
You could configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding -gt Default Server Setup
It is because SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users So to make an internal server
for outside access we must specify the service port and the LAN IP of this
server in Web configurator Thus SUA is able to forward the incoming packets
to the requested service behind SUA and the outside users access the server
using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address So we have to configure the
internal IPsec client as a default server (unspecified service port) when it acts
a server gateway
14 What is Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping allocates the bandwidth to WAN dynamically and aims at
boosting the efficiency of the bandwidth If there are serveral VCs in the
P-660HW-Dx v2 but only one VC activated at one time the P-660HW-Dx v2
allocates all the Bandwidth to the VC and the VC gets full bandwidth If another
VCs are activated later the bandwidth is yield to other VCs after ward
15 Why do we perform traffic shaping in the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 must manage traffic fairly and provide bandwidth
allocation for different sorts of applications such as voice video and data All
applications have their own natural bit rate Large data transactions have a
fluctuating natural bit rate The P-660HW-Dx v2 is able to support variable
traffic among different virtual connections Certain traffic may be discarded if
the virtual connection experiences congestion Traffic shaping defines a set of
actions taken by the P-660HW-Dx v2 to avoid congestion traffic shaping takes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
15
measures to adapt to unpredictable fluctuations in traffic flows and other
problems among virtual connections
16 What do the parameters (PCR SCR MBS) mean
Traffic shaping parameters (PCR SCR MBS) can be set in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt ATM Setup
Peak Cell Rate(PCR) The maximum bandwidth allocated to this connection
The VC connection throughput is limited by PCR
Sustainable Cell Rate(SCR) The least guaranteed bandwidth of a VC
When there are multi-VCs on the same line the VC throughput is guaranteed
by SCR
Maximum Burst Size(MBS) The amount of cells transmitted through this
VC at the Peak Cell Rate before yielding to other VCs Total bandwidth of the
line is dedicated to single VC if there is only one VC on the line However as
the other VC asking the bandwidth the MBS defines the maximum number of
cells transmitted via this VC with Peak Cell rate before yielding to other VCs
The P-660HW-Dx v2 holds the parameters for shaping the traffic among its
virtual channels If you do not need traffic shaping please set SCR = 0 MBS =
0 and PCR as the maximum value according to the line rate (for example 23
Mbps line rate will result PCR as 5424 cellsec)
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
Constant bit rate(CBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that requires
the user to determine a fixed bandwidth requirement at the time the connection
is set up so that the data can be sent in a steady stream CBR service is often
used when transmitting fixed-rate uncompressed video
Unspecified bit rate(UBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that does
not guarantee any throughput levels and uses only available bandwidth UBR
is often used when transmitting data that can tolerate delays such as e-mail
Variable bit rate(VBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that allows
users to specify a throughput capacity (ie a peak rate) and a sustained rate
but data is not sent evenly You can select VBR for bursty traffic and
bandwidth sharing with other applications It contains two subclasses
Variable bit rate nonreal time (VBR-nRT)
Variable bit rate real time (VBR-RT)
18 What is content filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
16
Internet Content filter allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies
tailored to your needs Content filter gives you the ability to block web sites that
contain key words (that you specify) in the URL You can set a schedule for
when the P-660HW-Dx v2 performs content filtering You can also specify
trusted IP Addresses on LAN for which the P-660HW-Dx v2 will not perform
content filtering You can configure the details about it in Web Configurator
Advanced setup Security -gt Content Filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
17
ADSL FAQ
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems
ADSL provides a dedicated service over a single telephone line cable
modems offer a dedicated service over a shared media While cable modems
have greater downstream bandwidth capabilities (up to 30 Mbps) that
bandwidth is shared among all users on a line and will therefore vary perhaps
dramatically as more users in a neighborhood get online at the same time
Cable modem upstream traffic will in many cases be slower than ADSL either
because the particular cable modem is inherently slower or because of rate
reductions caused by contention for upstream bandwidth slots The big
difference between ADSL and cable modems however is the number of lines
available to each There are no more than 12 million homes passed today that
can support two-way cable modem transmissions and while the figure also
grows steadily it will not catch up with telephone lines for many years
Additionally many of the older cable networks are not capable of offering a
return channel consequently such networks will need significant upgrading
before they can offer high bandwidth services
2 What is the expected throughput
In our test we can get about 16Mbps data rate on 15Kft using the 26AWG
loop The shorter the loop the better the throughput is
3 What is the microfilter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up
You can see the DSL LED Green on the P-660HW-Dx v2s front panel is on
when the ADSL physical layer is up
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL
Depending on the line quality the P-660HW-Dx v2 uses Fall Back and Fall
Forward to automatically adjust the date rate
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
18
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing
Though the LLC-based multiplexing can carry multiple protocols over a single
VC it requires extra header information to identify the protocol being carried
on the virtual circuit (VC) The VC-based multiplexing needs a separate VC for
carrying each protocol but it does not need the extra headers Therefore the
VC-based multiplexing is more efficient
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics
You can use the following CI commands to check the ADSL line
statistics
CIgt wan adsl perfdata
CIgt wan adsl status
CIgt wan adsl linedata far
CIgt wan adsl linedata near
You can also do it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Diagnostic -gt DSL Line -gt DSL Status
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector
The signaling pins on the P-660HW-Dx v2s ADSL connector are pin 3 and pin
4 The middle two pins for a RJ11 cable
9 What is triple play
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
19
More and more TelcoISPs are providing three kinds of services (VoIP Video
and Internet) over one existing ADSL connection
The different services (such as video VoIP and Internet access) require
different Qulity of Service
The high priority is Voice (VoIP) data
The Medium priority is Video (IPTV) data
The low priority is internet access such as ftp etc hellip
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus you can configure each PVC separately to assign different
QoS to different application
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
20
Firewall FAQ
General
1 What is a network firewall
A firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control
policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to
protect a trusted network from an untrusted network The firewall can be
thought of two mechanisms One to block the traffic and the other to permit
traffic
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure
The P-660HW-Dx v2 is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks such as Ping of Death SYN Flood LAND
attack IP Spoofing etc It also uses stateful packet inspection to determine if
an inbound connection is allowed through the firewall to the private LAN The
P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Network Address Translation (NAT) which
translates the private local addresses to one or multiple public addresses This
adds a level of security since the clients on the private LAN are invisible to the
Internet
3 What are the basic types of firewalls
Conceptually there are three types of firewalls
1 Packet Filtering Firewall
2 Application-level Firewall
3 Stateful Inspection Firewall
Packet Filtering Firewalls generally make their decisions based on the header
information in individual packets These headers information include the
source destination addresses and ports of the packets
Application-level Firewalls generally are hosts running proxy servers which
permit no traffic directly between networks and which perform logging and
auditing of traffic passing through them A proxy server is an application
gateway or circuit-level gateway that runs on top of general operating system
such as UNIX or Windows NT It hides valuable data by requiring users to
communicate with secure systems by mean of a proxy A key drawback of this
device is performance
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
21
Stateful Inspection Firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against
defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP
address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the
integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols The flexible
nature of Stateful Inspection firewalls generally provides the best speed and
transparency however they may lack the granular application level access
control or caching that some proxies support
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2
1 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall inspects packets contents and IP
headers It is applicable to all protocols that understands data in the
packet is intended for other layers from network layer up to the
application layer
2 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall performs stateful inspection It takes into
account the state of connections it handles so that for example a
legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request
for that packet and allowed in Conversely an incoming packet
masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be
blocked
3 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall uses session filtering ie smart rules
that enhance the filtering process and control the network session
rather than control individual packets in a session
4 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall is fast It uses a hashing function to
search the matched session cache instead of going through every
individual rule for a packet
5 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall provides email service to notify you for
routine reports and when alerts occur
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet filtering and
NAT built-in
With the spectacular growth of the Internet and online access companies that
do business on the Internet face greater security threats Although packet filter
and NAT restrict access to particular computers and networks however for
the other companies this security may be insufficient because packets filters
typically cannot maintain session state Thus for greater security a firewall is
considered
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a
connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable
a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
22
There are four types of DoS attacks
1 Those that exploits bugs in a TCPIP implementation such as Ping of
Death and Teardrop
2 Those that exploits weaknesses in the TCPIP specification such as
SYN Flood and LAND Attacks
3 Brute-force attacks that flood a network with useless data such as
Smurf attack
4 IP Spoofing
7 What is Ping of Death attack
Ping of Death uses a PING utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the
maximum 65535 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification The oversize
packet is then sent to an unsuspecting system Systems may crash hang or
reboot
8 What is Teardrop attack
Teardrop attack exploits weakness in the reassemble of the IP packet
fragments As data is transmitted through a network IP packets are often
broken up into smaller chunks Each fragment looks like the original packet
except that it contains an offset field The Teardrop program creates a series of
IP fragments with overlapping offset fields When these fragments are
reassembled at the destination some systems will crash hang or reboot
9 What is SYN Flood attack
SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each
packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response While the
targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK it queues up all
outstanding SYN-ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue
SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when
an internal timer (which is set a relatively long intervals) terminates the TCP
three-way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all
incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users
10 What is LAND attack
In a LAN attack hackers flood SYN packets to the network with a spoofed
source IP address of the targeted system This makes it appear as if the host
computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the
target system tries to respond to itself
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
23
11 What is Brute-force attack
A Brute-force attack such as Smurf attack targets a feature in the IP
specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting to quickly flood the
target network with useless data A Smurf hacker flood a destination IP
address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network the router will
broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network If there
are numerous hosts this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request
packet the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the intermediary
network but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address
known as the victim network This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all
available bandwidth making communications impossible
12 What is IP Spoofing attack
Many DoS attacks also use IP Spoofing as part of their attack IP Spoofing
may be used to break into systems to hide the hackers identity or to magnify
the effect of the DoS attack IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain
unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking
that the communications are coming from within the trusted network To
engage in IP Spoofing a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it
appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed
through the router or firewall
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
There are two default ACLs pre-configured in the P-660HW-Dx v2 one allows
all connections from LAN to WAN and the other blocks all connections from
WAN to LAN except of the DHCP packets
Configuration
1 How do I configure the firewall
You can use the Web Configurator to configure the firewall for P-660HW-Dx v2
By factory default if you connect your PC to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 you can access Web Configurator via bdquohttp19216811‟
Note Donrsquot forget to type in the Administrator Password
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall
There are several ways to protect others from touching the settings of your
firewall
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
24
1 Change the default Administrator password since it is required when
setting up the firewall
2 Limit who can access to your P-660HW-Dx v2‟s Web Configurator or
CLI You can enter the IP address of the secured LAN host in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt
[Service] -gtSecured Client IP to allow special access to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
The default value in this field is 0000 which means you do not care which
host is trying to telnet your P-660HW-Dx v2 or accessthe Web
Configurator of
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN
There are four reasons that WWWTelnet from WAN is blocked
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable Telnet from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow WWWTelnet connection
from WAN The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
WWW (For accessing Web Configurator)
Source IP= Remote trusted host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP80
Action=Forward
TELNET (For accessing Command Line Interface)
Source IP= Telnet Client host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP23
Action=Forward
(2)You have disabled WWWTelnet service in Web Configurator Advanced
setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
25
(3) WWWTelnet service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host
entered in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote
MGNT
(4)A filter set which blocks WWWTelnet from WAN is applied to WAN node
You can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using FTP over
WAN
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable FTP from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow FTP connection from WAN
The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
Source IP= FTP host
Destination IP= P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP
Service= FTP TCP21 TCP20
Action=Forward
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
26
(2) You have disabled FTP service in Web Configurator Advanced setup
Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(3) FTP service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host entered
in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(4) A filter set which blocks FTP from WAN is applied to WAN node You
can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
Log and Alert
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the firewall log immediately when the packet
matches a firewall rule The log for Default Firewall Policy (LAN to WAN WAN
to LAN WAN to WAN) is generated automatically with factory default setting
but you can change it in Web Configurator
2 What does the log show to us
The log supports up to 128 entries There are 5 columns for each entry Please
see the example shown below
3 How do I view the firewall log
All logs generated in P-660HW-Dx v2 including firewall logs IPSec logs
system logs are migrated to centralized logs So you can view firewall logs in
Centralized logs Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs
-gtView Log
The log keeps 128 entries the new entries will overwrite the old entries when
the log has over 128 entries
Before you can view firewall logs there are two steps you need to do
(1) Enable log function in Centralized logs setup via either one of the following
methods
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
27
Web configuration Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log
Settings check Access Control and Attacks options depending on
your real situation
CI command sys logs category [access | attack]
(2) Enable log function in firewall default policy or in firewall rules
After the above two steps you can view firewall logs via
Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gtView
Log
View the log by CI command sys logs disp
You can also view Centralized logs via mail or syslog please configure mail
server or Unix Syslog server in Web configuration Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the alert when an attack is detected by the
firewall and sends it via Email So to send the alert you must configure the
mail server and Email address using Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings You can also specify how frequently
you want to receive the alert in it
5 What is the difference between the log and alert
A log entry is just added to the log inside the P-660HW-Dx v2 and e-mailed
together with all other log entries at the scheduled time as configured An alert
is e-mailed immediately after an attacked is detected
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
28
Wireless FAQ
General FAQ
1 What is a Wireless LAN
Wireless LANs provide all the functionality of wired LANs without the need for
physical connections (wires) Data is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier
and transmitted through the ether Typical bit-rates are 11Mbps and 54Mbps
although in practice data throughput is half of this Wireless LANs can be
formed simply by equipping PCs with wireless NICs If connectivity to a wired
LAN is required an Access Point (AP) is used as a bridging device APs are
typically located close to the centre of the wireless client population
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN
Mobility Wireless LAN systems can provide LAN users with access to
real-time information anywhere in their organization This mobility supports
productivity and service opportunities not possible with wired networks
Installation Speed and Simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be
fast and easy and can eliminate the need to pull cable through walls and
ceilings
Installation Flexibility Wireless technology allows the network to go where
wire cannot go
Reduced Cost-of-Ownership While the initial investment required for
wireless LAN hardware can be higher than the cost of wired LAN hardware
overall installation expenses and life-cycle costs can be significantly lower
Long-term cost benefits are greatest in dynamic environments requiring
frequent moves and changes
Scalability Wireless LAN systems can be configured in a variety of topologies
to meet the needs of specific applications and installations Configurations are
easily changed and range from peer-to-peer networks suitable for a small
number of users to full infrastructure networks of thousands of users that
enable roaming over a broad area
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN
The speed of Wireless LAN is still relatively slower than wired LAN The setup
cost of Wireless LAN is relative high because the equipment cost including
access point and PCMCIA Wireless LAN card is higher than hubs and CAT 5
cables
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
29
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks
Airports hotels and even coffee shops like Starbucks are deploying 80211
networks so people can wirelessly surf the Internet with their laptops
5 What is an Access Point
The AP (access point also known as a base station) is the wireless server that
with an antenna and a wired Ethernet connection that broadcasts information
using radio signals AP typically acts as a bridge for the clients It can pass
information to wireless LAN cards that have been installed in computers or
laptops allowing those computers to connect to the campus network and the
Internet without wires
6 Whatrsquos the difference between IEEE80211abg
The IEEE 80211 is a wireless LAN industry standard and the objective of
IEEE 80211 is to make sure that different manufactures wireless LAN devices
can communicate to each other Below is a brief comparison for the
IEEE80211 abg
Publish
Time
Frequency
Band(GHZ)
Data Rate(Mbps) Compatibility
IEEE80211a 1999 UNII Band
515~5825
691218243648
54
Only work with
80211a
devices
IEEE80211b 1999 ISM Band
24~24835
125511 -
IEEE80211g 2001 ISM Band
24~24835
691218243648
54
Backward
compatible with
80211b
devices
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
Yes As long as the products comply to the same IEEE 80211 standard The
Wi-Fi logo is used to define 80211b compatible products Wi-Fi5 is a
compatibility standard for 80211a products running in the 5GHz band
8 What is Wi-Fi
The Wi-Fi logo signifies that a product is interoperable with wireless
networking equipment from other vendors A Wi-Fi logo product has been
tested and certified by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA)
The Socket Wireless LAN Card is Wi-Fi certified and that means that it will
work (interoperate) with any brand of Access Point that is also Wi-Fi certified
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band
Various spread spectrum radio communication applications use the 24 GHz
band This includes WLAN systems (not necessarily of the type IEEE
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
30
80211b) cordless phones wireless medical telemetry equipment and
Bluetoothtrade short-range wireless applications which include connecting
printers to computers and connecting modems or hands-free kits to mobile
phones
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device
Any time devices are operated in the same frequency band there is the
potential for interference
Both the 80211bg and Bluetooth devices occupy the same24-to-2483-GHz
unlicensed frequency range-the same band But a Bluetooth device would not
interfere with other 80211 devices much more than another 80211 device
would interefere While more collisions are possible with the introduction of a
Bluetooth device they are also possible with the introduction of another 80211
device or a new 24 GHz cordless phone for that matter But BlueTooth
devices are usually low-power so the effects that a Bluetooth device may have
on an 80211 network if any arent far-reaching
11 Can radio signals pass through wall
Transmitting through a wall is possible depending upon the material used in its
construction In general metals and substances with a high water content do
not allow radio waves to pass through Metals reflect radio waves and concrete
attenuates radio waves The amount of attenuation suffered in passing through
concrete will be a function of its thickness and amount of metal re-enforcement
used
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference among WLAN
products
Factors of interference
(1) Obstacles walls ceilings furniturehellip etc
(2) Building Materials metal door aluminum studs
(3) Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors
Solution
(1) Minimizing the number of walls and ceilings
(2) Antenna is positioned for best reception
(3) Keep WLAN products away from electrical devices eg microwaves
monitors electric motorshellip etc
(4) Add additional APs if necessary
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN
WLANs are generally privately owned wireless systems that are deployed in a
corporation warehouse hospital or educational campus setting Data rates
are high and there are no per-packet charges for data transmission
WWANs are generally publicly shared data networks designed to provide
coverage in metropolitan areas and along traffic corridors WWANs are owned
by a service provider or carrier Data rates are low and charges are based on
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
31
usage Specialized applications are characteristically designed around short
burst messaging
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage any
hardware
Yes it will not harm the hardware but the module will not be detected and
work after inserting to the slot You need to reboot the router to initialize the
module
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
The wireless security modes supported on P-660HW-Dx v2 are Static
WEP WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK and WPA2
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
It supports IEEE 80211bgg+ standard
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering
Yes it supports up to 32 MAC Address filtering
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption
Yes it means that the AP on P-660HW-Dx v2 will automatically decelerate
when devices move beyond the optimal range or other interference is present
If the device moves back within the range of a higher-speed transmission the
connection will automatically speed up again Rate shifting is a physical-layer
mechanism transparent to the user and the upper layers of the protocol stack
Advanced FAQ
1 What is Ad Hoc mode
A wireless network consists of a number of stations without using an access
point or any connection to a wired network
2 What is Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure mode implies connectivity to a wired communications
infrastructure If such connectivity is required the Access Points must be used
to connect to the wired LAN backbone Wireless clients have their
configurations set for infrastructure mode in order to utilise access points
relaying
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area
This depends on the surrounding terrain the diameter of the client population
and the number of clients If an area is large with dispersed pockets of
populations then extension points can be used for extend coverage
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
32
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (DSSS)
DSSS spreads its signal continuously over a wide frequency band DSSS
maps the information bearing bit-pattern at the sending station into a higher
data rate bit sequence using a chipping code The chipping code (also known
as processing gain) introduces redundancy which allows data recovery if
certain bit errors occur during transmission The FCC rules the minimum
processing gain should be 10 typical systems use processing gains of 20
IEEE 80211b specifies the use of DSSS
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (FHSS)
FHSS uses a narrowband carrier which hops through a predefined sequence
of several frequencies at a specific rate This avoids problems with fixed
channel narrowband noise and simple jamming Both transmitter and receiver
must have their hopping sequences synchronized to create the effect of a
single logical channel To an unsynchronised receiver an FHSS transmission
appears to be short-duration impulse noise 80211 may use FHSS or DSSS
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
No Provided the antenna is optimally designed for 24GHz or 5GHz operation
WLAN NICs often include an internal antenna which may provide sufficient
reception
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range
This frequency range has been set aside by the FCC and is generally labeled
the ISM band A few years ago Apple and several other large corporations
requested that the FCC allow the development of wireless networks within this
frequency range What we have today is a protocol and system that allows for
unlicensed use of radios within a prescribed power level The ISM band is
populated by Industrial Scientific and Medical devices that are all low power
devices but can interfere with each other
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID)
SSID is a configurable identification that allows clients to communicate to the
appropriate base station With proper configuration only clients that are
configured with the same SSID can communicate with base stations having
the same SSID SSID from a security point of view acts as a simple single
shared password between base stations and clients
9 What is an ESSID
ESSID stands for Extended Service Set Identifier and identifies the wireless
LAN The ESSID of the mobile device must match the ESSID of the AP to
communicate with the AP The ESSID is a 32-character maximum string and is
case-sensitive
Security FAQ
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Points
radio link
To secure the date across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Point‟s radio link we
could select any one of the security mode Static 64128256 bit WEP
WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK WPA2
2 What is WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security mechanism defined within the
80211 standard and designed to make the security of the wireless medium
equal to that of a cable (wire) WEP data encryption was designed to prevent
access to the network by intruders and to prevent the capture of wireless
LAN traffic through eavesdropping WEP allows the administrator to define a
set of respective Keys for each wireless network user based on a Key
String passed through the WEP encryption algorithm Access is denied by
anyone who does not have an assigned key Note WEP has shown to have
fundamental flaws in its key generation processing
3 What is WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN You can refer to
the User Guide for more information about it
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP
40 bit WEP and 64 bit WEP are the same encryption level and can interoperate
The lower level of WEP encryption uses a 40 bit (10 Hex character) as secret
key (set by user) and a 24 bit Initialization Vector (not under user control)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
34
(40+24=64) Some vendors refer to this level of WEP as 40 bit others as 64
bit
5 What is a WEP key
A WEP key is a user defined string of characters used to encrypt and decrypt
data
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP
No 128-bit WEP will not communicate with 64-bit WEP Although 128 bit WEP
also uses a 24 bit Initialization Vector but it uses a 104 bit as secret key Users
need to use the same encryption level in order to make a connection
7 Can the SSID be encrypted
No WEP only encrypts the data packets not the 80211 management
packetsThe SSID is in the beacon and probe management messages and
SSID goes over the air in clear text This makes obtaining the SSID easy by
sniffing 80211 wireless traffic
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff the SSID
Many APs by default have broadcasting the SSID turned on Sniffers typically
will find the SSID in the broadcast beacon packets Turning off the broadcast of
SSID in the beacon message (a common practice) does not prevent getting
the SSID since the SSID is sent in the clear in the probe message when a
client associates to an AP a sniffer just has to wait for a valid user to associate
to the network to see the SSID
9 What are Insertion Attacks
The insertion attacks are based on placing unauthorized devices on the
wireless network without going through a security process and review
10 What is Wireless Sniffer
An attacker can sniff and capture legitimate traffic Many of the sniffer tools for
Ethernet are based on capturing the first part of the connection session where
the data would typically include the username and password An intruder can
masquerade as that user by using this captured information An intruder who
monitors the wireless network can apply this same attack principle on the
wireless
11 What is OTIST How do I use it
OTIST is acronym for ZyXEL‟s bdquoOne Touch Intelligent Security Technology‟
It enables P-660HW-Dx v2 and ZyXEL‟s OTIST supported Wireless adapters
to establish connections of the WPA-PSK security mode automatically with
just one touch at the reset button on rear panel
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
35
To use this function on P-660HW-Dx v2 you could press the reset button on
P-660HW-Dx v2 for 1~5 seconds the OTIST is actived The P-660HW-Dx v2
will enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA-PSK automatically if no
WLAN security has been set The default setup key for OTIST is bdquo01234567‟
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
36
Application Notes
General Application Notes
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode
Setup your workstation
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
If the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet that means only
the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as an ADSL bridge
modem to connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account
and limit only one computer to access the Internet
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
To connect your computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN port the computer
must have an Ethernet adapter card installed For connecting a single
computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2 we use a Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
In most cases the IP address of the computer is assigned by the ISP
dynamically so you have to configure the computer as a DHCP client which
obtains the IP from the ISP using DHCP protocol The ISP may also provide
the gateway DNS via DHCP if they are available Otherwise please enter the
static IP addresses for all that the ISP gives to you in the network TCPIP
settings For Windows we check the option Obtain an IP address
automatically in its TCPIP setup please see the example shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
37
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
bridge mode We will use Web Configurator to guide you through the related
menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as bridge mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
(2)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
38
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For example
LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
(2) Turn off DHCP Server and configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 in
Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN We use 19216811 as
the LAN IP for P-660HW-Dx v2 in this case
Step 1 Disactive DHCP Server and apply it
Step 2 Assign an IP to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx v2 eg
19216811
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to install an Internet sharing device like
a router In this case we use the P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
Connect the LAN ports of all computers to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 using Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
Since the P-660HW-Dx v2 is set to DHCP server as default so you need only
to configure the workstations as the DHCP clients in the networking settings In
this case the IP address of the computer is assigned by the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 can also provide the DNS to the clients via DHCP if it is
available For this setup in Windows we check the option Obtain an IP
address automatically in its TCPIP setup Please see the example shown
below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
39
Set up your P-660HW-Dx v2 under routing mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
Routing mode for routing traffic We will use Web Configurator to guide you
through the related menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as routing mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For
example LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
IP Address
Assignment
Set to Dynamic if the ISP provides the IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2
dynamically Otherwise set to Static and enter the IP in the IP
Address field
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
40
(2) Configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 and the DHCP settings in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
What is DHCP Relay
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In addition to the
DHCP server feature the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports the DHCP relay function
When it is configured as DHCP server it assigns the IP addresses to the LAN
clients When it is configured as DHCP relay it is responsible for forwarding
the requests and responses negotiating between the DHCP clients and the
server See figure 1
Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
We could set the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay by the following command
in CLI
Ip dhcp enif0 mode relay
Ip dhcp enif0 relay server [Server IP Address]
4 SUA Notes
Tested SUANAT Applications (eg Cu-SeeMe ICQ NetMeeting)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
41
Introduction
Generally SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users However some applications
such as Cu-SeeMe and ICQ will need to connect to the local user behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 In such case a SUA server must be configured to forward
the incoming packets to the true destination behind SUA After the required
server are configured in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding the internal server or client applications can be accessed
by using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP Address
SUA Supporting Table
The following are the required Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding for the various applications running SUA mode
ZyXEL SUA Supporting Table1
Application
Required Settings in Port Forwarding
PortIP
Outgoing Connection Incoming
Connection
HTTP None 80client IP
FTP None 21client IP
TELNET None 23client IP
(and active Telnet
service from WAN)
POP3 None 110client IP
SMTP None 25client IP
mIRC
None for Chat
For DCC please set
DefaultClient IP
Windows PPTP None 1723client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
42
ICQ 99a None for Chat
For DCC please set
ICQ -gt preference -gt
connections -gt firewall
and set the firewall time
out to 80 seconds in
firewall setting
Defaultclient IP
ICQ 2000b None for Chat None for Chat
ICQ Phone 2000b None 6701client IP
Cornell 11 Cu-SeeMe None 7648client IP
White Pine 312 Cu-SeeMe2 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
White Pine 40 Cu-SeeMe 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
Microsoft NetMeeting 21 amp
3013
None 1720client IP
1503client IP
Cisco IPTV 200 None
RealPlayer G2 None
VDOLive None
Quake1064 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeII2305 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeIII105 beta None
StartCraft 6112client IP
Quick Time 40 None
pcAnywhere 80 None
5631client IP
5632client IP
22client IP
IPsec (ESP tunneling mode) None (one client only) DefaultClient
Microsoft Messenger Service
30 6901client IP 6901client IP
Microsoft Messenger Service
46 47 50hellip
(none UPnP)6
None for Chat File
transfer Video and Voice
None for Chat File
transfer Video and
Voice
Net2Phone None 6701client IP
Network Time Protocol (NTP) None 123 server IP
Win2k Terminal Server None 3389server IP
Remote Anything None 3996 - 4000client IP
Virtual Network Computing None 5500client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
43
(VNC) 5800client IP
5900client IP
AIM (AOL Instant Messenger) None for Chat and IM None for Chat and
IM
e-Donkey None 4661 - 4662client IP
POLYCOM Video
Conferencing None Defaultclient IP
iVISTA 41 None 80server IP
Microsoft Xbox Live7 None NA 1 Since SUA enables your LAN to appear as a single computer to the Internet
it is not possible to configure similar servers on the same LAN behind SUA 2 Because White Pine Cu-SeeMe uses dedicate ports (port 7648 amp port 24032)
to transmit and receive data therefore only one local Cu-SeeMe is allowed
within the same LAN 3 In SUA mode only one local NetMeeting user is allowed because the
outsiders can not distinguish between local users using the same internet IP 4 Certain Quake servers do not allow multiple users to login using the same
unique IP so only one Quake user will be allowed in this case Moreover
when a Quake server is configured behind SUA P-660HW-Dx v2 will not be
able to provide information of that server on the internet 5 Quake II has the same limitations as that of Quake I 6 P-660HW-Dx v2 supports MSN Messenger 46 47 50hellip video voice
pass-through NAT In addition for the Windows OS supported UPnP
(Universal Plug and Play) such as Windows XP and Windows ME UPnP
supported in P-660HW-Dx v2 is an alternative solution to pass through MSN
Messenger video voice traffic For more detail please refer to UPnP
application note 7 P-660HW-Dx v2 support Microsoft Xbox Live with factory default
configuration
Configurations
For example if the workstation operating Cu-SeeMe has an IP of 192168134
then the default SUA server must be set to 192168134 The peer Cu-SeeMe
user can reach this workstation by using P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
44
which can be obtained from Web Configurator
Configure an Internal Server behind SUA
Introduction
If you wish you can make internal servers (eg Web ftp or mail server)
accessible for outside users even though SUA makes your LAN appear as a
single machine to the outside world A service is identified by the port number
Also since you need to specify the IP address of a server behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 a server must have a fixed IP address and not be a DHCP
client whose IP address potentially changes each time P-660HW-Dx v2 is
powered on
In addition to the servers for specific services SUA supports a default server
A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for is
forwarded to the default server If the default server is not defined the service
request is simply discarded
Configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
45
To make a server visible to the outside world specify the port number of the
service and the inside address of the server in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The outside users can access
the local server using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address which can be
obtained from Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information
For example
Configuring an internal Web server for outside access (suppose the
Server IP Address is 192168110)
(1) Fill in the service name and server IP Address press button bdquoAdd‟
(2) If add successfully the Web Configurator will display message
bdquoConfiguration updated successfully‟ at the bottom You can see the port
forwarding rule on the same page the default port for Web Server is 80
(3) If you want to change the port for Web Server you could press button
bdquoModify‟ on corresponding rule then modify and apply it
Default port numbers for some services
Service Port Number
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
46
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
Configure a PPTP server behind SUA
Introduction
PPTP is a tunneling protocol defined by the PPTP forum that allows PPP
packets to be encapsulated within Internet Protocol (IP) packets and
forwarded over any IP network including the Internet itself
In order to run the Windows 9x PPTP client you must be able to establish an
IP connection with a tunnel server such as the Windows NT Server 40
Remote Access Server
Windows Dial-Up Networking uses the Internet standard Point-to-Point (PPP)
to provide a secure optimized multiple-protocol network connection over
dial-up telephone lines All data sent over this connection can be encrypted
and compressed and multiple network level protocols (TCPIP NetBEUI and
IPX) can be run correctly Windows NT Domain Login level security is
preserved even across the Internet
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
47
Window98 PPTP Client Internet NT RAS Server Protocol Stack
PPTP appears as new modem type (Virtual Private Networking Adapter) that
can be selected when setting up a connection in the Dial-Up Networking folder
The VPN Adapter type does not appear elsewhere in the system Since PPTP
encapsulates its data stream in the PPP protocol the VPN requires a second
dial-up adapter This second dial-up adapter for VPN is added during the
installation phase of the Upgrade in addition to the first dial-up adapter that
provides PPP support for the analog or ISDN modem
The PPTP is supported in Windows NT and Windows 98 already For
Windows 95 it needs to be upgraded by the Dial-Up Networking 12 upgrade
Configuration
This application note explains how to establish a PPTP connection with a
remote private network in the P-660HW-Dx v2 SUA case In ZyNOS all PPTP
packets can be forwarded to the internal PPTP Server (WinNT server) behind
SUA The port number of the PPTP has to be entered in the Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding on
P-660HW-Dx v2 to forward to the appropriate private IP address of Windows
NT server
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
48
Example
The following example shows how to dial to an ISP via the P-660HW-Dx v2
and then establish a tunnel to a private network There will be three items that
you need to set up for PPTP application these are PPTP server (WinNT)
PPTP client (Win9x) and the P-660HW-Dx v2
(1) PPTP server setup (WinNT)
Add the VPN service from Control Panel -gtNetwork
Add an user account for PPTP logged on user
Enable RAS port
Select the network protocols from RAS such as IPX TCPIP NetBEUI
Set the Internet gateway to P-660HW-Dx v2
(2) PPTP client setup (Win9x)
Add one VPN connection from Dial-Up Networking by entering the
correct username amp password and the IP address of the P-660HW-Dx
v2s Internet IP address for logging to NT RAS server
Set the Internet gateway to the router that is connecting to ISP
(3) P-660HW-Dx v2 setup
Before making a VPN connection from Win9x to WinNT server you
need to connect P-660HW-Dx v2 router to your ISP first
Enter the IP address of the PPTP server (WinNT server) and the
port number for PPTP as shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
49
Select service name as bdquoPPTP‟ fill in the Server IP Address then press button
bdquoAdd‟
When you have finished the above settings you can ping to the remote Win9x
client from WinNT This ping command is used to demonstrate that remote
the Win9x can be reached across the Internet If the Internet connection
between two LANs is achievable you can place a VPN call from the remote
Win9x client
For example Cping 203661132
When a dial-up connection to ISP is established a default gateway is assigned
to the router traffic through that connection Therefore the output below shows
the default gateway of the Win9x client after the dial-up connection has been
established
Before making a VPN connection from the Win9x client to the NT server you
need to know the exact Internet IP address that the ISP assigns to
P-660HW-Dx v2 router in SUA mode and enter this IP address in the VPN
dial-up dialog box You can check this Internet IP address from PNC Monitor or
S Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information If the Internet IP address
is a fixed IP address provided by ISP in SUA mode then you can always use
this IP address for reaching the VPN server
In the following example the IP address 1401131225 is dynamically
assigned by ISP You must enter this IP address in the VPN Server dialog box
for reaching the PPTP server After the VPN link is established you can start
the network protocol application such as IP IPX and NetBEUI
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
50
5 Using Full Feature NAT
When P-660HW-Dx v2 is in Routing mode you can select NAT Option as
Full Feature in Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit
Key Settings
Field Options Description
Network Address
Translation
Full Feature
When you select this option you can select
Address Mapping Set Number 1~8 in the
pull-down menu on the right
None NAT is disabled when you select this option
SUA Only
When you select this option this remote node
will use default SUA Address Mapping Set
You can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat
lookup 255‟ It‟s a read-only sets with two
rules Many-to-One and server mapping
Select Full Feature when you require other
mapping types
Configuring NAT
Address Mapping Sets and NAT Server Sets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
51
The P-660HW-Dx v2 has 8 remote nodes and so allows you to configure 8
NAT Address Mapping Sets You must specify which NAT Address Mapping
Set (1~8) to use in the remote node when you select Full Feature NAT
You can edit 10 rules for each Address Mapping Set You can edit the rules for
Address Mapping Sets 1 in Web Configurator The other Address Mapping
Sets 2~8 can only be configured in CLI (Command Line Interface)
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports We
can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Port Forwarding To use the NAT server sets you‟ve configured a Server
rule must be set up inside the NAT Address Mapping set Please see NAT
Server Sets for further information on how to apply it
When you select SUA Only the P-660HW-Dx v2 will use a default SUA
Address Mapping set for it It has two rules Many-to-One and Server You
can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat lookup 255‟
Please note that the fields in this menu are read-only However the settings of
the rule set 2 can be modified in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The following table explains the fields in this
above screen
Field Description OptionExample
set This is sequence number for Address Mapping Sets 255 for SUA
Internal
Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA)
0000 for the
Many-to-One type
Local End
IP
This is the starting local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0000 and the
End IP is 255255255255
255255255255
Global Start
IP
This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you
have a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start
IP
0000
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
52
Global End
IP This is the ending global IP address (IGA) NA
Type This is the NAT mapping types Many-to-One and
Server
Here we‟ll guide you to configure Address Mapping Sets from Web
Configurator and CLI (Since in Web Configurator we can only edit the rules
for Address Mapping Sets 1 The other Address Mapping Sets 2~8 can only
be configured in CLI)
Now lets begin with Web Configurator
Firstly let‟s come to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping
This menu is for Address Mapping Set 1 you can edit 10 Address Mapping
Rules for Set 1 You can edit or remove a rule by clicking the two buttons on
the rule table
Click the bdquoEditrsquo Button on the rule 1 then you can enter the window in which
you can edit an individual rule and configure the Mapping Type Local and
Global StartEnd IPs
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
53
The following table describes the fields in this screen
Field Description OptionExample
Type You can select one of the five mapping types from the
pull-down menu
1 One-to-One
2 Many-to-One
3 Many-to-Many
Overload
4 Many-to-Many No
Overload
5 Server
Local
IP
Start This is the starting local IP address (ILA) 0000
End
This is the ending local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0000 and the
End IP as 255255255255 This field is NA for
One-to-One type
255255255255
Global
IP
Start This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you have
a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start IP 0000
End
This is the ending global IP address (IGA) This
field is NA for One-to-One Many-to-One and Server
types
2001164
Note For all Local and Global IPs the End IP address must begin after the IP
Start address ie you cannot have an End IP address beginning before the
Start IP address
Configure Address Mapping Sets in CLI
Setp 1 Telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 (We suppose the LAN IP Address of
P-660HW-Dx v2 is 19216811)
Step 2 Select one Address Mapping Set (1~8) by command bdquoip nat
addrmap map [map ] [set name]‟ (set name is optional) Suppose we
configure set 2 in the example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
54
Setp 3 Set NAT address mapping rule for the Address Mapping Set you just
configured (Set 2 in this example) by command bdquoip nat addrmap rule [rule]
[insert | edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP] [global start IP] [global
end IP] [server set ]‟ Suppose we set a Many-to-One rule for set 2 by
command bdquoip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 1 192168110 192168120 172111
172111‟
Setp 4 Save the configuration by command bdquoip nat addrmap save‟ You can
apply the Address Mapping Set 2 to remote nodes in Web Configurator when
you select Full Feature NAT See the intire process as follows
Set 5 You can lookup the successfully configured Address Mapping Sets by
command bdquoip nat addrmap disp‟
Key Settings
CI Command Description
ip nat addrmap map [map] [set
name]
Select NAT address mapping set and set mapping set
name but set name is optional
Example
gt ip nat addrmap map 2 Test
ip nat addrmap rule [rule] [insert |
edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP]
[global start IP] [global end IP] [server
set ]
Set NAT address mapping rule If the ldquotyperdquo is not
ldquoinside-serverrdquo then the ldquotyperdquo field will still need a
dummy value like ldquo0rdquo
Type is 0 - 4 = one-to-one many-to-one
many-to-many-overload many-to-many-non overload
inside-server
Example
gt ip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 3 192168110
192168120 172111 172111
ip nat addrmap clear [map] [rule] Clear the selected rule of the set
ip nat addrmap freememory Discard Changes
ip nat addrmap disp Display nat set information
ip nat addrmap save Save settings
ip nat server load [set] Load the server sets of NAT into buffer
ip nat server disp [1] ldquodisp 1rdquo means to display the NAT server set in buffer
if parameter ldquo1rdquo is omitted then it will display all the
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
55
server sets
ip nat server save Save the NAT server set buffer into flash
ip nat server clear [set] Clear the server set [set] must use ldquosaverdquo command
to let it save into flash
ip nat server edit [rule] active Activate the rule [rule] rule number is 1 to 24 the
number 25-36 is for UPNP application
ip nat server edit [rule] svrport ltstart
portgt ltend portgt
Configure the port range from ltstart port gt to ltend
portgt
ip nat server edit [rule] remotehost
ltstart IPgt ltend IPgt
Configure the IP address range of remote host (Leave
it to be default value if you don‟t need this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] leasetime
ltsecondsgt
Configure the lease time (Leave it to be default value if
you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] rulename
ltstringgt
Configure the name of the rule (Leave it to be default
value if you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] forwardip ltIP
addressgt Configure the LAN IP address to be forwarded
ip nat server edit [rule] protocol
ltTCP|UDP|ALLgt
Configure the protocol to be used TCP UDP or ALL
(it must be capital)
NAT Server Sets
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports
(similar to the old SUA menu of before) If you wish you can make inside
servers for different services eg Web or FTP visible to the outside users
even though NAT makes your network appears as a single machine to the
outside world A server is identified by the port number eg Web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21
As an example (see the following figure) if you have a Web server at
192168136 and a FTP server at 192168133 then you need to specify for
port 80 (Web) the server at IP address 192168136 and for port 21 (FTP)
another at IP address 192168133
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
56
Please note that a server can support more than one service eg a server
can provide both FTP and Mail service while another provides only Web
service
The following procedures show how to configure a server behind NAT
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
Step 2 Select the service name from the pull-down menu and fill in the server
Address on bdquoServer IP Address‟ then click button bdquoAdd‟ to save it
Step 3 You could click the button bdquoEdit‟ on the rule to modify the Service name
Server IP Address StartEnd Port
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please
refer RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers
Service Port Number
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol)
1723
Examples
Internet Access Only
Internet Access with an Internal Server
Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
(1) Internet Access Only
In our Internet Access example we only need one rule where all our ILAs map
to one IGA assigned by the ISP You can just use the default SUA NAT or you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
57
could select Full Feature NAT and select an Address Mapping Set with a
Many-to-One Rule See the following figure
(2) Internet Access with an Internal Server
In this case we do exactly as the figure (use the convenient pre-configured
SUA Only set) and also go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
NAT -gt Port Forwarding to specify the Internet Server behind the NAT as
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
58
below
(3) Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
(One-to-One Many-to-One Server Set mapping types are used)
In this case we have 3 IGAs from the ISP We have two very busy internal FTP
servers and also an internal general server for the web and mail In this case
we want to assign the 3 IGAs by the following way using 4 NAT rules
Rule 1 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
Rule 3 (Many-to-One type) to map the other clients to IGA3 (200003)
Rule 4 (Server type) to map a web server and mail server with ILA3
(192168120) to IGA3 Type Server allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types to other machines behind NAT on the LAN
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
59
Step 1 In this case we need to map ILA to more than one IGA therefore we
must choose the Full Feature option from the NAT field in currently active
remote node and assign IGA3 to P-660HW-Dx v2‟s WAN IP Address
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping to begin configuring Address Mapping Set 1 We can see
there are 10 blank rule table that could be configured See the following setup
for the four rules in our case
Rule 1 Setup Select One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 Setup Selecting One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
60
Rule 3 Setup Select Many-to-One type to map the other clients to IGA3
(200003)
Rule 4 Setup Select Server type to map our web server and mail server with
ILA3 (192168120) to IGA3
Menu Network -gt NAT -gt Address Mapping should look as follows now
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
61
Step 3 Now we configure all other incoming traffic to go to our web server and
mail server from Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
(4) Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some mIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address In this case it is better to
use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types thus each
user login to the server using a unique global IP address The following figure
illustrates this
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
62
One rule configured for using Many-to-Many No Overload mapping type is
shown below
We can also do this by configure threeOne-to-One mapping type rules
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
What is DDNS
The DDNS service an IP Registry provides a public central database where
information such as email addresses hostnames IPs etc can be stored and
retrieved This solves the problems if your DNS server uses an IP associated
with dynamic IPs
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to access the internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
must inform the DDNS server the change of this IP so that the server can
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
63
update its IP-to-DNS entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is
updated the DNS name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still
usable
The DDNS servers the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports currently is
WWWDYNDNSORG where you apply the DNS from and update the WAN IP
to
Setup the DDNS
1 Before configuring the DDNS settings in the P-660HW-Dx v2 you must
register an account from the DDNS server such as
WWWDYNDNSORG first After the registration you have a hostname
for your internal server and a password using to update the IP to the
DDNS server
2 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Dynamic DNS
Select Active Dynamic DNS option
Key Settings
Option Description
Service Provider Enter the DDNS server in this field Currently we support
WWWDYNDNSORG
Active Toggle to Yes
Host Name Enter the hostname you subscribe from the above DDNS server
For example zyxelcomtw
User Name Enter the user name that the DDNS server gives to you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
64
Password Enter the password that the DDNS server gives to you
Enable Wildcard
Enter the hostname for the wildcard function that the
WWWDYNDNSORG supports Note that Wildcard option is
available only when the provider is httpwwwdyndnsorg
7 Network Management Using SNMP
ZyXEL SNMP Implementation
ZyXEL currently includes SNMP support in some P-660HW-Dx v2 routers It is
implemented based on the SNMPv1 so it will be able to communicate with
SNMPv1 NMSs Further users can also add ZyXELs private MIB in the NMS
to monitor and control additional system variables The ZyXELs private MIB
tree is shown in figure 3 For SNMPv1 operation ZyXEL permits one
community string so that the router can belong to only one community and
allows trap messages to be sent to only one NMS manager
Some traps are sent to the SNMP manager when anyone of the following
events happens
1 coldStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine coldstarts the trap will be sent after booting
2 warmStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine warmstarts the trap will be sent after booting
3 linkDown (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is down the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
4 linkUp (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is up the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
5 authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215)
When receiving any SNMP get or set requirement with wrong community
this trap is sent to the manager
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
65
6 whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-MIB)
When the system is going to restart (warmstart) the trap will be sent with the
reason of restart before rebooting
(1) For intentional reboot
In some cases (download new files CI command sys reboot ) reboot is
done intentionally And traps with the message System reboot by user will
be sent
(2) For fatal error
System has to reboot for some fatal errors And traps with the message of the
fatal code will be sent
Downloading ZyXELs private MIB
Configure the P-660HW-Dx v2 for SNMP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
66
The SNMP related settings in P-660HW-Dx v2 are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt SNMP The
following steps describe a simple setup procedure for configuring all SNMP
settings
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Get
Community
Enter the correct Get Community This Get Community must match the
Get- and GetNext community requested from the NMS The default is
public
Set
Community
Enter the correct Set Community This Set Community must match the
Set-community requested from the NMS The default is public
Trusted
Host
Enter the IP address of the NMS The P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will only
respond to SNMP messages coming from this IP address If 0000 is
entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will respond to all NMS
managers
Trap
Community
Enter the community name in each sent trap to the NMS This Trap
Community must match what the NMS is expecting The default is
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
67
public
Trap
Destination
Enter the IP address of the NMS that you wish to send the traps to If
0000 is entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will not send trap any
NMS manager
Note You may need to edit a firewall rule to permit SNMP Packets
8 Using syslog
You can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt
Logs -gt Log Settings -gt Syslog logging
Key Settings
Active Select it to active UNIX Syslog
Syslog IP Address Enter the IP address of the UNIX server that you wish to
send the syslog
Log Facility Select from the 7 different local options The log facility lets you
log the message in different server files Refer to your UNIX manual
9 Using IP Alias
What is IP Alias
In a typical environment a LAN router is required to connect two local
networks The P-660HW-Dx v2 can connect three local networks to the ISP or
a remote node we call this function as IP Alias In this case an internal
router is not required For example the network manager can divide the local
network into three networks and connect them to the Internet using
P-660HW-Dx v2s single user account See the figure below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
68
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports three virtual LAN interfaces via its single
physical Ethernet interface The first network can be configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN -gt DHCP Setup The second
and third networks that we call IP Alias 1 and IP Alias 2 can be configured
in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias
There are three internal virtual LAN interfaces for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to route
the packets fromto the three networks correctly They are enif0 for the major
network enif00 for the IP alias 1 and enif01 for the IP alias 2 Therefore
three routes are created in the P-660HW-Dx v2 as shown below when the
three networks are configured If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP is also enabled
the IP pool for the clients can be any of the three networks
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
69
You can edit filter rule to accept or deny LAN packets fromto the IP alias 12
go through the P-660HW-Dx v2 by command in CLI
lan index [index number]
Usage index number =1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt [set]
Usage set= the corresponding filter set number you‟ve configured
lan save
IP Alias Setup
(1) Edit the first network in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
LAN -gt IPDHCP Setup by configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s first LAN IP
address
Key Settings
DHCP
Setup
If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP server is enabled the IP pool for the clients
can be any of the three networks
TCPIP
Setup
Enter the first LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This will create the
first route in the enif0 interface
(2) Edit the second and third networks in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias by
configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s second and third LAN IP addresses
Key Settings
IP Alias 1 Active it and enter the second LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the second route in the enif00 interface
IP Alias 2 Active it and enter the third LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the third route in the enif01 interface
10 Using IP Policy Routing
What is IP Policy Routing (IPPR)
Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router
takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides
a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet
forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator
Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis
prior to the normal routing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
70
traffic among multiple paths For example if a network has both the Internet
and remote node connections we can route the Web packets to the Internet
using one policy and route the FTP packets to the remote LAN using another
policy See the figure below
Use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths
Benefits
Source-Based Routing - Network administrators can use policy-based
routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections
Quality of Service (QoS)- Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the
precedence or TOS (Type of Service) values in the IP header at the periphery
of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic
Cost Savings- IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on
high-bandwidth high-cost path while using low-path for batch traffic
Load Sharing- Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic
among multiple paths
How does the IPPR work
A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet
meets the criteria The action is taken only when all the criteria are met The
criteria include the source address and port IP protocol (ICMP UDP TCP
etc) destination address and port TOS and precedence (fields in the IP
header) and length The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between
interactive and bulk traffic Interactive applications eg Telnet tend to have
short packets while bulk traffic eg file transfer tends to have large packets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
71
The actions that can be taken include routing the packet to a different gateway
(and hence the outgoing interface) and the TOS and precedence fields in the
IP header IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of ZyNOS in style
and in implementation The policies are divided into sets where related
policies are grouped together A use defines the policies before applying them
to an interface or a remote node in the same fashion as the filters There are
12 policy sets with 6 policies in each set
Setup the IP Policy Routing
Setp 1 Set the index of IP routing policy set rule by command bdquoip
policyrouting set index [set] [rule]‟ Suppose set=1 rule=1 in this
example
Step 2 Suppose we‟d like to edit the rule like this
Policy Set Name=Test
Active= Yes
Criteria
IP Protocol = 6
Type of Service= Dont Care Packet length= 0
Precedence = Dont Care Len Comp= NA
Source
addr start= 19216812 end= 192168120
port start= 0 end= NA
Destination
addr start= 0000 end= NA
port start= 80 end= 80
Action= Matched
Gateway addr = 1921681254 Log= No
Type of Service= No Change
Precedence = No Change
This policy example forces the Web packets originated from the clients with IP
addresses from 19216812 to 192168120 be routed to the remote LAN via
the gateway 1921681254
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
ip policyrouting set name Test
(Set the name as Test of IP routing policy rule )
ip policyrouting set active yes
(Enable the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria protocol 6
(Set the protocol ID as 6(TCP) for the rule)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
72
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the criteria type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria packetlength 0
(Set the packet length as 0 for the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcip 19216812 192168120
(Set the source IP address for the rule Start=19216812 end=192168120)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcport 0
(Set the source port for the rule Start=0)
ip policyrouting set criteria destip 0000
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=0000)
ip policyrouting set criteria destport 80 80
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=80 end=80)
ip policyrouting set action actmatched
(Set the action for the rule Matched)
ip policyrouting set action gatewaytype 0
(Set gateway type for the rule Gateway Address)
ip policyrouting set action gatewayaddr 1921681254
(Set the gateway address for the rule 1921681254)
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the action type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the action precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set action log no
(Set log option for the rule no log)
ip polictrouting set save
(Save the rule)
Step 3 Apply the IP policy routing There are two interfaces to apply the policy
set they are the LAN interface and WAN interface It depends where the
gateway specified in the policy rule is located If the gateway you specified is
located on the local LAN you apply the policy set in LAN interface If the
gateway you specified is located on the remote WAN site you apply the policy
set in WAN interface
Apply to WAN Interface (Suppose we apply it to remote node 1 in the
example)
wan node index 1
wan node ippolicy 1
11 Using Call Scheduling
What is Call Scheduling
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
73
Call scheduling enables the mechanism for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to run the
remote node connection according to the pre-defined schedule This feature is
just like the scheduler in a video recorder which records the program according
to the specified time Users can apply at most 4 schedule sets in Remote Node
The remote node configured with the schedule set could be Forced On
Forced Down Enable Dial-On-Demand or Disable Dial-On-Demand on
specified date and time
How to configure a Call Scheduling
You can configure a call scheduling in CLI
Suppose we want to edit a call schedule set like this
Call Schedule Set =1
Set name=Test
Active= Yes
Start Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 - 12 - 27
How Often= Once
Once
Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 -12 -27
Start Time(hhmm)= 12 00
Duration(hhmm)= 16 00
Action= Enable Dial-on-demand
This schedule example permits a demand call on the line on 1200 am
2005-12-27 The maximum length of time this connection is allowed is 16
hours
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
wan callsch index 1
(Set call schedule index = 1 You must apply this command first before you
begin to configure call schedule)
wan callsch name Test
(Set the schedule name as Test)
wan callsch active Yes
(Enable schedule)
wan callsch startdate 2005 12 27
(Set schedule start date as 2005-12-27)
wan callsch oncedate 2005 12 27
(Set the schedule used just once it works on 2005-12-27)
wan callsch starttime 12 00
(Set the schedule start time as 1200)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
74
wan callsch duration 16 00
(Set schedule duration time as 16 hours)
wan callsch action 2
(Set action as dial-on-demand)
wan callsch save
(Save the current call schedule set)
Key Settings
Start Date
Start date of this schedule rule It can be unmatched with weekday
setting For example if Start Date is 20001002(Monday) but Monday
setting in weekday can be No
Forced On The node will always keep up during the setting period It is equivalent
to diable the idel timeout
Forced Down The node will always keep doen during the setting period The
connected remote node will be dropped
Enable
Dial-On-Demand The remote node accepts Dial-on-demand during this period
Disable
Dial-On-Demand
The remote node denies any demand dial during the period For the
existing connected nodes it will be dropped after idle timeout and no
triggered up
Start Time
Duration Start Time and Duration of this schedule
Apply the schedule to the Remote node
Multiple scheduling rules can program in a Remote node and they have
priority For example if we program the sets as 1234 in remote node then
the set 1 will override set 234 set 2 will override 34 and so on
We can apply the schedule to the remote node in CLI by the commands
wan node index []index]
wan node callsch [index]
wan node save
For example if we want to apply the call schedule set 1 to remote node 1 we
could use the commands
wan node index 1
wan node callsch 1
wan node save
Time Service in P-660HW-Dx v2
There is no RTC (Real-Time Clock) chip so the P-660HW-Dx v2 should launch
a mechanism to get current time and date from external server in boot time
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
75
Time service is implemented by the Daytime protocol(RFC-867) Time
protocol(RFC-868) and NTP protocol(RFC-1305) You have to assign an IP
address of a time server and then the P-660HW-Dx v2 will get the date time
and time-zone information from this server You can configure it in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt System -gt Time Setting
12 Using IP Multicast
What is IP Multicast
Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in two ways - unicast or broadcast
Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts Host groups
are identified by class D IP addresses ie those with 1110 as their
higher-order bits In dotted decimal notation host group addresses range from
224000 to 239255255255 Among them 224001 is assigned to the
permanent IP hosts group and 224002 is assigned to the multicast routers
group
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is the protocol used to support
multicast groups The latest version is version 2 (see RFC2236) IP hosts use
IGMP to report their multicast group membership to any immediate-neighbor
multicast routers so the multicast routers can decide if a multicast packet
needs to be forwarded At start up the P-660HW-Dx v2 queries all directly
connected networks to gather group membership
After that the P-660HW-Dx v2 updates the information by periodic queries
The P-660HW-Dx v2 implementation of IGMP is also compatible with version 1
The multicast setting can be turned on or off on Ethernet and remote nodes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
76
IP Multicast Setup
(1) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt LAN -gt IP -gt Advanced Setup
(2) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s remote node in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt Multicast
Key Settings
Multicast IGMP-v1 for IGMP version 1 IGMP-v2 for IGMP version 2
13 Using Bandwidth Management
Why Bandwidth Management (BWM)
Nowadays we have many different traffic types for Internet applications Some
traffic may consume high bandwidth such as FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
Some other traffic may not require high bandwidth but they require stable
supply of bandwidth such as VoIP traffic The VoIP quality would not be good
if all of the outgoing bandwidth is occupied via FTP Additionally chances are
that you would like to grant higher bandwidth for somebody special who is
using specific IP address in your network All of these are reasons why we
need bandwidth management
Using BWM
Setp 1 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gtSummary activate bandwidth management on the interface you
would like to manage We enable the BWM function on WAN interface in this
example
Enter the total speed for this interface that you want to allocate using
bandwidth management This appears as the bandwidth budget of the
interface‟s root class
Select how you want the bandwidth to be allocated Priority-Based means
bandwidth is allocated via priority so the traffic with highest priority would be
served first then the second priority is served secondly and so on If
Fairness-Based is chosen then the bandwidth is allocated by ratio Which
means if A class needs 300 kbps B class needs 600 kbps then the ratio of A
and Bs actual bandwidth is 12 So if we get 450 kbps in total then A would
get 150 kbps B would get 300 kbps We select Priority-Based in this
example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
77
Key Settings
Active
Check the box to enable BWM on the interface Note that if you would like
to manage traffic from WAN to LAN you should apply BWM on LAN
interface If you would like to management traffic from WAN to DMZ
please apply BWM on DMZ interface
Speed Enter the total speed to manage on this interface This value is the budget
of the class trees root
Scheduler
Choose the principle to allocate bandwidth on this interface
Priority-Based allocates bandwidth via priority Fairness-Based allocates
bandwidth by ratio
Maximize
Bandwidth
Usage
Check this box if you would like to give residuary bandwidth from Interface
to the classes who need more bandwidth than configured amount Do not
select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a
bandwidth class or you want to limit the bandwidth of each class at the
configured value (Please note that to meat the second condition you
should also disable Use All Managed Bandwidth in the BWM rule)
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Rule Setup select the interface Service Priority and Allocated
Bandwidth for this rule then click button bdquoAdd‟ to apply this rule
Step 3 You can modify the rule by clicking the button lsquoEditrsquo on the rule
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
78
Key Settings
RuleName Give this rule a name for example WWW
BW Budget Configure the bandwidth you would like to allocate to this rule
Priority Enter a number between 0 and 7 to set the priority of this class The
higher the number the higher the priority The default setting is 3
Use All
Managed
Bandwidth
Check this box if you would like to let this class to borrow bandwidth from
its parents when the required bandwidth is higher than the configured
amount Do not check this if you want to limit the bandwidth of this class
at the configured value(Please note that you should also disable
Maximize Bandwidth Usage on the interface to meet the condition)
Service Select User-defined SIP FTP or H323 to specify the traffic types
Destination
IP Address Enter the IP address of destination that meets this class
Destination
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
Destination
Port Enter the destination port number of the traffic
Source IP
Address
Enter the IP address of source that meats this class Note that for traffic
from LAN to WAN since BWM is before NAT you should use the IP
address before NAT processing
Source
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
79
Source Port Enter the source port number of the traffic
Protocol ID Enter the protocol number for the traffic 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP or 17 for
UDP
After configuration BWM you can check current bandwidth of the configured
traffic in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Monitor
14 Using Zero-Configuration
Zero-Configuration and VC auto-hunting
Zero-Configure feature can help customer to reduce the burden of setting
efforts Whenever system ADSL links up system will send out some probing
patterns system will analyze the packets returned from ISP and decide which
services the ISP may provide Because ADSL is based on a ATM network so
system have to pre-configured a VPIVCI hunting pool before Auto-Configure
function begins to work
The Zero-Configuration feature can hunt the encapsulation and VPIVCI value
and system will automatically configure itself if the hunting result is
successfully This feature has two constraints
1 It supports the ISP provides one kind of service (PPPoEPPPoA etc)
only otherwise the hunting will get confusing and failed
2 VC auto-hunting only supports dynamic WAN IP address If the router is
set a static WAN IP address VC auto-hunting function will be disabled
The entry of hunting pool must also contain the VPI VCI and which kinds of
hunting patterns you wish to send Whenever system send out all the probing
patterns with specific VPIVCI system will wait for 5~10 seconds and get the
response from ISP the response patterns will decide which kinds of ADSL
services of the line will be After that system will save back the correct VPI
VCI and also services (encapsulation) type into profile of WAN interface
Configure the VC auto-hunting preconfigured table
(1) Display auto-haunting preconfigured table by using command from CLI
wan atm vchunt display
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
80
(2) Add items to the auto-haunting preconfigured table by using commands
wan atm vchunt add ltremoteNodeIndexgt ltvpigt ltvcigt ltservice
bit(hex)gt
wan atm vchunt save
Note ltremote nodegt input the remote node index 1-8
ltvpigt vpi value
ltvcigt vci value
ltservicegt it‟s a hex value bit0PPPoEVC (1) bit1PPPoELLC (2)
bit2PPPoAVC (4) bit3PPPoALLC (8) bit4EnetVC (16) bit5 EnetLLC (32)
For example
(1) If you need service PPPoELLC and EnetLLC then the service bits will be
2+32 = 34 (decimal) = 22 (hex) you must input 22
(2) If you want to enable all service for VC hunting the service bits will be
1+2+4+8+16+32=63(decimal)= 3f (hex) you must input 3f
Need to perform save after this by command bdquowan atm vchunt save‟
(3) Delete items from the auto-haunting preconfigured table by useing
command
wan atm vchunt remove ltremote nodegt ltvpigt ltvcigt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
81
Using Zero configuration
You can enabledisable Zero Configuration in Network -gt WAN -gt Advanced
Setup
(1) After configure the auto-haunting preconfigured table You just need a PC
connected to the device LAN Ethernet port with the DSL sync up
(2) Open your web browser to access a Web site It should prompt and request
for your username password of your ISP account if your ISP provide PPPoE
or PPPoA service
(3) After key-in the correct info it will than test the connection If it is
successful it will than close the browser and you can open a new browser to
surf the Internet If the connection test fail it will go back to the page ask for
user name and password
(4) Basically the zero configuration only work on the VC that was preconigured
in the auto-haunting preconfigured table
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2
The common triple play scenario is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
82
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus we could assign different parameters to the PVC (CBR
UBR VBR-RT VBR-nRT) to guarantee different applications
We could configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 via CLI The command is
sys tripleplay set portbase ltEportIDgt ltPVCIDgt
For example sys tripleplay portbase set 1 1
sys tripleplay portbase set 2 2
sys tripleplay portbase set 3 3
The traffic from Ethernet port 1 must be forwarded to PVC1 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet port 2 must be forwarded to PVC2 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet Port3 must be forwarded to PVC3 vice versa
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to configure up to twelve filter sets with six
rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system You can apply up to
four filter sets to a particular port to block multiple types of packets With each
filter set having up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for
a single port
The packet filter function on P-660HW-Dx v2 is the same as before just that
you could only configure the filter set and apply them by command in CLI It‟s
very complex for common users to do it So here‟s the recommendation
(1) Usually if you want to block special packets you could edit a firewall rule in
Web Configurator
032
VOIP Server
IPTV Server
Internet
Server
Others
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
ATUR IP-DSLAM VL-Switch
CPE Access Network ISP
034
055
VOIP Telephone
Video Client
Clients surfing
Internet
Other clients
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
PVC1
PVC2
PVC3
PVC4 132
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
83
(2) By factory default ZyXEL has preconfigured many filter sets for your
reference you can check them by command
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Usage set 1~12 rule 1~6 Commonly the preconfigured filter sets are as
follows ltset 2 rule 1~6gt ltset 3 rule 1gt ltset 4 rule 1gt
sys filter set display
For example
This could satisfy mostly requirement You could select any of them to apply to
the WAN node or LAN Interface on demand The command is as follows
Apply to WAN node
wan node index ltnodegt
Usage node= 1~8 corresponding to the remote node 1~8
wan node filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt
ltset3gt ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to one remote node
wan node save
Apply to LAN Interface
lan index [index]
Usage index=1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
84
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt ltset3gt
ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to LAN Interface
lan save
(3) If you are very advanced user you could edit filter set by the following
command
sys filter set [set] [rule]
Usage Set up a filter set index to edit a set
set 1~12
rule 1~6
sys filter set type [typeID]
Usage typeID tcpip or generic
Note In one filter set you should configure all the rules in one type either
tcpip or generic
sys filter set enable
Usage Enable(active) the rule
sys filter set helliphellip(You could configure a filter rule on demand the newest
command is available on release note)
sys filter set save
Usage Don‟t forget to save the rule everytime you‟ve configured it
Reference Commands
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Set the index of filter set rule you must apply this
command first before you begin to configure the
filter rules
sys filter set name [set name] Set the name of filter set
sys filter set type [tcpip | generic] Set the type of filter rule
sys filter set enable Enable the rule
sys filter set disable Disable the rule
sys filter set protocol [protocol ] Set the protocol ID of the rule
sys filter set sourceroute [yes|no] Set the sourceroute yesno
sys filter set destip [address] [subnet
mask]
Set the destination IP address and subnet mask of
the rule
sys filter set destport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|notequal|less|greater]
Set the destination port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set srcip [address] [subnet
mask] Set the source IP address and subnet mask
sys filter set srcport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|not
Set the source port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
85
equal|less|greater] equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set tcpEstab [yes|no] Set TCP establish option
sys filter set more [yes|no] Set the more option to yesno
sys filter set log [type 0-3= none | match|
notmatch | both ]
Set the log type (it could be 0-3 =none match not
match both)
sys filter set actmatch[type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for match
sys filter set actnomatch [type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for not match
sys filter set offset [] Set offset for the generic rule
sys filter set length [] Set the length for generic rule
sys filter set mask [] Set the mask for generic rule
sys filter set value [(depend on length in
hex)] Set the value for generic rule
sys filter set clear Clear the current filter set
sys filter set save Save the filter set parameters
sys filter set display [set][rule] Display Filter set information Wo parameter it will
display buffer information
sys filter set freememory Discard Changes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
86
Wireless Application Notes
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode
Ad hoc Introduction
What is Ad Hoc mode
Ad hoc mode is a wireless network consists of a number of stations without
access points Without using an access point or any connection to a wired
network a client unit in Ad hoc operation mode can communicate directly to
other client units just as using a cross over Ethernet cable connecting 2 hosts
together via a NIC card for direct connection when configured in Ad hoc mode
without an access point being present Ad hoc operation is ideal for small
networks of no more than 2-4 computers Larger networks would require the
use of one or perhaps several access points
Configuration for Wireless Station A
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
87
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
88
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Configuration for Wireless Station B
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
89
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
90
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Step 7 Station A now are able to connect to Station B
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure Introduction
For Infrastructure WLANs multiple Access Points (APs) like the WLAN to the
wired network and allow users to efficiently share network resources The
Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also
mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
91
Configure Wireless Access Point to Infrastructure mode using Web
configurator
To configure Infrastructure mode of your P-660HW-Dx v2 wireless AP please
follow the steps below
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gt General Configure the basic parameters for Wireless LAN
Step 2 You could click the button bdquoAdvanced Setup‟ for more detailed
configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
92
Configuration Wireless Station to Infrastructure mode
To configure Infrastructure mode on your ZyAIR G-200 Wireless Network
Adapter please follow the following steps
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
93
Step 3 Select Infrastructure from the operation mode pull down menu fill in an
SSID or leave it as any if you wish to connect to any AP than press Apply
Change to take effect
Step 4 Click on Site Survey tab and press search all the available AP will be
listed
Step 5 Double click on the AP you want to associated with
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
94
Step 6 After the client have associated with the selected AP The linked APs
channel current linkup rate SSID link quality and signal strength will show on
the Link Info page You now successfully associate with the selected AP with
Infrastructure Mode
3 MAC Filter
MAC Filter Overview
Users can use MAC Filter as a method to restrict unauthorized stations from
accessing the APs ZyXELs APs provide the capability for checking MAC
address of the station before allowing it to connect to the network This
provides an additional layer of control layer in that only stations with registered
MAC addresses can connect This approach requires that the list of MAC
addresses be configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
95
ZyXEL MAC Filter Implementation
ZyXELs MAC Filter Implementation allows users to define a list to allow or
block association from STAs The filter set allows users to input 12 entries in
the list If Allow Association is selected all other STAs which are not on the list
will be denied Otherwise if Deny Association is selected all other STAs which
are not on the list will be allowed for association Users can choose either way
to configure their filter rule
Configure the WLAN MAC Filter
The MAC Filter related settings in ZyXEL APs are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gtMAC Filter
Before you configure the MAC filter you need to know the MAC address of the
client first If not knowing what your MAC address is please enter a command
ipconfig all after DOS prompt to get the MAC (physical) address of your
wireless client
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gtMAC Filter active MAC Filter
Step 2 Enter the MAC Addresses of wireless cards in the filter set to allow or
deny association from these cards
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Filter Action
Allow or block association from MAC addresses contained in this list If Allow
Association is selected in this field hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list
will be allowed to associate with AP If Deny Association is selected in this field
hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list will be blocked
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
96
MAC Address This field specifies those MAC Addresses that you want to add in the list
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
Introduction
The 80211 standard describes the communication that occurs in wireless
LANs
The Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm is used to protect wireless
communication from eavesdropping because wireless transmissions are
easier to intercept than transmissions over wired networks and wireless is a
shared medium everything that is transmitted or received over a wireless
network can be intercepted
WEP relies on a secret key that is shared between a mobile station (eg a
laptop with a wireless Ethernet card) and an access point (ie a base station)
The secret key is used to encrypt packets before they are transmitted and an
integrity check is used to ensure that packages are not modified during the
transition The standard does not discuss how the shared key is established In
practice most installations use a single key that is shared between all mobile
stations and access points APs You can refer to the User Guide for more
detailed information about it
Setting up the Access Point
You can set up the Access Point from Web configurator Advanced Setup
Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General (You can also configure it via CLI)
Step 1 Select bdquoStatic WEP‟ from the pull down menu bdquoSecurity Mode‟ in Web
Configurator
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
97
Step 2 Set up WEP Key in the Web Configurator You need to set the one of
the following parameters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 5 characters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 10 hexadecimal digits
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 13 characters
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 26 hexadecimal digits
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 29 characters
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 58 hexadecimal digits
There are two ways you can configure the WEP Key
(1) You can put in a special WEP key in the bdquoWEP Key‟ menu directly
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
98
(2) You can also put in an arbitrary sequence of characters in the
bdquoPassphrase‟ and then press button bdquoGenerate‟ to let the P-660HW-Dx v2
generate WEP Key for you
Setting up the Station
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar or right click
the utility icon then select Show Config Utility
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
99
The utility will pop up on your windows screen
Note If the utility icon doesnt exist in your task bar click Start -gt
Programs -gt helliphellip to start the utility
Step 2 Select the Configuration tab
Select bdquoSet Security‟ to configure encryption type and parameters
correspond with access point
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
100
Note You should select Key 1 as default Transmit Key since the P-660HW-Dx
v2 is supposed to use Key 1 by default
Key settings
The WEP Encryption type of station has to equal to the access point
Check ASCII field for characters WEP key or uncheck ASCII field for
Hexadecimal digits WEP key
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
101
Hexadecimal digits dont need to precede by 0x
For example
64-bits with characters WEP key Key1= 2e3f4
64-bits with hexadecimal digits WEP key Key1= 123456789A
5 Site Survey
Introduction
What is Site Survey
An RF site survey is a MAP to RF contour of RF coverage in a particular
facility With wireless system it is very difficult to predict the propagation of
radio waves and detect the presence of interfering signals Walls doors
elevator shafts and other obstacles offer different degree of attenuation This
will cause the RF coverage pattern be irregular and hard to predict
Site survey can help us overcome these problem and even provide us a map
of RF coverage of the facility
Preparation
Below are the steps to complete a simple site survey with simple tools
1 First you will need to obtain a facility diagram such as blueprints This is
for you to mark and take record on
2 Visually inspect the facility walk through the facility to verify the accuracy of
the diagram and mark down any large obstacle you see that may effect the RF
signal such as metal shelf metal desk etc on the diagram
3 Identify users area when doing so ask a question where is wireless
coverage needed and where does not and note and take note on the diagram
this is information is needed to determine the number of AP required
4 Determine the preliminary access point location on the facility diagram base
on the service area needed obstacles power wall jack considerations
Survey on Site
Step 1 With the diagram with all information you gathered in the preparation
phase Now you are ready to make the survey
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
102
Step 2 Install an access point at the preliminary location
Step 3 Use a notebook with wireless client installed and run its utility An utility
will provide information such as connection speed current used channel
associated rate link quality signal strength and etc information as shown in
utility below
Step 4 Its always a good idea to start with putting the access point at the
corner of the room and walk away from the access point in a systematic
manner Record the changes at point where transfer rate drop and the link
quality and signal strength information on the diagram as you go alone
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
103
Step 5 When you reach the farthest point of connection mark the spot Now
you move the access point to this new spot as have already determine the
farthest point of the access point installation spot if wireless service is required
from corner of the room
Step 6 Repeat step 1~5 and now you should be able to mark an RF coverage
area as illustrated in above picutre
Step 7 You may need more than one access point is the RF coverage area
hasn‟t covered all the wireless service area you needed
Step 8 Repeat step 1~6 of survey on site as necessary upon completion you
will have a diagram and information of site survey As illustrated below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
104
Note If there are more than one access point is needed be sure to make the
adjacent access point service area over lap one another So the wireless
station is able to roam For more information please refer to roaming at
6 Configure 8021x and WPA
What is the WPA Functionality
Configuration for Access Point
Configuration for your PC
What is WPA Functionality
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
105
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN
Here comes WPA-PSK Application example for your reference
Configuration for Access point
The IEEE 8021x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the
authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management
Authentication can be done using local user database internal to the
P-660HW-Dx v2 (authenticate up to 32 users) or an external RADIUS server
for an unlimited number of users
Step 1 To change your P-660HW-Dx v2s authentication settings login Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General
-gtSecurity
Step 2 Select lsquoSecurity Mode‟ as WAP-PSK
Step 3 Type the Pre Shared Key in the Pre-Shared Key field
Step 4 Click Apply to finish
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
106
Configuration for your PC
Step 1 Double click on your wireless utility icon in your windows task bar the
utility will pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select the configuration tab type in the SSID (Service Set Identifier)
select the operating Mode as Infrastructure and select proper channel
Step 3 Click Set Security to configure the security parameters
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
107
Step 4 Click OK for finish and begin to Site survey Connect to the AP as you
have configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
108
Step 5 Click Link Info tab if the PC associated and authenticated with AP
successfully we will see the following information
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
109
Support Tool
1 LANWAN Packet Trace
The Prestige packet trace records and analyzes packets running on LAN and
WAN interfaces It is designed for users with technical backgrounds who are
interested in the details of the packet flow on LAN or WAN end of Prestige It is
also very helpful for diagnostics if you have compatibility problems with your
ISP or if you want to know the details of a packet for configuring a filter rule
The format of the display is as following
Packet
[index] [timersecond][channel-receivetransmit][length] [protocol]
[sourceIPport] [destIPport]
There are two ways to dump the trace
Online Trace--display the trace real time on screen
Offline Trace--capture the trace first and display later
The details for capturing the trace in CLI as follows
First of all you need to telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 firstly The password is
Administrator passwords bdquoadmin‟ by default
Online Trace
(1) Trace LAN packet
Disable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
none
Enable to capture the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
110
(2) Trace WAN packet
Disable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
none
Enable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
111
Offline Trace
Disable the capture of the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel
mpoa00 none
Enable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Wait for packet passing through the Prestige over LAN
Disable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw off amp sys trcl sw off
Display the trace briefly by entering sys trcp brief
Display specific packets by using sys trcp parse ltfrom_indexgt ltto_indexgt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
112
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal
Step 1 Initiate a hyper terminal connection from your PC(suppose you
connected to the LAN port of P-660HW-Dx v2)
Step 2 Click the bdquoproperties‟ to configure parameters to telnet to the
P-660HW-Dx v2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
113
Step 3 So that after you invoke the relevant commands you could save the
logs you‟ve captured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
114
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP
Using TFTP client software
Uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Uploaddownload Prestige configurations via LAN
(1) Using TFTP to uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout
in Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 Enter the IP address of the Prestige
Step 5To upload the firmware please save the remote file as ras to
Prestige After the transfer is complete the Prestige will program the upgraded
firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
115
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige The local file is the source
file of the ZyNOS firmware that is available in your hard disk The remote file is
the file name that will be saved in Prestige Check the port number 69 and
512-Octet blocks for TFTP Check Binary mode for file transfering
(2) Using TFTP to uploaddownload SMT configurations via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 To download the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please get the
remote file rom-0 from the Prestige
Step 5 To upload the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please save the
remote file as rom-0 in the Prestige
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
116
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige
The local file is the source file of your configuration file that is available
in your hard disk
The remote file is the file name that will be saved in Prestige
Check the port number 69 and 512-Octet blocks for TFTP
Check Binary mode for file transfering
Using TFTP command on Windows NT
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Download ZyNOS via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] get ras [localfile]
Step 4 Upload P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] put
[localfile] rom-0
Step 5 Download P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP]
get rom-0 [localfile]
Using TFTP command on UNIX
Before you begin
1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Example
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ telnet 19216811
Trying 19216811
Connected to 19216811
Escape character is ^]
Password
rasgt sys stdio 0
(Open a new window)
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get rom-0 [local-rom] lt- change to binary mode
lt- download configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-rom] rom-0 lt- upload configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get ras [local-ras ] lt- download firmware
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-ras] ras lt- upload firmware
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
117
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files
In addition to upload the firmware and configuration file via the console port
and TFTP client you can also upload the firmware and configuration files to
the Prestige using FTP
To use this feature your workstation must have a FTP client software See the
example shown below
Using FTP client software
Note The remote file name for the firmware is ras and the configuration file is
rom-0
Step 1 Use FTP client from your workstation to connect to the Prestige by
entering the IP address of the Prestige
Step2 Press Enter key to ignore the username because the Prestige does
not check the username
Step 3 Enter the CLI password as the FTP login password the default is
admin
Step 4 Enter command bin to set the transfer type to binary
Step 5 Use put command to transfer the file to the Prestige
Example
Step 1 Connect to the Prestige by entering the Prestiges IP and Administrator
password in the FTP software Set the transfer type to Auto-Detect or
Binary
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
118
Step 2 Press OK to ignore the Username prompt
Step 3 To upload the firmware file we transfer the local ras file to overwrite
the remote ras file
To upload the configuration file we transfer the local rom-0 to overwrite
the remote rom-0 file
Step 4 The Prestige reboots automatically after the uploading is finished
Please do not power off the router at this moment
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
119
CI Command Reference
Command Syntax and General User Interface
CI has the following command syntax
command ltiface | device gt subcommand [param]
command subcommand [param]
command | help
command subcommand | help
General user interface
1 Shows the following commands and all major (sub)commands
2 exit Exit Subcommand
To get the latest CI Command list
The latest CI Command list is available in release note of every ZyXEL
firmware release Please goto ZyXEL public WEB site
httpwwwzyxelcomsupportdownload_indexphp to download firmware
package (zip) you should unzip the package to get the release note in PDF
format
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
10
16 How can I protect against IP spoofing attacks
The P-660HW-Dx v2s filter sets provide a means to protect against IP
spoofing attacks The basic scheme is as follows
For the input data filter
Deny packets from the outside that claim to be from the inside
Allow everything that is not spoofing us
Filter rule setup
Filter type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Source IP Addr =abcd
Source IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action Not Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
For the output data filters
Deny bounce back packet
Allow packets that originate from us
Filter rule setup
Filter Type =TCPIP Filter Rule
Active =Yes
Destination IP Addr =abcd
Destination IP Mask =wxyz
Action Matched =Drop
Action No Matched =Forward
Where abcd is an IP address on your local network and wxyz is your
netmask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
11
Product FAQ
1 How can I manage P-660HW-Dx v2
Multilingual Embedded Web GUI for Local and Remote management
CLI (Command-line interface)
Telnet support (Administrator Password Protected ) for remote
configuration change and status monitoring
FTP TFTP sever firmware upgrade and configuration backup and
restore are supported(Administrator Password Protected)
2 What is the default password for Web Configurator
There are two different accounts for P-660HW-Dx v2 Web Configurator
Common User Account and Administrator Account
By factory default the password for the two accounts are
Common User Account user
Administrator Account 1234
You can change the password after you logging in the Web Configurator
Please record your new password whenever you change it The system
will lock you out if you have forgotten your password
3 Whatrsquos the difference between lsquoCommon User Accountrsquo and
lsquoAdministrator Accountrsquo
For Common User Account it can only access the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 and check the current system status
For Administrator Account besides accessing the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 it can also access Winzard setup Advanced setup of
P-660HW-Dx v2
Moreover only with Administrator Password you could manage the
P-660HW-Dx v2 via FTPTFTP or Telnet
4 How do I know the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address assigned by the
ISP
You can view My WAN IP ltfrom ISPgt xxxx shown in Web Configurator
bdquoStatus-gtDevice Information -gtWAN Information‟ to check this IP address
5 What is the micro filter or splitter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
12
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
6 The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Bridge and Router mode whats the
difference between them
When the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet which means
only the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use bridge mode which works as an ADSL modem to
connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account and limit
only one computer to access the Internet
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to add another Internet sharing device
like a router In this case we use the router mode which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
7 How do I know I am using PPPoE
PPPoE requires a user account to login to the providers server If you need to
configure a user name and password on your computer to connect to the ISP
you are probably using PPPoE If you are simply connected to the Internet
when you turn on your computer you probably are not You can also check
your ISP or the information sheet given by the ISP Please choose PPPoE as
the encapsulation type in the P-660HW-Dx v2 if the ISP uses PPPoE
8 Why does my provider use PPPoE
PPPoE emulates a familiar Dial-Up connection It allows your ISP to provide
services using their existing network configuration over the broadband
connections Besides PPPoE supports a broad range of existing applications
and service including authentication accounting secure access and
configuration management
9 What is DDNS
The Dynamic DNS service allows you to alias a dynamic IP address to a static
hostname allowing your computer to be more easily accessed from various
locations on the Internet To use the service you must first apply an account
from several free Web servers such as httpwwwdyndnsorg
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to reach our internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
13
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
updates this IP to DDNS server so that the server can update its IP-to-DNS
entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is updated the DNS
name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still usable
10 When do I need DDNS service
When you want your internal server to be accessed by using DNS name rather
than using the dynamic IP address we can use the DDNS service The DDNS
server allows to alias a dynamic IP address to a static hostname Whenever
the ISP assigns you a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2 sends this IP to the DDNS
server for its updates
11 What is DDNS wildcard Does the P-660HW-Dx v2 support DDNS
wildcard
Some DDNS servers support the wildcard feature which allows the hostname
yourhostdyndnsorg to be aliased to the same IP address as
yourhostdyndnsorg This feature is useful when there are multiple servers
inside and you want users to be able to use things such as
wwwyourhostdyndnsorg and still reach your hostname
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports DDNS wildcard that httpwwwdyndnsorg
supports When using wildcard you simply enter yourhostdyndnsorg in the
Host field in Menu 11 Configure Dynamic DNS
12 Can the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA handle IPSec packets sent by the
IPSec gateway
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA can handle IPSec ESP Tunneling mode We
know when packets go through SUA SUA will change the source IP address
and source port for the host To pass IPSec packets SUA must understand
the ESP packet with protocol number 50 replace the source IP address of the
IPSec gateway to the routers WAN IP address However SUA should not
change the source port of the UDP packets which are used for key
managements Because the remote gateway checks this source port during
connections the port thus is not allowed to be changed
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
14
13 How do I setup my P-660HW-Dx v2 for routing IPSec packets over
SUA
For outgoing IPSec tunnels no extra setting is required
For forwarding the inbound IPSec ESP tunnel A Default server set is required
You could configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding -gt Default Server Setup
It is because SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users So to make an internal server
for outside access we must specify the service port and the LAN IP of this
server in Web configurator Thus SUA is able to forward the incoming packets
to the requested service behind SUA and the outside users access the server
using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address So we have to configure the
internal IPsec client as a default server (unspecified service port) when it acts
a server gateway
14 What is Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping allocates the bandwidth to WAN dynamically and aims at
boosting the efficiency of the bandwidth If there are serveral VCs in the
P-660HW-Dx v2 but only one VC activated at one time the P-660HW-Dx v2
allocates all the Bandwidth to the VC and the VC gets full bandwidth If another
VCs are activated later the bandwidth is yield to other VCs after ward
15 Why do we perform traffic shaping in the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 must manage traffic fairly and provide bandwidth
allocation for different sorts of applications such as voice video and data All
applications have their own natural bit rate Large data transactions have a
fluctuating natural bit rate The P-660HW-Dx v2 is able to support variable
traffic among different virtual connections Certain traffic may be discarded if
the virtual connection experiences congestion Traffic shaping defines a set of
actions taken by the P-660HW-Dx v2 to avoid congestion traffic shaping takes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
15
measures to adapt to unpredictable fluctuations in traffic flows and other
problems among virtual connections
16 What do the parameters (PCR SCR MBS) mean
Traffic shaping parameters (PCR SCR MBS) can be set in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt ATM Setup
Peak Cell Rate(PCR) The maximum bandwidth allocated to this connection
The VC connection throughput is limited by PCR
Sustainable Cell Rate(SCR) The least guaranteed bandwidth of a VC
When there are multi-VCs on the same line the VC throughput is guaranteed
by SCR
Maximum Burst Size(MBS) The amount of cells transmitted through this
VC at the Peak Cell Rate before yielding to other VCs Total bandwidth of the
line is dedicated to single VC if there is only one VC on the line However as
the other VC asking the bandwidth the MBS defines the maximum number of
cells transmitted via this VC with Peak Cell rate before yielding to other VCs
The P-660HW-Dx v2 holds the parameters for shaping the traffic among its
virtual channels If you do not need traffic shaping please set SCR = 0 MBS =
0 and PCR as the maximum value according to the line rate (for example 23
Mbps line rate will result PCR as 5424 cellsec)
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
Constant bit rate(CBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that requires
the user to determine a fixed bandwidth requirement at the time the connection
is set up so that the data can be sent in a steady stream CBR service is often
used when transmitting fixed-rate uncompressed video
Unspecified bit rate(UBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that does
not guarantee any throughput levels and uses only available bandwidth UBR
is often used when transmitting data that can tolerate delays such as e-mail
Variable bit rate(VBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that allows
users to specify a throughput capacity (ie a peak rate) and a sustained rate
but data is not sent evenly You can select VBR for bursty traffic and
bandwidth sharing with other applications It contains two subclasses
Variable bit rate nonreal time (VBR-nRT)
Variable bit rate real time (VBR-RT)
18 What is content filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
16
Internet Content filter allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies
tailored to your needs Content filter gives you the ability to block web sites that
contain key words (that you specify) in the URL You can set a schedule for
when the P-660HW-Dx v2 performs content filtering You can also specify
trusted IP Addresses on LAN for which the P-660HW-Dx v2 will not perform
content filtering You can configure the details about it in Web Configurator
Advanced setup Security -gt Content Filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
17
ADSL FAQ
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems
ADSL provides a dedicated service over a single telephone line cable
modems offer a dedicated service over a shared media While cable modems
have greater downstream bandwidth capabilities (up to 30 Mbps) that
bandwidth is shared among all users on a line and will therefore vary perhaps
dramatically as more users in a neighborhood get online at the same time
Cable modem upstream traffic will in many cases be slower than ADSL either
because the particular cable modem is inherently slower or because of rate
reductions caused by contention for upstream bandwidth slots The big
difference between ADSL and cable modems however is the number of lines
available to each There are no more than 12 million homes passed today that
can support two-way cable modem transmissions and while the figure also
grows steadily it will not catch up with telephone lines for many years
Additionally many of the older cable networks are not capable of offering a
return channel consequently such networks will need significant upgrading
before they can offer high bandwidth services
2 What is the expected throughput
In our test we can get about 16Mbps data rate on 15Kft using the 26AWG
loop The shorter the loop the better the throughput is
3 What is the microfilter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up
You can see the DSL LED Green on the P-660HW-Dx v2s front panel is on
when the ADSL physical layer is up
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL
Depending on the line quality the P-660HW-Dx v2 uses Fall Back and Fall
Forward to automatically adjust the date rate
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
18
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing
Though the LLC-based multiplexing can carry multiple protocols over a single
VC it requires extra header information to identify the protocol being carried
on the virtual circuit (VC) The VC-based multiplexing needs a separate VC for
carrying each protocol but it does not need the extra headers Therefore the
VC-based multiplexing is more efficient
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics
You can use the following CI commands to check the ADSL line
statistics
CIgt wan adsl perfdata
CIgt wan adsl status
CIgt wan adsl linedata far
CIgt wan adsl linedata near
You can also do it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Diagnostic -gt DSL Line -gt DSL Status
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector
The signaling pins on the P-660HW-Dx v2s ADSL connector are pin 3 and pin
4 The middle two pins for a RJ11 cable
9 What is triple play
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
19
More and more TelcoISPs are providing three kinds of services (VoIP Video
and Internet) over one existing ADSL connection
The different services (such as video VoIP and Internet access) require
different Qulity of Service
The high priority is Voice (VoIP) data
The Medium priority is Video (IPTV) data
The low priority is internet access such as ftp etc hellip
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus you can configure each PVC separately to assign different
QoS to different application
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
20
Firewall FAQ
General
1 What is a network firewall
A firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control
policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to
protect a trusted network from an untrusted network The firewall can be
thought of two mechanisms One to block the traffic and the other to permit
traffic
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure
The P-660HW-Dx v2 is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks such as Ping of Death SYN Flood LAND
attack IP Spoofing etc It also uses stateful packet inspection to determine if
an inbound connection is allowed through the firewall to the private LAN The
P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Network Address Translation (NAT) which
translates the private local addresses to one or multiple public addresses This
adds a level of security since the clients on the private LAN are invisible to the
Internet
3 What are the basic types of firewalls
Conceptually there are three types of firewalls
1 Packet Filtering Firewall
2 Application-level Firewall
3 Stateful Inspection Firewall
Packet Filtering Firewalls generally make their decisions based on the header
information in individual packets These headers information include the
source destination addresses and ports of the packets
Application-level Firewalls generally are hosts running proxy servers which
permit no traffic directly between networks and which perform logging and
auditing of traffic passing through them A proxy server is an application
gateway or circuit-level gateway that runs on top of general operating system
such as UNIX or Windows NT It hides valuable data by requiring users to
communicate with secure systems by mean of a proxy A key drawback of this
device is performance
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
21
Stateful Inspection Firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against
defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP
address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the
integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols The flexible
nature of Stateful Inspection firewalls generally provides the best speed and
transparency however they may lack the granular application level access
control or caching that some proxies support
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2
1 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall inspects packets contents and IP
headers It is applicable to all protocols that understands data in the
packet is intended for other layers from network layer up to the
application layer
2 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall performs stateful inspection It takes into
account the state of connections it handles so that for example a
legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request
for that packet and allowed in Conversely an incoming packet
masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be
blocked
3 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall uses session filtering ie smart rules
that enhance the filtering process and control the network session
rather than control individual packets in a session
4 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall is fast It uses a hashing function to
search the matched session cache instead of going through every
individual rule for a packet
5 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall provides email service to notify you for
routine reports and when alerts occur
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet filtering and
NAT built-in
With the spectacular growth of the Internet and online access companies that
do business on the Internet face greater security threats Although packet filter
and NAT restrict access to particular computers and networks however for
the other companies this security may be insufficient because packets filters
typically cannot maintain session state Thus for greater security a firewall is
considered
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a
connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable
a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
22
There are four types of DoS attacks
1 Those that exploits bugs in a TCPIP implementation such as Ping of
Death and Teardrop
2 Those that exploits weaknesses in the TCPIP specification such as
SYN Flood and LAND Attacks
3 Brute-force attacks that flood a network with useless data such as
Smurf attack
4 IP Spoofing
7 What is Ping of Death attack
Ping of Death uses a PING utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the
maximum 65535 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification The oversize
packet is then sent to an unsuspecting system Systems may crash hang or
reboot
8 What is Teardrop attack
Teardrop attack exploits weakness in the reassemble of the IP packet
fragments As data is transmitted through a network IP packets are often
broken up into smaller chunks Each fragment looks like the original packet
except that it contains an offset field The Teardrop program creates a series of
IP fragments with overlapping offset fields When these fragments are
reassembled at the destination some systems will crash hang or reboot
9 What is SYN Flood attack
SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each
packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response While the
targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK it queues up all
outstanding SYN-ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue
SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when
an internal timer (which is set a relatively long intervals) terminates the TCP
three-way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all
incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users
10 What is LAND attack
In a LAN attack hackers flood SYN packets to the network with a spoofed
source IP address of the targeted system This makes it appear as if the host
computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the
target system tries to respond to itself
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
23
11 What is Brute-force attack
A Brute-force attack such as Smurf attack targets a feature in the IP
specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting to quickly flood the
target network with useless data A Smurf hacker flood a destination IP
address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network the router will
broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network If there
are numerous hosts this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request
packet the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the intermediary
network but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address
known as the victim network This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all
available bandwidth making communications impossible
12 What is IP Spoofing attack
Many DoS attacks also use IP Spoofing as part of their attack IP Spoofing
may be used to break into systems to hide the hackers identity or to magnify
the effect of the DoS attack IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain
unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking
that the communications are coming from within the trusted network To
engage in IP Spoofing a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it
appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed
through the router or firewall
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
There are two default ACLs pre-configured in the P-660HW-Dx v2 one allows
all connections from LAN to WAN and the other blocks all connections from
WAN to LAN except of the DHCP packets
Configuration
1 How do I configure the firewall
You can use the Web Configurator to configure the firewall for P-660HW-Dx v2
By factory default if you connect your PC to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 you can access Web Configurator via bdquohttp19216811‟
Note Donrsquot forget to type in the Administrator Password
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall
There are several ways to protect others from touching the settings of your
firewall
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
24
1 Change the default Administrator password since it is required when
setting up the firewall
2 Limit who can access to your P-660HW-Dx v2‟s Web Configurator or
CLI You can enter the IP address of the secured LAN host in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt
[Service] -gtSecured Client IP to allow special access to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
The default value in this field is 0000 which means you do not care which
host is trying to telnet your P-660HW-Dx v2 or accessthe Web
Configurator of
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN
There are four reasons that WWWTelnet from WAN is blocked
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable Telnet from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow WWWTelnet connection
from WAN The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
WWW (For accessing Web Configurator)
Source IP= Remote trusted host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP80
Action=Forward
TELNET (For accessing Command Line Interface)
Source IP= Telnet Client host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP23
Action=Forward
(2)You have disabled WWWTelnet service in Web Configurator Advanced
setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
25
(3) WWWTelnet service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host
entered in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote
MGNT
(4)A filter set which blocks WWWTelnet from WAN is applied to WAN node
You can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using FTP over
WAN
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable FTP from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow FTP connection from WAN
The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
Source IP= FTP host
Destination IP= P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP
Service= FTP TCP21 TCP20
Action=Forward
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
26
(2) You have disabled FTP service in Web Configurator Advanced setup
Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(3) FTP service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host entered
in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(4) A filter set which blocks FTP from WAN is applied to WAN node You
can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
Log and Alert
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the firewall log immediately when the packet
matches a firewall rule The log for Default Firewall Policy (LAN to WAN WAN
to LAN WAN to WAN) is generated automatically with factory default setting
but you can change it in Web Configurator
2 What does the log show to us
The log supports up to 128 entries There are 5 columns for each entry Please
see the example shown below
3 How do I view the firewall log
All logs generated in P-660HW-Dx v2 including firewall logs IPSec logs
system logs are migrated to centralized logs So you can view firewall logs in
Centralized logs Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs
-gtView Log
The log keeps 128 entries the new entries will overwrite the old entries when
the log has over 128 entries
Before you can view firewall logs there are two steps you need to do
(1) Enable log function in Centralized logs setup via either one of the following
methods
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
27
Web configuration Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log
Settings check Access Control and Attacks options depending on
your real situation
CI command sys logs category [access | attack]
(2) Enable log function in firewall default policy or in firewall rules
After the above two steps you can view firewall logs via
Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gtView
Log
View the log by CI command sys logs disp
You can also view Centralized logs via mail or syslog please configure mail
server or Unix Syslog server in Web configuration Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the alert when an attack is detected by the
firewall and sends it via Email So to send the alert you must configure the
mail server and Email address using Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings You can also specify how frequently
you want to receive the alert in it
5 What is the difference between the log and alert
A log entry is just added to the log inside the P-660HW-Dx v2 and e-mailed
together with all other log entries at the scheduled time as configured An alert
is e-mailed immediately after an attacked is detected
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
28
Wireless FAQ
General FAQ
1 What is a Wireless LAN
Wireless LANs provide all the functionality of wired LANs without the need for
physical connections (wires) Data is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier
and transmitted through the ether Typical bit-rates are 11Mbps and 54Mbps
although in practice data throughput is half of this Wireless LANs can be
formed simply by equipping PCs with wireless NICs If connectivity to a wired
LAN is required an Access Point (AP) is used as a bridging device APs are
typically located close to the centre of the wireless client population
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN
Mobility Wireless LAN systems can provide LAN users with access to
real-time information anywhere in their organization This mobility supports
productivity and service opportunities not possible with wired networks
Installation Speed and Simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be
fast and easy and can eliminate the need to pull cable through walls and
ceilings
Installation Flexibility Wireless technology allows the network to go where
wire cannot go
Reduced Cost-of-Ownership While the initial investment required for
wireless LAN hardware can be higher than the cost of wired LAN hardware
overall installation expenses and life-cycle costs can be significantly lower
Long-term cost benefits are greatest in dynamic environments requiring
frequent moves and changes
Scalability Wireless LAN systems can be configured in a variety of topologies
to meet the needs of specific applications and installations Configurations are
easily changed and range from peer-to-peer networks suitable for a small
number of users to full infrastructure networks of thousands of users that
enable roaming over a broad area
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN
The speed of Wireless LAN is still relatively slower than wired LAN The setup
cost of Wireless LAN is relative high because the equipment cost including
access point and PCMCIA Wireless LAN card is higher than hubs and CAT 5
cables
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
29
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks
Airports hotels and even coffee shops like Starbucks are deploying 80211
networks so people can wirelessly surf the Internet with their laptops
5 What is an Access Point
The AP (access point also known as a base station) is the wireless server that
with an antenna and a wired Ethernet connection that broadcasts information
using radio signals AP typically acts as a bridge for the clients It can pass
information to wireless LAN cards that have been installed in computers or
laptops allowing those computers to connect to the campus network and the
Internet without wires
6 Whatrsquos the difference between IEEE80211abg
The IEEE 80211 is a wireless LAN industry standard and the objective of
IEEE 80211 is to make sure that different manufactures wireless LAN devices
can communicate to each other Below is a brief comparison for the
IEEE80211 abg
Publish
Time
Frequency
Band(GHZ)
Data Rate(Mbps) Compatibility
IEEE80211a 1999 UNII Band
515~5825
691218243648
54
Only work with
80211a
devices
IEEE80211b 1999 ISM Band
24~24835
125511 -
IEEE80211g 2001 ISM Band
24~24835
691218243648
54
Backward
compatible with
80211b
devices
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
Yes As long as the products comply to the same IEEE 80211 standard The
Wi-Fi logo is used to define 80211b compatible products Wi-Fi5 is a
compatibility standard for 80211a products running in the 5GHz band
8 What is Wi-Fi
The Wi-Fi logo signifies that a product is interoperable with wireless
networking equipment from other vendors A Wi-Fi logo product has been
tested and certified by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA)
The Socket Wireless LAN Card is Wi-Fi certified and that means that it will
work (interoperate) with any brand of Access Point that is also Wi-Fi certified
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band
Various spread spectrum radio communication applications use the 24 GHz
band This includes WLAN systems (not necessarily of the type IEEE
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
30
80211b) cordless phones wireless medical telemetry equipment and
Bluetoothtrade short-range wireless applications which include connecting
printers to computers and connecting modems or hands-free kits to mobile
phones
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device
Any time devices are operated in the same frequency band there is the
potential for interference
Both the 80211bg and Bluetooth devices occupy the same24-to-2483-GHz
unlicensed frequency range-the same band But a Bluetooth device would not
interfere with other 80211 devices much more than another 80211 device
would interefere While more collisions are possible with the introduction of a
Bluetooth device they are also possible with the introduction of another 80211
device or a new 24 GHz cordless phone for that matter But BlueTooth
devices are usually low-power so the effects that a Bluetooth device may have
on an 80211 network if any arent far-reaching
11 Can radio signals pass through wall
Transmitting through a wall is possible depending upon the material used in its
construction In general metals and substances with a high water content do
not allow radio waves to pass through Metals reflect radio waves and concrete
attenuates radio waves The amount of attenuation suffered in passing through
concrete will be a function of its thickness and amount of metal re-enforcement
used
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference among WLAN
products
Factors of interference
(1) Obstacles walls ceilings furniturehellip etc
(2) Building Materials metal door aluminum studs
(3) Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors
Solution
(1) Minimizing the number of walls and ceilings
(2) Antenna is positioned for best reception
(3) Keep WLAN products away from electrical devices eg microwaves
monitors electric motorshellip etc
(4) Add additional APs if necessary
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN
WLANs are generally privately owned wireless systems that are deployed in a
corporation warehouse hospital or educational campus setting Data rates
are high and there are no per-packet charges for data transmission
WWANs are generally publicly shared data networks designed to provide
coverage in metropolitan areas and along traffic corridors WWANs are owned
by a service provider or carrier Data rates are low and charges are based on
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
31
usage Specialized applications are characteristically designed around short
burst messaging
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage any
hardware
Yes it will not harm the hardware but the module will not be detected and
work after inserting to the slot You need to reboot the router to initialize the
module
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
The wireless security modes supported on P-660HW-Dx v2 are Static
WEP WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK and WPA2
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
It supports IEEE 80211bgg+ standard
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering
Yes it supports up to 32 MAC Address filtering
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption
Yes it means that the AP on P-660HW-Dx v2 will automatically decelerate
when devices move beyond the optimal range or other interference is present
If the device moves back within the range of a higher-speed transmission the
connection will automatically speed up again Rate shifting is a physical-layer
mechanism transparent to the user and the upper layers of the protocol stack
Advanced FAQ
1 What is Ad Hoc mode
A wireless network consists of a number of stations without using an access
point or any connection to a wired network
2 What is Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure mode implies connectivity to a wired communications
infrastructure If such connectivity is required the Access Points must be used
to connect to the wired LAN backbone Wireless clients have their
configurations set for infrastructure mode in order to utilise access points
relaying
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area
This depends on the surrounding terrain the diameter of the client population
and the number of clients If an area is large with dispersed pockets of
populations then extension points can be used for extend coverage
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
32
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (DSSS)
DSSS spreads its signal continuously over a wide frequency band DSSS
maps the information bearing bit-pattern at the sending station into a higher
data rate bit sequence using a chipping code The chipping code (also known
as processing gain) introduces redundancy which allows data recovery if
certain bit errors occur during transmission The FCC rules the minimum
processing gain should be 10 typical systems use processing gains of 20
IEEE 80211b specifies the use of DSSS
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (FHSS)
FHSS uses a narrowband carrier which hops through a predefined sequence
of several frequencies at a specific rate This avoids problems with fixed
channel narrowband noise and simple jamming Both transmitter and receiver
must have their hopping sequences synchronized to create the effect of a
single logical channel To an unsynchronised receiver an FHSS transmission
appears to be short-duration impulse noise 80211 may use FHSS or DSSS
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
No Provided the antenna is optimally designed for 24GHz or 5GHz operation
WLAN NICs often include an internal antenna which may provide sufficient
reception
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range
This frequency range has been set aside by the FCC and is generally labeled
the ISM band A few years ago Apple and several other large corporations
requested that the FCC allow the development of wireless networks within this
frequency range What we have today is a protocol and system that allows for
unlicensed use of radios within a prescribed power level The ISM band is
populated by Industrial Scientific and Medical devices that are all low power
devices but can interfere with each other
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID)
SSID is a configurable identification that allows clients to communicate to the
appropriate base station With proper configuration only clients that are
configured with the same SSID can communicate with base stations having
the same SSID SSID from a security point of view acts as a simple single
shared password between base stations and clients
9 What is an ESSID
ESSID stands for Extended Service Set Identifier and identifies the wireless
LAN The ESSID of the mobile device must match the ESSID of the AP to
communicate with the AP The ESSID is a 32-character maximum string and is
case-sensitive
Security FAQ
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Points
radio link
To secure the date across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Point‟s radio link we
could select any one of the security mode Static 64128256 bit WEP
WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK WPA2
2 What is WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security mechanism defined within the
80211 standard and designed to make the security of the wireless medium
equal to that of a cable (wire) WEP data encryption was designed to prevent
access to the network by intruders and to prevent the capture of wireless
LAN traffic through eavesdropping WEP allows the administrator to define a
set of respective Keys for each wireless network user based on a Key
String passed through the WEP encryption algorithm Access is denied by
anyone who does not have an assigned key Note WEP has shown to have
fundamental flaws in its key generation processing
3 What is WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN You can refer to
the User Guide for more information about it
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP
40 bit WEP and 64 bit WEP are the same encryption level and can interoperate
The lower level of WEP encryption uses a 40 bit (10 Hex character) as secret
key (set by user) and a 24 bit Initialization Vector (not under user control)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
34
(40+24=64) Some vendors refer to this level of WEP as 40 bit others as 64
bit
5 What is a WEP key
A WEP key is a user defined string of characters used to encrypt and decrypt
data
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP
No 128-bit WEP will not communicate with 64-bit WEP Although 128 bit WEP
also uses a 24 bit Initialization Vector but it uses a 104 bit as secret key Users
need to use the same encryption level in order to make a connection
7 Can the SSID be encrypted
No WEP only encrypts the data packets not the 80211 management
packetsThe SSID is in the beacon and probe management messages and
SSID goes over the air in clear text This makes obtaining the SSID easy by
sniffing 80211 wireless traffic
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff the SSID
Many APs by default have broadcasting the SSID turned on Sniffers typically
will find the SSID in the broadcast beacon packets Turning off the broadcast of
SSID in the beacon message (a common practice) does not prevent getting
the SSID since the SSID is sent in the clear in the probe message when a
client associates to an AP a sniffer just has to wait for a valid user to associate
to the network to see the SSID
9 What are Insertion Attacks
The insertion attacks are based on placing unauthorized devices on the
wireless network without going through a security process and review
10 What is Wireless Sniffer
An attacker can sniff and capture legitimate traffic Many of the sniffer tools for
Ethernet are based on capturing the first part of the connection session where
the data would typically include the username and password An intruder can
masquerade as that user by using this captured information An intruder who
monitors the wireless network can apply this same attack principle on the
wireless
11 What is OTIST How do I use it
OTIST is acronym for ZyXEL‟s bdquoOne Touch Intelligent Security Technology‟
It enables P-660HW-Dx v2 and ZyXEL‟s OTIST supported Wireless adapters
to establish connections of the WPA-PSK security mode automatically with
just one touch at the reset button on rear panel
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
35
To use this function on P-660HW-Dx v2 you could press the reset button on
P-660HW-Dx v2 for 1~5 seconds the OTIST is actived The P-660HW-Dx v2
will enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA-PSK automatically if no
WLAN security has been set The default setup key for OTIST is bdquo01234567‟
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
36
Application Notes
General Application Notes
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode
Setup your workstation
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
If the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet that means only
the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as an ADSL bridge
modem to connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account
and limit only one computer to access the Internet
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
To connect your computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN port the computer
must have an Ethernet adapter card installed For connecting a single
computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2 we use a Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
In most cases the IP address of the computer is assigned by the ISP
dynamically so you have to configure the computer as a DHCP client which
obtains the IP from the ISP using DHCP protocol The ISP may also provide
the gateway DNS via DHCP if they are available Otherwise please enter the
static IP addresses for all that the ISP gives to you in the network TCPIP
settings For Windows we check the option Obtain an IP address
automatically in its TCPIP setup please see the example shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
37
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
bridge mode We will use Web Configurator to guide you through the related
menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as bridge mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
(2)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
38
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For example
LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
(2) Turn off DHCP Server and configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 in
Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN We use 19216811 as
the LAN IP for P-660HW-Dx v2 in this case
Step 1 Disactive DHCP Server and apply it
Step 2 Assign an IP to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx v2 eg
19216811
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to install an Internet sharing device like
a router In this case we use the P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
Connect the LAN ports of all computers to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 using Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
Since the P-660HW-Dx v2 is set to DHCP server as default so you need only
to configure the workstations as the DHCP clients in the networking settings In
this case the IP address of the computer is assigned by the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 can also provide the DNS to the clients via DHCP if it is
available For this setup in Windows we check the option Obtain an IP
address automatically in its TCPIP setup Please see the example shown
below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
39
Set up your P-660HW-Dx v2 under routing mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
Routing mode for routing traffic We will use Web Configurator to guide you
through the related menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as routing mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For
example LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
IP Address
Assignment
Set to Dynamic if the ISP provides the IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2
dynamically Otherwise set to Static and enter the IP in the IP
Address field
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
40
(2) Configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 and the DHCP settings in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
What is DHCP Relay
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In addition to the
DHCP server feature the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports the DHCP relay function
When it is configured as DHCP server it assigns the IP addresses to the LAN
clients When it is configured as DHCP relay it is responsible for forwarding
the requests and responses negotiating between the DHCP clients and the
server See figure 1
Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
We could set the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay by the following command
in CLI
Ip dhcp enif0 mode relay
Ip dhcp enif0 relay server [Server IP Address]
4 SUA Notes
Tested SUANAT Applications (eg Cu-SeeMe ICQ NetMeeting)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
41
Introduction
Generally SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users However some applications
such as Cu-SeeMe and ICQ will need to connect to the local user behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 In such case a SUA server must be configured to forward
the incoming packets to the true destination behind SUA After the required
server are configured in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding the internal server or client applications can be accessed
by using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP Address
SUA Supporting Table
The following are the required Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding for the various applications running SUA mode
ZyXEL SUA Supporting Table1
Application
Required Settings in Port Forwarding
PortIP
Outgoing Connection Incoming
Connection
HTTP None 80client IP
FTP None 21client IP
TELNET None 23client IP
(and active Telnet
service from WAN)
POP3 None 110client IP
SMTP None 25client IP
mIRC
None for Chat
For DCC please set
DefaultClient IP
Windows PPTP None 1723client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
42
ICQ 99a None for Chat
For DCC please set
ICQ -gt preference -gt
connections -gt firewall
and set the firewall time
out to 80 seconds in
firewall setting
Defaultclient IP
ICQ 2000b None for Chat None for Chat
ICQ Phone 2000b None 6701client IP
Cornell 11 Cu-SeeMe None 7648client IP
White Pine 312 Cu-SeeMe2 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
White Pine 40 Cu-SeeMe 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
Microsoft NetMeeting 21 amp
3013
None 1720client IP
1503client IP
Cisco IPTV 200 None
RealPlayer G2 None
VDOLive None
Quake1064 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeII2305 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeIII105 beta None
StartCraft 6112client IP
Quick Time 40 None
pcAnywhere 80 None
5631client IP
5632client IP
22client IP
IPsec (ESP tunneling mode) None (one client only) DefaultClient
Microsoft Messenger Service
30 6901client IP 6901client IP
Microsoft Messenger Service
46 47 50hellip
(none UPnP)6
None for Chat File
transfer Video and Voice
None for Chat File
transfer Video and
Voice
Net2Phone None 6701client IP
Network Time Protocol (NTP) None 123 server IP
Win2k Terminal Server None 3389server IP
Remote Anything None 3996 - 4000client IP
Virtual Network Computing None 5500client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
43
(VNC) 5800client IP
5900client IP
AIM (AOL Instant Messenger) None for Chat and IM None for Chat and
IM
e-Donkey None 4661 - 4662client IP
POLYCOM Video
Conferencing None Defaultclient IP
iVISTA 41 None 80server IP
Microsoft Xbox Live7 None NA 1 Since SUA enables your LAN to appear as a single computer to the Internet
it is not possible to configure similar servers on the same LAN behind SUA 2 Because White Pine Cu-SeeMe uses dedicate ports (port 7648 amp port 24032)
to transmit and receive data therefore only one local Cu-SeeMe is allowed
within the same LAN 3 In SUA mode only one local NetMeeting user is allowed because the
outsiders can not distinguish between local users using the same internet IP 4 Certain Quake servers do not allow multiple users to login using the same
unique IP so only one Quake user will be allowed in this case Moreover
when a Quake server is configured behind SUA P-660HW-Dx v2 will not be
able to provide information of that server on the internet 5 Quake II has the same limitations as that of Quake I 6 P-660HW-Dx v2 supports MSN Messenger 46 47 50hellip video voice
pass-through NAT In addition for the Windows OS supported UPnP
(Universal Plug and Play) such as Windows XP and Windows ME UPnP
supported in P-660HW-Dx v2 is an alternative solution to pass through MSN
Messenger video voice traffic For more detail please refer to UPnP
application note 7 P-660HW-Dx v2 support Microsoft Xbox Live with factory default
configuration
Configurations
For example if the workstation operating Cu-SeeMe has an IP of 192168134
then the default SUA server must be set to 192168134 The peer Cu-SeeMe
user can reach this workstation by using P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
44
which can be obtained from Web Configurator
Configure an Internal Server behind SUA
Introduction
If you wish you can make internal servers (eg Web ftp or mail server)
accessible for outside users even though SUA makes your LAN appear as a
single machine to the outside world A service is identified by the port number
Also since you need to specify the IP address of a server behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 a server must have a fixed IP address and not be a DHCP
client whose IP address potentially changes each time P-660HW-Dx v2 is
powered on
In addition to the servers for specific services SUA supports a default server
A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for is
forwarded to the default server If the default server is not defined the service
request is simply discarded
Configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
45
To make a server visible to the outside world specify the port number of the
service and the inside address of the server in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The outside users can access
the local server using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address which can be
obtained from Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information
For example
Configuring an internal Web server for outside access (suppose the
Server IP Address is 192168110)
(1) Fill in the service name and server IP Address press button bdquoAdd‟
(2) If add successfully the Web Configurator will display message
bdquoConfiguration updated successfully‟ at the bottom You can see the port
forwarding rule on the same page the default port for Web Server is 80
(3) If you want to change the port for Web Server you could press button
bdquoModify‟ on corresponding rule then modify and apply it
Default port numbers for some services
Service Port Number
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
46
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
Configure a PPTP server behind SUA
Introduction
PPTP is a tunneling protocol defined by the PPTP forum that allows PPP
packets to be encapsulated within Internet Protocol (IP) packets and
forwarded over any IP network including the Internet itself
In order to run the Windows 9x PPTP client you must be able to establish an
IP connection with a tunnel server such as the Windows NT Server 40
Remote Access Server
Windows Dial-Up Networking uses the Internet standard Point-to-Point (PPP)
to provide a secure optimized multiple-protocol network connection over
dial-up telephone lines All data sent over this connection can be encrypted
and compressed and multiple network level protocols (TCPIP NetBEUI and
IPX) can be run correctly Windows NT Domain Login level security is
preserved even across the Internet
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
47
Window98 PPTP Client Internet NT RAS Server Protocol Stack
PPTP appears as new modem type (Virtual Private Networking Adapter) that
can be selected when setting up a connection in the Dial-Up Networking folder
The VPN Adapter type does not appear elsewhere in the system Since PPTP
encapsulates its data stream in the PPP protocol the VPN requires a second
dial-up adapter This second dial-up adapter for VPN is added during the
installation phase of the Upgrade in addition to the first dial-up adapter that
provides PPP support for the analog or ISDN modem
The PPTP is supported in Windows NT and Windows 98 already For
Windows 95 it needs to be upgraded by the Dial-Up Networking 12 upgrade
Configuration
This application note explains how to establish a PPTP connection with a
remote private network in the P-660HW-Dx v2 SUA case In ZyNOS all PPTP
packets can be forwarded to the internal PPTP Server (WinNT server) behind
SUA The port number of the PPTP has to be entered in the Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding on
P-660HW-Dx v2 to forward to the appropriate private IP address of Windows
NT server
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
48
Example
The following example shows how to dial to an ISP via the P-660HW-Dx v2
and then establish a tunnel to a private network There will be three items that
you need to set up for PPTP application these are PPTP server (WinNT)
PPTP client (Win9x) and the P-660HW-Dx v2
(1) PPTP server setup (WinNT)
Add the VPN service from Control Panel -gtNetwork
Add an user account for PPTP logged on user
Enable RAS port
Select the network protocols from RAS such as IPX TCPIP NetBEUI
Set the Internet gateway to P-660HW-Dx v2
(2) PPTP client setup (Win9x)
Add one VPN connection from Dial-Up Networking by entering the
correct username amp password and the IP address of the P-660HW-Dx
v2s Internet IP address for logging to NT RAS server
Set the Internet gateway to the router that is connecting to ISP
(3) P-660HW-Dx v2 setup
Before making a VPN connection from Win9x to WinNT server you
need to connect P-660HW-Dx v2 router to your ISP first
Enter the IP address of the PPTP server (WinNT server) and the
port number for PPTP as shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
49
Select service name as bdquoPPTP‟ fill in the Server IP Address then press button
bdquoAdd‟
When you have finished the above settings you can ping to the remote Win9x
client from WinNT This ping command is used to demonstrate that remote
the Win9x can be reached across the Internet If the Internet connection
between two LANs is achievable you can place a VPN call from the remote
Win9x client
For example Cping 203661132
When a dial-up connection to ISP is established a default gateway is assigned
to the router traffic through that connection Therefore the output below shows
the default gateway of the Win9x client after the dial-up connection has been
established
Before making a VPN connection from the Win9x client to the NT server you
need to know the exact Internet IP address that the ISP assigns to
P-660HW-Dx v2 router in SUA mode and enter this IP address in the VPN
dial-up dialog box You can check this Internet IP address from PNC Monitor or
S Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information If the Internet IP address
is a fixed IP address provided by ISP in SUA mode then you can always use
this IP address for reaching the VPN server
In the following example the IP address 1401131225 is dynamically
assigned by ISP You must enter this IP address in the VPN Server dialog box
for reaching the PPTP server After the VPN link is established you can start
the network protocol application such as IP IPX and NetBEUI
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
50
5 Using Full Feature NAT
When P-660HW-Dx v2 is in Routing mode you can select NAT Option as
Full Feature in Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit
Key Settings
Field Options Description
Network Address
Translation
Full Feature
When you select this option you can select
Address Mapping Set Number 1~8 in the
pull-down menu on the right
None NAT is disabled when you select this option
SUA Only
When you select this option this remote node
will use default SUA Address Mapping Set
You can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat
lookup 255‟ It‟s a read-only sets with two
rules Many-to-One and server mapping
Select Full Feature when you require other
mapping types
Configuring NAT
Address Mapping Sets and NAT Server Sets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
51
The P-660HW-Dx v2 has 8 remote nodes and so allows you to configure 8
NAT Address Mapping Sets You must specify which NAT Address Mapping
Set (1~8) to use in the remote node when you select Full Feature NAT
You can edit 10 rules for each Address Mapping Set You can edit the rules for
Address Mapping Sets 1 in Web Configurator The other Address Mapping
Sets 2~8 can only be configured in CLI (Command Line Interface)
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports We
can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Port Forwarding To use the NAT server sets you‟ve configured a Server
rule must be set up inside the NAT Address Mapping set Please see NAT
Server Sets for further information on how to apply it
When you select SUA Only the P-660HW-Dx v2 will use a default SUA
Address Mapping set for it It has two rules Many-to-One and Server You
can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat lookup 255‟
Please note that the fields in this menu are read-only However the settings of
the rule set 2 can be modified in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The following table explains the fields in this
above screen
Field Description OptionExample
set This is sequence number for Address Mapping Sets 255 for SUA
Internal
Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA)
0000 for the
Many-to-One type
Local End
IP
This is the starting local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0000 and the
End IP is 255255255255
255255255255
Global Start
IP
This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you
have a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start
IP
0000
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
52
Global End
IP This is the ending global IP address (IGA) NA
Type This is the NAT mapping types Many-to-One and
Server
Here we‟ll guide you to configure Address Mapping Sets from Web
Configurator and CLI (Since in Web Configurator we can only edit the rules
for Address Mapping Sets 1 The other Address Mapping Sets 2~8 can only
be configured in CLI)
Now lets begin with Web Configurator
Firstly let‟s come to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping
This menu is for Address Mapping Set 1 you can edit 10 Address Mapping
Rules for Set 1 You can edit or remove a rule by clicking the two buttons on
the rule table
Click the bdquoEditrsquo Button on the rule 1 then you can enter the window in which
you can edit an individual rule and configure the Mapping Type Local and
Global StartEnd IPs
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
53
The following table describes the fields in this screen
Field Description OptionExample
Type You can select one of the five mapping types from the
pull-down menu
1 One-to-One
2 Many-to-One
3 Many-to-Many
Overload
4 Many-to-Many No
Overload
5 Server
Local
IP
Start This is the starting local IP address (ILA) 0000
End
This is the ending local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0000 and the
End IP as 255255255255 This field is NA for
One-to-One type
255255255255
Global
IP
Start This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you have
a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start IP 0000
End
This is the ending global IP address (IGA) This
field is NA for One-to-One Many-to-One and Server
types
2001164
Note For all Local and Global IPs the End IP address must begin after the IP
Start address ie you cannot have an End IP address beginning before the
Start IP address
Configure Address Mapping Sets in CLI
Setp 1 Telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 (We suppose the LAN IP Address of
P-660HW-Dx v2 is 19216811)
Step 2 Select one Address Mapping Set (1~8) by command bdquoip nat
addrmap map [map ] [set name]‟ (set name is optional) Suppose we
configure set 2 in the example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
54
Setp 3 Set NAT address mapping rule for the Address Mapping Set you just
configured (Set 2 in this example) by command bdquoip nat addrmap rule [rule]
[insert | edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP] [global start IP] [global
end IP] [server set ]‟ Suppose we set a Many-to-One rule for set 2 by
command bdquoip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 1 192168110 192168120 172111
172111‟
Setp 4 Save the configuration by command bdquoip nat addrmap save‟ You can
apply the Address Mapping Set 2 to remote nodes in Web Configurator when
you select Full Feature NAT See the intire process as follows
Set 5 You can lookup the successfully configured Address Mapping Sets by
command bdquoip nat addrmap disp‟
Key Settings
CI Command Description
ip nat addrmap map [map] [set
name]
Select NAT address mapping set and set mapping set
name but set name is optional
Example
gt ip nat addrmap map 2 Test
ip nat addrmap rule [rule] [insert |
edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP]
[global start IP] [global end IP] [server
set ]
Set NAT address mapping rule If the ldquotyperdquo is not
ldquoinside-serverrdquo then the ldquotyperdquo field will still need a
dummy value like ldquo0rdquo
Type is 0 - 4 = one-to-one many-to-one
many-to-many-overload many-to-many-non overload
inside-server
Example
gt ip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 3 192168110
192168120 172111 172111
ip nat addrmap clear [map] [rule] Clear the selected rule of the set
ip nat addrmap freememory Discard Changes
ip nat addrmap disp Display nat set information
ip nat addrmap save Save settings
ip nat server load [set] Load the server sets of NAT into buffer
ip nat server disp [1] ldquodisp 1rdquo means to display the NAT server set in buffer
if parameter ldquo1rdquo is omitted then it will display all the
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
55
server sets
ip nat server save Save the NAT server set buffer into flash
ip nat server clear [set] Clear the server set [set] must use ldquosaverdquo command
to let it save into flash
ip nat server edit [rule] active Activate the rule [rule] rule number is 1 to 24 the
number 25-36 is for UPNP application
ip nat server edit [rule] svrport ltstart
portgt ltend portgt
Configure the port range from ltstart port gt to ltend
portgt
ip nat server edit [rule] remotehost
ltstart IPgt ltend IPgt
Configure the IP address range of remote host (Leave
it to be default value if you don‟t need this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] leasetime
ltsecondsgt
Configure the lease time (Leave it to be default value if
you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] rulename
ltstringgt
Configure the name of the rule (Leave it to be default
value if you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] forwardip ltIP
addressgt Configure the LAN IP address to be forwarded
ip nat server edit [rule] protocol
ltTCP|UDP|ALLgt
Configure the protocol to be used TCP UDP or ALL
(it must be capital)
NAT Server Sets
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports
(similar to the old SUA menu of before) If you wish you can make inside
servers for different services eg Web or FTP visible to the outside users
even though NAT makes your network appears as a single machine to the
outside world A server is identified by the port number eg Web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21
As an example (see the following figure) if you have a Web server at
192168136 and a FTP server at 192168133 then you need to specify for
port 80 (Web) the server at IP address 192168136 and for port 21 (FTP)
another at IP address 192168133
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
56
Please note that a server can support more than one service eg a server
can provide both FTP and Mail service while another provides only Web
service
The following procedures show how to configure a server behind NAT
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
Step 2 Select the service name from the pull-down menu and fill in the server
Address on bdquoServer IP Address‟ then click button bdquoAdd‟ to save it
Step 3 You could click the button bdquoEdit‟ on the rule to modify the Service name
Server IP Address StartEnd Port
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please
refer RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers
Service Port Number
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol)
1723
Examples
Internet Access Only
Internet Access with an Internal Server
Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
(1) Internet Access Only
In our Internet Access example we only need one rule where all our ILAs map
to one IGA assigned by the ISP You can just use the default SUA NAT or you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
57
could select Full Feature NAT and select an Address Mapping Set with a
Many-to-One Rule See the following figure
(2) Internet Access with an Internal Server
In this case we do exactly as the figure (use the convenient pre-configured
SUA Only set) and also go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
NAT -gt Port Forwarding to specify the Internet Server behind the NAT as
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
58
below
(3) Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
(One-to-One Many-to-One Server Set mapping types are used)
In this case we have 3 IGAs from the ISP We have two very busy internal FTP
servers and also an internal general server for the web and mail In this case
we want to assign the 3 IGAs by the following way using 4 NAT rules
Rule 1 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
Rule 3 (Many-to-One type) to map the other clients to IGA3 (200003)
Rule 4 (Server type) to map a web server and mail server with ILA3
(192168120) to IGA3 Type Server allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types to other machines behind NAT on the LAN
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
59
Step 1 In this case we need to map ILA to more than one IGA therefore we
must choose the Full Feature option from the NAT field in currently active
remote node and assign IGA3 to P-660HW-Dx v2‟s WAN IP Address
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping to begin configuring Address Mapping Set 1 We can see
there are 10 blank rule table that could be configured See the following setup
for the four rules in our case
Rule 1 Setup Select One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 Setup Selecting One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
60
Rule 3 Setup Select Many-to-One type to map the other clients to IGA3
(200003)
Rule 4 Setup Select Server type to map our web server and mail server with
ILA3 (192168120) to IGA3
Menu Network -gt NAT -gt Address Mapping should look as follows now
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
61
Step 3 Now we configure all other incoming traffic to go to our web server and
mail server from Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
(4) Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some mIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address In this case it is better to
use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types thus each
user login to the server using a unique global IP address The following figure
illustrates this
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
62
One rule configured for using Many-to-Many No Overload mapping type is
shown below
We can also do this by configure threeOne-to-One mapping type rules
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
What is DDNS
The DDNS service an IP Registry provides a public central database where
information such as email addresses hostnames IPs etc can be stored and
retrieved This solves the problems if your DNS server uses an IP associated
with dynamic IPs
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to access the internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
must inform the DDNS server the change of this IP so that the server can
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
63
update its IP-to-DNS entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is
updated the DNS name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still
usable
The DDNS servers the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports currently is
WWWDYNDNSORG where you apply the DNS from and update the WAN IP
to
Setup the DDNS
1 Before configuring the DDNS settings in the P-660HW-Dx v2 you must
register an account from the DDNS server such as
WWWDYNDNSORG first After the registration you have a hostname
for your internal server and a password using to update the IP to the
DDNS server
2 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Dynamic DNS
Select Active Dynamic DNS option
Key Settings
Option Description
Service Provider Enter the DDNS server in this field Currently we support
WWWDYNDNSORG
Active Toggle to Yes
Host Name Enter the hostname you subscribe from the above DDNS server
For example zyxelcomtw
User Name Enter the user name that the DDNS server gives to you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
64
Password Enter the password that the DDNS server gives to you
Enable Wildcard
Enter the hostname for the wildcard function that the
WWWDYNDNSORG supports Note that Wildcard option is
available only when the provider is httpwwwdyndnsorg
7 Network Management Using SNMP
ZyXEL SNMP Implementation
ZyXEL currently includes SNMP support in some P-660HW-Dx v2 routers It is
implemented based on the SNMPv1 so it will be able to communicate with
SNMPv1 NMSs Further users can also add ZyXELs private MIB in the NMS
to monitor and control additional system variables The ZyXELs private MIB
tree is shown in figure 3 For SNMPv1 operation ZyXEL permits one
community string so that the router can belong to only one community and
allows trap messages to be sent to only one NMS manager
Some traps are sent to the SNMP manager when anyone of the following
events happens
1 coldStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine coldstarts the trap will be sent after booting
2 warmStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine warmstarts the trap will be sent after booting
3 linkDown (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is down the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
4 linkUp (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is up the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
5 authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215)
When receiving any SNMP get or set requirement with wrong community
this trap is sent to the manager
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
65
6 whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-MIB)
When the system is going to restart (warmstart) the trap will be sent with the
reason of restart before rebooting
(1) For intentional reboot
In some cases (download new files CI command sys reboot ) reboot is
done intentionally And traps with the message System reboot by user will
be sent
(2) For fatal error
System has to reboot for some fatal errors And traps with the message of the
fatal code will be sent
Downloading ZyXELs private MIB
Configure the P-660HW-Dx v2 for SNMP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
66
The SNMP related settings in P-660HW-Dx v2 are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt SNMP The
following steps describe a simple setup procedure for configuring all SNMP
settings
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Get
Community
Enter the correct Get Community This Get Community must match the
Get- and GetNext community requested from the NMS The default is
public
Set
Community
Enter the correct Set Community This Set Community must match the
Set-community requested from the NMS The default is public
Trusted
Host
Enter the IP address of the NMS The P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will only
respond to SNMP messages coming from this IP address If 0000 is
entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will respond to all NMS
managers
Trap
Community
Enter the community name in each sent trap to the NMS This Trap
Community must match what the NMS is expecting The default is
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
67
public
Trap
Destination
Enter the IP address of the NMS that you wish to send the traps to If
0000 is entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will not send trap any
NMS manager
Note You may need to edit a firewall rule to permit SNMP Packets
8 Using syslog
You can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt
Logs -gt Log Settings -gt Syslog logging
Key Settings
Active Select it to active UNIX Syslog
Syslog IP Address Enter the IP address of the UNIX server that you wish to
send the syslog
Log Facility Select from the 7 different local options The log facility lets you
log the message in different server files Refer to your UNIX manual
9 Using IP Alias
What is IP Alias
In a typical environment a LAN router is required to connect two local
networks The P-660HW-Dx v2 can connect three local networks to the ISP or
a remote node we call this function as IP Alias In this case an internal
router is not required For example the network manager can divide the local
network into three networks and connect them to the Internet using
P-660HW-Dx v2s single user account See the figure below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
68
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports three virtual LAN interfaces via its single
physical Ethernet interface The first network can be configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN -gt DHCP Setup The second
and third networks that we call IP Alias 1 and IP Alias 2 can be configured
in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias
There are three internal virtual LAN interfaces for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to route
the packets fromto the three networks correctly They are enif0 for the major
network enif00 for the IP alias 1 and enif01 for the IP alias 2 Therefore
three routes are created in the P-660HW-Dx v2 as shown below when the
three networks are configured If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP is also enabled
the IP pool for the clients can be any of the three networks
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
69
You can edit filter rule to accept or deny LAN packets fromto the IP alias 12
go through the P-660HW-Dx v2 by command in CLI
lan index [index number]
Usage index number =1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt [set]
Usage set= the corresponding filter set number you‟ve configured
lan save
IP Alias Setup
(1) Edit the first network in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
LAN -gt IPDHCP Setup by configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s first LAN IP
address
Key Settings
DHCP
Setup
If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP server is enabled the IP pool for the clients
can be any of the three networks
TCPIP
Setup
Enter the first LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This will create the
first route in the enif0 interface
(2) Edit the second and third networks in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias by
configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s second and third LAN IP addresses
Key Settings
IP Alias 1 Active it and enter the second LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the second route in the enif00 interface
IP Alias 2 Active it and enter the third LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the third route in the enif01 interface
10 Using IP Policy Routing
What is IP Policy Routing (IPPR)
Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router
takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides
a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet
forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator
Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis
prior to the normal routing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
70
traffic among multiple paths For example if a network has both the Internet
and remote node connections we can route the Web packets to the Internet
using one policy and route the FTP packets to the remote LAN using another
policy See the figure below
Use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths
Benefits
Source-Based Routing - Network administrators can use policy-based
routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections
Quality of Service (QoS)- Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the
precedence or TOS (Type of Service) values in the IP header at the periphery
of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic
Cost Savings- IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on
high-bandwidth high-cost path while using low-path for batch traffic
Load Sharing- Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic
among multiple paths
How does the IPPR work
A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet
meets the criteria The action is taken only when all the criteria are met The
criteria include the source address and port IP protocol (ICMP UDP TCP
etc) destination address and port TOS and precedence (fields in the IP
header) and length The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between
interactive and bulk traffic Interactive applications eg Telnet tend to have
short packets while bulk traffic eg file transfer tends to have large packets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
71
The actions that can be taken include routing the packet to a different gateway
(and hence the outgoing interface) and the TOS and precedence fields in the
IP header IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of ZyNOS in style
and in implementation The policies are divided into sets where related
policies are grouped together A use defines the policies before applying them
to an interface or a remote node in the same fashion as the filters There are
12 policy sets with 6 policies in each set
Setup the IP Policy Routing
Setp 1 Set the index of IP routing policy set rule by command bdquoip
policyrouting set index [set] [rule]‟ Suppose set=1 rule=1 in this
example
Step 2 Suppose we‟d like to edit the rule like this
Policy Set Name=Test
Active= Yes
Criteria
IP Protocol = 6
Type of Service= Dont Care Packet length= 0
Precedence = Dont Care Len Comp= NA
Source
addr start= 19216812 end= 192168120
port start= 0 end= NA
Destination
addr start= 0000 end= NA
port start= 80 end= 80
Action= Matched
Gateway addr = 1921681254 Log= No
Type of Service= No Change
Precedence = No Change
This policy example forces the Web packets originated from the clients with IP
addresses from 19216812 to 192168120 be routed to the remote LAN via
the gateway 1921681254
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
ip policyrouting set name Test
(Set the name as Test of IP routing policy rule )
ip policyrouting set active yes
(Enable the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria protocol 6
(Set the protocol ID as 6(TCP) for the rule)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
72
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the criteria type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria packetlength 0
(Set the packet length as 0 for the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcip 19216812 192168120
(Set the source IP address for the rule Start=19216812 end=192168120)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcport 0
(Set the source port for the rule Start=0)
ip policyrouting set criteria destip 0000
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=0000)
ip policyrouting set criteria destport 80 80
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=80 end=80)
ip policyrouting set action actmatched
(Set the action for the rule Matched)
ip policyrouting set action gatewaytype 0
(Set gateway type for the rule Gateway Address)
ip policyrouting set action gatewayaddr 1921681254
(Set the gateway address for the rule 1921681254)
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the action type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the action precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set action log no
(Set log option for the rule no log)
ip polictrouting set save
(Save the rule)
Step 3 Apply the IP policy routing There are two interfaces to apply the policy
set they are the LAN interface and WAN interface It depends where the
gateway specified in the policy rule is located If the gateway you specified is
located on the local LAN you apply the policy set in LAN interface If the
gateway you specified is located on the remote WAN site you apply the policy
set in WAN interface
Apply to WAN Interface (Suppose we apply it to remote node 1 in the
example)
wan node index 1
wan node ippolicy 1
11 Using Call Scheduling
What is Call Scheduling
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
73
Call scheduling enables the mechanism for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to run the
remote node connection according to the pre-defined schedule This feature is
just like the scheduler in a video recorder which records the program according
to the specified time Users can apply at most 4 schedule sets in Remote Node
The remote node configured with the schedule set could be Forced On
Forced Down Enable Dial-On-Demand or Disable Dial-On-Demand on
specified date and time
How to configure a Call Scheduling
You can configure a call scheduling in CLI
Suppose we want to edit a call schedule set like this
Call Schedule Set =1
Set name=Test
Active= Yes
Start Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 - 12 - 27
How Often= Once
Once
Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 -12 -27
Start Time(hhmm)= 12 00
Duration(hhmm)= 16 00
Action= Enable Dial-on-demand
This schedule example permits a demand call on the line on 1200 am
2005-12-27 The maximum length of time this connection is allowed is 16
hours
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
wan callsch index 1
(Set call schedule index = 1 You must apply this command first before you
begin to configure call schedule)
wan callsch name Test
(Set the schedule name as Test)
wan callsch active Yes
(Enable schedule)
wan callsch startdate 2005 12 27
(Set schedule start date as 2005-12-27)
wan callsch oncedate 2005 12 27
(Set the schedule used just once it works on 2005-12-27)
wan callsch starttime 12 00
(Set the schedule start time as 1200)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
74
wan callsch duration 16 00
(Set schedule duration time as 16 hours)
wan callsch action 2
(Set action as dial-on-demand)
wan callsch save
(Save the current call schedule set)
Key Settings
Start Date
Start date of this schedule rule It can be unmatched with weekday
setting For example if Start Date is 20001002(Monday) but Monday
setting in weekday can be No
Forced On The node will always keep up during the setting period It is equivalent
to diable the idel timeout
Forced Down The node will always keep doen during the setting period The
connected remote node will be dropped
Enable
Dial-On-Demand The remote node accepts Dial-on-demand during this period
Disable
Dial-On-Demand
The remote node denies any demand dial during the period For the
existing connected nodes it will be dropped after idle timeout and no
triggered up
Start Time
Duration Start Time and Duration of this schedule
Apply the schedule to the Remote node
Multiple scheduling rules can program in a Remote node and they have
priority For example if we program the sets as 1234 in remote node then
the set 1 will override set 234 set 2 will override 34 and so on
We can apply the schedule to the remote node in CLI by the commands
wan node index []index]
wan node callsch [index]
wan node save
For example if we want to apply the call schedule set 1 to remote node 1 we
could use the commands
wan node index 1
wan node callsch 1
wan node save
Time Service in P-660HW-Dx v2
There is no RTC (Real-Time Clock) chip so the P-660HW-Dx v2 should launch
a mechanism to get current time and date from external server in boot time
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
75
Time service is implemented by the Daytime protocol(RFC-867) Time
protocol(RFC-868) and NTP protocol(RFC-1305) You have to assign an IP
address of a time server and then the P-660HW-Dx v2 will get the date time
and time-zone information from this server You can configure it in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt System -gt Time Setting
12 Using IP Multicast
What is IP Multicast
Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in two ways - unicast or broadcast
Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts Host groups
are identified by class D IP addresses ie those with 1110 as their
higher-order bits In dotted decimal notation host group addresses range from
224000 to 239255255255 Among them 224001 is assigned to the
permanent IP hosts group and 224002 is assigned to the multicast routers
group
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is the protocol used to support
multicast groups The latest version is version 2 (see RFC2236) IP hosts use
IGMP to report their multicast group membership to any immediate-neighbor
multicast routers so the multicast routers can decide if a multicast packet
needs to be forwarded At start up the P-660HW-Dx v2 queries all directly
connected networks to gather group membership
After that the P-660HW-Dx v2 updates the information by periodic queries
The P-660HW-Dx v2 implementation of IGMP is also compatible with version 1
The multicast setting can be turned on or off on Ethernet and remote nodes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
76
IP Multicast Setup
(1) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt LAN -gt IP -gt Advanced Setup
(2) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s remote node in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt Multicast
Key Settings
Multicast IGMP-v1 for IGMP version 1 IGMP-v2 for IGMP version 2
13 Using Bandwidth Management
Why Bandwidth Management (BWM)
Nowadays we have many different traffic types for Internet applications Some
traffic may consume high bandwidth such as FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
Some other traffic may not require high bandwidth but they require stable
supply of bandwidth such as VoIP traffic The VoIP quality would not be good
if all of the outgoing bandwidth is occupied via FTP Additionally chances are
that you would like to grant higher bandwidth for somebody special who is
using specific IP address in your network All of these are reasons why we
need bandwidth management
Using BWM
Setp 1 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gtSummary activate bandwidth management on the interface you
would like to manage We enable the BWM function on WAN interface in this
example
Enter the total speed for this interface that you want to allocate using
bandwidth management This appears as the bandwidth budget of the
interface‟s root class
Select how you want the bandwidth to be allocated Priority-Based means
bandwidth is allocated via priority so the traffic with highest priority would be
served first then the second priority is served secondly and so on If
Fairness-Based is chosen then the bandwidth is allocated by ratio Which
means if A class needs 300 kbps B class needs 600 kbps then the ratio of A
and Bs actual bandwidth is 12 So if we get 450 kbps in total then A would
get 150 kbps B would get 300 kbps We select Priority-Based in this
example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
77
Key Settings
Active
Check the box to enable BWM on the interface Note that if you would like
to manage traffic from WAN to LAN you should apply BWM on LAN
interface If you would like to management traffic from WAN to DMZ
please apply BWM on DMZ interface
Speed Enter the total speed to manage on this interface This value is the budget
of the class trees root
Scheduler
Choose the principle to allocate bandwidth on this interface
Priority-Based allocates bandwidth via priority Fairness-Based allocates
bandwidth by ratio
Maximize
Bandwidth
Usage
Check this box if you would like to give residuary bandwidth from Interface
to the classes who need more bandwidth than configured amount Do not
select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a
bandwidth class or you want to limit the bandwidth of each class at the
configured value (Please note that to meat the second condition you
should also disable Use All Managed Bandwidth in the BWM rule)
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Rule Setup select the interface Service Priority and Allocated
Bandwidth for this rule then click button bdquoAdd‟ to apply this rule
Step 3 You can modify the rule by clicking the button lsquoEditrsquo on the rule
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
78
Key Settings
RuleName Give this rule a name for example WWW
BW Budget Configure the bandwidth you would like to allocate to this rule
Priority Enter a number between 0 and 7 to set the priority of this class The
higher the number the higher the priority The default setting is 3
Use All
Managed
Bandwidth
Check this box if you would like to let this class to borrow bandwidth from
its parents when the required bandwidth is higher than the configured
amount Do not check this if you want to limit the bandwidth of this class
at the configured value(Please note that you should also disable
Maximize Bandwidth Usage on the interface to meet the condition)
Service Select User-defined SIP FTP or H323 to specify the traffic types
Destination
IP Address Enter the IP address of destination that meets this class
Destination
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
Destination
Port Enter the destination port number of the traffic
Source IP
Address
Enter the IP address of source that meats this class Note that for traffic
from LAN to WAN since BWM is before NAT you should use the IP
address before NAT processing
Source
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
79
Source Port Enter the source port number of the traffic
Protocol ID Enter the protocol number for the traffic 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP or 17 for
UDP
After configuration BWM you can check current bandwidth of the configured
traffic in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Monitor
14 Using Zero-Configuration
Zero-Configuration and VC auto-hunting
Zero-Configure feature can help customer to reduce the burden of setting
efforts Whenever system ADSL links up system will send out some probing
patterns system will analyze the packets returned from ISP and decide which
services the ISP may provide Because ADSL is based on a ATM network so
system have to pre-configured a VPIVCI hunting pool before Auto-Configure
function begins to work
The Zero-Configuration feature can hunt the encapsulation and VPIVCI value
and system will automatically configure itself if the hunting result is
successfully This feature has two constraints
1 It supports the ISP provides one kind of service (PPPoEPPPoA etc)
only otherwise the hunting will get confusing and failed
2 VC auto-hunting only supports dynamic WAN IP address If the router is
set a static WAN IP address VC auto-hunting function will be disabled
The entry of hunting pool must also contain the VPI VCI and which kinds of
hunting patterns you wish to send Whenever system send out all the probing
patterns with specific VPIVCI system will wait for 5~10 seconds and get the
response from ISP the response patterns will decide which kinds of ADSL
services of the line will be After that system will save back the correct VPI
VCI and also services (encapsulation) type into profile of WAN interface
Configure the VC auto-hunting preconfigured table
(1) Display auto-haunting preconfigured table by using command from CLI
wan atm vchunt display
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
80
(2) Add items to the auto-haunting preconfigured table by using commands
wan atm vchunt add ltremoteNodeIndexgt ltvpigt ltvcigt ltservice
bit(hex)gt
wan atm vchunt save
Note ltremote nodegt input the remote node index 1-8
ltvpigt vpi value
ltvcigt vci value
ltservicegt it‟s a hex value bit0PPPoEVC (1) bit1PPPoELLC (2)
bit2PPPoAVC (4) bit3PPPoALLC (8) bit4EnetVC (16) bit5 EnetLLC (32)
For example
(1) If you need service PPPoELLC and EnetLLC then the service bits will be
2+32 = 34 (decimal) = 22 (hex) you must input 22
(2) If you want to enable all service for VC hunting the service bits will be
1+2+4+8+16+32=63(decimal)= 3f (hex) you must input 3f
Need to perform save after this by command bdquowan atm vchunt save‟
(3) Delete items from the auto-haunting preconfigured table by useing
command
wan atm vchunt remove ltremote nodegt ltvpigt ltvcigt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
81
Using Zero configuration
You can enabledisable Zero Configuration in Network -gt WAN -gt Advanced
Setup
(1) After configure the auto-haunting preconfigured table You just need a PC
connected to the device LAN Ethernet port with the DSL sync up
(2) Open your web browser to access a Web site It should prompt and request
for your username password of your ISP account if your ISP provide PPPoE
or PPPoA service
(3) After key-in the correct info it will than test the connection If it is
successful it will than close the browser and you can open a new browser to
surf the Internet If the connection test fail it will go back to the page ask for
user name and password
(4) Basically the zero configuration only work on the VC that was preconigured
in the auto-haunting preconfigured table
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2
The common triple play scenario is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
82
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus we could assign different parameters to the PVC (CBR
UBR VBR-RT VBR-nRT) to guarantee different applications
We could configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 via CLI The command is
sys tripleplay set portbase ltEportIDgt ltPVCIDgt
For example sys tripleplay portbase set 1 1
sys tripleplay portbase set 2 2
sys tripleplay portbase set 3 3
The traffic from Ethernet port 1 must be forwarded to PVC1 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet port 2 must be forwarded to PVC2 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet Port3 must be forwarded to PVC3 vice versa
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to configure up to twelve filter sets with six
rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system You can apply up to
four filter sets to a particular port to block multiple types of packets With each
filter set having up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for
a single port
The packet filter function on P-660HW-Dx v2 is the same as before just that
you could only configure the filter set and apply them by command in CLI It‟s
very complex for common users to do it So here‟s the recommendation
(1) Usually if you want to block special packets you could edit a firewall rule in
Web Configurator
032
VOIP Server
IPTV Server
Internet
Server
Others
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
ATUR IP-DSLAM VL-Switch
CPE Access Network ISP
034
055
VOIP Telephone
Video Client
Clients surfing
Internet
Other clients
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
PVC1
PVC2
PVC3
PVC4 132
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
83
(2) By factory default ZyXEL has preconfigured many filter sets for your
reference you can check them by command
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Usage set 1~12 rule 1~6 Commonly the preconfigured filter sets are as
follows ltset 2 rule 1~6gt ltset 3 rule 1gt ltset 4 rule 1gt
sys filter set display
For example
This could satisfy mostly requirement You could select any of them to apply to
the WAN node or LAN Interface on demand The command is as follows
Apply to WAN node
wan node index ltnodegt
Usage node= 1~8 corresponding to the remote node 1~8
wan node filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt
ltset3gt ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to one remote node
wan node save
Apply to LAN Interface
lan index [index]
Usage index=1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
84
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt ltset3gt
ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to LAN Interface
lan save
(3) If you are very advanced user you could edit filter set by the following
command
sys filter set [set] [rule]
Usage Set up a filter set index to edit a set
set 1~12
rule 1~6
sys filter set type [typeID]
Usage typeID tcpip or generic
Note In one filter set you should configure all the rules in one type either
tcpip or generic
sys filter set enable
Usage Enable(active) the rule
sys filter set helliphellip(You could configure a filter rule on demand the newest
command is available on release note)
sys filter set save
Usage Don‟t forget to save the rule everytime you‟ve configured it
Reference Commands
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Set the index of filter set rule you must apply this
command first before you begin to configure the
filter rules
sys filter set name [set name] Set the name of filter set
sys filter set type [tcpip | generic] Set the type of filter rule
sys filter set enable Enable the rule
sys filter set disable Disable the rule
sys filter set protocol [protocol ] Set the protocol ID of the rule
sys filter set sourceroute [yes|no] Set the sourceroute yesno
sys filter set destip [address] [subnet
mask]
Set the destination IP address and subnet mask of
the rule
sys filter set destport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|notequal|less|greater]
Set the destination port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set srcip [address] [subnet
mask] Set the source IP address and subnet mask
sys filter set srcport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|not
Set the source port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
85
equal|less|greater] equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set tcpEstab [yes|no] Set TCP establish option
sys filter set more [yes|no] Set the more option to yesno
sys filter set log [type 0-3= none | match|
notmatch | both ]
Set the log type (it could be 0-3 =none match not
match both)
sys filter set actmatch[type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for match
sys filter set actnomatch [type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for not match
sys filter set offset [] Set offset for the generic rule
sys filter set length [] Set the length for generic rule
sys filter set mask [] Set the mask for generic rule
sys filter set value [(depend on length in
hex)] Set the value for generic rule
sys filter set clear Clear the current filter set
sys filter set save Save the filter set parameters
sys filter set display [set][rule] Display Filter set information Wo parameter it will
display buffer information
sys filter set freememory Discard Changes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
86
Wireless Application Notes
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode
Ad hoc Introduction
What is Ad Hoc mode
Ad hoc mode is a wireless network consists of a number of stations without
access points Without using an access point or any connection to a wired
network a client unit in Ad hoc operation mode can communicate directly to
other client units just as using a cross over Ethernet cable connecting 2 hosts
together via a NIC card for direct connection when configured in Ad hoc mode
without an access point being present Ad hoc operation is ideal for small
networks of no more than 2-4 computers Larger networks would require the
use of one or perhaps several access points
Configuration for Wireless Station A
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
87
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
88
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Configuration for Wireless Station B
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
89
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
90
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Step 7 Station A now are able to connect to Station B
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure Introduction
For Infrastructure WLANs multiple Access Points (APs) like the WLAN to the
wired network and allow users to efficiently share network resources The
Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also
mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
91
Configure Wireless Access Point to Infrastructure mode using Web
configurator
To configure Infrastructure mode of your P-660HW-Dx v2 wireless AP please
follow the steps below
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gt General Configure the basic parameters for Wireless LAN
Step 2 You could click the button bdquoAdvanced Setup‟ for more detailed
configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
92
Configuration Wireless Station to Infrastructure mode
To configure Infrastructure mode on your ZyAIR G-200 Wireless Network
Adapter please follow the following steps
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
93
Step 3 Select Infrastructure from the operation mode pull down menu fill in an
SSID or leave it as any if you wish to connect to any AP than press Apply
Change to take effect
Step 4 Click on Site Survey tab and press search all the available AP will be
listed
Step 5 Double click on the AP you want to associated with
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
94
Step 6 After the client have associated with the selected AP The linked APs
channel current linkup rate SSID link quality and signal strength will show on
the Link Info page You now successfully associate with the selected AP with
Infrastructure Mode
3 MAC Filter
MAC Filter Overview
Users can use MAC Filter as a method to restrict unauthorized stations from
accessing the APs ZyXELs APs provide the capability for checking MAC
address of the station before allowing it to connect to the network This
provides an additional layer of control layer in that only stations with registered
MAC addresses can connect This approach requires that the list of MAC
addresses be configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
95
ZyXEL MAC Filter Implementation
ZyXELs MAC Filter Implementation allows users to define a list to allow or
block association from STAs The filter set allows users to input 12 entries in
the list If Allow Association is selected all other STAs which are not on the list
will be denied Otherwise if Deny Association is selected all other STAs which
are not on the list will be allowed for association Users can choose either way
to configure their filter rule
Configure the WLAN MAC Filter
The MAC Filter related settings in ZyXEL APs are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gtMAC Filter
Before you configure the MAC filter you need to know the MAC address of the
client first If not knowing what your MAC address is please enter a command
ipconfig all after DOS prompt to get the MAC (physical) address of your
wireless client
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gtMAC Filter active MAC Filter
Step 2 Enter the MAC Addresses of wireless cards in the filter set to allow or
deny association from these cards
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Filter Action
Allow or block association from MAC addresses contained in this list If Allow
Association is selected in this field hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list
will be allowed to associate with AP If Deny Association is selected in this field
hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list will be blocked
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
96
MAC Address This field specifies those MAC Addresses that you want to add in the list
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
Introduction
The 80211 standard describes the communication that occurs in wireless
LANs
The Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm is used to protect wireless
communication from eavesdropping because wireless transmissions are
easier to intercept than transmissions over wired networks and wireless is a
shared medium everything that is transmitted or received over a wireless
network can be intercepted
WEP relies on a secret key that is shared between a mobile station (eg a
laptop with a wireless Ethernet card) and an access point (ie a base station)
The secret key is used to encrypt packets before they are transmitted and an
integrity check is used to ensure that packages are not modified during the
transition The standard does not discuss how the shared key is established In
practice most installations use a single key that is shared between all mobile
stations and access points APs You can refer to the User Guide for more
detailed information about it
Setting up the Access Point
You can set up the Access Point from Web configurator Advanced Setup
Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General (You can also configure it via CLI)
Step 1 Select bdquoStatic WEP‟ from the pull down menu bdquoSecurity Mode‟ in Web
Configurator
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
97
Step 2 Set up WEP Key in the Web Configurator You need to set the one of
the following parameters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 5 characters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 10 hexadecimal digits
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 13 characters
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 26 hexadecimal digits
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 29 characters
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 58 hexadecimal digits
There are two ways you can configure the WEP Key
(1) You can put in a special WEP key in the bdquoWEP Key‟ menu directly
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
98
(2) You can also put in an arbitrary sequence of characters in the
bdquoPassphrase‟ and then press button bdquoGenerate‟ to let the P-660HW-Dx v2
generate WEP Key for you
Setting up the Station
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar or right click
the utility icon then select Show Config Utility
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
99
The utility will pop up on your windows screen
Note If the utility icon doesnt exist in your task bar click Start -gt
Programs -gt helliphellip to start the utility
Step 2 Select the Configuration tab
Select bdquoSet Security‟ to configure encryption type and parameters
correspond with access point
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
100
Note You should select Key 1 as default Transmit Key since the P-660HW-Dx
v2 is supposed to use Key 1 by default
Key settings
The WEP Encryption type of station has to equal to the access point
Check ASCII field for characters WEP key or uncheck ASCII field for
Hexadecimal digits WEP key
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
101
Hexadecimal digits dont need to precede by 0x
For example
64-bits with characters WEP key Key1= 2e3f4
64-bits with hexadecimal digits WEP key Key1= 123456789A
5 Site Survey
Introduction
What is Site Survey
An RF site survey is a MAP to RF contour of RF coverage in a particular
facility With wireless system it is very difficult to predict the propagation of
radio waves and detect the presence of interfering signals Walls doors
elevator shafts and other obstacles offer different degree of attenuation This
will cause the RF coverage pattern be irregular and hard to predict
Site survey can help us overcome these problem and even provide us a map
of RF coverage of the facility
Preparation
Below are the steps to complete a simple site survey with simple tools
1 First you will need to obtain a facility diagram such as blueprints This is
for you to mark and take record on
2 Visually inspect the facility walk through the facility to verify the accuracy of
the diagram and mark down any large obstacle you see that may effect the RF
signal such as metal shelf metal desk etc on the diagram
3 Identify users area when doing so ask a question where is wireless
coverage needed and where does not and note and take note on the diagram
this is information is needed to determine the number of AP required
4 Determine the preliminary access point location on the facility diagram base
on the service area needed obstacles power wall jack considerations
Survey on Site
Step 1 With the diagram with all information you gathered in the preparation
phase Now you are ready to make the survey
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
102
Step 2 Install an access point at the preliminary location
Step 3 Use a notebook with wireless client installed and run its utility An utility
will provide information such as connection speed current used channel
associated rate link quality signal strength and etc information as shown in
utility below
Step 4 Its always a good idea to start with putting the access point at the
corner of the room and walk away from the access point in a systematic
manner Record the changes at point where transfer rate drop and the link
quality and signal strength information on the diagram as you go alone
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
103
Step 5 When you reach the farthest point of connection mark the spot Now
you move the access point to this new spot as have already determine the
farthest point of the access point installation spot if wireless service is required
from corner of the room
Step 6 Repeat step 1~5 and now you should be able to mark an RF coverage
area as illustrated in above picutre
Step 7 You may need more than one access point is the RF coverage area
hasn‟t covered all the wireless service area you needed
Step 8 Repeat step 1~6 of survey on site as necessary upon completion you
will have a diagram and information of site survey As illustrated below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
104
Note If there are more than one access point is needed be sure to make the
adjacent access point service area over lap one another So the wireless
station is able to roam For more information please refer to roaming at
6 Configure 8021x and WPA
What is the WPA Functionality
Configuration for Access Point
Configuration for your PC
What is WPA Functionality
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
105
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN
Here comes WPA-PSK Application example for your reference
Configuration for Access point
The IEEE 8021x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the
authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management
Authentication can be done using local user database internal to the
P-660HW-Dx v2 (authenticate up to 32 users) or an external RADIUS server
for an unlimited number of users
Step 1 To change your P-660HW-Dx v2s authentication settings login Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General
-gtSecurity
Step 2 Select lsquoSecurity Mode‟ as WAP-PSK
Step 3 Type the Pre Shared Key in the Pre-Shared Key field
Step 4 Click Apply to finish
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
106
Configuration for your PC
Step 1 Double click on your wireless utility icon in your windows task bar the
utility will pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select the configuration tab type in the SSID (Service Set Identifier)
select the operating Mode as Infrastructure and select proper channel
Step 3 Click Set Security to configure the security parameters
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
107
Step 4 Click OK for finish and begin to Site survey Connect to the AP as you
have configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
108
Step 5 Click Link Info tab if the PC associated and authenticated with AP
successfully we will see the following information
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
109
Support Tool
1 LANWAN Packet Trace
The Prestige packet trace records and analyzes packets running on LAN and
WAN interfaces It is designed for users with technical backgrounds who are
interested in the details of the packet flow on LAN or WAN end of Prestige It is
also very helpful for diagnostics if you have compatibility problems with your
ISP or if you want to know the details of a packet for configuring a filter rule
The format of the display is as following
Packet
[index] [timersecond][channel-receivetransmit][length] [protocol]
[sourceIPport] [destIPport]
There are two ways to dump the trace
Online Trace--display the trace real time on screen
Offline Trace--capture the trace first and display later
The details for capturing the trace in CLI as follows
First of all you need to telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 firstly The password is
Administrator passwords bdquoadmin‟ by default
Online Trace
(1) Trace LAN packet
Disable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
none
Enable to capture the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
110
(2) Trace WAN packet
Disable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
none
Enable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
111
Offline Trace
Disable the capture of the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel
mpoa00 none
Enable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Wait for packet passing through the Prestige over LAN
Disable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw off amp sys trcl sw off
Display the trace briefly by entering sys trcp brief
Display specific packets by using sys trcp parse ltfrom_indexgt ltto_indexgt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
112
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal
Step 1 Initiate a hyper terminal connection from your PC(suppose you
connected to the LAN port of P-660HW-Dx v2)
Step 2 Click the bdquoproperties‟ to configure parameters to telnet to the
P-660HW-Dx v2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
113
Step 3 So that after you invoke the relevant commands you could save the
logs you‟ve captured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
114
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP
Using TFTP client software
Uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Uploaddownload Prestige configurations via LAN
(1) Using TFTP to uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout
in Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 Enter the IP address of the Prestige
Step 5To upload the firmware please save the remote file as ras to
Prestige After the transfer is complete the Prestige will program the upgraded
firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
115
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige The local file is the source
file of the ZyNOS firmware that is available in your hard disk The remote file is
the file name that will be saved in Prestige Check the port number 69 and
512-Octet blocks for TFTP Check Binary mode for file transfering
(2) Using TFTP to uploaddownload SMT configurations via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 To download the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please get the
remote file rom-0 from the Prestige
Step 5 To upload the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please save the
remote file as rom-0 in the Prestige
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
116
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige
The local file is the source file of your configuration file that is available
in your hard disk
The remote file is the file name that will be saved in Prestige
Check the port number 69 and 512-Octet blocks for TFTP
Check Binary mode for file transfering
Using TFTP command on Windows NT
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Download ZyNOS via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] get ras [localfile]
Step 4 Upload P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] put
[localfile] rom-0
Step 5 Download P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP]
get rom-0 [localfile]
Using TFTP command on UNIX
Before you begin
1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Example
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ telnet 19216811
Trying 19216811
Connected to 19216811
Escape character is ^]
Password
rasgt sys stdio 0
(Open a new window)
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get rom-0 [local-rom] lt- change to binary mode
lt- download configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-rom] rom-0 lt- upload configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get ras [local-ras ] lt- download firmware
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-ras] ras lt- upload firmware
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
117
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files
In addition to upload the firmware and configuration file via the console port
and TFTP client you can also upload the firmware and configuration files to
the Prestige using FTP
To use this feature your workstation must have a FTP client software See the
example shown below
Using FTP client software
Note The remote file name for the firmware is ras and the configuration file is
rom-0
Step 1 Use FTP client from your workstation to connect to the Prestige by
entering the IP address of the Prestige
Step2 Press Enter key to ignore the username because the Prestige does
not check the username
Step 3 Enter the CLI password as the FTP login password the default is
admin
Step 4 Enter command bin to set the transfer type to binary
Step 5 Use put command to transfer the file to the Prestige
Example
Step 1 Connect to the Prestige by entering the Prestiges IP and Administrator
password in the FTP software Set the transfer type to Auto-Detect or
Binary
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
118
Step 2 Press OK to ignore the Username prompt
Step 3 To upload the firmware file we transfer the local ras file to overwrite
the remote ras file
To upload the configuration file we transfer the local rom-0 to overwrite
the remote rom-0 file
Step 4 The Prestige reboots automatically after the uploading is finished
Please do not power off the router at this moment
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
119
CI Command Reference
Command Syntax and General User Interface
CI has the following command syntax
command ltiface | device gt subcommand [param]
command subcommand [param]
command | help
command subcommand | help
General user interface
1 Shows the following commands and all major (sub)commands
2 exit Exit Subcommand
To get the latest CI Command list
The latest CI Command list is available in release note of every ZyXEL
firmware release Please goto ZyXEL public WEB site
httpwwwzyxelcomsupportdownload_indexphp to download firmware
package (zip) you should unzip the package to get the release note in PDF
format
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
11
Product FAQ
1 How can I manage P-660HW-Dx v2
Multilingual Embedded Web GUI for Local and Remote management
CLI (Command-line interface)
Telnet support (Administrator Password Protected ) for remote
configuration change and status monitoring
FTP TFTP sever firmware upgrade and configuration backup and
restore are supported(Administrator Password Protected)
2 What is the default password for Web Configurator
There are two different accounts for P-660HW-Dx v2 Web Configurator
Common User Account and Administrator Account
By factory default the password for the two accounts are
Common User Account user
Administrator Account 1234
You can change the password after you logging in the Web Configurator
Please record your new password whenever you change it The system
will lock you out if you have forgotten your password
3 Whatrsquos the difference between lsquoCommon User Accountrsquo and
lsquoAdministrator Accountrsquo
For Common User Account it can only access the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 and check the current system status
For Administrator Account besides accessing the status monitor of
P-660HW-Dx v2 it can also access Winzard setup Advanced setup of
P-660HW-Dx v2
Moreover only with Administrator Password you could manage the
P-660HW-Dx v2 via FTPTFTP or Telnet
4 How do I know the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address assigned by the
ISP
You can view My WAN IP ltfrom ISPgt xxxx shown in Web Configurator
bdquoStatus-gtDevice Information -gtWAN Information‟ to check this IP address
5 What is the micro filter or splitter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
12
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
6 The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Bridge and Router mode whats the
difference between them
When the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet which means
only the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use bridge mode which works as an ADSL modem to
connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account and limit
only one computer to access the Internet
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to add another Internet sharing device
like a router In this case we use the router mode which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
7 How do I know I am using PPPoE
PPPoE requires a user account to login to the providers server If you need to
configure a user name and password on your computer to connect to the ISP
you are probably using PPPoE If you are simply connected to the Internet
when you turn on your computer you probably are not You can also check
your ISP or the information sheet given by the ISP Please choose PPPoE as
the encapsulation type in the P-660HW-Dx v2 if the ISP uses PPPoE
8 Why does my provider use PPPoE
PPPoE emulates a familiar Dial-Up connection It allows your ISP to provide
services using their existing network configuration over the broadband
connections Besides PPPoE supports a broad range of existing applications
and service including authentication accounting secure access and
configuration management
9 What is DDNS
The Dynamic DNS service allows you to alias a dynamic IP address to a static
hostname allowing your computer to be more easily accessed from various
locations on the Internet To use the service you must first apply an account
from several free Web servers such as httpwwwdyndnsorg
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to reach our internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
13
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
updates this IP to DDNS server so that the server can update its IP-to-DNS
entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is updated the DNS
name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still usable
10 When do I need DDNS service
When you want your internal server to be accessed by using DNS name rather
than using the dynamic IP address we can use the DDNS service The DDNS
server allows to alias a dynamic IP address to a static hostname Whenever
the ISP assigns you a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2 sends this IP to the DDNS
server for its updates
11 What is DDNS wildcard Does the P-660HW-Dx v2 support DDNS
wildcard
Some DDNS servers support the wildcard feature which allows the hostname
yourhostdyndnsorg to be aliased to the same IP address as
yourhostdyndnsorg This feature is useful when there are multiple servers
inside and you want users to be able to use things such as
wwwyourhostdyndnsorg and still reach your hostname
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports DDNS wildcard that httpwwwdyndnsorg
supports When using wildcard you simply enter yourhostdyndnsorg in the
Host field in Menu 11 Configure Dynamic DNS
12 Can the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA handle IPSec packets sent by the
IPSec gateway
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA can handle IPSec ESP Tunneling mode We
know when packets go through SUA SUA will change the source IP address
and source port for the host To pass IPSec packets SUA must understand
the ESP packet with protocol number 50 replace the source IP address of the
IPSec gateway to the routers WAN IP address However SUA should not
change the source port of the UDP packets which are used for key
managements Because the remote gateway checks this source port during
connections the port thus is not allowed to be changed
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
14
13 How do I setup my P-660HW-Dx v2 for routing IPSec packets over
SUA
For outgoing IPSec tunnels no extra setting is required
For forwarding the inbound IPSec ESP tunnel A Default server set is required
You could configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding -gt Default Server Setup
It is because SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users So to make an internal server
for outside access we must specify the service port and the LAN IP of this
server in Web configurator Thus SUA is able to forward the incoming packets
to the requested service behind SUA and the outside users access the server
using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address So we have to configure the
internal IPsec client as a default server (unspecified service port) when it acts
a server gateway
14 What is Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping allocates the bandwidth to WAN dynamically and aims at
boosting the efficiency of the bandwidth If there are serveral VCs in the
P-660HW-Dx v2 but only one VC activated at one time the P-660HW-Dx v2
allocates all the Bandwidth to the VC and the VC gets full bandwidth If another
VCs are activated later the bandwidth is yield to other VCs after ward
15 Why do we perform traffic shaping in the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 must manage traffic fairly and provide bandwidth
allocation for different sorts of applications such as voice video and data All
applications have their own natural bit rate Large data transactions have a
fluctuating natural bit rate The P-660HW-Dx v2 is able to support variable
traffic among different virtual connections Certain traffic may be discarded if
the virtual connection experiences congestion Traffic shaping defines a set of
actions taken by the P-660HW-Dx v2 to avoid congestion traffic shaping takes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
15
measures to adapt to unpredictable fluctuations in traffic flows and other
problems among virtual connections
16 What do the parameters (PCR SCR MBS) mean
Traffic shaping parameters (PCR SCR MBS) can be set in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt ATM Setup
Peak Cell Rate(PCR) The maximum bandwidth allocated to this connection
The VC connection throughput is limited by PCR
Sustainable Cell Rate(SCR) The least guaranteed bandwidth of a VC
When there are multi-VCs on the same line the VC throughput is guaranteed
by SCR
Maximum Burst Size(MBS) The amount of cells transmitted through this
VC at the Peak Cell Rate before yielding to other VCs Total bandwidth of the
line is dedicated to single VC if there is only one VC on the line However as
the other VC asking the bandwidth the MBS defines the maximum number of
cells transmitted via this VC with Peak Cell rate before yielding to other VCs
The P-660HW-Dx v2 holds the parameters for shaping the traffic among its
virtual channels If you do not need traffic shaping please set SCR = 0 MBS =
0 and PCR as the maximum value according to the line rate (for example 23
Mbps line rate will result PCR as 5424 cellsec)
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
Constant bit rate(CBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that requires
the user to determine a fixed bandwidth requirement at the time the connection
is set up so that the data can be sent in a steady stream CBR service is often
used when transmitting fixed-rate uncompressed video
Unspecified bit rate(UBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that does
not guarantee any throughput levels and uses only available bandwidth UBR
is often used when transmitting data that can tolerate delays such as e-mail
Variable bit rate(VBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that allows
users to specify a throughput capacity (ie a peak rate) and a sustained rate
but data is not sent evenly You can select VBR for bursty traffic and
bandwidth sharing with other applications It contains two subclasses
Variable bit rate nonreal time (VBR-nRT)
Variable bit rate real time (VBR-RT)
18 What is content filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
16
Internet Content filter allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies
tailored to your needs Content filter gives you the ability to block web sites that
contain key words (that you specify) in the URL You can set a schedule for
when the P-660HW-Dx v2 performs content filtering You can also specify
trusted IP Addresses on LAN for which the P-660HW-Dx v2 will not perform
content filtering You can configure the details about it in Web Configurator
Advanced setup Security -gt Content Filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
17
ADSL FAQ
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems
ADSL provides a dedicated service over a single telephone line cable
modems offer a dedicated service over a shared media While cable modems
have greater downstream bandwidth capabilities (up to 30 Mbps) that
bandwidth is shared among all users on a line and will therefore vary perhaps
dramatically as more users in a neighborhood get online at the same time
Cable modem upstream traffic will in many cases be slower than ADSL either
because the particular cable modem is inherently slower or because of rate
reductions caused by contention for upstream bandwidth slots The big
difference between ADSL and cable modems however is the number of lines
available to each There are no more than 12 million homes passed today that
can support two-way cable modem transmissions and while the figure also
grows steadily it will not catch up with telephone lines for many years
Additionally many of the older cable networks are not capable of offering a
return channel consequently such networks will need significant upgrading
before they can offer high bandwidth services
2 What is the expected throughput
In our test we can get about 16Mbps data rate on 15Kft using the 26AWG
loop The shorter the loop the better the throughput is
3 What is the microfilter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up
You can see the DSL LED Green on the P-660HW-Dx v2s front panel is on
when the ADSL physical layer is up
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL
Depending on the line quality the P-660HW-Dx v2 uses Fall Back and Fall
Forward to automatically adjust the date rate
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
18
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing
Though the LLC-based multiplexing can carry multiple protocols over a single
VC it requires extra header information to identify the protocol being carried
on the virtual circuit (VC) The VC-based multiplexing needs a separate VC for
carrying each protocol but it does not need the extra headers Therefore the
VC-based multiplexing is more efficient
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics
You can use the following CI commands to check the ADSL line
statistics
CIgt wan adsl perfdata
CIgt wan adsl status
CIgt wan adsl linedata far
CIgt wan adsl linedata near
You can also do it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Diagnostic -gt DSL Line -gt DSL Status
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector
The signaling pins on the P-660HW-Dx v2s ADSL connector are pin 3 and pin
4 The middle two pins for a RJ11 cable
9 What is triple play
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
19
More and more TelcoISPs are providing three kinds of services (VoIP Video
and Internet) over one existing ADSL connection
The different services (such as video VoIP and Internet access) require
different Qulity of Service
The high priority is Voice (VoIP) data
The Medium priority is Video (IPTV) data
The low priority is internet access such as ftp etc hellip
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus you can configure each PVC separately to assign different
QoS to different application
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
20
Firewall FAQ
General
1 What is a network firewall
A firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control
policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to
protect a trusted network from an untrusted network The firewall can be
thought of two mechanisms One to block the traffic and the other to permit
traffic
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure
The P-660HW-Dx v2 is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks such as Ping of Death SYN Flood LAND
attack IP Spoofing etc It also uses stateful packet inspection to determine if
an inbound connection is allowed through the firewall to the private LAN The
P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Network Address Translation (NAT) which
translates the private local addresses to one or multiple public addresses This
adds a level of security since the clients on the private LAN are invisible to the
Internet
3 What are the basic types of firewalls
Conceptually there are three types of firewalls
1 Packet Filtering Firewall
2 Application-level Firewall
3 Stateful Inspection Firewall
Packet Filtering Firewalls generally make their decisions based on the header
information in individual packets These headers information include the
source destination addresses and ports of the packets
Application-level Firewalls generally are hosts running proxy servers which
permit no traffic directly between networks and which perform logging and
auditing of traffic passing through them A proxy server is an application
gateway or circuit-level gateway that runs on top of general operating system
such as UNIX or Windows NT It hides valuable data by requiring users to
communicate with secure systems by mean of a proxy A key drawback of this
device is performance
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
21
Stateful Inspection Firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against
defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP
address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the
integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols The flexible
nature of Stateful Inspection firewalls generally provides the best speed and
transparency however they may lack the granular application level access
control or caching that some proxies support
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2
1 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall inspects packets contents and IP
headers It is applicable to all protocols that understands data in the
packet is intended for other layers from network layer up to the
application layer
2 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall performs stateful inspection It takes into
account the state of connections it handles so that for example a
legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request
for that packet and allowed in Conversely an incoming packet
masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be
blocked
3 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall uses session filtering ie smart rules
that enhance the filtering process and control the network session
rather than control individual packets in a session
4 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall is fast It uses a hashing function to
search the matched session cache instead of going through every
individual rule for a packet
5 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall provides email service to notify you for
routine reports and when alerts occur
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet filtering and
NAT built-in
With the spectacular growth of the Internet and online access companies that
do business on the Internet face greater security threats Although packet filter
and NAT restrict access to particular computers and networks however for
the other companies this security may be insufficient because packets filters
typically cannot maintain session state Thus for greater security a firewall is
considered
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a
connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable
a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
22
There are four types of DoS attacks
1 Those that exploits bugs in a TCPIP implementation such as Ping of
Death and Teardrop
2 Those that exploits weaknesses in the TCPIP specification such as
SYN Flood and LAND Attacks
3 Brute-force attacks that flood a network with useless data such as
Smurf attack
4 IP Spoofing
7 What is Ping of Death attack
Ping of Death uses a PING utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the
maximum 65535 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification The oversize
packet is then sent to an unsuspecting system Systems may crash hang or
reboot
8 What is Teardrop attack
Teardrop attack exploits weakness in the reassemble of the IP packet
fragments As data is transmitted through a network IP packets are often
broken up into smaller chunks Each fragment looks like the original packet
except that it contains an offset field The Teardrop program creates a series of
IP fragments with overlapping offset fields When these fragments are
reassembled at the destination some systems will crash hang or reboot
9 What is SYN Flood attack
SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each
packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response While the
targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK it queues up all
outstanding SYN-ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue
SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when
an internal timer (which is set a relatively long intervals) terminates the TCP
three-way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all
incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users
10 What is LAND attack
In a LAN attack hackers flood SYN packets to the network with a spoofed
source IP address of the targeted system This makes it appear as if the host
computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the
target system tries to respond to itself
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
23
11 What is Brute-force attack
A Brute-force attack such as Smurf attack targets a feature in the IP
specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting to quickly flood the
target network with useless data A Smurf hacker flood a destination IP
address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network the router will
broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network If there
are numerous hosts this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request
packet the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the intermediary
network but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address
known as the victim network This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all
available bandwidth making communications impossible
12 What is IP Spoofing attack
Many DoS attacks also use IP Spoofing as part of their attack IP Spoofing
may be used to break into systems to hide the hackers identity or to magnify
the effect of the DoS attack IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain
unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking
that the communications are coming from within the trusted network To
engage in IP Spoofing a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it
appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed
through the router or firewall
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
There are two default ACLs pre-configured in the P-660HW-Dx v2 one allows
all connections from LAN to WAN and the other blocks all connections from
WAN to LAN except of the DHCP packets
Configuration
1 How do I configure the firewall
You can use the Web Configurator to configure the firewall for P-660HW-Dx v2
By factory default if you connect your PC to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 you can access Web Configurator via bdquohttp19216811‟
Note Donrsquot forget to type in the Administrator Password
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall
There are several ways to protect others from touching the settings of your
firewall
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
24
1 Change the default Administrator password since it is required when
setting up the firewall
2 Limit who can access to your P-660HW-Dx v2‟s Web Configurator or
CLI You can enter the IP address of the secured LAN host in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt
[Service] -gtSecured Client IP to allow special access to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
The default value in this field is 0000 which means you do not care which
host is trying to telnet your P-660HW-Dx v2 or accessthe Web
Configurator of
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN
There are four reasons that WWWTelnet from WAN is blocked
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable Telnet from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow WWWTelnet connection
from WAN The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
WWW (For accessing Web Configurator)
Source IP= Remote trusted host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP80
Action=Forward
TELNET (For accessing Command Line Interface)
Source IP= Telnet Client host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP23
Action=Forward
(2)You have disabled WWWTelnet service in Web Configurator Advanced
setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
25
(3) WWWTelnet service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host
entered in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote
MGNT
(4)A filter set which blocks WWWTelnet from WAN is applied to WAN node
You can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using FTP over
WAN
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable FTP from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow FTP connection from WAN
The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
Source IP= FTP host
Destination IP= P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP
Service= FTP TCP21 TCP20
Action=Forward
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
26
(2) You have disabled FTP service in Web Configurator Advanced setup
Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(3) FTP service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host entered
in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(4) A filter set which blocks FTP from WAN is applied to WAN node You
can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
Log and Alert
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the firewall log immediately when the packet
matches a firewall rule The log for Default Firewall Policy (LAN to WAN WAN
to LAN WAN to WAN) is generated automatically with factory default setting
but you can change it in Web Configurator
2 What does the log show to us
The log supports up to 128 entries There are 5 columns for each entry Please
see the example shown below
3 How do I view the firewall log
All logs generated in P-660HW-Dx v2 including firewall logs IPSec logs
system logs are migrated to centralized logs So you can view firewall logs in
Centralized logs Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs
-gtView Log
The log keeps 128 entries the new entries will overwrite the old entries when
the log has over 128 entries
Before you can view firewall logs there are two steps you need to do
(1) Enable log function in Centralized logs setup via either one of the following
methods
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
27
Web configuration Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log
Settings check Access Control and Attacks options depending on
your real situation
CI command sys logs category [access | attack]
(2) Enable log function in firewall default policy or in firewall rules
After the above two steps you can view firewall logs via
Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gtView
Log
View the log by CI command sys logs disp
You can also view Centralized logs via mail or syslog please configure mail
server or Unix Syslog server in Web configuration Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the alert when an attack is detected by the
firewall and sends it via Email So to send the alert you must configure the
mail server and Email address using Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings You can also specify how frequently
you want to receive the alert in it
5 What is the difference between the log and alert
A log entry is just added to the log inside the P-660HW-Dx v2 and e-mailed
together with all other log entries at the scheduled time as configured An alert
is e-mailed immediately after an attacked is detected
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
28
Wireless FAQ
General FAQ
1 What is a Wireless LAN
Wireless LANs provide all the functionality of wired LANs without the need for
physical connections (wires) Data is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier
and transmitted through the ether Typical bit-rates are 11Mbps and 54Mbps
although in practice data throughput is half of this Wireless LANs can be
formed simply by equipping PCs with wireless NICs If connectivity to a wired
LAN is required an Access Point (AP) is used as a bridging device APs are
typically located close to the centre of the wireless client population
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN
Mobility Wireless LAN systems can provide LAN users with access to
real-time information anywhere in their organization This mobility supports
productivity and service opportunities not possible with wired networks
Installation Speed and Simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be
fast and easy and can eliminate the need to pull cable through walls and
ceilings
Installation Flexibility Wireless technology allows the network to go where
wire cannot go
Reduced Cost-of-Ownership While the initial investment required for
wireless LAN hardware can be higher than the cost of wired LAN hardware
overall installation expenses and life-cycle costs can be significantly lower
Long-term cost benefits are greatest in dynamic environments requiring
frequent moves and changes
Scalability Wireless LAN systems can be configured in a variety of topologies
to meet the needs of specific applications and installations Configurations are
easily changed and range from peer-to-peer networks suitable for a small
number of users to full infrastructure networks of thousands of users that
enable roaming over a broad area
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN
The speed of Wireless LAN is still relatively slower than wired LAN The setup
cost of Wireless LAN is relative high because the equipment cost including
access point and PCMCIA Wireless LAN card is higher than hubs and CAT 5
cables
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
29
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks
Airports hotels and even coffee shops like Starbucks are deploying 80211
networks so people can wirelessly surf the Internet with their laptops
5 What is an Access Point
The AP (access point also known as a base station) is the wireless server that
with an antenna and a wired Ethernet connection that broadcasts information
using radio signals AP typically acts as a bridge for the clients It can pass
information to wireless LAN cards that have been installed in computers or
laptops allowing those computers to connect to the campus network and the
Internet without wires
6 Whatrsquos the difference between IEEE80211abg
The IEEE 80211 is a wireless LAN industry standard and the objective of
IEEE 80211 is to make sure that different manufactures wireless LAN devices
can communicate to each other Below is a brief comparison for the
IEEE80211 abg
Publish
Time
Frequency
Band(GHZ)
Data Rate(Mbps) Compatibility
IEEE80211a 1999 UNII Band
515~5825
691218243648
54
Only work with
80211a
devices
IEEE80211b 1999 ISM Band
24~24835
125511 -
IEEE80211g 2001 ISM Band
24~24835
691218243648
54
Backward
compatible with
80211b
devices
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
Yes As long as the products comply to the same IEEE 80211 standard The
Wi-Fi logo is used to define 80211b compatible products Wi-Fi5 is a
compatibility standard for 80211a products running in the 5GHz band
8 What is Wi-Fi
The Wi-Fi logo signifies that a product is interoperable with wireless
networking equipment from other vendors A Wi-Fi logo product has been
tested and certified by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA)
The Socket Wireless LAN Card is Wi-Fi certified and that means that it will
work (interoperate) with any brand of Access Point that is also Wi-Fi certified
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band
Various spread spectrum radio communication applications use the 24 GHz
band This includes WLAN systems (not necessarily of the type IEEE
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
30
80211b) cordless phones wireless medical telemetry equipment and
Bluetoothtrade short-range wireless applications which include connecting
printers to computers and connecting modems or hands-free kits to mobile
phones
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device
Any time devices are operated in the same frequency band there is the
potential for interference
Both the 80211bg and Bluetooth devices occupy the same24-to-2483-GHz
unlicensed frequency range-the same band But a Bluetooth device would not
interfere with other 80211 devices much more than another 80211 device
would interefere While more collisions are possible with the introduction of a
Bluetooth device they are also possible with the introduction of another 80211
device or a new 24 GHz cordless phone for that matter But BlueTooth
devices are usually low-power so the effects that a Bluetooth device may have
on an 80211 network if any arent far-reaching
11 Can radio signals pass through wall
Transmitting through a wall is possible depending upon the material used in its
construction In general metals and substances with a high water content do
not allow radio waves to pass through Metals reflect radio waves and concrete
attenuates radio waves The amount of attenuation suffered in passing through
concrete will be a function of its thickness and amount of metal re-enforcement
used
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference among WLAN
products
Factors of interference
(1) Obstacles walls ceilings furniturehellip etc
(2) Building Materials metal door aluminum studs
(3) Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors
Solution
(1) Minimizing the number of walls and ceilings
(2) Antenna is positioned for best reception
(3) Keep WLAN products away from electrical devices eg microwaves
monitors electric motorshellip etc
(4) Add additional APs if necessary
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN
WLANs are generally privately owned wireless systems that are deployed in a
corporation warehouse hospital or educational campus setting Data rates
are high and there are no per-packet charges for data transmission
WWANs are generally publicly shared data networks designed to provide
coverage in metropolitan areas and along traffic corridors WWANs are owned
by a service provider or carrier Data rates are low and charges are based on
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
31
usage Specialized applications are characteristically designed around short
burst messaging
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage any
hardware
Yes it will not harm the hardware but the module will not be detected and
work after inserting to the slot You need to reboot the router to initialize the
module
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
The wireless security modes supported on P-660HW-Dx v2 are Static
WEP WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK and WPA2
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
It supports IEEE 80211bgg+ standard
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering
Yes it supports up to 32 MAC Address filtering
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption
Yes it means that the AP on P-660HW-Dx v2 will automatically decelerate
when devices move beyond the optimal range or other interference is present
If the device moves back within the range of a higher-speed transmission the
connection will automatically speed up again Rate shifting is a physical-layer
mechanism transparent to the user and the upper layers of the protocol stack
Advanced FAQ
1 What is Ad Hoc mode
A wireless network consists of a number of stations without using an access
point or any connection to a wired network
2 What is Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure mode implies connectivity to a wired communications
infrastructure If such connectivity is required the Access Points must be used
to connect to the wired LAN backbone Wireless clients have their
configurations set for infrastructure mode in order to utilise access points
relaying
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area
This depends on the surrounding terrain the diameter of the client population
and the number of clients If an area is large with dispersed pockets of
populations then extension points can be used for extend coverage
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
32
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (DSSS)
DSSS spreads its signal continuously over a wide frequency band DSSS
maps the information bearing bit-pattern at the sending station into a higher
data rate bit sequence using a chipping code The chipping code (also known
as processing gain) introduces redundancy which allows data recovery if
certain bit errors occur during transmission The FCC rules the minimum
processing gain should be 10 typical systems use processing gains of 20
IEEE 80211b specifies the use of DSSS
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (FHSS)
FHSS uses a narrowband carrier which hops through a predefined sequence
of several frequencies at a specific rate This avoids problems with fixed
channel narrowband noise and simple jamming Both transmitter and receiver
must have their hopping sequences synchronized to create the effect of a
single logical channel To an unsynchronised receiver an FHSS transmission
appears to be short-duration impulse noise 80211 may use FHSS or DSSS
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
No Provided the antenna is optimally designed for 24GHz or 5GHz operation
WLAN NICs often include an internal antenna which may provide sufficient
reception
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range
This frequency range has been set aside by the FCC and is generally labeled
the ISM band A few years ago Apple and several other large corporations
requested that the FCC allow the development of wireless networks within this
frequency range What we have today is a protocol and system that allows for
unlicensed use of radios within a prescribed power level The ISM band is
populated by Industrial Scientific and Medical devices that are all low power
devices but can interfere with each other
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID)
SSID is a configurable identification that allows clients to communicate to the
appropriate base station With proper configuration only clients that are
configured with the same SSID can communicate with base stations having
the same SSID SSID from a security point of view acts as a simple single
shared password between base stations and clients
9 What is an ESSID
ESSID stands for Extended Service Set Identifier and identifies the wireless
LAN The ESSID of the mobile device must match the ESSID of the AP to
communicate with the AP The ESSID is a 32-character maximum string and is
case-sensitive
Security FAQ
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Points
radio link
To secure the date across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Point‟s radio link we
could select any one of the security mode Static 64128256 bit WEP
WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK WPA2
2 What is WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security mechanism defined within the
80211 standard and designed to make the security of the wireless medium
equal to that of a cable (wire) WEP data encryption was designed to prevent
access to the network by intruders and to prevent the capture of wireless
LAN traffic through eavesdropping WEP allows the administrator to define a
set of respective Keys for each wireless network user based on a Key
String passed through the WEP encryption algorithm Access is denied by
anyone who does not have an assigned key Note WEP has shown to have
fundamental flaws in its key generation processing
3 What is WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN You can refer to
the User Guide for more information about it
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP
40 bit WEP and 64 bit WEP are the same encryption level and can interoperate
The lower level of WEP encryption uses a 40 bit (10 Hex character) as secret
key (set by user) and a 24 bit Initialization Vector (not under user control)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
34
(40+24=64) Some vendors refer to this level of WEP as 40 bit others as 64
bit
5 What is a WEP key
A WEP key is a user defined string of characters used to encrypt and decrypt
data
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP
No 128-bit WEP will not communicate with 64-bit WEP Although 128 bit WEP
also uses a 24 bit Initialization Vector but it uses a 104 bit as secret key Users
need to use the same encryption level in order to make a connection
7 Can the SSID be encrypted
No WEP only encrypts the data packets not the 80211 management
packetsThe SSID is in the beacon and probe management messages and
SSID goes over the air in clear text This makes obtaining the SSID easy by
sniffing 80211 wireless traffic
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff the SSID
Many APs by default have broadcasting the SSID turned on Sniffers typically
will find the SSID in the broadcast beacon packets Turning off the broadcast of
SSID in the beacon message (a common practice) does not prevent getting
the SSID since the SSID is sent in the clear in the probe message when a
client associates to an AP a sniffer just has to wait for a valid user to associate
to the network to see the SSID
9 What are Insertion Attacks
The insertion attacks are based on placing unauthorized devices on the
wireless network without going through a security process and review
10 What is Wireless Sniffer
An attacker can sniff and capture legitimate traffic Many of the sniffer tools for
Ethernet are based on capturing the first part of the connection session where
the data would typically include the username and password An intruder can
masquerade as that user by using this captured information An intruder who
monitors the wireless network can apply this same attack principle on the
wireless
11 What is OTIST How do I use it
OTIST is acronym for ZyXEL‟s bdquoOne Touch Intelligent Security Technology‟
It enables P-660HW-Dx v2 and ZyXEL‟s OTIST supported Wireless adapters
to establish connections of the WPA-PSK security mode automatically with
just one touch at the reset button on rear panel
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
35
To use this function on P-660HW-Dx v2 you could press the reset button on
P-660HW-Dx v2 for 1~5 seconds the OTIST is actived The P-660HW-Dx v2
will enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA-PSK automatically if no
WLAN security has been set The default setup key for OTIST is bdquo01234567‟
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
36
Application Notes
General Application Notes
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode
Setup your workstation
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
If the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet that means only
the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as an ADSL bridge
modem to connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account
and limit only one computer to access the Internet
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
To connect your computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN port the computer
must have an Ethernet adapter card installed For connecting a single
computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2 we use a Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
In most cases the IP address of the computer is assigned by the ISP
dynamically so you have to configure the computer as a DHCP client which
obtains the IP from the ISP using DHCP protocol The ISP may also provide
the gateway DNS via DHCP if they are available Otherwise please enter the
static IP addresses for all that the ISP gives to you in the network TCPIP
settings For Windows we check the option Obtain an IP address
automatically in its TCPIP setup please see the example shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
37
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
bridge mode We will use Web Configurator to guide you through the related
menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as bridge mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
(2)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
38
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For example
LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
(2) Turn off DHCP Server and configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 in
Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN We use 19216811 as
the LAN IP for P-660HW-Dx v2 in this case
Step 1 Disactive DHCP Server and apply it
Step 2 Assign an IP to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx v2 eg
19216811
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to install an Internet sharing device like
a router In this case we use the P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
Connect the LAN ports of all computers to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 using Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
Since the P-660HW-Dx v2 is set to DHCP server as default so you need only
to configure the workstations as the DHCP clients in the networking settings In
this case the IP address of the computer is assigned by the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 can also provide the DNS to the clients via DHCP if it is
available For this setup in Windows we check the option Obtain an IP
address automatically in its TCPIP setup Please see the example shown
below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
39
Set up your P-660HW-Dx v2 under routing mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
Routing mode for routing traffic We will use Web Configurator to guide you
through the related menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as routing mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For
example LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
IP Address
Assignment
Set to Dynamic if the ISP provides the IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2
dynamically Otherwise set to Static and enter the IP in the IP
Address field
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
40
(2) Configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 and the DHCP settings in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
What is DHCP Relay
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In addition to the
DHCP server feature the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports the DHCP relay function
When it is configured as DHCP server it assigns the IP addresses to the LAN
clients When it is configured as DHCP relay it is responsible for forwarding
the requests and responses negotiating between the DHCP clients and the
server See figure 1
Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
We could set the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay by the following command
in CLI
Ip dhcp enif0 mode relay
Ip dhcp enif0 relay server [Server IP Address]
4 SUA Notes
Tested SUANAT Applications (eg Cu-SeeMe ICQ NetMeeting)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
41
Introduction
Generally SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users However some applications
such as Cu-SeeMe and ICQ will need to connect to the local user behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 In such case a SUA server must be configured to forward
the incoming packets to the true destination behind SUA After the required
server are configured in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding the internal server or client applications can be accessed
by using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP Address
SUA Supporting Table
The following are the required Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding for the various applications running SUA mode
ZyXEL SUA Supporting Table1
Application
Required Settings in Port Forwarding
PortIP
Outgoing Connection Incoming
Connection
HTTP None 80client IP
FTP None 21client IP
TELNET None 23client IP
(and active Telnet
service from WAN)
POP3 None 110client IP
SMTP None 25client IP
mIRC
None for Chat
For DCC please set
DefaultClient IP
Windows PPTP None 1723client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
42
ICQ 99a None for Chat
For DCC please set
ICQ -gt preference -gt
connections -gt firewall
and set the firewall time
out to 80 seconds in
firewall setting
Defaultclient IP
ICQ 2000b None for Chat None for Chat
ICQ Phone 2000b None 6701client IP
Cornell 11 Cu-SeeMe None 7648client IP
White Pine 312 Cu-SeeMe2 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
White Pine 40 Cu-SeeMe 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
Microsoft NetMeeting 21 amp
3013
None 1720client IP
1503client IP
Cisco IPTV 200 None
RealPlayer G2 None
VDOLive None
Quake1064 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeII2305 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeIII105 beta None
StartCraft 6112client IP
Quick Time 40 None
pcAnywhere 80 None
5631client IP
5632client IP
22client IP
IPsec (ESP tunneling mode) None (one client only) DefaultClient
Microsoft Messenger Service
30 6901client IP 6901client IP
Microsoft Messenger Service
46 47 50hellip
(none UPnP)6
None for Chat File
transfer Video and Voice
None for Chat File
transfer Video and
Voice
Net2Phone None 6701client IP
Network Time Protocol (NTP) None 123 server IP
Win2k Terminal Server None 3389server IP
Remote Anything None 3996 - 4000client IP
Virtual Network Computing None 5500client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
43
(VNC) 5800client IP
5900client IP
AIM (AOL Instant Messenger) None for Chat and IM None for Chat and
IM
e-Donkey None 4661 - 4662client IP
POLYCOM Video
Conferencing None Defaultclient IP
iVISTA 41 None 80server IP
Microsoft Xbox Live7 None NA 1 Since SUA enables your LAN to appear as a single computer to the Internet
it is not possible to configure similar servers on the same LAN behind SUA 2 Because White Pine Cu-SeeMe uses dedicate ports (port 7648 amp port 24032)
to transmit and receive data therefore only one local Cu-SeeMe is allowed
within the same LAN 3 In SUA mode only one local NetMeeting user is allowed because the
outsiders can not distinguish between local users using the same internet IP 4 Certain Quake servers do not allow multiple users to login using the same
unique IP so only one Quake user will be allowed in this case Moreover
when a Quake server is configured behind SUA P-660HW-Dx v2 will not be
able to provide information of that server on the internet 5 Quake II has the same limitations as that of Quake I 6 P-660HW-Dx v2 supports MSN Messenger 46 47 50hellip video voice
pass-through NAT In addition for the Windows OS supported UPnP
(Universal Plug and Play) such as Windows XP and Windows ME UPnP
supported in P-660HW-Dx v2 is an alternative solution to pass through MSN
Messenger video voice traffic For more detail please refer to UPnP
application note 7 P-660HW-Dx v2 support Microsoft Xbox Live with factory default
configuration
Configurations
For example if the workstation operating Cu-SeeMe has an IP of 192168134
then the default SUA server must be set to 192168134 The peer Cu-SeeMe
user can reach this workstation by using P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
44
which can be obtained from Web Configurator
Configure an Internal Server behind SUA
Introduction
If you wish you can make internal servers (eg Web ftp or mail server)
accessible for outside users even though SUA makes your LAN appear as a
single machine to the outside world A service is identified by the port number
Also since you need to specify the IP address of a server behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 a server must have a fixed IP address and not be a DHCP
client whose IP address potentially changes each time P-660HW-Dx v2 is
powered on
In addition to the servers for specific services SUA supports a default server
A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for is
forwarded to the default server If the default server is not defined the service
request is simply discarded
Configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
45
To make a server visible to the outside world specify the port number of the
service and the inside address of the server in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The outside users can access
the local server using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address which can be
obtained from Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information
For example
Configuring an internal Web server for outside access (suppose the
Server IP Address is 192168110)
(1) Fill in the service name and server IP Address press button bdquoAdd‟
(2) If add successfully the Web Configurator will display message
bdquoConfiguration updated successfully‟ at the bottom You can see the port
forwarding rule on the same page the default port for Web Server is 80
(3) If you want to change the port for Web Server you could press button
bdquoModify‟ on corresponding rule then modify and apply it
Default port numbers for some services
Service Port Number
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
46
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
Configure a PPTP server behind SUA
Introduction
PPTP is a tunneling protocol defined by the PPTP forum that allows PPP
packets to be encapsulated within Internet Protocol (IP) packets and
forwarded over any IP network including the Internet itself
In order to run the Windows 9x PPTP client you must be able to establish an
IP connection with a tunnel server such as the Windows NT Server 40
Remote Access Server
Windows Dial-Up Networking uses the Internet standard Point-to-Point (PPP)
to provide a secure optimized multiple-protocol network connection over
dial-up telephone lines All data sent over this connection can be encrypted
and compressed and multiple network level protocols (TCPIP NetBEUI and
IPX) can be run correctly Windows NT Domain Login level security is
preserved even across the Internet
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
47
Window98 PPTP Client Internet NT RAS Server Protocol Stack
PPTP appears as new modem type (Virtual Private Networking Adapter) that
can be selected when setting up a connection in the Dial-Up Networking folder
The VPN Adapter type does not appear elsewhere in the system Since PPTP
encapsulates its data stream in the PPP protocol the VPN requires a second
dial-up adapter This second dial-up adapter for VPN is added during the
installation phase of the Upgrade in addition to the first dial-up adapter that
provides PPP support for the analog or ISDN modem
The PPTP is supported in Windows NT and Windows 98 already For
Windows 95 it needs to be upgraded by the Dial-Up Networking 12 upgrade
Configuration
This application note explains how to establish a PPTP connection with a
remote private network in the P-660HW-Dx v2 SUA case In ZyNOS all PPTP
packets can be forwarded to the internal PPTP Server (WinNT server) behind
SUA The port number of the PPTP has to be entered in the Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding on
P-660HW-Dx v2 to forward to the appropriate private IP address of Windows
NT server
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
48
Example
The following example shows how to dial to an ISP via the P-660HW-Dx v2
and then establish a tunnel to a private network There will be three items that
you need to set up for PPTP application these are PPTP server (WinNT)
PPTP client (Win9x) and the P-660HW-Dx v2
(1) PPTP server setup (WinNT)
Add the VPN service from Control Panel -gtNetwork
Add an user account for PPTP logged on user
Enable RAS port
Select the network protocols from RAS such as IPX TCPIP NetBEUI
Set the Internet gateway to P-660HW-Dx v2
(2) PPTP client setup (Win9x)
Add one VPN connection from Dial-Up Networking by entering the
correct username amp password and the IP address of the P-660HW-Dx
v2s Internet IP address for logging to NT RAS server
Set the Internet gateway to the router that is connecting to ISP
(3) P-660HW-Dx v2 setup
Before making a VPN connection from Win9x to WinNT server you
need to connect P-660HW-Dx v2 router to your ISP first
Enter the IP address of the PPTP server (WinNT server) and the
port number for PPTP as shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
49
Select service name as bdquoPPTP‟ fill in the Server IP Address then press button
bdquoAdd‟
When you have finished the above settings you can ping to the remote Win9x
client from WinNT This ping command is used to demonstrate that remote
the Win9x can be reached across the Internet If the Internet connection
between two LANs is achievable you can place a VPN call from the remote
Win9x client
For example Cping 203661132
When a dial-up connection to ISP is established a default gateway is assigned
to the router traffic through that connection Therefore the output below shows
the default gateway of the Win9x client after the dial-up connection has been
established
Before making a VPN connection from the Win9x client to the NT server you
need to know the exact Internet IP address that the ISP assigns to
P-660HW-Dx v2 router in SUA mode and enter this IP address in the VPN
dial-up dialog box You can check this Internet IP address from PNC Monitor or
S Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information If the Internet IP address
is a fixed IP address provided by ISP in SUA mode then you can always use
this IP address for reaching the VPN server
In the following example the IP address 1401131225 is dynamically
assigned by ISP You must enter this IP address in the VPN Server dialog box
for reaching the PPTP server After the VPN link is established you can start
the network protocol application such as IP IPX and NetBEUI
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
50
5 Using Full Feature NAT
When P-660HW-Dx v2 is in Routing mode you can select NAT Option as
Full Feature in Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit
Key Settings
Field Options Description
Network Address
Translation
Full Feature
When you select this option you can select
Address Mapping Set Number 1~8 in the
pull-down menu on the right
None NAT is disabled when you select this option
SUA Only
When you select this option this remote node
will use default SUA Address Mapping Set
You can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat
lookup 255‟ It‟s a read-only sets with two
rules Many-to-One and server mapping
Select Full Feature when you require other
mapping types
Configuring NAT
Address Mapping Sets and NAT Server Sets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
51
The P-660HW-Dx v2 has 8 remote nodes and so allows you to configure 8
NAT Address Mapping Sets You must specify which NAT Address Mapping
Set (1~8) to use in the remote node when you select Full Feature NAT
You can edit 10 rules for each Address Mapping Set You can edit the rules for
Address Mapping Sets 1 in Web Configurator The other Address Mapping
Sets 2~8 can only be configured in CLI (Command Line Interface)
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports We
can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Port Forwarding To use the NAT server sets you‟ve configured a Server
rule must be set up inside the NAT Address Mapping set Please see NAT
Server Sets for further information on how to apply it
When you select SUA Only the P-660HW-Dx v2 will use a default SUA
Address Mapping set for it It has two rules Many-to-One and Server You
can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat lookup 255‟
Please note that the fields in this menu are read-only However the settings of
the rule set 2 can be modified in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The following table explains the fields in this
above screen
Field Description OptionExample
set This is sequence number for Address Mapping Sets 255 for SUA
Internal
Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA)
0000 for the
Many-to-One type
Local End
IP
This is the starting local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0000 and the
End IP is 255255255255
255255255255
Global Start
IP
This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you
have a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start
IP
0000
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
52
Global End
IP This is the ending global IP address (IGA) NA
Type This is the NAT mapping types Many-to-One and
Server
Here we‟ll guide you to configure Address Mapping Sets from Web
Configurator and CLI (Since in Web Configurator we can only edit the rules
for Address Mapping Sets 1 The other Address Mapping Sets 2~8 can only
be configured in CLI)
Now lets begin with Web Configurator
Firstly let‟s come to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping
This menu is for Address Mapping Set 1 you can edit 10 Address Mapping
Rules for Set 1 You can edit or remove a rule by clicking the two buttons on
the rule table
Click the bdquoEditrsquo Button on the rule 1 then you can enter the window in which
you can edit an individual rule and configure the Mapping Type Local and
Global StartEnd IPs
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
53
The following table describes the fields in this screen
Field Description OptionExample
Type You can select one of the five mapping types from the
pull-down menu
1 One-to-One
2 Many-to-One
3 Many-to-Many
Overload
4 Many-to-Many No
Overload
5 Server
Local
IP
Start This is the starting local IP address (ILA) 0000
End
This is the ending local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0000 and the
End IP as 255255255255 This field is NA for
One-to-One type
255255255255
Global
IP
Start This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you have
a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start IP 0000
End
This is the ending global IP address (IGA) This
field is NA for One-to-One Many-to-One and Server
types
2001164
Note For all Local and Global IPs the End IP address must begin after the IP
Start address ie you cannot have an End IP address beginning before the
Start IP address
Configure Address Mapping Sets in CLI
Setp 1 Telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 (We suppose the LAN IP Address of
P-660HW-Dx v2 is 19216811)
Step 2 Select one Address Mapping Set (1~8) by command bdquoip nat
addrmap map [map ] [set name]‟ (set name is optional) Suppose we
configure set 2 in the example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
54
Setp 3 Set NAT address mapping rule for the Address Mapping Set you just
configured (Set 2 in this example) by command bdquoip nat addrmap rule [rule]
[insert | edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP] [global start IP] [global
end IP] [server set ]‟ Suppose we set a Many-to-One rule for set 2 by
command bdquoip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 1 192168110 192168120 172111
172111‟
Setp 4 Save the configuration by command bdquoip nat addrmap save‟ You can
apply the Address Mapping Set 2 to remote nodes in Web Configurator when
you select Full Feature NAT See the intire process as follows
Set 5 You can lookup the successfully configured Address Mapping Sets by
command bdquoip nat addrmap disp‟
Key Settings
CI Command Description
ip nat addrmap map [map] [set
name]
Select NAT address mapping set and set mapping set
name but set name is optional
Example
gt ip nat addrmap map 2 Test
ip nat addrmap rule [rule] [insert |
edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP]
[global start IP] [global end IP] [server
set ]
Set NAT address mapping rule If the ldquotyperdquo is not
ldquoinside-serverrdquo then the ldquotyperdquo field will still need a
dummy value like ldquo0rdquo
Type is 0 - 4 = one-to-one many-to-one
many-to-many-overload many-to-many-non overload
inside-server
Example
gt ip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 3 192168110
192168120 172111 172111
ip nat addrmap clear [map] [rule] Clear the selected rule of the set
ip nat addrmap freememory Discard Changes
ip nat addrmap disp Display nat set information
ip nat addrmap save Save settings
ip nat server load [set] Load the server sets of NAT into buffer
ip nat server disp [1] ldquodisp 1rdquo means to display the NAT server set in buffer
if parameter ldquo1rdquo is omitted then it will display all the
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
55
server sets
ip nat server save Save the NAT server set buffer into flash
ip nat server clear [set] Clear the server set [set] must use ldquosaverdquo command
to let it save into flash
ip nat server edit [rule] active Activate the rule [rule] rule number is 1 to 24 the
number 25-36 is for UPNP application
ip nat server edit [rule] svrport ltstart
portgt ltend portgt
Configure the port range from ltstart port gt to ltend
portgt
ip nat server edit [rule] remotehost
ltstart IPgt ltend IPgt
Configure the IP address range of remote host (Leave
it to be default value if you don‟t need this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] leasetime
ltsecondsgt
Configure the lease time (Leave it to be default value if
you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] rulename
ltstringgt
Configure the name of the rule (Leave it to be default
value if you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] forwardip ltIP
addressgt Configure the LAN IP address to be forwarded
ip nat server edit [rule] protocol
ltTCP|UDP|ALLgt
Configure the protocol to be used TCP UDP or ALL
(it must be capital)
NAT Server Sets
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports
(similar to the old SUA menu of before) If you wish you can make inside
servers for different services eg Web or FTP visible to the outside users
even though NAT makes your network appears as a single machine to the
outside world A server is identified by the port number eg Web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21
As an example (see the following figure) if you have a Web server at
192168136 and a FTP server at 192168133 then you need to specify for
port 80 (Web) the server at IP address 192168136 and for port 21 (FTP)
another at IP address 192168133
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
56
Please note that a server can support more than one service eg a server
can provide both FTP and Mail service while another provides only Web
service
The following procedures show how to configure a server behind NAT
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
Step 2 Select the service name from the pull-down menu and fill in the server
Address on bdquoServer IP Address‟ then click button bdquoAdd‟ to save it
Step 3 You could click the button bdquoEdit‟ on the rule to modify the Service name
Server IP Address StartEnd Port
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please
refer RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers
Service Port Number
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol)
1723
Examples
Internet Access Only
Internet Access with an Internal Server
Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
(1) Internet Access Only
In our Internet Access example we only need one rule where all our ILAs map
to one IGA assigned by the ISP You can just use the default SUA NAT or you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
57
could select Full Feature NAT and select an Address Mapping Set with a
Many-to-One Rule See the following figure
(2) Internet Access with an Internal Server
In this case we do exactly as the figure (use the convenient pre-configured
SUA Only set) and also go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
NAT -gt Port Forwarding to specify the Internet Server behind the NAT as
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
58
below
(3) Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
(One-to-One Many-to-One Server Set mapping types are used)
In this case we have 3 IGAs from the ISP We have two very busy internal FTP
servers and also an internal general server for the web and mail In this case
we want to assign the 3 IGAs by the following way using 4 NAT rules
Rule 1 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
Rule 3 (Many-to-One type) to map the other clients to IGA3 (200003)
Rule 4 (Server type) to map a web server and mail server with ILA3
(192168120) to IGA3 Type Server allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types to other machines behind NAT on the LAN
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
59
Step 1 In this case we need to map ILA to more than one IGA therefore we
must choose the Full Feature option from the NAT field in currently active
remote node and assign IGA3 to P-660HW-Dx v2‟s WAN IP Address
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping to begin configuring Address Mapping Set 1 We can see
there are 10 blank rule table that could be configured See the following setup
for the four rules in our case
Rule 1 Setup Select One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 Setup Selecting One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
60
Rule 3 Setup Select Many-to-One type to map the other clients to IGA3
(200003)
Rule 4 Setup Select Server type to map our web server and mail server with
ILA3 (192168120) to IGA3
Menu Network -gt NAT -gt Address Mapping should look as follows now
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
61
Step 3 Now we configure all other incoming traffic to go to our web server and
mail server from Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
(4) Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some mIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address In this case it is better to
use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types thus each
user login to the server using a unique global IP address The following figure
illustrates this
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
62
One rule configured for using Many-to-Many No Overload mapping type is
shown below
We can also do this by configure threeOne-to-One mapping type rules
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
What is DDNS
The DDNS service an IP Registry provides a public central database where
information such as email addresses hostnames IPs etc can be stored and
retrieved This solves the problems if your DNS server uses an IP associated
with dynamic IPs
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to access the internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
must inform the DDNS server the change of this IP so that the server can
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
63
update its IP-to-DNS entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is
updated the DNS name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still
usable
The DDNS servers the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports currently is
WWWDYNDNSORG where you apply the DNS from and update the WAN IP
to
Setup the DDNS
1 Before configuring the DDNS settings in the P-660HW-Dx v2 you must
register an account from the DDNS server such as
WWWDYNDNSORG first After the registration you have a hostname
for your internal server and a password using to update the IP to the
DDNS server
2 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Dynamic DNS
Select Active Dynamic DNS option
Key Settings
Option Description
Service Provider Enter the DDNS server in this field Currently we support
WWWDYNDNSORG
Active Toggle to Yes
Host Name Enter the hostname you subscribe from the above DDNS server
For example zyxelcomtw
User Name Enter the user name that the DDNS server gives to you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
64
Password Enter the password that the DDNS server gives to you
Enable Wildcard
Enter the hostname for the wildcard function that the
WWWDYNDNSORG supports Note that Wildcard option is
available only when the provider is httpwwwdyndnsorg
7 Network Management Using SNMP
ZyXEL SNMP Implementation
ZyXEL currently includes SNMP support in some P-660HW-Dx v2 routers It is
implemented based on the SNMPv1 so it will be able to communicate with
SNMPv1 NMSs Further users can also add ZyXELs private MIB in the NMS
to monitor and control additional system variables The ZyXELs private MIB
tree is shown in figure 3 For SNMPv1 operation ZyXEL permits one
community string so that the router can belong to only one community and
allows trap messages to be sent to only one NMS manager
Some traps are sent to the SNMP manager when anyone of the following
events happens
1 coldStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine coldstarts the trap will be sent after booting
2 warmStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine warmstarts the trap will be sent after booting
3 linkDown (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is down the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
4 linkUp (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is up the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
5 authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215)
When receiving any SNMP get or set requirement with wrong community
this trap is sent to the manager
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
65
6 whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-MIB)
When the system is going to restart (warmstart) the trap will be sent with the
reason of restart before rebooting
(1) For intentional reboot
In some cases (download new files CI command sys reboot ) reboot is
done intentionally And traps with the message System reboot by user will
be sent
(2) For fatal error
System has to reboot for some fatal errors And traps with the message of the
fatal code will be sent
Downloading ZyXELs private MIB
Configure the P-660HW-Dx v2 for SNMP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
66
The SNMP related settings in P-660HW-Dx v2 are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt SNMP The
following steps describe a simple setup procedure for configuring all SNMP
settings
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Get
Community
Enter the correct Get Community This Get Community must match the
Get- and GetNext community requested from the NMS The default is
public
Set
Community
Enter the correct Set Community This Set Community must match the
Set-community requested from the NMS The default is public
Trusted
Host
Enter the IP address of the NMS The P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will only
respond to SNMP messages coming from this IP address If 0000 is
entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will respond to all NMS
managers
Trap
Community
Enter the community name in each sent trap to the NMS This Trap
Community must match what the NMS is expecting The default is
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
67
public
Trap
Destination
Enter the IP address of the NMS that you wish to send the traps to If
0000 is entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will not send trap any
NMS manager
Note You may need to edit a firewall rule to permit SNMP Packets
8 Using syslog
You can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt
Logs -gt Log Settings -gt Syslog logging
Key Settings
Active Select it to active UNIX Syslog
Syslog IP Address Enter the IP address of the UNIX server that you wish to
send the syslog
Log Facility Select from the 7 different local options The log facility lets you
log the message in different server files Refer to your UNIX manual
9 Using IP Alias
What is IP Alias
In a typical environment a LAN router is required to connect two local
networks The P-660HW-Dx v2 can connect three local networks to the ISP or
a remote node we call this function as IP Alias In this case an internal
router is not required For example the network manager can divide the local
network into three networks and connect them to the Internet using
P-660HW-Dx v2s single user account See the figure below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
68
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports three virtual LAN interfaces via its single
physical Ethernet interface The first network can be configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN -gt DHCP Setup The second
and third networks that we call IP Alias 1 and IP Alias 2 can be configured
in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias
There are three internal virtual LAN interfaces for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to route
the packets fromto the three networks correctly They are enif0 for the major
network enif00 for the IP alias 1 and enif01 for the IP alias 2 Therefore
three routes are created in the P-660HW-Dx v2 as shown below when the
three networks are configured If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP is also enabled
the IP pool for the clients can be any of the three networks
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
69
You can edit filter rule to accept or deny LAN packets fromto the IP alias 12
go through the P-660HW-Dx v2 by command in CLI
lan index [index number]
Usage index number =1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt [set]
Usage set= the corresponding filter set number you‟ve configured
lan save
IP Alias Setup
(1) Edit the first network in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
LAN -gt IPDHCP Setup by configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s first LAN IP
address
Key Settings
DHCP
Setup
If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP server is enabled the IP pool for the clients
can be any of the three networks
TCPIP
Setup
Enter the first LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This will create the
first route in the enif0 interface
(2) Edit the second and third networks in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias by
configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s second and third LAN IP addresses
Key Settings
IP Alias 1 Active it and enter the second LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the second route in the enif00 interface
IP Alias 2 Active it and enter the third LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the third route in the enif01 interface
10 Using IP Policy Routing
What is IP Policy Routing (IPPR)
Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router
takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides
a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet
forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator
Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis
prior to the normal routing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
70
traffic among multiple paths For example if a network has both the Internet
and remote node connections we can route the Web packets to the Internet
using one policy and route the FTP packets to the remote LAN using another
policy See the figure below
Use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths
Benefits
Source-Based Routing - Network administrators can use policy-based
routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections
Quality of Service (QoS)- Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the
precedence or TOS (Type of Service) values in the IP header at the periphery
of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic
Cost Savings- IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on
high-bandwidth high-cost path while using low-path for batch traffic
Load Sharing- Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic
among multiple paths
How does the IPPR work
A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet
meets the criteria The action is taken only when all the criteria are met The
criteria include the source address and port IP protocol (ICMP UDP TCP
etc) destination address and port TOS and precedence (fields in the IP
header) and length The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between
interactive and bulk traffic Interactive applications eg Telnet tend to have
short packets while bulk traffic eg file transfer tends to have large packets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
71
The actions that can be taken include routing the packet to a different gateway
(and hence the outgoing interface) and the TOS and precedence fields in the
IP header IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of ZyNOS in style
and in implementation The policies are divided into sets where related
policies are grouped together A use defines the policies before applying them
to an interface or a remote node in the same fashion as the filters There are
12 policy sets with 6 policies in each set
Setup the IP Policy Routing
Setp 1 Set the index of IP routing policy set rule by command bdquoip
policyrouting set index [set] [rule]‟ Suppose set=1 rule=1 in this
example
Step 2 Suppose we‟d like to edit the rule like this
Policy Set Name=Test
Active= Yes
Criteria
IP Protocol = 6
Type of Service= Dont Care Packet length= 0
Precedence = Dont Care Len Comp= NA
Source
addr start= 19216812 end= 192168120
port start= 0 end= NA
Destination
addr start= 0000 end= NA
port start= 80 end= 80
Action= Matched
Gateway addr = 1921681254 Log= No
Type of Service= No Change
Precedence = No Change
This policy example forces the Web packets originated from the clients with IP
addresses from 19216812 to 192168120 be routed to the remote LAN via
the gateway 1921681254
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
ip policyrouting set name Test
(Set the name as Test of IP routing policy rule )
ip policyrouting set active yes
(Enable the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria protocol 6
(Set the protocol ID as 6(TCP) for the rule)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
72
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the criteria type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria packetlength 0
(Set the packet length as 0 for the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcip 19216812 192168120
(Set the source IP address for the rule Start=19216812 end=192168120)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcport 0
(Set the source port for the rule Start=0)
ip policyrouting set criteria destip 0000
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=0000)
ip policyrouting set criteria destport 80 80
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=80 end=80)
ip policyrouting set action actmatched
(Set the action for the rule Matched)
ip policyrouting set action gatewaytype 0
(Set gateway type for the rule Gateway Address)
ip policyrouting set action gatewayaddr 1921681254
(Set the gateway address for the rule 1921681254)
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the action type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the action precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set action log no
(Set log option for the rule no log)
ip polictrouting set save
(Save the rule)
Step 3 Apply the IP policy routing There are two interfaces to apply the policy
set they are the LAN interface and WAN interface It depends where the
gateway specified in the policy rule is located If the gateway you specified is
located on the local LAN you apply the policy set in LAN interface If the
gateway you specified is located on the remote WAN site you apply the policy
set in WAN interface
Apply to WAN Interface (Suppose we apply it to remote node 1 in the
example)
wan node index 1
wan node ippolicy 1
11 Using Call Scheduling
What is Call Scheduling
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
73
Call scheduling enables the mechanism for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to run the
remote node connection according to the pre-defined schedule This feature is
just like the scheduler in a video recorder which records the program according
to the specified time Users can apply at most 4 schedule sets in Remote Node
The remote node configured with the schedule set could be Forced On
Forced Down Enable Dial-On-Demand or Disable Dial-On-Demand on
specified date and time
How to configure a Call Scheduling
You can configure a call scheduling in CLI
Suppose we want to edit a call schedule set like this
Call Schedule Set =1
Set name=Test
Active= Yes
Start Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 - 12 - 27
How Often= Once
Once
Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 -12 -27
Start Time(hhmm)= 12 00
Duration(hhmm)= 16 00
Action= Enable Dial-on-demand
This schedule example permits a demand call on the line on 1200 am
2005-12-27 The maximum length of time this connection is allowed is 16
hours
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
wan callsch index 1
(Set call schedule index = 1 You must apply this command first before you
begin to configure call schedule)
wan callsch name Test
(Set the schedule name as Test)
wan callsch active Yes
(Enable schedule)
wan callsch startdate 2005 12 27
(Set schedule start date as 2005-12-27)
wan callsch oncedate 2005 12 27
(Set the schedule used just once it works on 2005-12-27)
wan callsch starttime 12 00
(Set the schedule start time as 1200)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
74
wan callsch duration 16 00
(Set schedule duration time as 16 hours)
wan callsch action 2
(Set action as dial-on-demand)
wan callsch save
(Save the current call schedule set)
Key Settings
Start Date
Start date of this schedule rule It can be unmatched with weekday
setting For example if Start Date is 20001002(Monday) but Monday
setting in weekday can be No
Forced On The node will always keep up during the setting period It is equivalent
to diable the idel timeout
Forced Down The node will always keep doen during the setting period The
connected remote node will be dropped
Enable
Dial-On-Demand The remote node accepts Dial-on-demand during this period
Disable
Dial-On-Demand
The remote node denies any demand dial during the period For the
existing connected nodes it will be dropped after idle timeout and no
triggered up
Start Time
Duration Start Time and Duration of this schedule
Apply the schedule to the Remote node
Multiple scheduling rules can program in a Remote node and they have
priority For example if we program the sets as 1234 in remote node then
the set 1 will override set 234 set 2 will override 34 and so on
We can apply the schedule to the remote node in CLI by the commands
wan node index []index]
wan node callsch [index]
wan node save
For example if we want to apply the call schedule set 1 to remote node 1 we
could use the commands
wan node index 1
wan node callsch 1
wan node save
Time Service in P-660HW-Dx v2
There is no RTC (Real-Time Clock) chip so the P-660HW-Dx v2 should launch
a mechanism to get current time and date from external server in boot time
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
75
Time service is implemented by the Daytime protocol(RFC-867) Time
protocol(RFC-868) and NTP protocol(RFC-1305) You have to assign an IP
address of a time server and then the P-660HW-Dx v2 will get the date time
and time-zone information from this server You can configure it in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt System -gt Time Setting
12 Using IP Multicast
What is IP Multicast
Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in two ways - unicast or broadcast
Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts Host groups
are identified by class D IP addresses ie those with 1110 as their
higher-order bits In dotted decimal notation host group addresses range from
224000 to 239255255255 Among them 224001 is assigned to the
permanent IP hosts group and 224002 is assigned to the multicast routers
group
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is the protocol used to support
multicast groups The latest version is version 2 (see RFC2236) IP hosts use
IGMP to report their multicast group membership to any immediate-neighbor
multicast routers so the multicast routers can decide if a multicast packet
needs to be forwarded At start up the P-660HW-Dx v2 queries all directly
connected networks to gather group membership
After that the P-660HW-Dx v2 updates the information by periodic queries
The P-660HW-Dx v2 implementation of IGMP is also compatible with version 1
The multicast setting can be turned on or off on Ethernet and remote nodes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
76
IP Multicast Setup
(1) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt LAN -gt IP -gt Advanced Setup
(2) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s remote node in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt Multicast
Key Settings
Multicast IGMP-v1 for IGMP version 1 IGMP-v2 for IGMP version 2
13 Using Bandwidth Management
Why Bandwidth Management (BWM)
Nowadays we have many different traffic types for Internet applications Some
traffic may consume high bandwidth such as FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
Some other traffic may not require high bandwidth but they require stable
supply of bandwidth such as VoIP traffic The VoIP quality would not be good
if all of the outgoing bandwidth is occupied via FTP Additionally chances are
that you would like to grant higher bandwidth for somebody special who is
using specific IP address in your network All of these are reasons why we
need bandwidth management
Using BWM
Setp 1 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gtSummary activate bandwidth management on the interface you
would like to manage We enable the BWM function on WAN interface in this
example
Enter the total speed for this interface that you want to allocate using
bandwidth management This appears as the bandwidth budget of the
interface‟s root class
Select how you want the bandwidth to be allocated Priority-Based means
bandwidth is allocated via priority so the traffic with highest priority would be
served first then the second priority is served secondly and so on If
Fairness-Based is chosen then the bandwidth is allocated by ratio Which
means if A class needs 300 kbps B class needs 600 kbps then the ratio of A
and Bs actual bandwidth is 12 So if we get 450 kbps in total then A would
get 150 kbps B would get 300 kbps We select Priority-Based in this
example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
77
Key Settings
Active
Check the box to enable BWM on the interface Note that if you would like
to manage traffic from WAN to LAN you should apply BWM on LAN
interface If you would like to management traffic from WAN to DMZ
please apply BWM on DMZ interface
Speed Enter the total speed to manage on this interface This value is the budget
of the class trees root
Scheduler
Choose the principle to allocate bandwidth on this interface
Priority-Based allocates bandwidth via priority Fairness-Based allocates
bandwidth by ratio
Maximize
Bandwidth
Usage
Check this box if you would like to give residuary bandwidth from Interface
to the classes who need more bandwidth than configured amount Do not
select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a
bandwidth class or you want to limit the bandwidth of each class at the
configured value (Please note that to meat the second condition you
should also disable Use All Managed Bandwidth in the BWM rule)
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Rule Setup select the interface Service Priority and Allocated
Bandwidth for this rule then click button bdquoAdd‟ to apply this rule
Step 3 You can modify the rule by clicking the button lsquoEditrsquo on the rule
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
78
Key Settings
RuleName Give this rule a name for example WWW
BW Budget Configure the bandwidth you would like to allocate to this rule
Priority Enter a number between 0 and 7 to set the priority of this class The
higher the number the higher the priority The default setting is 3
Use All
Managed
Bandwidth
Check this box if you would like to let this class to borrow bandwidth from
its parents when the required bandwidth is higher than the configured
amount Do not check this if you want to limit the bandwidth of this class
at the configured value(Please note that you should also disable
Maximize Bandwidth Usage on the interface to meet the condition)
Service Select User-defined SIP FTP or H323 to specify the traffic types
Destination
IP Address Enter the IP address of destination that meets this class
Destination
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
Destination
Port Enter the destination port number of the traffic
Source IP
Address
Enter the IP address of source that meats this class Note that for traffic
from LAN to WAN since BWM is before NAT you should use the IP
address before NAT processing
Source
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
79
Source Port Enter the source port number of the traffic
Protocol ID Enter the protocol number for the traffic 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP or 17 for
UDP
After configuration BWM you can check current bandwidth of the configured
traffic in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Monitor
14 Using Zero-Configuration
Zero-Configuration and VC auto-hunting
Zero-Configure feature can help customer to reduce the burden of setting
efforts Whenever system ADSL links up system will send out some probing
patterns system will analyze the packets returned from ISP and decide which
services the ISP may provide Because ADSL is based on a ATM network so
system have to pre-configured a VPIVCI hunting pool before Auto-Configure
function begins to work
The Zero-Configuration feature can hunt the encapsulation and VPIVCI value
and system will automatically configure itself if the hunting result is
successfully This feature has two constraints
1 It supports the ISP provides one kind of service (PPPoEPPPoA etc)
only otherwise the hunting will get confusing and failed
2 VC auto-hunting only supports dynamic WAN IP address If the router is
set a static WAN IP address VC auto-hunting function will be disabled
The entry of hunting pool must also contain the VPI VCI and which kinds of
hunting patterns you wish to send Whenever system send out all the probing
patterns with specific VPIVCI system will wait for 5~10 seconds and get the
response from ISP the response patterns will decide which kinds of ADSL
services of the line will be After that system will save back the correct VPI
VCI and also services (encapsulation) type into profile of WAN interface
Configure the VC auto-hunting preconfigured table
(1) Display auto-haunting preconfigured table by using command from CLI
wan atm vchunt display
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
80
(2) Add items to the auto-haunting preconfigured table by using commands
wan atm vchunt add ltremoteNodeIndexgt ltvpigt ltvcigt ltservice
bit(hex)gt
wan atm vchunt save
Note ltremote nodegt input the remote node index 1-8
ltvpigt vpi value
ltvcigt vci value
ltservicegt it‟s a hex value bit0PPPoEVC (1) bit1PPPoELLC (2)
bit2PPPoAVC (4) bit3PPPoALLC (8) bit4EnetVC (16) bit5 EnetLLC (32)
For example
(1) If you need service PPPoELLC and EnetLLC then the service bits will be
2+32 = 34 (decimal) = 22 (hex) you must input 22
(2) If you want to enable all service for VC hunting the service bits will be
1+2+4+8+16+32=63(decimal)= 3f (hex) you must input 3f
Need to perform save after this by command bdquowan atm vchunt save‟
(3) Delete items from the auto-haunting preconfigured table by useing
command
wan atm vchunt remove ltremote nodegt ltvpigt ltvcigt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
81
Using Zero configuration
You can enabledisable Zero Configuration in Network -gt WAN -gt Advanced
Setup
(1) After configure the auto-haunting preconfigured table You just need a PC
connected to the device LAN Ethernet port with the DSL sync up
(2) Open your web browser to access a Web site It should prompt and request
for your username password of your ISP account if your ISP provide PPPoE
or PPPoA service
(3) After key-in the correct info it will than test the connection If it is
successful it will than close the browser and you can open a new browser to
surf the Internet If the connection test fail it will go back to the page ask for
user name and password
(4) Basically the zero configuration only work on the VC that was preconigured
in the auto-haunting preconfigured table
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2
The common triple play scenario is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
82
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus we could assign different parameters to the PVC (CBR
UBR VBR-RT VBR-nRT) to guarantee different applications
We could configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 via CLI The command is
sys tripleplay set portbase ltEportIDgt ltPVCIDgt
For example sys tripleplay portbase set 1 1
sys tripleplay portbase set 2 2
sys tripleplay portbase set 3 3
The traffic from Ethernet port 1 must be forwarded to PVC1 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet port 2 must be forwarded to PVC2 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet Port3 must be forwarded to PVC3 vice versa
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to configure up to twelve filter sets with six
rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system You can apply up to
four filter sets to a particular port to block multiple types of packets With each
filter set having up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for
a single port
The packet filter function on P-660HW-Dx v2 is the same as before just that
you could only configure the filter set and apply them by command in CLI It‟s
very complex for common users to do it So here‟s the recommendation
(1) Usually if you want to block special packets you could edit a firewall rule in
Web Configurator
032
VOIP Server
IPTV Server
Internet
Server
Others
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
ATUR IP-DSLAM VL-Switch
CPE Access Network ISP
034
055
VOIP Telephone
Video Client
Clients surfing
Internet
Other clients
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
PVC1
PVC2
PVC3
PVC4 132
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
83
(2) By factory default ZyXEL has preconfigured many filter sets for your
reference you can check them by command
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Usage set 1~12 rule 1~6 Commonly the preconfigured filter sets are as
follows ltset 2 rule 1~6gt ltset 3 rule 1gt ltset 4 rule 1gt
sys filter set display
For example
This could satisfy mostly requirement You could select any of them to apply to
the WAN node or LAN Interface on demand The command is as follows
Apply to WAN node
wan node index ltnodegt
Usage node= 1~8 corresponding to the remote node 1~8
wan node filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt
ltset3gt ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to one remote node
wan node save
Apply to LAN Interface
lan index [index]
Usage index=1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
84
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt ltset3gt
ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to LAN Interface
lan save
(3) If you are very advanced user you could edit filter set by the following
command
sys filter set [set] [rule]
Usage Set up a filter set index to edit a set
set 1~12
rule 1~6
sys filter set type [typeID]
Usage typeID tcpip or generic
Note In one filter set you should configure all the rules in one type either
tcpip or generic
sys filter set enable
Usage Enable(active) the rule
sys filter set helliphellip(You could configure a filter rule on demand the newest
command is available on release note)
sys filter set save
Usage Don‟t forget to save the rule everytime you‟ve configured it
Reference Commands
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Set the index of filter set rule you must apply this
command first before you begin to configure the
filter rules
sys filter set name [set name] Set the name of filter set
sys filter set type [tcpip | generic] Set the type of filter rule
sys filter set enable Enable the rule
sys filter set disable Disable the rule
sys filter set protocol [protocol ] Set the protocol ID of the rule
sys filter set sourceroute [yes|no] Set the sourceroute yesno
sys filter set destip [address] [subnet
mask]
Set the destination IP address and subnet mask of
the rule
sys filter set destport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|notequal|less|greater]
Set the destination port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set srcip [address] [subnet
mask] Set the source IP address and subnet mask
sys filter set srcport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|not
Set the source port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
85
equal|less|greater] equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set tcpEstab [yes|no] Set TCP establish option
sys filter set more [yes|no] Set the more option to yesno
sys filter set log [type 0-3= none | match|
notmatch | both ]
Set the log type (it could be 0-3 =none match not
match both)
sys filter set actmatch[type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for match
sys filter set actnomatch [type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for not match
sys filter set offset [] Set offset for the generic rule
sys filter set length [] Set the length for generic rule
sys filter set mask [] Set the mask for generic rule
sys filter set value [(depend on length in
hex)] Set the value for generic rule
sys filter set clear Clear the current filter set
sys filter set save Save the filter set parameters
sys filter set display [set][rule] Display Filter set information Wo parameter it will
display buffer information
sys filter set freememory Discard Changes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
86
Wireless Application Notes
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode
Ad hoc Introduction
What is Ad Hoc mode
Ad hoc mode is a wireless network consists of a number of stations without
access points Without using an access point or any connection to a wired
network a client unit in Ad hoc operation mode can communicate directly to
other client units just as using a cross over Ethernet cable connecting 2 hosts
together via a NIC card for direct connection when configured in Ad hoc mode
without an access point being present Ad hoc operation is ideal for small
networks of no more than 2-4 computers Larger networks would require the
use of one or perhaps several access points
Configuration for Wireless Station A
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
87
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
88
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Configuration for Wireless Station B
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
89
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
90
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Step 7 Station A now are able to connect to Station B
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure Introduction
For Infrastructure WLANs multiple Access Points (APs) like the WLAN to the
wired network and allow users to efficiently share network resources The
Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also
mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
91
Configure Wireless Access Point to Infrastructure mode using Web
configurator
To configure Infrastructure mode of your P-660HW-Dx v2 wireless AP please
follow the steps below
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gt General Configure the basic parameters for Wireless LAN
Step 2 You could click the button bdquoAdvanced Setup‟ for more detailed
configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
92
Configuration Wireless Station to Infrastructure mode
To configure Infrastructure mode on your ZyAIR G-200 Wireless Network
Adapter please follow the following steps
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
93
Step 3 Select Infrastructure from the operation mode pull down menu fill in an
SSID or leave it as any if you wish to connect to any AP than press Apply
Change to take effect
Step 4 Click on Site Survey tab and press search all the available AP will be
listed
Step 5 Double click on the AP you want to associated with
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
94
Step 6 After the client have associated with the selected AP The linked APs
channel current linkup rate SSID link quality and signal strength will show on
the Link Info page You now successfully associate with the selected AP with
Infrastructure Mode
3 MAC Filter
MAC Filter Overview
Users can use MAC Filter as a method to restrict unauthorized stations from
accessing the APs ZyXELs APs provide the capability for checking MAC
address of the station before allowing it to connect to the network This
provides an additional layer of control layer in that only stations with registered
MAC addresses can connect This approach requires that the list of MAC
addresses be configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
95
ZyXEL MAC Filter Implementation
ZyXELs MAC Filter Implementation allows users to define a list to allow or
block association from STAs The filter set allows users to input 12 entries in
the list If Allow Association is selected all other STAs which are not on the list
will be denied Otherwise if Deny Association is selected all other STAs which
are not on the list will be allowed for association Users can choose either way
to configure their filter rule
Configure the WLAN MAC Filter
The MAC Filter related settings in ZyXEL APs are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gtMAC Filter
Before you configure the MAC filter you need to know the MAC address of the
client first If not knowing what your MAC address is please enter a command
ipconfig all after DOS prompt to get the MAC (physical) address of your
wireless client
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gtMAC Filter active MAC Filter
Step 2 Enter the MAC Addresses of wireless cards in the filter set to allow or
deny association from these cards
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Filter Action
Allow or block association from MAC addresses contained in this list If Allow
Association is selected in this field hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list
will be allowed to associate with AP If Deny Association is selected in this field
hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list will be blocked
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
96
MAC Address This field specifies those MAC Addresses that you want to add in the list
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
Introduction
The 80211 standard describes the communication that occurs in wireless
LANs
The Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm is used to protect wireless
communication from eavesdropping because wireless transmissions are
easier to intercept than transmissions over wired networks and wireless is a
shared medium everything that is transmitted or received over a wireless
network can be intercepted
WEP relies on a secret key that is shared between a mobile station (eg a
laptop with a wireless Ethernet card) and an access point (ie a base station)
The secret key is used to encrypt packets before they are transmitted and an
integrity check is used to ensure that packages are not modified during the
transition The standard does not discuss how the shared key is established In
practice most installations use a single key that is shared between all mobile
stations and access points APs You can refer to the User Guide for more
detailed information about it
Setting up the Access Point
You can set up the Access Point from Web configurator Advanced Setup
Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General (You can also configure it via CLI)
Step 1 Select bdquoStatic WEP‟ from the pull down menu bdquoSecurity Mode‟ in Web
Configurator
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
97
Step 2 Set up WEP Key in the Web Configurator You need to set the one of
the following parameters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 5 characters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 10 hexadecimal digits
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 13 characters
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 26 hexadecimal digits
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 29 characters
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 58 hexadecimal digits
There are two ways you can configure the WEP Key
(1) You can put in a special WEP key in the bdquoWEP Key‟ menu directly
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
98
(2) You can also put in an arbitrary sequence of characters in the
bdquoPassphrase‟ and then press button bdquoGenerate‟ to let the P-660HW-Dx v2
generate WEP Key for you
Setting up the Station
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar or right click
the utility icon then select Show Config Utility
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
99
The utility will pop up on your windows screen
Note If the utility icon doesnt exist in your task bar click Start -gt
Programs -gt helliphellip to start the utility
Step 2 Select the Configuration tab
Select bdquoSet Security‟ to configure encryption type and parameters
correspond with access point
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
100
Note You should select Key 1 as default Transmit Key since the P-660HW-Dx
v2 is supposed to use Key 1 by default
Key settings
The WEP Encryption type of station has to equal to the access point
Check ASCII field for characters WEP key or uncheck ASCII field for
Hexadecimal digits WEP key
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
101
Hexadecimal digits dont need to precede by 0x
For example
64-bits with characters WEP key Key1= 2e3f4
64-bits with hexadecimal digits WEP key Key1= 123456789A
5 Site Survey
Introduction
What is Site Survey
An RF site survey is a MAP to RF contour of RF coverage in a particular
facility With wireless system it is very difficult to predict the propagation of
radio waves and detect the presence of interfering signals Walls doors
elevator shafts and other obstacles offer different degree of attenuation This
will cause the RF coverage pattern be irregular and hard to predict
Site survey can help us overcome these problem and even provide us a map
of RF coverage of the facility
Preparation
Below are the steps to complete a simple site survey with simple tools
1 First you will need to obtain a facility diagram such as blueprints This is
for you to mark and take record on
2 Visually inspect the facility walk through the facility to verify the accuracy of
the diagram and mark down any large obstacle you see that may effect the RF
signal such as metal shelf metal desk etc on the diagram
3 Identify users area when doing so ask a question where is wireless
coverage needed and where does not and note and take note on the diagram
this is information is needed to determine the number of AP required
4 Determine the preliminary access point location on the facility diagram base
on the service area needed obstacles power wall jack considerations
Survey on Site
Step 1 With the diagram with all information you gathered in the preparation
phase Now you are ready to make the survey
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
102
Step 2 Install an access point at the preliminary location
Step 3 Use a notebook with wireless client installed and run its utility An utility
will provide information such as connection speed current used channel
associated rate link quality signal strength and etc information as shown in
utility below
Step 4 Its always a good idea to start with putting the access point at the
corner of the room and walk away from the access point in a systematic
manner Record the changes at point where transfer rate drop and the link
quality and signal strength information on the diagram as you go alone
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
103
Step 5 When you reach the farthest point of connection mark the spot Now
you move the access point to this new spot as have already determine the
farthest point of the access point installation spot if wireless service is required
from corner of the room
Step 6 Repeat step 1~5 and now you should be able to mark an RF coverage
area as illustrated in above picutre
Step 7 You may need more than one access point is the RF coverage area
hasn‟t covered all the wireless service area you needed
Step 8 Repeat step 1~6 of survey on site as necessary upon completion you
will have a diagram and information of site survey As illustrated below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
104
Note If there are more than one access point is needed be sure to make the
adjacent access point service area over lap one another So the wireless
station is able to roam For more information please refer to roaming at
6 Configure 8021x and WPA
What is the WPA Functionality
Configuration for Access Point
Configuration for your PC
What is WPA Functionality
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
105
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN
Here comes WPA-PSK Application example for your reference
Configuration for Access point
The IEEE 8021x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the
authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management
Authentication can be done using local user database internal to the
P-660HW-Dx v2 (authenticate up to 32 users) or an external RADIUS server
for an unlimited number of users
Step 1 To change your P-660HW-Dx v2s authentication settings login Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General
-gtSecurity
Step 2 Select lsquoSecurity Mode‟ as WAP-PSK
Step 3 Type the Pre Shared Key in the Pre-Shared Key field
Step 4 Click Apply to finish
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
106
Configuration for your PC
Step 1 Double click on your wireless utility icon in your windows task bar the
utility will pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select the configuration tab type in the SSID (Service Set Identifier)
select the operating Mode as Infrastructure and select proper channel
Step 3 Click Set Security to configure the security parameters
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
107
Step 4 Click OK for finish and begin to Site survey Connect to the AP as you
have configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
108
Step 5 Click Link Info tab if the PC associated and authenticated with AP
successfully we will see the following information
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
109
Support Tool
1 LANWAN Packet Trace
The Prestige packet trace records and analyzes packets running on LAN and
WAN interfaces It is designed for users with technical backgrounds who are
interested in the details of the packet flow on LAN or WAN end of Prestige It is
also very helpful for diagnostics if you have compatibility problems with your
ISP or if you want to know the details of a packet for configuring a filter rule
The format of the display is as following
Packet
[index] [timersecond][channel-receivetransmit][length] [protocol]
[sourceIPport] [destIPport]
There are two ways to dump the trace
Online Trace--display the trace real time on screen
Offline Trace--capture the trace first and display later
The details for capturing the trace in CLI as follows
First of all you need to telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 firstly The password is
Administrator passwords bdquoadmin‟ by default
Online Trace
(1) Trace LAN packet
Disable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
none
Enable to capture the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
110
(2) Trace WAN packet
Disable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
none
Enable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
111
Offline Trace
Disable the capture of the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel
mpoa00 none
Enable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Wait for packet passing through the Prestige over LAN
Disable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw off amp sys trcl sw off
Display the trace briefly by entering sys trcp brief
Display specific packets by using sys trcp parse ltfrom_indexgt ltto_indexgt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
112
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal
Step 1 Initiate a hyper terminal connection from your PC(suppose you
connected to the LAN port of P-660HW-Dx v2)
Step 2 Click the bdquoproperties‟ to configure parameters to telnet to the
P-660HW-Dx v2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
113
Step 3 So that after you invoke the relevant commands you could save the
logs you‟ve captured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
114
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP
Using TFTP client software
Uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Uploaddownload Prestige configurations via LAN
(1) Using TFTP to uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout
in Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 Enter the IP address of the Prestige
Step 5To upload the firmware please save the remote file as ras to
Prestige After the transfer is complete the Prestige will program the upgraded
firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
115
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige The local file is the source
file of the ZyNOS firmware that is available in your hard disk The remote file is
the file name that will be saved in Prestige Check the port number 69 and
512-Octet blocks for TFTP Check Binary mode for file transfering
(2) Using TFTP to uploaddownload SMT configurations via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 To download the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please get the
remote file rom-0 from the Prestige
Step 5 To upload the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please save the
remote file as rom-0 in the Prestige
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
116
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige
The local file is the source file of your configuration file that is available
in your hard disk
The remote file is the file name that will be saved in Prestige
Check the port number 69 and 512-Octet blocks for TFTP
Check Binary mode for file transfering
Using TFTP command on Windows NT
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Download ZyNOS via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] get ras [localfile]
Step 4 Upload P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] put
[localfile] rom-0
Step 5 Download P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP]
get rom-0 [localfile]
Using TFTP command on UNIX
Before you begin
1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Example
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ telnet 19216811
Trying 19216811
Connected to 19216811
Escape character is ^]
Password
rasgt sys stdio 0
(Open a new window)
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get rom-0 [local-rom] lt- change to binary mode
lt- download configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-rom] rom-0 lt- upload configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get ras [local-ras ] lt- download firmware
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-ras] ras lt- upload firmware
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
117
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files
In addition to upload the firmware and configuration file via the console port
and TFTP client you can also upload the firmware and configuration files to
the Prestige using FTP
To use this feature your workstation must have a FTP client software See the
example shown below
Using FTP client software
Note The remote file name for the firmware is ras and the configuration file is
rom-0
Step 1 Use FTP client from your workstation to connect to the Prestige by
entering the IP address of the Prestige
Step2 Press Enter key to ignore the username because the Prestige does
not check the username
Step 3 Enter the CLI password as the FTP login password the default is
admin
Step 4 Enter command bin to set the transfer type to binary
Step 5 Use put command to transfer the file to the Prestige
Example
Step 1 Connect to the Prestige by entering the Prestiges IP and Administrator
password in the FTP software Set the transfer type to Auto-Detect or
Binary
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
118
Step 2 Press OK to ignore the Username prompt
Step 3 To upload the firmware file we transfer the local ras file to overwrite
the remote ras file
To upload the configuration file we transfer the local rom-0 to overwrite
the remote rom-0 file
Step 4 The Prestige reboots automatically after the uploading is finished
Please do not power off the router at this moment
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
119
CI Command Reference
Command Syntax and General User Interface
CI has the following command syntax
command ltiface | device gt subcommand [param]
command subcommand [param]
command | help
command subcommand | help
General user interface
1 Shows the following commands and all major (sub)commands
2 exit Exit Subcommand
To get the latest CI Command list
The latest CI Command list is available in release note of every ZyXEL
firmware release Please goto ZyXEL public WEB site
httpwwwzyxelcomsupportdownload_indexphp to download firmware
package (zip) you should unzip the package to get the release note in PDF
format
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
12
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
6 The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Bridge and Router mode whats the
difference between them
When the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet which means
only the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use bridge mode which works as an ADSL modem to
connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account and limit
only one computer to access the Internet
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to add another Internet sharing device
like a router In this case we use the router mode which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
7 How do I know I am using PPPoE
PPPoE requires a user account to login to the providers server If you need to
configure a user name and password on your computer to connect to the ISP
you are probably using PPPoE If you are simply connected to the Internet
when you turn on your computer you probably are not You can also check
your ISP or the information sheet given by the ISP Please choose PPPoE as
the encapsulation type in the P-660HW-Dx v2 if the ISP uses PPPoE
8 Why does my provider use PPPoE
PPPoE emulates a familiar Dial-Up connection It allows your ISP to provide
services using their existing network configuration over the broadband
connections Besides PPPoE supports a broad range of existing applications
and service including authentication accounting secure access and
configuration management
9 What is DDNS
The Dynamic DNS service allows you to alias a dynamic IP address to a static
hostname allowing your computer to be more easily accessed from various
locations on the Internet To use the service you must first apply an account
from several free Web servers such as httpwwwdyndnsorg
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to reach our internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
13
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
updates this IP to DDNS server so that the server can update its IP-to-DNS
entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is updated the DNS
name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still usable
10 When do I need DDNS service
When you want your internal server to be accessed by using DNS name rather
than using the dynamic IP address we can use the DDNS service The DDNS
server allows to alias a dynamic IP address to a static hostname Whenever
the ISP assigns you a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2 sends this IP to the DDNS
server for its updates
11 What is DDNS wildcard Does the P-660HW-Dx v2 support DDNS
wildcard
Some DDNS servers support the wildcard feature which allows the hostname
yourhostdyndnsorg to be aliased to the same IP address as
yourhostdyndnsorg This feature is useful when there are multiple servers
inside and you want users to be able to use things such as
wwwyourhostdyndnsorg and still reach your hostname
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports DDNS wildcard that httpwwwdyndnsorg
supports When using wildcard you simply enter yourhostdyndnsorg in the
Host field in Menu 11 Configure Dynamic DNS
12 Can the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA handle IPSec packets sent by the
IPSec gateway
Yes the P-660HW-Dx v2s SUA can handle IPSec ESP Tunneling mode We
know when packets go through SUA SUA will change the source IP address
and source port for the host To pass IPSec packets SUA must understand
the ESP packet with protocol number 50 replace the source IP address of the
IPSec gateway to the routers WAN IP address However SUA should not
change the source port of the UDP packets which are used for key
managements Because the remote gateway checks this source port during
connections the port thus is not allowed to be changed
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
14
13 How do I setup my P-660HW-Dx v2 for routing IPSec packets over
SUA
For outgoing IPSec tunnels no extra setting is required
For forwarding the inbound IPSec ESP tunnel A Default server set is required
You could configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding -gt Default Server Setup
It is because SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users So to make an internal server
for outside access we must specify the service port and the LAN IP of this
server in Web configurator Thus SUA is able to forward the incoming packets
to the requested service behind SUA and the outside users access the server
using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address So we have to configure the
internal IPsec client as a default server (unspecified service port) when it acts
a server gateway
14 What is Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping allocates the bandwidth to WAN dynamically and aims at
boosting the efficiency of the bandwidth If there are serveral VCs in the
P-660HW-Dx v2 but only one VC activated at one time the P-660HW-Dx v2
allocates all the Bandwidth to the VC and the VC gets full bandwidth If another
VCs are activated later the bandwidth is yield to other VCs after ward
15 Why do we perform traffic shaping in the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 must manage traffic fairly and provide bandwidth
allocation for different sorts of applications such as voice video and data All
applications have their own natural bit rate Large data transactions have a
fluctuating natural bit rate The P-660HW-Dx v2 is able to support variable
traffic among different virtual connections Certain traffic may be discarded if
the virtual connection experiences congestion Traffic shaping defines a set of
actions taken by the P-660HW-Dx v2 to avoid congestion traffic shaping takes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
15
measures to adapt to unpredictable fluctuations in traffic flows and other
problems among virtual connections
16 What do the parameters (PCR SCR MBS) mean
Traffic shaping parameters (PCR SCR MBS) can be set in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt ATM Setup
Peak Cell Rate(PCR) The maximum bandwidth allocated to this connection
The VC connection throughput is limited by PCR
Sustainable Cell Rate(SCR) The least guaranteed bandwidth of a VC
When there are multi-VCs on the same line the VC throughput is guaranteed
by SCR
Maximum Burst Size(MBS) The amount of cells transmitted through this
VC at the Peak Cell Rate before yielding to other VCs Total bandwidth of the
line is dedicated to single VC if there is only one VC on the line However as
the other VC asking the bandwidth the MBS defines the maximum number of
cells transmitted via this VC with Peak Cell rate before yielding to other VCs
The P-660HW-Dx v2 holds the parameters for shaping the traffic among its
virtual channels If you do not need traffic shaping please set SCR = 0 MBS =
0 and PCR as the maximum value according to the line rate (for example 23
Mbps line rate will result PCR as 5424 cellsec)
17 What do the ATM QoS Types (CBR UBR VBR-nRT VBR-RT) mean
Constant bit rate(CBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that requires
the user to determine a fixed bandwidth requirement at the time the connection
is set up so that the data can be sent in a steady stream CBR service is often
used when transmitting fixed-rate uncompressed video
Unspecified bit rate(UBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that does
not guarantee any throughput levels and uses only available bandwidth UBR
is often used when transmitting data that can tolerate delays such as e-mail
Variable bit rate(VBR) An ATM bandwidth-allocation service that allows
users to specify a throughput capacity (ie a peak rate) and a sustained rate
but data is not sent evenly You can select VBR for bursty traffic and
bandwidth sharing with other applications It contains two subclasses
Variable bit rate nonreal time (VBR-nRT)
Variable bit rate real time (VBR-RT)
18 What is content filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
16
Internet Content filter allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies
tailored to your needs Content filter gives you the ability to block web sites that
contain key words (that you specify) in the URL You can set a schedule for
when the P-660HW-Dx v2 performs content filtering You can also specify
trusted IP Addresses on LAN for which the P-660HW-Dx v2 will not perform
content filtering You can configure the details about it in Web Configurator
Advanced setup Security -gt Content Filter
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
17
ADSL FAQ
1 How does ADSL compare to Cable modems
ADSL provides a dedicated service over a single telephone line cable
modems offer a dedicated service over a shared media While cable modems
have greater downstream bandwidth capabilities (up to 30 Mbps) that
bandwidth is shared among all users on a line and will therefore vary perhaps
dramatically as more users in a neighborhood get online at the same time
Cable modem upstream traffic will in many cases be slower than ADSL either
because the particular cable modem is inherently slower or because of rate
reductions caused by contention for upstream bandwidth slots The big
difference between ADSL and cable modems however is the number of lines
available to each There are no more than 12 million homes passed today that
can support two-way cable modem transmissions and while the figure also
grows steadily it will not catch up with telephone lines for many years
Additionally many of the older cable networks are not capable of offering a
return channel consequently such networks will need significant upgrading
before they can offer high bandwidth services
2 What is the expected throughput
In our test we can get about 16Mbps data rate on 15Kft using the 26AWG
loop The shorter the loop the better the throughput is
3 What is the microfilter used for
Generally the voice band uses the lower frequency ranging from 0 to 4KHz
while ADSL data transmission uses the higher frequency The micro filter acts
as a low-pass filter for your telephone set to ensure that ADSL transmissions
do not interfere with your voice transmissions For the details about how to
connect the micro filter please refer to the users manual
4 How do I know the ADSL line is up
You can see the DSL LED Green on the P-660HW-Dx v2s front panel is on
when the ADSL physical layer is up
5 How does the P-660HW-Dx v2 work on a noisy ADSL
Depending on the line quality the P-660HW-Dx v2 uses Fall Back and Fall
Forward to automatically adjust the date rate
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
18
6 Does the VC-based multiplexing perform better than the LLC-based
multiplexing
Though the LLC-based multiplexing can carry multiple protocols over a single
VC it requires extra header information to identify the protocol being carried
on the virtual circuit (VC) The VC-based multiplexing needs a separate VC for
carrying each protocol but it does not need the extra headers Therefore the
VC-based multiplexing is more efficient
7 How do I know the details of my ADSL line statistics
You can use the following CI commands to check the ADSL line
statistics
CIgt wan adsl perfdata
CIgt wan adsl status
CIgt wan adsl linedata far
CIgt wan adsl linedata near
You can also do it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Diagnostic -gt DSL Line -gt DSL Status
8 What are the signaling pins of the ADSL connector
The signaling pins on the P-660HW-Dx v2s ADSL connector are pin 3 and pin
4 The middle two pins for a RJ11 cable
9 What is triple play
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
19
More and more TelcoISPs are providing three kinds of services (VoIP Video
and Internet) over one existing ADSL connection
The different services (such as video VoIP and Internet access) require
different Qulity of Service
The high priority is Voice (VoIP) data
The Medium priority is Video (IPTV) data
The low priority is internet access such as ftp etc hellip
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus you can configure each PVC separately to assign different
QoS to different application
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
20
Firewall FAQ
General
1 What is a network firewall
A firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control
policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to
protect a trusted network from an untrusted network The firewall can be
thought of two mechanisms One to block the traffic and the other to permit
traffic
2 What makes P-660HW-Dx v2 secure
The P-660HW-Dx v2 is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks such as Ping of Death SYN Flood LAND
attack IP Spoofing etc It also uses stateful packet inspection to determine if
an inbound connection is allowed through the firewall to the private LAN The
P-660HW-Dx v2 supports Network Address Translation (NAT) which
translates the private local addresses to one or multiple public addresses This
adds a level of security since the clients on the private LAN are invisible to the
Internet
3 What are the basic types of firewalls
Conceptually there are three types of firewalls
1 Packet Filtering Firewall
2 Application-level Firewall
3 Stateful Inspection Firewall
Packet Filtering Firewalls generally make their decisions based on the header
information in individual packets These headers information include the
source destination addresses and ports of the packets
Application-level Firewalls generally are hosts running proxy servers which
permit no traffic directly between networks and which perform logging and
auditing of traffic passing through them A proxy server is an application
gateway or circuit-level gateway that runs on top of general operating system
such as UNIX or Windows NT It hides valuable data by requiring users to
communicate with secure systems by mean of a proxy A key drawback of this
device is performance
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
21
Stateful Inspection Firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against
defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP
address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the
integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols The flexible
nature of Stateful Inspection firewalls generally provides the best speed and
transparency however they may lack the granular application level access
control or caching that some proxies support
4 What kind of firewall is the P-660HW-Dx v2
1 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall inspects packets contents and IP
headers It is applicable to all protocols that understands data in the
packet is intended for other layers from network layer up to the
application layer
2 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall performs stateful inspection It takes into
account the state of connections it handles so that for example a
legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request
for that packet and allowed in Conversely an incoming packet
masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be
blocked
3 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall uses session filtering ie smart rules
that enhance the filtering process and control the network session
rather than control individual packets in a session
4 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall is fast It uses a hashing function to
search the matched session cache instead of going through every
individual rule for a packet
5 The P-660HW-Dx v2s firewall provides email service to notify you for
routine reports and when alerts occur
5 Why do you need a firewall when your router has packet filtering and
NAT built-in
With the spectacular growth of the Internet and online access companies that
do business on the Internet face greater security threats Although packet filter
and NAT restrict access to particular computers and networks however for
the other companies this security may be insufficient because packets filters
typically cannot maintain session state Thus for greater security a firewall is
considered
6 What is Denials of Service (DoS) attack
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a
connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable
a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
22
There are four types of DoS attacks
1 Those that exploits bugs in a TCPIP implementation such as Ping of
Death and Teardrop
2 Those that exploits weaknesses in the TCPIP specification such as
SYN Flood and LAND Attacks
3 Brute-force attacks that flood a network with useless data such as
Smurf attack
4 IP Spoofing
7 What is Ping of Death attack
Ping of Death uses a PING utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the
maximum 65535 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification The oversize
packet is then sent to an unsuspecting system Systems may crash hang or
reboot
8 What is Teardrop attack
Teardrop attack exploits weakness in the reassemble of the IP packet
fragments As data is transmitted through a network IP packets are often
broken up into smaller chunks Each fragment looks like the original packet
except that it contains an offset field The Teardrop program creates a series of
IP fragments with overlapping offset fields When these fragments are
reassembled at the destination some systems will crash hang or reboot
9 What is SYN Flood attack
SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each
packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response While the
targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK it queues up all
outstanding SYN-ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue
SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when
an internal timer (which is set a relatively long intervals) terminates the TCP
three-way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all
incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users
10 What is LAND attack
In a LAN attack hackers flood SYN packets to the network with a spoofed
source IP address of the targeted system This makes it appear as if the host
computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the
target system tries to respond to itself
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
23
11 What is Brute-force attack
A Brute-force attack such as Smurf attack targets a feature in the IP
specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting to quickly flood the
target network with useless data A Smurf hacker flood a destination IP
address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network the router will
broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network If there
are numerous hosts this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request
packet the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the intermediary
network but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address
known as the victim network This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all
available bandwidth making communications impossible
12 What is IP Spoofing attack
Many DoS attacks also use IP Spoofing as part of their attack IP Spoofing
may be used to break into systems to hide the hackers identity or to magnify
the effect of the DoS attack IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain
unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking
that the communications are coming from within the trusted network To
engage in IP Spoofing a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it
appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed
through the router or firewall
13 What are the default ACL firewall rules in P-660HW-Dx v2
There are two default ACLs pre-configured in the P-660HW-Dx v2 one allows
all connections from LAN to WAN and the other blocks all connections from
WAN to LAN except of the DHCP packets
Configuration
1 How do I configure the firewall
You can use the Web Configurator to configure the firewall for P-660HW-Dx v2
By factory default if you connect your PC to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 you can access Web Configurator via bdquohttp19216811‟
Note Donrsquot forget to type in the Administrator Password
2 How do I prevent others from configuring my firewall
There are several ways to protect others from touching the settings of your
firewall
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
24
1 Change the default Administrator password since it is required when
setting up the firewall
2 Limit who can access to your P-660HW-Dx v2‟s Web Configurator or
CLI You can enter the IP address of the secured LAN host in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt
[Service] -gtSecured Client IP to allow special access to your
P-660HW-Dx v2
The default value in this field is 0000 which means you do not care which
host is trying to telnet your P-660HW-Dx v2 or accessthe Web
Configurator of
3 Why cant I configure my P-660HW-Dx v2 using Web
ConfiguratorTelnet over WAN
There are four reasons that WWWTelnet from WAN is blocked
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable Telnet from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow WWWTelnet connection
from WAN The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
WWW (For accessing Web Configurator)
Source IP= Remote trusted host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP80
Action=Forward
TELNET (For accessing Command Line Interface)
Source IP= Telnet Client host
Destination IP= router WAN IP
Service= TCP23
Action=Forward
(2)You have disabled WWWTelnet service in Web Configurator Advanced
setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
25
(3) WWWTelnet service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host
entered in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote
MGNT
(4)A filter set which blocks WWWTelnet from WAN is applied to WAN node
You can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
4 Why cant I upload the firmware and configuration file using FTP over
WAN
(1) When the firewall is turned on all connections from WAN to LAN are
blocked by the default ACL rule To enable FTP from WAN you must turn
the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow FTP connection from WAN
The WAN-to-LAN ACL summary will look like as shown below
Source IP= FTP host
Destination IP= P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP
Service= FTP TCP21 TCP20
Action=Forward
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
26
(2) You have disabled FTP service in Web Configurator Advanced setup
Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(3) FTP service is enabled but your host IP is not the secured host entered
in Web Configurator Advanced setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT
(4) A filter set which blocks FTP from WAN is applied to WAN node You
can check by command
wan node index [index ]
wan node display
Log and Alert
1 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall log
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the firewall log immediately when the packet
matches a firewall rule The log for Default Firewall Policy (LAN to WAN WAN
to LAN WAN to WAN) is generated automatically with factory default setting
but you can change it in Web Configurator
2 What does the log show to us
The log supports up to 128 entries There are 5 columns for each entry Please
see the example shown below
3 How do I view the firewall log
All logs generated in P-660HW-Dx v2 including firewall logs IPSec logs
system logs are migrated to centralized logs So you can view firewall logs in
Centralized logs Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs
-gtView Log
The log keeps 128 entries the new entries will overwrite the old entries when
the log has over 128 entries
Before you can view firewall logs there are two steps you need to do
(1) Enable log function in Centralized logs setup via either one of the following
methods
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
27
Web configuration Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log
Settings check Access Control and Attacks options depending on
your real situation
CI command sys logs category [access | attack]
(2) Enable log function in firewall default policy or in firewall rules
After the above two steps you can view firewall logs via
Web Configurator Advanced setup Maintenance -gt Logs -gtView
Log
View the log by CI command sys logs disp
You can also view Centralized logs via mail or syslog please configure mail
server or Unix Syslog server in Web configuration Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings
4 When does the P-660HW-Dx v2 generate the firewall alert
The P-660HW-Dx v2 generates the alert when an attack is detected by the
firewall and sends it via Email So to send the alert you must configure the
mail server and Email address using Web Configurator Advanced Setup
Maintenance -gt Logs -gt Log Settings You can also specify how frequently
you want to receive the alert in it
5 What is the difference between the log and alert
A log entry is just added to the log inside the P-660HW-Dx v2 and e-mailed
together with all other log entries at the scheduled time as configured An alert
is e-mailed immediately after an attacked is detected
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
28
Wireless FAQ
General FAQ
1 What is a Wireless LAN
Wireless LANs provide all the functionality of wired LANs without the need for
physical connections (wires) Data is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier
and transmitted through the ether Typical bit-rates are 11Mbps and 54Mbps
although in practice data throughput is half of this Wireless LANs can be
formed simply by equipping PCs with wireless NICs If connectivity to a wired
LAN is required an Access Point (AP) is used as a bridging device APs are
typically located close to the centre of the wireless client population
2 What are the advantages of Wireless LAN
Mobility Wireless LAN systems can provide LAN users with access to
real-time information anywhere in their organization This mobility supports
productivity and service opportunities not possible with wired networks
Installation Speed and Simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be
fast and easy and can eliminate the need to pull cable through walls and
ceilings
Installation Flexibility Wireless technology allows the network to go where
wire cannot go
Reduced Cost-of-Ownership While the initial investment required for
wireless LAN hardware can be higher than the cost of wired LAN hardware
overall installation expenses and life-cycle costs can be significantly lower
Long-term cost benefits are greatest in dynamic environments requiring
frequent moves and changes
Scalability Wireless LAN systems can be configured in a variety of topologies
to meet the needs of specific applications and installations Configurations are
easily changed and range from peer-to-peer networks suitable for a small
number of users to full infrastructure networks of thousands of users that
enable roaming over a broad area
3 What is the disadvantage of Wireless LAN
The speed of Wireless LAN is still relatively slower than wired LAN The setup
cost of Wireless LAN is relative high because the equipment cost including
access point and PCMCIA Wireless LAN card is higher than hubs and CAT 5
cables
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
29
4 Where can you find 80211 wireless networks
Airports hotels and even coffee shops like Starbucks are deploying 80211
networks so people can wirelessly surf the Internet with their laptops
5 What is an Access Point
The AP (access point also known as a base station) is the wireless server that
with an antenna and a wired Ethernet connection that broadcasts information
using radio signals AP typically acts as a bridge for the clients It can pass
information to wireless LAN cards that have been installed in computers or
laptops allowing those computers to connect to the campus network and the
Internet without wires
6 Whatrsquos the difference between IEEE80211abg
The IEEE 80211 is a wireless LAN industry standard and the objective of
IEEE 80211 is to make sure that different manufactures wireless LAN devices
can communicate to each other Below is a brief comparison for the
IEEE80211 abg
Publish
Time
Frequency
Band(GHZ)
Data Rate(Mbps) Compatibility
IEEE80211a 1999 UNII Band
515~5825
691218243648
54
Only work with
80211a
devices
IEEE80211b 1999 ISM Band
24~24835
125511 -
IEEE80211g 2001 ISM Band
24~24835
691218243648
54
Backward
compatible with
80211b
devices
7 Is it possible to use wireless products from a variety of vendors
Yes As long as the products comply to the same IEEE 80211 standard The
Wi-Fi logo is used to define 80211b compatible products Wi-Fi5 is a
compatibility standard for 80211a products running in the 5GHz band
8 What is Wi-Fi
The Wi-Fi logo signifies that a product is interoperable with wireless
networking equipment from other vendors A Wi-Fi logo product has been
tested and certified by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA)
The Socket Wireless LAN Card is Wi-Fi certified and that means that it will
work (interoperate) with any brand of Access Point that is also Wi-Fi certified
9 What types of devices use the 24GHz Band
Various spread spectrum radio communication applications use the 24 GHz
band This includes WLAN systems (not necessarily of the type IEEE
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
30
80211b) cordless phones wireless medical telemetry equipment and
Bluetoothtrade short-range wireless applications which include connecting
printers to computers and connecting modems or hands-free kits to mobile
phones
10 Does the 80211 interfere with Bluetooth device
Any time devices are operated in the same frequency band there is the
potential for interference
Both the 80211bg and Bluetooth devices occupy the same24-to-2483-GHz
unlicensed frequency range-the same band But a Bluetooth device would not
interfere with other 80211 devices much more than another 80211 device
would interefere While more collisions are possible with the introduction of a
Bluetooth device they are also possible with the introduction of another 80211
device or a new 24 GHz cordless phone for that matter But BlueTooth
devices are usually low-power so the effects that a Bluetooth device may have
on an 80211 network if any arent far-reaching
11 Can radio signals pass through wall
Transmitting through a wall is possible depending upon the material used in its
construction In general metals and substances with a high water content do
not allow radio waves to pass through Metals reflect radio waves and concrete
attenuates radio waves The amount of attenuation suffered in passing through
concrete will be a function of its thickness and amount of metal re-enforcement
used
12 What are potential factors that may causes interference among WLAN
products
Factors of interference
(1) Obstacles walls ceilings furniturehellip etc
(2) Building Materials metal door aluminum studs
(3) Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors
Solution
(1) Minimizing the number of walls and ceilings
(2) Antenna is positioned for best reception
(3) Keep WLAN products away from electrical devices eg microwaves
monitors electric motorshellip etc
(4) Add additional APs if necessary
13 Whats the difference between a WLAN and a WWAN
WLANs are generally privately owned wireless systems that are deployed in a
corporation warehouse hospital or educational campus setting Data rates
are high and there are no per-packet charges for data transmission
WWANs are generally publicly shared data networks designed to provide
coverage in metropolitan areas and along traffic corridors WWANs are owned
by a service provider or carrier Data rates are low and charges are based on
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
31
usage Specialized applications are characteristically designed around short
burst messaging
14 Can I manually swap the wireless module without damage any
hardware
Yes it will not harm the hardware but the module will not be detected and
work after inserting to the slot You need to reboot the router to initialize the
module
15 What wireless security mode does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
The wireless security modes supported on P-660HW-Dx v2 are Static
WEP WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK and WPA2
16 What Wireless standard does P-660HW-Dx v2 support
It supports IEEE 80211bgg+ standard
17 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support MAC filtering
Yes it supports up to 32 MAC Address filtering
18 Does P-660HW-Dx v2 support auto rate adaption
Yes it means that the AP on P-660HW-Dx v2 will automatically decelerate
when devices move beyond the optimal range or other interference is present
If the device moves back within the range of a higher-speed transmission the
connection will automatically speed up again Rate shifting is a physical-layer
mechanism transparent to the user and the upper layers of the protocol stack
Advanced FAQ
1 What is Ad Hoc mode
A wireless network consists of a number of stations without using an access
point or any connection to a wired network
2 What is Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure mode implies connectivity to a wired communications
infrastructure If such connectivity is required the Access Points must be used
to connect to the wired LAN backbone Wireless clients have their
configurations set for infrastructure mode in order to utilise access points
relaying
3 How many Access Points are required in a given area
This depends on the surrounding terrain the diameter of the client population
and the number of clients If an area is large with dispersed pockets of
populations then extension points can be used for extend coverage
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
32
4 What is Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (DSSS)
DSSS spreads its signal continuously over a wide frequency band DSSS
maps the information bearing bit-pattern at the sending station into a higher
data rate bit sequence using a chipping code The chipping code (also known
as processing gain) introduces redundancy which allows data recovery if
certain bit errors occur during transmission The FCC rules the minimum
processing gain should be 10 typical systems use processing gains of 20
IEEE 80211b specifies the use of DSSS
5 What is Frequency-hopping Spread Spectrum Technology ndash (FHSS)
FHSS uses a narrowband carrier which hops through a predefined sequence
of several frequencies at a specific rate This avoids problems with fixed
channel narrowband noise and simple jamming Both transmitter and receiver
must have their hopping sequences synchronized to create the effect of a
single logical channel To an unsynchronised receiver an FHSS transmission
appears to be short-duration impulse noise 80211 may use FHSS or DSSS
6 Do I need the same kind of antenna on both sides of a link
No Provided the antenna is optimally designed for 24GHz or 5GHz operation
WLAN NICs often include an internal antenna which may provide sufficient
reception
7 Why the 24 GHZ Frequency range
This frequency range has been set aside by the FCC and is generally labeled
the ISM band A few years ago Apple and several other large corporations
requested that the FCC allow the development of wireless networks within this
frequency range What we have today is a protocol and system that allows for
unlicensed use of radios within a prescribed power level The ISM band is
populated by Industrial Scientific and Medical devices that are all low power
devices but can interfere with each other
8 What is Server Set ID (SSID)
SSID is a configurable identification that allows clients to communicate to the
appropriate base station With proper configuration only clients that are
configured with the same SSID can communicate with base stations having
the same SSID SSID from a security point of view acts as a simple single
shared password between base stations and clients
9 What is an ESSID
ESSID stands for Extended Service Set Identifier and identifies the wireless
LAN The ESSID of the mobile device must match the ESSID of the AP to
communicate with the AP The ESSID is a 32-character maximum string and is
case-sensitive
Security FAQ
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
33
1 How do I secure the data across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Points
radio link
To secure the date across the P-660HW-Dx v2 Access Point‟s radio link we
could select any one of the security mode Static 64128256 bit WEP
WPA-PSK WPA WPA2-PSK WPA2
2 What is WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security mechanism defined within the
80211 standard and designed to make the security of the wireless medium
equal to that of a cable (wire) WEP data encryption was designed to prevent
access to the network by intruders and to prevent the capture of wireless
LAN traffic through eavesdropping WEP allows the administrator to define a
set of respective Keys for each wireless network user based on a Key
String passed through the WEP encryption algorithm Access is denied by
anyone who does not have an assigned key Note WEP has shown to have
fundamental flaws in its key generation processing
3 What is WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN You can refer to
the User Guide for more information about it
4 What is the difference between 40-bit and 64-bit WEP
40 bit WEP and 64 bit WEP are the same encryption level and can interoperate
The lower level of WEP encryption uses a 40 bit (10 Hex character) as secret
key (set by user) and a 24 bit Initialization Vector (not under user control)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
34
(40+24=64) Some vendors refer to this level of WEP as 40 bit others as 64
bit
5 What is a WEP key
A WEP key is a user defined string of characters used to encrypt and decrypt
data
6 Will 128-bit WEP communicate with 64-bit WEP
No 128-bit WEP will not communicate with 64-bit WEP Although 128 bit WEP
also uses a 24 bit Initialization Vector but it uses a 104 bit as secret key Users
need to use the same encryption level in order to make a connection
7 Can the SSID be encrypted
No WEP only encrypts the data packets not the 80211 management
packetsThe SSID is in the beacon and probe management messages and
SSID goes over the air in clear text This makes obtaining the SSID easy by
sniffing 80211 wireless traffic
8 By turning off the broadcast of SSID can someone still sniff the SSID
Many APs by default have broadcasting the SSID turned on Sniffers typically
will find the SSID in the broadcast beacon packets Turning off the broadcast of
SSID in the beacon message (a common practice) does not prevent getting
the SSID since the SSID is sent in the clear in the probe message when a
client associates to an AP a sniffer just has to wait for a valid user to associate
to the network to see the SSID
9 What are Insertion Attacks
The insertion attacks are based on placing unauthorized devices on the
wireless network without going through a security process and review
10 What is Wireless Sniffer
An attacker can sniff and capture legitimate traffic Many of the sniffer tools for
Ethernet are based on capturing the first part of the connection session where
the data would typically include the username and password An intruder can
masquerade as that user by using this captured information An intruder who
monitors the wireless network can apply this same attack principle on the
wireless
11 What is OTIST How do I use it
OTIST is acronym for ZyXEL‟s bdquoOne Touch Intelligent Security Technology‟
It enables P-660HW-Dx v2 and ZyXEL‟s OTIST supported Wireless adapters
to establish connections of the WPA-PSK security mode automatically with
just one touch at the reset button on rear panel
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
35
To use this function on P-660HW-Dx v2 you could press the reset button on
P-660HW-Dx v2 for 1~5 seconds the OTIST is actived The P-660HW-Dx v2
will enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA-PSK automatically if no
WLAN security has been set The default setup key for OTIST is bdquo01234567‟
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
36
Application Notes
General Application Notes
1 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Bridge mode
Setup your workstation
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
If the ISP limits some specific computers to access Internet that means only
the traffic tofrom these computers will be forwarded and the other will be
filtered In this case we use P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as an ADSL bridge
modem to connect to the ISP The ISP will generally give one Internet account
and limit only one computer to access the Internet
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
To connect your computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN port the computer
must have an Ethernet adapter card installed For connecting a single
computer to the P-660HW-Dx v2 we use a Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
In most cases the IP address of the computer is assigned by the ISP
dynamically so you have to configure the computer as a DHCP client which
obtains the IP from the ISP using DHCP protocol The ISP may also provide
the gateway DNS via DHCP if they are available Otherwise please enter the
static IP addresses for all that the ISP gives to you in the network TCPIP
settings For Windows we check the option Obtain an IP address
automatically in its TCPIP setup please see the example shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
37
Setup your P-660HW-Dx v2 under bridge mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
bridge mode We will use Web Configurator to guide you through the related
menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as bridge mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
(2)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
38
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For example
LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
(2) Turn off DHCP Server and configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 in
Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN We use 19216811 as
the LAN IP for P-660HW-Dx v2 in this case
Step 1 Disactive DHCP Server and apply it
Step 2 Assign an IP to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx v2 eg
19216811
2 Internet Access Using P-660HW-Dx v2 under Routing mode
For most Internet users having multiple computers want to share an Internet
account for Internet access they have to install an Internet sharing device like
a router In this case we use the P-660HW-Dx v2 which works as a general
Router plus an ADSL Modem
Set up your workstation
(1) Ethernet connection
Connect the LAN ports of all computers to the LAN Interface of P-660HW-Dx
v2 using Ethernet cable
(2) TCPIP configuration
Since the P-660HW-Dx v2 is set to DHCP server as default so you need only
to configure the workstations as the DHCP clients in the networking settings In
this case the IP address of the computer is assigned by the P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 can also provide the DNS to the clients via DHCP if it is
available For this setup in Windows we check the option Obtain an IP
address automatically in its TCPIP setup Please see the example shown
below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
39
Set up your P-660HW-Dx v2 under routing mode
The following procedure shows you how to configure your P-660HW-Dx v2 as
Routing mode for routing traffic We will use Web Configurator to guide you
through the related menu
(1) Configure P-660HW-Dx v2 as routing mode and configure Internet setup
parameters in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt WAN -gt
Internet Connection
Key Settings
Option Description
Encapsulation Select the correct Encapsulation type that your ISP supports For
example RFC 1483
Multiplexing Select the correct Multiplexing type that your ISP supports For
example LLC
VPI amp VCI
number
Specify a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) given to you by your ISP
IP Address
Assignment
Set to Dynamic if the ISP provides the IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2
dynamically Otherwise set to Static and enter the IP in the IP
Address field
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
40
(2) Configure a LAN IP for the P-660HW-Dx v2 and the DHCP settings in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN
3 Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
What is DHCP Relay
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In addition to the
DHCP server feature the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports the DHCP relay function
When it is configured as DHCP server it assigns the IP addresses to the LAN
clients When it is configured as DHCP relay it is responsible for forwarding
the requests and responses negotiating between the DHCP clients and the
server See figure 1
Setup the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay
We could set the P-660HW-Dx v2 as a DHCP Relay by the following command
in CLI
Ip dhcp enif0 mode relay
Ip dhcp enif0 relay server [Server IP Address]
4 SUA Notes
Tested SUANAT Applications (eg Cu-SeeMe ICQ NetMeeting)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
41
Introduction
Generally SUA makes your LAN appear as a single machine to the outside
world LAN users are invisible to outside users However some applications
such as Cu-SeeMe and ICQ will need to connect to the local user behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 In such case a SUA server must be configured to forward
the incoming packets to the true destination behind SUA After the required
server are configured in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT
-gt Port Forwarding the internal server or client applications can be accessed
by using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP Address
SUA Supporting Table
The following are the required Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding for the various applications running SUA mode
ZyXEL SUA Supporting Table1
Application
Required Settings in Port Forwarding
PortIP
Outgoing Connection Incoming
Connection
HTTP None 80client IP
FTP None 21client IP
TELNET None 23client IP
(and active Telnet
service from WAN)
POP3 None 110client IP
SMTP None 25client IP
mIRC
None for Chat
For DCC please set
DefaultClient IP
Windows PPTP None 1723client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
42
ICQ 99a None for Chat
For DCC please set
ICQ -gt preference -gt
connections -gt firewall
and set the firewall time
out to 80 seconds in
firewall setting
Defaultclient IP
ICQ 2000b None for Chat None for Chat
ICQ Phone 2000b None 6701client IP
Cornell 11 Cu-SeeMe None 7648client IP
White Pine 312 Cu-SeeMe2 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
White Pine 40 Cu-SeeMe 7648client IP amp
24032client IP
Defaultclient IP
Microsoft NetMeeting 21 amp
3013
None 1720client IP
1503client IP
Cisco IPTV 200 None
RealPlayer G2 None
VDOLive None
Quake1064 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeII2305 None Defaultclient IP
QuakeIII105 beta None
StartCraft 6112client IP
Quick Time 40 None
pcAnywhere 80 None
5631client IP
5632client IP
22client IP
IPsec (ESP tunneling mode) None (one client only) DefaultClient
Microsoft Messenger Service
30 6901client IP 6901client IP
Microsoft Messenger Service
46 47 50hellip
(none UPnP)6
None for Chat File
transfer Video and Voice
None for Chat File
transfer Video and
Voice
Net2Phone None 6701client IP
Network Time Protocol (NTP) None 123 server IP
Win2k Terminal Server None 3389server IP
Remote Anything None 3996 - 4000client IP
Virtual Network Computing None 5500client IP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
43
(VNC) 5800client IP
5900client IP
AIM (AOL Instant Messenger) None for Chat and IM None for Chat and
IM
e-Donkey None 4661 - 4662client IP
POLYCOM Video
Conferencing None Defaultclient IP
iVISTA 41 None 80server IP
Microsoft Xbox Live7 None NA 1 Since SUA enables your LAN to appear as a single computer to the Internet
it is not possible to configure similar servers on the same LAN behind SUA 2 Because White Pine Cu-SeeMe uses dedicate ports (port 7648 amp port 24032)
to transmit and receive data therefore only one local Cu-SeeMe is allowed
within the same LAN 3 In SUA mode only one local NetMeeting user is allowed because the
outsiders can not distinguish between local users using the same internet IP 4 Certain Quake servers do not allow multiple users to login using the same
unique IP so only one Quake user will be allowed in this case Moreover
when a Quake server is configured behind SUA P-660HW-Dx v2 will not be
able to provide information of that server on the internet 5 Quake II has the same limitations as that of Quake I 6 P-660HW-Dx v2 supports MSN Messenger 46 47 50hellip video voice
pass-through NAT In addition for the Windows OS supported UPnP
(Universal Plug and Play) such as Windows XP and Windows ME UPnP
supported in P-660HW-Dx v2 is an alternative solution to pass through MSN
Messenger video voice traffic For more detail please refer to UPnP
application note 7 P-660HW-Dx v2 support Microsoft Xbox Live with factory default
configuration
Configurations
For example if the workstation operating Cu-SeeMe has an IP of 192168134
then the default SUA server must be set to 192168134 The peer Cu-SeeMe
user can reach this workstation by using P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
44
which can be obtained from Web Configurator
Configure an Internal Server behind SUA
Introduction
If you wish you can make internal servers (eg Web ftp or mail server)
accessible for outside users even though SUA makes your LAN appear as a
single machine to the outside world A service is identified by the port number
Also since you need to specify the IP address of a server behind the
P-660HW-Dx v2 a server must have a fixed IP address and not be a DHCP
client whose IP address potentially changes each time P-660HW-Dx v2 is
powered on
In addition to the servers for specific services SUA supports a default server
A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for is
forwarded to the default server If the default server is not defined the service
request is simply discarded
Configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
45
To make a server visible to the outside world specify the port number of the
service and the inside address of the server in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The outside users can access
the local server using the P-660HW-Dx v2s WAN IP address which can be
obtained from Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information
For example
Configuring an internal Web server for outside access (suppose the
Server IP Address is 192168110)
(1) Fill in the service name and server IP Address press button bdquoAdd‟
(2) If add successfully the Web Configurator will display message
bdquoConfiguration updated successfully‟ at the bottom You can see the port
forwarding rule on the same page the default port for Web Server is 80
(3) If you want to change the port for Web Server you could press button
bdquoModify‟ on corresponding rule then modify and apply it
Default port numbers for some services
Service Port Number
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
46
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
Configure a PPTP server behind SUA
Introduction
PPTP is a tunneling protocol defined by the PPTP forum that allows PPP
packets to be encapsulated within Internet Protocol (IP) packets and
forwarded over any IP network including the Internet itself
In order to run the Windows 9x PPTP client you must be able to establish an
IP connection with a tunnel server such as the Windows NT Server 40
Remote Access Server
Windows Dial-Up Networking uses the Internet standard Point-to-Point (PPP)
to provide a secure optimized multiple-protocol network connection over
dial-up telephone lines All data sent over this connection can be encrypted
and compressed and multiple network level protocols (TCPIP NetBEUI and
IPX) can be run correctly Windows NT Domain Login level security is
preserved even across the Internet
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
47
Window98 PPTP Client Internet NT RAS Server Protocol Stack
PPTP appears as new modem type (Virtual Private Networking Adapter) that
can be selected when setting up a connection in the Dial-Up Networking folder
The VPN Adapter type does not appear elsewhere in the system Since PPTP
encapsulates its data stream in the PPP protocol the VPN requires a second
dial-up adapter This second dial-up adapter for VPN is added during the
installation phase of the Upgrade in addition to the first dial-up adapter that
provides PPP support for the analog or ISDN modem
The PPTP is supported in Windows NT and Windows 98 already For
Windows 95 it needs to be upgraded by the Dial-Up Networking 12 upgrade
Configuration
This application note explains how to establish a PPTP connection with a
remote private network in the P-660HW-Dx v2 SUA case In ZyNOS all PPTP
packets can be forwarded to the internal PPTP Server (WinNT server) behind
SUA The port number of the PPTP has to be entered in the Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding on
P-660HW-Dx v2 to forward to the appropriate private IP address of Windows
NT server
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
48
Example
The following example shows how to dial to an ISP via the P-660HW-Dx v2
and then establish a tunnel to a private network There will be three items that
you need to set up for PPTP application these are PPTP server (WinNT)
PPTP client (Win9x) and the P-660HW-Dx v2
(1) PPTP server setup (WinNT)
Add the VPN service from Control Panel -gtNetwork
Add an user account for PPTP logged on user
Enable RAS port
Select the network protocols from RAS such as IPX TCPIP NetBEUI
Set the Internet gateway to P-660HW-Dx v2
(2) PPTP client setup (Win9x)
Add one VPN connection from Dial-Up Networking by entering the
correct username amp password and the IP address of the P-660HW-Dx
v2s Internet IP address for logging to NT RAS server
Set the Internet gateway to the router that is connecting to ISP
(3) P-660HW-Dx v2 setup
Before making a VPN connection from Win9x to WinNT server you
need to connect P-660HW-Dx v2 router to your ISP first
Enter the IP address of the PPTP server (WinNT server) and the
port number for PPTP as shown below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
49
Select service name as bdquoPPTP‟ fill in the Server IP Address then press button
bdquoAdd‟
When you have finished the above settings you can ping to the remote Win9x
client from WinNT This ping command is used to demonstrate that remote
the Win9x can be reached across the Internet If the Internet connection
between two LANs is achievable you can place a VPN call from the remote
Win9x client
For example Cping 203661132
When a dial-up connection to ISP is established a default gateway is assigned
to the router traffic through that connection Therefore the output below shows
the default gateway of the Win9x client after the dial-up connection has been
established
Before making a VPN connection from the Win9x client to the NT server you
need to know the exact Internet IP address that the ISP assigns to
P-660HW-Dx v2 router in SUA mode and enter this IP address in the VPN
dial-up dialog box You can check this Internet IP address from PNC Monitor or
S Web Configurator Status -gt WAN Information If the Internet IP address
is a fixed IP address provided by ISP in SUA mode then you can always use
this IP address for reaching the VPN server
In the following example the IP address 1401131225 is dynamically
assigned by ISP You must enter this IP address in the VPN Server dialog box
for reaching the PPTP server After the VPN link is established you can start
the network protocol application such as IP IPX and NetBEUI
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
50
5 Using Full Feature NAT
When P-660HW-Dx v2 is in Routing mode you can select NAT Option as
Full Feature in Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit
Key Settings
Field Options Description
Network Address
Translation
Full Feature
When you select this option you can select
Address Mapping Set Number 1~8 in the
pull-down menu on the right
None NAT is disabled when you select this option
SUA Only
When you select this option this remote node
will use default SUA Address Mapping Set
You can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat
lookup 255‟ It‟s a read-only sets with two
rules Many-to-One and server mapping
Select Full Feature when you require other
mapping types
Configuring NAT
Address Mapping Sets and NAT Server Sets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
51
The P-660HW-Dx v2 has 8 remote nodes and so allows you to configure 8
NAT Address Mapping Sets You must specify which NAT Address Mapping
Set (1~8) to use in the remote node when you select Full Feature NAT
You can edit 10 rules for each Address Mapping Set You can edit the rules for
Address Mapping Sets 1 in Web Configurator The other Address Mapping
Sets 2~8 can only be configured in CLI (Command Line Interface)
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports We
can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Port Forwarding To use the NAT server sets you‟ve configured a Server
rule must be set up inside the NAT Address Mapping set Please see NAT
Server Sets for further information on how to apply it
When you select SUA Only the P-660HW-Dx v2 will use a default SUA
Address Mapping set for it It has two rules Many-to-One and Server You
can see it in CLI by command bdquoip nat lookup 255‟
Please note that the fields in this menu are read-only However the settings of
the rule set 2 can be modified in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network
-gt NAT -gt Port Forwarding The following table explains the fields in this
above screen
Field Description OptionExample
set This is sequence number for Address Mapping Sets 255 for SUA
Internal
Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA)
0000 for the
Many-to-One type
Local End
IP
This is the starting local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0000 and the
End IP is 255255255255
255255255255
Global Start
IP
This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you
have a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start
IP
0000
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
52
Global End
IP This is the ending global IP address (IGA) NA
Type This is the NAT mapping types Many-to-One and
Server
Here we‟ll guide you to configure Address Mapping Sets from Web
Configurator and CLI (Since in Web Configurator we can only edit the rules
for Address Mapping Sets 1 The other Address Mapping Sets 2~8 can only
be configured in CLI)
Now lets begin with Web Configurator
Firstly let‟s come to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping
This menu is for Address Mapping Set 1 you can edit 10 Address Mapping
Rules for Set 1 You can edit or remove a rule by clicking the two buttons on
the rule table
Click the bdquoEditrsquo Button on the rule 1 then you can enter the window in which
you can edit an individual rule and configure the Mapping Type Local and
Global StartEnd IPs
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
53
The following table describes the fields in this screen
Field Description OptionExample
Type You can select one of the five mapping types from the
pull-down menu
1 One-to-One
2 Many-to-One
3 Many-to-Many
Overload
4 Many-to-Many No
Overload
5 Server
Local
IP
Start This is the starting local IP address (ILA) 0000
End
This is the ending local IP address (ILA) If the rule is
for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0000 and the
End IP as 255255255255 This field is NA for
One-to-One type
255255255255
Global
IP
Start This is the starting global IP address (IGA) If you have
a dynamic IP enter 0000 as the Global Start IP 0000
End
This is the ending global IP address (IGA) This
field is NA for One-to-One Many-to-One and Server
types
2001164
Note For all Local and Global IPs the End IP address must begin after the IP
Start address ie you cannot have an End IP address beginning before the
Start IP address
Configure Address Mapping Sets in CLI
Setp 1 Telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 (We suppose the LAN IP Address of
P-660HW-Dx v2 is 19216811)
Step 2 Select one Address Mapping Set (1~8) by command bdquoip nat
addrmap map [map ] [set name]‟ (set name is optional) Suppose we
configure set 2 in the example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
54
Setp 3 Set NAT address mapping rule for the Address Mapping Set you just
configured (Set 2 in this example) by command bdquoip nat addrmap rule [rule]
[insert | edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP] [global start IP] [global
end IP] [server set ]‟ Suppose we set a Many-to-One rule for set 2 by
command bdquoip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 1 192168110 192168120 172111
172111‟
Setp 4 Save the configuration by command bdquoip nat addrmap save‟ You can
apply the Address Mapping Set 2 to remote nodes in Web Configurator when
you select Full Feature NAT See the intire process as follows
Set 5 You can lookup the successfully configured Address Mapping Sets by
command bdquoip nat addrmap disp‟
Key Settings
CI Command Description
ip nat addrmap map [map] [set
name]
Select NAT address mapping set and set mapping set
name but set name is optional
Example
gt ip nat addrmap map 2 Test
ip nat addrmap rule [rule] [insert |
edit] [type] [local start IP] [local end IP]
[global start IP] [global end IP] [server
set ]
Set NAT address mapping rule If the ldquotyperdquo is not
ldquoinside-serverrdquo then the ldquotyperdquo field will still need a
dummy value like ldquo0rdquo
Type is 0 - 4 = one-to-one many-to-one
many-to-many-overload many-to-many-non overload
inside-server
Example
gt ip nat addrmap rule 1 edit 3 192168110
192168120 172111 172111
ip nat addrmap clear [map] [rule] Clear the selected rule of the set
ip nat addrmap freememory Discard Changes
ip nat addrmap disp Display nat set information
ip nat addrmap save Save settings
ip nat server load [set] Load the server sets of NAT into buffer
ip nat server disp [1] ldquodisp 1rdquo means to display the NAT server set in buffer
if parameter ldquo1rdquo is omitted then it will display all the
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
55
server sets
ip nat server save Save the NAT server set buffer into flash
ip nat server clear [set] Clear the server set [set] must use ldquosaverdquo command
to let it save into flash
ip nat server edit [rule] active Activate the rule [rule] rule number is 1 to 24 the
number 25-36 is for UPNP application
ip nat server edit [rule] svrport ltstart
portgt ltend portgt
Configure the port range from ltstart port gt to ltend
portgt
ip nat server edit [rule] remotehost
ltstart IPgt ltend IPgt
Configure the IP address range of remote host (Leave
it to be default value if you don‟t need this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] leasetime
ltsecondsgt
Configure the lease time (Leave it to be default value if
you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] rulename
ltstringgt
Configure the name of the rule (Leave it to be default
value if you don‟t want this command)
ip nat server edit [rule] forwardip ltIP
addressgt Configure the LAN IP address to be forwarded
ip nat server edit [rule] protocol
ltTCP|UDP|ALLgt
Configure the protocol to be used TCP UDP or ALL
(it must be capital)
NAT Server Sets
The NAT Server Set is a list of LAN side servers mapped to external ports
(similar to the old SUA menu of before) If you wish you can make inside
servers for different services eg Web or FTP visible to the outside users
even though NAT makes your network appears as a single machine to the
outside world A server is identified by the port number eg Web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21
As an example (see the following figure) if you have a Web server at
192168136 and a FTP server at 192168133 then you need to specify for
port 80 (Web) the server at IP address 192168136 and for port 21 (FTP)
another at IP address 192168133
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
56
Please note that a server can support more than one service eg a server
can provide both FTP and Mail service while another provides only Web
service
The following procedures show how to configure a server behind NAT
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
Step 2 Select the service name from the pull-down menu and fill in the server
Address on bdquoServer IP Address‟ then click button bdquoAdd‟ to save it
Step 3 You could click the button bdquoEdit‟ on the rule to modify the Service name
Server IP Address StartEnd Port
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please
refer RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers
Service Port Number
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS (Domain Name Server) 53
www-http (Web) 80
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol)
1723
Examples
Internet Access Only
Internet Access with an Internal Server
Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
(1) Internet Access Only
In our Internet Access example we only need one rule where all our ILAs map
to one IGA assigned by the ISP You can just use the default SUA NAT or you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
57
could select Full Feature NAT and select an Address Mapping Set with a
Many-to-One Rule See the following figure
(2) Internet Access with an Internal Server
In this case we do exactly as the figure (use the convenient pre-configured
SUA Only set) and also go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
NAT -gt Port Forwarding to specify the Internet Server behind the NAT as
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
58
below
(3) Using Multiple Global IP addresses for clients and servers
(One-to-One Many-to-One Server Set mapping types are used)
In this case we have 3 IGAs from the ISP We have two very busy internal FTP
servers and also an internal general server for the web and mail In this case
we want to assign the 3 IGAs by the following way using 4 NAT rules
Rule 1 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 (One-to-One type) to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
Rule 3 (Many-to-One type) to map the other clients to IGA3 (200003)
Rule 4 (Server type) to map a web server and mail server with ILA3
(192168120) to IGA3 Type Server allows us to specify multiple
servers of different types to other machines behind NAT on the LAN
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
59
Step 1 In this case we need to map ILA to more than one IGA therefore we
must choose the Full Feature option from the NAT field in currently active
remote node and assign IGA3 to P-660HW-Dx v2‟s WAN IP Address
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt
Address Mapping to begin configuring Address Mapping Set 1 We can see
there are 10 blank rule table that could be configured See the following setup
for the four rules in our case
Rule 1 Setup Select One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 1 with ILA1
(192168110) to IGA1 (200001)
Rule 2 Setup Selecting One-to-One type to map the FTP Server 2 with ILA2
(192168111) to IGA2 (200002)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
60
Rule 3 Setup Select Many-to-One type to map the other clients to IGA3
(200003)
Rule 4 Setup Select Server type to map our web server and mail server with
ILA3 (192168120) to IGA3
Menu Network -gt NAT -gt Address Mapping should look as follows now
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
61
Step 3 Now we configure all other incoming traffic to go to our web server and
mail server from Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt NAT -gt Port
Forwarding
(4) Support Non NAT Friendly Applications
Some servers providing Internet applications such as some mIRC servers do
not allow users to login using the same IP address In this case it is better to
use Many-to-Many No Overload or One-to-One NAT mapping types thus each
user login to the server using a unique global IP address The following figure
illustrates this
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
62
One rule configured for using Many-to-Many No Overload mapping type is
shown below
We can also do this by configure threeOne-to-One mapping type rules
6 Using the Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
What is DDNS
The DDNS service an IP Registry provides a public central database where
information such as email addresses hostnames IPs etc can be stored and
retrieved This solves the problems if your DNS server uses an IP associated
with dynamic IPs
Without DDNS we always tell the users to use the WAN IP of the
P-660HW-Dx v2 to access the internal server It is inconvenient for the users if
this IP is dynamic With DDNS supported by the P-660HW-Dx v2 you apply a
DNS name (eg wwwzyxelcomtw) for your server (eg Web server) from a
DDNS server The outside users can always access the web server using the
wwwzyxelcomtw regardless of the WAN IP of the P-660HW-Dx v2
When the ISP assigns the P-660HW-Dx v2 a new IP the P-660HW-Dx v2
must inform the DDNS server the change of this IP so that the server can
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
63
update its IP-to-DNS entry Once the IP-to-DNS table in the DDNS server is
updated the DNS name for your web server (ie wwwzyxelcomtw) is still
usable
The DDNS servers the P-660HW-Dx v2 supports currently is
WWWDYNDNSORG where you apply the DNS from and update the WAN IP
to
Setup the DDNS
1 Before configuring the DDNS settings in the P-660HW-Dx v2 you must
register an account from the DDNS server such as
WWWDYNDNSORG first After the registration you have a hostname
for your internal server and a password using to update the IP to the
DDNS server
2 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Dynamic DNS
Select Active Dynamic DNS option
Key Settings
Option Description
Service Provider Enter the DDNS server in this field Currently we support
WWWDYNDNSORG
Active Toggle to Yes
Host Name Enter the hostname you subscribe from the above DDNS server
For example zyxelcomtw
User Name Enter the user name that the DDNS server gives to you
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
64
Password Enter the password that the DDNS server gives to you
Enable Wildcard
Enter the hostname for the wildcard function that the
WWWDYNDNSORG supports Note that Wildcard option is
available only when the provider is httpwwwdyndnsorg
7 Network Management Using SNMP
ZyXEL SNMP Implementation
ZyXEL currently includes SNMP support in some P-660HW-Dx v2 routers It is
implemented based on the SNMPv1 so it will be able to communicate with
SNMPv1 NMSs Further users can also add ZyXELs private MIB in the NMS
to monitor and control additional system variables The ZyXELs private MIB
tree is shown in figure 3 For SNMPv1 operation ZyXEL permits one
community string so that the router can belong to only one community and
allows trap messages to be sent to only one NMS manager
Some traps are sent to the SNMP manager when anyone of the following
events happens
1 coldStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine coldstarts the trap will be sent after booting
2 warmStart (defined in RFC-1215)
If the machine warmstarts the trap will be sent after booting
3 linkDown (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is down the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
4 linkUp (defined in RFC-1215)
If any link of IDSL or WAN is up the trap will be sent with the port
number The port number is its interface index under the interface
group
5 authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215)
When receiving any SNMP get or set requirement with wrong community
this trap is sent to the manager
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
65
6 whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-MIB)
When the system is going to restart (warmstart) the trap will be sent with the
reason of restart before rebooting
(1) For intentional reboot
In some cases (download new files CI command sys reboot ) reboot is
done intentionally And traps with the message System reboot by user will
be sent
(2) For fatal error
System has to reboot for some fatal errors And traps with the message of the
fatal code will be sent
Downloading ZyXELs private MIB
Configure the P-660HW-Dx v2 for SNMP
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
66
The SNMP related settings in P-660HW-Dx v2 are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Remote MGNT -gt SNMP The
following steps describe a simple setup procedure for configuring all SNMP
settings
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Get
Community
Enter the correct Get Community This Get Community must match the
Get- and GetNext community requested from the NMS The default is
public
Set
Community
Enter the correct Set Community This Set Community must match the
Set-community requested from the NMS The default is public
Trusted
Host
Enter the IP address of the NMS The P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will only
respond to SNMP messages coming from this IP address If 0000 is
entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will respond to all NMS
managers
Trap
Community
Enter the community name in each sent trap to the NMS This Trap
Community must match what the NMS is expecting The default is
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
67
public
Trap
Destination
Enter the IP address of the NMS that you wish to send the traps to If
0000 is entered the P-660HW-Dx v2HW-DX will not send trap any
NMS manager
Note You may need to edit a firewall rule to permit SNMP Packets
8 Using syslog
You can configure it in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt
Logs -gt Log Settings -gt Syslog logging
Key Settings
Active Select it to active UNIX Syslog
Syslog IP Address Enter the IP address of the UNIX server that you wish to
send the syslog
Log Facility Select from the 7 different local options The log facility lets you
log the message in different server files Refer to your UNIX manual
9 Using IP Alias
What is IP Alias
In a typical environment a LAN router is required to connect two local
networks The P-660HW-Dx v2 can connect three local networks to the ISP or
a remote node we call this function as IP Alias In this case an internal
router is not required For example the network manager can divide the local
network into three networks and connect them to the Internet using
P-660HW-Dx v2s single user account See the figure below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
68
The P-660HW-Dx v2 supports three virtual LAN interfaces via its single
physical Ethernet interface The first network can be configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt LAN -gt DHCP Setup The second
and third networks that we call IP Alias 1 and IP Alias 2 can be configured
in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias
There are three internal virtual LAN interfaces for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to route
the packets fromto the three networks correctly They are enif0 for the major
network enif00 for the IP alias 1 and enif01 for the IP alias 2 Therefore
three routes are created in the P-660HW-Dx v2 as shown below when the
three networks are configured If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP is also enabled
the IP pool for the clients can be any of the three networks
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
69
You can edit filter rule to accept or deny LAN packets fromto the IP alias 12
go through the P-660HW-Dx v2 by command in CLI
lan index [index number]
Usage index number =1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt [set]
Usage set= the corresponding filter set number you‟ve configured
lan save
IP Alias Setup
(1) Edit the first network in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt
LAN -gt IPDHCP Setup by configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s first LAN IP
address
Key Settings
DHCP
Setup
If the P-660HW-Dx v2s DHCP server is enabled the IP pool for the clients
can be any of the three networks
TCPIP
Setup
Enter the first LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This will create the
first route in the enif0 interface
(2) Edit the second and third networks in Network -gt LAN -gt IP Alias by
configuring the P-660HW-Dx v2s second and third LAN IP addresses
Key Settings
IP Alias 1 Active it and enter the second LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the second route in the enif00 interface
IP Alias 2 Active it and enter the third LAN IP address for the P-660HW-Dx v2 This
will create the third route in the enif01 interface
10 Using IP Policy Routing
What is IP Policy Routing (IPPR)
Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router
takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides
a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet
forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator
Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis
prior to the normal routing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
70
traffic among multiple paths For example if a network has both the Internet
and remote node connections we can route the Web packets to the Internet
using one policy and route the FTP packets to the remote LAN using another
policy See the figure below
Use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths
Benefits
Source-Based Routing - Network administrators can use policy-based
routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections
Quality of Service (QoS)- Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the
precedence or TOS (Type of Service) values in the IP header at the periphery
of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic
Cost Savings- IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on
high-bandwidth high-cost path while using low-path for batch traffic
Load Sharing- Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic
among multiple paths
How does the IPPR work
A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet
meets the criteria The action is taken only when all the criteria are met The
criteria include the source address and port IP protocol (ICMP UDP TCP
etc) destination address and port TOS and precedence (fields in the IP
header) and length The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between
interactive and bulk traffic Interactive applications eg Telnet tend to have
short packets while bulk traffic eg file transfer tends to have large packets
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
71
The actions that can be taken include routing the packet to a different gateway
(and hence the outgoing interface) and the TOS and precedence fields in the
IP header IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of ZyNOS in style
and in implementation The policies are divided into sets where related
policies are grouped together A use defines the policies before applying them
to an interface or a remote node in the same fashion as the filters There are
12 policy sets with 6 policies in each set
Setup the IP Policy Routing
Setp 1 Set the index of IP routing policy set rule by command bdquoip
policyrouting set index [set] [rule]‟ Suppose set=1 rule=1 in this
example
Step 2 Suppose we‟d like to edit the rule like this
Policy Set Name=Test
Active= Yes
Criteria
IP Protocol = 6
Type of Service= Dont Care Packet length= 0
Precedence = Dont Care Len Comp= NA
Source
addr start= 19216812 end= 192168120
port start= 0 end= NA
Destination
addr start= 0000 end= NA
port start= 80 end= 80
Action= Matched
Gateway addr = 1921681254 Log= No
Type of Service= No Change
Precedence = No Change
This policy example forces the Web packets originated from the clients with IP
addresses from 19216812 to 192168120 be routed to the remote LAN via
the gateway 1921681254
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
ip policyrouting set name Test
(Set the name as Test of IP routing policy rule )
ip policyrouting set active yes
(Enable the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria protocol 6
(Set the protocol ID as 6(TCP) for the rule)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
72
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the criteria type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria packetlength 0
(Set the packet length as 0 for the rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcip 19216812 192168120
(Set the source IP address for the rule Start=19216812 end=192168120)
ip policyrouting set criteria srcport 0
(Set the source port for the rule Start=0)
ip policyrouting set criteria destip 0000
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=0000)
ip policyrouting set criteria destport 80 80
(Set the destination port for the rule Start=80 end=80)
ip policyrouting set action actmatched
(Set the action for the rule Matched)
ip policyrouting set action gatewaytype 0
(Set gateway type for the rule Gateway Address)
ip policyrouting set action gatewayaddr 1921681254
(Set the gateway address for the rule 1921681254)
ip policyrouting set criteria serviceType 0
(Set the action type of service as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set criteria precedence 8
(Set the action precedence as don‟t care for this rule)
ip policyrouting set action log no
(Set log option for the rule no log)
ip polictrouting set save
(Save the rule)
Step 3 Apply the IP policy routing There are two interfaces to apply the policy
set they are the LAN interface and WAN interface It depends where the
gateway specified in the policy rule is located If the gateway you specified is
located on the local LAN you apply the policy set in LAN interface If the
gateway you specified is located on the remote WAN site you apply the policy
set in WAN interface
Apply to WAN Interface (Suppose we apply it to remote node 1 in the
example)
wan node index 1
wan node ippolicy 1
11 Using Call Scheduling
What is Call Scheduling
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
73
Call scheduling enables the mechanism for the P-660HW-Dx v2 to run the
remote node connection according to the pre-defined schedule This feature is
just like the scheduler in a video recorder which records the program according
to the specified time Users can apply at most 4 schedule sets in Remote Node
The remote node configured with the schedule set could be Forced On
Forced Down Enable Dial-On-Demand or Disable Dial-On-Demand on
specified date and time
How to configure a Call Scheduling
You can configure a call scheduling in CLI
Suppose we want to edit a call schedule set like this
Call Schedule Set =1
Set name=Test
Active= Yes
Start Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 - 12 - 27
How Often= Once
Once
Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2005 -12 -27
Start Time(hhmm)= 12 00
Duration(hhmm)= 16 00
Action= Enable Dial-on-demand
This schedule example permits a demand call on the line on 1200 am
2005-12-27 The maximum length of time this connection is allowed is 16
hours
To implement this we need to invoke the following command one by one
wan callsch index 1
(Set call schedule index = 1 You must apply this command first before you
begin to configure call schedule)
wan callsch name Test
(Set the schedule name as Test)
wan callsch active Yes
(Enable schedule)
wan callsch startdate 2005 12 27
(Set schedule start date as 2005-12-27)
wan callsch oncedate 2005 12 27
(Set the schedule used just once it works on 2005-12-27)
wan callsch starttime 12 00
(Set the schedule start time as 1200)
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
74
wan callsch duration 16 00
(Set schedule duration time as 16 hours)
wan callsch action 2
(Set action as dial-on-demand)
wan callsch save
(Save the current call schedule set)
Key Settings
Start Date
Start date of this schedule rule It can be unmatched with weekday
setting For example if Start Date is 20001002(Monday) but Monday
setting in weekday can be No
Forced On The node will always keep up during the setting period It is equivalent
to diable the idel timeout
Forced Down The node will always keep doen during the setting period The
connected remote node will be dropped
Enable
Dial-On-Demand The remote node accepts Dial-on-demand during this period
Disable
Dial-On-Demand
The remote node denies any demand dial during the period For the
existing connected nodes it will be dropped after idle timeout and no
triggered up
Start Time
Duration Start Time and Duration of this schedule
Apply the schedule to the Remote node
Multiple scheduling rules can program in a Remote node and they have
priority For example if we program the sets as 1234 in remote node then
the set 1 will override set 234 set 2 will override 34 and so on
We can apply the schedule to the remote node in CLI by the commands
wan node index []index]
wan node callsch [index]
wan node save
For example if we want to apply the call schedule set 1 to remote node 1 we
could use the commands
wan node index 1
wan node callsch 1
wan node save
Time Service in P-660HW-Dx v2
There is no RTC (Real-Time Clock) chip so the P-660HW-Dx v2 should launch
a mechanism to get current time and date from external server in boot time
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
75
Time service is implemented by the Daytime protocol(RFC-867) Time
protocol(RFC-868) and NTP protocol(RFC-1305) You have to assign an IP
address of a time server and then the P-660HW-Dx v2 will get the date time
and time-zone information from this server You can configure it in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Maintenance -gt System -gt Time Setting
12 Using IP Multicast
What is IP Multicast
Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in two ways - unicast or broadcast
Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts Host groups
are identified by class D IP addresses ie those with 1110 as their
higher-order bits In dotted decimal notation host group addresses range from
224000 to 239255255255 Among them 224001 is assigned to the
permanent IP hosts group and 224002 is assigned to the multicast routers
group
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is the protocol used to support
multicast groups The latest version is version 2 (see RFC2236) IP hosts use
IGMP to report their multicast group membership to any immediate-neighbor
multicast routers so the multicast routers can decide if a multicast packet
needs to be forwarded At start up the P-660HW-Dx v2 queries all directly
connected networks to gather group membership
After that the P-660HW-Dx v2 updates the information by periodic queries
The P-660HW-Dx v2 implementation of IGMP is also compatible with version 1
The multicast setting can be turned on or off on Ethernet and remote nodes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
76
IP Multicast Setup
(1) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s LAN in Web Configurator Advanced
Setup Network -gt LAN -gt IP -gt Advanced Setup
(2) Enable IGMP in P-660HW-Dx v2s remote node in Web Configurator
Advanced Setup Network -gt Remote Node -gt Edit -gt Multicast
Key Settings
Multicast IGMP-v1 for IGMP version 1 IGMP-v2 for IGMP version 2
13 Using Bandwidth Management
Why Bandwidth Management (BWM)
Nowadays we have many different traffic types for Internet applications Some
traffic may consume high bandwidth such as FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
Some other traffic may not require high bandwidth but they require stable
supply of bandwidth such as VoIP traffic The VoIP quality would not be good
if all of the outgoing bandwidth is occupied via FTP Additionally chances are
that you would like to grant higher bandwidth for somebody special who is
using specific IP address in your network All of these are reasons why we
need bandwidth management
Using BWM
Setp 1 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gtSummary activate bandwidth management on the interface you
would like to manage We enable the BWM function on WAN interface in this
example
Enter the total speed for this interface that you want to allocate using
bandwidth management This appears as the bandwidth budget of the
interface‟s root class
Select how you want the bandwidth to be allocated Priority-Based means
bandwidth is allocated via priority so the traffic with highest priority would be
served first then the second priority is served secondly and so on If
Fairness-Based is chosen then the bandwidth is allocated by ratio Which
means if A class needs 300 kbps B class needs 600 kbps then the ratio of A
and Bs actual bandwidth is 12 So if we get 450 kbps in total then A would
get 150 kbps B would get 300 kbps We select Priority-Based in this
example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
77
Key Settings
Active
Check the box to enable BWM on the interface Note that if you would like
to manage traffic from WAN to LAN you should apply BWM on LAN
interface If you would like to management traffic from WAN to DMZ
please apply BWM on DMZ interface
Speed Enter the total speed to manage on this interface This value is the budget
of the class trees root
Scheduler
Choose the principle to allocate bandwidth on this interface
Priority-Based allocates bandwidth via priority Fairness-Based allocates
bandwidth by ratio
Maximize
Bandwidth
Usage
Check this box if you would like to give residuary bandwidth from Interface
to the classes who need more bandwidth than configured amount Do not
select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a
bandwidth class or you want to limit the bandwidth of each class at the
configured value (Please note that to meat the second condition you
should also disable Use All Managed Bandwidth in the BWM rule)
Step 2 Go to Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Rule Setup select the interface Service Priority and Allocated
Bandwidth for this rule then click button bdquoAdd‟ to apply this rule
Step 3 You can modify the rule by clicking the button lsquoEditrsquo on the rule
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
78
Key Settings
RuleName Give this rule a name for example WWW
BW Budget Configure the bandwidth you would like to allocate to this rule
Priority Enter a number between 0 and 7 to set the priority of this class The
higher the number the higher the priority The default setting is 3
Use All
Managed
Bandwidth
Check this box if you would like to let this class to borrow bandwidth from
its parents when the required bandwidth is higher than the configured
amount Do not check this if you want to limit the bandwidth of this class
at the configured value(Please note that you should also disable
Maximize Bandwidth Usage on the interface to meet the condition)
Service Select User-defined SIP FTP or H323 to specify the traffic types
Destination
IP Address Enter the IP address of destination that meets this class
Destination
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
Destination
Port Enter the destination port number of the traffic
Source IP
Address
Enter the IP address of source that meats this class Note that for traffic
from LAN to WAN since BWM is before NAT you should use the IP
address before NAT processing
Source
Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
79
Source Port Enter the source port number of the traffic
Protocol ID Enter the protocol number for the traffic 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP or 17 for
UDP
After configuration BWM you can check current bandwidth of the configured
traffic in Web Configurator Advanced Setup Advanced -gt Bandwidth
MGMT-gt Monitor
14 Using Zero-Configuration
Zero-Configuration and VC auto-hunting
Zero-Configure feature can help customer to reduce the burden of setting
efforts Whenever system ADSL links up system will send out some probing
patterns system will analyze the packets returned from ISP and decide which
services the ISP may provide Because ADSL is based on a ATM network so
system have to pre-configured a VPIVCI hunting pool before Auto-Configure
function begins to work
The Zero-Configuration feature can hunt the encapsulation and VPIVCI value
and system will automatically configure itself if the hunting result is
successfully This feature has two constraints
1 It supports the ISP provides one kind of service (PPPoEPPPoA etc)
only otherwise the hunting will get confusing and failed
2 VC auto-hunting only supports dynamic WAN IP address If the router is
set a static WAN IP address VC auto-hunting function will be disabled
The entry of hunting pool must also contain the VPI VCI and which kinds of
hunting patterns you wish to send Whenever system send out all the probing
patterns with specific VPIVCI system will wait for 5~10 seconds and get the
response from ISP the response patterns will decide which kinds of ADSL
services of the line will be After that system will save back the correct VPI
VCI and also services (encapsulation) type into profile of WAN interface
Configure the VC auto-hunting preconfigured table
(1) Display auto-haunting preconfigured table by using command from CLI
wan atm vchunt display
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
80
(2) Add items to the auto-haunting preconfigured table by using commands
wan atm vchunt add ltremoteNodeIndexgt ltvpigt ltvcigt ltservice
bit(hex)gt
wan atm vchunt save
Note ltremote nodegt input the remote node index 1-8
ltvpigt vpi value
ltvcigt vci value
ltservicegt it‟s a hex value bit0PPPoEVC (1) bit1PPPoELLC (2)
bit2PPPoAVC (4) bit3PPPoALLC (8) bit4EnetVC (16) bit5 EnetLLC (32)
For example
(1) If you need service PPPoELLC and EnetLLC then the service bits will be
2+32 = 34 (decimal) = 22 (hex) you must input 22
(2) If you want to enable all service for VC hunting the service bits will be
1+2+4+8+16+32=63(decimal)= 3f (hex) you must input 3f
Need to perform save after this by command bdquowan atm vchunt save‟
(3) Delete items from the auto-haunting preconfigured table by useing
command
wan atm vchunt remove ltremote nodegt ltvpigt ltvcigt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
81
Using Zero configuration
You can enabledisable Zero Configuration in Network -gt WAN -gt Advanced
Setup
(1) After configure the auto-haunting preconfigured table You just need a PC
connected to the device LAN Ethernet port with the DSL sync up
(2) Open your web browser to access a Web site It should prompt and request
for your username password of your ISP account if your ISP provide PPPoE
or PPPoA service
(3) After key-in the correct info it will than test the connection If it is
successful it will than close the browser and you can open a new browser to
surf the Internet If the connection test fail it will go back to the page ask for
user name and password
(4) Basically the zero configuration only work on the VC that was preconigured
in the auto-haunting preconfigured table
15 How could I configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2
The common triple play scenario is as follows
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
82
Triple Play is a port-based policy to forward packets from different LAN port to
different PVCs thus we could assign different parameters to the PVC (CBR
UBR VBR-RT VBR-nRT) to guarantee different applications
We could configure triple play on P-660HW-Dx v2 via CLI The command is
sys tripleplay set portbase ltEportIDgt ltPVCIDgt
For example sys tripleplay portbase set 1 1
sys tripleplay portbase set 2 2
sys tripleplay portbase set 3 3
The traffic from Ethernet port 1 must be forwarded to PVC1 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet port 2 must be forwarded to PVC2 vice versa
The traffic from Ethernet Port3 must be forwarded to PVC3 vice versa
16 How to configure packet filter on P-660HW-Dx v2
The P-660HW-Dx v2 allows you to configure up to twelve filter sets with six
rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system You can apply up to
four filter sets to a particular port to block multiple types of packets With each
filter set having up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for
a single port
The packet filter function on P-660HW-Dx v2 is the same as before just that
you could only configure the filter set and apply them by command in CLI It‟s
very complex for common users to do it So here‟s the recommendation
(1) Usually if you want to block special packets you could edit a firewall rule in
Web Configurator
032
VOIP Server
IPTV Server
Internet
Server
Others
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
ATUR IP-DSLAM VL-Switch
CPE Access Network ISP
034
055
VOIP Telephone
Video Client
Clients surfing
Internet
Other clients
Port1
Port2
Port3
Port4
PVC1
PVC2
PVC3
PVC4 132
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
83
(2) By factory default ZyXEL has preconfigured many filter sets for your
reference you can check them by command
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Usage set 1~12 rule 1~6 Commonly the preconfigured filter sets are as
follows ltset 2 rule 1~6gt ltset 3 rule 1gt ltset 4 rule 1gt
sys filter set display
For example
This could satisfy mostly requirement You could select any of them to apply to
the WAN node or LAN Interface on demand The command is as follows
Apply to WAN node
wan node index ltnodegt
Usage node= 1~8 corresponding to the remote node 1~8
wan node filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt
ltset3gt ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to one remote node
wan node save
Apply to LAN Interface
lan index [index]
Usage index=1 main LAN
2 IP Alias1
3 IP Alias2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
84
lan filter ltincoming|outgoinggt lttcpip|genericgt ltset1gt ltset2gt ltset3gt
ltset4gt
Usage You can apply at most four filter sets to LAN Interface
lan save
(3) If you are very advanced user you could edit filter set by the following
command
sys filter set [set] [rule]
Usage Set up a filter set index to edit a set
set 1~12
rule 1~6
sys filter set type [typeID]
Usage typeID tcpip or generic
Note In one filter set you should configure all the rules in one type either
tcpip or generic
sys filter set enable
Usage Enable(active) the rule
sys filter set helliphellip(You could configure a filter rule on demand the newest
command is available on release note)
sys filter set save
Usage Don‟t forget to save the rule everytime you‟ve configured it
Reference Commands
sys filter set index [set] [rule]
Set the index of filter set rule you must apply this
command first before you begin to configure the
filter rules
sys filter set name [set name] Set the name of filter set
sys filter set type [tcpip | generic] Set the type of filter rule
sys filter set enable Enable the rule
sys filter set disable Disable the rule
sys filter set protocol [protocol ] Set the protocol ID of the rule
sys filter set sourceroute [yes|no] Set the sourceroute yesno
sys filter set destip [address] [subnet
mask]
Set the destination IP address and subnet mask of
the rule
sys filter set destport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|notequal|less|greater]
Set the destination port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set srcip [address] [subnet
mask] Set the source IP address and subnet mask
sys filter set srcport [port] [compare
type = none|equal|not
Set the source port and compare type (compare
type could be 0(none)|1(equal)|2(not
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
85
equal|less|greater] equal)|3(less)|4(greater) )
sys filter set tcpEstab [yes|no] Set TCP establish option
sys filter set more [yes|no] Set the more option to yesno
sys filter set log [type 0-3= none | match|
notmatch | both ]
Set the log type (it could be 0-3 =none match not
match both)
sys filter set actmatch[type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for match
sys filter set actnomatch [type 0-2 =
checknext | forward | drop] Set the action for not match
sys filter set offset [] Set offset for the generic rule
sys filter set length [] Set the length for generic rule
sys filter set mask [] Set the mask for generic rule
sys filter set value [(depend on length in
hex)] Set the value for generic rule
sys filter set clear Clear the current filter set
sys filter set save Save the filter set parameters
sys filter set display [set][rule] Display Filter set information Wo parameter it will
display buffer information
sys filter set freememory Discard Changes
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
86
Wireless Application Notes
1 Configure a Wireless Client to Ad hoc mode
Ad hoc Introduction
What is Ad Hoc mode
Ad hoc mode is a wireless network consists of a number of stations without
access points Without using an access point or any connection to a wired
network a client unit in Ad hoc operation mode can communicate directly to
other client units just as using a cross over Ethernet cable connecting 2 hosts
together via a NIC card for direct connection when configured in Ad hoc mode
without an access point being present Ad hoc operation is ideal for small
networks of no more than 2-4 computers Larger networks would require the
use of one or perhaps several access points
Configuration for Wireless Station A
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
87
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
88
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Configuration for Wireless Station B
To configure Ad hoc mode on your ZyAIR B-100B-200B-300 wireless NIC
cards please follow the following step
Step1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
89
Step 3 Select Ad hoc from the operation mode pull down menu fill you an
SSID and select a channel you want to use than press OK to apply
Step 4 Since there is no DHCP server to give the host IP you must first
designate a static IP for your station From Windows Start select Control
Panel gtNetwork ConnectiongtWireless Network Connection
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
90
Step 5 From general tab select TCPIP and click property
Step 6 Fill in your network IP address and subnet mask and click OK to finish
Step 7 Station A now are able to connect to Station B
2 Configuring Infrastructure mode
Infrastructure Introduction
For Infrastructure WLANs multiple Access Points (APs) like the WLAN to the
wired network and allow users to efficiently share network resources The
Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also
mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
91
Configure Wireless Access Point to Infrastructure mode using Web
configurator
To configure Infrastructure mode of your P-660HW-Dx v2 wireless AP please
follow the steps below
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gt General Configure the basic parameters for Wireless LAN
Step 2 You could click the button bdquoAdvanced Setup‟ for more detailed
configuration
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
92
Configuration Wireless Station to Infrastructure mode
To configure Infrastructure mode on your ZyAIR G-200 Wireless Network
Adapter please follow the following steps
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar the utility will
pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select configuration tab
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
93
Step 3 Select Infrastructure from the operation mode pull down menu fill in an
SSID or leave it as any if you wish to connect to any AP than press Apply
Change to take effect
Step 4 Click on Site Survey tab and press search all the available AP will be
listed
Step 5 Double click on the AP you want to associated with
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
94
Step 6 After the client have associated with the selected AP The linked APs
channel current linkup rate SSID link quality and signal strength will show on
the Link Info page You now successfully associate with the selected AP with
Infrastructure Mode
3 MAC Filter
MAC Filter Overview
Users can use MAC Filter as a method to restrict unauthorized stations from
accessing the APs ZyXELs APs provide the capability for checking MAC
address of the station before allowing it to connect to the network This
provides an additional layer of control layer in that only stations with registered
MAC addresses can connect This approach requires that the list of MAC
addresses be configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
95
ZyXEL MAC Filter Implementation
ZyXELs MAC Filter Implementation allows users to define a list to allow or
block association from STAs The filter set allows users to input 12 entries in
the list If Allow Association is selected all other STAs which are not on the list
will be denied Otherwise if Deny Association is selected all other STAs which
are not on the list will be allowed for association Users can choose either way
to configure their filter rule
Configure the WLAN MAC Filter
The MAC Filter related settings in ZyXEL APs are configured in Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gtMAC Filter
Before you configure the MAC filter you need to know the MAC address of the
client first If not knowing what your MAC address is please enter a command
ipconfig all after DOS prompt to get the MAC (physical) address of your
wireless client
Step 1 Login Web Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN
-gtMAC Filter active MAC Filter
Step 2 Enter the MAC Addresses of wireless cards in the filter set to allow or
deny association from these cards
Key Settings
Option Descriptions
Filter Action
Allow or block association from MAC addresses contained in this list If Allow
Association is selected in this field hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list
will be allowed to associate with AP If Deny Association is selected in this field
hosts with MAC addresses configured in this list will be blocked
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
96
MAC Address This field specifies those MAC Addresses that you want to add in the list
4 Setup WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
Introduction
The 80211 standard describes the communication that occurs in wireless
LANs
The Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm is used to protect wireless
communication from eavesdropping because wireless transmissions are
easier to intercept than transmissions over wired networks and wireless is a
shared medium everything that is transmitted or received over a wireless
network can be intercepted
WEP relies on a secret key that is shared between a mobile station (eg a
laptop with a wireless Ethernet card) and an access point (ie a base station)
The secret key is used to encrypt packets before they are transmitted and an
integrity check is used to ensure that packages are not modified during the
transition The standard does not discuss how the shared key is established In
practice most installations use a single key that is shared between all mobile
stations and access points APs You can refer to the User Guide for more
detailed information about it
Setting up the Access Point
You can set up the Access Point from Web configurator Advanced Setup
Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General (You can also configure it via CLI)
Step 1 Select bdquoStatic WEP‟ from the pull down menu bdquoSecurity Mode‟ in Web
Configurator
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
97
Step 2 Set up WEP Key in the Web Configurator You need to set the one of
the following parameters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 5 characters
o 64-bit WEP key (secret key) with 10 hexadecimal digits
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 13 characters
o 128-bit WEP key (secret key) with 26 hexadecimal digits
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 29 characters
o 256-bit WEP key (secret key) with 58 hexadecimal digits
There are two ways you can configure the WEP Key
(1) You can put in a special WEP key in the bdquoWEP Key‟ menu directly
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
98
(2) You can also put in an arbitrary sequence of characters in the
bdquoPassphrase‟ and then press button bdquoGenerate‟ to let the P-660HW-Dx v2
generate WEP Key for you
Setting up the Station
Step 1 Double click on the utility icon in your windows task bar or right click
the utility icon then select Show Config Utility
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
99
The utility will pop up on your windows screen
Note If the utility icon doesnt exist in your task bar click Start -gt
Programs -gt helliphellip to start the utility
Step 2 Select the Configuration tab
Select bdquoSet Security‟ to configure encryption type and parameters
correspond with access point
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
100
Note You should select Key 1 as default Transmit Key since the P-660HW-Dx
v2 is supposed to use Key 1 by default
Key settings
The WEP Encryption type of station has to equal to the access point
Check ASCII field for characters WEP key or uncheck ASCII field for
Hexadecimal digits WEP key
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
101
Hexadecimal digits dont need to precede by 0x
For example
64-bits with characters WEP key Key1= 2e3f4
64-bits with hexadecimal digits WEP key Key1= 123456789A
5 Site Survey
Introduction
What is Site Survey
An RF site survey is a MAP to RF contour of RF coverage in a particular
facility With wireless system it is very difficult to predict the propagation of
radio waves and detect the presence of interfering signals Walls doors
elevator shafts and other obstacles offer different degree of attenuation This
will cause the RF coverage pattern be irregular and hard to predict
Site survey can help us overcome these problem and even provide us a map
of RF coverage of the facility
Preparation
Below are the steps to complete a simple site survey with simple tools
1 First you will need to obtain a facility diagram such as blueprints This is
for you to mark and take record on
2 Visually inspect the facility walk through the facility to verify the accuracy of
the diagram and mark down any large obstacle you see that may effect the RF
signal such as metal shelf metal desk etc on the diagram
3 Identify users area when doing so ask a question where is wireless
coverage needed and where does not and note and take note on the diagram
this is information is needed to determine the number of AP required
4 Determine the preliminary access point location on the facility diagram base
on the service area needed obstacles power wall jack considerations
Survey on Site
Step 1 With the diagram with all information you gathered in the preparation
phase Now you are ready to make the survey
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
102
Step 2 Install an access point at the preliminary location
Step 3 Use a notebook with wireless client installed and run its utility An utility
will provide information such as connection speed current used channel
associated rate link quality signal strength and etc information as shown in
utility below
Step 4 Its always a good idea to start with putting the access point at the
corner of the room and walk away from the access point in a systematic
manner Record the changes at point where transfer rate drop and the link
quality and signal strength information on the diagram as you go alone
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
103
Step 5 When you reach the farthest point of connection mark the spot Now
you move the access point to this new spot as have already determine the
farthest point of the access point installation spot if wireless service is required
from corner of the room
Step 6 Repeat step 1~5 and now you should be able to mark an RF coverage
area as illustrated in above picutre
Step 7 You may need more than one access point is the RF coverage area
hasn‟t covered all the wireless service area you needed
Step 8 Repeat step 1~6 of survey on site as necessary upon completion you
will have a diagram and information of site survey As illustrated below
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
104
Note If there are more than one access point is needed be sure to make the
adjacent access point service area over lap one another So the wireless
station is able to roam For more information please refer to roaming at
6 Configure 8021x and WPA
What is the WPA Functionality
Configuration for Access Point
Configuration for your PC
What is WPA Functionality
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 80211i security
specification draft Key differences between WAP and WEP are user
authentication and improved data encryption WAP applies IEEE 8021x
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using
an external RADIUS database You can not use the P-660HW-Dx v2s local
user database for WPA authentication purpose since the local user database
uses MD5 EAP which can not to generate keys
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) Message Integrity Check and IEEE 8021x Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol uses 128-bits keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
105
the authentication server It includes a per-packet key mixing function a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extend initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules and a re-keying mechanism
If you do not have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA-PSK
(WPA Pre-Share Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered
into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the
passwords match a client will be granted access to a WLAN
Here comes WPA-PSK Application example for your reference
Configuration for Access point
The IEEE 8021x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the
authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management
Authentication can be done using local user database internal to the
P-660HW-Dx v2 (authenticate up to 32 users) or an external RADIUS server
for an unlimited number of users
Step 1 To change your P-660HW-Dx v2s authentication settings login Web
Configurator Advanced Setup Network -gt Wireless LAN -gt General
-gtSecurity
Step 2 Select lsquoSecurity Mode‟ as WAP-PSK
Step 3 Type the Pre Shared Key in the Pre-Shared Key field
Step 4 Click Apply to finish
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
106
Configuration for your PC
Step 1 Double click on your wireless utility icon in your windows task bar the
utility will pop up on your windows screen
Step 2 Select the configuration tab type in the SSID (Service Set Identifier)
select the operating Mode as Infrastructure and select proper channel
Step 3 Click Set Security to configure the security parameters
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
107
Step 4 Click OK for finish and begin to Site survey Connect to the AP as you
have configured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
108
Step 5 Click Link Info tab if the PC associated and authenticated with AP
successfully we will see the following information
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
109
Support Tool
1 LANWAN Packet Trace
The Prestige packet trace records and analyzes packets running on LAN and
WAN interfaces It is designed for users with technical backgrounds who are
interested in the details of the packet flow on LAN or WAN end of Prestige It is
also very helpful for diagnostics if you have compatibility problems with your
ISP or if you want to know the details of a packet for configuring a filter rule
The format of the display is as following
Packet
[index] [timersecond][channel-receivetransmit][length] [protocol]
[sourceIPport] [destIPport]
There are two ways to dump the trace
Online Trace--display the trace real time on screen
Offline Trace--capture the trace first and display later
The details for capturing the trace in CLI as follows
First of all you need to telnet to the P-660HW-Dx v2 firstly The password is
Administrator passwords bdquoadmin‟ by default
Online Trace
(1) Trace LAN packet
Disable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
none
Enable to capture the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
110
(2) Trace WAN packet
Disable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
none
Enable to capture the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel mpoa00
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Display the brief trace online by entering sys trcd brief
Display the detailed trace online by entering sys trcd parse
Example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
111
Offline Trace
Disable the capture of the WAN packet by entering sys trcp channel
mpoa00 none
Enable the capture of the LAN packet by entering sys trcp channel enet0
bothway
Enable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw on amp sys trcl sw on
Wait for packet passing through the Prestige over LAN
Disable the trace log by entering sys trcp sw off amp sys trcl sw off
Display the trace briefly by entering sys trcp brief
Display specific packets by using sys trcp parse ltfrom_indexgt ltto_indexgt
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
112
Capture the detailed logs by Hyper Terminal
Step 1 Initiate a hyper terminal connection from your PC(suppose you
connected to the LAN port of P-660HW-Dx v2)
Step 2 Click the bdquoproperties‟ to configure parameters to telnet to the
P-660HW-Dx v2
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
113
Step 3 So that after you invoke the relevant commands you could save the
logs you‟ve captured
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
114
2 FirmwareConfigurations Uploading and Downloading using TFTP
Using TFTP client software
Uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Uploaddownload Prestige configurations via LAN
(1) Using TFTP to uploaddownload ZyNOS via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout
in Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 Enter the IP address of the Prestige
Step 5To upload the firmware please save the remote file as ras to
Prestige After the transfer is complete the Prestige will program the upgraded
firmware into FLASH ROM and reboot itself
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
115
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige The local file is the source
file of the ZyNOS firmware that is available in your hard disk The remote file is
the file name that will be saved in Prestige Check the port number 69 and
512-Octet blocks for TFTP Check Binary mode for file transfering
(2) Using TFTP to uploaddownload SMT configurations via LAN
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before running the TFTP software
Step 2 Type the command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Run the TFTP client software
Step 4 To download the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please get the
remote file rom-0 from the Prestige
Step 5 To upload the P-660HW-Dx v2 configuration please save the
remote file as rom-0 in the Prestige
An example
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
116
The 19216811 is the IP address of the Prestige
The local file is the source file of your configuration file that is available
in your hard disk
The remote file is the file name that will be saved in Prestige
Check the port number 69 and 512-Octet blocks for TFTP
Check Binary mode for file transfering
Using TFTP command on Windows NT
Step 1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
Step 2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Step 3 Download ZyNOS via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] get ras [localfile]
Step 4 Upload P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP] put
[localfile] rom-0
Step 5 Download P-660HW-Dx v2 configurations via LAN ctftp -i [PrestigeIP]
get rom-0 [localfile]
Using TFTP command on UNIX
Before you begin
1 TELNET to your Prestige first before using TFTP command
2 Type the CI command sys stdio 0 to disable console idle timeout in
Command Line Interface (CLI)
Example
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ telnet 19216811
Trying 19216811
Connected to 19216811
Escape character is ^]
Password
rasgt sys stdio 0
(Open a new window)
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get rom-0 [local-rom] lt- change to binary mode
lt- download configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-rom] rom-0 lt- upload configurations
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 get ras [local-ras ] lt- download firmware
[cppwufaelinux cppwu]$ tftp -I 19216811 put [local-ras] ras lt- upload firmware
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
117
3 Using FTP to Upload the Firmware and Configuration Files
In addition to upload the firmware and configuration file via the console port
and TFTP client you can also upload the firmware and configuration files to
the Prestige using FTP
To use this feature your workstation must have a FTP client software See the
example shown below
Using FTP client software
Note The remote file name for the firmware is ras and the configuration file is
rom-0
Step 1 Use FTP client from your workstation to connect to the Prestige by
entering the IP address of the Prestige
Step2 Press Enter key to ignore the username because the Prestige does
not check the username
Step 3 Enter the CLI password as the FTP login password the default is
admin
Step 4 Enter command bin to set the transfer type to binary
Step 5 Use put command to transfer the file to the Prestige
Example
Step 1 Connect to the Prestige by entering the Prestiges IP and Administrator
password in the FTP software Set the transfer type to Auto-Detect or
Binary
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
118
Step 2 Press OK to ignore the Username prompt
Step 3 To upload the firmware file we transfer the local ras file to overwrite
the remote ras file
To upload the configuration file we transfer the local rom-0 to overwrite
the remote rom-0 file
Step 4 The Prestige reboots automatically after the uploading is finished
Please do not power off the router at this moment
P-660HW-Dx v2 Series Support Notes
All contents copyright copy 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
119
CI Command Reference
Command Syntax and General User Interface
CI has the following command syntax
command ltiface | device gt subcommand [param]
command subcommand [param]
command | help
command subcommand | help
General user interface
1 Shows the following commands and all major (sub)commands
2 exit Exit Subcommand
To get the latest CI Command list
The latest CI Command list is available in release note of every ZyXEL
firmware release Please goto ZyXEL public WEB site
httpwwwzyxelcomsupportdownload_indexphp to download firmware
package (zip) you should unzip the package to get the release note in PDF
format